Extended Abstracts UI 2008

Extended Abstracts UI 2008

HEALTH SCIENCE EXTENDED ABSTRACTS


Bacterial contamination in foods and drinks at canteen around
campus in Depok, 2008
Staff : D. Susanna1*, T. Eryando2, & Y.M. Indrawani3
Sponsor : RUUI 2007
Email Contact : dsusanna@ui.edu; tris@ui.edu, and ivonne@ui.edu
Disseminated at : “The 40th APACPH Annual Conference in Kuala Lumpur, 7th-9th
November 2008”
1
Department of Environmental Health, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia.
2
Department of Population and Biostatistics, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia.
3
Department of Nutrition, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia.
* corresponding author
Introduction
As important sources for human life, food and drink should be healthy, and means saved to be
consumed and free from contamination of dangerous and hazardous elements such as
microorganism and chemical. The Ministry of Health Decree no.715/MENKES/SK/V/2003
mentioned that the number of Escherichia coli should be 0/gram sample (negative).
Research method
This research was using cross-sectional design, conducted in canteen in the area of campus in
Depok, in the year 2008. The quality of microbiology, E. coli and Salmonella in foods and
drinks that served from 13 canteens in the campus were analyzed. It was 49 foods and 24
drinks samples were examined in this research, beside utensils, and hand of the food handlers.
It was 49 samples from 4 food categories, and 24 type of drink from 3 categories, beside
utensils, and hand of the food handlers.
The sample of foods and drinks were analyzed about the existence of E. coli and Salmonella
in the food, drink, utensil and hand of the food handlers, using Most Probable Number (MPN)
method.
Result
Totally, there were 49 foods and 24 drinks taken as samples. Positive percentage of E. coli
and Salmonella in food calculated per mL, for utensil is per cm2, from hand of the food
handler is in cm2 (Table 1).
Tabel 1. The percentage of ‘positive’ E. coli in foods (per mL), utensils (cm2), and hand of food handlers (cm2),
and Salmonella in foods (per mL), from 13 canteens around Campus in Depok, 2008
Food Type of food E. coli (positive) Salmonella
Category n=49 Food Utensil Hand of (positive)
(per 2
(cm ) foodhanler in Food (per mL)
mL) (cm2)
Dry meals Fried rice 7 28,6 0 42,86 14,29
Mix rice 3 66,7 0 66,67 0
Rice + chicken grill 1 100 0 0 0
Padang rice 4 100 100 50 0
(rendang)
Kweetiauw 1 0 0 0 0
Fried noodle 2 50 0 0 0
Total 18 55.5 22.22 38.89 5.55
Dressing Lamb soup 1 0 0 0 0
meals Tongseng 1 0 0 100 0
(wet food) Meet soup 2 50 0 50 0
Chicken soto 3 0 0 33,33 66,67
Noodle soup 2 50 0 50 0
Meat soto 1 0 0 100 100
Genome 3

Rib soto 2 50 0 50 50
Meatball + soup 1 100 0 100 0
Noodle + chicken 1 0 0 100 0
Total 14 28.6 0 57.14 28.57
Meals Ketoprak 2 100 50 0 50
with Gado-gado 4 100 100 50 25
‘sambal’ Karedok 1 100 100 100 100
Pecel 1 100 100 0 0
Siomay 1 100 0 100 100
Total 9 100 66.67 33.33 33.33
‘Sambal’ in meat soup 1 100 0 0 0
in chicken soto 2 0 0 0 0
in noodle soto 1 0 100 0 0
in rib soup 2 100 100 50 0
for chicken grill 1 100 100 0 100
for Padang rice 1 0 0 0 0
Total 8 37.5 50 12.50 12.50
Table 1 shows that all category of food found positively contaminated by E. coli and
Salmonella with various percentages, unless utensils for used for dressing foods type.
Foods mixture with sambal were 100 % contaminated E. coli. Food with dressing had the
lowest percentage of E. coli, and none in the utensil used for this type of food, but quite high
in the hand of the food handlers or waiters. This phenomenon was almost the same for the
existence of Salmonella.
From 24 sample of type of drinks served in many different canteens, the highest percentage of
E. coli was in the drink, then in utensil, and the lowest was in the hand of the food handlers.
Salmonella found in about 12.50 % in the drink. There were no E. coli or Salmonella existed
in capuccino and fruit cocktail (Table 2).
Table 2. The percentage of ‘positive’ of E. coli in type of drinks (per mL), utensils (per cm2), hand of food
handlers (cm2) (per cm2), and Salmonella in drink (per mL), from 13 canteen around Campus in Depok, 2008
Drink Type of Drink E. coli ( % positif) Salmonella
Category Total Drink Utensil Hand of food (% positive)
(per mL) (cm2) handler in (mL)
(cm2)
Juice Mango 4 50 0 50 0
Sirsak 2 100 100 0 0
Jambu 4 75 75 50 50
Orange 2 100 50 50 0
Avocado 4 75 75 0 25
Lacy 1 100 100 100 0
Melon 1 0 0 0 0
Tea Ice tea 4 50 0 50 0
Others Cappuccino 1 0 0 0 0
Cocktail 1 0 0 0 0
Total 24 62.50 41.66 33.33 12.50
Discussion
Microbiology analysis from the sample survey of food and drink that served in the canteen
around campus showed that almost all of the foods and the drinks sampled were positively
contaminated by E. coli and also some of the even with Salmonella, although there were no
evidence of water source contamination of bacteria. Swane, et al (2003), mentions that 90%
of contamination are by bacteria, and Kurnia (2004) says there are about 35 type of bacteria in
food and drink, such as E.coli and Salmonella. Refai (1979) mentions that the existence of E.
coli in the food can lead to the possibility of the existence of Salmonella, Shigella, and
Staphylocccus. Salmonella is bacteria that can cause thypoid, so the existence of the
Salmonella in the food becomes quite dangerous. It is very important to develop certificate
mechanism from district or provincial health office is important to implement, as mentioned
in the Ministry of Health Decree no.715/MENKES/SK/V/2003.
Genome 4


Conclusion
The survey of food and drink that served in canteen in the area of campus in city of Depok
showed positive contamination of E. coli and Salmonella. All samples of food with dressing
were found positively contaminated by E. coli and Salmonella, mostly in the food that
mixture with ‘sambal’. food and drink that served in canteen in the area of campus showed
positive contamination of E. coli and Salmonella.
Keywords
Canteen, drink, Escherihia coli, food, Salmonella.
References
Keputusan Menteri Kesehatan Republik Indonesia Nomor 715/MENKES/SK/V/2003.
Kurnia, D. 2004. Gambaran Pelaksanaan Higiene dan Sanitasi Pengelolaan Makanan di Rumah Sakit Umum
Tangerang Tahun 2004. Skripsi. FKM-UI. Depok.
Refai, MK. 1979. Manual of Food Quality Control. Microbiological Analysis. Rome: Food and Agricultural
Organization of United Nations.
Swane, et.al. 2003. Essential of Food Safety and Sanitation. Third edition, Prentice-Hall, Inc. Upper Saddle River.
New Jersey.
Genome 5

Cigarette smoking in Indonesia: Examination of myopic models of

addictive behavior in panel data
Staff : B. Hidayat1*, H. Thabrany1
Sponsor : The National Institute of Health/Fogarty International Center, USA.
Email Contact : b_hidayat@hotmail.com
Disseminated at : Hidayat B, Thabrany H, Hu T. (2009) Myopic addiction of
cigarettes demand in Indonesia: panel data approaches [14th World
Conference on Tobacco or Health, Mumbai (India), March 8-12
2009]

1
Department of Health Policy and Administration, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia, Depok,
Indonesia 16424
Introduction
Economic of addiction consists of three models: (i) imperfectly rational addiction, (ii) myopic
addiction and (iii) rational addiction (Chaloupka & Warner 2000). The myopic addiction
assumes that individuals recognize the dependence of current addictive good consumption on
past consumption, but ignore the impact of current and past choices on future consumption
decisions when making current choices. The myopic framework therefore takes into account
of consumption history, but do not fully anticipate future changes. This study aims to estimate
the demand for cigarette in Indonesia following the myopic addiction model. The goal are (i)
to document the process by which one could choose the most appropriate panel data, and (ii)
to estimate price elasticities of cigarettes demand in Indonesia.
Methods
In this study, we estimated a dynamic model for cigarette demand equation in the form of:
C it = β 0 + β 1C it −1 + β 2 Pci t + β 3 Pa i t + β 4 X it' + υ i + d t + ε it (1)
where i is an individual, t is time, C is consumption of cigarettes, Pc is the price of cigarettes,
Pa is the price of alcohol, X ' is a vector of exogenous variable that affect cigarettes
consumption (i.e., income, age, employment, the proportion of child under 14 years), υi is
individual fixed effects that control for the agent time invariant preferences and marginal
utility of wealth, dt are time fixed effects to control unanticipated changes in wealth, and εit is
the error term. Significantly positive effect of the previous consumption (β1) on the current
cigarette consumption (Cit) indicating smoker show myopic behavior.
This study used three waves a panel data of the Indonesian Family Life Survey (IFLS),
carried out in 1993 (IFLS1), in 1997 (IFLS2) and in 2000 (IFLS3) by the RAND Corporation
in conjunction with Indonesian researchers and various international agencies. To estimate
(1), we explored two group estimators. Group I consist of estimators that ignore the
endogeneity problem of the regresors. Here we considered OLS, fixed effects (FE), and
random effects (RE). Group II are used to deal with errors in variables and unobservable
heterogeneity, which include two-stage least squares (2SLS), FE2SLS, RE2SLS, and GMM.
The drawback of using estimators Group II is that the variance-covariance matrix of the
estimator is larger than that of Group I estimators. Thus, if the bias caused by the errors-in-
variables not too severe, it may be preferable to use estimators in Group I.
Results and discussion

Model selection
We developed a framework to select the most appropriate panel data techniques. The
framework (Figure 1) considers both endogeneity of the regressors and behaviour of the error
terms (Hidayat et al. 2009). Investigating endogeneity is a crucial step, and the result is used
Genome 6


to decide whether one have to correct or not to correct for endogeneity problems. First, we
checked for the endogeneity of the lags using Durbin-Wu Hausman and Hausman-Wu tests.
The tests, distributed as a X2 with 1 degree of freedom, was 7.8 with a p-value of 0.005. We
thus rejected the null hypothesis of exogeneity, suggesting OLS results in inconsistent
parameter estimates. What would be if the exogeneity tests were accepted? Non-rejection the
null hypothesis leads us to choose estimators Group I. Although it is not in our case, we have
presented the results of the Breusch-Pagan test--to discriminate OLS vs FE and/or RE--and
the Hausman test--to select FE or RE (Baltagi 2005).

Figure 1. Framework to select the best alternatives estimation methods
Since the null hypothesis of exogeneity was rejected, further consideration is to choose Group
II estimators. Pagan-Hall tests for heteroskedasticity were utilized to discriminate 2SLS and
GMM. The test rejected the null hypothesis, suggesting GMM is preferable to the 2SLS.
Next, we considered RE2SLS or FE2SLS. The Hausman’s test yielded an observed x2 test of
12.9, insignificant at 5% level. We could not reject the null hypothesis of no correlation
between εit and Xit in (1), implying RE2SLS is preferable than FE2SLS (Baltagi 2005).
It has been noted (Staiger & Stock 1996) that if the instruments are only weakly related to the
endogenous variable, the resulting parameter estimates will be biased even if the instruments
are not correlated with the error term of the demand equation (1). This implies the consistency
of the coefficient estimates using Group II, and the test for endogeneity depends largely on
the accuracy of the instruments. To deal with this, we employed instrumental variables tests
(i.e. relevancy, validity and orthogonality). A reduced form regression of the suspected
endogenous variables,Ct-1, on the full set of instruments was estimated using OLS regressions.
The resulting R2 was 12%. A gap between Partial R2 and Shea partial R2 was considerably
close, suggesting that the model is well identified (Shea 1997). The relevance of the
instruments was also investigated using an F-test, and confirmed the null hypothesis of the F-
test was rejected, indicating the instruments were correlated with the endogenous variable
(Bound et al. 1995). The instruments also passed over identification and orthogonality tests,
i.e., the Hansen J, Basman and Sargan tests could not reject the null hypothesis of correct
specifications, suggesting the models are well specified, and the instruments are valid.
Estimation results
Based on the model selection criteria, we opted to the estimation results derived from GMM.
Coefficient estimate of the lags consumption was a positive (+0.603) and highly significant,
suggesting cigarette is an addictive good. The lags consumption represents a fixed propensity
Genome 7

to addiction, which is carried over from period to period and its coefficient can be interpreted
as the speed of adjustment to the stable of consumption. Our finding suggests that Indonesian
smokers are myopic addicts, i.e., higher past consumption causes raiser the marginal utility of
current consumption of the cigarette and leads to higher in current consumption.
Price of cigarette was a negative, whilst it was a positive for the alcohol. Coefficient estimate
of price cigarette indicates the short-run price elasticity. The long-run elasticity was computed
as: ∂E(LnCit ) / ∂E(LnPcit ) = βˆ2 /(1 − βˆ1 ) . A 10% increase in cigarette prices would lead to a 2.8%
decrease in cigarette consumption in the short-run and 7.3% decreases in the long-run.
Information on the magnitude price elasticites of cigarettes demand is important from the
perspective of tobacco control policies. Since additional public health care costs smokers
impose on non smokers, control tobacco policies can be internalised using price mechanisms.
The purpose of increasing price can be used to control tobacco use, and at the same time to
maximize government revenue. This study detects the demand for cigarettes are price
inelastic (the price elasticity, in absolute value, less than one), suggesting the percentage
increase in prices would higher than the percentage decrease in consumptions. However, any
efforts to reduce cigarette consumption through increasing cigarettes prices (for instance by
placing tax) could be an efficient way of raising government revenue since the tax revenue
would increase, not decrease. The tax generated from this policy can be used to increase the
allocation of public health budgets, which is true as smokers give the negative consequences
to non-smokers.
Conclusion
Myopic addiction models are employed to investigate cigarette consumption using individuals
aggregated data derived from the Indonesian Family Life Survey in the period 1993-2000.
The estimations provide evidence on the dependence, reinforcement and tolerance effects of
cigarettes consumptions (coefficient of the lags consumption turns out to be a positive). We
conclude that addiction of Indonesian cigarette smokers is a result of myopic consumer
behavior. The demand for cigarettes is inelastic. The short-run price elasticity was estimated
at -0.28, while for the long-run one was -0.73. Any efforts to reduce cigarette consumptions
(i.e., tax on cigarette) could be an effective way of raising government revenue.
Acknowledgments
This study, under the supervision of Professor Teh-Wei Hu and funded by the National
Institute of Health/Fogarty International Center, is a collaborate study coordinated by the
Public Health Institute, Oakland, California, USA. The authors are grateful to the RAND
Corporation for providing the data. All views expressed and errors encountered are the sole
responsibility of the authors. The authors are thankful to Prof Mao Zhengzhong, Hai-Yen
Sung, Mike Ong, Anita Lee, Eliza Tong, Vetty Yulianty, Triasih Djutaharta and participants
of the 14WCTOH in India for their valuable inputs and supports.
Keywords
Cigarette smoking, myopic addictive models, statistical methodology for panel data.
References
Baltagi B.H. (2005) Econometric analysis of panel data. 3rd Edition. ©John Wiley & Sons Ltd, Chichester, West
Sussex PO19 8SQ, England (ISBN 0-470-01456-3).
Bound J., Jaeger D.A., Baker R.M. (1995) Problems with instrumental variables estimation when the correlation
between the instruments and the endogeneous explanatory variable is weak. J Am Stat Assoc 90, 443-450.
Chaloupka F.J., Warner K.E. (2000) The Economics of Smoking. In: Newhouse J.P., Cutler D. (Eds), Handbooks
of Health Economics. Elsevier, North-Holland, p.1539-1627 (ISBN-13: 978-0444822901).
Hidayat B,Thabrany H, Hu TW. (2009) Myopic addiction of cigarettes demand in Indonesia: panel data
approaches [14th World Conference on Tobacco or Health (14WCTOH), Mumbai (India), March 8-12 2009].
Shea J. (1997) Instrumental relevance in multivariate linier models: A simple measure. Rev Econ Stat 79, 348-352.
Staiger D., Stock J.H. (1996) Instrumental variables regression with weak instruments. Econometrica 65, 557-586.
Genome 8


Cytotoxicity of chitosan and coral as scaffold on osteoblast
Staff : Bachtiar E.W.1*, B.M. Bachtiar1, and Abas 2
Student : R.F. Hakim
Sponsor : RUUI 2007
Email Contact : endang04@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : The Asian Oral Health Meeting, Jakarta, November 2008
1
Department of Oral Biology, Faculty of Dentistry Universitas, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Badan Tenaga Nuklir Nasional (BATAN)
Introduction
Coral and chitosan are promising biomaterials used in the experiments of oromaxillofacial
tissue engineering. These natural materials have been extensively studied due to their
properties in the promotion of bone remodeling.
Objective
The purpose of this study was to evaluate the cytotoxicity effect of those materials in
osteoblast cell line, MG 63.
Methods
Osteoblast cells line were cultured in alpha minimum essential medium (α-MEM)
supplemented with fetal calf serum, penicillin-streptomycine and fungizone. For the trial
groups, the cells were grown in medium containing chitosan at concentrations of 1 or 2
mg/ml, without or with the addition of 2 mg of coral powder sized 1 micrometer, whereas the
control group was cultured with α-MEM only. In order to evaluate cytotoxicity of these
materials, the 3-(4, 5-dimethyl-thiazole-2-yl)-2, 5-diphenyl tetrazolium bromide (MTT) assay
was performed followed by determination of the number of viable cells after 4 hours
incubation.
Results
Compared to the control, the groups treated with either 1 or 2 mg/ml of chitosan together with
coral powder, show a slightly decrease in the percentage of viable cells (85% versus 85,6%,
p>0.05). However, when chitosan and coral were separately added to the osteoblast culture, it
seem more cells were viable (85.7% and 86.3%, p>0.05). In addition, statistical analysis
revealed there was no significance different among the groups of experiment.
Conclusion
We conclude that either Coral goniophora sp or chitosan indicate minimal cytotoxic effect in
osteoblast cells line culture and it seem to be compatible to be used as a scaffold in tissue
engineering.
Keywords
Chitosan, coral, cytotocixity, MTT assay, osteoblast, scaffold.
References
Schmitz T, Grabovac V, Palmberger TF, Hoffer MH, Bernkop-Schnürch A.Synthesis and characterization of a
chitosan-N-acetyl cysteine conjugate. Int J Pharm. 2008 Jan 22;347(1-2):79-85. Epub 2007 Jun 30.
Guggi D, Langoth N, Hoffer MH, Wirth M, Bernkop-Schnürch A. Comparative evaluation of cytotoxicity of a
glucosamine-TBA conjugate and a chitosan-TBA conjugate. Int J Pharm. 2004 Jul 8;278(2):353-60.
Genome 9

Chen F, Feng X, Wu W, Ouyang H, Gao Z, Cheng X, Hou R, Mao T. Segmental bone tissue engineering by
seeding osteoblast precursor cells into titanium mesh-coral composite scaffolds. Int J Oral Maxillofac Surg.
2007 Sep;36(9):822-7.
Okamura H, Nakatani M, Doe M, Morimoto Y, Takemura K. Cytotoxic Biscembranes from the Soft Coral
Sarcophyton glaucum. J Nat Prod. 2009 Mar 30.
Ragetly GR, Slavik GJ, Cunningham BT, Schaeffer DJ, Griffon DJ. Cartilage tissue engineering on fibrous
chitosan scaffolds produced by a replica molding technique.
J Biomed Mater Res A. 2009 May 29.
Genome 10


Effect of fish protein concentrate biscuit with probiotic as functional
food on humoral immune system and nutritional status of underfive-
year children
Staff : Ingrid S. Surono4*
Sponsor : Hibah pasca
Email Contact : gridsw@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Fredrik Rieuwpassa1, Clara M. Kusharto2, Made Astawan2, Netty
Harnetty3 and Ingrid S. Surono4 Effect of Fish Protein Concentrate
Biscuit with Probiotic as Functional Food on Humoral Immune
System and Nutritional Status of Underfive-year Children
International on Probiotic from Asian Traditional Fermented Food
for Healthy Gut Function, Jakarta, Indonesia. August 19-20, 2008.
Oral Presentation
1
Faculty of Fishery and Oceanology, Pattimura University
2
Faculty of Human Ecology, Bogor Agricultural University
3
Cibeber Health Center, Cianjur
4
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia
Introduction
Protein energy deficiency among children underfive year remained a main public health
problem in Indonesia. Malnutrition is still a big problem for underfive children although
many nutrition improvement programs have been done by the Government, NGO’s and other
institutions in the community. Many studies were reported that the problems usually started
after the baby entering a weaning phase. It is a critical phase, where the parent need to gives
full attention by feeding their baby with a nutritious food especially during children’s golden
age to be able their baby growing well and healthy.
According to Department of Health (2002), children who suffered from malnutrition are
about 27.3 %). Prevelance of malnutrion in Indonesia is in a high rank as compared to other
ASEAN countries and diarrhea is a major cause problem for those children. One of eight
underfive children suffered malnutrion problem since a baby borned (WNPG, 2004).
Malnourished children will cause growth failure , about less than 10 cm for length and 2 kg
for weight of children. It was reported that mental retarded may reduced 10 poin of IQ and
increased anemia as well as mortality rate (Woodhouse, 1999).
General objective of this study was to formulate biscuit based on Fish Protein Concentrate
(FBC) and Probiotic which is good for improving immunity and nutritional status of children
younger than five. Specific Objectives were three folds, to formulate biscuit based on Fish
Protein Concentrate (FBC) and Probiotic; and analyze its physical quality and aceeptability;
to study the effect of biscuit based on Fish Protein Concentrate (FBC) and Probiotic to
biological value and antibody (IgA), and to study the effect of biscuit based on Fish Protein
Concentrate (FBC) and Probiotic to nutritional status and antibodi (IgA) of malnourished
children.
Materials and methods

The biscuit was made by using main ingredient non-salt dried fish Ikan teri (Stolephorus sp.)
from Tual, Maluku Tenggara used as a major component. other ingredients used are whet
flour, skim milk, milk powder, sugar, margarine, eggs, baking powder, essence mocca and
probiotic cream containing Enterococcus faecium IS-27526.
A basic formula used to produced probiotic cream are krim probiotik 10 g butter + 10 g
margarine + 75 g sugar powder + 5 ml milk + probiotic.
Genome 11

The study was conducted in two phases : The first phase, assessing the protein quality (NPR,
BV, % Digestibility, NPU) and immune status by using Sprague Dauley Rats. The second
phase was human trial with 3 groups of subjects, supplemented with biscuit non fish (group
1), biscuit fish concentrate (group 2) and Biscuit fish protein concentrate with probiotic cream
(group3). Each group consists of 35 subjects children younger than 5 years. Supplementation
was carried out for 90 days, a placebo control trial pre-post study.

Biscuit fish protein concentrate plus probiotic shows a good formula as compare to other
formulas (NPR 6.90; BV 98.5%; % Digestibility 94.6; dan NPU 93.2 %). The effect of biscuit
fish protein concentrate plus Probiotic tends to improve a nutritional status of children, A
significance difference was fouind on the increment of body weight of children with Biscuit
fish protein concentrate plus probiotic (Z skor BB/U) as compared to biscuit fish protein
concentrate and biscuit non-fish protein concentrate (p< 0.05).
The effect of fish protein concentrate biscuit plus Probiotik tends to improve a nutritional
status of children, A significance difference was exist increment body weight of children
with biscuit KPI plus Probiotik (Z skor BB/U) as compared to fish protein concentrate biscuit
and biskuit non-KPI (p< 0.05).
The result showed that the Fish Protein Concentrate (FPC) biscuit plus probiotic was
significantly improved the nutritional status of the underfive children, the Z score body
weight for age (W/A) 0.55 ± 0.47 , Z score body height for age (H/A) 0.60 ± 2.3, and Z score
body weight for body height (W/H) 0.55 ± 0.49, which were significantly higher than those
two other treatment groups. Antibody IgA level increase from 87 to 107.6 mg/dl and
viability of fecal lactic acid bacteria was 1.5 x 106 coloni/g). The morbidity rate of underfive
children with biscuit’s FPC plus probiotic was much lower (14.3%) than those two other
treatments (biscuit FPC or biscuit without FPC 23%, 29.5%, respectively).
Supplementation of probiotic Enterococcus faecium IS-27526 to undernourished children less
than five for 90 days significantly improve the body weight of undernourished children and
also enhance the humoral immune response (sIgA saliva) (Surono et al., 2005). This study
confirmed and validated previous study with the same indigenous probiotic strains. Moreover,
the addition of fish protein concentrate gave supplementation of nutrition, which has been
proven in supporting the probiotic function in stimulating the humoral immune response to
children less than five.
Keywords
Children younger than five, nutritional status, probiotic E. faecium IS-27526, serum IgA.
References
Ouwehand, A.C., P.V. Kirjavainen, C. Shortt and S. Salminen. 1999. Probiotics: Mechanism and Established
Effects. International Dairy Journal, 9: 43-52.
Widya karya Nasional Pangan dan Gizi, 2004.
Surono, 2005. Exploration of Indigenous Lactic Acid Bacteria from Dadih of West Sumatra for good starter
cultures and probiotic bacteria Report of RUTI program.
Genome 12


Effect of glucose in removal of microcystin-LR by viable commercial
probiotic strains and strains isolated from Dadih fermented milk
Staff : Sonja M.K. Nybom1*, M. Carmen Collado2, Ingrid S. Surono3*,
Seppo J. Salminen2, and Jussi A.O. Meriluoto1
Sponsor : Academy of Finland, RC for Biosciences and Environment
(decision numbers 210309 and 210310)
Disseminated at : Sonja M. K. Nybom, M. Carmen Collado, Ingrid S. Surono.
Seppo J. Salminen, and Jussi A. O. Meriluoto. Effect of Glucose
in Removal of Microcystin-LR by Viable Commercial Probiotic
Strains and Strains Isolated from Dadih Fermented Milk J. Agric.
Food Chem. 2008, 56, 3714–3720
1
Department of Biochemistry and Pharmacy, Åbo Akademi University, Tykistökatu 6A, 20520 Turku, Finland
2
Functional Foods Forum, University of Turku, Itäinen Pitkäkatu 4 A, 20014 Turku, Finland
3
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia, Salemba Raya 6, Jakarta 10430-Indonesia
Introduction
In many eutrophic freshwaters, cyanobacteria frequently form toxic mass occurrences,
produce a number of potent hepato- and neurotoxins called cyanotoxins. Cyanotoxins show a
potent acute hepatotoxicity and tumorpromoting activity and are therefore considered a
significant public health problem worldwide. Microcystins are cyclic heptapeptide
hepatotoxins, tumor promoters (1) and possible carcinogens (2), which are produced by
several cyanobacterial genera. Cyanotoxins a are increasingly found in drinking water
reservoirs, entering the water supply (3), contaminate drinking water resources and raw
materials for the food industry, including animal tissues and agricultural products.
Microcystin-LR (MC-LR) is the most common and the most toxic variant among
approximately 80 microcystins, and a provisional guideline value of 1 µg L-1 for MC-LR in
drinking water has been issued by the World Health Organization (4)
Probiotic has been defined by the FAO-WHO as a “live microorganism which when
administered in adequate amounts confers a health benefit on the host” (5). This study was
designed to demonstrate the ability of specific commercial strains of lactobacilli and
bifidobacteria and the natural Lactobacillus plantarum strains isolated from traditionally
fermented dadih to remove the cyanobacterial peptide toxin MCLR from water solutions.
Dadih, a yogurtlike product, is an Indonesian traditional fermented product from West
Sumatra, which is spontaneously fermented from fresh raw buffalo milk in bamboo tubes and
capped with banana leaves (6). Studies on potential probiotic properties of indigenous lactic
acid bacteria isolated from dadih have demonstrated antimutagenic, mutagen-binding, and
cholesterol-binding properties, as well as acid and bile tolerance, good adhesion properties,
and antipathogenic properties (7-8, 9–12).

Microcystins. MC-LR was extracted from a culture of Anabaena sp. 90 (originating from the
culture collection of Prof. Kaarina Sivonen, University of Helsinki, Finland) and purified by
HPLC as described earlier (13). Ten micrograms of MC-LR was dissolved in 1 mL of PBS
buffer, and appropriate dilutions were made.
Bacterial Strains. Six commercial probiotic and two dadih lactic acid bacterial strains were
tested for their microcystin-removal capacity. The commercial strains were Lactobacillus
rhamnosus GG (ATCC 53103, Valio Ltd., Helsinki, Finland), L. rhamnosus LC-705 (Valio
Ltd.), L. plantarum Lp-115 (Danisco Inc., Madison), Bifidobacterium longum 46 (DSM
Genome 13

14583), Bifidobacterium lactis 420 (Danisco Deutschland Gmbh, Niebüll, Germany), and B.
lactis Bb12 (Chr. Hansen Ltd., Hørsholm, Denmark), and they were obtained in commercial
lyophilized form. The indigenous dadih strains were L. plantarum strains with the
identification numbers IS-10506 and IS-20506 (Gene Bank Accession numbers DQ860148
and DC860149, respectively) from the University of Turku culture collection. The bacteria
were cultured in deMan-Rogosa-Sharpe (MRS) broth (Oxoid, Hampshire, United Kingdom)
(MRS supplemented with 0.05% w/v cysteine-HCl for Bifidobacteria) for 18 h at 37 oC, and
the cells were harvested by centrifugation (3200g, 4 oC, 20 min), washed twice with PBS
buffer, then suspended in PBS with or without glucose (1, 2, or 3%) to reach a final cell
density of approximately 1010 colonyforming units (CFU)/mL. Glucose was added in PBS as
a bacterial nutrient. Total viable counts of bacterial suspensions were determined prior to
incubation (control, time 0 h) by flow cytometry. The percentages of viability were calculated
comparing the total viable counts before incubation (t ) 0, 100% viability) with the viable
cells labeled with SYTO9 (green color) obtained after 24 and 48 h of incubation at 4 and 37
o
C in different concentrations of glucose.
Microscopy. Visual inspection of the viability of bacteria (for L. rhamnosus GG) during
incubation with MC-LR at 37 oC in absence or presence of glucose (0 or 1%) was determined
by microscopy. An Olympus epifluorescence microscope BX50 (Olympus, Tokyo, Japan)
with filter U-MWIB (excitation, 460–490 nm; emission, 515–700 nm) was used. Images were
recorded with a digital camera (model DP-10; Olympus, Hamburg, Germany): green bacteria,
viable; red bacteria, nonviable; and orange bacteria, injured.
Microcystin Removal Assay. One milliliter of the bacteria suspended in PBS at a
concentration of approximately 1010 CFU/mL with or without the addition of glucose (1, 2, or
3%) together with 100 µg/LMC-LR were incubated in 1.5 mL borosilicate glass
chromatographic vials under continuous reciprocal shaking, 120 rotations per minute
(Certomat WR, B. Braun, Melsungen, Germany) at 4 or 37 oC for different times (0, 18, 24,
and 48 h). Subsamples were taken and centrifuged (12000g, 10 min, room temperature) in
300 µL borosilicate glass chromatographic inserts. The supernatants were analyzed for
residual MC-LR concentration by HPLC as compared with a 100 µg/L MC-LR control in
PBS.
Statistics. Statistical analysis was performed using the t test. The probability level of 5% (p )
0.05) was used to indicate the significance.

The results show that all tested strains were able to remove MC-LR from aqueous solutions,
but differences in the elimination efficiency of the strains were demonstrated. The removal
efficiency was dependent on the strain and on glucose addition. The results suggest that
bacterial metabolic activity has an important role in toxin removal because at 37o C, the
removal percentages were highest (p < 0.05) for all tested strains . The best MC-LR removal
percentages were obtained at 37 oC by L. plantarum strains isolated from dadih fermented
milk. Furthermore, the glucose addition improved the removal efficiencies of all tested strains
at 37 o C by enhancing both the removal rate and the amount of MC-LR removed. The
addition of 2 or 3% glucose did not significantly improve or affect the removal further. In
general, the viability of all bacterial strains tested decreased at 37 o C in the presence of
glucose, but the behavior was straindependent. At 37 C o, the metabolic activity rate is higher
in the presence of glucose and the viable cells may experience stress as shown by the decrease
of viability. For some of the strains, such as L. rhamnosus GG and B. longum 46, the viability
decreased dramatically as a result of the addition of glucose, whereas L. plantarum IS-10560
and IS-20560 and B. lactis Bb12 and 420, glucose did not significantly affect the viability
within 24 h of incubation. The B. lactis strains Bb12 and 420 showed viabilities similar to
dadih strains at 37 oC, but the removal percentages observed were lower. The microscopic
images showed that in the absence of glucose most of the cells stayed viable until 24 h of
incubation. The images also support the conclusion that the bacteria become stressed as a
result of higher metabolic activity when glucose is added. All three techniques (plate
Genome 14


counting, flow cytometry, and microscopy) demonstrated that cell viability decreased during
incubation and with an increasing concentration of glucose. The probiotic strains isolated
from dadih showed high removal abilities also at lower bacterial concentrations (109-1010
CFU/mL) than the commercial probiotics, but with higher bacterial cell densities, the removal
abilities were similar with all strains. In addition, dadih strains of L. plantarum (IS-10506 and
IS-20506) were shown to have higher removal abilities as compared to the commercial L.
plantarum strain Lp- 115, which was shown to behave similarly to the other commercial
strains.
For the dadih strains, a clear improvement on the removal ability was observed by the
addition of glucose to the solution, but the increase was not so marked for the other strains. Of
the commercial strains, B. lactis Bb12 and 420 showed similar viabilities when compared to
the dadih strains, but their MCLR removal efficiencies were significantly lower. During
incubation, the bacterial strains consume glucose and as a consequence produce lactic acid,
which in turn causes cell stress as a result of the decrease in pH. In this study, the bacterial
cells removed MC-LR from solution faster in the presence of glucose but cell death also
occurred faster.
In general, the dadih probiotic strains were more resistant and stayed viable longer. As a
result also, the removal percentages observed for L. plantarum IS-10506 and IS-20506 in the
presence of glucose were higher than for the commercial probiotics. The commercial L.
plantarum strain Lp-115 was shown to behave more similar to the other commercial strains
than with the L. plantarum strains isolated from dadih. The results reveal that cell viability,
bacterial cell density, cell culturability, and metabolic activity play important roles in the
removal of MC-LR.
Keywords
Glucose, metabolism , microcystin-LR, probiotic, viability.
References
Falconer, I. R.; Humpage, A. R. Tumour promotion by cyanobacterial toxins. Phycologia 1996, 35, 74–79.
Ito, E.; Kondo, F.; Terao, K.; Harada, K. Neoplastic nodular formation in mouse liver induced by repeated
intraperitoneal injections of microcystin-LR. Toxicon 1997, 35, 1453–1457.
Sivonen, K.; Jones, G. Cyanobacterial toxins. In Toxic Cyanobacteria in Water; Chorus, I., Bartram, J., Eds.; E &
FN Spon: London, United Kingdom, 1999.
WHO. Guidelines for Drinking-WaterQuality, 3rd ed.; World Health Organization : Geneva,2004;Vol 1.
Recommendations.
FAO-WHO. Guidelines for the EValuation of Probiotics in Food Working Group Report; Food and Health
Agricultural.
Akuzawa, R.; Surono, I. S. Fermented milks of Asia. In Encyclopedia of Dairy Sciences; Roginski, H., Fuquay, J.
W., Fox, P. F., Eds.; Academic Press: London, United Kingdom, 2002; pp 1045–1048.
Surono, I. S.; Hosono, A. Antimutagenicity of milk cultured with lactic acid bacteria from Dadih against
mutagenic Terasi. Milchwissenschaft 1996, 51, 493–497.
Surono, I. S. In vitro probiotic properties of indigenous dadih lactic acid bacteria. Asian-Aus. J. Anim. Sci. 2003,
16, 726–731.
Pato, U.; Surono, I. S.; Koesnandar; Hosono, A. Hypo-cholesterolemic effect of indigenous dadih lactic acid
bacteria by deconjugation of bile salts. Asian-Aust. J. Anim. Sci. 2004, 17 (12), 1741–1745.
Dharmawan, J.; Surono, I. S.; Lee, Y. K. Adhesion properties of indigenous dadih lactic acid bacteria on human
intestinal mucosal surface. Asian-Aust. J. Anim. Sci. 2006, 19 (5), 751.
Collado, M. C.; Surono, I.; Meriluoto, J.; Salminen, J. Potential probiotic characteristics against pathogen intestinal
colonization of strains isolated from traditional dadih fermented milk. J. Food Prot. 2007, 70, 700–705.
Collado, M. C.; Surono, I.; Meriluoto, J.; Salminen, J. Indigenous dadih lactic acid bacteria: Cell-surface
properties and interactions with pathogens. J. Food Sci. 2007, 72, M89–M93.
Meriluoto, J.; Spoof, L. Purification of microcystins by highperformance liquid chromatography. In TOXIC:
Cyanobacterial Monitoring and Cyanotoxin Analysis; Meriluoto, J., Codd, G. A., Eds.; Åbo Akademi
University Press: Turku, Finland, 2005; pp 93–104.
Genome 15

Effect of IgY on in vitro biofilm formation of S. mutans isolated from

children
Staff : Budiarjo S.1, Soenawan H., Bachtiar E.W.2* and Bachtiar B.M.2
Wibawan I.T.3, Soejoedono R.3
Student : Widjaya A.
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : The Asian Oral Health Meeting, Jakarta November 2008
1
Department of Paedodonti, Faculty of Dentistry, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Department of Oral Biology, Faculty of Dentistry, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
3
Faculty of Veterinary, Bogor Agricultur Institute, (IPB) Bogor Indonesia
Introductions
Streptococcus mutans (S mutans) has been strongly implicated as a causative organism of
dental caries. S mutans serotype c is a major etiologic agent of human dental caries. One of
the concept in preventing dental caries is passive immunization with IgY. This yolk antibody
can prevent the attachment between S mutans and tooth surface.
Purpose
This purpose of this study was to evaluate the effect of IgY–anti S. mutans serotype c on in
vitro biofilm formation of S. mutans isolated from children dental plaque.
Methods
Subject between the ages 9 to 12 years of age were involved in this study. Dental Plaque
samples were collected by rubbing a sterile wooden toothpick on the buccal surface of lower
first molar. The biofilm assay was carried out by using 24-well tissue culture plates. Briefly, S
mutans was cultured on TYSB agar and the selected colonies was isolated and grown in TSB
medium. A 10.000 CFU/ml bacteria were inoculated in 24 well-plate supplemented without
(control) or with 40 µg/ml IgY. The plate were then kept in incubator for 2 hours to allow
biofilm formation on the bottom of the plate. The bacterial biofilm were quantified by
measuring the absorbance at OD655.
Results
The result of this experiment demonstrated that plates with IgY, incubated for 2 hours
showed significant decrease (p<0,05) of biofilm formation than plates without IgY.
Conclusion
IgY Anti S mutans serotype c has the potential to inhibit the formation of biofilm of S mutans
isolated children dental plaque.
Keywords
Biofilm, IgY, Streptococcus mutans.
References
Smith DJ. Dental Caries Vaccines: Prospects and Concerns.J Crit Rev Oral Biol Med 2002; 13(4): 335-349.
Smith DJ, King WF and Godiska R. Passive Transfer of Immunoglobulin Y Antibody to Streptococcus mutans
Glucan Binding Protein B Can Confer Protection against Experimental Dental Caries. J Infect Immun 2001;
69(5): 3135-3142.
Genome 16


Vojdani. 2003. look at Infectious Agent as Possible Causative Factors in Cardiovascular Disease: Part I .Lab Med
A 34(3): 6-11.
Genome 17

Effect of Portland cement on human dental-pulp cells vibility

Staff : D.A. Margono1, and E.W. Bachtiar2*
Student : D. Angelina
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : The 22nd International Association for Dental Research (SEA
Division) & 19th South East Asia Association for Dental
Education Manila, Philipine (October 8-10, 2008)
1
Department of Concervative Dentistry, Faculty of Dentistry, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Introduction
Mineral trioxide aggregate is an endodontic material which has biocompatibility and provides
an excellent sealing, non toxic and inducing the tissues regeneration. The basic subtance of
MTA is cement Portland enriched by bismuth oxide to give radiopacity property. Some
studies report that MTA and Portland cement have similar mechanical and chemical
constituents. However, there were only few reports using human pulps cells to assess the
citotoxicity effect of Portland cement in vitro.
Objective
To compare the citotoxicity effect of the grey and the white Portland cement when co-
cultured with human dental-pulp cells. Methods: Human dental-pulp cells were obtained from
caries free teeth which were extracted for orthodontic treatment. The teeth were cracked to
obtain the pulp tissue, then were cultured in DMEM supplemented with 10% FBS. The cells
were used after fifth and sixth passages, and the specimens were soaked for 1 and 7 days with
DMEM-free serum prior to be seeded into human dental-pulp cells in 24-well cultur plate.
Subsequently,the effect was assessed using MTT assay.
Results
Viability test showed that white Portland cement has no citotoxicity effect on human dental
pulp cells, but the grey has. However, statistical analysis showed no significant di fferent
between the two effects.
Conclusion
This study demonstrates, both the white and the grey Portland cement showed similar
property as biocompatible material when co-cultured with human dental-pulp cells in
vitro.
References
Gandolfi MG, Perut F, Ciapetti G, Mongiorgi R, Prati C.New Portland cement-based materials for endodontics
mixed with articaine solution: a study of cellular response. J Endod. 2008 Jan;34(1):39-44.
De-Deus G, de Souza MC, Sergio Fidel RA, Fidel SR, de Campos RC, Luna AS.Negligible Expression of Arsenic
in Some Commercially Available Brands of Portland Cement and Mineral Trioxide Aggregate. J Endod. 2009
Jun;35(6):887-890.
Reyes-Carmona JF, Felippe MS, Felippe WT. Biomineralization ability and interaction of mineral trioxide
aggregate and white portland cement with dentin in a phosphate-containing fluid. J Endod. 2009
May;35(5):731-6.
Genome 18


Escherichia coli contamination in meals at canteen around campus in
Depok, 2008
Staff : T. Eryando1*, D. Susanna2 & Y.M. Indrawani3
Sponsor : RUUI 2007
Email Contact : dsusanna@ui.edu; tris@ui.edu; and ivonne@ui.edu
Disseminated at : “The 40th APACPH Annual Conference in Kuala Lumpur, 7th-9th
November 2008”
1
Department of Population and Biostatistics, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia
2
Department of Environmental Health, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia
3
Department of Nutrition, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia
Introduction
Meals are very important for energy source and growth for human body, and are expected to
be good in features and delicious, but the most important thing is save to consumed or
uncontaminated by dangerous and poisoned element, such as microorganism which could
produce sicknesses. Ministry of Health Decree no.715/MENKES/SK/V/2003 mentioned that
the number of E. coli should be 0/gram sample (or negative).
Research method
A cross-sectional design research conducted in all registered canteen around campus in
Depok-West Java, in the year 2008. Amount of 13 canteens were observed of microbiology of
E. coli contamination in meals served. There were 49 type of meals from 4 categories; dry
meals, wet meals, and meals that poured or mix with sambals and sambal itself, using the
most probable number methods.
Result and discussion

Almost all type of meals from eah canteen were contaminated by Escherichia coli, Meals
with sambal were the most risking from the contamination of E. coli (Table 1).
Tabel 1. The percentage of ‘positive’ E. coli in foods (per mL), utensils (cm2), and hand of food handlers (cm2),
and Salmonella in foods (per mL), from 13 canteens around Campus in Depok, 2008
Food Number of Frequency Number Percentage Rank of its
Category Type of foods measured (n=47) of of of category of foods
measured ‘positive’ ‘positive’
Dry meals Fried rice 7 21 5 23,88 4
Mix rice 3 9 4 44,44 3
Rice + chicken 1 3 3 100,00 1
grilled
Padang rice 4 12 8 66,67 2
(rendang)
Kweetiauw 1 3 0 0,00 6
Fried noodle 2 6 1 16,66 5
Total 18 54 21 38,89 2
Wet Lamb soup 1 3 0 0,00 4
meals Tongseng 1 3 1 33,33 2
Meet soup 2 6 2 33,33 2
Chicken soto 3 9 1 11,11 3
Noodle soup 2 6 2 33,33 2
Meat soto 1 3 1 33,33 2
Rib soto 2 6 2 33,33 2
‘lontong sayur’ 1 3 2 66,67 1
Noodle + 1 3 1 33,33 2
chicken
Total 14 42 12 28,57 4
Genome 19

With 6 3 50,00 4
'Sambal' Ketoprak 2
Gado-gado 4 12 10 83,33 2
Karedok 1 3 3 100,00 1
Pecel 1 3 2 66,67 3
Siomay 1 3 1 33,33 5
Total 9 21 19 90,15 1
Sambal' in meat soup 1 3 1 33,33 2
in chicken soto 2 6 0 0,00 3
in noodle soto 1 3 1 33,33 2
in rib soup 2 6 4 66,67 1
for chicken 1 3 2 66,67 1
grilled
for Padang rice 1 3 0 0,00 3
Total 8 24 8 33,33 3
It is proved that E. coli is the common contaminant in meals (Swane, et.al. 2003), besides
Salmonella and Staphylococcus (Kurnia, 2004). The existene of E. coli is very dangerous,
because it would risen the posibility of other pathogen, such as Salmonella, Shigella, and
Staphylococcu (Djaja, 2003).
The result found that meals with the highest risk of bacteria contamination were mostly the
traditional meals such as ‘siomay’, ‘rendang’, ‘karedok’ and ‘gado-gado’. Karedok and Gado-
gado are food made by mixture of vegetables (sprouts, beans, gabage, tofu, and tempe) mixed
or poured with sambal. This phenomenon proofed that type of meals that made from many
ingredients were highly risk for bacterial contamination. There are 5 pathogen types of E. coli
were ever observed (Refai, 1979) and these pathogen bacteria caused an outbreak that
sometimes take life.
Table 2. Contamination of E. Coli in Dairy and Non-dairy Meals for Each Cathegory from Canteen around
Campus in Depok, 2008
Canteen E. coli ‘positive’
location Dairy Non-dairy
A 0 1
B 2 1
C 2 1
D 0 1
E 2 0
F 2 1
G 2 1
H 0 1
I 1 0
J 2 0
K 2 0
L 0 1
M 0 1
Total (%) 15 (62.50) 9 (37.50)
Categorization than made for two types of meal, dairy and non-dairy meals. Table 2 showed
that the number of food with positive E. coli contamination in dairy meals were higher then
non-dairy meals. According to Indrawani, every animal can be a reservoir of E. coli,
including O157:H7 strain (Indrawani, 2004).
Meals are risking from the bacteria contamination, and it could lead to the very specific
illness which can be avoided. Almost all of meals category were positively contaminated by
Escherichia coli, like mentioned by Swane (Swane, et.al. 2003). There are about 35 types of
bacteria in meals, such as Escherichia coli and Salmonella (Djaja, 2003). The existence of E.
coli can lead the possibility of the existence of Salmonella, Shigella, and Staphylocccus
(Refai, 1979).
Conclusion
The survey of meals in canteens around the campus in Depok showed the positive
contamination of Escherichia coli. Almost all type of meals sampled found positively
contaminated by E. coli in each canteen. It is important to improve the quality of meals served
Genome 20


in canteen by maintaining routine monitoring and evaluation of the meals material, process
and personal hygiene and sanitation. The certificate mechanism from district or provincial
health office is important to implement, as mentioned in the Ministry of Health Decree
no.715/MENKES/SK/V/2003.
Keywords
Campus, Escherichia coli, meals.
References
Djaja, IM. 2003. Pengaruh Jenis Tempat Pengelolaan Makanan terhadap kontaminasi Bakteri pada Makanan di
Jakarta Selatan. Disertasi. Program Pascasarjana Universitas Indonesia. Jakarta.
Indrawani, Y. M. 2004 . Escherichia Coli O157H7 dan Faktor Lingkungan Biofisik sebagai Ukuran Dampak
Limbah Kotoran Sapi terhadap Kejadian Diare Balita Keluarga Petani-Peternak di Kabupaten Bogor.
Disertasi. Program Pasca Sarjana FKM-UI, Depok.
Keputusan Menteri Kesehatan Republik Indonesia Nomor 715/MENKES/SK/V/2003.
Kurnia, D. 2004. Gambaran Pelaksanaan Higiene dan Sanitasi Pengelolaan Makanan di Rumah Sakit Umum
Tangerang Tahun 2004. Skripsi. FKM-UI. Depok.
Refai, MK. 1979. Manual of Food Quality Control. Microbiological Analysis. Rome: Food and Agricultural
Organization of United Nations.
Swane, et.al. 2003. Essential of Food Safety and Sanitation. Third edition, Prentice-Hall, Inc. Upper Saddle River.
New Jersey.
Genome 21

Expression level of TAp73 isoform in oral squamous cell carcinoma

cell lines
Staff : Y.S. Wimardhani1*, E.W. Bachtiar2, N. Sudarsono2
Student :-
Sponsor : Risbin Iptekdok 2007
Email Contact : yuniardini@ui.edu
1
Department of Oral Medicine, Faculty of Dentistry Universitas, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Introduction
High telomerase activity that causes immortal characteristic of cancer cells is one of the result
of mutation of p53 gene. The TAp73 isoform, one of p53 family, also has role in regulating
telomerase activity. Study on the relation of the status of p53 and expression of isoform
TAP73 on telomerase activity in oral cancer has not been provided. This study aims to
analyze the role of isoform TAp73 on telomerase activity in two oral squamous cell
carcinoma in relation to their status of p53 mutation, to see the chance of TAp73 isoform as
anti-proliferation gene therapy.

Two oral squamous cell carcinoma cell lines, HSC-3 and HSC-4 which have different
location of the p53 gene mutation, were cultured and harvested for protein and mRNA
extraction. The RT-PCR for TAp73 mRNA was run to see the expression at the pre-
translational level. The SDS-PAGE gel electrophoresis of the total protein was initially run to
describe the protein profile of the two cell lines and Western Blot specific for TAp73 and
hTERT would be further performed. The expected bands were visualised under UV light and
semi-quantitatively analysed using Quantity One (BioRad).
Results
At the mRNA level, HSC-3 cell line expressed higher level of TAp73 mRNA compared to
that of HSC-4 cell line. The analysis of the expression of hTERT at the mRNA level is still
being optimised. The results showed that the protein profile specifically TAp73 and hTERT
of the two cell lines were quite similar but TAp73 were expressed in higher level in HSC-3
cell line while hTERT was expressed higher in HSC-4 as seen in SDS-PAGE. More specific
protein analysis using Western Blot for TAp73 are still being optimized.
Discussion
The expression of TAp73 at the mRNA level which was visualised semiquantitatively was
higher in HSC-3 cell line compared to that of HSC-4. This result should be further analysed
specifically by using qRT-PCR. Visualisation of the protein band of TAp73 analysed using
SDS PAGE also showed the same pattern, however the specific protein analysis using
Western Blot should confirm this initial result. Studies have shown that the expression of p73
isoforms depend on the type of the tissue and its developmental stage, while their expression
on cancer tissue also varied and could be detected easier. Mutant p53 protein was known to be
bind with the TAp73 and inhibit its pro-apoptotic properties. The type of p53 polymorphism
at codon 72 also known to influence the binding strength between the two molecules. The
mutant p53 with arginine residu 72 (R72) would bind stronger to TAp73, therefore the HSC-4
cells which have this type of polymorphism, this event would cause the inactivation of the
p73 protein which resulted in its lower expression of TAp73 but higher expression of hTERT.
Genome 22


Conclusion
This initial result showed that the expression of expected TAp73 protein was higher in HSC-3
cell line but the hTERT expression showed higher expression in HSC-4 cell line. This
observation might be related to its characteristic in terms of telomerase activity. Further work
on the optimisation of the detection of hTERT mRNA and analysis of TAp73 and hTERT
using Western Blot would be performed.
Keywords
Oral cancer, p53, TAp73, telomerase.
References
Artandi S., Attardi L.,(2005) Pathways connecting telomeres and p53 in senescence, apoptosis, and cancer.
Biochem Biophys Res Commun 331:881-890.
Beitzinger M., Oswald C., Beinoraviciute-Kellner R., Stiewe T.(2006) Regulation of telomerase activity by the
p53 family member p73. Oncogene 25:813-826.
Bodnar A., Ouellette M., Frolkis M., Holt S., Chiu C., Morin G., Harley C., Shay J., Lichtsteiner S., Wright
W.,(1998) Extension of life-span by introduction of telomerase into normal human cells. Science 279:349-352.
Fujimoto R., Kamata N., Yokoyama K., Ueda N., Satomura K., Hayashi E., Nagayama M., (2001) Expression of
telomerase components in oral keratinocytes and squamous cell carcinomas. Oral Oncol 37:132-140.
Kumar S., Zain R., Ismail S., Cheong S., (2005) Human telomerase reverse transcriptase expression in oral
carcinogenesis--a preliminary report. J Exp Clin Cancer Res 24:639-646.
Lin S., Elledge S., (2003) Multiple tumor suppressor pathways negatively regulate telomerase. Cell 113:881-889.
Shats I., Milyavsky M., Tang X., Stambolsky P., Erez N., Brosh R., Kogan I., Braunstein I., Tzukerman M.,
Ginsberg D. V. R., (2004) p53-dependent down-regulation of telomerase is mediated by p21waf1. J Biol Chem
279:50976.
Stiewe T., Putzer B., (2002) Role of p73 in malignancy: tumor suppressor or oncogene? Cell Death Differ 9:237-
245.
Stiewe T., Tuve S., Peter M., Tannapfel A., Elmaagacli A., Putzer B., (2004) Quantitative TP73 transcript analysis
in hepatocellular carcinomas. Clin Cancer Res 10:626-633.
Vaziri H., Benchimol S., (1999) Alternative pathways for the extension of cellular life span: inactivation of
p53/pRb and expression of telomerase. Oncogene 18:7676-7680.
Xu D., Wang Q., Gruber A., Bjorkholm M., Chen Z., Zaid A., Selivanova G., Peterson C., Wiman K.G.P.P.,(2000)
Downregulation of telomerase reverse transcriptase mRNA expression by wild type p53 in human tumor cells.
Oncogene 19:5123-5133.
Genome 23

Expression of tenascin C in rat neonatal cardiac tissue

Staff : R.D. Antarianto1*, J.A. Pawitan1, A.A. Jusuf 1
Student : R.D. Antarianto3
Sponsor : Hibah Tesis S2 DRPM UI 2008
Email Contact : radiana.dhewayani@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : 3rd Fraunhofer Life Science Symposium, Leipzig,GERMANY.
Presented as poster presentation.
1
Department of Histology, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Tenascin-C (TNC) is a large glycoprotein molecule at extracellular matrix, well known as
regulator of multiple cellular functions during embryogenesis, wound healing or cancer
progression. In the heart, TNC expression appears at the initial differentiation of
cardiomyocyte and coronary vasculo/angiogenesis. TNC re-express after myocardial injury,
regulating tissue remodeling. TNC is also essential for post natal cardiac angiogenic function.
Objective of this study is to describe location of TNC expression in rat neonatal cardiac
tissue.

The neonatal rat was sacrificed according to the guidance of the ethical commission on Health
Research, Ministry of Health of the Republic of Indonesia. Neonatal rat cardiac tissues for
TN-C immunohistochemistry were fixed in 10% neutral buffer formalin, dehydrated, and
embedded in paraffin. Sections cut at 5 µm were placed on glass slides coated with Silan
(Sigma). Sections were dewaxed in xylene and rehydrated in a series of graded concentrations
of ethanol and distilled water. Heat mediated antigen retrieval was performed using 10mM
citrate buffer pH 6.0 in microwave for 15 min. Immersed in 3% H2O2 (Blocking peroxidase
solution, Dako Cytomation) for 20 min to block endogenous peroxidase activity. After
equilibration in 10 mM PBS pH 7.4 and incubation in 10% normal horse serum for 30 min,
they were incubated with goat polyclonal anti-human TNC polyclonal antibody (N-19/sc-
9871, Santa Cruz Biotechnology; dilution 1:200 in PBS containing 1%v/v blocking serum)
overnight at 4°C. Following washing in PBS for 10 min, they were treated with swine anti-
goat biotynilated-primary antibody (LINK, LSAB kit k-0679, Dako Cytomation), followed by
incubation with the secondary antibody linked to peroxidase labeled steptavidin complex
(Streptavidin HRP, Dako Cytomation) (for 15 minutes each in room temperature). Color
development was achieved with diaminobenzidine (Dako Cytomation). Counterstaining was
performed with Mayer's haematoxylin. As a negative control, slide was not incubated in
primary antibody. Microphotograph was taken with a Canon Microscopic photographic
device.

Immunoreactivity of tenascin-C was found at cardiac ventricle, especially at the cytoplasmic
and membrane area of cardiomyocites. The nucleus and perinuclear area are devoid of
tenascin-C immunoreactivity. Atrioventricular valve also showed imunoreactivity for
tenascin-C in connective tissue area as patches.
Genome 24


Figure 1: Negative control(left), Positive immunoreactivity in rat cardiac ventricle
Figure 2 : Negative control (left), positive immunostaining at AV valve

Tenascin C expression previously investigated by Imanaka-Yoshida et al. Their findings
revealed tenascin C expression in association with cardiac diseases in patients (myocardial
infarction, myocarditis) and animal model.
Our result showed pattern of intracytoplasmic immunoreactivity of tenascin C, membranous
immunoreactivity and both. Tenascin C was previously found in extracellular space as
extracellular matrix protein. This molecule was believed to be synthesized by myofibroblast
which reside in interstisial space between stacks of cardiaomyocites. Our study suggested
cardiomyocites themselves secrete and synthesize tenascin C. This result confirmed the
findings of Yamamoto et al through in vitro mechanical strain towards cardiomyocite showed
induction of tenascin C mRNA (3.9 ± 0.5-times fold, p < 0.01, n = 13) and increased in
tenascin-C concentration. Immunohistochemistry of tenascin C in cardiac provide structural
images and location of tenascin C protein in cardiomyocite. Intracytoplasmic tenascin C
expression signals the process of tenascin C synthesis in the cardiomyocite’s cytoplasm.
Membranous tenascin C expression signals the secretion of tenascin C from inside the
cardiomyocites to the extracellular space.
Conclusion
Tenascin C expression in rat neonatal cardiac are intacytoplasmic and membrane area of
cardiomyocites suggested the process of synthesis and secretion of tenascin C by
cardiomyocites.
Keywords
Immunohistochemistry, rat neonatal cardiac, tenascin-C.
References
Yanagisawa M, Yu RK. The Expression and Functions of Glycoconjugates in Neural Stem Cells. Glycobiology.
2007.
Imanaka-Yoshida K, Hiroe M, Nishikawa T, Ishiyama S, Shimojo T, Ohta Y, Sakakura T, Yoshida T. Tenascin-C
modulates adhesion of cardiomyocytes to extracellular matrix during tissue remodeling after myocardial
infarction. Lab Invest. 2001; 81: 1015–1024.
Jones FS, Jones PL. The Tenascin Family of ECM Glycoproteins: Structure, Function, and Regulation During
Embryonic Development and Tissue Remodeling. Developmental Dynamics. 2000; 218:235–259.
Tenascin-C as an indicator of tissue reactions. On the pathogenesis of shoulderimpingement syndrome. 2003 Oulu
University Library.
Genome 25

NCBI Entrez Gene. TNC tenascin C (hexabrachion) [ Homo sapiens ]. Gene ID : 3371.
Imanaka-Yoshida K, Matsumotot K, Hara M, Sakakura T, Yoshida T. The dynamic expression of tenascin-C and
tenascin-X during early heart development in the mouse. Differentiation. 2003 Jun;71(4-5):291-8.
Galoian KA, Garamszegi N, Garamszegi SP, Scully SP. Molecular Mechanism of Tenascin-C Action on Matrix
Metalloproteinase-1 Invasive Potential Experimental Biology and Medicine 232:515-522 (2007).
Miyagawa-Tomita S, Nakagawa M, Sugimura H. Nakazawa M, Imanaka-Yoshida K. Tenascin-C may regulate
behavior of proepicardial organ-derived cells. Cardiovascular Development Conference 2005.
Terasaki F, Okamoto H, Onishi K, Sato A, Shimomura H, Bin Tsukada, et al. Higher Serum Tenascin-C Levels
Reflect the Severity of Heart Failure, Left Ventricular Dysfunction and Remodeling in Patients With Dilated
Cardiomyopathy. CIRCJ. 2007; 71(3): 327-330.
Jinnin M, Ihn H, Asano Y, Yamane K, Trojanowska M, Tamaki K. Platelet derived growth factor induced
tenascin-C transcription is phosphoinositide 3-kinase/Akt-dependent and mediated by Ets family transcription
factors.J Cell Physiol. 2006 Mar;206(3):718-27.
Midwood KS, Schwarzbauer JE. Tenascin-C Modulates Matrix Contraction via Focal Adhesion Kinase- and Rho-
mediated Signaling Pathways. Molecular Biology of the Cell. October 2002, 13(10): 3601-3613.
Tamaoki M, Imanaka-Yoshida K, Yokoyama K, Nishioka T, Inada H, Hiroe M, et al. Tenascin-C Regulates
Recruitment of Myofibroblasts during Tissue Repair after Myocardial Injury.Am J Pathol. 2005 July; 167(1):
71–80.
Yamamoto K, Dang QN, Kennedy SP, Osathanondh R, Kelly RA, Lee RT. Induction of Tenascin-C in Cardiac
Myocytes by Mechanical Deformation ROLE OF REACTIVE OXYGEN SPECIES .J Biol Chem. July 30,
1999, 274(31): 21840-21846.
Genome 26


Histodynamics of cardiomyocites number and diameter in neonatal,
adult and senilis rat cardiac tissue: Preliminary study
Staff : R.D. Antarianto1*, J.A. Pawitan1, A.A. Jusuf 1
Student : R.D. Antarianto3
Sponsor : Hibah Tesis S2 DRPM UI 2008
Email Contact : radiana.dhewayani@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : 3rd Fraunhofer Life Science Symposium, Leipzig, GERMANY.
Presented as poster presentation.
1
Department of Histology, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Heart was once considered as terminally differentiated organ, static from birth till end of life.
Discovery of cardiac stem cells (CSCs) shed new perspective on heart as a dynamic organ,
able to regenerate in homeostasis and injury. Quantitative morphological analysis is the most
reliable evidence for cardiac regeneration. However, histological evidence on cardiac changes
in developmental process from post natal to senile remains very much debatable, whether
hypertrophy of cardiomyocytes or proliferation from CSCs occurred in the process of cardiac
growth and development. This study aims to investigate changes in cardiac histological
appearance (cardiomyocytes number and diameter) from post natal to senilis using animal
model.

Design of this study was comparative cross sectional with 9 rats divided in to three groups
based on age(neonatal age 2 days old; young adult age 3-6 months old; adult age 12-18
months). The rats was sacrificed according to the guidance of the ethical commission on
Health Research, Ministry of Health of the Republic of Indonesia. This preliminary study was
performed at Histology Laboratory, Faculty of Medicine Universitas Indonesia from
December 2007 to February 2008. The subjects underwent intravital fixation and cardiac
organ was removed. Microscopic specimens were made and stained with Hematoxylin-Eosin.
Data collected: 2 microphotographs from atrium and 2 from ventricle. Cardiomyocite number
was counted with Digimizer Image Analyzer. Measurement of cardiomyocite diameter was
calibrated with micrometer scale using Digimizer Image Analyzer.

Optimization of Intravital Fixation
Figure 1. 3 neonatal rats age 2 days old
Genome 27

Figure 2. Thoracotomy before intravital fixation

The intravital fixation preferred in this study to preserve the cardiac organ as in living
condition and minimized the congested blood inside the cardiac organ. After thoracotomy was
done, the right atrium was cut and infusion syringe from perista infusion pump was
immediately inserted to the left ventricle. With the beating of the heart, the blood was quickly
removed from the systemic circulation and replaced with fixative solution, 10% buffered
formaldehyde.
Histology of 3 age groups rat cardiac
Figure 3. Cross section of left to right neonatal cardiac, young adult cardiac and adult cardiac
Histology of neonatal rat cardiac revealed 3 layers of cardiac wall. They are the innermost
lining is endocardium (simple squamous endothelium), myocardium in the middle which
directly attaches to endocardium and epicardium. Sub-endocardium (connective tissue
between endocardium and myocardium) and sub-epicardium (connective tissue between
epicardium and myocardium) still undeveloped. This is different from young adult and adult
cardiac. The sub-endocardium and sub-epicardium is well developed. Cardiomyocites in
neonatal cardiac have large nuclei in the centre of the cells, no peri-nuclear space, and
intercalated disc is not clear, distance between two adjacent cardiomyocites was narrow.
Changes in Cardiomyocites number and diameter with age
Changes in cardiomyocites number showed this pattern: the number of cardiomyocites were
most abundant in neonatal, less abundant in young adult and least number in adult cardiac.
This resembles degenerative process, decrease in number of cardiomyocites with advancing
age. This result need to be carefully interpreted. It was different from the result of Linzbach et
al that showed increased cardiomyocites number with aging. The difference was in the
quantification methods used. Our study counted cardiomyocites per high power field
(magnification 10x40) of selected areas representing cardiac atrium and ventricle, while
Linzbach made proportion of cardiac wall volume divided with cardiomyocite’s volume.
Table 1: Differrence in Cardiomyocites number and diameter between 3 age groups

Age Group ATRIUM VENTRICLE
Number per hpfDiameter in µmNumber per hpfDiameter in µm
Neonatus 72.8 (±5.3) 6.3 (±0.6) 153.3(±10) 6.9 ( ±0.5)

Adult 42.6 (±8.9) 9.2 (±0.4) 78.2(±6.6) 10.7 (±0.3)
Senile 22.8(±5.2) 18.1 (±1.2) 40(±3.6) 23.4 (±2.3).
The diameter size of cardyomiocites increased with aging. Increase in diameter is probably
due to either hypertophy or maturation process. Neonatal cardiomyocites were still immature
therefore have smaller diameter compared with young adult and adult cardiomyocites. Young
adult cardiomyocites were in growth and development phase therefore the diameter is larger
Genome 28


than neonatal cardiomyocites but smaller than adult cardiomyocites. Adult cardiomyocites
were fully mature and developed therefore have the largest diameter.
Conclusion
Cardiac muscle is a dynamic tissue. Number of cardiomyocites/high power field in atrium and
ventricle decreased with aging while the diameter size of cardyomiocites increased with
aging.
Keywords
Aging, cardiac hystology, cardiomyocyte hypertrophy, post natal growth & development.
References
Leri A, Kajstura J, Anversa P. Cardiac Stem Cells and Mechanisms of Myocardial Regeneration. Physiol Rev.
2005; 85: 1373-1416.
Anversa P, Leri A, Rota M, et al. Concise Review: Stem Cells, Myocardial Regeneration, and Methodological
Artifacts. Stem Cells. 2007; 25(3): 589-601.
Martin CM, Meeson AP, Robertson SM, Hawke TJ, Richardson JA, Bates S, Goetsch SC, Gallardo TD, Garry DJ.
Persistent expression of the ATP-binding cassette transporter, Abcg2, identifies cardiac SP cells in the
developing and adult heart. Dev Biol. 2004; 265: 262–275.
Beltrami AP, Urbanek K, Kajstura J, Yan SM, Finato N, Bussani R, et al. Evidence that human cardiac myocytes
divide after myocardial infarction. N Engl J Med. 2001;344:1750-7.
Linzbach AJ. Heart failure from the point of view of quantitative anatomy. Am J Cardiol 1960;5:370–382.
Genome 29

In vitro displacement and inhibition of Bacteroides vulgatus intestinal

colonisation by probiotic bacteria
Sponsor : Academy of Finland
Disseminated at : Anggraeini Puspitasari1, Philips Onggowidjaja1, Triswaty Winata1,
Seppo Salminen2, Eeva Salminen2 and Ingrid S. Surono3
Displacement and Inhibition of Bacteroides vulgatus by Probiotic
Bacteria. International Symposium on Probiotic from Asian
Traditional Fermented Food for Healthy Gut Function, Jakarta,
Indonesia. August 19-20, 2008

1
Faculty of Medicine, Maranatha Christian University, Bandung-Indonesia
2
Functional Foods Forum, University of Turku, Finland
3
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta-Indonesia
Introduction
Probiotics are microbial food supplements, which beneficially affect the host's health. They
are used to treat disturbed intestinal microflora and increased gut permeability which
commonly occur in children with acute rotavirus diarrhoea, people with food allergies or
colonic disorders and in patients undergoing pelvic radiotherapy (Salminen et al., 1996). One
of the main criteria for selecting probiotic strains is their ability to adhere to intestinal
surfaces. Attachment to mucosa prolongs the time probiotics can in£uence the gastrointestinal
immune system and microbiota of the host. Thus the ability to adhere to intestinal surfaces is
thought tocorrespond to the efficacy of the probiotic strain. The antibody titres detected from
the serum of people treated with probiotic bacteria has been shown to be directly correlated
with the adherence ability of the used strain (O'Halloran et al., 1997).
Probiotic bacteria are thought to improve resistance to gut infection by competing with
pathogen through displacement, inhibition and exclusion of harmful bacteria and balancing
the intestinal microbiota. The aim of this research was to find out the ability of probiotic
bacteria, namely Bifidobacterium lactis Bb12, Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG, as commercial
probiotic strains, and Lactobacillus plantarum IS-10506, Lactobacillus plantarum IS-20506
as Indonesian indigenous probiotic strains isolated from dadih in the displacement and
inhibition of pathogenic bacteria Bacteroides vulgatus.

Human intestinal mucus was isolated from the healthy part of resected colonic tissue as
described earlier (Ouwehand 1999; 2002). Before use, the protein concentration was
determined by a modification of the method of Lowry et al. (1951) as described by Miller and
Hoskins (1981), with bovine serum albumin (Sigma, St. Louis, Mo.) as the standard. Human
mucus was dissolved (0.5 mg of protein per ml) in HEPES (N-2-hydroxyethylpiperazine- N-
2-ethanosulfonic acid)–Hanks buffer (HH; 10 mM HEPES, pH 7.4), and 100 µl of the
solution was immobilized into polystyrene microtiter plate wells (Maxisorp, Nunc, Denmark)
by overnight incubation at 4oC by the method of Collado et al., 2005). Radiolabeled bacteria
were harvested after overnight incubation and washed twice with HH buffer. The A600 value
was adjusted to 0.25 - 0.05 to standardize the number of bacteria (approximately 108
CFU/ml), and 100 µl of this suspension was added to the wells and incubated for 1 h at 37oC.
Subsequently, the wells were washed twice with 200 µl of HH to remove unattached bacteria.
Adhered bacteria were released and lysed with 1% (wt/vol) sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS) in
NaOH (0.1 mol/liter, 200 ml per well) by incubation at 65o C for 1 h. The contents of the
wells were transferred to microfuge tubes containing scintillation liquid (OptiPhase ‘‘HiSafe
Genome 30


3,’’ Wallac, Turku, Finland), and radioactivity was measured by liquid scintillation. Adhesion
was expressed as the percentage of radioactivity recovered after adhesion relative to the
radioactivity of the bacterial suspension added to the immobilized mucus. Adhesion was
determined in three independent experiments, and each assay was performed in quadruplicate
to calculate intra-assay variation, expressed as the remaining pathogen adhesion to
immobilized mucus.

Bacteroides vulgatus was displaced by LGG, Bb12, Lactobacillus plantarum IS-10506,
Lactobacillus plantarum IS-20506, from the initial 100 % to 70,44%; 117,22%; 131%;
70,56%, respectively.
The results showed that Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG and Lactobacillus plantarum IS-20506
were significantly (P<0,05) displaced the Bacteroides vulgatus adhesion by 70,44 % and
70,56 %, respectively. Both Bifidobacterium lactis Bb12 and Lactobacillus plantarum IS-
10506 each was not significantly (p>0,05) displaced Bacteroides vulgatus adhesion. None of
the four tested probiotic bacteria showed significant (P>0,05) in inhibiting Bacteroides
vulgatus adhesion.
There was reduction in the amount of Bacteroides vulgatus adhere to mucus in vitro in the
present of LGG, Bb12, Lactobacillus plantarum IS-10506 and Lactobacillus plantarum IS-
20506 to 87,89%; 99,11%; 87,44%; 83,56%, as compared to the control, 100 %.
The ability to exclude and displace pathogens from mucus by specific probiotic strains has
been reported in other studies (Collado et al., 2005; Lee et al., 2003). The difficulties involved
in the analysis of bacterial adhesion in vivo have led to the development of in vitro model
systems for the selection of potentially adherent strains. Many different intestinal mucosa
models have been used to assess the adhesive ability of probiotics; among them, adhesion to
human intestinal mucus has been widely used (Collado et al., 2005; Kirjavainen, et al., 1998,
Tuomola et al., 1999). This study has also used a reproducible and sensitive human intestinal
mucus model (33).
As a conclusion, Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG as well as Lactobacillus plantarum IS-20506
significantly displaced the adhesion of Bacteroides vulgatus
Keywords
Adhesion, Bacteroides vulgates, displacement, inhibition, probiotic bacteria.
References
Collado, M. C., M. Gueimonde, M. Hernandez, Y. Sanz, and S. Salminen. 2005. Adhesion of selected
Bifidobacterium strains to human intestinal mucus and its role in enteropathogen exclusion. J. Food Prot.
68:2672-2678.
Kirjavainen, P. E., A. C. Ouwehand, E. Isolauri, and S. Salminen. 1998. The ability of probiotic bacteria to bind
to human intestinal mucus. FEMS Microbiol. Lett. 167:185–189.
Lee, Y.-K., K.-Y. Puong, A. C. Ouwehand, and S. Salminen. 2003. Displacement of bacterial pathogens from
mucus and Caco-2 cell surface by lactobacilli. J. Med. Microbiol. 52:925–930.
Lowry, O. H., N. J. Rosebourgh, A. L. Farr, and R. J. Randall. 1951. Protein measurement with the Folin phenol
reagent. J. Biol. Chem. 19:265–275.
Miller, R. S., and L. C. Hoskins. 1981. Mucus degradation in human colon ecosystems. Faecal population densities
of mucus degrading bacteria estimated by a ‘most probable number’ method. Gastroenterology 81:759–765.
Ouwehand, A. C., E. Isolauri, P. V. Kirjavainen, and S. Salminen. 1999. Adhesion of four Bifidobacterium strains
to human intestinal mucus from subjects in different age groups. FEMS Microbiol. Lett. 172:61-64.
Ouwehand, A. C., S. Salminen, S. Tolkko, P. Roberts, J. Ovaska, and E. Salminen. 2002. Resected human colonic
tissue: new model for characterizing adhesion of lactic acid bacteria. Clin. Diagn. Lab. Immunol. 9:184-186.
O'Halloran, S., Feeney, M., Morrissey, D., Murphy, L., Thornton, G., Shanahan, F., O'Sullivan, G.C. and Collins,
J.K. (1997) Adhesion of potential probiotic bacteria to human epithelial cell lines. Poster in conference:
Functional Foods: Designer Foods for the Future, Cork, Ireland.
Salminen, S., Isolauri, E. and Salminen, E. (1996) Clinical uses of probiotics for stabilizing the gut mucosal
barrier: successful strains and future challenges. Antonie van Leeuwenhoek 70, 347-358.
Tuomola, E. M., A. C. Ouwehand, and S. Salminen. 1999. The effect of probiotic bacteria on the adhesion of
pathogens to human intestinal mucus. FEMS Immunol. Med. Microbiol. 26:137–142.
Genome 31

Long-term outcome of a prospective cohort of apprentices exposed to

high-molecular-weight agents
Staff : D. Gautrin1, H. Ghezzo1, C. Infante-Rivard2, M. Magnan1, J
’Archevêque1, E. Suarthana1,2*, JL Malo1Student : -
Sponsor : The Canadian Institutes of Health Research (Grant MOP-53118),
the Medical Health, McGill University, Montreal, Canada;3 IRAS
(Institute for Risk Assessment Sciences), Environmental
Epidemiology Division, Utrecht University. P.O. Box 80176, 3508
TD, Utrecht, The Netherlands Research Council of Canada (Grant
MT-12256), and the Institut de recherche Robert-Sauvé en santé et
en sécurité du travail (Grant 099-164). One author (ES) was a
research fellow with a grant from the Center for Asthma in the
Workplace-Canadian Institutes of Health Research
Email Contact : d.gautrin@umontreal.ca
Disseminated at : Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2008; 177: 871-879
1
The Axe de recherche en santé respiratoire, Sacré-Coeur Hospital, 5400 Gouin Blvd West, Montreal, Canada H4J
1C5, Montreal, Canada; tel: 514-338-2796; fax: 514-338-3123
2
The Department of Epidemiology, Biostatistics and Occupational
Introduction
A long-term (8-year) follow-up study was conducted in 408 subjects from a cohort of
apprentices enrolled when they started a vocational program involving exposure to high-
molecular-weight allergens. The objectives were to examine: 1) incident specific
sensitization, work-related respiratory symptoms and bronchial responsiveness in those who
entered a workplace with similar exposure; 2) persistence of the same outcomes in those who
developed these features during their apprenticeship whether or not they were still exposed.
Methods
A respiratory symptom questionnaire, skin prick tests with specific allergens (laboratory
animals, flour and latex), spirometry and a methacholine challenge were administered to
participants. The association between incidence or persistence of these outcomes and
individual characteristics at baseline and end of apprenticeship was examined.
Findings
In subjects who at any time during follow-up held a job related to their training (78%), the
cumulative incidence of sensitization, rhinoconjunctival and respiratory symptoms, bronchial
hyperresponsiveness and probable OA at follow-up was respectively 9.8%, 12.6%, 5.3%,
14.3% and 3.0%. The persistence of these outcomes acquired during apprenticeship was
32.7%, 34.9%, 28.6%, 47.2% and 33.3%, respectively, compared to 0 to 25% in subjects who
were no longer exposed. Several clinical, immunological and functional characteristics at
baseline and acquired during apprenticeship were found to be significantly associated with the
incidence and loss of the outcomes assessed at follow-up.
Discussion
The incidence of sensitization, symptoms, bronchial hyperresponsiveness and probable OA
were lower while at work by comparison with the apprenticeship period. Among subjects no
longer exposed, a very high proportion experienced loss of features they had acquired during
their apprenticeship.
Genome 32


References
B Bernstein IL, Chan-Yeung M, Malo JL, Berstein DI. Asthma in the workplace. Francis & Taylor 2006;3rd ed.
New York, NY.
Zotti R De, Bovenzi M. Prospective study of work related respiratory symptoms in trainee bakers. (2000) Occup
Environ Med 57:58-61.
Walusiak J, Hanke W, Gorski P, Palczynski C. (2004) Respiratory allergy in apprentice bakers: do occupational
allergies follow the allergic march? Allergy;59:442-450
Walusiak J, Hanke W, Gorski P, Palczynski C. (2004) Respiratory allergy in apprentice bakers: do occupational
allergies follow the allergic march? Allergy;59:442-450.
Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Infante-Rivard C, Malo J-L. (2000) Incidence and determinants of IgE-mediated
sensitization in apprentices: a prospective study. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 162:1222-1228.
Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Infante-Rivard C, Malo JL. (2001) Natural history of sensitization, symptoms and diseases
in apprentices exposed to laboratory animals. Eur Respir J 17:904-908.
El-Zein M, Malo JL, Infante-Rivard C, Gautrin D. (2003) Incidence of probable occupational asthma and of
changes in airway calibre and responsiveness in apprentice welders. Eur Respir J 22:513-518.
Gautrin D, Infante-Rivard C, Dao TV, Magnan-Larose M, Desjardins D, Malo JL. (1997) Specific IgE-dependent
sensitization, atopy and bronchial hyperresponsiveness in apprentices starting exposure to protein-derived
agents. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 155:1841-1847.
Gautrin D, Infante-Rivard C, Ghezzo H, Malo JL. (2001) Incidence and host determinants of probable
occupational asthma in apprentices exposed to laboratory animals. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 163:899-904.
Archambault S, Malo JL, Infante-Rivard C, Ghezzo H, Gautrin D. (2001) Incidence of sensitization, symptoms
and probable occupational rhinoconjunctivitis and asthma in apprentices starting exposure to latex. J Allergy
Clin Immunol 107:921-923.
Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Infante-Rivard C, Malo JL. (2002) Incidence and host determinants of work-related
rhinoconjunctivitis in apprentice pastry-makers. Allergy 57:913-918.
Rodier F, Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Malo JL. (2003) Incidence of occupational rhinoconjunctivitis and risk factors in
animal-health apprentices. J Allergy & Clin Immunol 112:1105-1111.
Burney PGJ, Laitinen LA, Perdrizet S, Huckauf H, Tattersfield AE, et al. (1989) Validity and repeatability of the
IUATLD (1984) bronchial symptoms questionnaire: an international comparison. Eur Respir J 2:940-5.
Troyanov S, Malo JL, Cartier A, Gautrin D. (2000) Frequency and determinants of exaggerated
bronchoconstriction during shortened methacholine challenge tests in epidemiological and clinical set-ups. Eur
Respir J 16:9-14.
American Thoracic Society. Standardization of spirometry. (1995) Am J Respir Crit Care Med 152:1107-1136.
Dehaut P, Rachiele A, Martin RR, Malo JL. (1983) Histamine dose-response curves in asthma: reproducibility and
sensitivity of different indices to assess response. Thorax 38:516-22.
sensitivity of different indices to assess response. Thorax 38:516-22.
Jeal H, Draper A, Harris J, Taylor A Newman, Cullinan P, et al. (2006) Modified Th2 Responses at High-Dose
Exposures to Allergen: Using an Occupational Model. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 174: 21-25.
Becklake MR, Chan-Yeung M, Malo JL. Epidemiological Approaches in Occupational Asthma. In: Asthma in the
Workplace, 3rd edition. Bernstein IL, Chan-Yeung M, Malo JL, Bernstein DI, eds. Taylor & Francis, New
York, NY 2006:37-85.
Lemière C, Cartier A, Malo JL, Lehrer SB. (2000) Persistent specific bronchial reactivity to occupational agents
in workers with normal nonspecific bronchial reactivity. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 162:976-980.
Malo JL, Cartier A, Ghezzo H, Lafrance M, Mccants M, Lehrer SB. (1988) Patterns of improvement of
spirometry, bronchial hyperresponsiveness, and specific IgE antibody levels after cessation of exposure in
occupational asthma caused by snow-crab processing. Am Rev Respir Dis 138:807-12.
Venables KM, Topping MD, Nunn AJ, Howe W, Newman-Taylor AJ. (1987) Immunologic and functional
consequences of chemical (tetrachlorophthalic anhydride)-induced asthma after four years of avoidance of
exposure. J Allergy Clin Immunol 80:212-8.
Siracusa A, Desrosiers M, Marabini A. (2000) Epidemiology of occupational rhinitis: prevalence, aetiology and
determinants. Clin Exp Allergy 30:1519-1534.
Gautrin D, Desrosiers M, Castano R. (2006) Occupational rhinitis. Curr Opin Allergy Clin Immunol 6:677-684.
Orbon KH, vanderGulden JWJ, Schermer TRJ, vandenNieuwenhof L, Boot CRL, vandenHoogen H, et al.
(2006) Vocational and working career of asthmatic adolescents is only slightly affected. Respir Med 100:1163-
1173.
Bernstein DI, Campo P, Baur X. Clinical Assessment and Management of Occupational Asthma. In: Asthma in the
workplace, 3rd ed. Bernstein IL, Chan-Yeung M, Malo JL, Bernstein DI., eds. Taylor & Francis, New York
2006:161-178.
Genome 33

Nursing student's and nurse educator’s perceptions and attitudes

towards bioscience in an Indonesian bachelor of nursing program
Staff : H. Pujasari¹*, R. Faulkne², and Dyah Juliastuti
Sponsor : Australian Development Scholarship, 2006
Email contact : pujasari@ui.ac.id; rfaulkner@unimelb.edu.au
Disseminated at : Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia 2008
¹Basic Science and Fundamental of Nursing Group, Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia, Indonesia
²School of Nursing, Faculty of Medicine, Dentistry, and Health Sciences, University of Melbourne
* Coresponding author
Introduction
Bioscience has been defined by Prowse and Lyne (2000) as an integration of
anatomy, physiology, microbiology and pharmacology. Bioscience including all these
elements is regarded as providing a foundation for nursing professional science
(Brown & Seddon, 1996; Clarke, 1995). According to Prowse and Heath (2005) and
Prowse and Lyne (2000), nurses who have a sound knowledge of bioscience perform
better in the clinical setting and achieve higher quality of care and increase patients'
satisfaction. However, there is a gap between theory and nursing practice (Corlett,
2000) with many nursing students finding difficulty in learning bioscience in their
nursing program (Gresty & Cotton, 2003; McKee, 2002) and a lack of confidence in
applying bioscience in nursing practice (Clancy, McVicar, & Bird, 2000).
The Faculty of Nursing in the Universitas Indonesia was established in 1985. There
have been many changes in the teaching and learning of bioscience. However, no
study aimed at evaluating the on-going curriculum, especially in bioscience, has been
conducted. Conducting this study would be expected to result in many beneficial
outcomes. The study would provide a clear description of nursing students’ and nurse
educators’ perceptions and attitudes towards bioscience which have not been explored
in any previous Indonesian study. The study findings would enable the curriculum to
be developed in ways that would improve the quality of teaching and learning in
nursing education; thus resulting in better qualified graduates.
Methodology
This study was a descriptive survey using a self-administrated questionnaire. A
validated questionnaire developed previously for a similar project by Friedel and
Treagust (2005) was utilized. Participants were sourced from a Faculty of Nursing in
a public university in Jakarta, Indonesia. The participants were second and third year
undergraduate students and nurse educators who were not involved in the teaching of
bioscience subjects. Data collected was analyzed using both descriptive and
inferential statistics. Frequencies were used to describe the participants’
characteristics and frequency and descriptive statistics, paired sample t-tests and
independent sample t-tests were used. The 0.05 level of significance was used to
indicate that a difference between means was statistically significant. Ethic approval
for this research was given before the study was undertaken.
Finding
A total of 221 eligible potential participants, 183 nursing students and 38 nurse
educators, were invited to attend meetings between the co-researcher and potential
Genome 34


participants. The response rate for the nursing students was 81. 3% and for the nurse
educators it was 94.7%.
In terms of the mean attitude scores for nursing students, they had better attitudes to
bioscience in nursing practice scores (mean score=4.26) than to science at school
scores (mean score=3.91) and to bioscience in nursing education scores (mean
score=3.95).In terms of the scores for attitudes of nurse educators, it was surprising
that their attitudes towards bioscience in nursing education (mean score=3.66) and
attitudes towards bioscience in nursing practice (mean score=3.78) were less positive
than their attitudes towards science at school (mean score=3.86).The independent
sample t-test comparing the two mean scores indicated that the nursing students’ and
the nurse educators’ attitudes were statistically different only for their attitudes
towards bioscience in nursing practice (p <0.05).
Both nursing students and nurse educators were asked to respond to similar statements
about bioscience and its application in nursing practice. More of the nursing students
(94.8%) than the nurse educators (75.0%) agreed with this statement. When compared
with the nursing students, a higher percentage of the nurse educators (36.1%) strongly
agreed or agreed that their science background was not good enough for the
bioscience study they had to do, 23.7% of the nursing students either strongly agreed
or agreed with this statement. Likewise, the percentage of the nursing students who
strongly disagreed or disagreed with this statement was higher (46.7%) than the
percentage of the nurse educators (36.2%).
Discussion
In general, both nursing students and nurse educators were found to hold positive
attitudes towards science at school, in nursing education and in nursing practice.
Although the nursing students had very positive attitudes towards bioscience in
nursing practice, their attitudes towards bioscience in nursing education and at schools
were less positive. This implies that although these students were relatively new to
nursing concepts and nursing practice, they were aware that applying bioscience in
their future nursing practice would be valuable. Although no students in this study
were reported as being over 25 year old while in the previous study by Friedel and
Treagust (2005) 48% of the students were over 30 year old, this study finding is
consistent with the results of a study by Friedel and Treagust (2005) and supports the
view that students accept that the study of bioscience is useful and will have a positive
impact on their study in the later years of their course as well as on their ability to
apply bioscience in their nursing practice.
As in a previous study conducted by Clancy et al. (2000), this study reported that both
students and nurse educators believed that bioscience is very important for nursing
practice. However the proportion of the nursing students who agreed that bioscience
knowledge forms the basis of nursing was greater than the proportion of the nurse
educators who agreed with this statement. Previous studies have reported that nursing
students and nurse teachers have different perceptions on the value of bioscience and
other subjects (Jordan, et al., 1999; Courtenay, 1999). In the Courtenay (1999) study,
nursing students had a more positive value of bioscience subjects than did the nurse
educators. In the present study, the percentage of the nursing students who disagreed
that there was too much classroom time allocated to bioscience subjects in the nursing
course was higher than that of the nurse educators. This finding appears to be
consistent with the finding of a study by Jordan, et al. (1999) that lecturers were
satisfied with time allocated to teaching bioscience. These lecturers perceived that
Genome 35

bioscience subjects were less important than other subjects such as social policy,
psychology, ethics and law, research and critical thinking
Conclusion
It was evident that nursing students had more positive attitudes to bioscience in
nursing practice than to bioscience in nursing education and to science at school. The
nursing students’ were found to have better attitudes to bioscience in nursing practice
when compared with those of the nurse educators. The nursing students were not
confident in explaining a number of topics within the bioscience. Another important
finding was that the majority of both nursing students and nurse educators perceived
that bioscience knowledge was essential to form the foundation of nursing practice. In
order to improve the quality of teaching and learning bioscience in the faculty,
recommendations have been made such as to increase the relevancy of bioscience
subject contents to nursing practice, to increase the time allocated for bioscience and
to provide bioscience integrated with nursing subjects. A further study using a
combined of quantitative and qualitative methods should be undertaken to explore in-
depth perceptions of students, nurse educators, graduates and employers. A more
extensive study involving more than one nursing program in Indonesia would be
needed to generate more generalizable findings.
Acknowledgment
We are indebted to June M. Friedel and David F. Treagust for the permission of
using their questionnaire.
Keywords
Attitude, biomedical sciences, bioscience, Indonesia, nursing, perception, student.
References
Brown, C., & Seddon, J. (1996). The social body and the biomechanical body: can they coexist in nurse
education? Journal of Advanced Nursing, 23, 651-656.
Clancy, J., McVicar, A., & Bird, D. (2000). Getting it right? An exploration of issues relating to the biological
sciences in nurse education and nursing practice. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 32(6), 1522-1532.
Corlett, J. (2000). The perceptions of nurse teachers, student nurses and preceptors of the theory-practice gap in
nurse education. Nurse Education Today, 20, 499–505.
Courtenay, M. (1991). A study of teaching and learning of the biological sciences in nurse education. Journal of
Advanced Nursing, 16, 1110-1116.
Friedel, J. M., & Treagust, D. F. (2005). Learning bioscience in nursing education: Perceptions of the intended and
the prescribed curriculum. Learning in Health and Social Care, 4(4), 203-216.
Gresty, K. A., & Cotton, D. R. E. (2003). Supporting biosciences in the nursing curriculum: Development and
evaluation of an online resource. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 44(4), 339–349.
Jordan, S., Davies, S., & Green, B. (1999). The biosciences in pre-registration nursing curriculum: Staff and
students' perceptions of difficulties and relevance. Nurse Education Today, 19, 215-226.
McVicar, A., & Clancy, J. ( 2001). The bioscience and fitness for practice: A time for review. British Journal of
Nursing, 10(21), 1415-1420.
Prowse, M. A., & Heath, V. (2005). Working collaboratively in health care contexts: the influence of bioscientific
knowledge on patient outcomes. Nurse Education Today, 25, 132–139.
Prowse, M. A., & Lyne, P. A. (2000). Revealing the contribution of bioscience-based nursing knowledge to
clinically effective patient care. Clinical Effectiveness in Nursing, 4, 67–74.
Genome 36


Protein profiles of S. mutans as an antigen to induce IgY anti S.
mutans
Staff : Bachtiar E.W.1*, B.M. Bachtiar1, R. Soejoedono2, and I.W.T.
Wibawan2
Student : S. Chismirina
Sponsor : RUUI 2006
Email Contact : boy_mb@ui.ac.id
1
Department of Oral Biology, Faculty of Dentistry Universitas, Universitas Indonesia Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Faculty of Veterinary, Bogor Agricultur Institute, (IPB) Bogor Indonesia
Introduction
Primary causatif agent of caries are Streptococcus mutans (S. mutans) serotype c, e, f and
Streptococcus sobrinus (S. sobrinus) serotype d. The early phase of dental caries development
is adhesion of organism to saliva protein (pellicle) on tooth surface, followed by colonization
of bacteria forming a membrane that mantion dental biofilm (dental plaque). Adhesion and
colonization process of bacteria are doing by antigen I/II, glucocyltransferase (Gtf) and
glucan binding protein (Gbp) that act as virulen factors. Many researchs are doing to prevent
caries for example using chicken yolk immunoglobuline (Ig Y). Veterinay Faculty of Institute
Pertanian of Bogor (IPB) Institute have success doing IgY purification from fresh chicken
yolk that made and produce as IgY water soluble fraction (WSF) freeze dry yolk anti S.
mutans. The aim of this research is identify protein profil of S. mutans from Veterinary
Faculty of IPB that use to produce yolk immunoglobuline (Ig Y).
Method
Spectrofotometer with Bradford method is using for distance S. mutans and S. sobrinus
antigen protein value. SDS-PAGE using for identify protein profil.
Results
S. mutans, S. sobrinus and S. mutans from Veterinay Faculty of IPB have the same profile
protein, bands with weight 190 kDa(antigen I/II), 140 kDa (Gtf) and 60 kDa (Gbp). There are
62-98 kDa, 28-38 kDa and 17-28 kDa bands that found from S. mutans from Veterinay
Faculty of IPB.
Conclusion
IgY anti S.mutans from Veterinay Faculty of IPB has able to inhibit S. mutans virulence
factors.
References
Wen B, Zhou RJ, Yang J, Tang Z, Zhou Z. [The inhibitory effect of anti-streptococcus mutans immunoglobulin of
yolk on glucan synthesis of Streptococcus mutans] Shanghai Kou Qiang Yi Xue. 2002 Jun;11(2):141-2.
Rawendra R. Imunoglobulin Y (IgY) Water Soluble Fraction (WSF) Kuning Telur Kering Beku anti
ENTEROPATHOGENIC Escherichia coli (EPEC). Disertasi untuk memperoleh gelar Doktor pada Program
Studi Sains Veteriner Sekolah Pascasarjana Institut Pertanian Bogor 2005.
Smith DJ. Caries Vaccines for the Twenty-First Century. J Dent Educat 2003;67(10): 1130-1138.
Smith DJ. Dental Caries Vaccines: Prospects and Concerns.J Crit Rev Oral Biol Med 2002;13(4):335-349.
Glucan Binding Protein B Can Confer Protection against Experimental Dental Caries. J Infect Immun
2001;69(5):3135-3142.
Genome 37

Qualitative work overload and other risk factors related to

hypertension risk among Indonesian Police Mobile Brigade (Brimob)
Staff : B. Basuki1*, G. Nainggolan2
Student : R.N. Kanam
Sponsor : --
Email Contact : bbasuki@bit.net.id
Disseminated at: R.N. Kanam, B. Basuki and G. Nainggolan (2008) Qualitative work
overload and other risk factors related to hypertension risk among
Indonesian Police Mobile Brigade (Brimob). Med J Indones 17
(3),188-196
1
Department of Community Medicine, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia
2
Department of Internal Medicine, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia
Introduction
The police force, specifically the members of the Indonesian Police Force (Kepolisian
Republik Indonesia or POLRI), are officers concerned mainly with law and order, keeping the
peace in the community, enforcing the law, detect and prevent crime.(Suparlan, 2002) One of
the units in the POLRI is the Mobile Brigade (Brimob). The Brimob is present in every high
intensity crisis, mass riots, or disasters that need emergency aid, which can occur in remote
inaccessible places. It means working in a stressful environment.
Members of the Brimob may suffer hypertension which is related to work stressors and other
risk factors. In the United States reported that when compared to men of the same age and
income bracket in the general population, the police officers had a higher prevalance of
hypertension (Franke, 2002).
Qualitative overload is one of the work-related stressors that occurs when there is a
discrepancy between technical capability and knowledge compared to the demands of the
work at hand. (Perry, 2002). This study aimed to identify the relationship between work
stressors and other hypertensive risk factors.
Methods
The subjects for this cross-sectional study were Brimob members undergoing their periodic
medical check-up during the period of July until October 2007. They were chosen by
consecutive sampling and must have had a tour of duty in a conflict area. The study was
carried out at one of the Brimob headquarters.
Data on age, marital status, level of education, blood pressure, body height and weight, work
unit, length of employment, rank, post tour of duty, exercise, smoking, coffee, diabetes
mellitus, family history of hypertension were recorded on a form especially constructed for
this study.
A subject was hypertensive if systolic blood pressure (SBP) was 140 mmHg or higher, or
diastolic (DBD) 90 mmHg or higher, or taking antihypertensive drugs. Normal subjects were
those who had SBP less than 120 mmHg and DBP less than 80 mmHg, and have never been
diagnosed with hypertension.
Work stressor was diagnosed using a diagnostic questionnaire, Kuesioner Diagnostik Stress
Kerja (Isfandari, 1992). The subject had to fill his answers on the questionnaire made up of 30
questions on 6 types of work-related stressors. The 6 types of work-related stressors evaluated
were: role ambiguity, role conflict, quantitative overload, qualitative overload, career
development, and personal responsibility. The accumulated score was classified as low if less
than 10, and moderate to high if more than 10.
Genome 38


Relative risk (RR) was used since the prevalence of hypertension among Brimob members
was cmore than 10%, with 95% confidence interval based on the result of Cox regression
analysis with time constant [Barros, 2003). STATA version 9 was used for statistical analysis.
Ethical approval was obtained from the Research Ethical Commission of Faculty of Medicine
Universitas Indonesia. The study was undertaken after approval was granted by the Chief of
the Brimob.
Results
There were 340 members of the Brimob aged 21 to 51 years eligible for this study, but 4
subjects did not fill in the questionnaire, leaving 336 as subjects. The number of subjects
included in the analysis was 190, which consisted of 111 subjects with normal blood pressure
and 79 subjects with hypertension (stages 1 & 2). None of the subjects were on
antihypertensive.
The subjects with hypertension and normal blood pressure were equally distributed in terms
of age, marital status, level of education, rank, length of employment, terms of exercise,
smoking, coffee, history of diabetes mellitus, and family history of hypertension, work-related
stress such as role ambiguity, role conflict, quantitative work overload, career development,
and personal responsibility.
When compared to the subject that was more than 4 weeks post tour of duty, the subject that
have only been home 1 day – 1 week more likely had a higher hypertension, and the subject
that have been home 1 week – 1 month less likely had hypertension. In term of work units,
the 2/Pelopor unit and the 3/Pelopor unit have a lower risk of being hypertensive.
Hypertension was found to be related to obesity and qualitative work overload. Medium to
high level qualitative work overload had a two-fold risk for hypertension [adjusted relative
risk (RRa) = 2.00; 95% confidence interval (CI) = 0.97-4.14; p = 0.060]. Overweight subjects
had 48% increased risk to hypertension (RRa = 1.48; 95% CI = 0.98-2.22; P = 0.059). Obese
subjects had a two-fold risk of being hypertensive (RRa = 2.21; 95% CI = 1.51 - 3.14).
Discussion
This study has several limitations. Firstly, the sample obtained did not represent the entire
Brimob in Indonesia. The study was directed only at a segment of the Brimob, those
undertaking their periodic medical check-up. Secondly, hypertension this study was made
based on cross-sectional data which might not confirm to standards in the clinic, and the
possibility of secondary hypertension was not explored.
This study reveals 79 (23.5%) Brimob officers had hypertension. This figure is higher than in
Indonesian Air Force helicopter air crew which noted 11.5% of them had hypertension
(Hanum, 2006). Most likely, Indonesian Air Force helicopter air crew were less likely
younger ages.
Our study revealed qualitative overload work stress increased the risk of hypertension among
members of Brimob. This coincides with finding of other studies (Krisnawati, 2006), and in
another study (Tsutsumi, 2001).
Compared to the study result in office workers in Jakarta, where moderate to high qualitative
work overload had a 7-fold increase on the risk of hypertension (Krisnawati, 2006), the
members of Brimob seems to have a better coping mechanism. The risk of hypertension was
only 2-fold in moderate to high qualitative overload in the Brimob. In addition, other studies
on various professions in Japan and on law enforcement officers, including policemen, in the
United States verify the relationship between work-related stress and the increased prevalence
of hypertension (Frankem,. 2002), and another study (Tsutsumi, 2001).
This study found that the risk of hypertension was higher among the overweight or obese
compare to normal body weight subjects. This coincides with finding of other study, where
the risk of hypertension increases with excess weight and obesity, especially in the young
adult population.(Lucini, 2007).
Other work-related stressors, such as role ambiguity, role conflict, career development, and
personal responsibility seemed to have no association with the risk of hypertension in Brimob
Genome 39

subjects. These might be due to career development is well-regulated with periodic

advancement in rank, and the sample size of subjects was not sufficient to identify these
increase risks.
Conclusion
Qualitative work stress and overweight and obesity increased the risk of hypertension among
members of Brimob. Therefore, qualitative work overload management and control of body
weight should be included in programs for maintaining health of Brimob members.
Acknowledgment
The authors wish to thank all subjects who cooperatively participated in this study. We also
would like to express our gratitude to Dr. Glenn Kaunang who facilitated this study.
Keywords
Hypertension, qualitative work overload, police.
References
Barros, AJD, and Hirakata, V. N. (2003). Alternative for logistic regression in cross-sectional studies: an empirical
comparison of models that directly estimates the prevalence ratio. BMC Medical Research Methodology 3 (21).
Full-text [online]. PubMedCentral [Accessed 9th February 2006].
Franke W. D, Ramey S. L, et al. (2002) Relationship between cardiovascular disease morbidity, risk factors, and
stress in a law enforcement cohort. J Occup Environ Med, 44, 1182-89.
Hanum K, Haksono H, et al (2006) Duration of works, flight hours, and blood pressure related to noise-induced
hearing loss among Indonesian Air Force helicopter pilots. Med J Indones, 15(3), 185-90.
Isfandari S. Penelitian instrumen survei diagnosa stress dan stress strain. Jakarta: Badan Penelitian dan
Pengembangan Departemen Kesehatan RI; 1992.
Krisnawati F, Basuki B, et al. (2006). Work stressors and other risk factors related to the risk of hypertension
among selected employees in Jakarta. Med J Indones, 15, 177-84.
Perry, W. C. B, Campbell, K. L, et al (2002). The association between hypertension and other cardiovaskular risk
faktor in young adult African Americans. J Clin hypertens, 4, 17-22.
Suparlan P. Polisi dan fungsinya dalam masyarakat. In: Suparlan P, editor. Bunga rampai ilmu kepolisian
Indonesia. Jakarta: Yayasan Pengembangan Kajian Ilmu Kepolisian; 2004.
Tsutsumi A, Kayaba K, er al. (2001). Association between work strain and prevalence of hypertension: a cross
sectional analysis in Japanese working population with a wide range of occupation: the Jichi Medical School
cohort study. J Occup Environ Med, 58, 367-73.
Genome 40


Risks for the development of outcomes related to occupational
allergies: An application of the asthma-specific job exposure matrix
compared to self reports and investigator-scores on job-training
related exposure
Staff : E. Suarthana1-3, D. Heederik2, H. Ghezzo1, J-L. Malo1, S.M.
Kennedy4, D. Gautrin1*
Student :-
the Medical Research Council of Canada (Grant MT-12256), and
the Institut de recherche Robert-Sauvé en santé et en sécurité du
travail (Grant 099-164). One author (ES) was a research fellow with
a grant from the Center for Asthma in the Workplace-Canadian
Institutes of Health Research
Email Contact : d.gautrin@umontreal.ca, e_suarthana@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Occup. Environ. Med. 2009;66;256-263
1
Department of Chest Medicine, Hopital du Sacre-Coeur de Montreal, 5400 West Gouin Blvd, Montreal, Canada
H4J 1C5
2
IRAS (Institute for Risk Assessment Sciences), Environmental Epidemiology Division, Utrecht University.
Utrecht, The Netherlands
3
Community Medicine Department, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia. Jl. Pegangsaan Timur 16, 10320,
Jakarta Pusat, Indonesia
4
School of Environmental Health, University of British Columbia, 2206 East Mall, Vancouver, BC, Canada V6T
1Z3
Introduction
Risks for development of occupational sensitization, bronchial hyperresponsiveness,
rhinoconjunctival and chest symptoms at work associated with continued exposure to high-
molecular weight (HMW) allergens were estimated with three exposure assessment methods.
Methods
A Cox regression analysis with adjustment for atopy and smoking habit was done in 408
apprentices in animal health technology, pastry-making, and dental hygiene technology with
an 8-year follow-up after training. The risk of continued exposure after training, estimated by
the asthma-specific job exposure matrix (JEM), was compared to self reports and
investigator-scores on job-training related exposure. Associations between outcomes and
work duration in job(s) related to training were also evaluated.
Results
Exposure to animal-derived HMW allergens, subsequent to the apprenticeship period, as
estimated by the JEM, was associated with a significantly increased risk for occupational
sensitization (hazard ratio (HR) 6.4; 95% CI 2.3 to 18.2) and rhinoconjunctival symptoms at
work (HR 2.6; 95% CI 1.1 to 6.2). Exposure to LMW agents significantly increased the risk
of developing bronchial hyperresponsiveness (HR 2.3; 95% CI 1.1 to 5.4). Exposure
verification appeared to be important to optimize the sensitivity and the specificity, as well as
hazard ratios produced by the JEM. Self reports and investigator-scores also indicated that
further exposure to HMW allergens increased the risk of developing occupational allergies.
The agreement between self reports, investigator-scores, and the JEM were moderate to good.
There was no significant association between respiratory outcomes and work duration in jobs
related to training.
Genome 41

Discussion
The asthma-specific JEM could estimate the risk of various outcomes of occupational
allergies associated with exposure to HMW and LMW allergens, but it is relatively labour-
intensive. Exposure verification is an important integrated step in the JEM that optimized the
performance of the matrix.
Keywords
Bronchial hyperreactivity, high molecular weight allergens, job exposure matrix,
occupational diseases, occupational exposure.
References
Nicholson PJ, Cullinan P, Taylor AJ, Burge PS, Boyle C. (2005) Evidence based guidelines for the prevention,
identification, and management of occupational asthma. Occup Environ Med 62(5):290-9.
Heederik D, Venables KM, Malmberg P, Hollander A, Karlsson AS, Renstrom A, et al. (1999) Exposure-response
relationships for work-related sensitization in workers exposed to rat urinary allergens: results from a pooled
study. J Allergy Clin Immunol 103(4):678-84.
Nieuwenhuijsen MJ, Putcha V, Gordon S, Heederik D, Venables KM, Cullinan P, et al. (2003) Exposure-response
relations among laboratory animal workers exposed to rats. Occup Environ Med 60(2):104-108.
Tielemans E, Heederik D, Burdorf A, Vermeulen R, Veulemans H, Kromhout H, et al. (1999) Assessment of
occupational exposures in a general population: comparison of different methods. Occup Environ Med
56(3):145-151.
Benke G, Sim M, Fritschi L, Aldred G, Forbes A, Kauppinen T. (2001) Comparison of occupational exposure
using three different methods: hygiene panel, job exposure matrix (JEM), and self reports. Appl Occup Environ
Hyg 16(1):84-91.
Kennedy SM, Le Moual N, Choudat D, Kauffmann F. (2000) Development of an asthma specific job exposure
matrix and its application in the epidemiological study of genetics and environment in asthma (EGEA). Occup
Environ Med 57(9):635-41.
McGuire V, Nelson LM, Koepsell TD, Checkoway H, Longstreth WT, Jr. (1998) Assessment of occupational
exposures in community-based case-control studies. Annu Rev Public Health 19:35-53.
de Vocht F, Zock JP, Kromhout H, Sunyer J, Anto JM, Burney P, et al. (2005) Comparison of self-reported
occupational exposure with a job exposure matrix in an international community-based study on asthma. Am J
Ind Med 47(5):434-42.
Zock JP, Cavalle N, Kromhout H, Kennedy SM, Sunyer J, Jaen A, et al. (2004) Evaluation of specific occupational
asthma risks in a community-based study with special reference to single and multiple exposures. J Expo Anal
Environ Epidemiol 14(5):397-403.
Radon K, Gerhardinger U, Schulze A, Zock JP, Norback D, Toren K, et al. (2008) Occupation and adult onset of
rhinitis in the general population. Occup Environ Med 65(1):38-43.
Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Infante-Rivard C, Malo J-L. (2000) Incidence and Determinants of IgE-mediated
Sensitization in Apprentices . A Prospective Study. Am. J. Respir. Crit. Care Med.162(4):1222-1228.
Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Infante-Rivard C, Magnan M, L'Archeveque J, Suarthana E, et al. (2008) Long-term
Outcomes in a Prospective Cohort of Apprentices Exposed to High-Molecular-Weight Agents. Am. J. Respir.
Crit. Care Med. 177:871-879.
Gautrin D, Infante-Rivard C, Dao T, Magnan-Larose M, Desjardins D, Malo J. (1997) Specific IgE-dependent
sensitization, atopy, and bronchial hyperresponsiveness in apprentices starting exposure to protein-derived
agents. Am. J. Respir. Crit. Care Med.155(6):1841-1847.
Burney PG, Laitinen LA, Perdrizet S, Huckauf H, Tattersfield AE, Chinn S, et al. (1989) Validity and repeatability
of the IUATLD (1984) Bronchial Symptoms Questionnaire: an international comparison. Eur Respir J
2(10):940-5.
Sterk PJ, Fabbri LM, Quanjer PH, Cockcroft DW, O'Byrne PM, Anderson SD, et al. (1993) Airway
responsiveness. Standardized challenge testing with pharmacological, physical and sensitizing stimuli in
adults. Report Working Party Standardization of Lung Function Tests, European Community for Steel and
Coal. Official Statement of the European Respiratory Society. Eur Respir J Suppl 16:53-83.
Respir J 16(1):9-14.
sensitivity of different indices to assess response. Thorax 38(7):516-22.
ILO. (1991) International Standard Classification of Occupations: ISCO 88. Geneva: ILO.
Cox D. (1972) Regression models and life tables. JR Stat Soc B 34:187–220.
Kruize H, Post W, Heederik D, Martens B, Hollander A, van der Beek E. (1997) Respiratory allergy in laboratory
animal workers: a retrospective cohort study using pre-employment screening data. Occup Environ Med
54(11):830-5.
Malo JL, Lemiere C, Gautrin D, Labrecque M. (2004) Occupational asthma. Curr Opin Pulm Med 10(1):57-61.
Genome 42


Hytonen M, Kanerva L, Malmberg H, Martikainen R, Mutanen P, Toikkanen J. (1997) The risk of occupational
rhinitis. Int Arch Occup Environ Health 69(6):487-90.
Gautrin D, Desrosiers M, Castano R. Occupational rhinitis. (2006) Curr Opin Allergy Clin Immunol 6(2):77-84.
Maestrelli P, Fabbri LM, Mapp CE. Pathophysiology. (2006) In: Bernstein I, Chan-Yeung M, Malo J-L, Bernstein
D, editors. Asthma in the Workplace. 3 ed. New York: Taylor & Francis 109-140.
Tielemans E, Burdorf A, te Velde ER, Weber RF, van Kooij RJ, Veulemans H, et al. (1999) Occupationally related
exposures and reduced semen quality: a case-control study. Fertil Steril 71(4):690-6.
Cartier A, L'Archeveque J, Malo JL. (1986) Exposure to a sensitizing occupational agent can cause a long-lasting
increase in bronchial responsiveness to histamine in the absence of significant changes in airway caliber. J
Allergy Clin Immunol 78(6):1185-9.
Malo JL, Cartier A, Lemiere C, Desjardins A, Labrecque M, L'Archeveque J, et al. (2004) Exaggerated
bronchoconstriction due to inhalation challenges with occupational agents. Eur Respir J 23(2):300-3.
Kogevinas M, Anto JM, Sunyer J, Tobias A, Kromhout H, Burney P. (1999) Occupational asthma in Europe and
other industrialised areas: a population-based study. European Community Respiratory Health Survey Study
Group. Lancet 353(9166):1750-4.
Tarlo SM, Liss GM. (2005) Prevention of occupational asthma--practical implications for occupational physicians.
Occup Med (Lond) 55(8):588-94.

Genome 43

Salivary immunoglobulin a response to Streptococcus mutans

serotype C is not associated with primary dentition caries among
Indonesian preschoolers
Staff : D.H.S. Dillon1,2*, E.W. Basuki3, P.D. Sahanggamu4
Sponsor : SEAMEO-TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia
Email Contact : drupadi.dillon@ui.ac.id; ddillon@seameo-rccn.org
Disseminated at : Joint International Tropical Medicine Meeting, Bangkok 2008.
1
SEAMEO-TROPMED RCCN, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Department of Nutrition, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
3
4
SEAMEO-TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Streptococcus mutans is the major pathogenic bacteria involved in dental caries process.
Previous studies had identified salivary Immunoglobulin A antibodies against five different
serotypes of Streptococcus mutans, and serotype C was dominantly isolated from dental
plaque. There have been conflicting results on the association between salivary IgA response
to Streptococcus mutans and caries status.
Objective
This cross-sectional study was aimed to investigate the association between salivary IgA
response to Streptococcus mutans serotype C and primary dentition caries among Indonesian
preschoolers.

This cross-sectional study was conducted in Ciputat Sub-district West Java. We randomly
selected 313 out of 1786 healthy preschoolers belonged to middle-low income families,
enrolled in 24 kindergartens. General characteristics and caries risk behaviour were assessed.
Salivary IgA response to Streptococcus mutans serotype C using Eliisa method, primary
dentition caries/Deft-t score, plaque index and saliva flow rate were determined.
Def-t score of 0 (zero) means caries free. Plaque index determines oral hygiene status; high
plaque index means bad oral hygiene. Saliva flow rate of ≤ 0.2 ml/minute means low flow
rate. Caries risk behaviour was determined by interviewing the preschooler’s caretaker using
caries risk assessment tool adopted from American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry.

Age of the preschoolers ranged 27.3-82.3 months, with similar proportion of boys and girls.
Prevalence of high caries risk behaviour, high plaque index, high Def-T score and low saliva
flow rate was 48%, 18%, 64%, and 4.5% respectively.
300
200
180
250
160
Preschoolers (n)
140 200
od
120
-3
150
x 10
100
80
100
60
40 50
20
0
0
< 48 m onths 48 to < 60 m onths ≥ 60 m onths
< 48 m onths 48 to < 60 m onths ≥ 60 m onths
Age group Age group

Figure 2. Median value of Salivary IgA response to
Figure 1. Distribution of preschoolers by age group
S.mutans serotype c by age group
Genome 44


Figure 1 shows that the preschoolers were mostly 60 months of age or older. Median value of
Streptococcus mutans serotype C was 0.227 od, with a tendency of higher median values
among younger preschoolers (Figure 2). Figure 3 shows a tendency of higher proportion of
primary dentition caries among older preschoolers. Median value of Def-t score was
significantly higher in children aged ≥ 60 months compared to <60 months (P=0.013).
Table 1 shows highly association between Def-t score and plaque index, a confirmation of the
theory that plaque is a prerequisite for dental caries, and therefore, primary dentition caries
may be reduced by having good oral hygiene. The positive correlation between behaviour risk
factor and plaque index and Def-t score indicates the importance of caries risk assessment for
individual as well as behaviour shifting, may be useful to prevent dental caries development
at earlier stage of life.
Table 1. Associations amongst Def-t score, plaque index, caries risk behaviour and saliva flow rate of the
preschoolers
Caries risk Plaque Saliva flow
behavior index rate
Def-t score r = 0.48* r = 0.71* r = 0.20*
(P<0.001) (P<0.001) (P<0.001)
Plaque r = 0.46* - NS
index (P<0.001)
*Spearman correlation coefficient
having caries
caries free
140
120
Preschoolers (n)
100
80
60
40
20
0
< 48 months 48 to < 60 months ≥ 60 months
Age group
Figure 3. Distribution of preschoolers with primary
dentition caries by age group
A correlation between saliva flow rate and Def-t score was also observed: preschoolers with
low saliva flow rate had a reduced oral clearance of plaque acids and food retention due to
lower self-cleansing effect that physically clears cariogenic materials from the mouth, less
able to buffer acid formation in the plaque, less contains fluoride to form protective coating
on the teeth.
No association between salivary IgA response to Streptococcus mutans serotype C and
primary dentition caries was observed, which could probably due to a dynamic process of
dental caries development involving demineralization of enamel by the product of bacterial
metabolism, with alternate periods of remineralization. This process requires an interaction of
a susceptible tooth, cariogenic bacteria and fermentable carbohydrate within a period of time.
Another possibility is that serotype C was not the dominant bacteria responsible for primary
dentition caries in this study, as other studies on the serotype C were done in non-Indonesian
of different population.
Conclusion and recommendation

No association between degree of dental caries and salivary IgA antibodies was observed
probably due to nature of cross-sectional method used in this study or else, dominant bacteria
responsible for primary dentition caries among Indonesian preschoolers was not serotype C.
A longitudinal study to observe salivary changes in caries, and further study on Streptococcus
mutans serotype e and f are proposed.
Keywords
Indonesia, primary dentition caries, salivary IgA.
Genome 45

References
Burt B.A., Sowers M.A. (2006) Carbonated soft drinks and dental caries in the primary dentition. J Dent. Res. 85
(3), 262-266.
Dodds M.W.J., Johnson D.A., Yeh C. (2005) Health benefits of saliva: A review. J.Dent. 33, 223-233.
Naspitz G.M., Nagao A.T., Mayer M.P., Carneiro-Sampaio M.M. (1999) Anti-Streptococcus mutans antibodies in
saliva of children with different degrees of dental caries. Pediatric Allergy and Immunology 10, 143-148.
Oho T., Yamashita Y., Shimazaki M., Kusyiyama M., Koga T. (2000) Simple and rapid detection of S.mutans and
S.sobrinus in human saliva by polymerase chain reaction. Oral Microbiol.Immunol. 15, 258-262.
Genome 46


The Dutch diagnostic model for laboratory animal allergens
sensitization was generalizable in Canadian apprentices
Staff : E. Suarthana1-3*, E. Meijer2, D. Heederik2, H. Ghezzo1, J-L. Malo1,
D. Gautrin1*
Student :-
Disseminated at : J Clin Epidemiol 2009; 62: 542-549
1
H4J 1C5
2
3
Introduction
The use of these diagnostic models can increase the efficiency of health surveillance, by
allowing an occupational physician to predict for an individual worker the probability of
being sensitized to LA allergens. On the basis of this prediction, a decision can be made to
conduct additional specific tests to diagnose occupational allergies among workers with a
high probability. The utility of predictive models depends on how well they perform when
applied to a new related population. In general, prediction models show a lower performance
in populations other than where the model was derived. Therefore, we aimed at assessing the
transportability of an earlier obtained diagnostic questionnaire model for sensitization to
laboratory animal allergens derived from LA workers population to the Canadian animal
health apprentices’ setting.
Methods
The model was externally validated in 414 Canadian animal health apprentices. Several
approaches were used: (1) no adjustment; (2) recalibration of the intercept of the model; (3)
re-estimation of the intercept and the regression coefficients of predictors; and (4) model
revision, by excluding the existing predictor(s) and/or including new predictor(s). The
bootstrapping procedure was done following the third and fourth methods. The calibration
was assessed graphically and with the Hosmer-Lemeshow (H-L) test. Discriminative
properties were determined by the area under the receiver operating characteristic curve
(ROC area).
Results
When applied without adjustment, the model’s discriminative ability was adequate (ROC area
was 0.74 vs. the original ROC area of 0.76); the calibration was poor (H-L test p-value
<0.001). The other methods yielded models with good calibration (p-value > 0.10) and
reasonable discrimination (ROC area ranged between 0.73 and 0.75). The refitted and revised
model showed a good internal validity (correction factors from the bootstrapping procedure
were > 0.90).
Genome 47

Discussion
Our analyses suggest that with local adjustment, the diagnostic model is externally valid and
has a reasonable performance in predicting the presence or absence of sensitization to LA
allergens in the Canadian animal health apprentices.
Keywords
Diagnostic model, occupational sensitization, questionnaire, screening, validity.
References
sensitization, atopy, and bronchial hyperresponsiveness in apprentices starting exposure to protein-derived
agents. Am. J. Respir. Crit. Care Med.155(6):1841-1847.
Meijer E, Grobbee DE, Heederik D. (2002) Detection of workers sensitised to high molecular weight allergens: a
diagnostic study in laboratory animal workers. Occup Environ Med 59(3):189-95.
Suarthana E, Vergouwe Y, Nieuwenhuijsen M, Heederik D, Grobbee DE, Meijer E. (2005) Diagnostic model for
sensitization in workers exposed to occupational high molecular weight allergens. Am J Ind Med 48(3):168-
74.
Meijer E, Grobbee DE, Heederik D. (2004) A strategy for health surveillance in laboratory animal workers
exposed to high molecular weight allergens. Occup Environ Med 61(10):831-7.
Bleeker SE, Moll HA, Steyerberg EW, Donders ART, Derksen-Lubsen G, Grobbee DE, et al. (2003) External
validation is necessary in prediction research: A clinical example. J Clin Epidemiol 56:826–832.
Steyerberg EW, Borsboom GJ, van Houwelingen HC, Eijkemans MJ, Habbema JD. (2004) Validation and
updating of predictive logistic regression models: a study on sample size and shrinkage. Stat Med 23(16):2567-
86.
Justice AC, Covinsky KE, Berlin JA. (1999) Assessing the generalizability of prognostic information. Ann Intern
Med 130(6):515-24.
Hollander A, Doekes G, Heederik D. (1996) Cat and dog allergy and total IgE as risk factors of laboratory animal
allergy. J Allergy Clin Immunol 98(3):545-54.
Medical Research Council Committee on the Aetiology of Chronic Bronchitis. Instruction for the use of
questionnaire on respiratory symptoms. Dawlish, UK: Holtman, Ltd; 1966.
2(10):940-5.
Grammer L, Patterson R. Immunologic evaluation of occupational asthma. In: Bernstein IL, Chan-Yeung M, Malo
J, Bernstein DI, editors. Asthma in the Workplace. 2nd ed. New York: Marcel Dekker Inc.; 1999. p. 159-171.
Hosmer D, Lemeshow S. Applied logistic regression. New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc; 1989.
Hanley JA, McNeil BJ. (1982) The meaning and use of the area under a receiver operating characteristic (ROC)
curve. Radiology 143(1):29-36.
Van Houwelingen JC, Le Cessie S. (1990) Predictive value of statistical models. Stat Med Nov 9(11):1303-25.
Harrell FE, Jr., Lee KL, Mark DB. (1996) Multivariable prognostic models: issues in developing models,
evaluating assumptions and adequacy, and measuring and reducing errors. Stat Med 15(4):361-87.
Harrell F. (2002) Design: S functions for biostatistical/epidemiologic modeling, testing, estimation, validation,
graphics, prediction, and typesetting. In: http://hesweb1.med.virginia.edu/biostat/s/Design.html.
Harrell F. (2002) The Hmisc library. In: http://hesweb1.med.virginia.edu/biostat/s/Hmisc.html.
Peduzzi P, Concato J, Kemper E, Holford TR, Feinstein AR. (1996) A simulation study of the number of events
per variable in logistic regression analysis. J Clin Epidemiol 49(12):1373-9.
Gann PH, Hennekens CH, Stampfer MJ. (1995) A prospective evaluation of plasma prostate-specific antigen for
detection of prostatic cancer. Jama 273(4):289-94.
Genome 48


The effect of IgY-Anti S. mutans in rat’s dental biofilm formation
Staff : B.M. Bachtiar1*, Bachtiar E.W.1, Wibawan I.T.2, Soejoedono R.2
Student : Nathania N., Kusno I.
Sponsor : RUUI 2006
Email Contact : boy_mb@ui.ac.id
1
2
Faculty of Veterinary, Bogor Agricultur Institute, (IPB), Bogor, Indonesia
Intruductions
Streptococcus mutans (S mutans) has been strongly implicated as a causative organism of
dental caries. S mutans serotype c is a major etiologic agent of human dental caries. One of
the concept in preventing dental caries is passive immunization with IgY. This antybody can
prevent the attachment between S mutans and tooth surface. That mechanism can inhibit the
adhesion and colonization of S mutans at initial phase so S mutans biofilm formation
decrease. Previously research showed that anti S mutans serotype d IgY can inhibit the
formation of biofilm by S mutans serotype c,e, and f.
Purpose
The purpose of this study was to determine the difference of Streptococcus mutans biofilm
formation with or without anti Streptococcus mutans serotype c immunoglobulin Y from
children dental plaque.
Methods
Subject between the ages 9 to 12 years of age were used in this study. Dental Plaque samples
were collected by rubbing a sterile wooden toothpick on the buccal surface of lower first
molar. The biofilm assay was carried out by using 24-well tissue culture plates. Briefly, S
mutans isolate in trypticase soy broth (TSB) were centrifuged two times, and pelet were
given 40 µg/ml IgY. The plates were kept in incubator for 2 hours. Control groups are without
IgY. Biofilm formed in plates were quantified by measuring the absorbance at optical density
655 nm (OD655).
Results
Biofilm assay demonstrated that plates with IgY, incubated for 2 hours showed significant
decrease (p<0,05) of biofilm formation than plates without IgY.
Conclusion
Anti S mutans serotype c IgY has the potential to inhibit the S mutans biofilm formation from
children dental plaque.
Keywords
Biofilm, IgY, Streptococcus mutans.
References
Glucan Binding Protein B Can Confer Protection against Experimental Dental Caries. J Infect Immun
2001;69(5):3135-3142.
Wen B, Zhou RJ, Yang J, Tang Z, Zhou Z. [The inhibitory effect of anti-streptococcus mutans immunoglobulin of
yolk on glucan synthesis of Streptococcus mutans] Shanghai Kou Qiang Yi Xue. 2002 Jun;11(2):141-2.
Genome 49

Krüger C, Pearson SK, Kodama Y, Vacca Smith A, Bowen WH, Hammarström L.The effects of egg-derived
antibodies to glucosyltransferases on dental caries in rats.Caries Res. 2004 Jan-Feb;38(1):9-14.
Rawendra R. Imunoglobulin Y (IgY) Water Soluble Fraction (WSF) Kuning Telur Kering Beku anti
ENTEROPATHOGENIC Escherichia coli (EPEC). Disertasi untuk memperoleh gelar Doktor pada Program
Studi Sains Veteriner Sekolah Pascasarjana Institut Pertanian Bogor 2005.
Genome 50


The effects of phytosterol in low fat milk on serum lipid levels among
mild-moderately hypercholesterolemic subjects
Staff : Sri Sukmaniah1*, Saptawati Bardosono1, Samuel Oetoro1, Inge
Permadhi1, Leilani Lestarina2
Student :-
Sponsor : PT Nestle Indonesia
Email Contact : aniss@cbn.net.id; tati_bardo @yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Sri Sukmaniah; Saptawati, B., Samuel, O., Inge, P. Medical Journal
of Indonesia (2008) 17(1): 5-12
1
Department of Nutrition, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
PT Nestle Indonesia, Jakarta
Introduction
There are several risk factors identified for the development of CHD. One of the most
important risk factors for CHD is dyslipidemia - changes of serum lipid profile – especially
hypercholesterolemia (Krummel, 2000; Tribble & Krauss, 2001). Many clinical trials have
been carried out to find the dietary components which have cholesterol-lowering effect. Plant-
is also named phyto-sterols, is dietary factor known to lower blood cholesterol. Consuming
between 2 to 3 g per day phytosterol lowers serum total- and LDL-cholesterol by 9% to 20%
without affecting HDL-cholesterol (Hallikainen, et al, 2000). Korpela, et al (2006) found that
2 g/day plant sterols in low-fat milk products for 4 weeks reduced 6.5% in serum total
cholesterol, and 10.4% in serum LDL-cholesterol, while no significant changes in serum
HDL-cholesterol and triglyceride levels. The cholesterol-lowering effects of phytosterol
differ according to food matrix, which low-fat milk was found to be the most effective vehicle
among the four foods, i.e., milk, yoghurt, bread, and cereal (Clifton, et al, 2004).
This study aimed to evaluate the effect of phytosterol properly solubilised in a partly
vegetable oil-filled low fat milk, on serum total cholesterol, LDL-cholesterol, HDL-
cholesterol, triglycerides, in mild-moderately hypercholesterolemic volunteers, who
consumed their habitual diets with some behavior change through a scheduled counseling

A randomized, two-arm parallel pre-post test design was conducted to evaluate the effect of
phytosterol on serum lipid profile in hypercholesterolemic subjects, at Department of
Nutrition-Universitas Indonesia in Jakarta from June to November 2006. Each subject was
randomly assigned to one of the following intervention for six weeks period: counseling plus
milk containing 1.2 g phytosterol (PS) and those received counseling alone(C). The
counseling aimed in order the subjects to follow the dietary recommendation of therapeutic
lifestyle changes (TLC Diet), whereas the energy requirement of the subject was individually
calculated using the Harris-Benedict equation.

The total number of subjects for each group was 20 subjects. At the end of the six weeks
intervention period, only 17 subjects in the PS group, and 14 subjects in the C group
completed the study. This sample size is still within adequate range. The age of the subjects
were 40.4 ± 7.5 years old, and 43.1 ± 8.4 years old respectively for PS, and C groups. The
composition of the subjects were 11 males (9 in PS group, and 2 in C group) and 20 females
(8 in PS group, and 12 in C group). After six weeks intervention, there were significant
reduction in Body Mass Index (BMI) and Waist-Circumference in PS groups (p<0.05), while
in C group the reduction were not significant (p>0.05). No significant changes of nutrient
Genome 51

intake were found in both groups between before and after intervention. In PS group, the
underlying mechanism of significant reduction of anthropometric measures without the
decreased of nutrient intakes was still unclear, however it might be suggested due to over
reported on their dietary assessment.
The changes of serum lipid profile of both groups were presented in table 1.
Table 1: Serum Lipid levels of the subjects before and after intervention based on the intervention group
Varibles PS- group C- group p-value**
n 17 14
Total cholesterol1, mg/dL 233.5 ± 24.6 218.3 ± 18.6
Total cholesterol2, mg/dL 211.2 ± 30.3 219.6 ± 24.3
p-value* 0.01 NS
Difference in serum total cholesterol, mg/dL -22.3 ± 28.7 1.3 ± 18.8 0.009
(%) (-9.2 ± 12.3) (0.7 ± 9.0) 0.013
LDL-cholesterol1, mg/dL 176.9 ± 24.7 164.7 ± 21.8
LDL-cholesterol2, mg/dL 154.5 ± 24.3 160.0 ± 26.4
p-value* 0.004 NS
Difference in serum LDL-cholesterol, mg/dL -22.4 ± 27.9 -4.7 ± 17.2 0.024
(%) (-11.5 ± 16.7) (-2.8 ± 10.5) NS
HDL-cholesterol1, mg/dL 43.6 ± 8.0 46.8 ± 9.0
HDL-cholesterol2, mg/dL 40.3 ± 8.0 45.9 ± 3.7
p-value* NS NS
Difference in serum HDL-cholesterol, mg/dL -3.2 ± 6.5 -0.9 ± 6.8 NS
(%) (-6.7 ± 13.2) (0.5 ± 14.7) NS
Ratio LDL/HDL-cholesterol1 4.2 ± 0.9 3.7 ± 1.0
Ratio LDL/HDL-cholesterol2 4.0 ± 1.1 3.5 ± 0.6
p-value* NS NS
Difference in LDL-HDL ratio 0.18 ± 0.96 0.18 ± 0.61 NS
(%) (3.2 ± 26.6) (1.7 ± 16.4) NS
Triglyceride1, mg/dL 167.6 ± 65.4 109.6 ± 32.9
Triglyceride2, mg/dL 146.8 ± 56.9 118.8 ± 40.0
p-value* NS NS
Difference in serum triglyceride, mg/dL -20.8 ± 57.7 9.1 ± 41.1 NS
(%) (-6.7 ± 31.0) (14.1 ± 41.7) NS
1
, before intervention; 2, 6 weeks after the intervention
*) using paired t-test, or Wilcoxon
**) using unpaired t-test, or Mann-Whitney
NS, no significant difference (p value > 0.05)
After six weeks intervention showed the significant decreased for serum total- cholesterol and
LDL-cholesterol in PS group (respectively -9.2 ± 12.3 % and -11.5 ± 16.7% (p<0.05), while
no significant reductions of serum HDL-cholesterol and triglyceride. In the C group, there
were no significant changes for all serum lipid measures. The decreased serum total- and
LDL- cholesterol levels in PS group was consistent with other reports that the
supplementation of phytosterol-fortified food products (1-4 g/day) may reduce circulating
cholesterol levels by 8-15% within 3 to 6 weeks in mildly hypercholesterolemic subjects
(Mensink, etal, 2002; Gyling and Miettinem, 1994). One of the mechanisms by which
phytosterol reduces serum cholesterol was suggested to be the inhibition of its absorption and
the increament of its efflux from enterocytes into the intestine lumen (Turley and Dietchy,
2003). The dietary counselling alone in the present study seemed to have no effect on serum
cholesterol profile, eventhough lipid lowering diet with highly motivated subjects were
reported to reduce total cholesterol concentration by 3-4% (Neil, et al, 1995)
Further analysis using repeated measures, it was found that the significant reduction of serum
total cholesterol, and LDL cholesterol levels in PS group were due to the intervention of
phytosterol. However, the Body Mass Index and Waist-Circumference in this group was also
reduced which might contribute to the reduction of total- and LDL-cholesterol.
Genome 52


Conclusion
The intervention of phytosterol reduced significantly total cholesterol, and LDL cholesterol
levels, while no significant reductions on serum HDL-cholesterol and triglyceride.
Keywords
β-carotene , cholesterol, phytosterol, soluble fiber, TLC-diet.
References
Clifton PM, Noakes M, Sullivan D, Erichsen N, Ross D, AnnisonG, Fassoulakis A, Cehun M, and Nestel P
Cholesterol-lowering effects of plant sterol esters differ in milk, yoghurt, bread, and cereal. Eur J Clin Nutr
2004.58. p: 503-508.
Gyling H. Miettinen TA. Serum cholesterol and cholesterol and lipoprotein metabolism in hypercholesterolemic
NIDDM subjects before and during sitostanol-ester margarine treatment. Diabetologia 1994; 37:773-80.
Hallikainen, MA. Sarkkinen, E.S. Gylling, H. Erkkilä, A.T. Uusitupa, M.I.J. Comparison of the effect of plant
sterol ester and plant stanol ester-enriched margarines in lowering serum cholesterol concentrations in
hypercholesterolaemic subject on a low fat. Eur J Clin Nutr 2000. 54. p: 715-725.
Korpela R., Tuomilehto J. HőgstrőmP., Seppo L., Piironen V., Salo- Väänänen P., Tivo J., Lamberg-Allard C.,
Kärkäinen M., Outila T., Sundvall j., Vikkilä S., and Tikkanen MJ. Safety aspects and cholesterol-lowering
efficacy of low fat dairy products containing plant sterols. Eur J Clin Nutr. 2006. 60. p:633-642
Krummel, D.A. Food, Nutrition and diet therapy. Krause’s. 11th . USA. 2000. 35.p: 860-899.
Mensink, RP. Ebbing, S. Lindhout, M. Plat, J. Heugten, M. M. A. Effects of plant stanol esters suplied in low-fat
yoghurt on serum lipids and lipoprotein, non-cholesterol sterol and fat soluble antioksidant concentrations.
Departement of Human Biology, Maastricht University. www.elsevier.com. 2002.p: 205-213.
Neil HAW, Roe L, Godlee RJP, Moore JW, Clarck GMG, Borwn J, Thorogood M, Startton IM, Lancaster T, Mant
T, Fowler GH. Randomised trial of lipid lowering dietary advice in general practice: the effects on serum
lipids, lipoproteins and antioxidants. BMJ. 1995:319: 569-573.
Tribble D.L & Krauss R.M. Atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease, in Present knowledge in nutrition (Bowman
B.A. & Russell. eds.). ILSI Press, Washington, DC. Eight edition. 2001. p: 543-551.
Turley SD and Dietchy JM. Sterol absorption in small intestine. Curr Op Lipiodol. 2003. 14. p: 233-240.

Genome 53

The effect Portland cement in ALP activity of dental-pulp cells

Staff : D.A. Margono1, and E.W. Bachtiar2*
Student : W. Asterianty
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at :The 22nd International Association for Dental Research (SEA
Division) & 19th South East Asia Association for Dental Education
Manila, Philipine (October 8-10, 2008)
1
Department of Concervative Dentistry, Faculty of Dentistry Universitas, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta,
Indonesia
2
Introduction
Mineral trioxide aggregate is an endodontic material which is used to seal the communication
between the pulp and oral environment or periodontal tissue. It has biocompatibility and
provides an excellent sealing, non toxic and inducing the tissues regeneration. The basic
substance of MTA is cement Portland which added bismuth oxide 4:1 ratio to give
radiopacity property. However, there were only few reports that use human pulps cells to
asses alkaline phosphatese activity induced by Portland cement in vitro.
Objective
To investigate the ability of Portland cement in producing alkaline phosphatase. Methods:
Human dental pulp cells were obtained from caries free teeth which were extracted for
orthodontic treatment. The teeth were split to obtain the pulp tissue. Cultured in DMEM
supplemented with 10% FBS. The cells were used between the fifth and sixth passages.
Alkaline phosphatase was asses by its supernatant for 24 hours and 72 hours.
Results
The mean value for alkaline phophatase production in MTA was higher than Portland
cements. Meanwhile, the statistical analysis shows no significant different between those
specimens.
Conclusion
Portland cement has its ability to induce alkaline phosphates production by human
pulp cells.
References
Camilleri J. Characterization and chemical activity of Portland cement and two experimental cements with
potential for use in dentistry. Int Endod J. 2008 Sep;41(9):791-9.
Shayegan A, Petein M, Abbeele AV. Beta-tricalcium phosphate, white mineral trioxide aggregate, white Portland
cement, ferric sulfate, and formocresol used as pulpotomy agents in primary pig teeth. Oral Surg Oral Med
Oral Pathol Oral Radiol Endod. 2008 Apr;105(4):536-42.
Kim EC, Lee BC, Chang HS, Lee W, Hong CU, Min KS. Evaluation of the radiopacity and cytotoxicity of
Portland cements containing bismuth oxide. Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Pathol Oral Radiol Endod. 2008
Jan;105(1):e54-7.
Genome 54


The effects of xylitol on dental pulp cells
Staff : R. Farida1*, D. Fatma
Student : N. Pandujiwo, R. Bayu, T.A. Risco
Sponsor : PT.Lotte Indonesia 2008
Email Contact : friedakuayu@yahoo.co.id
Disseminated at : Thailand International Conferrence 2009; 15th Scientific Meeting &
Refresher Course in Dentistry Faculty of Dentistry University
Indonesia 2009
1
Oral Biology Department, Faculty of Dentistry, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Xylitol is a polyol sugar alcohol and is used as an artificial sweetener that has been
successfully used in chewing gums to prevent dental caries as xylitol could inhibit the growth
of Streptococcus mutans, one of primary causative agents of dental caries for the past two
decades (Makinen KK, 2008). Furthermore, besides xylitol could be able to block bacteria
from producing the acids that cause tooth decay and decrease plaque formation, xylitol also
could enhance remineralization (hardening) of weakened teeth, and it relieves dry- mouth by
increasing saliva. Xylitol could inhibit the growth of periodontophatic bacteria P.gingivalis
(Su-Ji H et al, 2005). Therefore, xylitol might be a promising candidate as both an anticaries
and an antiperiodontitis agent. Dental pulp is a loose connective tissue that provides
dentinogenic, nutritive, sensory, and defensive functions to the tooth. Dental diseases and
injuries require replacement of the affected dental tissue. Culture of pulp cells appears as a
promising tool to ensure the dental tissue regeneration. On the open dental pulp cavity, xylitol
might diffuse across dentine from a cavity and are of concentrations high enough to produce a
biological effect upon the dental pulp. Subsequently, xylitol may interfere with the function
of the dental pulp cells, either by cytotoxicity or by enhance the pulp cells proliferation.
Objectives
To observe the effects elicited by xylitol upon the dental pulp cells proliferations based on
cells viability.
Methods
The dental pulp cells were obtained from freshly extracted teeth of patients with indication of
teeth extraction (e.g.orthodontic therapy). The cells were cultured in DMEM for 48 hr (370C,
5% CO2) and then exposed to 2%, 4%, 8%, and 16% xylitol, except the controls. The cells
viability were determined by MTT Assay and Bradford Protein Assay.
Results
The results of MTT Assay showed that after treated with 2% and 4% xylitol, the cells
viability were increased (113%; 157%, respectively) than the controls (100%). Then, they
tended to decrease after exposed to 8% and 16% (138%; 122%, respectively), eventhough
they were still higher than the controls. Furthermore, the results of Bradford Protein Assay
showed that the protein total of dental pulp cells after treated with 2%, 4%, 8% and 16%
xylitol were increased (23031.31µg/ml; 26380.87µg/ml, respectively) than the controls
(19013.05µg/ml). Furthermore, they tended to decrease after treated with 8% and 16% xylitol
(23192.57 µg/ml ; 21498.48µg/ml, respectively). However, they were still higher than the
controls. Thus, the increasing of dental pulp cells viability and the protein total of cells
indicated that xylitol could stimulate the cells viability.
Genome 55

Conclusion
Xylitol could enhance the proliferations of the dental pulp cells, so that by chewing xylitol, it
might help the regeneration of injured dental pulp.
Keywords
Cells viability, protein total of dental pulp cells, xylitol.
Acknowledgment
The authors acknowledge to PT.LOTTE INDONESIA for the grant to support this research.
References
Makinen KK. History, safety, and dental properties of xylitol. [online].[cited 2008 Oct 13]; Available from URL:
http:/xylitol.org/drmakinen.asp#term.
Su-Ji H, S0-Yeon J, Yun-Ju N, Kyu-Ho Y, Hoi-Soon L, Jin C. (2005). Xylitol inhibits inflammatory cytokine
expression induced by lipopolysaccharide from Porphyromonas gingivalis. Clin Diagn Lab Immunol. 12 (11):
1285-91.
Genome 56


The knowledge and practices of health worker toward food safety in
Malang, East Java Province
Staff : L. Sampetoding1,2, D.N. Iswarawanti1*, L.A.A. Wiradyani1, S.
Muslimatun1
Student : L. Sampetoding
Sponsor : National Education Ministry, Industry Council for Development
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN UI
Email Contact : diswarawanti@seameo-rccn.org
Disseminated at : The 5th Asian Conference on Food and Nutrition Safety, Cebu,
Philippines, November 5-7, 2008.
1
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN, Universitas Indonesia, Salemba Raya 6, Jakarta. diswarawanti@seameo-rccn.org
2
EPOS Health Consultants GmbH, Makassar, Indonesia
Introduction
Foodborne disease remains a public health problem in Indonesia (WHO, 2000). One of health
workers’ task is to educate the community on food safety (MOH, 2003). In order to ascertain
that health workers play their roles in prevention of foodborne disease, the assessment on
health worker knowledge and practice on food safety is indeed needed.
Method
This cross sectional study was done in Malang, East Java. The subject was 128 health workers
who had serviced more than 1 year. They were randomly selected. Information was obtained
through self administered questionnaire and interview. The cronbach alpha was 0.6 for
questions on food safety knowledge.
Result
Seventy percent (70%) of health workers had scores on food safety knowledge ≥ 80%. The
most difficult questions to answer were issues related with food storage (correct temperature
to keep cooked food) and surveillance (stakeholder need to be involved in FBD surveillance).
Table 1. Characteristics of subjects (n=128)

Age, years (range) 38 (23 ; 58)
Work duration at current place, years 10,2 ± 8,2
Work duration as health educator, years 8,6 ± 7,1
Female, n (%) 85 (66,4)
Profession, n (%)
Nutritionists 56 (43,8)
Community health workers 57 (44,5)
Others (midwife & nurse) 15 (11,7)
Having task as health educator, n (%) 109 (85,2)
Employment status, n (%)
Permanent staff 120 (93,8)
Part time staff 8 (6,3)
Monthly salary ≥ 110 US$ 113 (88,3)
Satisfy to received salary 76 (59,4)
Table 2. Proportion of health workers applying Food Safety knowledge on control measures (n=128)
Type of control measures n (%)
Policy development 73 (57,0)

Procedures on cleaning and sanitation68 (53,1)
Procedures on personal hygiene 63 (49,2)
Procedures on food storage 60 (46,9)
Genome 57

teachers 6
health workers 8,3
women's group 13,1
local stakeholder: head of village, etc 17,9
health cadres 23,8
food handler in hospital 25
family of the sick-people 32,1
food vendor 33,3
pregnant and lactating mother 34,5
sick people 35,7
food handler in food establishment 36,9
school children 46,4
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Figure 1. Target group receiving food safety messages dissemination in the last one year (n=84)
Discussion
Sixty six percent (66%) of the respondents have disseminated food safety messages to
various target in the community (Fig. 1). A lower proportion of health workers applying food
control measures (Table 2). Health workers tended to practice supervision and give corrective
actions toward hygiene and sanitation operations, rather than to establish procedures (p < 0.05
chi square test).
Conclusions and recommendations

The health workers have satisfactory food safety knowledge, however they still lack on some
critical issues of food safety. Encouragement toward their function as food safety educator is
necessary by provision of infrastructure and reward.
Keywords
Food safety, health workers, knowledge, practices.
Acknowledgment
Supported by SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN UI, Min. of National Education of Indonesia and
Industry Council for Development
References
WHO. Foodborne disease: a focus for health education. WHO. 2000.
Decree of Ministry of State Apparatus RI. “Nutritionist function task and credit value”. MoH, 2003.

Genome 58


The role of probiotics LIS 10506 And LIS 20506 on intestinal’s brush
border protein expression on LPS induced rat
Sponsor : Risbin Iptekdok 2007-2008
Disseminated at : Reza Ranuh1, Subijanto MS1,Ingrid Surono2,Tarina3, Wibi3,
Aulani3 The Role of Probiotics LIS 10506 and LIS 20506 on
intestinal’s brush border protein expression on LPS induced rat.
International Symposium on Probiotic from Asian Traditional
Fermented Food for Healthy Gut Function, Jakarta, Indonesia.
August 19-20, 2008. Oral Presentation
1
Faculty of Medicine, Maranatha Christian University, Bandung-Indonesia Medical Faculty Airlangga University
2
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta-Indonesia
3
Brawijaya University
Introduction
The intestine is an extremely complex living system that participates in the protection of the
host through a strong defense against aggressions from the external environment (Davidson
and Butler 2000). The integrity of the gastrointestinal brush border is a key element in
preventing systemic absorption of enteric toxins and bacteria (Mooseker, Keller et al. 1983;
Mooseker, Bonder et al. 1984; Mooseker, Bonder et al. 1984; Lievin-Le Moal, Amsellem et
al. 2002).
The primary functions of gastrointestinal tract have been perceived traditionally to be limited
to digestion and absorption of nutrients and electrolyte, and to water homeostasis. The
integrity of the gastrointestinal brush border is a key element in preventing systemic
absorption of enteric toxins and bacteria . In the critically ill situation, breakdown of
gastrointestinal brush border as barrier function may fuel sepsis. Probiotic are living
organisms, mostly found in food supplement, which provide health benefit beyond mere
nutritive value. The concept of using bacteria to treat disease and to promote health has
existed for not less than 100 years. The hypothesis of this study is that probiotic could
improve the breakdown of intestinal brush border induced by LPS as a model of intestinal
infection
Through extensive studies probiotic microorganism, appear to be highly beneficial for the
treatment of clinical conditions with abnormal mucosal barrier functions The understanding
of probiotic function on intestinal brush border recovery is needed to support this hypothesis.

Male adult Wistar rats Rattus norvegicus, 8-12 weeks of age , with 100-120 grams body
weight were used in the study. There were four groups with 5 rats each. The first group :
induced by LPS (2.5mg/kg/body weight) without probiotic.; The second group : without
induced by probiotic or LPS ; The third group: induced by LPS followed by intragastric
probiotic Lactobacillus plantarum IS -10506 and the fourth group : induced by LPS followed
by probiotic Lactobacillus plantarum IS-20506 for 7 days. The dose of probiotic was
2,67x109 CFU/day in 0,25 cc.
Rats (Rattus norvegicus) were sacrificed by cervical dislocation; the small intestine was
immediately excised and its contents were removed with phosphate-buffered saline (PBS).
After one end of the intestine was clamped, the lumen was filled with 3.7% formaldehyde in
PBS , the other end was clamped, and the whole intestine immersed for 10 min at room
temperature in the same fixative. The intestine was drained and cut open longitudinally.
Epithelial cells were removed from the luminal surface by scraping, suspended in PBS, and
Genome 59

single cells were prepared by passing the suspension several times through a 22-gauge syringe
needle. The cells were filtered through a 100-/xm mesh nylon cloth, collected at 300 g for 5
min, and finally resuspended in a small volume of PBS.
After protein isolation, analysis protein was done by using SDS-Page with 12% gradient. The
protein weight was measured by comparing protein fraction in Fermentes standard.
Results
This study is preliminary, to prove the role of probiotic on molecular aspect in brush border of
intestine rehabilitation. The black arrows (figure 1 and 2) showed the expression of intestinal
protein brush border before induced by LPS E.coli or probiotic, while the red arrows showed
the protein expression of intestinal brush border after inducing LPS E.coli. The blue arrows
showed improvement of intestinal brush border in the LPS group after inducing probiotic.
Figure 1 showed SDS-Page, The signficant improvement of intestinal brush border in the
illeum after inducing probiotic LIS 10506. Significant improvement of protein expression
intestinal brush border with the molecular weight in range 40-55 kDa,55-70 kDa,95-130 kDa
dan 100-130 kDa has been shown. This improvement of protein expression in jejunum with
the molecular weight range in 40-50 kDa, 66-70-72 kDa, 60-70 kDa dan > 250kDa is also
recognised. The effect of probiotic in duodenum found in 50-55 kDa molecular weight is
shown.
Figure 2 showed signficant improvement of intestinal brush border in the duodenum with the
molecular weight range 50-55kDa and in jejunum with the molecular weight range in 38-
40kDa; 40-50 kDa; 66-70 kDa. The improvement is also found in the illeum of intestinal with
the molecular weight range in 36-55 kDa dan 55-72kDa.

Figure 1. SDS Page improvement of intestinal brush border the illeum after inducing probiotic LIS-10506
Figure 2. SDS Page improvement of intestinal brush border in the duodenum after inducing probiotic LIS-20506
From this study, understanding the molecular mechanisms of intestinal brush border
rehabilitation induced by probiotic LIS 10506 and LIS 20506 has been proved. The effect of
probiotic LIS 20506 on jejunum is better than LIS 10506.
Keywords
Border, intestinal brush, probiotic, repair.
Genome 60


References
Davidson, G. P. and R. N. Butler (2000). "Probiotics in pediatric gastrointestinal disorders." Curr Opin Pediatr
12(5): 477-81.
Lievin-Le Moal, V., R. Amsellem, et al. (2002). "Lactobacillus acidophilus (strain LB) from the resident adult
human gastrointestinal microflora exerts activity against brush border damage promoted by a diarrhoeagenic
Escherichia coli in human enterocyte-like cells." Gut 50(6): 803-11.
Mooseker, M. S., E. M. Bonder, et al. (1984). "Brush border cytoskeleton and integration of cellular functions." J
Cell Biol 99(1 Pt 2): 104s-112s.
Mooseker, M. S., E. M. Bonder, et al. (1984). "The cytoskeletal apparatus of the intestinal brush border." Kroc
Found Ser 17: 287-307.
Mooseker, M. S., T. C. Keller, 3rd, et al. (1983). "Regulation of cytoskeletal structure and contractility in the brush
border." Ciba Found Symp 95: 195-215.
Vinderola, G., C. Matar, et al. (2007). "Mucosal immunomodulation by the non-bacterial fraction of milk
fermented by Lactobacillus helveticus R389." Int J Food Microbiol 115(2): 180-6.
Genome 61

The toxic effects of Triethylene Glycol Dimethacrylate (TEGDMA) on

dental pulp cells culture
Staff : R. Farida1*, D. Fatma
Student : S. Tanaya, Karina, R.A.S. Pardamean.
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : friedakuayu@yahoo.co.id
Disseminated at : International Conference Postgraduate Education, Penang, 2008;
Thailand International Conference, Bangkok, 2009; 15th Scientific
Meeting & Refresher Course in Dentistry, Jakarta, 2009
1
Oral Biology Department, Faculty of Dentistry, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Background
Triethylene glycol dimethacrylate (TEGDMA) is a common component of the bonding agents

and resin composites used in dentistry for various purposes, including restorative dentistry.
Most of dental resinous materials contain high quantities of the diluent monomer TEGDMA
as it reduces viscosity of resin materials and enhances bond strengths to dentin. However,
TEGDMA monomers could be released from composite resins following incomplete
polymerization and degradation processes by salivary enzymes in the mouth. Subsequently,
TEGDMA is available in saliva and diffuses toward and affects the dental pulp which
contains various cells, and thus may cause severe cytotoxic effects (Hume and Gerzina, 1996;
Spahl et al, 1998). Some researchers reported that TEGDMA induced toxicity to several
cells, apoptosis and mutagenesis (Schweikl and Schmalz,1999; Janke et al, 2003). Hoewever,
there has not been any reports yet about the cytotoxic effects of TEGDMA on human dental
pulp cells.
Objectives
To determine the toxic effects of TEGDMA on human dental pulp cells based on cells
viability, protein total, and protein profiles.
Methods
Dental pulp cells were isolated from the pulp of the freshly extracted teeth (free caries) and
cultured in DMEM for 48 h (370 C, 5% CO2). TEGDMA with several concentrations of 2mM,
4mM and 8 mM were added to the dental pulp cells and incubated for 24 h. Cells viability
was measured by MTT Assay, then was read by microplate reader. Whilst, the protein total
was measured by Bradford Protein Assay, and the protein profiles were determined by SDS-
PAGE.

The MTT Assay of this research showed that the cells viability of dental pulp cells after
treated with 4mM, and 8mM, and 12mM TEGDMA were statistically significant lower
(94.5%, 87.8%, 83%, respectively) than the controls (100%) by one way analysis of variance
(p<0.05). Therefore, by decreasing the cells viability in this research, TEGDMA might be
reported to have cytotoxic effect on dental pulp cells. Furthermore, the results of Bradford
protein assay of this research showed that the protein total of dental pulp cells after exposured
to 4mM, 8mM, and 12mM TEGDMA were statistically lower (22762.27µg/ml ±3385.87;
20268.44µg/ml±1701.14; 23706.51µg/ml±3214.52; respectively) than the control group
(24253.77µg/ml±3072.88). Thus, the decreasing of protein total of dental pulp cells after
Genome 62


exposured to TEGDMA expressing the cytotoxicity of TEGDMA on these cells. Whilst, the
protein total of dental pulp cells cultured medium after exposured to 4mM, 8mM, and 2mM
TEGDMA, were statistically higher (28635.85µg/ml±2373.4; 35288.41µg/ml±3469.48;
38199.79µg/ml±2752.47; respectively) when compared with the controls
(27073.83µg/ml±2772.47). The results showed that the protein total in cultured medium was
increased following the decreased cells viability which meant that protein in cultured medium
was not used by the dental pulp cells since the cells were necrotic or apoptotic. Furthermore,
the results of this research showed that the protein profiles of dental pulp cells and cultured
medium identified by SDS-PAGE were altered as there were several different molecular
weights of protein in dental pulp cells after treatment with TEGDMA compared with the
control group.
Conclusion
TEGDMA with several concentrations of 2mM, 4mM, and 8mM caused cytotoxicity to
human dental pulp cells showed by decreasing the cells viability and protein total of the cells,
also increasing the protein total in cultured medium. Furthermore, there was alteration of
protein profile of dental pulp cells following exposured to TEGDMA Consequently, it should
be the aim of future studies to replace TEGDMA with more biocompatible diluent monomers.
Keywords
Cells viability, cytotoxicity, TEGDMA, total protein.
Acknowledgments
The authors acknowledge Indonesia University for supporting this research by the grant from
DRPM (RUUI 2008).
References
Hume WR., Gerzina TM (1996). Bioavailabilty of components of resin-based materials which are applied to
teeth.Crit Rev Oral Biol Med 7: 172-179.
Janke V, von Neuhoff N, Schlegelberger B, Leyhusen G, Geurtsen W (2003). TEGDMA causes apoptosis in
primary human gingival fibroblasts. J Dent Res 82: 814-818.
Schweikl H, Schmalz G (1999). Triethylene glycol dimethacrylate induces large deletions in the hprt gene of V79
cells. Mutat Res 438: 71-78.
Spahl W, Budzikiewicz H, Geurtsen W (1998). Determination of leachable components from four commercial
dental composites by gas and liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry. J Dent 26:137-145.
Genome 63

Total dissolved solid (TDS) assessment of surface water contaminants

near pulp and paper mills in Pelalawan district, Province of Riau,
Indonesia
Staff : D. Susanna1* & A. Rahman2
Sponsor : Center for Environmental and Industrial Health, Faculty of Public
Health, Universitas Indonesia
Email Contact : dsusanna@ui.edu
Disseminated at : D. Susanna & A.Rahman. (2008). Environmental Health Journal
of Australia 8 (3), 45-55
1
Department of Environmental Health, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia.
2
Center for Environmental and Industrial Health, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia.
Introduction
Paper and pulp industries in Indonesia has contributed to Indonesian economy in foreign
exchange and finance, job provision, and development of other economic sectors associated
with industry, particularly in pulp and paper productions. Based on processes of pulp and
paper production as described in the 2003 AMDAL document, pulp and paper mills have
potential impacts directly on air and water quality. Hazardous chemicals in wastewater
effluent potentially impact human health and the aquatic ecosystem. These chemicals are
originated largely from wood chip digestion and bleaching processes. Even though the
Minister of Environment has standardized the effluent by pH, BOD, COD, TSS, and
Maximum Waste Debit by Kep-51/MENLH/10/1995 on Wastewater Standard for Industrial
Activities (MenLH 1995), yet some bleaching-by products are not regulated.
The residential community may worry about wastewater effluent. Although the wastewater
possibly has been appropriately treated before discharged, its physical appearance may
indicate visibly that the wastewater is not completely safe to human health and the
environment. Using contaminated water for domestic purposes is usually considered to be
responsible for skin problems and other waterborne diseases. Indirect exposure, for example
through food chain such as fish consumption, is of additional significant also if its existence
in corresponding environmental media can be well identified and accurately quantified.
Purpose and objective

The purpose of study is intended to presents actual measurement of TDS to support
management implementation through engagement of community involvement.
The ultimate goal of this study is to protect human health and the environment from the
adverse impacts of exposures to pulp and paper mills’ contamination. By this protection, it is
expected that a critical mass of productive people with optimal health status and healthy
behaviour and living in healthy environment will be created. This can be achieved by
managing appropriately physical and social environmental risk factors.
Method
Water quality parameters refer to Attachment B.V of the Minister of Environment decision of
Kep-51/MENLH/10/1995 on Wastewater Standard for Industrial Activities and Class B water
of the PP 82/2001. These parameters were TDS only. Water samples are collected from 7
sites for surface water samples presented in Table 1. It should be noted that water samples of
upper stream were required to know whether or not the wastewater effluent has significant
impact on the river water. The analysis methods were measured by accredited laboratories.
The water analysis quality analysis methods adopted mostly from Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewaters (Clesceri et al. 1998).
Genome 64


For AMDAL documentation, water quality refer to Class water of PP No. 82.2001 (RI 2001).
Environmental quality is conventionally evaluated using environmental standards or
guidelines. In most instances, this technique is not sufficient to recognize environmental
changes if the standards or guidelines are not exceeded. Alternatively, environmental quality
can be evaluated using Control Chart, one of 7 control measures commonly used in quality
improvement techniques. It was firstly introduced in 1924 by Walter Andrew Stewart of US
Bell Telephone Laboratories to eliminate abnormal variation by separating special and
common causes (Miller and Miller 1995).
The result of measurement of TDS showed in Table 1. The table represents the value of TDS
(mg/L) and its sampling sites. Based on statistical requirements, there was one parameter
(TDS) included for Control Chart construction. Procedure to construct Control Chart has been
described elsewhere (Rahman et al. 2004) and the constructed Control Chart is presented in
Graph 1 with sampling site codes refer to Table 1.
Table 1. Sampling sites for TDS measurement in Pelalawan District, Province of Riau, Indonesia, 2006
Code Location TDS
(mg/L)*
SWS1 water Intake 19
SWS2 upper stream of wastewater effluent 13
SWS3 around wastewater effluent 1,520
SWS4 down stream of wastewater effluent 1,450
SWS5 Pelalawan village 24
SWS6 upper stream of Port 20
SWS7 down stream of Port 60

Source: Abadi, E.K, 2007.
*) Governor of Riau regulation of No. 23 of 2003 for Class II water; numerically same as PP of No. 82/2001;. SWS1
= water intake for pulp and paper mills; SWS2 = upper stream of wastewater effluent; SWS3 = around wastewater
effluent; SWS4 = down stream of wastewater effluent; SWS5 = Pelalawan village; SWS6 = upper stream of Port;
SWS7 = down stream of Port.
Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) has not exceeded corresponding Control Limit so no action
required controlling them. In other words, the impact of wastewater effluent can be naturally
tolerated by the existing aquatic ecosystem. In the constructed Control Charts, impact of
wastewater effluent can be observed from increasing level of the surface water parameters at
SWS3 (around wastewater effluent) where the wastewater is discharged to water body.
Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) has exceeded the standard at SW3 and SW4. It is clear,
however, that water quality evaluation by ecological and legal viewpoints give different
outcomes in terms of specific parameters and sampling sites.
Genome 65

3000
3.0SL=2604
2000 2.0SL=1938
1000
Mean=605
0
mg/L
-2.0SL=-727.9
-1000
-3.0SL=-1394
-2000
1 2 3 4 5
Sampling Sites (SWS)
Figure 1. Total dissolved solid (TDS) in surface water at 5 sampling sites in Pelalawan District, Province of Riau,
Indonesia, 2006
Control Chart technique has been applied previously to evaluate water quality of Asahan
River, North Sumatra (Rahman et al. 1998). It has been able to detect dramatic water quality
changes due to pulp and rayon wastewater effluent, even though the legal standards had not
been exceeded. It has been useful as well to evaluate unregulated critical parameters. For
example, wastewater effluent has dramatically elevated color unit to intolerable level
(exceeding Upper Control Limit) whereas this parameter was not regulated by PP 20/1990 (RI
1990).

All the data sets have been thoroughly analyzed and discussed their meaning, importance, and
comparison with other relevant study results. It can be concluded that: Current levels of TDS
parameters exceeding legal standard (PP 82/2001) can be tolerated by existing aquatic system.
Wastewater effluent of pulp and paper mills can be tolerated by the existing aquatic system of
the Kampar River. It has been demonstrated also that the Control Chart technique is more
sensitive to evaluate environmental hazard than conservative legal appraisal.
Keywords
Control chart, pulp and paper, total dissolved solid.
References
Abadi, E.K. (2007). Public Health Assessment (PHA) Study of Pulp and Paper Mills in Pelalawan and Siak
Districts Provinsi Riau. Jakarta.
Clesceri LS, Greenberg AE, Eaton AD, eds. (1998). Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater 20th ed. Washington DC:American Public Health Association/American Water Works
Association/Water Environment Federation.
MenLH. 1995. State Minister of Environment Decision No. Kep-51/MENLH/10/1995 on Wastewater Standard for
Industrial Activities (Keputusan Menteri Negara Lingkungan Hidup No. Kep-51/MENLH/10/1995 tentang
Baku Mutu Limbah Cair Bagi Kegiatan Industri):State Ministry of Environment (Kementerian Negara
Lingkungan Hidup).
Miller I, Miller M. (1995). Statistical Methods for Quality, with Application to Engineering and Management.
New Jersey:Prentice Hall.
Rahman A, Ambudi W, Hartono B, Adi HK, Syahbana I, Sadulloh A, et al. (1998). Pemakaian Control Chart
sebagai salah satu teknik statistik untuk evaluasi kualitas air:Laboratorium Kesehatan Lingkungan FKM-UI.
Rahman A, Hartono B, Adi HK, Hermawati E, Setiakarnawijaya Y. (2004). Analisis Kualitas Lingkungan, Edisi 5.
Depok:Laboratorium Kesehatan Lingkungan FKM-UI.

Genome 66

EXTENDED ABSTRACTS UI 2008
Water quality of Angke River: Microbiology point of view

Staff : Conny Riana Tjampakasari and Mardiastuti, H.W.1*
Sponsor : Tzu Chi Foundation
Email Contact : connyrianat@yahoo.com; mardiastutiw@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Conny Riana Tjampakasari and Mardiastuti, HW. Medical Journal
of Indonesia 17(2), 82-87

1
Department of Microbiology, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia, Jalan Pegangsaan Timur 16, Jakarta,
Indonesia
Introduction
The Angke River is located at the northwest part of Jakarta. This river was polluted with
garbage that can cause diseases. People lived in the riverside in a low ceilings and muddy
floors. Every year flood cause serious problems during the rainy season, since this river is
located in the lowlands. Based on this fact, since 2002, Tzu Chi foundation has helped
relocate people from Angke River to Tangerang in order to clean up the river and to make
proper livelihood for the people. In 2005 the village has a drinkable tap water. They also
provided wastewater sewage treatment and recycled water for watering plants and cleaning up
public areas (Shu, 2008) Tzu Chi foundation also supports a research that will be organized
by several faculties in Universitas Indonesia as an integrated research. One of the researches
is the study of water quality of Angke River. The Department of Microbiology, Faculty of
Medicine,Universitas Indonesia was appointed to conduct a research for examining the
quality of water, based on microbiological aspect. In term of microbiological test, Escherichia
coli (E. coli) are used as the indicator for testing the quality of drinking water. The presence
of E.coli in the water, indicate that water is contaminated by human/mammals feces
(Cappucino and Sherman. 2005; Ministry of Health RI, 2003). The parameters of
microbiology examination of water quality are: Total Coliform and Fecal Coliform.

Eight samples from Angke River from different locations were taken on April 15th, 2007 :
Duri Kosambi, Pesing Poglar, Teluk Gong and Pantai Indah Kapuk 1 point respectively,
Muara (Estuary) 4 points. In this study we used double tube method since this method is
easier and effective for restless water, toxic water, metal and phenol. To detect Total Coliform
and Fecal Coliform in 100 ml water, we used Most Probably Number (MPN) method, which
was done in 2 steps: Presumptive Test and Confirmed Test. To ensure the presence of E. coli
in water, we have to conduct Completed test using selective medium and biochemical test
(Cappucino and Sherman. 2005; Ministry of Health RI, 2003). The study was completed
within 2 weeks. The interpretation is based on the Ministry of Health Recommendation
(Keputusan Mentri Kesehatan RI, 2002). The requirements of good quality of drinking water
are: Total Coliform = 0, Fecal Coliform = 0 and E. coli not found. Another interpretation
based on Government Regulation: Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia No. 82, 2001
about water quality handling and water pollution control (PP, 2001).

Escherichia coli were found at all points studied in the Angke River. The MPN of Total and
Fecal Coliform and other microorganisms isolated at the eight sampling locations is shown in
Table 1. At Duri Kosambi, the microorganisms found were the most variable i.e. E. coli,
Klebsiella oxytoca (K. ocytoca), Proteus mirabilis (P.mirabilis), Pseudomonas aeruginosa
(P.aeruginosa). The lowest MPN was found at Pantai Indah Kapuk (MPN of Total and Fecal
Coliform were 81 and 0 respectively), followed by the estuary (Muara, at the outer side of the
river mouth) where the MPN of Total coliform = 430 (Table 1). Clean water is different from
Genome 67

drinking water. Not all clean water is permitted to be used as drinking water; instead drinking
water is definitely clean water. Nowadays, in big cities, even clean water is very difficult to
be found. Only forty percents of middle to high economic level people in big cities in
Indonesia has access to use clean water. As a result of bad water condition and sanitation is
diarrhea that is the major cause of high mortality rate mostly in children. With the issue of
global warming, healthy water crisis may get worst. Not only because of contaminated with
bacteria and waste, but also due to dry season is predicted in many Indonesian regions
(Diambang Krisis Air Sehat, 2007). Based on biology parameter, fecal coliform in most river
in crowded cities in Java are more contaminated with coliform bacteria, for example Progo
River (Central Java and Jogyakarta), Ciliwung River (Jakarta), and Citarum River (West
Java) (Dinar, 2007). As compare to Singapore, it needs 18 years to recover the river water
quality (Kualitas Air Sungai di Indonesia Terus Menurun, 2007). Another study in Sukabumi
(West Java) concluded that rivers in Sukabumi were contaminated by Escherichia coli that
cause diarrhea. Fifteen rivers were contaminated with coliform and fecal coliform above
standard quality for 3rd class water quality. In those rivers, the MPN of total and fecal
coliform were around 10.000/100 ml and 20.000/100 ml respectively. Nowadays people do
not use river water in Sukabumi for drinking water anymore (Mayoritas Sungai di Kota
Sukabumi Tercemar Coli, 2007). Badan Pengendalian Lingkungan Hidup (BPLH) study in 33
locations of 13 rivers showed that in 2004 the river and soil water quality in Jakarta was
contaminated with organic and inorganic compounds. One strategy to solve these problems is
to relocate people, move them far away from the water sources (Nunuy, 2004). The result of
our study at Duri Kosambi showed that this location was contaminated with E. coli originated
from the environment, but not from human/animal feces. Other microorganisms observed
such as K. oxytoca, P. mirabilis and P. aeruginosa are human pathogens/opportunistic
pathogens. At Pesing Poglar and Teluk Gong we found microorganisms that generally cause
gastrointestinal and urinary tract infection in human (K. oxytoca,K. pneumoniae, and P.
mirabilis) (Cappucino and Suherman, 2005; Mims et al, 2004). Almost all MPN Total
Coliform of the locations studied were 2400/100 ml which is higher than the standard quality
for drinking water. This number is still lower compare to the total coliform in some rivers in
Sukabumi which are not used as drinking water anymore (Mayoritas Sungai di Kota
Sukabumi Tercemar Coli, 2007). Even though the MPN Total Coliform of water from Pantai
Indah Kapuk and outer side of river mouth were the lowest, based on Ministry of Health
Recommendation, the Republic of Indonesia (SK Menkes RI No. 907/MENKES/SK/VII/2002
July 29th, 2002), the water could not fulfill the requirements for drinking water (Keputusan
Mentri Kesehatan RI, 2002). In general, the water at Angke River is not recommended to be
used as drinking water. However, the result using microbiology parameters showed that the
water can only be used as clean water according to the government regulation which
categorized the river as 2nd class water quality. People live in Pantai Indah Kapuk, have a
higher economic level than other areas. So, it can be assumed that they are more educated
and have more knowledge and insight in hygiene and. sanitation. At the estuary, the water has
a higher salt concentration; so that coliform bacterial growth is inhibited. This data is
supported with the data from Sukabumi which showed that estuary areas have a lower number
of total and fecal coliform (Nunuy, 2004).
Conclusion
The water quality of eight sampling location is categorized as the 2th class quality not
recommended to be used as drinking water except the water from Pantai Indah Kapuk and
estuary area that can be used as drinking water after boiling.
Acknowledgment
This research is a part of a multidisciplinary research in Angke River supported by Tzu Chi
Foundation.

Genome 68

Keywords
Angke River, E.coli, fecal coliform, most probability water quality, total coliform number.
References
Shu C. C. Restoring the Angke River. Tzu Chi Monthly. No.441. August 2003.
www.tzuchi.org/global/projects/environmental_potection/stories_7.html. Downloaded 08/01/2008.
Cappucino, J.G and Sherman, N. Microbiology a laboratory manual. 7th ed. New York: Pearson Education Inc;
2005.
Ministry of Health, the Republic of Indonesia. A guide for laboratory personnel in monitoring the drinking water
quality, water treatment installation, collaboration project between the Republic of Indonesia and The Republic
of Germany in Monitoring water quality. Directorate of water sanitation. GTZ PN 94.2253.6-001.00, Maret
2003.
Keputusan Menteri Kesehatan Republik Indonesia tahun 2002, No. 07/MENKES/SK/VII/2002
Peraturan Pemerintah tahun 2001, No. 82/Tahun 2001
Diambang Krisis Air Sehat. www.depkes.go.id/index.php?option=news&task=viewarticle&sid=2677Itemi.
Downloaded 05/12/2007.
Dinar R.S. Pelayanan Air Minum Jakarta dan Pencemaran Air.
www.walhi.or.id/kampanye/air/privatisasi/051128_air_li. Downloaded 05/12/2007.
Kulaitas Air Sungai di Indonesia Terus Menurun. www.suaramerdeka.com/cybernews/harian/0608/16/nas8.htm.
Downloaded 05/12/2007.
Mayoritas sungai di Kota Sukabumi Tercemar Coli. Kemitraan Air Indonesia-www.inawater.com/news-Berita
KAI. Downloaded 05/12/2007.
Nunuy N. Kualitas Air Tanah dan Sungai di Jakarta Mengkhawatirkan. Tempo Interaktif, Selasa 12 Oktober
2004. www.tempointeractive.com/hg/2004/10/12/brk,20041012-39.id html. Downloaded 10/10/2007.
Mims, C., Dockrell H.M.,Goering R.V, Roitt,I,Wakelin D, Zuckerman M.. Medical Microbiology. 3 rd ed.
Toronto: Mosby; 2004.
Genome 69

Wheat allergen exposure and the prevalence of work-related

sensitization and allergy in bakery workers
Staff : J.H. Jacobs1, T. Meijster12, E. Meijer1, E. Suarthana1,3*, D.
Heederik1*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : D.Heederik@uu.nl, e_suarthana@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Allergy 2008: 63: 1597–1604
1
Division of Environmental Epidemiology, Institute for Risk Assessment Sciences, Utrecht University, Utrecht,
the Netherlands
2
Department of Food and Chemical Risk Analysis, TNO Quality of Life, Zeist, the Netherlands
3
Community Medicine Department, Faculty of Medicine, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Occupational airway diseases are common among bakers. The present study describes the
association between exposure to wheat allergen levels and sensitization to wheat allergens,
work-related upper and lower respiratory symptoms and asthma in bakery workers.
Methods
As part of a Health Surveillance System for early detection of (allergic) occupational airway
diseases a so-called _validation study_ was performed among Dutch bakers for validation of a
diagnostic model that predict the likelihood of sensitization to specific workplace allergens.
The present study used serology and questionnaire results of a subgroup of 860 bakers
participating in the validation study. An earlier developed job-exposure matrix was used to
predict average and cumulative personal exposure to wheat allergens.
Results
The prevalence of wheat sensitization, work-related respiratory symptoms and asthma
increased till average wheat exposure levels of approximately 25–30 lg/m3, leveled off and
decreased at higher exposure concentrations. Exposure–response curves showed a stronger
pronounced bell-shape with cumulative exposure. Associations were strongest for asthma and
work-related lower respiratory symptoms (PR_2 and PR_3.5–4.5 for average and cumulative
exposure, respectively). Associations were only found in atopics. Wheat sensitization was an
important factor in the prevalence of respiratory symptoms.
Discussion
In accordance with earlier studies, the present study showed a bell-shaped exposure–response
relationship especially for cumulative wheat allergen exposure with sensitization, allergic
respiratory symptoms and asthma. The healthy worker effect may be the possible explanation
for the bell-shaped relationship.
Keywords
Asthma, occupational sensitization, wheat allergen exposure, work-related respiratory
symptoms.
References
Kogevinas M, et al. (1999) Occupational asthma in Europe and other industrialised areas: a population-based
study. European Community Respiratory Health Survey Study Group. Lancet 353(9166): p. 1750-4.
De Zotti R, M. Bovenzi. (2000) Prospective study of work related respiratory symptoms in trainee bakers. Occup
Environ Med 57(1): p. 58-61.
Genome 70

Houba R, Heederik D, Doekes G. (1998) Wheat sensitization and work-related symptoms in the baking industry
are preventable. An epidemiologic study. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 158(5 Pt 1): p. 1499-503.
Houba R, et al. (1996) Exposure-sensitization relationship for alpha-amylase allergens in the baking industry. Am J
Respir Crit Care Med. 154(1): p. 130-6.
Heederik D, Houba R. (2001) An exploratory quantitative risk assessment for high molecular weight sensitizers:
wheat flour. Ann Occup Hyg 45(3): p. 175-85.
Heederik D. Thorne PS, Doekes G. (2002) Health-based occupational exposure limits for high molecular weight
sensitizers: how long is the road we must travel? Ann Occup Hyg 46(5): p. 439-46.
Houba R, Doekes G, Heederik D. (1998) Occupational respiratory allergy in bakery workers: a review of the
literature. Am J Ind Med 34(6): p. 529-46.
Cullinan P, et al. (1994) Work related symptoms, sensitisation, and estimated exposure in workers not previously
exposed to flour. Occup Environ Med 51(9): p. 579-83.
Cullinan P, et al. (2001) Allergen and dust exposure as determinants of work-related symptoms and sensitization in
a cohort of flour-exposed workers; a case-control analysis. Ann Occup Hyg 45(2): p. 97-103.
Siracusa A, Desrosiers M, Marabini A. (2000) Epidemiology of occupational rhinitis: prevalence, aetiology and
determinants. Clin Exp Allergy 30(11): p. 1519-34.
Peretz C, et al. (2005) Assessment of exposure to wheat flour and the shape of its relationship with specific
sensitization. Scand J Work Environ Health 31(1): p. 65-74.
Brisman J, Jarvholm B, Lillienberg L. (2000) Exposure-response relations for self reported asthma and rhinitis in
bakers. Occup Environ Med 57(5): p. 335-40.
Platts-Mills T, et al. (2001) Sensitisation, asthma, and a modified Th2 response in children exposed to cat allergen:
a population-based cross-sectional study. Lancet 357(9258): p. 752-6.
Meijster T, et al. (2006) Modelling of exposure in the context of an intervention program among flour processing
sectors in the Netherlands.
Burney PG, et al. (1989) Validity and repeatability of the IUATLD (1984) Bronchial Symptoms Questionnaire: an
international comparison. Eur Respir J 2(10): p. 940-5.
van der Lende R, Orie NG. (1972) The MRC-ECCS questionnaire on respiratory symptoms (use in epidemiology).
Scand J Respir Dis 53(4): p. 218-26.
Doekes G, et al. (1996) Enzyme immunoassays for total and allergen specific IgE in population studies. Occup
Environ Med 53(1): p. 63-70.
Pekkanen J, et al. (2005) Operational definitions of asthma in studies on its aetiology. Eur Respir J 26(1): p. 28-35.
Baur X, Chen Z, Liebers V. (1998) Exposure-response relationships of occupational inhalative allergens. Clin Exp
Allergy 28(5): p. 537-44.
Nieuwenhuijsen MJ, Burdorf A. (2001) Three centuries of research on baker's asthma: how close are we to
prevention? Ann Occup Hyg 45(2): p. 85-7.
(1996) Variations in the prevalence of respiratory symptoms, self-reported asthma attacks, and use of asthma
medication in the European Community Respiratory Health Survey (ECRHS). Eur Respir J. 9(4): p. 687-95.
Janson C, et al. (1997) Physician-diagnosed asthma and drug utilization in the European Community Respiratory
Health Survey. Eur Respir J 10(8): p. 1795-802.
Droste J, et al. (2003) Allergic sensitization, symptoms, and lung function among bakery workers as compared
with a nonexposed work population. J Occup Environ Med 45(6): p. 648-55.
Brant A, et al. (2005) The changing distribution of occupational asthma: a survey of supermarket bakery workers.
Eur Respir J 25(2): p. 303-8.
De Zotti R, et al. (1994) Allergic airway disease in Italian bakers and pastry makers. Occup Environ Med 51(8): p.
548-52.
Jeal H, et al. (2006) Modified th2 responses at high-dose exposures to allergen: using an occupational model. Am
J Respir Crit Care Med 174(1): p. 21-5.
Gautrin D, et al. (1997) Specific IgE-dependent sensitization, atopy, and bronchial hyperresponsiveness in
apprentices starting exposure to protein-derived agents. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 155(6): p. 1841-7.
Biagini RE, et al. (2004) Evaluation of the prevalence of antiwheat-, anti-flour dust, and anti-alpha-amylase
specific IgE antibodies in US blood donors. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 92(6): p. 649-53.
Smith TA. (2004) Preventing baker's asthma: an alternative strategy. Occup Med (Lond) 54(1): p. 21-7.
Kruize H, et al. (1997) Respiratory allergy in laboratory animal workers: a retrospective cohort study using pre-
employment screening data. Occup Environ Med 54(11): p. 830-5.
Genome 71

Which tools best predict the incidence of work related sensitisation

and symptoms
Staff : E. Suarthana1,2,3*, J-L. Malo1, D. Heederik2, H. Ghezzo1, J.
L’Archeveˆque1, D. Gautrin1*
Student :-
Disseminated at : Occup. Environ. Med. 2009; 66;111-117
1
H4J 1C5
2
3
Introduction
This study used information from the questionnaire alone or in conjunction with clinical tests,
such as skin-prick testing (SPT) and bronchial responsiveness (BR) testing at entry, to
develop models for estimating the probability of the occurrence of specific IgE-sensitisation
to and respiratory symptoms in contact with laboratory animal (LA) allergens after 32
months’ training in an animal health technology programme.
Methods
Four multivariable logistic regression models were developed for each endpoint, consisting
of: (1) questionnaire; (2) questionnaire and SPT; (3) questionnaire and BR testing; and (4)
questionnaire, SPT and BR testing. The prognostic models were derived from a cohort of
Canadian animal health technology apprentices. The models’ internal validity and diagnostic
accuracy were evaluated and compared.
Results
Symptoms indicative of asthma and allergic symptoms at baseline composed the final
questionnaire model for the occurrence of occupational sensitisation and symptoms. Both
questionnaire models showed a good discrimination (area under the receiver operating
characteristics curve were 0.73 and 0.78, respectively) and calibration (Hosmer-Lemeshow
test p value .0.10). Addition of SPT and/or BR testing increased the specificity of the
questionnaire model for LA sensitisation, but not for symptoms at work. To facilitate their
application in practice, the final questionnaire models were converted to easy-to-use scoring
system.
Discussion
Questionnaire is an easy tool that can give accurate prediction of the incidence of
occupational sensitisation and symptoms.
Genome 72

Keywords
Allergy, bronchial hyperreactivity, occupational diseases, prognosis, questionnaire.
References
Bernstein DI, Campo P, Baur X. (2006) Clinical assessment and management of occupational asthma. In:
Bernstein IL, Chan-Yeung M, Malo J, Bernstein DI, editors. Asthma in the Workplace. 3rd ed, 172, New York:
Taylor & Francis.
Blanc P, Toren K. (1999) How much asthma can be attributed to occupational factors? Am J Med 107:580-587.
Blanc PD, Eisner MD, Balmes JR, Trupin L, Yelin EH, Katz PP. (2005) Exposure to vapors, gas, dust, or fumes:
assessment by a single survey item compared to a detailed exposure battery and a job exposure matrix. Am J
Ind Med 48(2):110-7.
Bleeker S, Moll H, Steyerberg E, Donders A, Derksen-Lubsen G, Grobbee D, et al. (2003) External validation is
necessary in prediction research: A clinical example. J Clin Epidemiol 56(826-832).
Bollen K. (1989) Structural equations with latent variables. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
2(10):940-5.
Burney P, Luczynska C, Chinn S, Jarvis D. (1994) The European Community Respiratory Health Survey. Eur
Respir J 7:954-960.
Chan-Yeung M, Malo JL, Tarlo SM, Bernstein L, Gautrin D, Mapp C, et al. (2003) Proceedings of the first Jack
Pepys Occupational Asthma Symposium. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 167(3):450-71.
sensitization, atopy and bronchial hyperresponsiveness in apprentices starting exposure to protein-derived
agents. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 155:1841-1847.
Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Infante-Rivard C, Malo J-L. (2000) Incidence and determinants of IgE-mediated
sensitization in apprentices: a prospective study. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 162:1222-1228.
Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Infante-Rivard C, Malo J. (2001) Natural history of sensitization, symptoms and diseases in
apprentices exposed to laboratory animals. Eur Respir J 17:904-908.
Gautrin D, Infante-Rivard C, Ghezzo H, Malo J. (2001) Incidence and host determinants of probable occupational
asthma in apprentices exposed to laboratory animals. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 163:899-904.
Hanley J, McNeil B. (1982) The meaning and use of the area under a receiver operatic characteristic (roc) curve.
Radiology 143:29-36.
Harrell FE, Jr., Lee KL, Mark DB. (1996) Multivariable prognostic models: issues in developing models,
evaluating assumptions and adequacy, and measuring and reducing errors. Stat Med 15(4):361-87.
Hosmer D, Lemeshow S. (1989) Applied logistic regression. New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
Justice A, Covinsky K, Berlin J. (1999) Assessing the generalizability of prognostic information. Ann Intern Med
130:515-524.
Kogevinas M, Anto JM, Sunyer J, Tobias A, Kromhout H, Burney P. (1999) Occupational asthma in Europe and
other industrialised areas: a population-based study. European Community Respiratory Health Survey Study
Group. Lancet 353(9166):1750-4.
Kogevinas M, Zock J, Jarvis D, Kromhout H, Lillienberg L, Plana E, et al. (2007) Exposure to substances in the
workplace and new-onset asthma: an international prospective population-based study (ECRHS-II). Lancet
370:336-341.
Meijer E, Grobbee DE, Heederik D. (2004) A strategy for health surveillance in laboratory animal workers
exposed to high molecular weight allergens. Occup Environ Med 61(10):831-7.
Meyer JD, Holt DL, Cherry NM, McDonald JC. (1999) SWORD '98: Surveillance of work-related and
occupational respiratory disease in the UK. Occup Med 49(8):485-489.
Peduzzi P, Concato J, Kemper E, Holford T, Feinstein A. (1996) A simulation study of the number of events per
variable in logistic regression analysis. J Clin Epidemiol 49:1373-1379.
Rodier F, Gautrin D, Ghezzo H, Malo JL. (2003) Incidence of occupational rhinoconjunctivitis and risk factors in
animal-health apprentices. J Allergy Clin Immunol 112(6):1105-11.
Sterk PJ, Fabbri LM, Quanjer PH, Cockcroft DW, O'Byrne PM, Anderson SD, et al. (1993) Airway
responsiveness. Standardized challenge testing with pharmacological, physical and sensitizing stimuli in
adults. Report Working Party Standardization of Lung Function Tests, European Community for Steel and
Coal. Official Statement of the European Respiratory Society. Eur Respir J Suppl 16:53-83.
Respir J 16(1):9-14.
Van Houwelingen JC, Le Cessie S. (1990) Predictive value of statistical models. Stat Med 9(11):1303-25.
Genome 73

Formulate and evaluate: Population-specific complementary feeding

recommendation using linear programming
Staff : E. Ferguson1*, N. Darmon2, U. Fahmida3
Email Contact : elaine.ferguson@lshtm.ac.uk
Disseminated at : Sight and Life Magazine 2008;3:13-18
1
London School of Hygiene and tropical Medicine, London, UK
2
INSERM (Human Nutrition and Lipids), INRA, and Université Méditerranée Aix-Marseille, Faculté de
Médecine, Marseille, France
3
SEAMEO-TROPMED Regional Center for Community Nutrition, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Poor dietary quality is characteristic of complementary feeding diets consumed in
disadvantaged environments; contributing to multiple micronutrient deficiencies and their
associated adverse effects on infant health, growth and long-term development (Dewey and
Brown, 2003). In response, international agencies have emphasized the need for country-
specific approaches to improve complementary feeding diets, including evidence-based
guidelines on appropriated complementary feeding (WHO/UNICEF, 2003). To facilitate these
efforts, we have developed an approach based on linear programming analysis (LPA) that
objectively formulates and evaluates sets of food-based recommendations; and, when optimal
combinations of local foods are unlikely to ensure a nutritionally adequate diet, it confirms
the need for alternative intervention strategies to complement a food-based strategy (Ferguson
et al, 2006). The objective of the paper is to describe the contribution of the LPA in the
decision-making process involved in nutrition intervention program planning and advocacy
for improved complementary feeding diets and to describe, in simple terms, the steps using a
series of hypothetical examples.

Data requirements for performing LPA is presented in Table 1.
Table 1: Data required to define LP parameters

Data requirements Modules
List of foods typically consumed by target population All modules
For each food, nutrient content per 100grams, a realistic portion size per eating All modules
occasion, a maximum frequency of consumption per week, and its cost per edible 100
grams (optional)
The food consumption patterns of the target population (low-average-high levels) Modules I,
II, IV
The highest price the target population would be willing to spend on their infant’s diet All modules
(optional)
The target population’s breastfeeding status (breastfed – yes/no) Modules I,
II, IV
The estimated average energy requirements of the target population All modules
The desired nutrient content of the target population’s diet (e.g. FAO/WHO nutrient Modules I,
requirements) II, IV

Module I: Formulation of a set of food-based recommendations
Using this module, user can: (1) formulate a set of draft food-based recommendations, (2)
examine the nutrient or food content of the diet that best achieves the desired nutrient levels ,
i.e. optimal nutrient contents (FAO/WHO, 2002; FAO/WHO, 2004), and (3) identify nutrients
74 Information and Communication Technology

that are below their recommendation levels (FAO/WHO, 2002; FAO/WHO, 2004), even in a
diet that best achieves the desired nutrient levels.
Module II: Evaluation of recommendations for a food-based approach
Using this module, user can: (1) test a set of food-based recommendations to determine
whether local diets conforming to them are likely to be nutritionally adequate, (2) explore the
cost implications of a given set of food-based recommendations; and (3) determine whether a
food-based approach alone is likely to ensure a target population’s nutrient requirements are
met.
Module III: Identification of nutrient-dense local foods that provide key problem
nutrients
User can use this module to identify a combination of foods that, together, would provide
specific amounts of selected nutrients. These nutrient-dense foods can then be incorporated
into a set of food-based recommendations to improve them.
Module IV: Selection of a food-based approach from among alternatives
Using this module, user can compare alternative sets of food-based recommendations in terms
of their worst-case scenario nutrient levels or lower cost. The results from this analysis
provide objective evidence with which to inform the selection of a final set of food-based
recommendations from among alternative sets.
Several key nutrition program planning and advocacy decisions are addressed in each module
I-IV above, which shows the unique contribution LPA can make on decision-making process
(Table 2).

Table 2: key nutrition program planning and advocacy decisions addressed in each module of the LPA.
Modules Planning/advocacy decisions
I 1. What is the optimal set of food-based recommendations for a specific target
population?
2. What combination of nutrient-dense foods will come as close as possible to
achieving the desired nutrient levels?
3. What nutrients, if any, are likely to be low in local complementary feeding diets?
II 1. Will a set of food-based recommendations ensure nutritionally-adequate diets?
2. What is the lowest cost expected in diets conforming to a specific set of food-
based recommendations?
3. What nutrients will likely remain be low in diets adhering to the set of food-based
recommendations being tested?
III 1. What is best combination of local foods to fill a nutrient gap?
2. To create a recipe to improve dietary adequacy, which foods should be selected?
IV 1. What are the comparative cost and nutritional benefits of alternative sets of food-
based recommendations?
2. What is the impact on worst-case scenario nutrient levels and minimal cost of one
specific recommendation in a set of food-based recommendations i.e. is it
worthwhile including it?
Conclusion
This review has demonstrated the way in which an approach based on LPA can rapidly and
objectively inform food-based intervention program planning decisions and identify the need
for alternative intervention strategies to complement them.
Keywords
Complementary feeding, food-based approach, linear-programming.
References
Dewey KG, Brown KH. Update on technical issues concerning complementary feeding of young children in
developing countries and implications for intervention programs. Food Nutr Bull. 2003;24:5–28.
WHO/UNICEF. Global strategy for infant and young child feeding. Geneva: WHO; 2003.
Information and Communication Technology 75

Ferguson EL, Darmon N, Fahmida U, Fitriyanti S, Harper TB, Premachandra IM. Design of optimal food-based
complementary feeding recommendations and identification of key ‘‘problem nutrients’’ using goal
programming. J Nutr. 2006;136:2399–404.
FAO/WHO. Protein and amino acid requirements in human nutrition. 2002. Internet:
http://whqlibdoc.who.int/trs/WHO_TRS_935_eng.pdf.
FAO/WHO. Human vitamin and mineral requirements. Report of a joint FAO/WHO expert consultation, Bangkok,
Thailand. Rome: Food and Nutrition Division, FAO; 2002.

The development of model intelligence tutorial system for nursing

Problem Based Learning (Sistiwat)
Staff : T. Nuraini1*, E. Afifah1, Murtiwi1
Student : M.I. Sa’adah2, F. Ramadoni2, D. Novendasari2
Sponsor : Hibah PHK-A2 DIKTI 2008
Email Contact : tutinfik@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : T. Nuraini, E. Afifah, Murtiwi. The Development of Model
Intelligence Tutorial System for Nursing Problem Based Learning
(Sistiwat) in the one day research national nursing seminar on
March 20, 2009 at Faculty of Nursing UI building, Depok
1
Division of Basic Science in Nursing and Fundamental of Nursing, Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia,
Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Student in Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia. Faculty of Nursing, Universitas
Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
The Problem Based Learning (PBL) is the most appropriate learning method for the higher
education in nursing. The reason why this method is the most suitable method because it
requires facilitator’s attention in order to help each students to be more focus and directed
when they have to find out the solution over the problem that is given to them. However,
nowdays the facilitators in Faculty of Nursing Universitas Indonesia (FON-UI) don’t have
enough time to guide the students properly. This study aimed to find a prototype of tutorial
intelligentsia system for the nursing problem based learning which is integrated with the
internet connection or called the Computer Mediated Learning (CML) in Universitas
Indonesia so that the problem of the facilitator in FON UI can be solved by that.

The samples of this study were the students who enrolled Biology subject at the first semester
in 2008/ 2009 at FON-UI. The all samples identified into two groups; the experiment and
control group. The samples that were given the application of biotechnology as their trigger to
discuss using the combination of PBL system and internet connection/ CML (PBL Sistiwat)
classified as the experiment group whereas the samples that were given the reproduction
system as their trigger to discuss using PBL in face-to-face interaction method classified as
the control group. After applying the second method of learning, the researchers observed and
measured the students’ ability to understand the concept of knowledge and how to solve the
problem with the nursing knowledge. In addition, researchers also measured the satisfaction
level of students using the PBL method of on-line internet (Sistiwat) the quantitative and
qualitative.
Results and discussions

The PBL learning system with tutorial web-based learning experience designed to match the
face tutorial sessions PBL as closely as possible with the same time allow students to
participate from different locations. This system consists of four main components: the multi-
tool capital to support the students communication between students and between students
and the system in the group (network UI CML), a reference theoretical concept (of teaching
materials and modules), a model case, and the tutorial module.
This study’s results showed that the PBL Sistiwat compete the PBL in face-to-face
interaction. It illustrated that the post tests scores’ mean and the paper and presentation scores
in PBL Sistiwat was higher than PBL in face-to-face interaction (p = 0,017 and 0,000, α =
0,05). Besides, the students’ satisfactory level showed that the number of students who

identified their satisfaction in satisfied level was 62 out of 91 (68,1%), whereas the number of
students who indentified their satisfaction in very satisfied level was 21 out of 91 (23,1%).
The results of deep interview using Focus Group Discussion (FGD) also supported the
qualitative result.
Conclusion
To sum up, the PBL Sistiwat method was recommended to be applied in nursing education
system in order to create the professional nurses who can in touch with science and
technology.
Keywords
CML, nursing, PBL, tutorial intelligentsia system.
References
Afifah, E dan Syahreni, E (2005). Hubungan penerapan metode pembelajaran collaborative learning (CL) and
problem based learning (PBL) dengan motivasi belajar pada mahasiswa keperawatan Universitas Indonesia.
Jurnal Keperawatan Indonesia 9 (1). ISSN 1410-4490.
Billings, D.M & Halstead, J.A. (1998). Teaching in nursing: A guide for faculty. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.
Gallow De (2008), What is problem-based learning? Diambil pada 20 Februari 2008 dari
http://www.pbl.uci.edu/whatispbl.html.
Greenwald, N. (2001). Ill-defined encounters are the right kind! (guiding problem-based learning in science A
collaborative intelligent tutoring system for medical classrooms). Diambil pada tanggal 18 Februari 2008 dari
http://www.cct.umb.edu/pblscience.html.
Krisanti, E. & Mulia, K. (2004). Konsep belajar. Disampaikan pada Pelatihan “Collaborative Learning dan
Problem-based Learning”. Depok.
March, T. (2001). Working the web for education. Theory and practice on integrating the web for learning.
Diambil dari www.ozline.com/learning/theory.html pada 5 Februari 2008.
March, T. (1998). Why webquests? An introduction (web page). Diambil dari
http://www.ozline.com/webquests/intro.html pada 5 Februari 2008.
Martens, A., Bernauer, J., Illman, T., and Seitz, A. (2001). Does ‘n drugs-The Virtual Polyclinic. An intelligent
tutoring system for web-based and case-oriented training in medicine. Proceedings of the AMIA Fall
Symposium.
Ortiz . (2006). Online collaborative problem-based learning: Design, facilitation, student work strategies and
supporting technologies. Doctor of Education. Diambil dari
http://www.columbia.edu/~bil2001/onlinePBL/chapter6&References.pdf pada tanggal 18 Februari 2008.
Pujasari, H. (2007). Nursing students’ and nurse educators’ perception and attitudes towards bioscience in an
Indonesian bachelor of nursing program. Thesis of advanced nursing practice, Melbourne, Australia.
Suebnukam S., Haddawy P. (2004). A Collaborative Intelligent Tutoring System for Medical Problem-Based
Learning. Thailand. Diambil dari http://www.cs.ait.ac.th/~haddawy/pubs/iui04.pdf pada tanggal 18 Februari
2008.
Tim PDPT UI (2005). Modul Pelatihan Program Dasar Pendidikan Tinggi (PDPT) UI, Problem Based Learning
(PBL) dan Collaborative Learning (CL), disampaikan pada pelatihan fasilitator MPKT PDPT, Depok.
Ward, JD dan Lee, CL (2002). Review of problem-based learning. Journal of Family and Consumer Sciences
Education 20 (1).
Widjayakusumah, MD dan Tanzil, M (2005). Pengalaman inovasi pendidikan di Fakultas Kedokteran Universitas
Indonesia. Majalah Pendidikan Universitas Indonesia II (1). ISSN 0216-0889.

The implementation of informatics technology media utilization to

improve knowledge in practicing public health services in
Jabodetabek
Staff : R.T. Hariyati1*, E. Nurachmah2, and S. Mulyono3
Student : D. Ayu, Agustin, A. Martiwi4
Sponsor : Incentive of Technology Ministry 2007-2008
Email Contact : rrtutik@yahoo.com, sigit_mulyono@yahoo.ca
Disseminated at : Training of public health practitioners in Jakarta, 26-27 August
2008
1
Basic and Fundamental Nursing Division, Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Medical and surgical Nursing Division, Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
3
Community Nursing Division, Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
4
Students of Faculty of Nursing, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
In line with the development of science and knowledge and the demand s of society to public
health practitioners to always providing the best services, the public health practitioner needs
to identify an alternative method, an easy way of learning which is not limited to space,
place, and time. Based on the above reasons, a research in measuring the effectiveness of
Informatics Technology based learning was conducted to the Public Health Practitioners in
Jabodetabek.
Methodology
This research has been conducted in 2 years with Operations Research Studies/OR. The
Operations research has steps: needs assesment, trial and error, implementing and evaluation.
The research activity began with identification the problem, and continued with an
improvement of distance learning program using CD-delivery and e-learning. Before
elaborating the activities, the research team arranged a meeting with The Headmaster of
Health Office in DKI Jakarta, Depok, Bekasi, Bogor, Cilegon, and Serang. The purpose was
to find out their readiness on infrastructure and to develop an implementation strategic on
informatics technology based learning.
The implementation of the activities in the first year (2007) was a training program to
stimulate team building, active learning method, and to establish a community in a learning
program. The instrument used in the reseach was a questionnaire that was distributed to 152
public health practitioners in Jabodetabek. The purpose was to identify their basic knowledge
on technology based learning, support of infrastructure, and their motivation to conduct
informatics technology based learning. In the second year (2008), an action research was
implemented on distance learning program for the public health practitioners in Jabodetabek.


A website has been developed to achieve this purpose, that was www.fik.ui.ac.id/pkko.

Picture.1. Front view the website: www.fik.ui.ac.id/pkko
The findings of the research in 2008 demonstrated that in the area of infrastructure: there are
99% of Puskesmas and Health Office have computers, 76% connects to the internet, and 20%
has a good internet access. The use of this technology is 98% related to administrative tasks,
whereas its use for improving their knowledge through a distance learning method is not
considered yet. Forty three percent of the respondents stated they have a good motivation to
improve their knowledge using a distance learning method. In addition, from basic learning
skills through internet perspective, there are 56% of the respondents have moderate internet
use skill.
After the action research was conducted through a training program to learn how to use
informatics technology, the research result shown as on the table below:

Table.1 The perception of respondents on Informatics Technology based Learning
No Variable Jabodebek Cilegon &Serang
Number (n=100) % Number (n=26) %

1 As an alternative learning method
• Disagree 0 0 0 0
• Agree 13 13 2 7.7
• Strongly agree 87 87 24 92.3
2 As a media of improving knowledge
• Agree 18 18 0 3,8
3 Improving the perspective
• Agree 20 20 3 11.5
4 To get information easier
• Agree 15 15 8 11.5
5 To communicate each other
• Agree 28 28 8 11.5
6 Create difficulties
• Strongly disagree 48 48 12 46.2
• Disagree 48 48 13 50
• Agree 2 2 1 3.8
• Strongly agree 2 2 0
7 Very flexible
• Strongly disagree 1 1 0 0
• Agree 44 44 12 46.2
Enjoyable
8 • Agree 38 38 10 38.5
61 61 16 61.5
• Strongly agree
9 Improving knowledge
• Agree 33 33 11 42.3
10 Needs expenses

No Variable Jabodebek Cilegon &Serang
Number (n=100) % Number (n=26) %

• Disagree 53 53 13 50
• Agree 36 36 11 42.3
11 Willing to learn
• Agree 40 40 7 26.9
12 Willingness to use internet
• Agree 36 36 8 30.8
• Strongly agree 64 64 18 69.2,
13 Willingness to independent learning

• Agree 52 52 13 50
• Strongly agree 48 48 13 50
14 Perception on IT based Learning

• Poor 57 57 14 53.8
• Good 43 43 12 46.2
Table 1 above showed that half of the respondents stated agree that informatics technology
based learning can improve the willingness to learn; be an alternative learning method, and be
a learning media. Furthermore, informatics technology based learning facilitates in gaining
the information easier, less difficult, and flexible. Informatics based learning method also
encourage respondents to learn using internet access and be independent learner. However,
the cost of learning using internet is assumed still expensive. Finally, the perception on
informatics technology based learning is balanced between good perception (43% and 46,2%)
and poor (unfavourable) perception (57% and 53,8%).
Conclusion and suggestion

This research used an action research to identify the needs and perception on the IT based
learning from the public health practitioners in Puskesmas and Health Office in Jabodetabek
area. The number of respondents at the beginning of the research was 152 persons. After the
action research, there was only 126 persons participated. The result of the research concludes
that informatics technology based learning is potential to be implemented by the public health
practitioners in Puskesmas, encourage the active and independent learning. The infrastructure
obstacle and the expensive cost of internet access causes the good and the porr perception of
the respondents still balanced. Therefore, the policy and support from the institution’s leader
is needed to success the learning program base on informatics technology. The supporting
infrastructure and motivation to use this method is the successful key of the program.

Keywords
Active learning, informatics technology, internet, public health practitioner.
References
Hershey (2005), Strength of on line learning, acees from www.proquest.umi.com 17 march 2007.
Http//ferysifa.tripod.com.Colaboration of tehnology internet and religion education.
Kozlowski, D. (2002), Using on line learning in traditional face to face environment computer in Nursing.
Maki W, Maki, R. (2002) Multimedia comprehension skill predict differntial outcome of web-based and lecture
courses. Journal of experimental Psychology Applied 8.2.
Madjd, S.(2002) Usage of information resources by computer. singapur:Bradford.
Reece I, Walker. (2000) Teaching, training and learning. Fourd edition. Sunderland, Business Education
Publishers.
www.apindonesia.com., education problems in Indonesia, acces.7 March 2007.

Thermal radiation modeling for oil and gas tank

Staff : Fatma Lestari1*, Yulianto, S. Nugroho2
Student : Husnul Khotimah1
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : fatma@ui.ac.id; yulianto.nugroho@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : International Seminar on Occupational Health and Safety FKMUI,
Depok, August 27th, 2008
1.
Occupational Health and Safety Department, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI Depok
16424, Indonesia
2.
Mechanical Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI Depok 16424, Indonesia
Introduction
Many different types of consequences modeling exist 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. They range from simple
equations that can be solved by hand to complex models that require massive amounts of
input data and powerful computers1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Several fire accident scenarios could be modeled
including pool fire, jet fire, and BLEVE 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. A pool fire occurs when a flammable
liquid forms a puddle on the ground and catches on fire1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Thermal radiation is the
primary hazard associated with a pool fire. Other potential pool fire hazards include smoke,
toxic by products from the fire, and secondary fires and explosions in the surrounding area1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6
. The impact of thermal radiation on human depends on heat flux generated from the
thermal radiation3,6. Table 1 shows a different level of heat flux (kw/m2) with its related
impact.
Table 1. Impact of thermal radiation on human3

Incident Impact
Flux
(kW/m2)
37.5 100% lethality in 1 minute (Barry, 2002)
25 1% lethality in 10 seconds (Barry, 2002)
15.8 100% lethality in 1 minute, significant injury in 10 seconds (Barry, 2002)
12.5 1% lethality in 1 minute; first degree burns in 10 seconds (Barry, 2002)
6.3 Emergency actions lasting a minute can be performed by personnel without shielding but with appropriate
clothing (API RP 521)
4.7 Emergency actions lasting several minutes can be performed by personnel without shielding, but with appropriate
clothing (API RP 521)
ALOHA (Areal Locations of Hazardous Atmospheres) is a computer program designed
especially for use by people responding to chemical releases, as well as for emergency
planning and training. ALOHA models three hazard categories: toxic gas dispersion, fires,
and explosions. ALOHA uses three threshold values (measured in kilowatts per square meter
and denoted as kW/m2) to create the default threat zones 7,8: Red: 10 kW/m2 (potentially lethal
within 60 sec); Orange: 5 kW/m2 (second-degree burns within 60 sec); and Yellow: 2 kW/m2
(pain within 60 sec).
Methodology
The computer software use for modeling is ALOHA® version 5.4 which is a trademark from
The CAMEO® Software System, developed jointly by the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) and the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)7,8.
Unit of Analysis was selected based on the worst case scenario and the materials stored. The
Tank No. 18 was chosen with the material stored is gasoline (Premium) (Figure 1)9. Threat
zone is generated using the software, and there are three levels of concerns are chosen: red,
orange and yellow. The red threat zone represents the worst hazard and the orange and yellow
threat zones represent areas of decreasing hazard. Geographic Information System using
Google Earth is then used to plot the threat zone.


The flammable liquid storage tank was located in North Jakarta in which several other
flammable liquids including different types of gasoline (Pertamax Plus, Pertamax, Premium),
Kerosene and Diesel oil (Solar) are stored. The storage plant was located near to the
residential zone (Figure 1). There are 23 (twenty four) storage tank which consist of: 10 (ten)
tanks stored Premium, 2 (two) tanks for Pertamax, 2 (two) tanks for Pertamax Plus, 4 (four)
for kerosene, and 5 (five) for diesel oil.
2
4
6
1 8
3 1
5 1 14
7
16
9
1 18
1 20
22
15
17 2
19
Figure 1. Flammable storage plant at North Jakarta

Figure legend:

Pertamax Plus Pertamax

Premium Diesel Oil

Kerosene
GIS mapping for threat zone generated using Google Earth at the altitude of 1994 feet is
presented in Figure 2. The Red threat zone (heat exposure at 10 kW/m2) will affect 45,257 m2
of the area, affecting Tank No. 15, 16, 17, 19, and 20 (Figure 2). The red zone will also affect
the main car transportation way inside the storage plant, and 7 (seven) Rukun Tetangga (RT)
which occupied by 773 family members or 2869 people at the residential area near the storage
plant10. The Orange threat zone (heat exposure at 5 kW/m2) will affect 90,829 m2 of the area,
affecting Tank No. 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, and 22 (Figure 2). The orange zone will also affect the
main car transportation way inside the storage plant, and 16 (sixteen) Rukun Tetangga (RT)
which occupied by 2370 family members or 8814 people at the residential area near the
storage plant10. The Yellow threat zone (heat exposure at 2 kW/m2) will affect 222,376 m2 of
the area, affecting Tank No. 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23 and 24 (Figure 2). The
yellow zone will also affect the main car transportation way inside the storage plant, oil
storage tank, control room, and 21 (twenty one) Rukun Tetangga (RT) which occupied by
3195 family members or 11,890 people at the residential area near the storage plant10.

10
12 14
16
9
11 20
13 22
15 24
17
19
23
Figure 2. GIS mapping of Threat Zone
Conclusion
In conclusion, the model could be used for zone classification of thermal radiation, the
number of people effected, and to develop emergency response plan.
Keywords
ALOHA (Area Locations of Hazardous Atmosphere), consequences analysis, Fire Modeling,
pool fire, thermal radiation.
References
Nolan, Dennis P.(1996). Handbook of Fire and Explosion Protection Engineering Principles For Oil, Gas,
Chemical, and Related Facilities. New Jersey, U.S.A.: Noyes Publications.
Drysdale, Dougal. (1985). An Introduction to Fire Dynamics.
CCPS. (2003). Guidelines For Fire Protection In Chemical, Petrochemical, And Hydrocarbon Processing
Facilities. Park Avenue, NY: Center For Chemical Process Safety Of The American Institute Of Chemical
Engineers. (Fire Protection Guideline).
Lees, Frank P. (1996). Loss Prevention in the Process Industries. Oxford, Butterworth-Heinemann.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. 2003. Fire Protection Handbook. USA: One Battery March Park.
Society of Fire Protection Engineers. 2002. SFPE Engineering Guide, Predicting 1st and 2nd Degree burns from
Thermal Radiation.
US EPA. (2007). ALOHA® User’s Manual. US EPA and National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.
February 2007.
NOAA and US EPA.(2006). Technical documentation and software quality assurance for project Eagle-ALOHA.
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
Khotimah, H. (2008). Analisis Konsekuensi Pajanan Radiasi Panas dari Kebakaran jenis Pool Fire pada Tangki
Timbun Premium di Depot Pertamina Plumpang Tahun 2007 dengan mengunakan ALOHA (AREA
LOCATIONS OF HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE). Skripsi Fakultas Kesehatan Masyarakat, Universitas
Indonesia.

Functionality of indigenous probiotic from Dadih and regulatory

aspects of probiotic in Indonesia
Staff : Ingrid S. Surono1* and Widjaja Lukito1
Sponsor : DIPA and conference organizer
Disseminated at : Ingrid S. Surono1* and Widjaja Lukito1 (2008) Functionality of
Indigenous probiotic from dadih and regulatory aspects of
probiotic in Indonesia. 2nd European Conference on Probiotics and
Their application in Cracow, Poland, 15 -17 October 2008. Oral
presentation

1
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia, Jl. Salemba Raya 6 Jakarta 10430, Indonesia

*Corresponding author
Introduction
Dadih is an Indonesian traditional yoghurt like-product product from Minangkabau, West
Sumatera, spontaneously fermented from raw buffalo milk in bamboo tubes and capped with
banana leaf. Interestingly, the milk was fermented under unhygienic condition, no heat
process applied to the milk, and fermented spontaneously by lactic acid bacteria indigenously
present in the raw buffalo milk (Akuzawa and Surono, 2002), elder people in West Sumatera
even believe that dadih has beneficial effects for their health.
Dadih lactic IS-27526 was able to enhance humoral immune response in vivo, increase the
IgA levels in mice (Riewpassa, 2006). LAB in foods have a long history of safe use
(Salminen, et al. 1998), likewise, dadih which is safe for human consumption. In the case of
orally administrated probiotic, adhesion and viability, or the retention of heat labile
component, appear to be important for the stimulation of the immune system (Ouwehand, et
al., 1999).
The objective of this research were to study the effect dadih probiotic supplementation on
humoral immune response (total IgA serum and sIgA saliva in children younger than 5 years,
increase of their body weight, and to do the tracking of dadih probiotic on Indonesian people.

Dadih probiotic were assessed for probiotic function, by tracking on the stool samples using
molecular detection on Indonesian adults living with HIV/AIDS. The safety of Lactobacillus
plantarum isolated from Dadih, was validated in immuno compromise subjects. Enterococcus
faecium strain was validated in undernourished children younger than 5 years, on humoral
immune response sIgA from saliva, and in improving nutritional status.

The dadih Lactobacillus plantarum strain has probiotic function on the subjects shown by
availability of the probiotic strain in the fecal samples of the subjects identified by PCR, and
have been proven as safe probiotic towards immuno-compromised HIV/AIDS subjects.
Enterococcus faecium enhance the humoral immune response by increasing sIgA saliva of the
children.
Regulation for functional Food took effect in 2005. For probiotic food products, the
government allows to rate “probiotic fermented milk” according to the number of viable cells
under this regulation. It is important for the government to make sure that such products is
safe for the consumers and their health claims are not misleading. National Agency for Drug
and Food Control, Republic of Indonesia is currently developing a Draft Guidelines for
Evaluation of Probiotic in Food for Nutrition and Health Claim based on The NADFC Decree
2005 on Functional Food. ”Probiotic (Lactobacillus and Bifidobactrium,except L. bulgaricus)
Indigenous Studies 85

can help maintenance digestive function” is allowed, however, there should be based on
scientific evidence.The result is based on the clinical study in Indonesian people.
The regulation will cover steps to evaluate the microorganism : identification of
genus/species/strain, functional characterization, clinical study in human : safety, efficacy,
effectiveness, as well as the labeling. Genus, species and strain (physiological effect depend
on specific strain). While the claim should include minimum viable numbers of the probiotic
at the end of the shelf life, suggested serving size to be consumed in relation with the health
claim, storage conditions, address for consumer to get information
Keywords
Children less than five, dadih, HIV/AIDS people, immune function, indigenous probiotic,
regulation.
References
Akuzawa, Ryozo and Ingrid S. Surono, 2002. Fermented Milk of Asia. Encyclopaedia of Dairy Science.
Academic Press, 2002.
Erickson, K.L. and N. E. Hubbard. 2000. Probiotic Immunomodulation in Health and Disease. J. Nutr. (suppl),
130:403S-409S.
F. R-Zakaria, F. P. Koestomo, N.Novitasari and I. S. Surono, 2004. Potential of Dadih Lactic Bacteria IS-27526
Isolated to Increase IgA Antibody Secretion in Below Five Year Old Children. Proceeding International
Symposium Probiotic for Human and Immunity, September 7-8;, 2004. Pelangi Hotel, Seminyak, Bali
Ouwehand, A.C., P.V. Kirjavainen, C. Shortt and S. Salminen. 1999. Probiotics: Mechanism and Established
Effects. International Dairy Journal, 9: 43-52.
Salminen, S., A. C. Ouwehand, Y. Benno, and Y. K. Lee. 1999. Probiotics: how should they be defined? Trends
Food Sci. Technol. 10:107–110.
86 Indigenous Studies

Probiotic properties of lactic acid bacteria isolated from dadih, a

traditional Indonesian fermented milk
Sponsor : SEAMEO TORPMED RCCN UI and conference organizer
Disseminated at : Ingrid S. Surono (2008) Probiotic Properties of Lactic Acid
Bacteria Isolated from Dadih, a Traditional Indonesian Fermented
Milk. ILSI SEA Region’s Symposium on Diet, Nutrition and
Immunity – April 16-17, 2008, Singapore. Invited Speaker
1
SEAMEO TROPMED RCCN Universitas Indonesia, Jl. Salemba Raya 6 Jakarta 10430, Indonesia
Introduction
Dadih, an Indonesian traditional fermented buffalo milk in Indonesia, has been believed to
have a beneficial impact on human health due to the probiotic properties of the lactic acid
bacteria (LAB) involved in its fermentation process. Various indigenous lactic bacteria are
involved in the dadih fermentation, an Indonesian traditional fermented buffalo milk of West
Sumatra, which may vary from time to time as well as from place to place of dadih making
(Akuzawa and Surono, 2002).Some dadih lactic acid bacteria have immunomodulatory
properties (Surono et al., 2005).
In previous studies the adhesion capacity of specific LAB isolates from dadih to intestinal
mucus and the ability to inhibit human pathogens and displace them from human mucus
showed that L. plantarum IS-10506 is a potential probiotic culture. Many criteria have been
suggested for the selection of probiotics, including safety, tolerance to gastrointestinal
conditions, ability to adhere to the gastrointestinal mucosa, and competitive exclusion of
pathogens (Collado et al., 2005; Collins et al., 1998; Ouwehand et al., 2002). Adhesion to the
intestinal mucosa would allow colonization, although transient, of the human intestinal tract
and has been related to the ability to modulate the immune system, especially during its
development (Schiffrin et al., 1997). Thus, adhesion is one of the main selection criteria for
new probiotic strains (Salminen et al., 1999).The aim of the study was to validate the effect of
the most potential strains on humoral immune response as well as viability of fecal lactic acid
bacteria in vivo.

Strains and culture conditions. The indigenous dadih LAB strains were Lactobacillus
plantarum IS-10506 and IS-20506 and Enterococcus faecium IS-27526, IS-23427, and IS-
16183. All strains were isolated from dadih fermented milk (Surono, 2003) and were
identified by 16S rRNA gene sequencing as L. plantarum (GenBank accession no. DQ860148
and DC860149) and E. faecium (GenBank accession no. EF068251, EF068250, and
EF068249). All strains were kept in the University of Turku culture collection. For assays
with freshly grown bacteria, the bacteria were cultured in MRS broth for 18 h at 37C° under
aerobic conditions, harvested by centrifugation (3,200 xg, 4°C, 20 min), and washed twice
with phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) pH 7.0) buffer. The viability of the cells was tested on
MRS agar plates. The bacterial pathogens used in this study were Bacteroides vulgatus DSM
1447, Clostridium histolyticum DSM 627, Escherichia coli K-2, Salmonella enterica serovar
Typhimurium ATCC 12028, and Staphylococcus aureus DSM 20231, were grown in Gifu
anaerobic medium (Nissui Pharmaceutical, Tokyo, Japan) under anaerobic conditions (10%
H2, 10% CO2, and 80% N2; Concept 400 anaerobic chamber, Ruskinn Technology, Leeds,
UK). Bacteria were metabolically labeled by the addition of titrated thymidine at 10 l/ml
([5-3H]thymidine, 120 Ci/mmol; Amersham Biosciences, Buckinghamshire, UK). All
bacterial cultures were incubated at 37°C.

Competition between pathogens and LAB strains. Competitive exclusion of the pathogens by
tested probiotics was determined as described previously (Rinkinen et al., 2003). Also, we
analyzed the influence of the previous incubation in the competition test; for this, probiotic
and pathogen strains were mixed in the same proportions and were incubated for 120 min at
37°C. After incubation, the mix was added to the intestinal mucus, and competitive adhesion
was assessed following the methodology described elsewhere (Collado et al., 2005). After a
total reaction time of 120 min for each condition, the cells of the pathogen bound to the
mucus were removed, and the adhesion ratio (percent) was calculated as described above. For
each condition, wells with PBS only, instead of nonradiolabeled adhesive cells, were included
as controls, and the percentage of the pathogenic cells bound was considered the reference
value (0%).
Statistical analysis. Statistical analysis was done by SPSS 11.0 software (SPSS Inc., Chicago,
Ill.). Data were subjected to a one-way analysis of variance.
Animal experiment
Sprague Dauley rats were used, grouped into 4, Control group, supplemented with normal
diet only without probiotic, L. casei Shirota group, L. plantarum IS-10506 group, and L.
plantarum IS-20506 group, each kind of probiotic was supplemented at 1010 cfu/day. Each rat
was placed in metabolic cage, fed with normal diet for 5 days during adaptation period, and
then supplemented with probiotic for 7 days and followed by normal diet for 3 days. Fecal
secretory IgA was observed by sandwich ELISA, at 4 periods, before treatment, after 3 days
treatment, after 7 days treatment, and after normal diet for 3 days or end of experiment.
Likewise, the total fecal lactic acid bacteria and coliform were plate counting.

The adhesion of LAB strains varied from 1.4 to 9.8%, depending on the strain. The most
adhesive L. plantarum strain was IS-10506, with 9.8% adhesion, whereas the most adhesive
E. faecium strain was IS-16183, with 4.9% adhesion.
Results of competitive exclusion studies between pathogens and LAB strains show that
previous incubation at 37°C for 2 h decreased the pathogen adhesion to intestinal mucus, but
this behavior depended on each LAB strain and the pathogen assayed.. Every LAB strain was
able to compete and reduce (P < 0.05) the adhesion of E. coli K-2, S. enterica serovar
Typhimurium ATCC 12028, and S. aureus DSM 20231. The values ranged from 39.5 to
43.2%, 12.3 to 32.9%, and 23.9 to 36.3%, respectively. In certain cases, the presence of LAB
increased the adhesion of B. vulgatus DSM 1447 and C. histolyticum DSM 627. All strains,
with one exception, i.e., L. plantarum IS-20506, improved pathogen adhesion from 9.0 to
13.5%. L. plantarum IS-10506 improved the adhesion of B. vulgatus (33.5%). Every LAB
strain after incubation with pathogen strains at 37°C was able to compete and reduce (P <
0.05) the adhesion of E. coli K-2, S. enterica serovar Typhimurium ATCC 12028, and S.
aureus DSM 20231 by 57.7 to 64.7%, 32.8 to 56.0%, and 54.7 to 59.4%, respectively.
Further, all LAB strains reduced the adhesion of B. vulgatus DSM 1447 and C. histolyticum
DSM 627 from 44.4 to 66.8% and 14.5 to 34.00%, respectively.
In general, preincubation with LAB strains reduced pathogen adhesion. This is consistent
with the coaggregation between pathogen and LAB strains shown in previous studies
(Collado et al., 2007). These results suggest that coaggregation mechanisms between
pathogen and LAB strains are involved in the reduction of pathogen adhesion to mucus.
Natural wild strains isolated from dadih typical Indonesian fermented milk show inhibitory,
competitive, and displacing properties against pathogens, and they are promising candidates
for future probiotics. However, considering the high specificity of these processes, it is very
important to characterize the properties of the strains and strain combinations in order to
select the best strain or strain combination for the prevention or treatment of specific
infections. In this study, L. plantarum IS-10506 and E. faecium IS-27526 appear to have the
best properties of the assessed isolates.

Total secretory IgA

The increased values of fecal secretory IgA in rat supplemented with L. plantarum IS-10506
were significantly higher (p=0.05) than control and other probiotic groups, at the end of 3
days, at the end of 7 days and 3 days after normal diet (0.491 mg/ml, 0.311 mg/ml and 0.647
mg/ml respectively).
Fecal microbiota
Supplementation of probiotics significantly increased the fecal lactic acid bacteria in all of
probiotic groups, and the highest was found in IS-10506 group, while fecal coliform was
significantly lower in L. plantarum IS-10506 group, followed by L. plantarum IS-20506
group and L. casei Shirota group.
It is concluded that Lactobacillus plantarum IS-10506 and IS-20506 isolated from dadih are
potential candidates for using them as probiotic bacteria as they are capable of remaining
viable in the gut, reducing total fecal coliforms, and inducing the total IgA secretion. The
increase of secretory IgA is important to protect the mucosal surface from infectious diseases.
Keywords
Adhesion, competitiveness against pathogen, dadih, immune system , Lactic acid bacteria,
probiotic, viability.
References
Akuzawa, Ryozo and Ingrid S. Surono, 2002. Fermented Milk of Asia. Encyclopaedia of Dairy Science.
Academic Press, 2002.
Collado, M. C., M. Gueimonde, M. Hernandez, Y. Sanz, and S. Salminen. 2005. Adhesion of selected
Bifidobacterium strains to human intestinal mucus and its role in enteropathogen exclusion. J. Food Prot.
68:2672-2678.
Collins, J. K., G. Thornton, and G. O. Sullivan. 1998. Selection of probiotic strains for human application. Int.
Dairy J. 8:487-490.
Collado, M. Carmen Ingrid Surono, Jussi Meriluoto and Seppo Salminen. Potential probiotic characteristics of
Lactobacillus and Enterococcus strains isolated from traditional dadih fermented milk against pathogen
intestinal colonization. Journal of Food Protection, Vol. 70, No. 3, 2007, 700–705.
Erickson, K.L. and N. E. Hubbard. 2000. Probiotic Immunomodulation in Health and Disease. J. Nutr. (suppl),
130:403S-409S.
I. S. Surono and A. Hosono, 1996. Antimutagenicity of milk cultured with lactic acid bacteria from Dadih against
mutagenic Terasi. Milchwissenschaft 51 (9) 1996, 493-497.
Mitsuoka T., 1997. The Intestinal Flora and its Important Relationship with Health. In. Intestinal Flora and
Immunity: Intestinal Infection, Allergies, and Cancer. Yakult Honsha Co., Ltd., Tokyo.
Ouwehand, A. C., S. Salminen, S. Tolkko, P. Roberts, J. Ovaska, and E. Salminen. 2002. Resected human coloni
tissue: new model for characterizing adhesion of lactic acid bacteria. Clin. Diagn. Lab. Immunol. 9:184-186.
Rinkinen, M., E. Westermarck, S. Salminen, and A. C. Ouwehand. 2003. Absence of host specificity for in vitro
adhesion of probiotic lactic acid bacteria to intestinal mucus. Vet. Microbiol. 97:55–61.
Salminen, S., A. C. Ouwehand, Y. Benno, and Y. K. Lee. 1999. Probiotics: how should they be defined? Trends
Food Sci. Technol. 10:107–110.
Schiffrin, E. J., D. Brassard, A. L. Servin, F. Rochat, and A. Donnet-Hughes. 1997. Immune modulation of blood
leukocytes in humans by lactic acid bacteria: criteria for strain selection. Am. J. Clin. Nutr. 66:515–520.
Surono, I. S., and A. Hosono. 1996. Antimutagenicity of milk cultured with lactic acid bacteria from dadih against
mutagenic terasi. Milchwissenschaft 51:493–497.
Surono, I. S. 2003. In vitro probiotic properties of indigenous dadih lactic acid bacteria. Asian-Aust. J. Anim. Sci.
16:726–731.

Nano-coral as osteoconductive agent in bone regeneration proccess

Staff : E.W. Bachtiar1*, B.M. Bachtiar1, S.A. Soekanto1, L.D. Sulistiani2,
Latief B.S.3, Abas B.
Student :-
Sponsor : RUUI 2007
Disseminated at : The 22nd International Association for Dental Research (SEA
Division) & 19th South East Asia Association for Dental Education
Manila, Philipine (October 8-10, 2008)
1
2
Department of Oral Surgery, Faculty of Dentistry Universitas, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
3
Badan Tenaga Nuklir Nasional (BATAN)
Introductions
Coral as a new biomaterial for bone graft substitute has been studied for induction of jaw
bone regeneration. The structure of the commonly used coral, porites, is similar to that of
cancellous bone and its initial mechanical properties resemble those of bone. The exoskeleton
of these high content calcium carbonate scaffolds has since been shown to be biocompatible.
However those potency need to be improved.
Objectives
This study was aimed to evaluate potency of nano scale Coral as osteoinductive agent by in
vitro and in vivo experiments. Methods: We prepared a nano-scale coral to achieve the
material properties such as more biocompatible and biodegradable. MG 63 osteoblast cell
lines were coculture with nano-coral for further evaluation of bone regeneration marker,
Alkaline Phosphatase (ALP) and osteocalcin. In addition, rat connective tissue and bone
trabeculae content of tooth socket of post tooth extraction were also evaluated.
Results
ALP has significantly increased in the group with the addition of the size of 1000 nm coral in
comparison to those group without coral treatment (p<0.05). A significant higher of
osteocalcin concentration was also noted in the experimental group with the addition of
200mesh and 1000nm coral (p<0.001), Furthermore, connective tissue and bone trabeculae
fractions were formed in a higher proportion in comparison to those negative control.
Conclusions
Nano-coral induced bone regeneration protein markers ALP and osteocalcin in osteoblast
culutre as well as enhanced connective tissue and bone trabeculae formations.
Keywords
ALP , coral, osteoblast, osteocalcin, scaffold.
References
Prendergast PJ, Mc Hugh PE. Topics in bio-mechanical engineering: scaffold an cells: preliminary biomechanical
analysis and results for the use of a collagen-gag scaffold for bone tissue engineering 2004; 6: 167-83.
Yang S, Leong KF, Du Z, Chua CK. The design of scaffolds for use in tissue engineering. Part I. Traditional
factors. Tissue Engineering J 2001;7: 679-689.
Vuola J. Natural coral and hydroxyapatite as bone substitutes. Departement of Plastic Surgery. Helsinki University
Central Hospital. 2001; 9-25.

Analysis of radioactive transport safety regulation implementation in

Indonesia
Staff : Fatma Lestari1*, Hendra1, Achmad Bussamah2
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : fatma@ui.ac.id; dahen@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : International Seminar on Occupational Health and Safety, FKM
UI, Depok, August 27th, 2008
1
Occupational Health and Safety Department, Faculty of Public Health, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI Depok
16424, Indonesia
2
Badan Pengawas Tenaga Nuklir (BAPETEN) - Nuclear Energy Regulatory Agency, Indonesia
Introduction
The transport safety regulation for radioactive materials plays important role to ensure the
implementation of safety procedures. Several international standards for safety regulations for
the transport of radioactive materials have been established (Table 1).
Table 2.Safety Regulations for the Transport of Radioactive Material
Mode of International / Name of regulation / agreement / code Current Scope
transport regional version
organization
All IAEA Regulation for the Safe Transport of Radioactive TS-R-1; 2005 Worldwide
Material, TS-R-1 Edition
All UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous 2005 Edition Worldwide
Goods (14th Revised
Edition)
Sea IMO International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code 2004 Edition Worldwide
(IMDG Code) (with
amendment
International; Code of the Safe Carriage of Packaged 32-04)
Irradiated Nuclear Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Worldwide
Radioactive Wastes on Board Ships (INF Code 2000 Edition
Air ICAO Technical Instruction for the Safe Transport of 2005/06 Worldwide
Dangerous Goods by Air (TI) Edition
Dangerous Goods Regulations (DGR)
IATA
2006 Edition Worldwide
(47th Edition)
Road UN/ECE European Agreement concerning the International 2005 Edition Regional
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR)
Rail OTIF Regulations Concerning the International Carriage of 2005 Edition Regional
Dangerous Goods by Rail (RID)
Road and MERCOSUR/ Agreement of Partial Reach to Facilitate the Transport 1994 Regional
rail MERCOSUL of Dangerous Goods
Inland UN/ECE European Agreement concerning the International 2005 Edition Regional
waterways Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Inland Waterways
(ADN)
CCNR Provisions concerning the Carriage of Dangerous 2005 Edition Rhine
Goods on the Rhine (ADNR) navigation
Post UPU Universal Postal Convention and its detailed 2005 Edition Worldwide
regulations
Source: Safety Regulations Governing the Transport of Radioactive Material1.
Methodology
A comparison between the international safety standards of IAEA2-15 and existing Indonesian
regulation16-25 on the issue of safe transportation of radioactive material was conducted by
analyzing each items in the regulations.
Nano Science and Technology 91


A comparison between international safety standards for safe transport of radioactive
materials with existing Indonesian regulation is summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. A comparison between international safety standards for safe transport of radioactive materials with existing Indonesian
regulation
No Item IAEA Indonesia
1 Safety IAEA Safety Standards Series No. TS-R-1. Government Regulation No. 26, 2002. Transport
transportation for 2005. Standards Regulations for the Safe Safety of Radioactive Materials
Radioactive Transport of Radioactive Material 2005
Materials Edition. IAEA Safety No. TS-R-1. Chairman Decree No: 04/Ka-BAPETEN/V-99.
Safety Provision on Radioactive Material
Transportation
Chairman Decree No: 05-P/Ka-BAPETEN/VII-

00. Guide for Safety Requirement of
Radioactive Material Transportation
No Item IAEA Indonesia
2 Guidance on Safe IAEA. 1994. Quality Assurance for the Safe Not adopted yet
Transport of Transport of Radioactive Material. Safety
Radioactive Series No. 113.
Materials
IAEA, 1994. Compliance Assurance for the Not adopted yet
Safe Transport of Radioactive Material.
Safety Series No. 112, IAEA. Vienna:
International Atomic Energy Agency.
IAEA. 2002. Advisory Material for the IAEA Not adopted yet
Regulations for the Safe Transport of
Radioactive Material, Safety Standards Series
No. TS-G-1.1 (ST-2). Vienna: International
Atomic Energy Agency.
IAEA, 2002. Planning and Preparing for Not adopted yet

Emergency Response to Transport Accidents
Involving Radioactive Material.
Source: Bussamah, A. 200722.
Conclusion
The analysis of international safety standards for safe transport of radioactive materials with
existing Indonesian regulation suggested that the Indonesian regulation need to be improved.
Some particular guidance including the establishment of guidance for the quality assurance
program and emergency response for the safe transport of radioactive material need to be
developed to ensure the safe transport of radioactive materials, particularly in Indonesia.
Keywords
Radioactive transportation, risk identification, safety regulation for radioactive transport.
References
WNTI. Safety Regulations Governing the Transport of Radioactive Material, World Nuclear Transport Institute.
Available at: www.wnti.co.uk/UserFiles/File/public/publications/factsheets/wnti_fs-1.pdf.
IAEA Safety Standards Series No. TS-R-1. 2005. Standards Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive
Material 2005 Edition. IAEA Safety No. TS-R-1. Available at: www-
pub.iaea.org/MTCD/publications/PDF/Pub1225_web.pdf.
IAEA. (2002). Advisory Material for the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, Safety
Standards Series No. TS-G-1.1 (ST-2). Vienna: International Atomic Energy Agency.
IAEA, (1994). Compliance Assurance for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material. Safety Series No. 112,
IAEA. Vienna: International Atomic Energy Agency.
IAEA. (1994). Quality Assurance for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material. Safety Series No. 113.
IAEA. (2000). Generic Procedures for Assessment and Response during a Radiological Emergency. Technical No.
1162. Vienna: International Atomic Energy Agency.
IAEA. (2000). Legal and Governmental Infrastructure for Nuclear, Radiation, Radioactive Waste and Transport
Safety, Requirement No. GS-R-1. Vienna: International Atomic Energy Agency.
92 Policy Studies

IAEA, (20020. Planning and Preparing for Emergency Response to Transport Accidents Involving Radioactive
Material.
IAEA. (1996). International Basic Safety Standards for Protection Against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of
Radiation Sources, Safety Series No. 115 (1996)
IAEA. (2005). Management Systems for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, Safety Guide No. DS326
Draft 1. Vienna: International Atomic Energy Agency.
IAEA. (2000). Categorization of Radiation Sources, IAEA-TECDOC-1191 (2000).
IAEA. The Management Systems for Facilites and Activities, Safety Requirement No. GS-R-3. Vienna:
IAEA (2006). Training Courses Series No.1 on Safe Transport of Radioactive Material. 4nd ed. Vienna:
ICRP. (1990). ICRP Publication 60. 1990 Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological
Protection. The International Commission on Radiological Protection.
IAEA. (2000). Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material 1996 Edition (as amended 2003). Safety
Standards Series No. TR-S-1 (ST-1, Revised). Vienna: International Atomic Energy Agency.
Government Regulation No. 26, 2002. Transport Safety of Radioactive Materials.
Chairman Decree No: 01/Ka-BAPETEN/V-99. Safety Provision on Working Against Radiation.
Chairman Decree No: 05-P/Ka-BAPETEN/VII-00. Guide for Safety Requirement of Radioactive Material
Transportation.
Chairman Decree No: 03/Ka-BAPETEN/I-03. Safety Requirements of Type A and Type B Radioactive Material
Packages Test.
Chairman Decree No: 18/Ka-BAPETEN/II-00. Certification and Accreditation of Certification Agency, Training
Agency, and Laboratories in Nuclear Energy Utilization.
Chairman Decree No: 04/Ka-BAPETEN/V-99. Safety Provision on Radioactive Material Transportation.
Bussamah, A. (2007). Analisis Penerapan Peraturan Keselamatan Pengangkutan Zat Radioaktif di Indonesia.
Thesis. Magister K3 FKM UI.
Policy Studies 93

Rational addiction demand models for cigarettes in Indonesia

Staff : B. Hidayat1*, H. Thabrany1
Sponsor : The National Institute of Health/Fogarty International Center, USA.
Disseminated at : Hidayat B, Thabrany H. (2008) Model spesifikasi dinamis
permintaan rokok: rasionalkah perokok Indonesia. Jurnal Kesehatan
Masyarakat Nasional 3(3):99-108 Hidayat B. (2008) Rational
addiction demand models for cigarettes: evidence from Indonesia
Family Life Survey. [International Conference on Tobacco Control
Studies, Bali (Indonesia), May 13-14 2008]

1
Indonesia 16424
Introduction
A rational addiction (henceforth RA) framework based on Becker and Murphy’s (1988) has
become a standard approach in the analysis of addictive good. Key feature of the RA is the
existence of lags and leads dependent variable as the main regressors. This feature leads to
dynamic specifications. In spite of the large number of studies on demand for cigarettes, few
studies have tested the RA model in a developing country context. This paper addresses this
gap by testing the RA model of cigarette demand in Indonesia.
This study is the first attempt at providing empirical evidence on smoking behaviour that
confronts the RA hypothesis with Indonesian datasets. Previous studies in the country have
been done in the context of a demand system without trying to model dynamic specifications
of cigarette demand. Given a cross-sectional, some unobserved heterogeneity that may
confound the results can not be controlled for. The use of individual panel data in the current
study gives obvious advantages for adjusting individual behaviour regarding demand for
cigarettes. The authors explored several econometrics methods. Empirical results obtained
from different methods were compared, and the performances were assessed with several
statistical criterion.
Methods
We estimated the dynamic specifications of cigarette demand model in the form of:
C it = β 0 + β1C it −1 + β 2 C it +1 + β 3 Pci t + β 4 Pait + β 5 X it' + υ i + d t + ε it (1)
Error term (εit) in (1) may be serially correlated, and thus ordinary least square (OLS) yields
inconsistence parameter estimates. The presence of Ct-1 and Ct+1 also leads endogeneity
problem. Hence, this study explored not only OLS methods, but also instrumental variable
(IV) approaches i.e., 2SLS, GMM, and system-GMM. The most appropriate method was
selected based on statistical tests i.e., exogeneity, heteroskedasticity, and IV-tests. To employ
system-GMM, we applied the methods developed by David Roodman (2006) and
implemented “xtabond2” module in STATA for reducing the bias caused by too many
overidentifying in the GMM. A finite sample correction was also used to the robust two-step
covariance matrix calculated for system-GMM (Windmeijer 2000).
We used individual pooled data derived from three-wave a panel of the Indonesian Family
Life Survey (IFLS), spanning the period 1993-2000. The dependent variable is the number of
cigarettes smoked per day at the time of the interview. The main covariate is the number of
cigarettes smoked in the previews wave (Ct-1) and in the next wave (Ct+1) from the current
interview. These variables measure the effects of past and future consumption on current
marginal utility of consumption. Other covariates include price cigarettes, price alcohol and
income (proxied by expenditures). Prices and income variables were expressed in real terms
94 Policy Studies

by deflating current values using a consumer price index obtained from the Central Bureau of
Statistics.
We investigated other variables as the instruments for both Ct-1 and Ct+, including lagged and
lead cigarettes prices, lagged and lead employment status, home ownership, Moslem, type of
wall, and type of floor. To evaluate whether there may be a bias from weak instruments and
whether they are orthogonal to the εit in (1), we employed several IV-tests. First, the relevance
of the instruments was investigated by evaluating R2 and F-test of a reduced form regression
of both Ct-1 and Ct+1. Second, test of the over-identification, using Hansen's J-statistic in the
case of GMM, and both Sargan's and Basmaan’s tests for 2SLS, was used to validate the
instruments. Finally, C-test was used to assess orthogonality requirement of the instruments.

Table 1 presents the results the cigarette demand (eq..1) estimation. Coefficient estimate of
the cigarette prices indicates the short run elasticity. The long run elasticity is computed. The
ratio of the coefficient on the lead to that on the lag, β2/β1, gives an estimate of the discount
factor. It also can be used to derive the implied discount rate, which is (β1/β2 -1).
Pooled OLS that ignores the endogeneity with robust cluster standard errors are reported in
Table 1. The Table also reports results of the 2SLS and GMM estimations that allows for the
endogeneity. Both 2SLS and GMM estimation yields statistically significant results for Ct-1,
cigarettes and alcohol price. The magnitudes of prices are almost similar from both 2SLS and
GMM. The coefficient of Ct+1 has a positive sign and smaller than the coefficients of Ct-1. This
is consistent with the theory, which rises to a positive rate and reasonable time preference.
Table 3: Model estimation results
Metode Estimasi
OLS 2SLS GMM System GMM
† † †
Ct-1 0.244 [0.021] 0.520 [0.113] 0.521 [0.112] 0.846† [0.130]
Ct+1 0.318† [0.027] 0.133 [0.152] 0.119 [0.145] -0.749† [0.078]
Pct0 -0.154† [0.045] ‡
-0.118 [0.070] ‡
-0.129 [0.066] -0.358† [0.084]
Pat0 0.182† [0.019] †
0.152 [0.035] †
0.157 [0.035] 0.253† [0.060]
Ln-exp -0.021 [0.018] -0.016 [0.018] -0.015 [0.018] 0.023 [0.056]
Constant 0.469* [0.226] 0.333 [0.351] 0.36 [0.354] 1.455‡ [0.768]
N 1790 1783 1783 1783
R-squared 0.41 0.33 0.33
Uji-F- 181.45† 104.72† 81.72† 27.63†
# instrument 12 12 39
# excl. instruments 8 8
Short elasticity -0.154 -0.118 -0.129 -0.358
Long elasticity -0.352 -0.340 -0.358 -0.396
Discount factor 1.303 0.256 0.228 -0.885
Discount rate -0.233 2.910 3.378 -2.130
‡
significant at 10%; *significant at 5%; †significant at 1%; Robust standard errors in [brackets]
Based on the Durbin-Wu-Hausman and Wu-Hausman tests, we found evidence endogeneity
of Ct-1 and Ct+1, with a p-value of 0.031. While 2SLS has been applied widely to correct the
endogeneity problem in the RA model, we left this out for two reasons (Hidayat & Thabrany
208). First, unknown heteroskedasticity was detected, and this leads to give an invalid
inference since the standard error would be inconsistent. Second, results of the IV-tests gave a
little doubt of the excellence the instruments. The latter raises concern on the use of GMM,
and hence the system-GMM was selected as the best methods.
All parameters estimates produced by system-GMM, except income, were significant at the
1%. The short and long run elasticity was estimated to be –0.358 and -0.39, respectively. A
positive value of the Ct-1, with a p-value <1%, suggests the effect of dependence,
reinforcement and tolerance is significant. Since the coefficient term of Ct+1 turned out to be a
Policy Studies 95

negative, the RA-hypothesis is rejected. The RA-hypothesis is accepted when the coefficient
of the lead is a positive and significant, and when the discount rate has a reasonable value.
A rational smoker engages in a rational learning process, balances the utility value of smoking
with expected utility loss and selects the efficient risk level. This behaviour doesn’t hold true
for Indonesian smokers. They neglect future consequences of smoking risks. They are myopic
addict so ignore the impact of current and past choices on future consumption decisions when
making current choices. Although investigating determinant of the myopic addict is beyond
the scope of this study, intuitively two factors contribute on this. First, smokers are seriously
misinformed about a key risk of smoking. Whilst health warnings on cigarette packs have
been mandated, our findings reveal that smokers don’t process information on the dangers of
smoking efficiently. Second, smokers are exposed to many favorable messages about
smoking (perhaps by advertising from Tobacco industries), and such messages cloud their
thoughts about the risks. Anecdotal, tobacco industries provide more attractive and thorough
advertisement on their products than public health campaign do. In light of this view, the
promotion of more informed and responsible smoking should become policy objective. Policy
makers have to redesign current public health campaign against cigarette smoking.
Conclusions
This study estimates the demand for cigarette following the rational addiction framework. The
demand equation was tested on individuals aggregated data taken from three-wave a panel of
the Indonesian Family Life Survey covering the periods 1993-2000. The authors explored
several estimators, and chose the best fit one to overcome several econometric problems.
Whilst the effect of dependency, reinforcement and tolerance is significant (suggesting
cigarette is an addictive good), the RA-hypothesis was rejected in favour of the myopic one.
This study confirms that the demand for cigarettes to be more prices sensitive for the long-run
than the short-run. A ten percent increase in cigarette prices lowered the demand by 3.4
percent and 3.9 percent for the short and long-run, respectively.
Acknowledgments
This study, under the supervision of Professor Teh-Wei Hu and funded by the National
Institute of Health/Fogarty International Center, is a collaborate study coordinated by the
Public Health Institute, Oakland, California, USA. The authors are grateful to the RAND
Corporation for providing the IFLS data. All views expressed and errors encountered are the
sole responsibility of the authors. The authors are also thankful to Hai-Yen Sung, Mike Ong,
Anita Lee, Mao Zhengzhong, Eliza Tong, Vetty Yulianty, Triasih Djutaharta, Pujiyanto, and
Ede S. Dharmawan for their valuable inputs and supports.
Keywords
Demand for cigarettes, IFLS, rational addiction, tobacco.
References
Becker G., Murphy K. (1988) A theory of rational addiction. Journal of Political Economy 96, 675–700.
Hidayat B, Thabrany H (2008) Model spesifikasi dinamis permintaan rokok: rasionalkah perokok Indonesia.
Jurnal Kesehatan Masyarakat Nasional 3(3), 99-108.
Hidayat B. (2008) Rational addiction demand models for cigarettes: evidence from Indonesia Family Life Survey.
[International Conference on Tobacco Control Studies, Bali (Indonesia), May 13-14 2008].
Roodman D. (2006) How to do xtabond2: an introduction to "difference" and "system" GMM in Stata. Center for
Global Development, Washington D.C. [Working Paper #103].
Windmeijer F.A.G. (2000) Finite sample correction for the variance of linear two-step GMM estimators. Institute
for Fiscal Studies, Department of Economics, University College London.
96 Policy Studies

The differences between unconditional and conditional demand

estimates
Staff : B. Hidayat1*
Disseminated at : Hidayat B (2008) Are there differences between unconditional and
conditional demand estimates? implications for future research and
policy. Cost Effectiveness and Resources Allocations (6),15+
1
Indonesia 16424
Introduction
Estimates the probabilities of using healthcare services can be done based on samples of
either unconditional or conditional on being ill responses. The latter are the preferred
approaches because an individual’s decision to seek treatment implies that they are ill, which
is especially true in developing countries. However, conditional on ill estimates poses several
problems (Hidayat 2008). First, there may be an association between self-assessed health
status and healthcare use, raising the possibility of endogeneity, and therefore the estimated
responses of healthcare demand to exogenous variables based on an ill sample only would be
biased. Second, conditional estimates may be susceptible to an underreporting of the
incidence of illness in surveys and, thus would yield only a lower-bound estimate. Finally, the
total effects of prices on the demand can be inferred only from unconditional estimation and
such estimations would produce long-run effects. This study investigates the effects of health
insurance on the demand for outpatient care, based both on samples of unconditional
responses and on samples of responses conditional on being ill. The purpose is (i) to compare
the results of the two approaches estimations and (ii) to investigate the effects of health
insurance on the use of public and private outpatient care.
Methods
Healthcare demand is a function of health insurance and a set of exogenous variables
including health status, income, gender, household size, marital, education, electricity, age,
travel cost, travel time, urban, and survey site. Two types of health insurance schemes, Askes
and Jamsostek, were included in the analyses. Although these schemes are assumed to be
exogenous, apparently due to a mandatory program, the possible endogeneity problem of
insurance participation was tested using both the approaches described in Waters (1999) and
instrumental variable estimation (Baum et al. 2003).
The dependent variable is outpatient care during the previous four weeks of interview in three
provider options: self-treatment, public and private. The three provider option was estimated
using a multinomial logit (MNL) model, with self-treatment as the references. The model was
applied to the data from the second round of the Indonesian Family Life Survey (IFLS2), a
panel survey carried out by the RAND Corporation in conjunction with Indonesian
researchers and various international agencies (Frankenberg et al. 2000). The MNL assumes
the stochastic portions of the conditional utility functions are uncorrelated across alternatives,
and thus requires the assumption of independence of irrelevant alternatives (IIA) be satisfied.

To construct conditional on being ill samples, this study used a definition of sickness that
more accurately identifies people more likely to have used healthcare services. Individuals
included in the definition were those who reported having at least one activity of daily living
impairment and/or a serious illness. This approach identified 5055 individuals in the
conditional sample, around 31% of the total sample (n=16485). This finding implies that a
Policy Studies 97

problem with conditional estimates relates to the underreporting of incidents of illness

(Sauerborn et al. 1996) could be minimized by adopting complete list of health measurements
to capture the event of illness.
Since the study applied to conditional on being ill samples, health status was also potentially
endogenous due to a sample selection. A probit model with the sample selection was carried
out to investigate whether conditional estimates are affected by selection bias. The results
yielded an insignificant correlation between the error terms – i.e., X2(1) = 0.02, with a p-value
0.88 – ruling out any possibility of sample selection bias. This suggests that conditional
estimates do not suffer from the sample selectivity problem.
Table 4: MNL estimation results using self-treatment as the comparison group
Unconditional estimates Conditional estimates
Public Providers Private providers Public providers Private providers
βa [se]b βa [se]b βa [se]b βa [se]b
Askes 0.654‡ [0.101] 0.125 [0.141] 0.511‡ [0.153] 0.023 [0.193]
Jamsostek 0.512* [0.270] 1.362‡ [0.187] 0.314 [0.377] 1.086‡ [0.344]
*
Askes*Inc 0.065 [0.040] -0.014 [0.049] -0.031 [0.067] 0.019 [0.053]
Jamsostek*Inc. - -
0.760‡ [0.239] -0.388‡ [0.112] 0.529* [0.286] -0.599‡ [0.228]
- - -
Constant 7.121‡ [0.504] 13.031‡ [0.686] 5.766‡ [0.793] -12.365‡ [1.081]
N 16485 5055
Pseudo R2 0.144 0.118
Hausman test 16.7 (omitted-public), p-val= 0.98 1.18 (omitted-public), p-val=1.00
IIA: X2 (30) 13.1 (omitted-private), p-val=0.99 5.11 (omitted-private), p-val=1.00
Small-Hsiao test 41.7 (omitted-public), p-val=0.08; 18.3 (omitted-public), p-val= 0.95
IIA: X2(30) 16.5 (omitted-private), p-val=0.98 34.1 (omitted-private), p-val=0.28
a
The estimated parameters β; superscript ‡,††, and *significance at 1%, 5%, and 10% level, respectively. bRobust
R
standard errors given in [brackets]. References (omitted groups).
Table 1 displays the selected results of the MNL estimation. Detailed estimation results is in
Hidayat B (2008). The pseudo R2 values suggest the covariates explain 14% and 12%
variation in the unconditional and conditional models, respectively. Both Hausman and
Small-Hsiao tests confirmed that the MNL model passed the IIA assumption, suggesting that
retaining the present model does not lead to inconsistent estimates. The coefficient estimate
for Askes was positive for public and private providers, but only significant for the former at
the 1% level. The findings hold true for both unconditional and conditional estimates. The
coefficient estimate of Jamsostek in the unconditional estimates was positive for both
provider types, although there was a difference in the level of significance (i.e., 10% at public
and 1% at private). While in the conditional estimates, the coefficient of Jamsostek was
significant for the private provider only.
Although both unconditional and conditional estimates yielded similar results with respect to
the direction of most covariates, the recycling prediction results (see Table 4 in Hidayat B
2008) suggests that the latter yield a lower insurance effect than the former. The effects of
Askes on the use of public provider were 7.5% lower in the conditional estimates (55%) than
in the unconditional ones (62%). The demand effects of Jamsostek for outpatient with private
providers were 20% lower in the conditional estimates than in the unconditional ones (156%
and 176%, respectively).
When should we use unconditional estimates, and when should we rely on conditional
estimates? It depends on the purpose of the research. When the research aims to measure
long-run price effects, unconditional estimates are the desired option. However, if the
research is designed to measure equity in healthcare use (Waters 2000), conditional estimates
are preferable. Because conditional estimations do not suffer from statistical selection bias,
they are acceptable for short-term analysis, and may even be preferable since they are less
costly to implement (i.e., questionnaires need only be administered to those who are sick).
Conditional surveys are also worthwhile, especially in developing countries, since research
resources are usually inadequate.
The coefficient estimate of the interaction (Jamsostek*Inc) was negative for both provider
types and significant at the 1% levels, except for public provider in the conditional estimates.
98 Policy Studies

The negative coefficients of the interaction terms taken together suggest that the effects of
Jamsostek on the probability of using formal healthcare were higher among the poor (Fig.1).
These finding indicate that low-income people have a higher price elasticity of demand. From
a public health perspective, these findings are of substantial interest. It suggests that
expanding health insurance, as is the current policy thrust, will have a stronger impact on
increasing formal care usage rates among the poor. The introduction of a demand-side
subsidy to insure the 76.4 million poor in Indonesia is supported by the findings of this study.
Figure 2: The effects of health insurance on the use of public and private providers
Conclusion
This study estimates the effects of health insurance on healthcare demand in Indonesia using
samples that are both unconditional and conditional on being ill. The latter approach does not
suffer from the sample selectivity problem. Both estimations yield very similar outputs with
respect to the direction of most of the covariates. The magnitude effects of insurance on
demand for healthcare, however, are higher in the former estimates than the latter. The choice
between using unconditional or conditional estimates for future studies should be determined
by the main purpose of the research.
This study supports growing literature that health care demand is regressive irrespective of
insurance status. Health insurance significantly improves access to health care services, with
the largest demand effect of insurance found among individuals in the lowest income. This
study supports the expansion of insurance programs or the establishment of a national health
insurance program in order to address under-utilization of formal healthcare in Indonesia. A
demand-side subsidy to pay premiums for the poor is also recommended.
Keywords
Conditional estimates, healthcare demand, health insurance, unconditional estimates.
References
Baum C.F., Schaffer M.E., Stillman S. (2003) Instrumental variables and GMM: estimation and testing. STATA
Journal 3,1-31.
Frankenberg E. and Thomas D. (2000) The Indonesia Family Life Survey (IFLS): Study design and results from
waves 1 and 2. RAND Corporation, USA.
Hidayat B. (2008) Are there differences between unconditional and conditional demand estimates? implications
for future research and policy. Cost Effectiveness and Resources Allocations (6),15+.
Sauerborn R., Nougtara A., Hien M., Diesfeld H.J. (1996) Seasonal variations of household costs of illness in
Burkina Faso. Social Science and Medicine 43:281-290.
Waters H.R. (1999) Measuring the impact of health insurance with correction for selection bias: a case study of
Ecuador. Health Economics 8, 473-483.
Waters H.R. (2000) Measuring equity in access to health care. Social Science and Medicine 51, 599-612.
Policy Studies 99

The effect of community based health insurance on access and equity

in access to healthcare services: a case study from Purbalingga,
Indonesia
Staff : B. Hidayat1*, S. Riyarto2
Sponsor : GTZ-SHI Project
Disseminated at : Riyarto S., Hidayat B. (2009) The effects of community based
health insurance on access and financial protection. Harmonizing
Health and Economics- iHEA Conference Proceedings [The 7th
World Congress of International Health Economics Association,
Beijing (China), July 12-15, 2009]
1
Indonesia 16424
2
Faculty of Medicine, Gadjah Mada University, Yogjakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
The Indonesian health sector fights with inequitable use of formal care services. The income-
related inequity in access to formal care existed in Indonesia. The distribution of outpatient
care use showed inequity favouring the rich for private providers and inequity favouring the
poor for public ones (Hidayat et al 2004). The Indonesian health sector also struggles with
low demand for formal health care services. Utilization of formal healthcare services, even in
the case of illness, is very low. Only 23% of those reported having an illness sought formal
care. This figure is even lower than the studies derived from other developing countries i.e.,
Burkina Faso 42% (Sauerborn et al 1994) and Zambia 40% (Hjortsberg 2003).
The development of formal health insurance is an increasingly popular policy option to
address the issues of a low health care demand in many developing countries. Health
insurance has the potential to lower financial barriers as the financial risk of health is shared
among members, and no further costs will arise at the point of health care use (with the
exception of no cost sharing policies). Health insurance would be a potential tool to increase
the demand for health care.
Since 1999, the government of Purbalingga, Central Java (population about 849.831) had
introduced community health maintenance insurance (known as Jaminan Pemerliharaan
Kesehatan Masyarakat, JPKM) with very low premium rate (about US$ 11 per family per
year) and a limited benefit basket. The scheme covers about 42% of the population. This
study aims to evaluate the effect of JPKM on access and equity in the distribution of health
care use.
Methods
This study used data from a National Social Economic Survey (Susenas) 2004. To investigate
the effects of JPKM on access, we used health care demand framework. Our econometric
methods considered the feature of the dependent variables used in the analyses. For discrete
data, which measures demand for health care in terms of probabilities of use of medical care,
we adopted the discrete choice econometric. Whilst for discrete count, we used count data
models, and opted to negative binomial (Cameron and Trivedi 1986).
To investigate equity, we used a concentration index (CM) which is an extension of the Gini
coefficient. The CM can take values between -1 and +1. If there were no variation in access
among income groups, the index would be zero. A positive (negative) score of the CM
indicates inequity in the access, favouring the richest (poorest) groups.
100 Policy Studies


The most important results of the NB estimates confirm that the coefficient estimate for
JPKM was positive, and significant for public hospitals, health centers and policlinic. Since
the coefficient estimates alone does not readily tell us much about the magnitude of the effect
of JPKM, the predicted probabilities of using various types of providers were calculated
based on the NB estimations. Two scenarios were used; (i) holding all variables at current
mean and (ii) changing JPKM status only and holding all other variables at their mean. This
strategy assures that the distribution of the covariates and the sample size for each scenario is
the same, and the differences in the probabilities predicted under different scenarios indeed
due to difference in JPKM status.
Table 5: Predicted utilization of healthcare services under two scenarios

Public hospitals Health centres Private practice Policlinic
Sc:1 Sc:2 % Sc:1 Sc:2 % Sc:1 Sc:2 % Sc:1 Sc:2 %
All 31.5 100.9 220 132.0 288.6 119 186.7 49.1 -74 13.5 30.0 123
By income:
1st 7.5 27.8 273 181.3 474.1 162 110.5 39.6 -64 4.5 12.5 178
2nd 32.2 71.5 122 143.6 292.5 104 113.1 30.1 -73 0.0 0.0
3rd 31.5 116.1 269 87.7 197.4 125 195.5 49.0 -75 33.9 66.6 97
4th 40.0 122.6 206 128.5 244.1 90 155.4 43.8 -72 20.8 41.0 97
5th 54.2 159.8 195 102.2 297.2 191 394.6 100.4 -75 13.0 19.4 49
The predicted utilization when all individuals set out at the current mean level (scenario 1)
were 33, 132, 186 and 14, respectively for public hospitals, health centers, private doctor
practices and policlinic (Table 1). Except for private practice, the prediction utilization among
JPKM beneficiaries (scenario 2) was increased. The magnitude effects of JPKM is percentage
changes from scenarios 1 to scenario 2. The table reveals that the effects of JPKM on access
to public hospitals, health centers and policlinics were 220%, 119% and 123%, respectively.
The effect is higher among individuals in the lower income, suggesting low income have
higher price elasticity of demand.
Table 2 present the estimated CM and their t-statistics. The negative value of the CM in
healthcenter indicates the poor used health centers more often than the rich. Whilst the CM for
public hospitals, doctor practice, and policlinic was positive indicating utilization of these
providers concentrated in the rich (pro-rich inequity). Similar pattern (in terms of the CM sign)
was observed for scenario 2 (right panel), but the degree of the CM was difference.

Table 6. Concentration indices of outpatient use at various providers, Purbalingga, Indonesia
Scenario 1 Scenario 2: JPKM effects
CM SE t-test CM SE t-test
Public hospitals 0.0499 0.0024 20.47* 0.1437 0.0256 5.61*
Health center -0.0875 0.0034 -25.50* -0.1841 0.0697 -2.64*
Doctors practice 0.2867 0.0084 34.22* 0.0561 0.0134 4.19*
Policlinic 0.0194 0.0010 19.35* 0.0326 0.0125 2.62*
*significant at 1% level
The effects of JPKM on equity can be seen graphically from the concentration curves, which
show the cumulative proportion of outpatient care use against the cumulative proportion of
the sample population ranked by income. If everyone, irrespective of the income level, has
exactly the same value of outpatient care use, the concentration curve will then coincide with
the diagonal (equality line). If the concentration curve lies above (below) the equality line, it
indicates inequity of access in favour of the poorest (richest). The further the concentration
curve lies from the equality line, the greater the degree of inequity in outpatient care use
across income groups. Figures 1 presents the concentration curves in public hospitals, health
centers, doctor practice and policlinic, respectively. Generally the concentration curves for the
JPKM beneficiaries are closer to the equity line. This finding suggests that although still
inequitable, JPKM has a positive effect on closing the equity gap of the insured.
Policy Studies 101

Line of equality Overall: Scenario 1 Efect JPKM: Scenario 2 Line of equality Overall: Senario 1 Efect JPKM: Scenario 2
100 100
C u m u lativ e % p u b lic h o sp ital u se
75 75
C um u lativ e % h ealth cen ter u se

50 50
25 25
0 0
0 25 50 75 100 0 25 50 75 100
Cumulative % samples, ranked by income quintiles Cumulative % samples, ranked by income quintiles
a) Public hospital b) Public health center

Line of equality Overal: Scenario 1 Efek JPKM:Scenario 2 Line of equality Overal: Scenario 1 Efek JPKM:Scenario 2
100 100
75 C u m u lativ e % p o liclin ic u se 75
C u m u lativ e % d o cto r u se
50 50
25 25
0 0
0 25 50 75 100 0 25 50 75 100
Cumulative % samples, ranked by income quintiles Cumulative % samples, ranked by income quintiles
c) Doctor practice d) Policlinic

Figure 3: Concentration curves of outpatient use at various providers, Purbalingga, Indonesia.
Conclusions
There are strong effects of JPKM on improving access to formal health care, and the effects
are higher among individual in the lower income group. Whilst JPKM reduces inequitable
access to health care services among the insured, the effects is a modest.
Keywords
Health insurance, JPKM, access, equity, healthcare demand.
References
Cameron A.C., Trivedi P.K. (1986) Econometric models based on count data: comparisons and applications of
some estimators and tests. Journal of Applied Econometrics 1, 29-53.
Hidayat B., Thabrany H., Dong H., Sauerborn R. (2004) The effects of mandatory health insurance on equity in
access to outpatient care in Indonesia. Health Policy Plan 19, 323-336.
Hjortsberg C. (2003) Why do the sick not utilise health care? The case of Zambia. Health Econ 12, 755-70.
Riyarto S., Hidayat B. (2009) The effects of community based health insurance on access and financial protection.
Harmonizing Health and Economics-IHEA Conference Proceedings [The 7th World Congress of International
Health Economics Association, Beijing (China), July 12-15, 2009].
Sauerborn R, Nougtara A, Latimer E. The elasticity of demand for health care in Burkina Faso: Differences across
age and income groups. Health Policy Plan 9, 185-192.
102 Policy Studies


SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY EXTENDED
ABSTRACTS

Analysis of adduct which is formed from reaction between

cyclophosphamide with guanine and DNA Calf Thymus in vitro by
high performance liquid chromatography-strong cation exchange
Staff : Y. Harahap1*, Hayun1
Student : Irawati1
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : yahdiana03@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Yahdiana Harahap1, Hayun 1, Irawati1(2008).Proceeding The
International Symposium on Molecular Targeted Therapy, Gajah
Mada University, Yogyakarta-Indonesia, 26 Maret 2008
1
Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of Mathematic and Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok (Indonesia)
Introduction
Adduct is produced from the reaction between alkylating agents with nucleophile such as
amino acid, nucleic acid and protein (Baird and Mahadevan, 2004; Sharma and Farmer,
2004). N7-guanine is the most vulnerable to be attacked because it has the highest
nucleophilicity while O6-guanine is most difficult to be attacked because it has the lowest
nucleophilicity. Although O6-guanine has a relatively lowest nucleophilicity, almost every
alkylating agent can produce O6-alkylguanine in a significant amount (Korolkovas and
Burkalter, 1976).
Cyclophosphamide, is one of the alkylating agents that most used as anti cancer in a
chemotherapy regiment dosage (8). The advantage of cyclophosphamide compared to other
alkylating agents is that it can be administered orally and parenterally (9). Several methods
have been developed in order to detect the adduct. Those methods such as Thin Layer
Chromatography (TLC), Gas Chromatography (GC), High-Performance Liquid
Chromatography (HPLC), Magnetic Core Spectroscopic Resonance (MCSR), Mass
Spectroscopic (MS) and radioactive labelling. The previous research that used HPLC-
fluorescence needed a few steps of complex derivatives so that it needed bigger cost and
longer time.
In this research, the liquid chromatography method is used with a strong cation exchange
column because nucleotide base adduct has a weak base characteristic that can be protonized
into acid environment (pH 3.95) produces substance with positive charge, so it can compete
with the mobile phase. The objective of this study is to analyze and to characterize adduct as
a result of cyclophosphamide reaction with guanine and calf thymus DNA in vitro by High
performance liquid chromatography with strong cation exchange column.
Material and method

A. Instrumentation
A set of HPLC; strong cation exchange column (Supelcosil LC-SCX, 25 x 4.6 mm), pump
(Shimadzu LC-6A), oven column (Shimadzu CTO-6AS), detector (Shimadzu SPD-6AV UV-
Vis), and recorder (Shimadzu CR-4A Chromatopac); Spectrophotometer UV-Vis (Shimadzu
UV-Vis 1601).
B. Material
1. Guanine, N7-Methylguanine, O6-Methylguanine, Adenine, N3-Methyladenine,
cyclophosphamide, calf thymus DNA. (Sigma) Ammonia 25% p.a, formic acid p.a,
chloride acid p.a, absolute ethanol, dimethylsulphoxide, Tris, and methanol (Merck)
2. S9 mix enzyme (Pharmacology Lab ITB Bandung)
3. Aquabidestilata (PT.Wida Wi), Aquadest (Bumi Indah)
Genome 105

Procedure
1. Reaction of guanine with cyclophosphamide in vitro
4.0 mg of Guanine dissolve in 1.0 ml of potassium hydrogen phosphate 5 mM solution and
mix with 4.0 mg of cyclophosphamide in mixture of 1.0 ml buffer Tris 0.01 M pH 8.0 and
dimethylsulphoxide, then add 0.5 ml of S9 mix enzyme. As a control, S9 mix enzyme is
not added. Then it is incubated in 37 + 10C for 6 and 12 hours. The alkylated DNA is
precipitated by using 2.0 ml of ethanol absolute solution, centrifuged with 3.000 rpm for
10 minutes, the alkylated DNA is washed again by using 2.0 ml of 70% ethanol, and
centrifuged again. The DNA pellet and supernatant from incubation 6 and 12 hours is
hydrolyzed by using 1.0 ml chloride acid solution 0.1 N on 700C for 30 minutes. The
hydrolyzed DNA and supernatant are injected as much as 20.0 µl into HPLC .
2. Reaction of calf thymus DNA with cyclophosphamide in vitro
2 mg of calf thymus DNA with 4.0 mg of cyclophosphamide in mixture of 1.0 ml of buffer
Tris 0.01 M pH 8.0 and dimethylsulphoxide, then add 0.5 ml S9 mix enzyme. As a control,
S9 mix enzyme is not added. Then it is incubated in 37 ºC for 6 and 12 hours. And then
repeat procedure 4.

The chromatogram from each standard Guanine, N7-Methylguanine, O6-Methylguanine,

Adenine and N3-Methyladenine in 0.1 N chloride acid,- with sequential retention time + 4,60;
+ 7,72; + 8,11; + 10,57; and + 16,14 minutes. On the Guanine reaction with
cyclophosphamide in vitro, the resulted adduct is N7-metilguanin with retention time of +7.60
minutes with or without adding S9 mix enzyme. This shows that N7-guanine position is
vulnerable to be attacked because of the high nucleophilicity. The amount of N7-
methylguanine increased on the 12 hours incubation compared to 6 hours incubation. On the 6
hours incubation, N7-metilguanin was produced with concentration of 6.7050±0.3985 µg/ml
and increased on the 12 hours incubation to be 8.6082±1.3753 µg/ml. The reaction
between 2 mg of Calf thymus DNA with 4.0 mg of cyclophosphamide within the mixture of
0.01 M pH 8.0 buffer tris and dimethylsulphoxide, only produce O6-Methylguanine with
retention time + 10.50 minutes, with concentration of 3.1528 + 0.6095 µg/ml (6 hours) and
4.6149 + 0.5589 µg/ml (12 hours), without S9 enzyme, while with the adding of enzyme,
there was no detection of adduct O6 -Methylguanine.
The instability of the adducts were determined and compared with standard. N7-
Methylguanine resulted from reaction of Guanine with cyclophoshamide and O6-
Methylguanine resulted from reaction of calf thymus DNA with cyclophoshamide are both
not stable which is showed by the area (concentration) that was decreasing over the injection
period (interval 1,3,4,7,9 and 11 hours) whether from the 6-hour-incubation, 12-hour-
incubation. The instability of adduct resulting from the reaction can be linked to the
apurination (lost of purine residu) on the DNA strand that was alkylated, which ended with
the strand scission.
Summary
Reaction between 4.0 mg Guanine with 4.0 mg cyclophosphamide in vitro, without addition
of S9 mix enzyme produce N7-methylguanine with retention time + 7.60 minutes, with
concentration of 6.7050 + 0.3985 µg/ml (6 hours) and 8.6082 + 1.3753 µg/ml (12
hours).Furthermore on the reaction between 2 mg calf thymus DNA with 4.0 mg
cyclophosphamide without addition of S9 mix enzyme, produce O6-Methylguanine, with
retention time of + 10.50 minutes, with concentration of 3.1528 + 0.6095 µg/ml (6 hours) and
4.6149 + 0.5589 µg/ml (12 hours).
Keywords
Adduct, alkylating agent, Cyclophosphamide, DNA calf thymus, HPLC.
Genome 106

References
Baird, W.M. & B. Mahadevan. (2004). The Uses of Carcinogen-DNA Adduct Measurement in Establishing
Mechanisms of Mutagenesis and in Chemoprevention, J.Chromatogr B., 547: 1-4.
Sharma, R.A. & P.B. Farmer. (2004). Biological Relevance of Adduct Detection to the Chemoprevention of
Cancer, Clin. Cancer Res., 10 (1): 4901-4912.
Remmers, W. A. (1991). Antinepolastic Agent, dalam Wilsons dan Grisvold Textbook of Organic Medicinal and
Pharmaceutical. 9th edition, J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia: 313-321.
Wilman, D.E.V. & T.A.Connors. (1983). Molecular Structure and Antitumor Activity of Alkylating Agents, dalam
Molecular Aspects of Anticancer Drug Action, Verlag Chemie, USA: 233-313.
Dipple, A. (1995). DNA Adducts of Chemical Carcinogen, Carcinogenesis., 16 (3): 437-441.
Harahap, Y. (2003). Rasio O6 – alkilguanin dan Tautan Silang terhadap N7 – alkilguanin yang terbentuk pada
Reaksi Zat Pengalkil dengan DNA in vitro, Disertasi Program S3, Farmasi ITB, Bandung: 1-108.
Korolkovas, A. & J.H. Burkalter. (1976). Antineoplastic Agents, dalam Essentials of Medicinal Chemistry, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., New York: 541-564.
Lawley, P.D. & D.H. Philips. (1996). DNA Adduct from Chemotherapeutic Agents, J.Chromatogr B., 355: 13-40.
Venitt, S. & J.M. Parry. (1984). Background to Mutagenicity Testing, dalam Mutagenicity Testing : Practical
Approach, Oxford : IRL Press: 1-24.
Genome 107

Analysis of O6-Alkylguanine in rat blood during recurrent oral

administration of cyclophosphamide
Staff : Y. Harahap1*, Santi Purna Sari1, Hening Herawati2
Student : Novita Sari1
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : Yahdiana Harahap1, Santi Purna Sari1, Hening Herawati2, Novita
Sari1(2008). The 8th Asian Conference on Clinical Pharmacy, Hyatt
Regency Surabaya Hotel, 1-4 July, 2008, Surabaya, Indonesia
1
Department Pharmacy, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Science Universitas Indonesia
2
Dharmais Cancer Hospital
Introduction
Cyclophosphamide as one of the alkylating agents has been widely used in the cancer
chemotherapy because it is highly effective in eradicating the cancer cells by directly reacting
with DNA so that DNA is mutated by the alkylating process and lost its function of cell
replication. Besides its application in breast cancer, cyclophosphamide is also used in other
cancers such as Hodgkin disease, non Hodgkin lymphoma, Burkitt’s lymphoma, ovarium,
lung, etc. The mechanism of alkylating agent’s reaction with DNA is simple and not selective
and therefore normal cells can be attacked, and stimulate secondary cancer in various tissues
(Connors, 1986). Cyclophosphamide produces O6-alkylguanine adduct in vitro which has
been proven to give mutagenic and carcinogenic effects (Van Zeeland ,1985; Harahap, Y.,
2003).
Although cyclophosphamide has cytostatic effect, from various tests on animals it is found
that it has carcinogenic effect following oral administration or intravenous that triggers
benign and malignant tumors on many tissues including bladder. In a therapy using
cyclophosphamide, whether in single or combination with other cytostatic, second
malignancy is often reported following the stopping of cyclophosphamide administration
especially bladder cancer and leukaemia (Penn, 1986; Haas et al.,1987; Haase et al., 2002).
In this research, O6-alkylguanine was detected in whole blood of male sprague-dawley rats
after 8 hours oral administration of cyclophosphamide at doses 15 mg/200 g rats’ weight,
where cyclophosphamide was given in three series with a range between the administration
was two weeks. Method used to detect O6-alkylguanine was High Performance Liquid
Chromatography (HPLC)-fluorescence with strong cation exchange column (Harahap, Y.
2008).
The objective of this research is to know whether there is O6-Alkylguanine on the rat’s blood
which was administered with Cyclophosphamide and use the adduct as biomarker for early
detection of cancer risk.
Material and method

Material:
O6-methylguanine, N7-methylguanine, N3-methyladenine, guanine, and adenine (Sigma
Aldrich); cyclophosphamide (Sigma Aldrich); ammonia 25 % (Merck); formic acid (Merck);
methanol (Merck); hydrochloride acid (Malincrodt); Tris (Bromma); aquabidestilata (Wida
Wi); male rat Sprague-Dawley; ammonium chloride (Merck); potassium carbonate (Merck);
Na2EDTA (Merck); sodium chloride (Merck); sodium dodesil sulfat (SDS) (Merck); sodium
hydroxide (Merck); phenol (Merck); chloroform (Merck); ethanol absolute (Merck); ethanol
70%; dimethylsulphoxide (DMSO) (Merck).
Genome 108

Tools:
A set of HPLC consisted of column (Supelcosil LC-SCX 5µm, 250 x 4.6 mm), pump
(Shimadzu LC-10AD VP)), oven column (TC 1900), fluorescence detector (Shimadzu RF-10
A XL), and recorder; syringe 100 µl (Hamilton); Centrifugal tool (Profuge and Lab. Digital
Centrifuge DSC-300 SD); ultrasonic mixer (Elmasonic S 40 H); Thermomixer (Eppendorf);
hematocrite tube (superior).
Procedure
Chromatographic condition
Method used to detect O6-alkylguanine was High Performance Liquid Chromatography
(HPLC), with strong cation exchange column (Supelcosil LC-SCX, 5 µm, 250 x 4.6 mm),
mobile phase consisted of ammonium formate solution-methanol (94:6) with final
concentration of ammonium formate was 30 mM, pH 3.95, flow rate was 1.2 ml/minute,
column temperature was 30oC and detected at ecxitation wavelength 300 nm and emission
wavelength 370 nm.
Administering cyclophosphamide orally on rats
The test animals was divided into two groups, there were test group and control group. Each
groups consisted of ten rats. Cyclophosphamide was administered orally with dosage of 15
mg/200 g on test group, while aquabidest was administered with the appropriate volumn to
the control group. Drug administering was done for 3 cycles with 2 weeks of drug
administering range.
Analysis of O6-alkylguanine in rats’ blood
3 ml of rats’blood that were given cyclophosphamide was added into a tube that contains
Na2EDTA. Then DNA isolation was performed and the DNA was hydrolyzed with 0.1N
hydrochloride acid at 70oC for 30 minutes. The hydrolyzed DNA was injected as much as 20
µl to the HPLC. From the resulted peak, the concentration of O6-alkylguanine can be
calculated using standard calibration curve.

The method gave an acceptable validation result according to accuracy and precision test
results that fulfill the criteria, linear calibration curve, limit of detection is 4.5752 ng/ml and
limit of quantitation is 15.2506 ng/ml. The selectivity test to the sample components was
done to know whether there were other components to be detected at retention time of O6-
alkylguanine. The standard use was O6-methylguanine, N7-methylguanine, N3-methyladenine,
guanine, and adenine. Among all standards, only N3-methyladenine that was not detected
using the method. However the retention time of guanine, adenine, N7-methylguanine, and
O6-methylguanine were 3.725, 5.442, 5.517, and 8.908 minutes respectively. Before sample
was analyzed, DNA isolation had been done from whole blood then the DNA was hydrolyzed
by adding 0.1 N hydrochloride acid for 30 minutes at 70oC to release DNA bases and its
alkylated forms. After three series of cyclophosphamide administrations, O6-alkylguanine had
not been found in rats’ blood. Most of the test animals were died because of the toxicity of
cyclophosphamide, while most of the control group were survived. As a verification,
cyclophosphamide was reacted with calf thymus DNA. It yield O6-alkylguanine after
incubated for 6 hours.
Conclusion
O6-alkylguanine was not detected after three series of cyclophosphamide administration to the
rats with dosage of 15 mg/200 g with limit of detection is 4.5752 ng/ml and limit of
quantitation is 15.2506 ng/ml.
Keywords
Cyclophosphamide, DNA calf thymu, HPLC, O6-alkylguanine, Strong Cation Exchange.
Genome 109

Refference
Connors, T. A. (1986), Antitumour Alkylating Agnets : Cytotoxic Action andOrgan Toxicity, in Carcinogenecity of
Alkylating Cytostatic Drugs, No. 78, D. Schmahl, J. M. Kaldor, Eds., International Agency for Research on
Cancer, Lyon, 143-145.
Van Zeeland, A. A., G. R. Mohn, A. Nenhauser-Klaus, U. H. Ehling (1985), Quantitative Comparison of Genetic
Effects of Etyhlating Agents on The Basis of DNA Adduct Formation. Use of O6-Methylguanine as Molecular
Dosimeter for Extrapolation from Cells in Culture to The Mouse, Environ. Health Perspect., 62, 163-164.
Harahap, Y. (2003), Rasio O6-alkilguanin dan tautan silang terhadap N7-alkilguanin yang terbentuk pada reaksi zat
pengalkil dengan DNA Calf Thymus in vitro. Untuk Memperkirakan Risiko Penggunaannya pada Kemoterapi.
Disertasi Program S3, Farmasi ITB, Bandung.
Penn, I. (1986), Malignancies Induced by Drug Therapy : A Review, in Carcinogenicity of alkylating Cytostatic
Drugs, No. 78, D. Schmahl, J. M. Kaldor, Eds., International Agency for Research on Cancer, Lyon, 37-51.
Haas J.F., Kittelmann B., Mehnert W.H., et al. (1987), Risk of Leukaemia in Ovarian Tumour and Breast Cancer
Patients Following Treatment by Cyclophosphamide, Br. J. Cancer, 55: 213-218.
Haase D., Binder C., Bunger J., et al. (2002), Increased Risk for Therapyassociated Hematologic Malignancies in
Patients with Carcinoma of the Breast and Combined Homozygous Gene Deletions of Glutathione
Transferases M1 and T1, Leuk. Res., 26: 249-54.
Harahap Y., Santi Purna Sari, Hening Herawati & Novita Sari. (2008), Analysis of O6-Alkylguanine in Rat Blood
During Recurrent Oral Administration of Cyclophosphamide, The 8th Asian Conference of Clinical Pharmacy,
Hyatt Regency Surabaya Hotel, 1-4 July, 2008, Surabaya, Indonesia.
Genome 110

Comparative bioavailability of two cetirizine tablet formulations in

Indonesian healthy volunteers
Staff : Y. Harahap1,2*, B. Prasaja1, E. Indriati1, W. Lusthom1 and Lipin1
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : Y. Harahap1,2, B. Prasaja1, E. Indriati1, W. Lusthom1 and
Lipin1.(2008). International Journal of Clinical Pharmacology and
Therapeutics 46 (5), 268-272
1
Clinisindo Laboratories, Jakarta
2
Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of Mathematic and Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia

Introduction
Cetirizine {2-[4-[(4-chlorophenylmethyl]- 1- piperazinyl]ethoxy} acetic acid dihydrochloride
is described as a nonse dating anti histamine which is long acting and has some mast cell
stabilizing activity. Cetirizine is rapidly absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract after oral
administration, peak plasma concentration being attained within about one hour. Food de lays
the time to peak plasma con centration but dose not de creased the amount of drug absorbed.
Cetirizine is approximately 93% bound to plasma protein and has an elimination half life of
about 7 – 11 hours. Cetirizine is excreted primarily in the urine mainly as unchanged drug
[Moffat et al. 2004]. This study was in bio equivalence of 10 mg cetirizine tablet tended to
evaluate the manufactured by Novell Pharmaceutical Laboratories, Indonesia, with the
international reference tablet manufactured by UCB Pharma, Spain.
Material and methods

The study was conducted according an open, randomized, two period crossover design with a
1-week wash out period. Eighteen volunteers participated and all completed the study
successfully. Blood samples were obtained prior to dosing and at 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, , 8, 12, 24
and 30 hours after drug administration. Plasma concentrations of cetirizine were monitored
using high performance liquid chromatography over a period of 30 hours after administration.
The pharmacokinetics parameter AUC0–30h, AUC0–∞ and Cmax were tested for bioequivalence
after log-transformation of data and ratios of tmax were evaluated non parametrically.

All 18 volunteers successfully completed the trial according to the protocol. Both cetirizine
formulations were well-tolerated at the administered dose and no serious adverse clinical
events were observed and the mean cetirizine concentration versus time profiles for both
formulations are shown in Figure 1.
Genome 111


Figure 1. Plasma concentration time curves of cetirizine after oral administration of two different formulations
containing 10 mg of cetirizine. Data are shown as mean ± SD from 18 subjects. Vertical bar represents the
standard deviation of the mean.
The ratio of AUC0–30h/AUC0–∞ for all individuals and for both products was 0.90 or above,
indicate an adequate sampling time, since the extrapolated portion of the total AUC is less
than 20%. The pharmacokinetic parameters used to assess the bioequivalence of the test
formulation versus the reference were AUC0–30h,AUC0–∞ for the extent of the absorption and
Cmax and tmax for the rate of absorption. Descriptive statistics of the pharmacokinetic
parameter for cetirizine test and reference preparations are summarized in Table 2 with shows
the geometric mean values and the range for the AUC0–30h, AUC0–∞, Cmax and t½ values
obtained for each formulation. The pharmacokinetic characteristic tmax is presented as mean (±
SD). The results of the bioequivalence analysis are given in Table 3. The parametric 90%
confidence intervals for ratio T/R ranged from 101.9 – 114.95 (point estimate 108.23) for
AUC0–30h, 101.91 – 114.68 (point estimate108.11) for AUC0–∞ , 90.18 – 110.25 (point
estimate 99.71) for Cmax and 92.92 – 102.48 (point estimate 97.59) for t1/2, respectively, and
were entirely in cluded within the bioequivalence acceptance limits of 80 – 125% [CPMP
2001].The intra individual variations in the AUC0–30h, AUC0–∞ , Cmax and t1/2 estimated from
the coefficients of variation as determined by ANOVA were 10.34%, 10.10%, 17.23% and
8.37%, respectively.
Summary
In conclusion, the two cetirizine formulations are equivalent with respect to the rateand extent
of absorption and it can be assumed to be therapeutically equivalent and exchangeable in
clinical practice.
Acknowledgment
This study was sup ported by PT Novell Pharmaceutical Laboratories, Jakarta, Indonesia.
Keywords
Bioavalability, Bioequicalence, Cetirizine, Plasma concentration, HPLC.
References
CPMP Committee for Proprietary Medicinal Products. Note for guidance on the investigation of bioavailability
and bioequivalence. The European Agency for the Evaluation of Medicinal Products, Human Medicines
Evaluation Unit (CPMP/EWP/QWP/ 1401/98). 2001.
Diletti E, Hauschke D, Steinijans VW. Sample size determination for bioequivalence assessment by means of
confidence in tervals. Int J Clin Ther Toxicol. 1991; 29: 1-8.
FDA Food and Drug Admini tr tion. Guid ance for industry: bioanalytical methods validation. Centre for Drug
Evaluation and Research, Rockville, MD, USA. 2001.
Lefebvre RA, Rosseel MT, Bernheim J. Single dose pharmacokinetics of cetirizine in young and elderly volunteers.
Int J Clin Pharmacol Res. 1998; 8: 463-470.
Genome 112

Macek J, Ptacek P, Klima J. Determination of cetirizine in human plasma by high performance liquid.
Chromatography. J Chromatogr B Biomed Sci Appl. 1999; 736: 231-235.
Mof fat AC, Osselton MD, Widdop B. Clarke’s analysis of drugs and poisons in pharmaceuticals, body fluids and
post mortem material. 3rd ed, London : Pharmaceutical press; 2004, 808-810.
Muscara MN, Nucci GD. Com parative bioavailabilty of single dose of tablet formulation of cetirizine di hydro -
chloride in healthy male vol un teers. Int J Clin Pharmacol Ther. 1995; 33: 27-31.
Shah VP, Midha KK, Findlay JWA, Hill HM, Hulse JD, McGilveray IJ, McKay G, Miller KJ, Patnaik RN,Powell
ML, Tonelli A, Viswanathan CT, Yacobi A. Pharm Res. 2000 Bioanalytical method val i da tion. Are visit with
a de cade of prog ress. Work shop/Conference Re port. 2000; 17:1551-1557.
Genome 113

Comparative bioavailability of two estazolam tablet formulations in

Indonesian healthy volunteers
Staff : Y. Harahap1*, Lucy Sasongko2, Budi Prasaja3, Ega Indriati3, Windy
Lusthom3, Lipin
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : Y. Harahap1,2, B. Prasaja1, E. Indriati1, W. Lusthom1 and Lipin1.
(2008). Arzneimittel Forschung Drug Research 58 (10):501-504
1
Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of Mathematic and Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok (Indonesia)
2
School of Pharmacy, Bandung Institute of Technology, Bandung (Indonesia)
3
PT. Clinisindo Laboratories, Jakarta (Indonesia)
Introduction
Estazolam (8-chloro-6-phenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazolo [4.3-α]-1,4-benzodiazepine, CAS 29975-16-
4) is a triabenzolobenzodiazepine derivative. The spectrum of pharmacological actions of
benzodiazepines, including sedative/hypnotic, anxiolytic, anticonvulsant and muscle relaxant
effects, is elicited by binding to the supramolecular benzodiazepine GABA receptor complex.
Benzodiazepines increase sleep time and improve sleep quality by reducing sleep-onset
latency and wakefulness after sleep onset and by increasing sleep efficiency [1, 2]. Because
tolerance and dependence occur with prolonged use, benzodiazepines are most useful for
short-term treatment of insomnia.. Benzodiazepines withdrawal may cause anxiety,
depression, nausea, perceptual changes, rebound insomnia, intense dreams, nightmares and
poor memory consolidation. Estazolam is classified as a short-acting benzodiazepine with
general properties similar to diazepam. It is given by mouth as a hypnotic in the short-term
management of insomnia usually in a dose of 1 to 2 mg at night. Estazolam has shown that
this drug is rapidly absorbed following oral administration and is rapidly diffused into brain
and other tissues. Peak plasma concentrations of estazolam are reached on average within 2 h
(0.5–6 h) of oral administration. Estazolam is extensively metabolized, mainly to 1-oxo-
estazolam and 4-hydroxy-estazolam. These metabolites are excreted either free or conjugated
in the urine with small quantities detected in the feces. Only a small proportion of a dose is
excreted as unchanged drug. The mean elimination half-life has generally been reported to be
in the range of 10 to 24 h [2–5]. This study was designed to investigate the pharmacokinetics
and bioavailability of two estazolam tablet formulations in order to prove bioequivalence
between both formulations.

1. Subjects and study design
Twenty-four healthy adult volunteers (17 males and 7 females) were selected among
Indonesian residents and participated in this study. The ages of the subjects were between 18
and 37 years (25.8 ± 5.2 years), the body weights were between 46.5 and 73 kg (56.2 ± 7.5
kg) and the heights were between 148 and 173 cm (162.9 ± 6.5 cm). The sample size n = 24
subjects was based on a previous report [6]. The subjects were selected after passing a clinical
screening procedure including a physical examination, ECG and clinical laboratory tests. The
volunteers were excluded if they had a history of any illness of the hepatic, renal and
cardiovascular system, had taken alcohol or other medications for a prolonged period of time
or had a history of benzodiazepine derivative intake.
The test preparation was Estalin® (2 mg estazolam tablets, manufacturer: PT Novell
Pharmaceutical Laboratories, Jakarta, Indonesia). The protocol of this study was reviewed by
the Committee of The Medical Research Ethics of the Faculty of Medicine Universitas
Genome 114

Indonesia and was approved by the National Agency of Drug and Food Control, Indonesia.
All participants signed a written informed consent after they had been informed of the nature
and details of the study.
Each volunteer received an oral dose of 2 mg of estazolam according to a standard two-way
crossover randomized design. The dose was taken with 240 ml of tap water. There was a two-
week washout period between the doses. The subjects were asked to fast from 10 h before
until 4 h after drug administration. Serial venous blood samples (10 mL) were collected pre-
dose and at 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 8, 12, 24, 36, 48 and 72 h after the administration in
heparinized tubes. After blood separation, plasma was frozen at –20 °C until drug analysis.
2. Analytical method
The concentrations of estazolam in plasma were analyzed by a validated HPLC method with
ultraviolet detector. The mobile phase was acetonitrile:disodium hydrogen phosphate 5
mmol/L, pH 6.0 (35:65) pumped isocratically at 1 mL/min through a Purospher® STAR RP-
18, 5 µm, 250 mm x 4.6 mm (Merck, Darmstadt, Germany) maintained to 40 °C. The
wavelength was set at 254 nm. Briefly, a 20 µL aliquot of internal standard (alprazolam in
methanol) was added to a 1.5 mL aliquot of plasma sample. After mixing, to the mixture was
added 2 mL of water, 2 mL of 0.1 N NaOH and 8 mL of diethyleter. The mixture was
vortexed for 5 min and centrifuged for 15 min at 3500 rpm. After centrifugation, the organic
phase was removed and evaporated to dryness under vacuum at 60°C. The residue was
reconstituted with 150 µL of the mobile phase and removed to the HPLC vial. The assay was
linear over the concentration range of 1–250 ng/mL.
3. Pharmacokinetic and statistical analysis
The bioequivalence was studied using the primary parameters, AUC0-t, AUC0-∞ and Cmax.
AUC0-∞ = AUC0-t + *Ct/Kel
where *Ct is the estimated last plasma concentration. The apparent elimination half-life (t½)
of cetirizine in plasma was determined by using the following equation t1/2 = (ln2)/Kel
The accepted bioequivalence range for these parameters was 80 % to 125 %. All statistical
analyses were performed using EquivTest 2.0 statistical program (Statistical Solutions, Cork,
Ireland).

All 24 volunteers successfully completed the trial according to the protocol. Both estazolam
formulations were well tolerated at the administered dose and no serious adverse clinical
events were observed. The mean estazolam concentrations versus time profiles for both for-
mulations are shown in Fig. 1.
The pharmacokinetic parameters used to assess the bioequivalence of the test formulation
versus the reference were AUC0-t, AUC0-∞ for the extent of the absorption and Cmax and tmax
for the rate of absorption. Descriptive statistics of the pharmacokinetic parameter for
estazolam test and reference preparations are summarized in Table 1 which shows the
geometric mean values and the range for the AUC0-t, AUC0-∞, Cmax, and t½ values
obtained for each formulation. The pharmacokinetic characteristic tmax is presented as mean
(± SD). The results of the bioequivalence analysis are given in Table 1. The parametric 90 %
confidence intervals for the T/R ratio ranged from 87.48–94.72 (point estimate 91.03) for
AUC0-t, 86.67–96.55 (point estimate 91.48) for AUC0-∞, 92.60-99.31 (point estimate 95.90)
for Cmax and 93.05–107.06 (point estimate 99.81) for t1/2, respectively. The intra-individual
variations of AUC0-t, AUC0-∞, Cmax and t1/2 estimated from the coefficients of variation as
determined by ANOVA were 8.0 %, 10.86 %, 7.0 % and 14.14 %, respectively.
Genome 115

Table 1: Statistical evaluation of the comparison of AUC0-t, AUC0-∞, Cmax and t½ of two formulations
administered to 24 subjects.
We found that the 90 % CI for AUC0-t, AUC0-∞ and Cmax were within the acceptable
bioequivalence range of 80 % to 125 % [7]. The pharmacokinetic parameters such as AUC0-t,
AUC0-∞, Cmax, tmax and t1/2 were comparable with data reported in the literature after oral
administration of 2 mg estazolam. AUC0-t of 2636.2 + 1049.5 and 2652.4 + 1145.6 ng · h/mL,
AUC0-∞ of 2789.0 + 1286.5 and 2859.2 + 1542.3 ng · h/mL, maximum plasma
concentrations of 96.5 + 13.2 and 99.9 + 15.1 ng/mL, terminal half-lives of 19.7 + 6.3 and
19.8 + 7.8 2 h as well as the time to reach maximum plasma concentrations (tmax) between
0.3–6 h were reported by Dal Bo et al. [6]. The observed double peak of pharmacokinetic
profile, also reported by Dal Bo et al. [6], was confirmed in this study.The mean ratio of
AUCt-∞ /AUC0-∞ of 11.9 % confirmed that the sampling time was adequate. The highest
intra-subject variability in this study was t1/2. These results suggest a sample size of 12
subjects as a minimal size that would be necessary in order to conclude bioequivalence with a
power of 80 % at the 5 % nominal level [8].
Conclusion
The two estazolam formulations are equivalent with respect to the rate and extent of absorp-
tion and they can be assumed to be therapeutically equivalent and exchangeable in clinical
practice.
Keywords
Benzodiazepines, bioavailability, bioequivalence, estazolam, HPLC, two way cross over.
References
Dingemanse J. Pharmacotherapy of insomnia: practice and prospects. Pharm World Sci. 1995;17(3):67–75.
Ramakrishnan K , Scheid D C. Treatment options for insomnia. Am Fam Physician. 2007;76(4):517–526.
Machinist J M, Bopp B A, Anderson D J, Granneman GR, Sonders RC, Tolman K, et al. Metabolism of 14C-
estazolam in dogs and humans. Xenobiotica.1986;16(1):11–20.
Mancinelli A, Guiso G, Garattini S, Urso R, Caccia S. Kinetic and pharmacological studies on estazolam in mice
and man. Xenobiotica. 1985;15(3):257–265.
Gustavson LE, Carrigan PJ. The clinical pharmacokinetics of single dose of estazolam. Am J Med.
1990;88(3A):2S–5S.
[Dal Bo L, Verga F, Marzo A, La Commare P, De Vito ML. Gas chromatographic assay for estazolam in human
plasma and results of a bioequivalence study. Pharmacol Res. 1997;3(4):329–333.
CPMP Committee for Proprietary Medicinal Products. Note for guidance on investigation of bioavailability and
bioequivalence. The European Agency for the Evaluation of Medicinal Products, Human Medicines Evaluation
Unit. 2001 (CPMP/EWP/QWP/1401/98).
Diletti E, Hauschke D, Stenijans VW. Sample size determination for bioequivalence assessment by means of
confidence intervals. Int J Clin Ther Toxicol.1991;29:1–8.
Genome 116

Cytotoxicity test of Curcuma zedoaria [Berg.] Roscoe to CaSki cell

(cervical cancer) in vitro
Staff : Y. Harahap1*, Wan Lelly H2
Student : Erilia Kesumahati1
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : Yahdiana Harahap1, Erilia Kesumahati1, Wan Lelly H2 (2008). The
Indonesian Journal of Natural Products 6 (4), 135-138
1
Department of Pharmacy,Faculty of Mathematic and Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
2
Dharmais Cancer Hospital, Jakarta
Introduction
According to WHO, cancer ranks the third as the cause of death in the developed countries
right after cardiovascular and infection. One of the most occurred cancers on women is
cervical cancer which is the second biggest cause of death after breast cancer (1)
Indonesia is rich in various traditional herbal medicine that has anticancer activity, among
them is Curcuma zedoaria [Berg] Roscoe) which has been used empirically by public to treat
cancer and tumor. According to research result, Curcuma zedoaria has some effects:
analgesic, antioxidant, anti mutagenic, anti tumor, anti inflammation, and cytotoxic to some
cancer cell cultures. It has some chemical contents such as: curcuminoid (curcumin,
demetoksicurcumin, bisdemetoksicurcumin), volatile oil, (mono dan sesquiterpen), isoflavon,
polisaccharide, and other groups (2,3).
Some traditional medicines from Curcuma zedoaria have been marketed lately and indicated
to treat several kinds of disease such as cervical cancer. The widely sold traditional herbal
medicine found in the market must be effective, have good quality, thus safety that are
authentic and scientifically should be tested. It is a concern that those traditional herbal
medicine has been mixed with other materials so that the cytotoxic effect is not maximum.
For that matter, cytotoxic testing in vitro to one of the dosage form Curcuma zedoaria as dry
extract in which it is written on the packaging that it is useful to prohibit cervical cancer.
Therefore it can be scientifically proven whether the the dosage form can be used to prohibit
cervical cancer or not.
In this research, the Ca Ski (human cervical cancer cell that has human papiloma virus type
16) is used because the occurrence of cervical cancer due to human papiloma virus (HPV)
type 16 is high. Besides that, the cytotoxic test using Ca Ski cell is still rare to be performed.
This research has the purpose to test whether the dosage form Curcuma zedoaria as dry
extract (Zf) has cytotoxic effect to CaSki cell in vitro in comparison to positive control
(cisplatin and Curcuma zedoaria).
Material and method

a. Tool
Cell culture flask, 24 wells plate, cell incubator with CO2 5%, liquid Nitrogen tank,
microscope (Nikon TMS), hemocytometer, dan spectrophotometer UV-VIS (Shimadzu UV
265).
b. Material
Curcuma zedoaria dosage form as dry extract (Zf branded); CaSki cell ATCC cell lines
CRL-1550 from Institut Sains Biologi, Fakultas Biologi dan Sains University Malaya; ethanol
extract of Curcuma zedoaria and cisplatin (Platosin®).
Genome 117

c. Method
Cytotoxic test on CaSki cell
Cell culture in culture flask that has been incubated for 6 days was taken out from cell
incubator then washed three times with PBS solution, then tripsin and PBS were added.
Incubation was done for 5 minutes in the cell incubator, then medium RPMI 1640 was added.
Cell and liquid were pipetted, then was put into the centrifuge tube and was centrifuged on
1000 rpm for 5 minutes. Then the supernatan was taken out and the acquired pellet was
suspended by adding RPMI 1640 medium.
After that 250 µl cell suspension was put into medium RPMI 1640 (cell density 8000 sel/ml)
then it was incubated for 5 days in the cell incubator at 37°C. Afterward test solution and
DMSO blank were added until the end concentration of 200; 150; 100; and 50 µg/ml was
acquired. The positive control solution has end concentration of 100; 70; 40; and 10 µg/ml,
then it was incubated for 24 and 48 jam at 37°C in the cell incubator.
At the end of incubation, 200 µl of red netral was added into each wells, then was incubated
again for 2 hours at 37°C in the incubator. After 2 hours, the culture medium in each wells
were pipetted and discharged, then each well was washed with 1 ml of PBS. Then 2 ml of 1%
SDS was added into each wells, it was incubated again for 30 minutes at 37°C in the cell
incubator. The volume of each wells was then pipetted and was put into the cuvette and the
absorbance was measured at 536 nm by using spektrofotometer UV-VIS (4,5).

Cytotoxic test showed that at the highest concentration (200 µg/ml) test solution and its
comparison had lethal cell percentage of 32.15 and 94.25% with LC50 value of 687.32 and
39.97 µg/ml after 24 hours of incubation. The highest lethal cell percentage of the test
solution and its comparison after 48 hours of incubation was 43.26 (200 µg/ml concentration)
and 99.45% (150 µg/ml concentration) with LC50 value of 318.31 and 22.59 µg/ml. The
positive control has the highest lethal cell after 24 and 48 hours of incubation of 99.85 and
100% with LC50 value of 0.044 and 0.023 µg/ml.
LC50 value (concentration that caused 50% of lethal cell) was achieved by using linear
regression analysis. After 24 hours of incubation, test solution and positive control had LC50
value of 39.97 and 0.044 µg/ml. After 48 hours of incubation, the test solution and positive
control in a row had LC50 value of 22.59 and 0.023 µg/ml.
Besides the percentage of lethal cells, the prove of citotoxicity can also be seen from CaSki
cell morphology. Microscopic observation using blue tryphan and showed the morphology
differentiation between before and after treatment with the test solution (fig 1 and 2)
Figure 1. CaSki cell without treatment Figure 2. CaSki cell after treatment
with test solution 100 µg/ml
Summary
The dry extract dosage form of Curcuma zedoaria has weak cytotoxic effect to CaSki cell in
vitro with LC50 value of 687.32 and 318.314 µg/ml after 24 and 48 hours of incubation.
Keywords
Cancer, CaSki cell, Curcuma zedoaria, Cytotoxicity test, LC50.
Genome 118

Reference
National Cancer Institute. What is Cancer? Http://www.nci.nih.gov/cancerinfo/wyntk., 1 Desember 2003, Pk.
09.00.
Anonim. Kunir putih: Curcuma zedoaria & Curcuma mangga. Http: //www. kunirputih.tripod.com/photo.htm., 1
Desember 2003, Pk. 08.30.
Freshney. 1994. Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic Technique. 3rd ed. New York: Wiley-Liss Inc.,1994:
85-88, 154-55, 260-70, 287.
Yacob, H. 2002. Aktiviti Sitotoksik Ekstrak Momordica charantia ke atas Sel Caski. Kuala Lumpur: University
Malaya, 2002.
Borenfreund E & Harvey. The Neutral Red Cytotoxicity Assay. Protocol no. 64. Invittox Online. Desember: 6 hlm.
Http://embryo.ib.amway.edu.pl/invittox/prot/3.htm, New York: 1992: 1-2., 10 Januari 2004, Pk. 09.30.
Genome 119

Determination of carvedilol in human plasma in vitro using HPLC-

fluorescence
Staff : Y. Harahap1*, Budi Prasaja2, Ega Indriati2, Windy Lusthom2
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : Y. Harahap1,2, B. Prasaja1, E. Indriati1, W. Lusthom1. (2008).
Prosiding Kongres Ilmiah XVI ISFI, 11-12 Agustus 2008,
Yogyakarta
1
Departement of Pharmacy FMIPA Universitas Indonesia
2
Clinisindo Laboratories, Jakarta
Introduction
Carvedilol (1-Carbazol-4yloxy-3-[2-[2-methoxyphenoxy)ethylamino] propan-2-ol) is
antagonist ß-adrenoreseptor nonselective and antagonist α1- adrenoreceptor that does not have
intrinsic simpatomimetic activity. Carvedilol is used as anti hipertension drug and congestive
heart failure that reduce the risk of death to severe to severe heart failure patients (Phuong,
N.T., dkk 2004; Packer, M. 2001; Vanderhoff, B.T., 1998). In oral administration, cavedilol is
absorbed well in the digestive line and it reaches peak concentration in plasma in 1-2 hours.
The concentration of carvedilol in plasma is around 2.69 – 85.1 ng/ml. In general, the half
time of carvedilol is around 7-10 hours (Konishi, H. 2003) and the limit of quantification of
carvedilol in plasma or serum is 0.25-3.6 ng/ml (Ptacek, P. 2002).
Considering its trace concentration in plasma, then a more sensitive analysis method needs to
be developed. In this research, the determination of carvedilol in human plasma was
developed by using only 0.5ml plasma and the content was determined by using High
Performance Liquid Chromatography-Fluorescence. The extraction method was using liquid-
liquid extraction using dietil eter and separation with reversed phase column (RP-18) and
phosphate-acetonitril as mobile phase. The method was validated for its specificity and
selectivity, limit of quantification, precision and accuracy, and stability (FDA, 2001).
Method’s robustness was showed on sample analysis for pharmacokinetic study.
Material and method

A. Material
Carvedilol (Cadila Pharmaceutical, Gujarat, India) and Propranolol HCl as internal standard
(Badan Pengawas Obat dan Makanan, Indonesia). Asetonitril (HPLC grade, Merck),
triethylamine, phosphate acid 85%, Potasium dihydrogen phosphate, diethyl eter, methanol,
and sodium hidroxide (Merck (Darmstadt, Germany).
B. Tool
HPLC system comprises of Shimadzu instrument (Kyoto, Japan) : pump LC 10A, controller
system SCL-10Avp, data processing and software Class VP( Shimadzu), oven column CTO-
10A, autoinjector SIL-10AD, and fluorescence detector RF-10AXL. The separation was done
using Lichrospher column 5µm ODS 125x4 mm and guard column 5µm, RP-18 (Merck,
Darmstadt, German) .
C. Chromatographic condition
The mobile phase was comprised of 70% phosphate buffer, pH 2 (contain 1% of
triethylamine) and 30% acetonitril. The flow rate was 1 ml/minute at column temperature
35ºC, detected on ecxitation wavelength of 238 nm and emission wavelength of 350 nm.
Genome 120

D. Sample preparation
Sample was stored in freezer at -20ºC and was thawed prior sample preparation. 20 µL
Propranolol as internal standart (500 ng/ml) was added into o.5ml plasma. After being shaken
for a while, 150 µL of sodium hydroxide and 5ml of diethyl eter were added, then it was
shaken with vortex for 5 minutes, centrifuged for 5 minutes at 3000rpm. The organic phase (±
4 ml) was moved and dried using vaccum at 40ºC. The residue was dissolved in 200 µL of
mobile phase and was put into HPLC vial.
E. Method validation (FDA, 2001)
The validation method includes specificity and selectivity test, linearity and determination of
LOD and LOQ, accuracy and precision, and stability test that comprises of stock solution,
short term, long term, freeze and thaw, and auto sampler stability.

A. Specificity and selectivity
Specificity and selectivity test on 6 blank plasma showed that chromatogram was free from
interference peak, with bias value of <20%.
Propranolol as internal standard was detected at retention time of ± 3.3 minutes, while
Carvedilol was detected at retention time of ± 7.5 minute
B. Linearity and stability
The limit of quantification was 1.00 ng/ml. Linear calibration curve was between 1.00-80.16
ng/ml with 0.9997coefficient of correlation.
Short term stability test was performed by preparing 3 sets of samples (low, medium, and
high).
In the freeze and thaw stability test, 3 concentrations (low, medium, high) were stored at -
20ºC and were measured at the 3rd cycle of freeze and thaw in order to check Carvedilol
stability at room temperature after thawing until analysis. The bias value result was <12%.
For autosampler stability, 3 sample concentrations were measured in duplo at the 0 hour and
were placed at room temperature (25ºC), then the samples were analyzed at the 24th hour.
There was no significant decrease of carvedilol concentration.
During the long term stability testing, 3 concentrations were placed at a temperature of -20ºC
for 65 days and were analyzed using fresh calibration curve. The bias value result was <8%.
C. Precision and accuracy
On precision and accuracy within day as many as 5 sets of quality control sample (QC) with 3
concentrations (low, medium, and high) were analyzed using calibration curve sample in 1
batch. The resulted precision and accuracy was <12% and <14%. On day-to-day variation of
precision and accuracy, 5 sets were analyzed using sample calibration sample in 5 different
batches. The resulted precision was <5% and the accuracy was <9%.
D. Aplication on biological sample
From the validation result of bioanalisis method, this analysis method is valid and can be used
to establish carvedilol level in plasma sample in bioequivalency study. Plasma sample was
collected periodically for 24 hours after oral administration of 25mg carvedilol to 24 healthy
volunteers. On Figure 1 the average concentration of carvedilol in plasma can be seen. The
maximum carvedilol in plasma can be reached in 1 hour after drug administration and the
elimination half time was 8 hours.
Genome 121

120.00
Konsentrasi Carvedilol dalam plasma
100.00
Konsentasi rata-rata (ng/ml)

80.00
60.00
40.00
20.00
0.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Waktu (jam)

Figure 1. Average Concentration of Carvedilol (Dilbloc®) in plasma after oral administration of 25mg single dose
carvedilol (24 healthy volunteer)
Summary
Carvedilol can be determined in plasma by using HPLC-fluorescence by using mobile phase
consists of 70% of phosphate buffer, pH 2(contain 1% of trietilamin) and 30% of acetonitril.
The flow rate was 1ml/minute at 35ºC column temperature, after it was extracted with diethyl
eter.
The valid method was used in determination of carvedilol level at 1.00-80.16 ng/ml range
using 0.5 ml plasma. This method resulted sensitivity level and high selectivity for
pharmacokinetic study and fulfilled the FDA criteria.
Keywords
Bioequivalence, carvedilol, HPLC-fluorescence, human plasma, propranolol HCl.
Reference
Phuong, N.T., Lee, B.J, Choi, J.K, Kang, J.S, Kwon, K.I, 2004. Enantioselective Pharmacokinetics of Carvedilol
in Human Volunteers. Arch Pharm Res. 27 (9) : 973-977.
Packer, M., Coats, A. Fowler, M.B. 2001. Effect of Carvedilol on Survival in Severe Chronic Heart Failure. The
New England Journal of Medicine, 344 (22) : 1651-1658.
Vanderhoff, Bruce T., Ruppel, Heather M. 1998. Carvedilol ; the New Role of Beta Blockers in Congestive Heart
Failure. American Family Physician.
Konishi, H., Nishio, S., Tsutamoto, T., Minouchi T., Yamaji A. 2003. Serum Carvedilol Concentration and Its
Relation to Change in Plasama Brain Natriuretic Peptide Level in The Treatment of Heart Failure : A
Preliminary Study. International Journal of Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics. 41 (12) : 578-586.
Ptacek, P., Macek. J., Klima, J. 2003. Liquid Chromatographic Determination of Carvedilol in Human Plasma. J
Chromatogr B. 789 : 405-410.
Astigarraga, R., rafael EB. 2003. The Determination of Carvedilol in Human Plasma by LC-MS/MS using
Motoprolol as The Internal Standard. Brazil : Institute of Biomedical Sciences.
Gehr, T.W.B. 1999. Tenero, D.M., Boyle, D.A., Qian, Y. Sica, D.A., Shusterman, N.H. The Pharmacokinetics of
Carvedilol and Its Metabolites After Single and Multiple Dose Oral Administration in patients With
Hypertension and Renal Insufficiency. Eur J Clin Pharmacol. 55 : 269-277.
US Department of Health and Human Service, FDA. 2001. Guidance for Inustry. Bianalytical Method Validation.
Center for Drug Evaluation and Research (CDER). 1-2.
Genome 122

Effect of AHA (Lactic acid) on in vitro caffeine skin penetration as

anti cellulite agent in cream, gel and ointment
Staff : J. Djajadisastra1*, Iskandarsyah1
Student : R. Novitasari1
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : joshita_d@yahoo.com ; joshita@farmasi.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : J. Djajadisastra, Iskandarsyah, R. Novitasari. (2008) Pengaruh AHA
Terhadap Penetrasi Kafein Sebagai Antiselulit Dalam Sediaan
Krim, Gel, Salep Secara In Vitro, Kongres Ilmiah Ikatan Sarjana
Farmasi Indonesia XVI 2008, Yogyakarta 10-11 Agustus

1
Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of Mathematics and Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
Introduction
Skin penetration is of great interest to personal care formulators for many reasons, from
toxicology concerns to innovative delivery opportunities. With the introduction of
nanotechnology to the industry, issues surrounding skin penetration have become more
complex. The medical industry has spent much time focused on the mechanisms to increase
and decrease skin penetration.
This investigation is focused on ‘Cellulite’, the superficial pockets of trapped fats cause
uneven lumps, bumps and dimples, or “orange peel” skin found at the thighs, buttocks and
abdomen of post-adolescent women, but rarely seen in men (Rawlings, 2006), is defined as a
localized metabolic disorder of the subcutaneous tissue which provokes an alteration in the
female body shape caused inferiority because of ugly body appearance at the swimming pool
or other fit centre. Cellulite appears when there is a damage on blood vessel and lymph
vessel, decreasing microcirculation of blood flow, increasing lymph fluid on dermis and
accumulation of fat on subcutaneous adipose tissue and change of collagen matrix surrounded
(Rona et al. 2006; Baumann, Leslie. 2002). Lifestyle (sport, diet, alcohol, smoking, stress)
and age also cause cellulite formation. The solution to overcome this problem is to use the
topical dosage forms (cream, gel, or ointment) containing agents capable of distributing or
reducing local fat accumulation by lipolytic action, thereby improving the aesthetic
appearance of the skin. Among the common agents for treatment of cellulite as slimming
agents are xanthine derivates such as caffeine or aminophyllin which can block the
antilipolytic action of adenosine, a potent endogenous inhibitor of lipolysis (Rawlings, 2006;
Cho Suk Hyung, 1997). Other known method in lipolysis stimulation are achieved by
inhibiting phosphodiesterase in order to prevent or at least limit the degradation of cAMP.
Topical dosage form will be effectively functioned if the active ingredient can penetrate into
the deeper layer of the skin either through transepidermal or transfolicular route. There are
many factors influencing drug penetration through skin, one of the many is the hydrated skin.
The hydrated skin will be more permeable that make the drug easier to penetrate (Lachman et
al. 1994).
Anti cellulite dosage forms distributed in market often contained AHA besides caffeine as the
active ingredients to overcome cellulite. Actually AHA is used as a keratolytic agent or
moisturizer in a topical dosage form (Idson, Bernard. 1992), but so far, there is no information
whether it will enhance or lower the caffeine penetration from the dosage form. The effect of
AHA (lactic acid) to the in vitro penetration of caffeine from cream, gel, and ointment dosage
form will be evaluated on this investigation.
In this study, cream, gel, and ointment of caffeine containing AHA and without AHA were
made. All formulas were evaluated for its physical stability during eight weeks at 29±1ºC,
40±1ºC, and 4±1ºC, including organoleptic observation, pH, globul’s diameter, viscosity,
consistency, phase separation test by freeze thaw method and mechanical test. The in vitro
Genome 123

penetration of caffeine from cream, gel, and ointment were evaluated using Franz Diffusion
Cell through skin membrane of Sprague Dawley female rat.

Materials
The main materials are caffeine anhidrate (Jilin, Cina), lactic acid (Purac, Spain), materials
for cream, gel and ointment, and female rat strain Sprague-Dawley weight ±150 gram, 2-3
month age (Institut Pertanian Bogor, Indonesia).
Instrumentation
The main instrumentation are Franz Diffusion Cell with receptor compartment volume of 14.0
mL (Bengkel Gelas Institut Teknologi Bandung, Indonesia), Shimadzu UV-1601
Spectrophotometer (Shimadzu Scientific Instrument Inc., Japan), and instrumentations used to
evaluate the dosage forms
Methods
First step is making preparation of cream, gel and ointment by procedures commonly done in
pharmaceutical laboratory and then doing the evaluation of the dosage forms including
organoleptic appearance (odor, color, phase separation), homogeneity, pH, viscosity and
rheology, consistency and measuring mean globule diameter. The physical stability test was
done to evaluate the capability of those dosage forms to be resistant at stressing condition for
higher or lower temperature (±29˚C, 40±2˚C, 4±2˚C) every two weeks for the periode of 8
weeks, freeze thaw/cycling test for 6 cycles and mechanical test (centrifugation) for 3750 rpm
as long as 5 hours.
Diffusion test was done using rat skin membrane clamped into a Franz Diffusion Cell system,
then 1 gram of cream/gel/ointment was put on the membrane between donor and receptor
compartment containing phosphate buffer pH of 7.4 and stirred at constant rotation and
maintained at 37°C. The receptor fluid samples as much as 0.5 mL were collected every 1h up
to 8 h. After each withdrawal, the receptor fluid was substituted with the same volume of
phosphate buffer. Sample was accurately measured by spectrophotometer at maximum
wavelength.

The data of analysis was done by the equation:

Q= cumulative amount penetrated (µg/cm2); V= cell volume = 14.0 mL; S= sample volume =
0.5 mL; A= membrane surface area = 1.8376 cm2; Cn= amount penetrated at-nth sampling
(µg/ml); ΣCi= amount penetrated from the first sample withdrawal interval up to n-1th.
All the dosage forms were good appearance, relatively stable to stress condition and
interaction among the ingredients
Figure 1 : Cumulative caffeine penetrated from cream, gel and ointment with AHA (A1, B1, C1) and without AHA
(A2, B2, C2)
Genome 124

From the figure above, it was showed that AHA can enhance the percutane penetration of
caffeine compared to the one without AHA, which can increase the cell proliferation of
stratum corneum lead to enhancement of cell turn over, decreasing the thickness of stratum
corneum and enhancing the thickness of viable epidermis. AHA can also decreasing the
cohesion of corneocyte by ionic bond, hydrating stratum corneum and increasing skin water
content, opening the tight structure of stratum corneum and swelling the keratin fibers,
making the skin become more permeable and enhancing the caffeine penetration in turn
(Kielhorn et al. 2006).
Conclusion
• Gel has the highest caffeine penetration followed by cream and ointment.
• AHA can enhance the caffeine percutane penetration
Keywards
AHA (Lactic acid), anti cellulite, caffeine, skin penetration, Franz Diffusion Cell.
Acknowledgement
This research is donated by the grant of Dana RUUI DRPM-UI Year 2008 Contract no.
240G/DRPM-UI/N1.4/2008 Direktorat Riset dan Pengabdian Masyarakat Universitas
Indonesia. The author thanks to PT Cognis Indonesia, PT Perdoni (Uniqema), PT Kimia
Farma for supporting the materials.
References
Rawlings, A. V. (2006) Cellulite and Its Treatment. International Journal of Cosmetic Science. 28, 175-190.
Rona, C., M. Carrera & E. Berardesca. (2006). Testing anticellulite products. International Journal of Cosmetic
Science. 28, 169-173.
Baumann, Leslie. (2002). Cosmetic Dermatology Principles and Practice. The MacGraw Hill Company, New
York: 3-6, 9, 119.
Cho Suk Hyung et al. 16 September 1997. Skin Care Composition for Treating Cellulite. United States Patent No.
5,667,793.
Lachman, L., H. Lieberman, J. L. Kanig. (1994). Teori dan Praktek Farmasi Industri, edisi ke-3. Terj dari, The
Theory and Practice of Industrial Pharmacy, oleh Siti Suyatmi. UI Press, Jakarta: 1042, 1081, 1085.
Idson, Bernard. (1992). Dry skin, moisturizing and emolliency. In: Cosmetics and Toiletries. 107.
Walters, K.A., H. Jonathan. (1993). Pharmaceutical Skin Penetration Enhancement. Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York: 355-361.
Smith, W.P. 24 Desember 1996. Method of Ameliorating Cellulite by Disrupting Barrier Function of the Stratum
Corneum. United States Patent No. 5,587,396.
Genome 125

Effect of cream, gel and ointment dosage forms on in-vitro skin

penetration of caffeine as an anti cellulite using Franz Diffusion Cell
Staff : J. Djajadisastra1*, Sutriyo1
Student : Haniefah1
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : joshita_d@yahoo.com; joshita@farmasi.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : J. Djajadisastra, Sutriyo, Haniefah. (2008) Effect of cream, gel and
ointment dosage forms on in-vitro skin penetration of caffeine as
an anti cellulite using Franz diffusion cell. ASEAN Scientific
Conference in Pharmaceutical Technology 2008, Penang, June 1-3
1
Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of Mathematics and Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
Introduction
Cellulite, a superficial pockets of trapped fats cause uneven dimpling or “orange peel” skin
found at the thighs, buttocks and abdomen of post-adolescent women, rarely seen in men, is
one of the problems on skin which is quite complex for some women even men, and emerging
the feel of inferiority. Cellulite appears when there is a damage on blood vessel and lymph
vessel, decreasing microcirculation of blood flow, increasing lymph fluid on dermis and
accumulation of fat on subcutaneous adipose tissue and change of collagen matrix surrounded
lead to accumulation of fat on subcutane layer (Rona et al. 2006). Lifestyle (sport, diet,
alcohol, smoking, stress) and age is also contributed to cause cellulite formation. One of the
solution to overcome this problem is to use the topical dosage forms (cream, gel, ointment)
containing active ingredients capable of distributing or reducing local fat accumulation by
lipolytic action, thereby improving the aesthetic appearance of the skin. Among the common
agents for treatment of cellulite as slimming agents are xanthine derivates such as caffeine or
aminophyllin which can block the antilipolytic action of adenosine, a potent endogenous
inhibitor of lipolysis which can inhibit phosphodiesterase enzyme lead to lipolysis (Baumann,
Leslie. 2002). Other known method in lipolysis stimulation are achieved by inhibiting
phosphodiesterase in order to prevent or at least limit the degradation of cAMP.
Certain drugs act on the fatty tissue, connective tissue and on the microcirculation, can be
used topically, systemically, or as transdermal administration. When using topical treatments,
the concentration and pharmacological/pharmacokinetic characteristics of the active drugs
must be considered, as well as the nature of the vehicle. The interaction of the drug with the
vehicle and the skin, the way the drug is applied, and other biological and environmental
factors may also affect the response to treatment. Because the stratum corneum is the main
barrier to drug penetration, formulations for topical use may include so called skin enhancers,
substances which, when included in the formulation, significantly increase cutaneous
penetration. Skin enhancers can be common solvents (water, alcohol, methyl alkyl
sulphoxide) or surfactants. They may also be phytosomes, phospholipid molecules which,
when attached to the active drug, increase their liposolubility, or liposomes –lipid vesicles
filled with active drugs (Rossi&Vergnanini, 2000).
So far there is no information about the influence of cream, gel and ointment on skin
penetration of active ingredient to reduce cellulite phenomenon. For this purpose caffeine is
formulated into different kinds of topical dosage form like cream, gel, or ointment. This
investigation was done to perform the amount of caffeine penetrated from cream, gel and
ointment dosage form, and the penetration was in vitro tested through Franz diffusion cell
using Sprague-Dawley rat abdomen skin as membrane diffusion. The test was done for 8
hours with 11 times samples withdrawn, and the absorption of each sample was measured by
spectrophotometer UV-Vis at wavelength 272.5 nm.
Genome 126


Materials
The main materials are caffeine anhidrate (Jilin, Cina), lactic acid (Purac, Spain), materials
for cream, gel and ointment, and female rat strain Sprague-Dawley weight ±150 gram, 2-3
month age (Institut Pertanian Bogor, Indonesia).
Instrumentation
The main instrumentation are Franz Diffusion Cell with receptor compartment volume of 14.0
mL (Bengkel Gelas Institut Teknologi Bandung, Indonesia), Shimadzu UV-1601
Spectrophotometer (Shimadzu Scientific Instrument Inc., Japan), and instrumentations used to
evaluate the dosage forms.
Methods
First step is making preparation of cream, gel and ointment by procedures commonly done in
pharmaceutical laboratory and then doing the evaluation of the dosage forms including
organoleptic appearance (odor, color, phase separation), homogeneity, pH, viscosity and
rheology, consistency and measuring mean globule diameter. The physical stability test was
done to evaluate the capability of those dosage forms to be resistant at stressing condition for
higher or lower temperature (±29˚C, 40±2˚C, 4±2˚C) every two weeks for the period of 8
weeks, freeze thaw/cycling test for 6 cycles and mechanical test (centrifugation) for 3750 rpm
as long as 5 hours. Diffusion test was done using rat skin membrane clamped into a Franz
Diffusion Cell system, then 1 gram of cream/gel/ointment was put on the membrane between
donor and receptor compartment containing phosphate buffer pH of 7.4 and stirred at
constant rotation and maintained at 37°C. The receptor fluid samples as much as 0.5 mL were
collected every 1h up to 8 h. After each withdrawal, the receptor fluid was substituted with
the same volume of phosphate buffer. Sample was accurately measured by spectrophotometer
at maximum wavelength.

The data of analysis was done by the equation:

Q= cumulative amount penetrated (µg/cm2); V= cell volume = 14.0 mL; S= sample volume =
0.5 mL; A= membrane surface area = 1.8376 cm2; Cn= amount penetrated at-nth sampling
(µg/ml); ΣCi= amount penetrated from the first sample withdrawal interval up to n-1th.
All the dosage forms were good appearance, relatively stable to stress condition and
interaction among the ingredients.

Figure 1 : Cumulative caffeine penetrated from cream, gel and ointment
From the figure above, it was showed that gel gives the highest penetration because it has
water and alcohol (glycerol, propylene glycol) in huge amount, which can hydrating stratum
corneum and increasing skin water content and opening the tight structure of stratum corneum
and swelling the keratin fibers, making the skin become more permeable and enhancing the
caffeine penetration in turn (Kielhorn et al. 2006).
Genome 127

Conclusion
Gel has the highest caffeine penetration followed by cream and ointment.

Keywords
Anticellulite, caffeine, cream-gel-ointment, Franz Diffusion Cell, skin penetration.
Aknowledgement
This research is donated by the grant of Dana RUUI DRPM-UI Year 2008 Contract no.
240G/DRPM-UI/N1.4/2008 Direktorat Riset dan Pengabdian Masyarakat Universitas
Indonesia. The author thanks to PT Cognis Indonesia, PT Perdoni (Uniqema), PT Kimia
Farma for supporting the materials.
References
Rona, C., M. Carrera & E. Berardesca. (2006). Testing anticellulite products. International Journal of Cosmetic
Science. 28, 169-173.
Baumann, Leslie. (2002). Cosmetic Dermatology Principles and Practice. The MacGraw Hill Company, New
York: 3-6, 9, 119.
Rossi, A.B.R. & A.L. Vergnanini. (2000). Cellulite: A review. Journal of European Academy of Dermatology and
Venereology. 14: 251-262.
Kielhorn, J., S. M. Kollmuβ. I. Mangelsdorf. (2006). Dermal absorption. In: Environmental Health Criteria 235.
World Health Organization.
Smith, W.P. (1996). Method of ameliorating cellulite by disrupting the barrier function of the stratum corneum.
United States Patent. No. 5,578,396.
Rawlings, A.V. (2006). Cellulite and its treatment. Int. J. Cosmet. Sci. 28, 175-190.
Pacheco, A.A. & T.L. Barr. (2005). Transdermal penetration system and treatment for cellulite. United States
Patent Application Publication No. US 2005/0182076 A1.
Znaiden, A.P., M.C. Cheney, C.S. Slavtcheff & Suk H. Cho. (1996). Cosmetic compositions for reducing or
preventing signs for cellulite. United States Patent No. 5,536,449.
Cho Suk Hyung, N.K. Richardson, A.R. Burger, A.M. Brinker & M.E. Rerek. (1997). Skin care compositions for
treating cellulite. United States Patent No. 5,667,793.
Osborne, D.W. & A.H. Amann. (1990). Topical drug delivery formulations. Marcel Dekker Inc., USA: 47-66.
Genome 128

Validation Of O6-Methylguanine Analysis Method By High

Performance Liquid Chromatography – Fluorescence Using Strong
Cation Exchange
Staff : Y. Harahap1*, Santi Purna Sari1, Hening Herawati2
Student : Novita Sari1
Sponsor : FMIPA – UI (Hibah Riset Peneliti Pemula)
Disseminated at: Yahdiana Harahap1, Santi Purna Sari1, Hening Herawati2, Novita
Sari1 (2008). Prosiding Kongres Ilmiah XVI ISFI 2008,
Transformasi Ilmu dan Teknologi dalam Praktek Kefarmasian

1
Department of Pharmacy Fakulty of Mathematics and Natural Science Universitas Indonesia
2
Dharmais Cancer Hospital
Introduction
Alkylation the DNA base as nucleophile center by alkylating agent will produce adduct that
can give cytotoxic and mutagenic effect. The generated mutagenic effect is related with the
forming of O6-alkylguanine that can cause point mutation in which when it is accumulated
will cause cancer (Harahap, Y. 2003, Herron, D. C. et. al.,1979).
Some methods have been used to determine adduct such as Gas Chromatography, High
Performance Liquid Chromatography, Mass Spectroscopy, Electrochemical Detection, and
Radioactive Labelling (Poirier, M. C., et al. 2000). High performance liquid chromatography
(HPLC) is the most appropriate method to analyze the nucleic acid components and its
derivatives in a biology sample (Pimenov, A. M., 1988).
DNA base and its alkylated derivatives have almost similar chemical structure so they also
have almost similar polarity. Therefore, the separation method using HPLC in this research is
using the strong cation exchange column.
Previous research has proved that guanine, nucleoside, nucleotide, and some of their alkylated
derivates have the highest intensity to have fluorescence among other purin and pirimidin
bases (Udenfriend S. et al, 1962). The previous research had also proved O6-alkylguanine
have highest fluorescence intensity when being detected by HPLC-fluorescence detection
without being derivatized first, while N7-alkilguanine and other adduct needs derivatisation to
have high fluorescence intensity (Harahap, Y. 2003).
This research was conducted to get the optimum condition and validation the analysis method
of O6-alkylguanine using high performance liquid chromatography (HLPC) with strong cation
exchange and fluorescence detector
Material and method

A. Tool
A set of HPLC which consists of column (Supelcosil LC-SCX 5 µm, 250 x 4.6 mm), pump
(Shimadzu LC-10AD vp), oven column (TC 1900), fluorescence detector (Shimadzu RF-10A
xl), system controller (Shimadzu SCL-10A vp) and recorder (Shimadzu Class-VP); syringe
100 µl (Hamilton); eluen filter 0,45 µm (Whatman).
B. Material
O6-methylguanine, N7-methylguanine, N3- methyladenine, guanine, adenine,
cyclophosphamide and DNA calf thymus (Sigma Aldrich); Ammonia 25 % p.a, asam format
p.a, hydrochloride acid p.a, Tris, ammonium chloride, ethanol, methanol and
dimethylsulphoxide (Merck), Aquabidestilata (Wida Wi)
Genome 129

C. Procedure
1. Chromatographic condition
The optimum condition to analyze O6-methylguanine in this research was High Performance
Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) with strong cation exchange column Supelcosil LC-SCX (5
µm, 250 x 4.6 mm), mobile phase was ammonium format-methanol (94:6) with 30 mM final
concentration of ammonium format, pH 3.95, flow rate was 1.2 mL/minute, column
temperature 30oC, and was detected at 300 nm exitation wavelength and 370 nm emission.
2. Selectivity test
Standard solution of O6-methylguanine, N7-methylguanine, N3-methylladenine, guanine and
adenine were injected as much as 20.0 µL into HPLC, then the retention time of each standard
was recorded and the resolution value was calculated.
3. Calibration curve, limit of detection (LOD), and limit of quantification (LOQ)
O6-methylguanine solution with 5.0 until 500.0 ng/mL concentration (20.0 µL each) was
injected into HPLC, then the coefficient of correlation was calculated, after that the LOD and
LOQ could be determined.
4. Accuracy and precision test
O6-methylguanine solution with concentration of 50.0; 100,0; and 300.0 ng/mL (20.0 µL
each) was injected into HPLC. The procedure was repeated six times, then % diff, deviation
standard and coeficient of variance could be calculated.
5. Reaction of calf thymus DNA with cyclophosphamide in vitro
0.5 mL calf thymus DNA (50 mg/ 12.5 mL) was reacted with 4.0 mg of cyclophosphamide in
1.0 mL mixture of dimethyllsulphoxide and 0.01 M Tris-HCl pH 8.0. Then the mixture was
incubated at 37oC for 6 hours. Afterwards, the alkylated DNA was precipitated with 3.0 mL
of ethanol absolute and then centrifuged with 3000 rpm for 10 minutes. The supernatant was
discarded and washed the pellet with 1.5 mL of 70 % ethanol. Then the DNA pellet was
hydrolysed with 1.0 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloride acid at 70oC for 30 minutes. Finally 20.0 µL
of the aliquot was injected to HPLC.

The retention time of O6-Methylguanine, guanine, adenine dan N7-methylguanine were 8.908;
3.725; 5.442; and 5.517 minutes with resolution more than 1.5. The result showed that this
method was selective to determine O6-methylguanine in sample. The calibration curve was
linear at concentration of 5.05 until 505.0ng/mL with the coefficient of correlation was
higher than 0.999. The regression coefficient function from calibration curve was 1.1569%.
This showed that the used concentration resulted good linearity. The LOD was 4.5752 ng/mL
and the LOQ was 15.2506 ng/mL.
The result of all accuracy tests showed that % diff between -2 until 2%. The precision test
data for O6-methylguanine with concentration of 50.5; 101.0 and 303.0ng/mL showed
coefficient of variation of 0.3719; 0.4153; and 0.5687% respectively. In this research, the
application of reacting calf thymus DNA with cyclophosphamide in vitro was also performed.
The performed procedure was also similar with the procedure in the previous research
(Harahap, Y, 2003), and hydrolization was performed with 0.1 N hydrochloride acid. The
reaction between calf thymus DNA with cyclophosphamide after 6 hours of incubation at
37oC, resulted O6-methylguanine.
Genome 130


Figure 1. Chromatogram of reaction result of 0.5 mL calf thymus DNA (50 mg/12.5 mL) with 4.0 mg of
cyclophosphamide. Note : (A) Guanine, (B) O6-metilguanine
Conclusion
The validated analysis method could separate DNA components and analysed O6-
methylguanine following the reaction of calf thymus DNA with cyclophosphamide.
Keywords
Calf thymus DNA, cyclophosphamide, guanine, O6-Methylguanine, validation.
Reference
Harahap, Y. 2003. Efek Samping Penggunaan Zat Pengalkil. Farmacia. Mei: 44-45.
Mutschler, E. 1991. Dinamika Obat, Buku Ajar Farmakologi dan Toksikologi Edisi Kelima. Penerbit ITB,
Bandung: 700-707.
Harahap, Y. 2003. Rasio O6-alkilguanin dan Tautan Silang Terhadap N7-alkilguanin yang Terbentuk pada Reaksi
Zat Pengalkil dengan DNA in vitro. Disertasi Program S3. Farmasi ITB, Bandung: 6-39.
Herron, D. C. & R. C. Shank. 1979. Quantitative High-Pressure Liquid Chromatographic Analysis of Methylated
Purines in DNA of Rats Treated with Chemical Carcinogens. Anal. Biochem. 100: 58-63.
Poirier, M. C., R. M. Santella & A. Weston. 2000. Carcinogen macromolecular adducts and their measurement.
Carcinogenesis. 21(3): 353-359.
Pimenov, A. M., Yu V. Tikhonov & P. T. Toguzov. 1986. The Separation of The Major Ribonucleotides,
Nucleosides, and Bases in Reverse-Phase Ion-Pair Chromatography. J. of Liq. Chromatogr. 9(5): 1003-1019.
Lloyd, R. Snyder, J. J. Kirkland & J. L. Glajch. 1997. Practical HPLC Method Development, 2nd edition. John
Willey & Sons, Inc., New York: 341-346, 686-695.
Udenfriend S. & P. Zaltzman. 1962. Fluorescence Characteristics of Purines, Pirimidines, and Their Derivatives:
Measurement of Guanine in Nucleic Acid Hydrolyzates. Anal. Biochem. 3: 49-59.
Venitt, S. & J. M. Parry. 1984. Mutagenicity testing, a practical approach. IRL Press, Oxford: 12-18, 30-42.
Genome 131

3D simulation of multiple odor sources localization using modified

particle swarm optimization
Staff : Wisnu Jatmiko1*
Student : Aditya Nugraha1, Wulung Pambuko1
Sponsor :-
Email contact : wisnuj@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Nugraha, Aditya, Wulung Pambuko and Wisnu Jatmiko. 2008.
Proceedings of International Conference on Advanced
Computational Intelligence and Its Application 2008. pg 116-119
1
Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI, Depok 16424, Jawa Barat, Indonesia
Introduction
Research in odor source localization problem is grown. Particle Swarm Optimization PSO) is
one of the algorithms which are proposed to solve this problem. Several researches have been
done and they give good results. Wisnu et al. [1], modifying PSO standard using detect and
response mechanism [2,3,4], charged robot [5,6,7], and wind utilization method, has been
successful in solving one odor source localization problem in dynamic environment.
Furthermore, Aditya et al. [8] developed modified PSO (MPSO) [1] in order to increase its
performance so that it can be used in multiple odor sources localization problem. MPSO [1]
has been modified using robot with odor closing method, spread phase, parallel PSO niching
[9], ranged global best I (RGB I) and RGB II [10]. Its result is also satisfactory.
Using 2D simulation environment, Wisnu et al. [1] And Aditya et al. [8,10] has proved their
methods were successful in solving odor source localization problem. Unfortunately, their
simulation was done only in 2D environment. The model used is very simple and not
applicable in real world. Robot’s movement was not including physical model as its
movement in real situation. Its collision was also done without physical model. Now, using
ODE (Open Dynamics Engine) library, we try to implement 3D and physical model in
simulation of multiple odor sources localization. ODE was introduced by Smith [8] as library
for simulating physical model of objects in 3D environment. Its result is expected to know if
MPSO [7] is applicable in real world.
ODE
ODE is a platform based on OpenGL written in C++ programming language for simulating
object in 3D. ODE is fast and stable. Primary author of ODE is Russel Smith
Figure 1. Object

There are features in ODE, like joints and collision detection. Object consists of body and
geometry. Body is used for calculation on dynamics and geometry is for calculation on
collision detection, as shown in Fig. 1. The shape of body and geometry do not have to be the
same. In this paper, we used ODE version 0.10.0. In this version, collision rules of cylinder
geometry are not perfectly built. So that, cylinder geometry could not be used for wheel of a
vehicle, because it would not have any friction with the ground, which cause robot will not
move. For wheel, we could substitute cylinder geometry with ball geometry, but still can
draw it as a cylinder.
Implementation
Chassis and upper body are joined by fixed joint so that they are bundled as one body. Wheels
are connected with hinge2 joint. Hinge2 joint has suspensions features which make it
suitable for modeling wheel of a vehicle. Hinge2 joint has 2 orthogonal axes. One has a
function like a suspension of wheel, and the other one as a wheel axis. The first one has a
parameter of boundary of spin, just like stir of ordinary vehicle. The other one does not have
a boundary, because its function as a wheel axis. Every joint in ODE can be attached a motor
on it, which makes it spin and it used for moving the robot.Suspension parameter for hinge2
joint are decided as shown on following table.
Table 1. Suspension Parameter
Parameter Nilai
dParamSuspensionERP 0.01
dParamSuspensionCFM 0.01
Design of the robot is shown in Fig. 2.
Figure 2. Robot measurement
After implementing robot and its environment in 3D simulation including physical model, we
utilized MPSO algorithm for searching multiple odor source in dynamic environment. Its
results show that MPSO is applicable in real situation. Fig. 8 is a visualization of the new
software based on ODE to deal for single odor source while Fig. 9. is a visualization for
multiple odor sources. Therefore the visualization of new software based on ODE is shown in
Fig. 3.

Figure 3. Implementasion of MPSO using ODE
Conclusions
We have implemented MPSO algorithm in 3D environment in order to model robot
movement and environment in searching multiple odor sources. We have moved one step
further to implement MPSO in real robot for searching odor source in real world. The result
of this simulation is not analyzed yet. Furthermore, this simulation must be analyzed in order
to assess its effectiveness.
Keywords
3D simulation, ODE (Open Dynamic Engine), Particle Swarm Optimization, robotic.
References
[1] W. Jatmiko, Kosuke Sekiyama and Toshio Fukuda, “A PSO-Based Mobile Robot for Odor Source
Localization in Dynamic Advection-Diffusion with Obstacles Environment: Theory Simulation and
Measurement”, IEEE Computational Intelligence Magazine, pp 37-51, May 2007.
[2] A. Carlisle and G. Dozier, “Adapting Particle Swarm Optimization to Dynamic Environment,” Proceeding of
the International Conference on Artificial Intelligence, pp.429-434, 2000.
[3] X. Hu and R. Eberhart, “Tracking Dynamic Systems with PSO: Where’s the Cheese?”, Proceedings of the
Workshop on Particle Swarm Optimization, Indianapolis, IN. 2001. [4] X. Hu and R. Eberhart, “Adaptive
Particle Swarm Optimization: Detection and Response to Dynamic System”, Proceedings of the IEEE
Congress on Evolutionary Computation (CEC), pp. 1666-1670, 2002.
[5] T. M. Blackwell, “Swarms in Dynamic Environment”, In Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Proceedings of
the Genetic and Evolutionary Computation, volume 2723, pp.1-12, 2003.
[6] T. M. Blackwell and P. J. Bentley, “Don’t Push Me! Collision-Avoiding Swarms”, In Proceedings of the IEEE
Congress on Evolutionary Computation, volume 2, pp. 1691-1696, May 2002.
[7] T. M. Blackwell and P. J. Bentley, “Dynamic Search with Charged Swarms”, In Proceedings of the Genetic
and Evolutionary Computation Conference, pp. 19-26, 2002.
[8] Aditya Nugraha, W. Jatmiko, J. Perkasa, “Modifikasi Particle Swarm Optimization untuk Pencarian Banyak
Sumber Gas”, Jurnal Ilmu Komputer dan Informasi, July 2008.
[9] Engelbrecht, Andries P., “Fundamentals of Computational Swarm Intelligence”, Wiley, 2005.
[10]Aditya Nugraha, W. Jatmiko, “Ranged Global Best in Parallel PSO Niching for Multiple Odor Sources
Localization Problem”, 2008.
[11]Kousei Demura, “Easy! Practical! Robot Simulation”, Morikita Publishing, 2008.

Ad Hoc On-Demand Distance Vector (AODV) routing protocol

performance evaluation on hybrid ad hoc network: Comparison of
result of NS-2 simulation and implementation on testbed using PDA
Staff : R.F. Sari1*, B. Budiardjo1
Student : A. Syarif1
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : riri@ui.ac.id, bbudi@ee.ui.ac.id, tigi6580@yahoo.co.id
Disseminated at : Makara, Teknologi, Vol. 12, No. 1 April 2008: 1-13
1
Electrical Engineering Departement, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
In Mobile Ad hoc NETwork (MANET), node supplemented with wireless equipment has the
capacity to manage and organise autonomously, without the presence of network
infrastructures. The hybrid ad hoc network, enable several nodes moved freely (mobile) to
developed communication instantly and independently from infrastructure. They could access
to the Local Area Network (LAN) or to the Internet. Functionalities of ad hoc network very
depend on the routing protocol that determines route around node.
Ad hoc On-demand Distance Vector (AODV) was one of routing protocols in the ad hoc
network which is reactive. This protocol was one of the protocols that were often researched
and used.
In this Research, AODV protocol investigation was conducted by developing a testbed using
Personal Computer, several Laptops (the Linux Red Hat operation system 9.0 and Fedora
Core 2), and Personal Digital Assitant (PDA). This research also made a complete package by
mean of cross compilation for PDA iPAQ.
The hardware used as follows: Laptops, PC Desktops, PDAs, Hewlett Packard iPAQ Series 5
(Intel XScale 400 MHz, RAM 128 MB, ROM 48 MB, Wireless, Infra red, Bluetooth
(integrated build-in) The software used in testbed are Linux ( Red Hat 9.0, Fedora Core 2),
Linux Familiar v0.7.2 (kernel 2.4.19-rmk6-pxa1-hh36), AODV-UU[2], Monmotha Cross
Compiler [7], Ethereal [6], Iperf [10], Iptables [8]. We used NS-2 as our network simulator.
In this research, we used Personal Computer with 2 NIC, eth0 and wlan0. Eth0 is a device
connected to the infrastructure by wire; wlan0 is a device which communicates to ad hoc
network as depicted in Figure 1.
LAN /
INtern
Ad
hoc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

Figure 1: Ad hoc Gateway Position
We make a script for gatewaying ad hoc network to infrastructure (hybrid). The purpose of
this script is that all packets from the ad hoc network could be forwarded to the infrastructure
(LAN or Internet). Iptables is used for packet filtering. Scenario in Figure 2 enforce
multihoping. We have only one collision domain in our testbed. To avoid collision only one
station can send at the time. This can be done using Iptables.

Adhoc-GW
LAN Adhoc-PC1
/
Adhoc-NB
Adhoc-PDA

Figure 2. Multihop Scenario
The command for accepting all packets from wlan0 forward to eth0 (POSTROUTING) from
all IP address to destination (LAN and Internet) are described as:
“iptables –t nat -A POSTROUTING -s 0/0 -0 eth0 -j MASQUERADE”
This script allows all nodes in ad hoc network to access LAN or Internet.

All experiment was performed indoor in the Mercator Laboratory of Postgraduate Building,
Faculty of Engineering, and Universitas Indonesia.

Figure 3: Scenario 4 Hops
AODV can effect directly to the outcome. When the route to destination cannot be found, or
when a node wait for RREP, the packet will be buffered. If a route can not find
RREQ_RETRIES, then all packets in buffer should be dropped and message “Destination
Unreachable” sent.
End-to-end delay is the time needed for the packet transmitted by a node and received by
destination. End-to-end delay is the sum of time spent for transmission, propagation, and
process and queuing at every node in network. The result shows 1,004,3 ms for the average
end-to-end delay. Figure 4 shows the routing overhead for 900 seconds.
Packet Delivery Ratio
101,00%
100,00%
99,00%
1 Hop
2 Hop
Percent
98,00% 3 Hop
4 Hop
Rata-Rata
97,00%
96,00%
95,00%
1 2 3 4 5
Percobaan

Figure 4. Packet Delivery Ratio in Testbed


Conclusion
Scalability and reliability are difficult to achieve simultaneously. In general, results obtained
from the simulation of AODV protocol using Network Simulator NS-2 are packet delivery
ratio 99.89%, end-to-end delay 0.14 seconds and routing overhead 1,756.61 byte per second.
Afterwards results from simulation were compared to results from testbed. Results obtained
from testbed are packet delivery the ratio 99.57%, end-to-end delay 1.004 seconds and
routing overhead 1,360.36 byte per second.
Keywords
Ad hoc hybrid, MANET, protokol routing AODV.
References
Carlo Kopp, “Ad hoc Networking” , Background Article, Published in ‘System’ , pp 33-40, 19 Februari 2002.
Alex Ali Hamidian,”A Study of Internet Connectivity for Mobile Ad Hoc Networks in NS 2”, Master’s Thesis,
Departement of Communication System, Lund University, Sweden, Januari 2003.
Project MobileMAN: http://keskus.hut.fi/ tutkimus/MobileMan/ , terakhir diakses 3 Mei 2005.
Jose Costa-Requena, Juan Gutierrez, Raimo Kantola, Jarrod Creado, Nicklas Beijar, “Network Architecture for
Scalable Ad hoc Network”, 11th International Conference of Telecommunications 2004 Brazil, 1-6 Agustus
2004.
Perkin C.; Belding-Royer E.M; Das S, “Ad hoc On Demand Distance Vector (AODV) Routing”, IETF Internet
Draft, Januari 2002.
Thomas Staub,”Performance Comparison of MANET Routing Protocols in Ad-hoc and Hybrid Network”,
Computer Science Project, University of Berne, Switzerland, Februari 2004.
http://www.isi.edu/nsnam/ns, terakhir diakses 13 Januari 2005.
Andi Bayu Wirawan, Eka Indarto, Mudah Membangun Simulasi dengan Network Simulator-2, Andi offset, 2004
Gnuplot 3.7 : http://www.gnuplot.info, terakhir diakses 2 Januari 2005.
Valeri Noumov, Gross. Thomas. “Simulation of Large Ad Hoc Networks”, ETH Zurich, 2003.
AODV-UU web page, http://www.docs.uu.se/scanet/aodv/, terakhir diakses 13 Mei 2005.
http://www.handhelds.org, terakhir diakses 12 Juni 2004.
Ethereal How-to : http://www.openxtra.co.uk/ support/howto/ethereal-display-filter.php, terakhir diakses 10 Juni
2005.
Project Iperf : http://dast.nlanr.net/Projects/Iperf/, terakhir diakses 10 Juni 2005.
Iptables How-to: http://www.linuxguruz. com/iptables/ howto/, terakhir diakses 10 Juni 2005.Raj Jain, The art of
computer system Performance Evaluation Performance Analysis, John Willey, 1991.

ANN models for determining bio-gasoline octane number based on

input data conditions
Staff : A. Wahid1* and B.H. Susanto1
Student :-
Sponsor : Hibah Bersaing 2007-2008
Email Contact : wahid@che.ui.ac.id; bambanghs@che.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at: 1). A. Wahid, B.H. Susanto, H. T. Rahayu, and T. Adilina. (2007).
“On determination of bio-gasoline octane number using artificial
neural network”. Proceeding’s The 10th “Quality in Research
(QIR)” International Conference4 – 6th Dec 2007: ICT-06
2). A. Wahid and B. H. Susanto. (2008). "Pemilihan Model JST
untuk Penentuan Angka Oktana Biogasolin Sesuai dengan Data
Masukannya". Prosiding Seminar Nasional Teknologi Simulasi
IV: 368-372. Wisma MM UGM Yogyakarta, Indonesia
3). A. Wahid and B. H. Susanto. (2008). “ANN models for
determining bio-gasoline octane number based on input data
conditions”Proceeding of International Graduate on Engineering
and Science (IGCES’08). Johor - Malaysia, 23 - 24 Dec 2008
1
Chemical Process System Lab., Department of Chemical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas
Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
Introduction
Bio-gasoline exhibits several merits when compared to that of the existing petroleum fuels. It
has fuel properties similar to that of gasoline and is produced easily and renewably from the
crops. However, the constraint that often appears in the research on bio-gasoline is
determining the octane number (ON) for predicting the quality of the bio-gasoline. It is not
always possible to conduct engine test to determine ON because of the cost of the reference
fuels and the more effort required. Hence, there have been many attempts either to calculate
the ON itself or to derive an alternative parameter that could provide an indication of the
ignition quality.
The application of ANN in engineering field is interesting and increasing one. In this study,
an attempt made to predict the ON of bio-gasoline using ANN models. They operate like a
‘black box’ model and do not require detailed information about the system being tested.
Instead, they learn the relationship between the input parameters and the controlled and
uncontrolled variables by studying previously recorded data, similar to the way a non-linear
regression might perform. The input data are the physical properties of bio-gasoline namely
density and temperature on 50% distillation or TT50, while the output is octane number of
bio-gasoline. It tried to using new data for a octane number above 92. The range of data is
0.73 - 0.8865 kg/m3 for density, 217 - 320oC for TT50, and 72.53 to 109.07 for octane
number.
There are three ANN models using in this study. These are multi-layer feed-forward (MLFF)
which comes from the previous development of back-propagation model, radial basis (RB),
and generalized regression neural network (GRNN). The MLFF model has one layer with 2
input neurons (X1 and X2), one hidden layer with 4 neurons and one layer of output (Y).
Network architecture produced the predicted optimum target. The RB model has "sum-
squared error goal" of 2 and "spreads meant" of 0.01. Meanwhile, in the GRNN model, which
is the development of RB model, used default functions.


1. Tests using validation data in the range of training data (density and the TT-50)
The simulation results in Table 1 show that the GRNN model is the best in determining the
ON when the density inputs are in the range. The MLFF model has smaller error (5.4%) than
the RB model (6.2%). RB model also produces the same value for all
variation of the density inputs. This is caused by the tendency of the RB model to choose ON
slightly smaller than the octane number data in the database, if variation of input data
produces a small ON. This means that the GRNN model should be used if the data density is
in the range of available data.
The same results also appear on the temperature variations of TT-50 in the range of data in
the software. The GRNN model produces the best value, with the average error of 0.5%.
Meanwhile, the MLFF model is in the second rank with an average error of 3.1%, and the RB
model provides the biggest error, at 8.1%.

Table 1: Error variations in the density and TT50 are in the range of training data
Density Variations TT50 Variations
No
GRNN MLFF RB GRNN MLFF RB
1 10.2% 3.8% 20.6% 0.9% 1.8% 32.6%
2 4.4% 9.9% 4.0% 1.1% 10.5% 1.8%
3 3.4% 11.1% 3.1% 0.4% 1.7% 2.9%
4 0.2% 1.4% 2.1% 0.2% 0.2% 2.2%
5 0.5% 1.0% 1.1% 0.1% 1.2% 1.2%
3.8% 5.4% 6.2% 0.5% 3.1% 8.1%

2. Tests using validation data LESS THEN OUT of range of training data (density and the
TT-50)
The simulation results are shown by Table 2. From the table 2, the MLFF model is better
than other models. The error of MLFF model is the smallest (3%), followed by the
GRNN model (5%), and the RB model generates the biggest error, at 18.7%. In this
case, the RB model can not determine the large ON. ON produced by the RB model are
have the same value for all variations of density, at 72.15. This ON is smaller than ON
data in the database, at 72.53.
Table 2: Errors with density and TT50 variationsare smaller outside the range of data input
No
1 17.6% 5.7% 18.0% 100.0% 5.9% 33.8%
2 2.3% 2.3% 18.0% 100.0% 6.3% 33.5%
3 2.3% 2.3% 18.0% 100.0% 6.8% 32.9%
4 2.3% 3.1% 18.0% 100.0% 8.9% 31.3%
5 0.5% 1.9% 21.6% 0.9% 10.0% 30.5%
5.0% 3.0% 18.7% 80.2% 7.6% 32.4%

It means, if someone has data where the TT-50 data from bio-gasoline is at smaller
outside TT-50 in the database, then it should choose the MLFF model for determining
ON, because of the level of average error is the smallest (7.6%). The GRNN model also
can not determine ON at the four data input. The results of determining ON is 0 (zero).
The neurons owned by GRNN model could not be able to determine the data input at
outside the training data. Actually, when the TT-50 approaching the smallest temperature
data owned by the training data (in the database), at 249oC, the GRNN model could be
able to determine ON accurately. The level of error is only 0.9%. But then, the TT-50 is
farther from its smallest value will produce very bad result (fail). These results also prove
that the neurons developed by the MLFF model is able to capture the unknown data input
(in the training data). Although the results still have errors high enough, but will be

more reliable than the others.

3. Tests using data validation GREATER THEN OUT of range of training data (density and
the TT-50)
Simulation results are indicated by Table 3. From the table, all of the ANN model have
relatively small error, but the GRNN model is the best due to has smaller an average error
than the others. At the high density, ON is small, in such a way that the RB model has a
relatively small error. However, the results of its ON are all the same, at 72.15. The
highest error occurred at the smallest TT-50 (307oC). It means that the model can not be
able to predict ON of bio-gasoline at small value of TT-50.
The RB model is the best for the TT-50 condition at higher outside of the training data.
The level of average error of the RB model is the smallest (1.2%). Followed by the MLFF
model at 8.3%, and the GRNN model has the highest errors on average, at 40.6%.
Table 3: Error variations in the density greater input in the training data
No
1 2.4% 4.0% 1.1% 100.0% 13.0% 2.7%
2 2.3% 3.6% 1.2% 100.0% 10.2% 0.7%
3 0.7% 2.1% 2.0% 0.8% 5.1% 0.5%
4 0.5% 1.4% 2.3% 0.7% 4.6% 0.4%
5 0.6% 1.9% 1.8% 1.5% 8.3% 1.9%
1.3% 2.6% 1.7% 40.6% 8.3% 1.2%

4. Conclussions
a. None of the three ANN models tested, generally can be used for all the data input
b. There are condition in application of the three ANN models for determining ON of
bio-gasoline :
1) Use MLFF model if the data of density and temperature TT-50 is smaller at
outside the range of training data
2) Use RB model if the temperature TT-50 is greater at outside the range of training
data
3) Use GRNN model if the data density and the TT-50 are in the range of training
data, and the density is higher at outside the range of training data as well.
References
Lob, A., et al. (1995). “Prediction of reformate RON by FT-IR”. Fuel. 74(2):.227-231.
Meusinger, R., R. Moros. (2001). “Determination of octane numbers of gasoline compounds from their chemical
structure by 13C NMR spectroscopy and neural networks”. Fuel. 80: 613- 621.
Murty, B. S. N., R. N. Rao. (2004). “Global optimization for prediction of blend composition of gasolines of
desired octane number and properties”. Fuel Processing Technology. 85: 1595– 1602.
Nasikin, M., et al. (2004). “The influence of acid strength of acid catalysis reactions that occur in the Triglyceride
from palm oil” Research Report of Department of Gas and Petrochemical FTUI.
Siang, Jong Jek. (2005). Artificial Neural Network and Its Programming using Matlab – Ed. I., Yogyakarta:
Andi.

An alternative theory of idea generation

Staff : R.M. Woodhead1 and M.A. Berawi2*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : maberawi@eng.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : R.M. Woodhead & M.A. Berawi (2008), An Alternative Theory to
Idea Generation, International Journal of Management Practice,
Volume 3, No. 1, pp.1-19
1
Technology Management, School of Technology, Oxford Brookes University, Oxford, United Kingdom
2
Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
It argues that the field of Innovation Management has become detached from the act
of invention (i.e. idea generation) because of an assumption brought by cognitive
theories of creativity that hold the location of ideas 'exclusively' within the human
brain. This 'assumption', grounded in cognitive theory, is believed to be the reason for
low levels of research, as it seems like a problem area already solved. This position
has caused a lack of research into idea generation, and is challenged by way of an
alternative view based on a relationship between intentionality and causality, which is
offered as a way to develop new perspectives that open the field to further enquiry.
This paper shares findings that offer the field of Innovation Management a different
lens to view the relationship between ideas, invention and innovation by
distinguishing different types of ideas and assembles them in a framework that links
intentionality (purpose and function) to causality (outcome and processes).
Research methodology
This paper seeks to stimulate further research into ‘practical’ idea generation by challenging
the current. It builds on many years of Action Research in major technology projects. The
basis for different types of ideas was proven using predicate calculus logic and a survey using
a statistical test known as the one-proportion test.

The distinction of the word ‘idea’ into one of the four mutually exclusive categories aids the
management of idea generation: ideas as purposes, outcomes, processes and functions (Figure
1).
Real World
Outcomes Processes Causality
Purpose Functions Intentionality
Conceptual World

Figure 1 - The relationship between Functions, Processes, Outcomes and Purpose

The ability to consider alternative ways or processes that could perform the same essential
work with added benefit stimulates enquiry and further exploration of the origin of ideas is
shown in Figure 2.
Real World Processes A
Causality
Outcomes Alternative
Processes
Processes B Recognition of processes
in relation to functions
leads to ideas. Further,
this can be extended to
Purpose Functions suggest new functions
and new purposes.
New Purpose Extended
Function Intentionality
Conceptual World

Figure 2 – Functional thinking enables Innovation
Thus our theory on idea generation is defined as:
“A good idea is the product of a complete functional understanding, optimal selection of
processes, and alignment between purpose and outcome.”
Conclusion
This paper has offered an alternative theory as to where ideas originate, and hopes to
stimulate further research into the act of idea generation and the exploration of why some idea
generation techniques are better than others. It has also offered one way to manage such a
process using Bayesian logic.
Keywords
Function, idea generation, innovation, process, value.
References
Ahmed, P.K. (1998) ‘Culture and climate for innovation’, European Journal of Innovation Management, Vol. 1,
No. 1, pp.30–43.
Alam, I. (2003) ‘Commercial innovations from consulting engineering firms: an empirical exploration of a novel
source of new ideas’, Journal of Product Innovation Management, Vol. 20, No. 4, pp.300–313.
Allen, M. (1962) Morphological Creativity, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey.
Amabile, T. (1988) ‘A model of creativity and innovation in organizations’, in Staw, B. and Cummings, L. (Eds.):
Research in Organizational Behavior, JAI Press, Greenwich, CT, Vol. 10, pp.123–167.
Argyris, C. (1999) On Organizational Learning, 2nd ed., Blackwell, Oxford.
Baird, D. (2002) ‘Thing knowledge – function and truth’, Techné: Journal of the Society for Philosophy and
Technology, Vol. 6, No. 2.
Belbin, M. (1981) Management Teams: Why they Succeed or Fail, Heinemann, Oxford.
Berawi, M.A. (2004) ‘Quality revolution: leading the innovation and competitive advantages’, International
Journal of Quality & Reliability Management, Vol. 21, No. 4, pp.425–438.
Berawi, M.A. (2006) Distinguishing Concept Types in Function Models During the Act of Innovation, PhD Thesis,
Oxford Brookes University, Oxford, UK.
Berawi, M.A. and Woodhead, R.M. (2005) ‘Application of knowledge management in production management’,
Human Factors and Ergonomics in Manufacturing, Vol. 15, No. 3, pp.249–257.

Bigelow, J. and Pargetter, R. (1987) ‘Functions’, Journal of Philosophy, Vol. 84, pp.181–196.
Birdi, K.S. (2005) ‘No idea? Evaluating the effectiveness of creativity training’, Journal of European Industrial
Training, Vol. 29, No. 2, pp.102–111.
Bunge, M. (1997) ‘Mechanism and explanation’, Philosophy of the Social Sciences, Vol. 27, No. 4, pp.410–465.
Buzan, T. and Buzan, B. (1995) The Mind Map Book, BBC Books, London.
Cumming, B.S. (1998) ‘Innovation overview and future challenges’, European Journal of Innovation
Management, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp.21–29.
Cummins, R. (1975) ‘Functional explanation’, Journal of Philosophy, Vol. 72, pp.741–764.
De Bono, E. (1984) Lateral Thinking for Management, Penguin, London.
Elder, C.L. (1998) ‘What versus how in naturally selected representations’, Mind, Vol. 107, pp.349–363.
Garnham, A. and Oakhill, J. (1994) Thinking and Reasoning, Blackwell, Oxford.
Gatchel, S.G. and Tanik, M.M. (2001) ‘Process science and philosophy for want of synthetic thought and a
unifying philosophy’, Society for Design and Process Science, Vol. 5, No. 4, pp.1–21.
Goodman, M. (1995) Creative Management, Prentice Hall, Hemel Hempstead.
Griffiths, P.E. (1993) ‘Functional analysis and proper function’, British Journal for the Philosophy of Science, Vol.
44, pp.409–422.
Howells, J. (2005) The Management of Innovation and Technology, Sage, London.
Kaufman, J.J. and Woodhead, R.M. (2006) Stimulating Innovation in Products and Services, Wiley, New Jersey.
Kroes, P. (2001) ‘Technical functions as dispositions: a critical assessment’, Techné, Vol. 5, No. 3, Spring, pp.1–
16.
Man, J. (2001) ‘Creating innovation’, Work Study, Vol. 50, No. 6, pp.229–234.
Marquis, D.G. (1969) ‘The anatomy of successful innovations’, Innovation, November.
Miles, L.D. (1961) Techniques of Value Analysis and Engineering, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Millikan, R.G. (1989) ‘In defense of proper functions’, Philosophy of Science, Vol. 56, pp.288–302.
Mukerjea, D. (1997) Brain Dancing, Oxford University Press, Singapore.
Oetinger, B. (2004) ‘From idea to innovation: making creativity real’, Journal of Business Strategy, Vol. 25, No. 5,
pp.35–41.
Parnes, S., Noller, R. and Biondi, A. (1977) Guide to Creative Action, Scribners, New York.
Pavia, T.M. (1991) ‘The early stage of new product development in entrepreneurial high-tech firms’, Journal of
Product Innovation Management, Vol. 8, No. 1, pp.18–31.
Perkins, D.N. (1981) The Mind’s Best Work, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA.
Perry, J.E. and Shalley, C.E. (2003) ‘The social side of creativity: a static and dynamic social network
perspective’, Academy of Management Review, Vol. 28, No. 1, pp.89–106.
Polanyi, M. (1958), Personal Knowledge: Toward a Post-Critical Philosophy, University of Chicago Press,
Chicago.
Preston, B. (1998) ‘Why is a wing like a spoon? A pluralist theory of function’, Journal of Philosophy, Vol. 95,
pp.215–254.
Price, C. (2001) Function in Mind: A Theory of Intentional Content, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Proctor, T. (1995) The Essence of Management Creativity, Prentice Hall, New York.
Rawlinson, J.G. (1981) Creative Thinking and Brainstorming, Wiley, New York.
Razoumnikova, O.M. (2000) ‘Functional organization of different brain areas during convergent and divergent
thinking: an EEG investigation’, Cognitive Brain Research, Vol. 10, No. 1, pp.11–18.
Schmidt-Tiedemann, K.J. (1982) ‘A new model of the innovation process’, Research Technology Management,
Vol. 25, No. 2, pp.18–22.
Searle, J.R. (1995) The Construction of Social Reality, Penguin, New York.
Sternberg, R.J. (Ed.) (1988), The Nature of Creativity: Contemporary Psychological Perspectives, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
Tidd, J. Bessant, J. and Pavitt, K. (2001) Managing Innovation: Integrating Technological, Market and
Organisational Change, 2nd ed., Wiley & Sons, Chichester.
Trott, P.(2002) Innovation Management and New Product Development, 2nd ed., Pearson Education Ltd., Harlow.
Twiss, B. (1992) Managing Technological Innovation, 4th ed., Pitman, London.
Urabe, K. (1998) Innovation and Management, Walter de Gruyter, New York.
Vermaas, P.E. and Houkes, W. (2003) ‘Ascribing functions to technical artefacts: a challenge to etiological
accounts of functions’, The British Journal for the Philosophy of Science, Vol. 54, pp.261–289.
Vernon, P.E. (Ed.) (1975) Creativity, Harmondsworth, Middlesex.
Whitehead, A.N. (1929) Process and Reality, Macmillan, New York.
Woodhead, R.M. and Downs, C.G. (2001) Value Management: Improving Capabilities, Thomas Telford Ltd.,
London.
Woodhead, R.M., Kaufman, J.J. and Berawi, M.A. (2004b) ‘Is “drink beer” a function?, Value world’, Journal of
the Society of Value Engineers, Vol. 27, No. 1, pp.11–15.
Woodhead, R.M. and McCuish, J. (2002) Achieving Result: How to Create Value, Thomas Telford Ltd., London.
Wright, L. (1973) ‘Functions’, Philosophical Review, Vol. 82, pp.139–168.

A conceptual model for mitigating delay in construction projects

using a project learning approach
Staff : H. Abdul-Rahman1, I.A. Yahya1, M.A. Berawi2*
Student : L.Wai Wah1
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : amethystlww@yahoo.com, maberawi@eng.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : H.Abdul-Rahman, I.A.Yahya, M.A.Berawi, L. Wai Wah (2008), A
conceptual model for mitigating delay in construction projects using a
project learning approach, Construction Management and Economics,
Volume 26, Issue 1, pages 15 – 27, Taylor and Francis
1
Faculty of Built Environment, University of Malaya, Malaysia
2
Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Indonesia
Introduction
There is universal agreement that construction delay is a common phenomenon in the
construction industry worldwide. Poor or lack of project knowledge management continues to
plague the construction industry, especially in relation to project delays.
The value of knowledge in the construction industry becomes noticeable as the success and
failure of each completed project depends on the knowledge contribution and integration of
project parties. As knowledge is the product of learning process, the extent of learning effort
in the project environment will have a significant effect on the product value. Project learning
thus serves as a professional best practice in the construction industry. The core
characterizations of professional expertise include an understanding of the processes behind
the activity, a profound understanding of the ways in which the problems and complexity of
the work are addressed and the materials used and continuous development. The use of
project learning can lead to the development of professional expertise by cultivating a culture
of continuous learning through experience and through narratives about others to create,
maintain and improve the content of existing knowledge.
This paper shows how knowledge management can be used to reduce the impact of
construction projects delay using a project learning approach.
Given the little research was done on delay mitigation using project learning approach,
exploratory research serves as an appropriate approach to gain information with the
phenomenon of the research area. Data collection was initiated in four-stages. These included
literature survey, preliminary survey, case study and interview survey.

The project learning approach contributes towards positive impacts on project schedule
performance. The conceptual model incorporates knowledge on knowledge management,
project learning, lessons learned feedback and supervisory control principles. The results
indicate that the application of project learning is a way to align the project schedule
performance to client and market needs while maintaining the contractor’s core competency.
The delay mitigation model is designed specifically for the use in construction projects and
with an intention to deal with major delay factors caused by lack of knowledge and poor
management of lessons learned. To assure an effective project learning process throughout the
project period, project manager, engineer or experienced personnel should act as a project
learning supervisor to ensure each project activities are performed in a knowledge-based
manner.

The research has implications for both practitioners and academic researchers. For
practitioners, this study highlights the importance of project learning to improve the level of
competency of contractors for future projects. For academic researchers, there is a need to
highlight and draw the practitioners’ attention to the significance of project learning in the
development of project performance competency.
Conclusion
Poor management of project knowledge in the construction industry encourages difficulty of
access to valuable and quality knowledge in performing project tasks. This in turn will lead to
repeated mistakes, slow and wrong decision making, and as a consequence, it will lead to an
increase in time and delay events. The application of project learning thus should be managed
with due care and due diligence to grasp the maximum value of project learning.
Keywords
Conceptual model, construction project, knowledge management, project delay, project
learning.
References
Abdul-Rahman, H., Berawi, M.A., Berawi, A.R., Mohamed, O., Othman, M. and Yahya, I.A. (2006a) Delay
mitigation in the Malaysian construction industry. Journal of Construction Engineering and Management,
132(2), 125-133.
Abdul-Rahman, H., Mohamed, O., Othman, M. and Yahya, I.A. (2006b) Mitigation of delay during
commissioning of construction project using knowledge management – Contractors’ perception. Quantity
Surveying National Convention, Sheraton Subang, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia.
Ahmed, S.M., Azhar, S., Castillo, M. and Kappagantula, P. (2002) Construction delays in Florida: An empirical
study. Department of Construction Management, Florida International University.
Aibinu, A.A. and Odeyinka, H.A. (2006) Construction delays and their causative factors in Nigeria. Journal of
Construction Engineering and Management, 132(7), 667-77.
Al-Khalil, M.I. and Al-Ghafly, M. (1999) Important causes of delay in public utility projects in Saudi Arabia.
Construction Management and Economics, 17(5), 647-55.
Al-Momani, A.H. (2000) Construction delay: A quantitative analysis. International Journal of Project
Management, 18(1), 51-9.
Alaghbari, W., Kadir, M.R.A., Salim, A. and Emawati. (2007) The significant factors causing delay of building
construction projects in Malaysia. Engineering, Construction and Architectural Management, 14(2), 192-206.
Anuar-Othman, A., Torrance, J.V. and Abdul-Hamid, M. (2006) Factors influencing the construction time of
engineering projects in Malaysia. Engineering, Construction and Architectural Management, 13(5), 481-501.
Arditi, D., Akan, G.T. and Gurdamar, S. (1985) Reasons for delays in public projects in Turkey. Construction
Management and Economics, 3(2), 171-81.
Arditi, D. and Pattanakitchamroon, T. (2006) Selecting a delay analysis method in resolving construction claims.
International Journal of Project Management, 24(2), 145-55.
Arditi, D., Tokdemir, O.B. and Suh, K. (2001) Effect of learning on line-of-balance scheduling. International
Journal of Project Management, 19(5), 265-77.
Assaf, S.A. and Al-Hejji, S. (2006) Causes of delay in large construction projects. International Journal of Project
Management, 24(4), 349-57.
Assaf, S.A., Al-Khalil, M. and Al-Hazmi, M. (1995) Causes of delay in large building construction projects.
Journal of Management in Engineering, 11(2), 45-50.
Benson, R.W. (2006) Key issues for the construction industry and the economy. MidMarket Advantage, Fall, 16-8.
Berawi, M.A. (2004) Quality revolution: Leading the innovation and competitive advantages. International
Journal of Quality & Reliability Management, 21(4), 425-438.
Berawi, M.A. (2006) Distinguishing Concept Types in Function Models during the Act Of Innovation. PhD Thesis.
Oxford Brookes University, UK.
Berawi, M.A. and Woodhead, R.M. (2005) Application of knowledge management in production management.
Human Factors and Ergonomics in Manufacturing, 15(3), 249-257.
Bordoli, D.W. and Baldwin, A.N. (1998) A methodology for assessing construction project delays. Construction
Management and Economics, 16(3), 327-37.
Carr, W. and Kemmis, S. (1986) Becoming Critical: Education, Knowledge and Action Research. Falmer Press,
New York.
Chan, D.W.M. and Kumaraswamy, M.M. (1997) A comparative study of causes of time overruns in Hong Kong
construction projects. International Journal of Project Management, 15(1), 55-63.
Dlakwa, M.M. and Culpin, M.F. (1990) Reasons for overrun in public sector construction projects in Nigeria.
International Journal of Project Management, 8(4), 237-41.

Egbu, C.O. (1999) The role of knowledge management and innovation in improving construction competitiveness.
Building Technology and Management Journal, 25, 1-10.
Fong, P.S.W. (2003) Knowledge creation in multidisciplinary project teams: An empirical study of the processes
and their dynamic interrelationships. International Journal of Project Management, 21(7), 479-86.
Frankfort-Nachmias, C. and Nachmias, D. (1996) Research Methods in the Social Sciences, 5th Edn. St. Martin’s
Press, Inc, Euston Road, London.
Freund , J.E. and Simon, G.A. (1997) Statistics, 9th Edn. Prentice-Hall.
Freund , R.J. and Wilson, W.J. (2003) Statistical Methods, 2nd Edn. Academic Press.
Frimpong, Y., Oluwoye, J. and Crawford, L. (2003) Causes of delay and cost overruns in construction of
groundwater projects in a developing countries: Ghana as a case study. International Journal of Project
Management, 21(5), 321-26.
Hammersley, M. and Gomm, R. (2000) Introduction, in Gomm, R., Hammersley, M. and Foster, P. (eds) Case
Study Method, SAGE Publications Limited, Bonhill Street, London, pp. 1-16.
Hari, S., Egbu, C. and Kumar, B. (2005) A knowledge capture awareness tool: An empirical study on small and
medium enterprises in the construction industry. Engineering, Construction and Architectural Management,
12(6), 533-67.
Hegazy, T. and Zhang, K. (2005) Daily windows delay analysis. Journal of Construction Engineering and
Management, 131(5), 505-12.
Hong, X. and Proverbs, D. (2003) Factors influencing contractor performance: An international investigation.
Engineering, Construction and Architectural Management, 10(5), 322-32.
Hussein, J.B. (2003) Emerging challenges of project management in Malaysia. Master Builders, 4th Quarter, 82-85.
Kaming, P.F., Olomolaiye, P.O., Holt, G.D. and Harris, F.C. (1997) Factors influencing construction time and cost
overruns on high-rise projects in Indonesia. Construction Management and Economics, 15(1), 83-94.
Keegan, A. and Turner, J.R. (2001) Quantity versus quality in project-based learning practices. Management
Learning, 32(1), 77-98.
Kim, Y., Kim, K. and Shin, D. (2005) Delay analysis method using delay section. Journal of Construction
Engineering and Management, 131(11), 1155-164.
Kotnour, T. (2000) Organizational learning practices in the project management environment. International
Journal of Quality & Reliability Management, 17(4/5), 393-406.
Koushki, P.A., Al-Rashid, K. and Kartam, N. (2005) Delays and cost increases in the construction of private
residential projects in Kuwait. Construction Management and Economics, 23(3), 285-94.
Krejcie, R.V. and Morgan, D.W. (1970) Determining sample size for research activities. Educational &
Psychological Measurement, 30, 607-610.
Kumaraswamy, M.M. and Chan, D.W.M. (1998) Contributors to construction delays. Construction Management
and Economics, 16(1), 17-29.
Lee, C.C.C., Egbu, C., Boyd, D., Hong, X. and Chinyo, E. (2005) Knowledge management for small medium
enterprise: Capturing and communicating learning and experiences. CIB W99 Working Commission 4th
Triennial International Conference Rethinking and Revitalizing Construction Safety, Health, Environment and
Quality, Port Elizabeth, South Africa, 17-20 May, pp. 808-20.
Lo, T.Y., Fung, I.W.H. and Tung, K.C.F. (2006) Construction delays in Hong Kong civil engineering projects.
Journal of Construction Engineering and Management, 132(6), 636-49.
Lopez, S.P., Peon, J.M.M. and Ordas, C.J.V. (2004) Managing knowledge: The link between culture and
organizational learning. Journal of Knowledge Management, 8(6), 93-104.
Mansfield, N.R., Ugwu, O.O. and Doran, T. (1994) Causes of delay and cost overruns in Nigerian construction
projects. International Journal of Project Management, 12(4), 254-60.
Mezher, T.M. and Tawil, W. (1998) Causes of delays in the construction industry in Lebanon. Engineering,
Construction and Architectural Management, 5(3), 252-60.
Odeh, A.M. and Battaineh, H.T. (2002) Causes of construction delay: Traditional contracts. International Journal
of Project Management, 20(1), 67-73.
Ogunlana, S.O., Promkuntong, K. and Jearkjirm, V. (1996) Construction delays in a fast-growing economy:
Comparing Thailand with other economies. International Journal of Project Management, 14(1), 37-45.
Robinson, H.S., Carrillo, P.M., Anumba, C.J. and Al-Ghassani, A.M. (2001) Perceptions and barriers in
implementing knowledge management strategies in large construction organizations. RICS COBRA Conference
2001, Glasgow Caledonian University, Glasgow, 3-5 September.
Rwelamila, P.D. and Hall, K.A. (1995) Total systems intervention: An integrated approach to time, cost and
quality management. Construction Management and Economics, 13(3), 235-41.

A thick Su-8 mask for microabrasive jet machining on glass

Staff : Agung Shamsuddin Saragih1, Tae Jo Ko2*
Sponsor : Korea Science and Engineering Foundation (KOSEF)
Email Contact : ashamsuddin@ui.ac.id; tjko@yu.ac.kr
Disseminated at : Agung Shamsuddin Saragih, Tae Jo Ko, (2009) International
Journal Advance Manufacturing Technology, Volume 41, Numbers
7-8, pages 734-740, DOI 10.1007/s00170-008-1520-7
1
Mechanical Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus Baru UI Depok
16424, Indonesia
2
School of Mechanical Engineering, Yeungnam University, 214-1 Daedong, Gyeongsan, Kyoungbuk 712-749,
Republic of Korea
Introduction
Glass is widely used in many fluidic applications because of its high resistance to chemicals
as well as its transparency. Microabrasive jet machining (µ-AJM) is a process that uses
impact energy from high-pressure air, containing microabrasive particles, to remove material
on workpieces. As a fast and flexible technique for micropatterning of glass, µ-AJM is usually
combined with a patterned mask, which is chosen from various types of high-erosion-resistant
materials to material with excellent photolithographic properties. Introduced by IBM in 1989,
the epoxy-based SU-8 photosensitive resist has been used in a wide range of applications for
fabricating high aspect ratio structures using optical lithography.
The advanced properties of SU-8 make it potentially suitable as a mask for the µ-AJM
process. The excellent photolithography properties of SU-8 will allow complex micro-pattern
to be fabricated and its transparency allow aligning process for a multi stage fabrication
process. Its capacity for high degree of cross-linking brings out the creation of a thick mask,
and as scarifying layer, this will permit high aspect ratios erosion result. By applying thick
SU-8 mask, a microchannel profile on glass using the µ-AJM process was obtained.
Experimental details
Commercially available NANO™ SU-8 2100 formulation from MicroChem Corp. (USA)
was used. Soda-lime glass slides 1 mm thick, with a Knoop hardness of 585 kg/mm2±20,
were cut into 25×25mm2 squares shape as target substrate. It cleaned in a hot Piranha solution
(75% H2SO4 : 25% H2O2), and dehydrated at 200°C to form a hydrophilic surface which
increased mask adhesion. Aluminum oxide (Al2O3) with an average grain size of 17.5 µm was
used as abrasive particles for the µ-AJM process. Some desription are shown on Fig.1.
Figure 1. µ-AJM equipment and schematic structure, close loop on nozzle on substrate, and Alumina abrasive
grain
Table 1. Process experimental parameters

Parameter Value
Nozzle size (rectangle) 0.18×3.75 mm
Stand-off distance 30 mm
Air pressure 300 kPa
Flow rate 0.8 g/min
Scanning speed 0.3 mm/s
Number of scans 10 times

The total process flow of the microchanneling

process using µ-AJM is shown in Fig. 2. It is
composed of three steps:
a) A masking process of SU-8 on glass substrate, by
photolithography method. The sample will be
covered by SU-8 mask which containing required
micro patterns for µ-AJM.
b) The abrasive jet machining process by using
micro abrasive grains to selectively machined
uncovered area by SU-8 mask (or the
micropattern). The process parameters, such as
the distance between the nozzle and workpiece,
the diameter of the nozzle, the blasting air
pressure, and the flow rate of the microabrasives
were maintained constant throughout the process.
The process parameters used in these experiments
are listed in Table 1.
c) The mask removal and cleaning process. Any
remaining mask adhering to the workpiece
Fig.2 Process flow of micro-pattering surface was removed after the machining process
procedure on glass by using µ-AJM was complete. A Piranha solution (75% H2SO4 :
25% H2O2) was used for this process.
Mask pattern and thickness
The quality of a mask can be determined
by sharpness of the pattern and evenness
of the surface, as shown in Fig. 2. For
fabricated mask at thickness ≥300µm and
above, wavy surface appeared after PEB,
which affected resolution greatly;
changes the dimensions of micro-patterns
if compared to those on the master film.
To much UV dosage will burnt the
polymer mask, to low dosage will lower
concentration of catalyst, which led to a
non-uniform cross-link reaction.
Empirically, on 600 mJ/cm2 UV light
exposure, the best mask quality was Figure 3. A.250-µm-thick patterned SU-8 mask on a
obtained at the thickness of 250µm. glass substrate showing good quality; sharp pattern
Microchannel results resolution, even surface and high repeatability
A thick mask was sacrificed to achieve the desired channel depth on target substrate. After the
µ-AJM process, a semicircular-shaped channel with an average width of 190 µm and a depth
of 70 µm was obtained. Erosion profile and measurement result showed in Fig.4.
Figure 4. Sample of measurement obtained by using non-contact surface profiler (vertical axis used
micrometer unit, horizontal axis used millimeter unit)

From micro hardness tests, the mask was much more ductile. So, we expected to achieve a
deeper channel depth by increasing the scanning time of the µ-AJM process. Fig. 5 shows the
observations of the machining result obtained with a scanning electron microscope (SEM).
The mask suffered an under-cut after the µ-AJM process when the scanning time was
doubled; this result was different from the expected result.
In 2000, Henk et al. introduced the ‘Blast lag’
effect of the abrasive blasting process by using a
patterned-mask. It is defined as small channel
etches occurring at a slower rate than the wider
channels. Therefore, it seems in our case, the
blast lag effect occurred when reached 70 µm
channel depth. But here, SU-8 mask got eroded
not only on top/surface layer, but also on the
wall near the open area of the target material,
resulting in the mask under-cut profile and the
widening of the channel width. This
Figure 5. Illustration of the expected result by phenomenon, which looks like the blast lag
using a thick mask in the µ-AJM process. effect, should be a reference for choosing
parameters in this work.
The micro-channel produced from by µ-AJM in this process is two-dimensional (planar)
profile. By this method, a trial to obtain a through hole on glass slide was also performed. As
single result, this kind machining result on a glass slide cannot be evaluated as a 3D feature,
but in future work, the combination of side-by-side microchannels and through holes with a
bonding process is expected to produce a single piece device with a close-microchannel in it.
Conclusions
The results of this study using a thick SU-8 mask to fabricate microchannels on glass
employing the µ-AJM process are summarized as follows:
1. For a thickness around 250 µm, SU-8 2100 can be used as a mask on a glass substrate to
obtain a good micropattern and highly repeatable results.
2. The erosion profiles of the channels show an arc-shape. Thus, it is very difficult to
machine accurate square-type (common result type of familiar wet etching process)
channels because of the basic characteristics of the µ-AJM process. However, if a
method for obtaining an ultra-thick SU-8 mask with a homogenous cross-link structure
and good pattern resolution can be elucidated, then erosion profiles at that thickness can
be explored.
3. As a result of the wear of the mask film and the “blast lag effect” at the boundaries, the
measured dimensions of the machined samples were slightly larger than those of the
masking patterns used.
Acknowledgments
This work was supported by grant No. R01- 2004-000-10556-0 from the Basic Research
Program of the Korea Science and Engineering Foundation (KOSEF).
Keywords
Abrasive jet machining, microchannel, SU-8 mask.
References
Grosse A, Grewe M, Fouckhardt H (2001) Deep wet etching of fused silica glass for hollow capillary optical leaky
waveguides in microfluidic device. J Micromech Microeng 11:252–262.
Slikkerveer PJ, Bouten PCP, in’t Veld FH, Scholten H (1998) Erosion and damage by sharp particles. Wear
217:237–250.
Wensink H, Berenshot U, Jansen HV, Elwenspoek MC (2000) High-resolution powder blast micromachining. In:
Proceedings of the IEEE Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), pp 769–774.
Zhang J, Tan KL, Gong HQ (2001) Characterization of the polymerization of SU-8 photoresist and its application
in microelectro- mechanical systems (MEMS). Polymer Testing 20 (201):693–701.

Boosting with kernel base classifiers for human object detection

Staff : M. Rahmat Widyanto1*
Student : Chastine Fatichah2
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : widyanto@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : M. Rahmat Widyanto, Chastine Fatichah. (2008). Asian Journal of
Information Technology 2 (5), 183-190, ISSN: 1682-3915, Medwell
Journals
1
Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Informatics Department, Faculty of Information Technology, Institut Teknologi Seupuluh Nopember, Surabaya,
Indonesia
Introduction
Human object detection is an important issue to address because of the many applications of
human object detection system, i.e., surveillance system, visual search engine, and intelligent
vehicles. Many interesting human object detection methods have been proposed in the
literatures. Oren and Papagergiou (1997) use wavelet templates to detect human object.
Papagergiou and Poggio (1999) pioneered the use of overcomplete sets of Haar wavelet
features in combination with a Support Vector Machine (SVM). Mohan et al. (1999), create
four component classifiers for detecting heads, legs, and left/right arms separately. The
research commonly used Support Vector Machine (SVM) method for human object detection.
SVM method has high accuracy for human object detection but the speed of testing is slow.
Other method for human object detection is Boosting. Laptev improves the accuracy object
detection using boosted histograms. Arras et al. (2007) used boosted features for detecting
people in 2D range data. Viola et. al used Boosting for movement human object detection.
Boosting method has comparably low accuracy for human object detection but the speed of
testing is fast.
The real time applications of human object detection requires high accuracy of detecting
human and high speed of testing. To overcome the problem, this research proposes Boosting
with kernel base classifier for human object detection in order to improve the accuracy of the
conventional boosting classifier.
Proposed K-Boosting: Boosting with kernel base classifiers

This section discusses the new proposed method for human object detection called K-Booting
(or Kernel Boosting). The proposed K-Boosting employs the quadratic kernel as base
classifiers for Boosting, therefore it has high accuracy and fast testing time. The quadratic
kernel of SVM is a quadratic function of dot product of the training data samples. Having
quadratic function, the kernel is able to form a complex non-linier decision function so that
SVM has high classification accuracy. Otherwise, the Boosting method has fast classification
time. The decision function of Boosting method is a linear combination of prediction of its
base classifiers. Having this simple linear combination, this method requires much less
classification time.
Base on the above analysis, a new boosting with kernel function as base classifiers (called K-
Boosting) is proposed. The kernel function in K-Boosting is used to improve the classification
accuracy. Meanwhile the simple linear combination of base classifier function of Boosting
makes the classification time of K-Boosting is fast. The schematic illustration of the proposed
w (1)
method is represented in Figure 1. First, initialize the weight n of training data with the
same value. Then, do iterate from 1 until M of base classifiers with kernel function. The
wnm
update weight coefficient that increase weight coefficient value for misclassify the

training data and decrease weight coefficient value for correct classify the training data.
Finally, when desired number of base classifiers has been trained, they are combined to form
a committee using coefficients that give different weight to different base classifiers.
{wn(1) } {wn( 2 ) } . . . {wn( M ) }
Ns
y1 ( x ) = ∑ β i t i ( x ⋅ xi + 1) n + b
i =1
y2 ( x) . . . yM (x)
⎛M ⎞
YM ( x) = sign⎜ ∑ α m ym ( x) ⎟
⎝ m ⎠
Figure 1. Schematic illustration of the K-Boosting framework
Experimental results and evaluation performance

In the experiment, a dataset of 250 positive samples and 375 negative samples is used. Each
of these samples is divide two parts, i.e., training dataset and testing dataset. These samples
are obtained from capturing image with 3-5 meter distance with variability in different
locations. The positive samples are images of human with variability in different colours and
garment types. The negative samples are images of natural scenery and buildings that are not
contain any human.
Performance of the proposed K-Boosting, Boosting and SVM for human object detection
problem are compared. To evaluate the system performance, the two scenarios are carried out.
The first scenario uses a training dataset with 450 samples and uses a testing dataset with 175
samples that the sizes of images are 128 x 64 pixels. The first scenario aims to measure the
accuracy and computational time of training process and testing process of the proposed
method that is compared with Boosting and SVM. In the first scenario, the result of accuracy
and computational time of training and testing process is presented in Table 1.
Table 1. The accuracy and computational time of training and testing process of K-Boosting, Boosting and SVM
Accuracy of (percentage) Computational time of (second)
Methods
training testing training testing
K-Boosting 97% 83% 161.52 0.01
SVM 97% 82% 110.9 10.7
Boosting 87% 67% 11.328 0.01
This result shows that the testing accuracy of the propose method is comparable to that SVM
method but higher about 16% than Boosting method. The testing time of the propose method
is comparable to that of conventional Boosting but higher than SVM method.
The second scenario uses a training dataset with 450 samples and uses a testing dataset with
the size of images those are larger than samples of training dataset. In the second scenario, the
system starts detecting human object in images by selecting 128 x 64 windows from top left
corner of the images. The system detects area of image of active window. If the result of
human object detection are positive class then the system draw a red box. The result of the
second experiment is shown in Figure 2.
(a) (b) (c)

Figure 2. The result of human object detection of image with size 176 x 234 using (a) K-Boosting (b) SVM and (c)
Boosting

Figure 2 show the result of image with size 176 x 234 and consist of five human objects. The
area of image that consist of human objects are signed with red boxes. In Figure 2 (c), there
are three red boxes that are false detection. The false detection is caused area of false
detection in image has similarity features with human object. This shows that the proposed K-
Boosting has better performance than the conventional Boosting.
Conclusion
In the experiment, the testing accuracy of the proposed K-Boosting method is about 83%.
This result improves the accuracy about 16% from that of the conventional Boosting that is
about 67%. The accuracy detection of large image of K-boosting is comparable to that of
SVM method. In Boosting method, the result of human object detection of large image show
that there are some false detection in image test. The false detection is caused area of false
detection in image has similarity features with human object. The experiment shows that the
proposed K-Boosting has a high accuracy that is comparable to SVM and a fast testing time
that is comparable to Boosting, therefore the proposed method can be applied for a real time
application. The research can be extended to the Internet domain to create a visual web search
engine. Besides that the proposed method can be further used in state of the art surveillance
systems and car driver assistance systems.
Keywords
Boosting, human object detection, kernel, support vector machine.
References
A. Asano (2004), Support Vector Machine and Kernel Method, Pattern information processing.
A. Mohan (1999), “Object Detection in Images by Components”, MIT AI Memo, 1664 (CBCL Memo 178).
C. Papageorgiou, T. Poggio (1999), “Trainable Pedestrian Detection”, Center for Biological and Computational
Learning Artificial Intelligence Laboratory MIT.
Christopher J.C. Burges (1998), “A Tutorial on Support Vector Machines for Pattern Recognition”, Data Mining
and Knowledge Discovery, 2, 121–167.
Christopher M. Bishop (2006), “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer.
Ivan Laptev (2006), “Improvements of Object Detection Using Boosted Histograms”, IRISA / INRIA Rennes.
Kai O. Arras, O´ scar Mart´ınez Mozos, W. Burgard (2007), “Using Boosted Features for the Detection of People
in 2D Range Data”, IEEE International Conference on Robotics and Automation.
M. Oren, C. Papageorgiou, P. Sinha, E. Osuna, and T. Poggio (1997), “Pedestrian Detection Using Wavelet
Templates”, IEEE Proceeding of Conference on Computer Vision and Pattern Recognition (CVPR.
Papageorgiou, T. Poggio (2000), “A Trainable System for Object Detection”, International Journal of Computer
Vision 38(1), 15–33, Kluwer Academic Publishers. Manufactured in The Netherlands.
Qiang Zhu, Shai Avidan, Mei-Chen Yeh, Kwang-Ting Cheng (2006), “Fast Human Detection Using a Cascade of
Histograms of Oriented Gradients”, Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories Cambridge, Massachusetts,
USA.
R. Lienhart, J. Maydt (2001), “An Extended Set of Haar-like Features for Rapid Object Detection”, Intel Labs,
Intel Corporation Santa Clara, CA 95052, USA.
Robert E. Schapire (2002), “The Boosting Approach to Machine Learning an Overview”, MSRI Workshop on
Nonlinear Estimation and Classification.
Unser, M. (1995), “Texture classification and Segmentation Using Wavelet Frames”, IEEE Transaction Image
Processing, 4(11), pp.1549-1560.
Y. Freud, R.E. Scaphire (1999), “A Short Introduction To Boosting“, Journal of Japanese Society for Artificial
Intelligence, 14(5):771-780, September.

Can we extract the pion electromagnetic form factor from a t-channel

diagram only?
Staff : T. Mart1*
Student :
Sponsor : Riset Cluster UI
Email Contact : tmart@fisika.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : T. Mart (2008) Modern Physics Letters A 39, 3317-3329
1
Departemen Fisika, FMIPA, Universitas Indonesia, Depok 16424, Indonesia
Introduction
In nuclear physics pions occupy a special place. Being the lightest meson in its family, pions
play the major role in strong interaction. In fact, pions were the first mesons predicted by
Yukawa as the mediator of the strong nuclear force. However, despite intensive investigations
for decades, our understanding of the pion structure is far from complete. This is reflected,
e.g., by the incomplete available data base of the pion electromagnetic form factor Fπ (Q 2 ) in
a considerably wide range of virtual photon momentum transfer Q2. We understand that
Fπ (Q 2 ) is nothing but a Fourier transformation of the charge distribution ρ. At very small Q2
the behavior of Fπ (Q 2 ) has been accurately determined by scattering of high energy pions
from atomic electrons, Amendolia et al. (1986). At higher Q2 values one should consult pion
electroproduction off a nucleon. With the continuous and excellent electron beams available
at modern accelerators, such as CEBAF at JLab, it is now possible to measure pion
electroproduction observables with unprecedented accuracy, at certain kinematics
inaccessible with previous technology. Thus, it is possible to extract Fπ (Q 2 ) with high
accuracies using the current experimental data. However, it is important to note that these
extractions:
• rely heavily on the t-channel dominant assumption, although the assumption has never
been directly checked
• are model dependent
• are plagued with the model uncertainties, which come from the extrapolation of the form
factor cut-off to the physical limit.
• are strategy dependent
It is the purpose of the present work to revisit a simple method, à la Chew-Low, which is
based only on the first assumption. This will also serve as an alternative method, which is
obviously easy to check and eliminate the above shortcomings.
Theoretical model
The only assumption made in our work is the dominance of the t-channel of pion
electroproduction. This channel is depicted in Fig. 1. By using the standard procedure we can
obtain the reaction amplitude as
M=
2iegπ Fπ (k 2 ) Fh (t )
2 2
k (t − mπ )
( )
u ( p' )γ 5 k 2 q ⋅ ε − k ⋅ q k ⋅ ε u ( p )
where k 2 = −Q 2 , e is the proton charge, ε denotes the virtual photon polarization, while mπ
and gπ are the pion mass and coupling constant, respectively. The hadronic and
electromagnetic form factors are denoted by Fh and Fπ, respectively, while the Mandelstam
variable t can be written as

t = (k − q) 2 = k 2 + mπ2 − 2k ⋅ q
Figure 1. The t-channel diagram that dominates the contributions to the pion electroproduction process. The
electromagnetic and hadronic form factors are denoted by F_ and Fh, respectively.
From the reaction amplitude we can calculate the longitudinal differential cross section which
reads
dσ L e 2 gπ2 Fπ2 (k 2 ) Fh2 (t )
=t 2 2 2
r 3 (q0 − 12 k0 ) 2
dt 8πW ( s − mπ )(t − mπ ) | k |
This cross section can be compared with the current experimental data of pion
electroproduction from Horn et al. (2006) and Tadevosyan et al. (2007), and therefore the
pion form factor Fπ (Q 2 ) can be easily extracted.
Result
The result of the present work is displayed in Fig. 2, where we compared the extracted form
factor with the result of previous works and a monopole parameterization as well as the Maris
& Tandy model (Maris and Tandy, 2000). The numerical results of our extraction are given in
Table 1. It is obvious that our result is in good agreement with the extracted form factor of
previous works. At Q2 = 1.6 GeV the extracted form factor has a relatively larger error bar.
This is understood from the fact that the used data have large t and W, thus contributions from
other channels beyond the t-channel could not be neglected. We also note that the result from
Horn et al. (2006) has much smaller error bars, since they do not quote the model
uncertainties in their result. As shown in the last column of Table 1, these uncertainties could
lead to large error bars in the extracted form factors.
Figure 2. The extracted pion form factor compared with that of previous works.

Table 1. The extracted pion form factor obtained in this work. Note that in the last column the model uncertainty is
indicated by the second error bars.
Q2 F F
(GeV2) (this work) (previous work)
0.60 0.438 ± 0.066 0.433 ± 0.017 ± 0.137
0.70 0.395 ± 0.076 0.473 ± 0.023 ± 0.038
0.75 0.396 ± 0.088 0.341 ± 0.022 ± 0.078
1.00 0.341 ± 0.074 0.312 ± 0.016 ± 0.035
1.60 0.194 ± 0.124 0.233 ± 0.014 ± 0.013
1.60 0.276 ± 0.036 0.243 ± 0.012
2.45 0.153 ± 0.042 0.167 ± 0.010
Keywords
Electromagnetic form factors, electroproduction reactions, eta mesons, K, Pi.
References
Amendolia S.R., et al. (1986) A Measurement of the Space-Like Pion Electromagnetic Form-Factor. Nuclear
Physics B 277, 168.
Horn T. et al., (2006) Determination of the Charged Pion Form Factor at Q2 = 1.60 – 2.45 (GeV/c)2. Physical
Review Letters 97, 192001.
Maris P. and Tandy P.C. (2000) The π, K+ and K0 Electromagnetic Form Factor. Physical Review C 62, 055204.
Tadevosyan V. et al., (2007) Determination of the Pion Charge Form Factor at Q2 = 0.60 – 1.60 (GeV/c)2. Physical
Review C 75, 055205.

Classification of polarimetric-SAR data using fuzzy maximum likelihood

estimation clustering with consideration of complementary information
based-on polarimetric parameters, target scattering characteristics, and
spatial context
2* 1
Staff : Aniati Murni Arymurthy and Mahdi Kartasasmita
1
Student : Katmoko Ari Sambodo
Sponsor : Hibah Pascasarjana 2008, DepDikNas
Email Contact : katmoko_ari@yahoo.com , aniati@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : International Conference on Information and Communication
Technology and Systems (ICTS), pp.562-571, Surabaya, August
2008
1
Indonesian National Institute of Aeronautics and Space, Jl.LAPAN No.70, Jakarta 13710
2
Laboratory for Pattern Recognition and Image Processing, Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia,
PO Box 3442, Jakarta 10002 or Universitas Indonesia Campus, Depok 16424, Indonesia
Introduction
Fully Polarimetric-Synthetic Aperture Radar (polarimetric-SAR) sensors are becoming more
important in remote sensing applications due to: (i) its all-weather, day and night operational
capability; and (ii) its sensitivity of the polarization state of the backscattered wave to
physical characteristics of the ground target [4,12]. The utilization of multi-polarized wave in
polarimetric-SAR system allows us to extract additional information which can give better
land use/cover classification results than single-channel/polarization SAR data [4,9,12].
Unsupervised classification is an important technique for automatic analysis of polarimetric-
SAR data, since it can be performed regardless the availability of ground truth information. In
the literature, many unsupervised classification approaches for polarimetric-SAR have been
proposed. Basically, there are two types of algorithms. The first type of algorithm is based on
the analysis of physical scattering properties [6], and the second one is based purely on
statistical clustering of polarimetric-SAR data [1,7]. Some limitations of these methods in
recognizing more detail object discrimination have been reported. To overcome these
problems, it is advisable to use multisensor data [3,11]. Another limitation of these methods is
that they performed on a pixel-by-pixel basis, which usually produced noisy classification
results (“salt-and-pepper” effect even in homogeneous areas).
This paper proposed an unsupervised classification scheme based on fuzzy maximum
likelihood estimation (FMLE) clustering algorithm [8] that integrates complementary
information of several polarimetric parameters and target scattering characteristic features,
and spatial contextual information.
Methodology
The scheme of the proposed methodology for polarimetric-SAR image analysis is shown in
Fig. 1. In brief, the processing steps include: (i) Image speckle filtering; (ii) Feature
extraction based on combination of polarimetric parameters (9 features) and target scattering
characteristics (3 features); (iii) Feature selection and reduction; (iv) Image clustering; (v)
Post-processing using spatial contextual information; (vi) Region object labeling using
ground truth information.
The feature selection is performed by maximum noise fraction (MNF) transformation, [2,5]
which reduced from 12 features to 4 features (in this case study). The unsupervised
classification used two methods for comparison, i.e. fuzzy maximum likelihood estimation
(FMLE) and fuzzy K-means (FKM) clustering methods [8,10].

Experimental data
The experimental data is a fully polarimetric, single look complex E-SAR (L-Band). The
data covered the area of Penajam, East Kalimantan, Indonesia. The area of study is shown in
Fig. 2.
Figure 1. Block scheme of the proposed method. Figure 2. Ground survey information.
Experimental results
The unsupervised classification using FMLE clustering was applied to polarimatric
parameters alone (a), to the target scattering characteristic features (b), and to the MNF
reduced features (c). The FMLE clustering result [8] (d) was also compared to the FKM
clustering result [10] (e).
(a) FMLE clustering (b) FMLE clustering (c) FMLE clustering (d) FMLE clustering (e) FKM clustering
method using polarimetric method using Cloude’s method using MNF method using MNF method using MNF
parameters (9 features). polarimetric reduced bands (4 reduced bands (4 features) reduced bands (4 features)
decomposition (3 features). and spatial-contextual and spatial-contextual
features). information. information.
Figure 3. Clustered images using several model feature images.
Water
Forest
Fields
Bare
soils
Conclusions
An alternative method for unsupervised classification of polarimetric-SAR data has been
proposed. The method was designed by integrating the combined features extracted from

polarimetric covariance matrix and Cloude’s polarimetric decomposition (which characterize

the target’s scattering mechanism) with spatial contextual-supported FMLE classifier.
The proposed method has been tested using a fully polarimetric, single look complex ESAR
(L-Band) data acquired on the area of Penajam, East Kalimantan, Indonesia. Experimental
results show that the proposed method improves land-cover discrimination performance, and
provides robust and homogeneous classification results but still preserve edge and other fine
structures.
Keywords
Fuzzy maximum likelihood estimation (FMLE) clustering, maximum noise fraction (MNF)
transformation, polarimetric-SAR, polarimetric parameters and decomposition, unsupervised
classification, wave scattering mechanism.
References
[1] J. Beaulieau, and R. Touzi, Segmentation of textured polarimetric SAR scenes by likelihood approximation,
IEEE Trans. Geosci. Remote Sensing, vol. 42, Oct. 2004, 2063-2072.
[2] J.W. Boardman, K.A. Kruse, and R.O. Green, Mapping target signatures via partial unmixing of AVIRIS data,
in Summaries of the Fifth Annual JPL Airborne Geosciences Workshop, 1995.
[3] D. Borghys, Y. Yvinec, C. Perneel, A. Pizurica, and W. Philips, Supervised feature-based classification of
multi-channel SAR images, in Pattern Recognition Letters, vol. 27, Mar. 2006.
[4] L. Bruzzone, M. Marconcini, U. Wegmuller, and A. Wiesmann, An Advanced method for the automatic
classification of multitemporal SAR images, IEEE Trans. Geosci. Remote Sensing, vol. 42, no. 6, Jun. 2004,
1321-1334.
[5] M.J. Canty, Image Analysis, Classification and Change Detection in Remote Sensing, Boca Raton, CRC Press
Taylor & Francis, 2006.
[6] S.R. Cloude and E. Pottier, An entropy based classification scheme for land applications of polarimetric SAR,
IEEE Trans. Geosci. Remote Sensing, vol. 35, no. 1, Jan 1997, 68-78.
[7] G. Davidson, K. Ouchi, G. Saito, N. Ishitsuka, N. Mohri, and S. Uratsuka, Polarimetric classification using
expectation methods, Polarimetric and Interferometric SAR Workshop, Communications Research Laboratory,
Tokyo, 2002.
[8] I. Gath and A.B. Geva, Unsupervised optimal fuzzy clustering, IEEE Trans. on Pattern Analysis and Machine
Intellegence , vol. 11, no. 7, Jul 1989, 773-781.
[9] V. Karathanassi and M. Dabboor, Land cover classification using E-SAR polarimetric data, in Proceedings of
the XXth ISPRS Congress, 2004.
[10] A. Reigber, M. Jager, M. Neumann, and L. Ferro-Famil, Polarimetric fuzzy K-means classification with
consideration of spatial context, in Proceedings of the Workshop on POLINSAR - Applications of SAR
Polarimetry and Polarimetric Interferometry, 2007.
[11] K.A. Sambodo, A. Murni, and M. Kartasasmita, Classification of polarimetric-SAR data with neural network
using combined features extracted from scattering models and texture analysis, International Journal of
Remote Sensing and Earth Sciences, vol. 4, Sept. 2007, 1-17.
[12] I. Woodhouse, Introduction to Microwave Remote Sensing, Boca Raton, CRC Press Taylor & Francis, 2006.

Classification of synthetic aperture radar image based on pulse

coupled neural networks
2*
Staff : Aniati Murni Arymurthy
1 3
Student : Harwikarya and Katmoko Ari Sambodo
Email Contact : harwiktr@yahoo.com, aniati@cs.ui.ac.id, k_ari@centrin.net.id
Disseminated at : International Conference on Information and Communication
Technology and Systems (ICTS), pp.548-555, Surabaya, August
2008.
1
Department of Computer System, Faculty of Information Technology, University of Budi Luhur Jl. Raya Ciledug,
Jakarta 12660
2
3
Indonesian National Institute of Aeronautics and Space, Jl.LAPAN No.70, Jakarta 13710
Introduction
The monitoring of land cover on a certain area could be done by analyzing optical-sensor remote
sensing images. The optical-sensor image is relatively easy to interpret, but it has cloud cover problem.
On the other hand, the Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) images are cloud free but they are more
difficult to interpret because of their geometric and speckle noise. SAR image analysis is usually done
based on texture features instead of color, because a SAR image is a single-band gray-level image. This
paper explores an approach for analyzing SAR image using Pulse Coupled Neural Network (PCNN).
Karvonen [3] has used PCNN for segmenting a SAR image of Baltic Sea into ice regions and open
water regions. The image is happened to be quasi homogeneous image. The coordinate of sea ice
region was transmitted to an ice-breaker ship to help the trade ships to pass the Baltic Sea.
The PCNN has difficulties in segmenting image into regions when the sea-ice region was broken into
small-size ice regions, so that the SAR image became a textured image. In the study carried out by
Karvonen [3-5], the input image is a homogeneous image and has only two classes of object, the sea
ice and the open water areas. This paper will explore the use of PCNN to classify land areas in a SAR
image where the SAR image is a textured image and has more than two classes of land cover object.
When a PCNN is used to classify two-class problem, the first iterations will give the area of class 1
(which has bright intensities) and the second iterations will give the area of class 2 (which has darker
intensities). This paper contributes a scheme that uses a PCNN for segmenting a textured image with
more than two classes of object.
Methodology
The research on PCNN was reported by Eckhorn in 1990 followed by Johnson et al. in 1994
[2]. PCNN is a mathematical model of cortex system of mamalia. The mathematical model of
cortex system consists of five equations. The system works iteratively until an object is seen.
Each neuron of PCNN, consist of receptive field, modulation field, and pulse generator [3-5].
This study has compared the result of using a PCNN to segment an original gray-level SAR image and
transformed Gray Level Co-occurrence Matrix (GLCM) [1] textured-feature SAR images as shown in
the diagram of Fig. 1. The input SAR image is firstly filtered to reduce the speckle noise. A standard
filter is used. The SAR image is then used as an input to the PCNN, and the iteration process is
conducted. To be able to recognize more than two classes of object, the proposed method has done
more iteration. Each time an object has been recognized, the input for the next iteration is subtracted by
the object pixels just have been recognized.
To be able to process a textured image, instead of using the original gray-level SAR image, a
transformed texture-feature SAR images are used. Three features of GLCM [1] were used. They
included dissimilarity, correlation and angular second moment features. Each of the texture images
followed the iterated process by the PCNN.

2. Airbone SAR image acquired from Kalimantan

Figure 1. Block diagram of experimental design. in L Band polarization L-VH.
Experimental data
The experimental data for this study is a SAR image acquired on a certain area in
Kalimantan by ESAR airborne system. It is using the L band and the transmission
mode vertical and horizontal polarisation ( L-VH). The image is shown in Figure 2.
Table 1. Recognized land cover
Object Class Recognized

Pixels (%)
Forest 70.02
Open area 48.24
Water area 44.73
Total 162.99
Figure 3. Segmented image using SAR image.
The first experiment has used the gray-level SAR image as the input to the PCNN. The forest
area appeared at the fifth iteration, the open area appeared at the seventh iteration, and finally
the darkest water area appeared at the eighth iteration. The total percentage of the recognized
land areas is 162.99% (shown in Table 1) which is exceeded 100%. It explained that there
were recognition error. The segmented image is shown in Fig. 3.
On the other hand, the used of input texture-feature SAR image gave better recognition result.
The forest area best appeared in the dissimilarity-feature image, the open area best appeared
in the correlation-feature image, and finally the darkest water area (sea, river, and swamp
area) best appeared in the angular second moment feature image. The fused segmented image
is shown in Fig. 4 and recognition accuracy is shown in Table 2. Fig. 3 has black pixels
(unrecognized pixels) in the homogeneous water area, while in Fig. 4 the black pixels shown
in the forest area. The segmented images can furtherly be corrected in a postprocessing step
using majority or morphology filters.

Table 2. Recognized land cover Figure
Object Class Recognized

Pixels (%)
Forest 26.68
Open area 47.23
Water area 16.42
Total 90.33
Figure 4. Segmented image using GLCM of SAR
Conclusions
This paper proposed a scheme for segmenting a textured and multi-object SAR image using
PCNN. To obtain more than two classes of land cover object, in the next object recognition
process the PCNN uses an input image where the just recognized object pixels are excluded
from the image. The process is repeated until all objects are recognized. To be able to process
a textured image, instead of using the original SAR image as an input, the PCNN has three
GLCM texture-feature input images. The three GLCM features include dissimilarity,
correlation and angular second moment. The final segmented image is constructed by fusing
the best single-object images obtained from processing the three GLCM-feature images. The
recognition rate can reach 99.33%.
Keywords
Classification, PCNN, SAR, segmentation, texture.
References
[1] Haralick, R.,M., Shanmugan, K., Dinstein, I., Textural Features for Image Classification, IEEE Transaction on Man,
System and Cybernetics, vol SMC3, no 6, 1973.
[2] Johnson, J.,L., Pulse-Couple Neural Nets : Translation, Rotation, Scale, Distortion, and Intensity Signal Invariance for
Images, Applied Optics, vol 33, no 26, 1994.
[3] Karvonen, J., Similla, M., Classification of Sea Ice Types from ScanSAR RADARSAT Images Using Pulse-Coupled
Neural Networks, IEEE Transaction on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, 1998.
[4] Karvonen, J., A Simplified Pulse-Coupled Neural Network Based Sea Ice Classifier with Graphical
Interactive Training, IEEE Transaction on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, 2000.
[5] Karvonen, J., Baltic Sea Ice SAR Segmentation and Classification Using Modified Pulse-Coupled Neural Networks,
IEEE Transaction on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, vol 42, no 7, July 2004.

Color and texture fusion for multispectral image segmentation

2* 2
Staff : Aniati Murni Arymurthy and Dina Chahyati
1
Student : Sony Hartono Wijaya
Email Contact : sony@ipb.ac.id , aniati@cs.ui.ac.id , dina@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : International Conference on Advanced Computing Intelligence and
its Applications (ICACIA), pp.57-62, Jakarta, September 2008
1
Computer Science Department, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Science, Bogor Agricultural University,
Kampus IPB Darmaga Wing 20 Level 5, Bogor 16680, Jawa Barat, Indonesia
2
PO Box 3442, Jakarta 10002 or Kampus UI, Depok 16424, Indonesia
Introduction
Feature extraction and selection process is an important process in remote sensing image
segmentation and classification [10,12]. Features that are frequently used in multispectral
image analysis include gray level or color and texture features. Pixel gray level values can be
represented as gray level histogram and has an important role in the process of object
recognition and interpretation. On the other hand, texture can describe the attraction between
a pixel and the other pixels around it and has also been widely used in remote sensing image
analysis.
Several techniques have been developed for texture feature extraction that includes statistical
method, filtering technique, or wavelet decomposition [10]. The implementation of image
classification using texture features alone gives a satisfying result on heterogeneous landscape
unit. In contrary, the use of texture features tends to show unsatisfying result on homogenous
landscape unit. Classification error usually occurs in the transition areas between texture
units. Color features give a better classification result on the homogeneous landscape unit
than on the heterogeneous landscape unit. The use of color information alone tends to give a
noisy classification result especially in the heterogeneous area. It is important to identify the
best texture features from the literatures and combine them with the best color features to
obtain an optimal remote sensing thematic image.
Belongie et al. [1] have used the Expectation Maximization (EM) algorithm using augmented
vector of texture and color features. An augmented-vector approach may cause the strengths
of each feature space cancelling out instead of complementing each other [2,6,7]. In [2,6,7],
they have used a data fusion based on texture and color features using maximum decision
rule. Huber [5] has introduced several schemes for combining decision rules. Fusion can also
be carried out at the level of information [11].
This paper synthesizes and proposes a framework to investigate the use of color and texture
features for analyzing a multispectral image. The discussions includes the methodology for
analyzing multispectral image using texture and color features, the experimental data,
experimental results and analysis. Finally, this paper is closed by a concluding remark.
Methodology for image analysis using texture and color features

The proposed processing framework can be illustrated as a diagram in Fig. 1. Two potential
models for texture feature extraction are used in this study. They are the Grey Level Co-
occurrence Matrix (GLCM) and the Gabor Filter (GF) models. The GLCM is a second order
statistical method, that represents the joint probability density of the intensity values between
two pixels. Eight GLCM features are used. They include energy, entropy, contrast, cluster
shade, correlation, homogeneity, inverse difference moment, and maximum probability [4].

The other GF model uses a technique for energy filtering to enhance some textural properties
of an image. In the spatial domain, a Gabor Filter function is a Gaussian function modulated
by a sinusoidal function. A total number of scaling factor on wavelet decomposition and a
total number of orientations are chosen [8,9]. The related GF features are then computed.
Color feature is represented in RGB model which is found to be the best in a comparison
study done by Jolly and Gupta [6].
Two approaches have been used in setting up the input GLCM, GF, and RGB features to the
EM algorithm. The EM algorithm [3] attempts to segment the data using a soft membership
function as a weighted sum of a number of Gaussian distributions called a Gaussian Mixture
Model (GMM). The generation of this GMM is achieved through an Expectation-
Maximization technique, which aims to find the maximum likelihood estimate for an
underlying distribution from a given dataset when the data is incomplete. The data input to
the EM algorithm has been set up based on the individual feature and based on the augmented
feature vector.
Several segmented images are produced: (i) one segmented image using the augmented
feature vector of the GLCM, GF, and RGB [1]; (ii) three segmented images using one feature
model of the GLCM, GF, or RGB feature, respectively; (iii) one segmented image as a result
of composing the GLCM-based, GF-based, and RGB-based classified images (known as an
information fusion scheme) [11]; and (iv) four segmented images using Product, Sum, Max,
and Majority-vote operator, respectively, applied to the decision rules using the GLCM, GF,
and RGB features [5].
All of the segmented images are filtered in the post-processing step to obtain the best result of
thematic images. The process consists of: (i) morphology filtering to improve the
segmentation result; and (ii) region merging and association labelling. The later process is a
finishing touch process which is done based on a visual perception and the ground truth
image. Finally, the classification result was evaluated based on its overall classification
accuracy.
Experimental data
A Landsat TM multispectral data of the city area of Dessau, Saxony-Anhalt, Germany
(source: eCognition User Guide 2005) shown in Fig. 2 is used for experiment. The data

contain images of three spectral bands, namely Red, Green and Blue, and a ground truth
image. A corrected ground truth image is created to differentiate the clear cut area or open
area in the forest area (which has white color in Fig. 2c) from the vegetation area. The
dimension of the images is 166 x 166 pixels.
Experimental results and analysis

In the case study, the best result is the classified image as the result of data fusion of RGB and
GLCM model features using Sum operator, follows by the classified image as a result of
information fusion using the three-model features as shown in Table 1. The related thematic
images are shown in Fig. 3.
Table 1. Data and information fusion.
O v e ra l l A c c u ra c y ( % )
N o. F e a tu r e s u s e d i n D a t a F u s i o n
P ro d uc t Sum M ax M a j o ri t y
1 G F a nd G LC M 5 3 .0 7 6 0 .6 3 55.36 6 4.41
2 R GB a nd G F 5 5 .5 4 7 7 .9 4 62.04 8 2.16
3 R GB a nd G L C M 6 4.06 86.12 76.80 8 0.67
4 R GB , G F a nd G LC M 6 2 .7 4 7 5 .5 7 63.18 6 8.45
A v e ra g e 5 8 .8 5 75.06 64.35 7 3.92
No I n f o r m a ti o n F u s i o n O v e ra l l A c c u ra c y ( % )
1 U sin g R G B , G F, a n d G L C M 8 5.85
Concluding remarks
The case study has suggested a scheme for multispectral image analysis based on a data
fusion of RGB and GLCM features using Sum operator.
Keywords
classification, color, data fusion, feature extraction, multispectral image, information fusion ,
segmentation, texture.
References
[1] S. Belongie, C. Carson, H. Greenspan, and J. Malik. Color and Texture-Based Image Segmentation Using EM
and Its Application to Content-Based Image Retrieval. IEEE Computer Society - Proceedings of the Sixth
Interational Conference on Computer Vision, pp. 675-682, 1998.
[2] J. Chen, T. N. Pappas, A. Mojsilovic, and B. Rogowitz. Adaptive Image Segmentation Based on Color and
Texture. IEEE International Conference on Image Processing, New York – USA, 2002.
[3] A. P. Dempster, N. M. Laird, and D. B. Rubin. Maximum Likelihood from Incomplete Data via the EM
Algorithm. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B (Methodological), vol. 39, no. 1, pp. 1-38. 1976.
[4] R. M. Haralick, K. Shanmugam, and Dinstein. Texture Features for Image Classification. IEEE Transactions
on System, Man, and Cybernetics, SMC-3, pp. 610-622, 1973.
[5] R. Huber. Classifier and Feature Selection for Land-Cover Mapping from High Resolution Airbone Dual-Band
SAR Data. Proceedings of World Multiconference on Systemics, Cybernetics and Informatics, vol. V, part I,
pp. 370-375, Orlando, Fl, USA, 2000.
[6] M. P. D. Jolly and A. Gupta. Color and Texture Fusion: Application to Aerial Image Segmentation and GIS
Updating. Siemens Corporate Research, New Jersey, 1996.
[7] S. Liapis, E. Sifakis, and G. Tziritas. Colour and Texture Segmentation using Wavelet Frame Analysis,
Deterministic Relaxation, and Fast Marching Algorithms. The Journal of Visual Communication and Image
Representation, pp. 1-24, 2004.
[8] J. Li and R. M. Narayanan. Integrated Spectral and Spatial Information Mining in Remote Sensing. IEEE
Transactions on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, vol. 42, no. 3, pp. 673-685, March 2004.
[9] B. S. Manjumath and W. Y. Ma. Texture Features for Browsing and Retrieval of Image Data. IEEE
Transaction on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, vol. 18, no. 8, pp. 837-842, August 1996.
[10] L. A. Ruiz, A. Fdez-Sarria, and J. A. Recio. Texture Feature Extraction for Classification of Remote Sensing
using Wavelet Decomposition: A Comparative Study. International Society for Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing, 2004.
[11] Solaiman, R. Koffi, R.K. Mouchot, M.C. Hillon, An Information Fusion Method for Multispectral Image
Classification Post-Processing, IEEE Transactions on Geoscience and Remote Sensing, Vol. 36, No. 2, pp.
395-406, March 1998.
[12] Y. Tian, P. Guo, and M. R. Lyu. Comparative Studies on Feature Extraction Methods for Multispectral
Remote Sensing Image Classification. IEEE International Conference on Systems, Man and Cybernetics, pp.
1275-1279, 2005.

Defining relative qualities over a number of object oriented softwares
Staff : Petrus Mursanto1*
Student : Z. Rahman, D. Dulianto, E. Hermawan, Nurmaya, Christariny
Sponsor : --
Email Contact : santo@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Petrus Mursanto, Efano Hermawan, Wisnu Jatmiko (2008)
Measuring Relative Quality of Object Oriented Software Design
using Analytic Hierarchy Process, Proceedings of Indonesia-Japan
Joint Scientific Symposium pp.89-94
1
Enterprise Computing Lab, Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
Introduction
The advanced of software engineering has shifted software development from procedural to
object oriented (OO) paradigm. It results in changes on how software design is evaluated. In
procedural, algorithm complexity is the main indicator of software design [9]. However, the
metrics of software complexity are considerably not appropriate for object oriented software
[4]. There have been many researches to develop set of metrics for systems developed using
OO approach. Several studies show the adoption of these metrics to support OO programming
such as Ada and Classic-Ada [10], C++ and Eiffel [3].
The adoption of the OO paradigm is to produce better and cheaper software. The main
structural mechanisms of this paradigm, namely inheritance, encapsulation, information
hiding or polymorphism, are the keys to foster reuse and achieve easier maintainability.
However, the use of language constructs that support those mechanisms can be more or less
intensive, depending mostly on the designer ability. We can then expect rather different
quality products to emerge, as well as different productivity gains.
A measurement tool is required to produce quantitative values representing OO program’s
qualities. Christariny developed Metrics Calculator for Java program based on Abreu’s
metrics [7]. Nurmaya improved the usability of the calculator [12] and utilized it for
explorative experiments on the applicability of the Confidence Interval Good OO Design
(CIGOOD) proposed by Abreu in [2]. The drawback of CIGOOD was revealed by Nurmaya,
i.e. the measurement result is much dependent on the quality of sample programs taken as the
statistical population of the method. This paper presents a new method of defining rank of
qualities over a set of Java programs using the Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) introduced
by Thomas Saaty [15].
Object oriented metrics

There are two major sets of metrics for OO, i.e. Metrics for Object Oriented Design (MOOD)
[2] to represent quality of an integrated system and Method for Object Oriented Software
Engineering (MOOSE) [6] to measure quality of classes as components of an OO system. The
MOOD used in this paper consists of the following metrics: Method Hiding Factor (MHF),
Attribute Hiding Factor (AHF), Method Inheritance Factor (MIF), Attribute Inheritance
Factor (AIF), Polymorphism Factor (POF) and Coupling Factor (COF), whereas the MOOSE
are Weighted Method per Class (WMC), Depth of Inheritance Tree (DIT), Number of
Children (NOC), Coupling between Object Classes (CBO), Response Set for A Class (RFC)
and Lack of Cohesion in Methods (LCOM).
Methodology
We proposed the use of Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) for interpreting a set of metrics as
a single quantitative value describing the quality. AHP is a mechanism for multi criteria

decision making based on ratio scales from paired comparisons [15]. By organizing and
assessing alternatives against a hierarchy of multifaceted objectives, AHP provides a proven,
effective means to deal with complex decision making. We use AHP since it lends itself to the
nature of complexity in defining software quality based on the OO metrics, whose weights
will vary according the property of quality being examined. AHP splits the overall problem to
solve into many evaluations of lesser importance, while keeping at the same time their parts
in the global decision.
3.1. Decomposition
Each metric of the MOOSE refers to the property of design quality in object-oriented
paradigm as efficiency (LCOM, CBO, DIT, NOC), understandability (WMC, RFC, DIT),
reusability (WMC, LCOM, CBO, DIT, NOC), testability (WMC, RFC, DIT, NOC) and
maintainability (RFC) [14]. Some literatures define property of design quality using several
additional metrics, such as in [1], [5] and [11]. However, this paper focuses only on MOOSE
and MOOD-based design quality.
The decision hierarchy for the quality rank has three different levels. The top level describes
the overall decision, i.e. selecting the highest quality program. The middle level describes the
factors that are to be considered. The lowest level of the decision hierarchy reveals the OO
metrics suitable to support the middle factors. The decision hierarchy for defining quality
rank is shown in Figure 1.
Quality Quality
Efficiency Understandability Reusability Testability Maintainability Encapsulation Inheritance Polymorphism Coupling
LCOM WMC WMC WMC RFC MHF MIF POF COF
CBO RFC LCOM RFC AHF AIF
DIT DIT CBO DIT
NOC DIT NOC

NOC
Figure 1.Hierarchical parameters for MOOSE (left) and MOOD (right)
3.2. Weighting
The key to using AHP is pair wise comparison. Each pair of the parameters are compared and
given value based on a scale that ranges from equally preferred (1) to extremely preferred (9).
From the hierarchy, we produced weights of elements for each criterion. Metrics of MOOSE
and MOOD are considered as equally preferred one to the other since they all together
constitute the properties of good object oriented software. Further discussion and details of
process using the metrics can be reviewed on [6] for MOOSE and [8] for MOOD.
3.3. Evaluation
The experiment was conducted to measure quality of five open source ERP programs
available in [13]. They are Adempiere 3.2, OpenBravo 2.5.3, Plazma 0.1.5, FreedomERP
1.1.3.5 and JAllInOne 0.9.0.6. Christariny’s Metrics Calculator was used to measure MOOSE
and MOOD of the five sample programs. Consistency ratio (CR) is important in AHP, since it
defines the consistency of preference assignment of all parameters involved in the process.
CR obtained from this experiment is 0.0784. It is less than 0.1 and hence the comparison is
called consistent.
3.4. Defining rank
Having the weighted and values of each parameter, we can complete the overall measurement
and rank of quality based on the properties defined previously. It turns out that both metric
sets (MOOSE and MOOD) result in relatively equal rank of qualities. The result is also
supported by the fact that Adempiere and Openbravo are the two most frequently downloaded
open source ERP programs [13].

Table 4. Rank of quality based on MOOSE and MOOD

Quality based on-
Application MOOSE MOOD
Adempiere 0.1275 0.4233
Openbravo 0.1209 0.4202
Plazma 0.1194 0.3014
FreedomERP 0.1066 0.2855
JAllInOne 0.0309 0.1043
Conclusion
It has been shown that combination of object oriented metrics and AHP is a powerful tool to
measure quality of software design. Although it can not produce absolute value of quality, the
quantitative results can give an estimation figure of quality rank over a set of Java codes.
Although the two OO metric sets are defined for different measurement purposes, MOOSE
for individual class quality and MOOD for integrated system quality, apparently both produce
a relatively equivalent rank of quality over five ERP programs. However, it can not be
concluded that the difference of two quantitative values represents the quality gap of the two
software designs. There is a lot more explorative experiment needs to conduct for more
comprehensive conclusion.
Keywords
Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP), MOOD, MOOSE, object oriented metrics.
References
[1]Abreu F.B., Carapuça R. (1994) Object-Oriented Software Engineering: Measuring and Controlling the
Development Process, 4th International Conference on Software Quality, USA.
[2]Abrue F.B., Esteves R., Goulao M. (1996) The Design of Eiffel Programs: Quantitative Evaluation Using the
MOOD Metrics, Proceeding of TOOLS, USA.
[3]Abreu F.B., Melo W.L. (1996) Evaluating the Impact of Object-Oriented Design on Software Quality, 3rd
International Software Metrics Symposium, Germany. Available on http://www-ctp.di.fct.unl.pt/QUASAR/
Resources/Papers/Metrics/Metrics96.pdf.
[4]Basili V.R., Briand L. and Melo W.L. (1995) A Validation of Object-Oriented Design As Quality Indicators.
Dept of Computer Science – Univ of Maryland. Available on http://www.cs.umd.edu/projects/SoftEng/
ESEG/papers/CS-TR-3443.pdf.
[5]Bruntink M., Arie van Deursen (2003) Predicting Class Testability using Object Oriented Metrics.
[6]Chidamber, Shyam, Kemerer, Chris F (1993) A Metrics Suite for Object-Oriented Design, M.I.T. Sloan School
of Management E53-315.
[7]Christariny (2004) Metrics Calculator for Object Oriented System, Final Project, Faculty of Computer Science,
Universitas Indonesia.
[8]Dulianto D. (2008) The Application of AHP and Software Metrics in Defining Object Oriented Software
Quality, Master Thesis, Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia.
[9]Henry S., Long C. (2002) Measurement Technique for Object Oriented Systems. Available on http://www.
ssgrr.it/en/ssgrr2002s/papers/58.pdf.
[10]Latanzzi M., Henry S. (1994) Object Oriented Metrics: Generation and Application. Available on
http://eprints.cs.vt.edu/archive/00000400/01/TR-94-20.ps.
[11]Lindell, J. and Hägglund M. (2002) Maintainability Metrics for Object Oriented Systems.
[12]Nurmaya (2007) The Measurement of Software Design using Metrics for Object Oriented Design (MOOD),
Final Project, Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia.
[13]Open Source Software, available on http://www.sourceforge.net.
[14]Rosenberg L.H. and Hyaat L.E. (1999) Software Quality Metrics for Object-Oriented Environments.
[15]Saaty, T.L. (2000) Fundamentals of Decision making and Priority Theory, RWS Publications, 1st ed.

Design, manufacturing and testing kinetic adsorption test rig

Staff : Bambang Suryawan1, M. Idrus Alhamid1, and Nasruddin1
Student : Awaludin Martin2* and Arfie I. Firmansyah2
Sponsor : Hibah Bersaing and PHK A3 DTM-FTUI
Email contact : awaludin.martin@ui.edu
Desseminated at : Martin, Awaludin, Arfie I. Firmansyah, Bambang Suryawan, M.
Idrus Alhamid, Nasruddin, 2008, Design, Manufacturing and
Testing Kinetic Adsorption Test Rig, Sriwijaya International
Seminar on Energy Science and Technology, Universitas Sriwijaya,
Palembang, 5-6 Nov 2008
1
Refrigeration & air condition Laboratory, Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering-
Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering-Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Adsorption on a solid adsorbent is the fundamental processes in the field of separation
processes, purification of gases, and adsorption cooling. The understanding of the
thermodynamic property fields of adsorbent plus adsorbate system is important because it
enables the adsorption processes to be analyzed.(Saha, B.B., et al, 2006).
Information concerning the relevant adsorption equilibrium and characterized of adsorbent is
generally an essential requirement for the analysis and design of an adsorption separation
process. For practical application, the adsorption equilibrium must be known over a broad
range of operation temperatures (Lee, Jong-Seok, et al, 2002).
At least, there are two methods two know the adsorption equilibrium, first is direct method
(gravimetric method) and secondly is indirect method (volumetric method).
The main objective of this research is to design and manufacturing kinetic adsorption test rig
to investigate the adsorption equilibrium such as capacity and rate of adsorption with indirect
method (volumetric method).
Thermodynamical analysis
An adsorbate mass balance on the measuring cell of the sorption kinetic test rig yield
(Dawoud dan Aristov, 2003):
dm
d, ms
= m
& −m
& (1)
dt vv ads
Figure 1. Scheme of kinetic adsorption test rig

Where:
dm
d, ms & ads
and m
& : adsorbate mass flow rate in measuring cell and vapour vessel (kg/s) m : mass flow
dt vv
rate of adsorbate on adsorbent (kg/s)
Assuming an ideal gas behavior for the adsorbate during the whole sorption process, both the
rate of adsorbate flow from the vapor vessel to the measuring cell and the time rate of

variation of the mass of the vapor phase in the measuring cell can be obtained according to
the following equations (2) and (3).
∆m m (t) − m (t + ∆t) (p vv (t) − p vv (t + ∆t) ) ⋅ Vvv
m& = vv = vv vv = (2)
vv ∆t ∆t R ⋅ T ⋅ ∆t
vv vv
dm (m (t + ∆t) − m (t)
d, ms d, ms d, ms (p (t + ∆t) − p (t)) ⋅ V
= = ms ms ms (3)
dt ∆t R ⋅ T ⋅ ∆t
d ms
By substitution equations (2) and (3) to equation (1) can be obtained:
∆m (t) (p (t) − p (t + ∆t)) ⋅ V
m
& = ads vv vv vv (p ms (t + ∆t) − p ms (t)) ⋅ Vms (4)
ads = −
∆t R ⋅ T ⋅ ∆t R ⋅T ⋅∆t
vv vv d ms
Knowing the mass of the dry adsorbent sample ms,dry as well as the starting adsorbate loading x0, the time variation of the
adsorbate loading can be calculated due to equation (5):
t ∆m ads
x=x + ∑ (5)
0
t = 0 m s, dry
Methode of design
Kinetic adsorption test rig as shown at figure 2 consist of pressure vessel, measuring cell,
vacuum pump, gas vessel, pressure transmitter, thermocouple Type K, and circulating thermal
bath. Design of kinetic adsorption test rig only for pressure vessel and measuring cell.

(a) (b)
Figure 2. Schematic of kinetic adsorption test rig (a) picture of kinetic adsorption test rig (b)
Measurement
The Adsorption experiments were based on the static volumetric method. In this method, the
maximum capacity and adsorption rate of adsorbate on adsorbent were determined by
appropriate pressure and temperature measurement. The system pressure was measured by an
absolute presure transmitters (DRUCK, PTX 1400) the pressure range are 0 – 40 bar and its
reading uncertainty is ± 0.15 % within the useable measurement range with a high accuracy
signal conditioner (ADAM, type 4018). The system temperature was measured by
Thermocouple type K. During the experiment, the temperature in pressure vessel and
measuring cell were maintained by circulating thermal bath and the temperature controllers of
the circulating thermal bathes have an accuracy of ± 0.2oC.
Experimental procedure
In order to activate the adsorbent sample, the measuring cell is heated to 150oC and
evacuated, in the same time, for 1 h using a vacuum pump (degassing process). During this
process, measuring cell is separated from pressure vessel and kinetic adsorption test rig
system. After degassing process the measuring cell is cooled down to the required sorption
temperature and measuring cell were connected with tube to the kinetic adsorption test rig
system.

The temperature of the pressure vessel is adjusted to the required sorption temperature, and
then charged with adsorbat (gas) from the gas storage, up to the required starting pressure for
the sorption process. The temperature of the connecting piping and valves has to be adjusted
and controlled to the required sorption temperature. The first sorption process starts when the
valve V2 and V4 is opened (in figure 2a), resulting in decreasing the pressure in the pressure
vessel for 30 minutes. During the first sorption process, the temperature of water in
circulating thermal bath 2 was prepared to be 10oC. The sorption process starts when the
temperature of water in circulating thermal bath is 10oC and was flowed to water jacket of
measuring cell. The pressure variation, being measured using the two pressure transmitters
P1& P2 are used to determine the amount of the adsorbed gas on the adsorbent sample.
Repeatibility of kinetic adsorption test rig

Repeatibility was done to guarantee that kinetic adsorption test rig can result the capacity and
rate of adsorption data in the same value on the same condition as shown at Figure 3.
80
70
CO2 Loading (mgr/gr)
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 600 1200 1800
Time (s) J13

J16
( 13)
Figure 3. CO2 adsorption on commercial ctivated carbon
Conclusion
1. Kinetic adsorption test rig can be use for research in adsorption engineering to
investigate capacity and rate of adsorption data.
2. Kinetic adsorption test rig was manufactured to investigate capacity and rate of
adsorption up to 40 bar.
3. Pressure vessel and measuring cell were design for pressure up100 bar.
Acknowledgment
This research was supported by the Higher Education Directorate, National Education
Department of Republic Indonesia, through Project Hibah Bersaing and Contract No. 239
AT/DRPM-UI/N14/2008 respectively.
Refferences
Dawoud, Belal, Yuri Aristov, 2003, Experimental Study on The Kinetics of Water Vapor Sorption on Selective
Water Sorbent, Silica Gel and Alumina Under Typical Operating Conditions of Sorption Heat Pumps,
International Jounal of Heat and Mass Transfer, pp 273-281.
Elyas, Anas, 2006, Experimentelle Untersuchung der Adsorptions- und Desorptionskinetik von Wasserdampf auf
losen Pellets von SWS-1L unter den Betriebsbedingungen von Adsorptionswärmepumpen, Thesis, Rheinisch -
Westfälische Technische Hochschule, Aachen.
Jong-Seok Lee, Jong-Hwa Kim, Jin-Tae Kim, Jeong-Kwon Suh, Jung-Min Lee, and Chang-Ha Lee, 2002
Adsorption Equilibria of CO2 on Zeolite 13X and Zeolite X/Activated Carbon Composite, J. Chem. Eng. Data
2002, 47, 1237-1242.
Saha, B.B., Ibrahim I. El-Sharkawy, Anutosh Chakraborty, Shigeru Koyama, Seong-Ho, and Kim Choon Ng,
2006, Adsorption Rate of Ethanol on Activated Carbon Fiber, J. Chem. Eng. Data, 2006, 51, 1587-1592.

Diagnosing Pap smear cell image based on association rules

Staff : Aniati Murni Arymurthy2*
Student : Endang Purnama Giri1
Email Contact : epgthebest@yahoo.com , aniati@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : International Conference on Advanced Computing Intelligence and its
Applications (ICACIA), pp.33-38, Jakarta, September 2008
1
Computer Science Department, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Science, Bogor Institute of Agriculture. Jl
Pajajaran, Bogor, Jawa Barat, Indonesia
2
Laboratory for Pattern Recognition and Image Processing, Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia, PO Box 3442,
Jakarta 10002 or Universitas Indonesia Campus, Depok 16424, Indonesia
Introduction
Cervix cancer is the cause of many women death throughout the world. This case
frequently happened because of overdue treatment to the patients. Several research works
have been done in developing automatic system for cervix cancer identification. Their main
goals are to make the identification process to be more simple and faster.
Eric Martin [2] has made a classification of a Pap smear cell into seven classes. Three
classes are grouped into normal cells: Normal Superficial, Normal Intermediate, and Normal
Columnar. The other four classes are grouped into abnormal cells: MildDysplasia, Moderate
Dysplasia, Severe Dysplasia, and Carcinoma In Situ. This paper presents a new approach
using association rules (AR) that can be used to classify a Pap smear cell image based on the
stadium of cervix cancer. A new matching scoring formula based on AR has been proposed on
this paper.
This work has used qualitative features in composing association rules (AR) for each class of
object. These association rules will then be used as a basis of classification model.
Basically, the qualitative features were extracted from the related quantitative features. The
intervals of the qualitative features are determined based on the Fuzzy C-Means (FCM)
clustering process. This study has selected only five optimal features from the twenty features of
Pap smear cell image used by Jantzen [1]. In order to obtain the optimal five features, the
Sequential Floating Forward Selection (SFFS) procedure proposed by Pudil et al. [3] was
used. The five selected features are: (1) Nucleus brightness, (2) Nucleus Longest Diameter,
(3) Nucleus Perimeter, (4) Nucleus Position and, (5) Cytoplasma Maxima. The value of each
quantitative feature is transformed into one of three qualitative features, so that in total there
will be fifteen (5 x 3) possible values of qualitative features.
Methodology
The classification model construction can be divided into two major steps: (i) create and
compute the Association Rules (AR) and the Probabilities (P) of each object as a basis for
classification; and (ii) apply the AR to the classification model. These two steps are shown in
Fig. 1. Fig. 2 illustrates the detail process of generating AR and computing P, and Fig. 3
shows the detail process in the main model of classification.
Association rules capture information about items that are frequently associated with each
other. The objective of mining a set of images for association rules is to identify the rules that
satisfy the user’s specified constraint. In the association rule mining process, the user needs to
specify the two constraints for the rules: the minimum support and the minimum confidence.
The rules with high support and confidence identified among features describe frequently
occurring class.
The use of association rules in the classification process needs a measure of similarity. This
paper has proposed a new scoring formula for the classification process, since the parameter for
relevance feed back used by HaoranYi et al [4] seems not working well in this study.

Figure 1. Classification Model Construction
Figure 2: Generate AR and P for Classification.
Figure 3: Classification Model

The proposed scoring computation is shown in Fig. 4. Kt is the qualitative feature vector of the
observed testing image (i=ith class and j=jth association rule of class i). If an association
rule is matched to the observed feature vector then the score is increased. The term “matched”
means that the union of antecedent item set and consequent item set is a subset of the
observed feature vector. On the other hand, if the probability of the item set is equal to the
item set of the observed feature vector then the score is increased.
The weighting factor for matching condition based on the association rules is n|ARi
(j).antecendent|,where the value of n is to be selected equal to 2. The larger the exponent
value of |ARi(j).antecendent | means that the more similar the item set of antecedent to the
observed feature vector. The weighting factor for matching condition based on probability is n5,
where the value of n is also to be selected equal to 2. The value 5 is equal to the number of
selected quantitative features that are transformed to qualitative features.
Experimental data
The experimental data consist of 917 pairs of Pap smear gray level image and its
segmented image [1]. The classification accuracy was determined using k-fold cross
validation, with k = 3. The experimental scenario has used combinations of training and
testing image data (B1, B2, and B3) explained in Table 1.
The classification accuracy for the 2-class problem are shown in Table 2, and the average
classification accuracy can reach 89.14%. On the other hand, the use of the association-rule
approach seems to be not too successful for solving the 7-class problem, where the classification
accuracy is only 38.45% in average.

Figure 4. The new formula for scoring
Table 1. Training and testing data for each experimental scenario.

Combination Train Data Test Data
C1 B1 dan B2 B3
C2 B1 dan B3 B2
C3 B2 dan B3 B1
Table 2. Classification Accuracy for 2-Class Problem.

Combination Accuracy (%)
Accuracy
No Training and No Class Name
(%) C1 C2 C3 Average
Testing
1 C1 100.0
90.12 1 Normal Superficial
0
100.00 100.00 100.00
2 C2 Normal 100.0
2 95.65 100.00 98.55
87.77 Intermediete 0
3 C3
89.54 3 Normal Columnar 45.45 42.42 66.67 51.51
4 C4 100.0
89.14 4 Light Dysplasia 100.00 93.44 97.81
0
5 Medium Dysplasia 95.92 97.96 95.92 96.60
6 Severe Dysplasia 95.45 86.36 72.73 84.85
7 Carcinoma Insitu 94.00 92.00 98.00 94.67
Conclusions
The experimental results show quite promising results, with the average classification accuracies
of 89.14% for 2-class problem (normal and abnormal) and 38.17% for 7-class more difficult
problem. A refinement of recognition steps is proposed for the future work, based on a
hierarchical classifier using more qualitative feature intervals.

Keywords
Association rules, classification, Pap smear.
References
[1] J. Jantzen, J. Norup, G. Dounias, and B. Bjerregaard, “Pap-smear Benchmark Data For Pattern Classification,”
Technical University of Denmark, Denmark, 2005.
[2] E. Martin, “Pap-Smear Classification,” Technical University of Denmark – DTU, 2003.
[3] P. Pudil, F.J. Ferri, J. Novovicova, and J. Kittler, ”Floating Search Methods for Feature Selection with Nonmonotonic
Criterion Functions,” Dept. of Electronic & Electrical Enginering, University of Surrey, Guildford GU25XH, UK, 1992.
[4] Haoran Yi, Deepu Rajan, and Liang-Tien Chia, “ARIRS: Association Rule Based Image Retrieval System,” Center for
Multimedia and Network Technology, School of Computer Engineering Nanyang Technological University, Singapore
639798, 2004.

Edge antimagic total labeling on paths and unicycles

Staff : D.R. Silaban, K.A. Sugeng1*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : {denny-rs,kiki}@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : D.R. Silaban and K.A. Sugeng. (2008) Edge antimagic total
labeling on paths and unicycles. JCMCC 65, 127-132
1
Department of Mathematics, Universitas Indonesia, Depok 16424, Indonesia
Introduction
In this paper we only deal with simple and connected graphs. Let G = (V,E) be a simple and
undirected graph with v vertices and e edges. Let V = V (G) be the set of vertices of G and E
= E(G) be the set of edges of G.
Hartsfield and Ringel [5] introduced the concept of an antimagic labeling. For a graph G of
size e, it is said to be antimagic if there is a labeling from E(G) into {1, 2, . . . , e} such that all
sums of the labels on the edges incident with each vertex v are distinct. Such a labeling is
called an antimagic labeling. Paths, cycles, complete graphs, and wheels are the examples of
antimagic graphs. We know that K2 is not antimagic. In fact, Hartsfield and Ringel conjecture
that every connected graph other than K2 is antimagic.
A (v, e)-graph G is defined to be edge-antimagic if there exists a labeling f from
V (G ) ∪ E (G ) into {1, 2, . . . , v + e} which satisfies the condition that
f (u1 ) + f ( v1 ) + f ( u1v1 ) ≠ f ( u2 ) + f ( v2 ) + f ( u2 v2 ) for any pair of distinct edges u1v1 and
u2 v2 of G. The term of edge-antimagic labeling was introduced by Kotzig and Rosa [6], but it
started to get more attention after Enomoto et al work [3]. Many families of graphs have been
proved to have an (a, d)-edge antimagic total labeling. As examples see [2, 10]. For the
complete survey, see [4]. Several works still left some open problems and some of them have
been collected in [1].
A total labeling of G is a bijection f : V (G ) ∪ E ( G ) → {1, 2, K , v + e} and the associated
weight wf (xy) of an edge xy in G is wf (xy) = f(x)+f(y)+f(xy). All labelings considered in
this paper are total labelings, and so from now on by a labeling we always mean a total
labeling. The labeling f of G is edge magic if every edge has the same weight. f is called a
super edge labeling if f(V ) = {1, ..., n}. Sedlacek [9] introduced magic labeling of graphs in
1963,
and since then there have been many results in magic labeling, especially in edge magic
labeling. For the details see [4].
A bijection f : V (G ) ∪ E ( G ) → {1, 2, K , v + e} is called an (a, d)-edge antimagic total ((a,
d)-EAT) labeling of G if the set of edge-weights of all edges in G is {a, a + d, a + 2d, . . . , a +
(v − 1)d}, where a > 0 and d ≥ 0 are two fixed nonnegative integers. If d = 0 then we call f
a edge-magic total labeling (EMT). An (a, d)-edge-antimagic total labeling f is called a super
(a, d)-edge-antimagic total super (a, d)-EAT) labeling if f(V )) = {1, 2, ..., v} and f(E) = {v +
1, v + 2, ..., v + e}. Note that if we restrict the domain of f to V (G) then we have (a’, d’)-edge
antimagic vertex labeling ((a’, d’)-EAV labeling).
In this paper we construct an (a, d)- edge antimagic total labelings on paths and unicyclic
graphs.
Let f : V (G ) ∪ E ( G ) → {1, 2, K , v + e} be an (a, d)-edge-antimagic total labeling of G and
W = {wt f ( uv ) : wt f ( uv ) = f ( u ) + f ( v ) + f ( uv ) , uv ∈ E (G )} = {a, a + d ,K, a + (e − 1)d }

is the set of edge-weights. Then the minimum possible edge-weight in super (a, d)-edge-
antimagic total labeling is at least v + 4. Consequently a ≥ 6 . On the other hand, the
3v + 3e − 9
maximum possible edge-weight is at most 3v + 3e − 3. Then d ≤ .
e −1
Baˇca et all. had survey on edge antimagic labeling in [1]. In their survey, they proposed some
open problems, one of them is in path Pn as follows:
• Find (a, 5)-EAT labelings for paths Pn, for the feasible values of a .
Let Pn be a path with n vertices, then according to the inequality (1), the following
observation is hold.
Observation 1
If paths Pn has an (a, d)-EAT labeling. Then d ≤ 6 .
Wallis et al proved that all path is an edge magic.
Theorem 1
Every odd path P2k+1, k ≥ 1 , has (4k + 4, 1)-EAT, (6k + 5, 3)- EAT, (4k + 4, 2)-EAT and (4k
+ 5, 2)-EAT labelings.
In the following theorem, we want to complete the results that we mentioned above.
Theorem 2
Every path Pn has (n + 4, 4)-EAT and (6, 6)-EAT labelings.
Theorem 3 [2]
If G has an (a, d)-EAV labeling then
• (i) G has a (a + n + 1, d + 1)-EAT labeling
• (ii) G has a (a + n + e, d − 1)-EAT labeling
Observation 2
If G has a SEMT labeling then G has an (a, 1)-EAV labeling.
Observation 3
_
If an n-crown graph G= Cm ∀ K n has an (a, d)-EAT labeling then d ≤ 5
Figueroa-Centeno et al.[8] proved that the n-crown graph has a super edge magic total
labeling.
Theorem 4 [8]
_
For every two integers m ≥ 3 and n ≥ 1, the n-crown G= Cm ∀ K n is super magic.
Using the Theorems and Observations above, we can conclude the following result.
Theorem 5
_
Every n-crown graphs G= Cm ∀ K n , m > 3, n ≥ 1 have an (a, d)-EAT labeling for d ∈ {2, 4}
Theorem 6
_
If n = 1 mod 4, m and d are odds, there is no (a, d)-EAT labeling for G= Cm ∀ K n
In the purpose to solve open problems of (a, d)-EAT labeling of path, we only can find an (a,
5)-EAT labeling for path Pn, n ≤ 9. Thus the problem in [1] is still open for d = 5. We list here
two problems for further investigation.
Conjecture 1
Path Pn, n ≥ 3 has an (a, 5)-EAT labelings.
Open Problems
_
Find if there is an (a, d)-EAT labeling, d ∈ {1, 3, 5}, for n-crown graphs G= Cm ∀ K n , n ≠ 1
mod 4
_
Note that we found an (a, 1)-EAT labeling for G= Cm ∀ K n for small size of m, where m is
even.
Keywords
Corona, cycle, edge antimagic total labeling, path.

References
M. Baca, E.T. Baskoro, M. Miller, J. Ryan, R. Simanjuntak and K.A. Sugeng. (2006) Survey of edge antimagic
labelings of graphs. J. Indones. Math. Soc(MIHMI) 12 No. 1, 113-130.
M. Baca, Y. Lin, M. Miller and R. Simanjuntak. (2001) New construction of magic and antimagic graph labelings.
Utilitas Math 60, 229-239.
H. Enomoto, A.S. Llado, T. Nakamigawa and G. Ringel. (1998) Super edgemagic graphs. SUT J. Math. 34, 105-
109.
J. Gallian. (2003) A dynamic survey of graph labeling. The Electronic Journal of Combinatorics 6, DS6 .
N. Hartsfield and G. Ringel. (1989) Supermagic and antimagic graphs. J. Rec. Math., 21, 107–115
A. Kotzig and A. Rosa. (1970) Magic valuations of finite graphs, Canad. Math. Bull. 13, 451-461.
A.A. Ngurah. (2003) On (a, b)-edge antimagic total labeling of odd cycle. MIHMI 9, 9-12.
R.M. Figueroa-Centeno, R. Ichishima and F.A. Muntaner-Batle. (2002) Magical coronation of graphs. Austral. J.
Combin. 26, 199-208.
J. Sedlacek. (1963) Problem 27, Theory of Graphs and its Applications. Proc. Symposium Smolenice, 163-167.
K.A. Sugeng and M. Miller. (2005) Relationships between adjacency matrices and super (a, d)-edge-antimagic
total graphs, JCMCC 55, 71-82.
W.D. Wallis, E.T. Baskoro, M. Miller and Slamin. (2000) Edge magic total labelings, Austral. J. Combin. 22, 177-
190.

Efficient probabilistic reanalysis for assessing imprecise reliability

Staff : F. Farizal1* and Efstratios Nikolaidis2
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : farizal@ie.ui.ac.id; enikolai@eng.utoledo.edu
Disseminated at : TEKNOSIM 2008 National Conference on Simulation Technology
IV Department of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering, Faculty
of Engineering, University of Gajah Mada
1
Industrial Engineering, the Universitas Indonesia, Kampus Baru UI, Depok 16424, Indonesia
2
Mechanical, Industrial and Manufacturing Engineering, the University of Toledo, 2801 W. Bancroft St., Toledo,
OH 43606, USA
Introduction
Large manufacturers spend up to tens of million dollars annually in warranty costs or in fixing
unreliable products in the last stages of a product development (Opp et al, 2005). For
example, typically, a company’s warranty cost ranges from 2% up to 15% of net sales
(McGuire, 1980). Moreover many product manufacturers lose significant market share
because they launch unreliable products. Therefore, it is important that product manufacturers
are able to predict the reliability of a product as it evolves during the development process
and to design the product so that it meets a required reliability target.
Probabilistic approaches are more suitable for making design decisions under uncertainty
because they consider all possible realizations of the uncertain variables and their likelihood
using probability theory. These approaches enable manufacturers to design reliability into a
product, thereby reducing warranty costs and avoiding loss of life. They also enable
designers to perform reliability-cost trade offs and to identify the most important uncertainties
that affect reliability. Finally, if designers know the reliability of a product as a function of its
lifetime, they can recommend to their customers when to retire a product at its zero life.
This study presents a new efficient Monte Carlo simulation approach to calculate the global
minimum and maximum probabilities of failure of a system that circumvents the high cost of
Monte Carlo simulation and at the same time retains its accuracy and robustness. The idea is
based on what we call efficient probabilistic reanalysis. The study considers problems where
there is only epistemic uncertainty in the probability distributions of the random variables and
the uncertainty is in the parameters of the distributions only. Other sources of uncertainty (e.g.
uncertainties in deterministic models used for checking if a design fails for a given value of
the random variables) are negligible.
Proposed approach: Efficient reliability reanalysis

The key idea of the efficient reliability reanalysis method is; if the probability of failure is
estimated a particular PDF fX(x,θ), then the probability of failure of the same system can be
calculated very efficiently for another PDF, f ′ ( x, θ) . Indeed, if one saves the values of the
X
failure indicator function I (xi) for the generated sample values, xi, then one can reuse these
values in the following equation to estimate the probability of failure PF ′ for f ′ ( x, θ) :
X
1 n f ′ (x i , θ)
PF ' ≈ ∑ I ( x i ) X (1)
n i =1 g X (xi , θ)
The proposed approach, the efficient reliability reanalysis, computes the probability of failure
PF(θ) for different values of parameters θ for approximately the cost of one reliability
analysis. The efficient reliability reanalysis can also be used to reduce the computational cost
of reliability-based design optimization when design variables are the parameters of the
probability distributions of the random variables (an example is a problem where design

variables are the mean values of the thicknesses of the plates of a car body and the thicknesses
are random). The same idea can also be used to perform sensitivity analysis of the probability
of failure with respect to the probability distributions of the random variables. However, in
this study, efficient reliability reanalysis will only be employed to determine efficiently lower
and upper bounds of the probability of failure when the parameters of the distributions of the
random variables are uncertain and their lower and upper bounds are known.
Dynamic vibration
m, ωn2 absorber
Normalized system M, ωn1 Original

amplitude y system
F=cos(ωet)
Figure 1. Tuned damper system

The proposed approach is demonstrated on calculating the imprecise probability of failure of
a tuned damper system due to excessive vibration (Figure 1). This system has been used to
identify weaknesses of probabilistic methods when there is scarce information for modeling
uncertainties (Nikolaidis et al, 1999).
The system on Figure 1 on the steady state has amplitude y which can be calculated as:
y ( β 1 , β 2 , R , ζ ) = 1 − (1 β 2 ) 2 /{[ 1 − R (1 β 1 ) 2 − (1 β 1 ) 2 (2)
− 1 β 2 ) 2 + 1 ( β 1 β 2 ) 2 ]2 + 4ζ 2 [(1 β 1 ) − 1 ( β 1 β 22 )] 2 }0 .5
where β1 is the ratio of the original system natural frequency to the excitation frequency, β2 is
the ratio of the absorber natural frequency to the excitation frequency, R the mass ratio of the
absorber to the original system, and ζ the damping ratio of the original system. The system
fails when the normalized amplitude y exceeds a certain maximum allowable value. It is
difficult to design a system whose vibration amplitude is less than a maximum allowable level
because there is variability in the frequency ratios β1 and β2, and the vibration amplitude is
sensitive to the values of these frequency ratios.

Table I shows PFmin and PFmax with their correspondence standard deviations (the numbers in
the parentheses). The large gap between the minimum and maximum failure probabilities
shows that epistemic uncertainty in the values of the distribution parameters is significant in
this example. The tables show that the proposed PRA method is on average equally accurate
as the MC method. However, the standard deviation of the estimates of the PRA method are
considerably larger than those of MC.
Table 1. Comparison of PFmin and PFmax for n = 10000

N m PRA MC
PFmin PFmax PFmin PFmax
(σPFmin) (σPFmax) (σPFmin) (σPFmax)
36 25 0.03069 0.27554 0.032 0.2763
(0.00209) (0.01437) (0.00176) (0.00447)
1000 0.02333 0.30982 0.0251 0.3106
(0.00159) (0.01899) (0.00156) (0.00463)
120 25 0.03069 0.30076 0.032 0.3004
(0.00209) (0.01703) (0.00176) (0.00458)
1000 0.02333 0.32721 0.0239 0.3249
(0.00159) (0.02001) (0.00159) (0.0047)
As an additional check, we compare the values of the distribution parameters that maximize
the probability of failure with the reference values found using numerical integration. The
values for which the failure probability is maximum are
µ1 = 1.033, σ 1 = 0.052 and µ 2 = 1.098, σ 2 = 0.0503 using both the proposed probabilistic

reanalysis and the Monte Carlo method. These are close to the reference values of the
distribution parameters that maximize the probability of failure, which are
µ1 = 1.032, σ 1 = 0.05 and µ 2 = 1.1, σ 2 = 0.05 .
Table II shows that the CPU time required by the PRA approach for calculation of PFmin and
PFmax is about two orders of magnitude smaller than that of MC simulation. The proposed
method is on average fifty six times more efficient than MC method. Note that in practical
problems, where calculation of the limit state function is very expensive, the CPU time of the
proposed approach will be several orders of magnitude smaller than that of a MC method.
Table 2. CPU Time for Simulation with n= 10,000
CPU Time
N m
PRA MC
36 25 2.703 151.047
1000 100.766 6061.500
120 25 8.609 503.594
1000 341.969 20198.47
In summary, the following observations are made based on the simulation results of this
example:
1. The proposed approach for estimating the minimum and maximum failure probabilities is
accurate and yields comparable results as a standard Monte-Carlo simulation approach.
2. At the same time the proposed approach required about one fiftieth of the CPU time of a
standard Monte-Carlo simulation approach. Note that for practical problems, where the
calculation of the limit state function is very expensive, the cost of the proposed method
should be orders of magnitude smaller than that of a MC method.
Keywords
Dynamic system, efficient reanalysis, imprecise reliability, Monte Carlo.
References
McGuire, E.P. (1980). Industrial Product Warranties: Policies and Practices. The Conference Board, Inc., New
York, NY.
Opp, M., K. Glazebrook, and V.G. Kulkarni (2005). Outsourcing warranty repairs: Dynamic allocation. Naval
Research Logistics 52: 381-398.
Nikolaidis, E. Cudney, H. Rosca, R. and Haftka, R. T. (1999). “Comparison of Probabilistic and Fuzzy Set-Based
Methods for Designing under Uncertainty”

Flame height of the propane flame lift-up

Staff : I Made Kartika Dhiputra1*, Bambang Sugiarto2
Student : Cokorda Prapti Mahandari3
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : dhiputra_made@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : I Made Kartika Dhiputra1, Bambang Sugiarto2, Cokorda Prapti
Mahandari3 (2008) Flame Height of the Propane Flame Lift-up
Proceeding of the 1st International Meeting on Advances in
Thermo-Fluid, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, 26 August 2008
1,2,3
Flame and Combustion Research Group, Thermodynamic Laboratory, Mechanical Engineering Department
Engineering Faculty, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
There are many researches on flame height or flame length of diffusion flame. However
researches on flame height for premix flame seem rather limited. Among them Rokke was the
one who proposed the determination of premix flame height as a correlation of Froude
number. The need for length of flame is depend on the application of the combustion process.
Short flame lengths are preferred on rockets. Therefore a tiny injector nozzle was used. On
the contrary, long flame lengths are preferred for industrial furnaces for uniformity of heat
transfer over the furnace height. For that reason large single nozzles were normally used.
Research on a new phenomenon the so called flame lift-up have been done on the basis of
flame stability. Lift-up would be appeared when a ring was placed on top of the exit tube
burner using a ring adjuster. Flame lift-up emerged on very lean combustion because AFR for
lift-up is higher than AFR stoichiometric. Stoichiometric fuel air ratio of propane or C3H8 is
4,02 % by volume than AFR is about 25. AFR for lift-up is about 30.
Consideration to implement this phenomenon on the design of burner should also
accommodate flame height. In this paper the investigation of flame height of this
phenomenon will be done. As a ground work study variation of AFR, that was resulted from
the variation of air flow rate would be investigated to the effect on flame height. Furthermore
the influenced of ring position and inside diameter of ring to the flame height would also be
studied. The flame height of flame lift-up that was ‘sit’ on the ring was measured based on the
image that captured by a camera. Measurements were taken from the base of flame on the
ring to the flame tip. The effects of AFR, burning load, position and inside diameter of ring
have plotted on graphics.
Methods
The apparatus for this study was similar to other research on propane flame lift-up. This
experiment was done on 14 mm inside diameter of barrel, and 3 different rings. The outside
diameter of ring was 30 mm and the inside diameter was 7 mm, 10 mm and 14 mm. Ring was
placed concentrically above the ring using a ring adjuster. Each ring was investigated on 4
positions, which are 10 mm, 20 mm 30 mm and 40 mm above the ring. For each ring position,
fuel flow rate was varied 5 ranges and for each fuel flow rate, air flow rate was controlled
until lift-up phenomenon happened. Flame height was capture in the same time.
Result and discussions

The correlation of flame height of lift-up and AFR for ring with inside diameter of 7 mm on 4
ring positions is presented on a graphics. Generally, flame height decreased when the AFR
was greater. Take note that it correspond to Rokke correlation that fuel fraction is
proportional to flame height. Among the four positions of ring it seems that on 10 mm and 20
mm above the barrel, flame height was rather difficult to be distinguished. However on ring

position of 30 mm and relatively high fuel flow rate, flame height is the highest as it is shown
on Figure 1. Flame height without ring near blow off seems higher among other flame height
on different position of ring but not on position of 30 mm just as on Figure 2.
Flame height vs AFR
on Di = 10 mm
350
300
Flame Length, Lf (mm) 250
200
150
X = 10 mm
100
X = 20 mm
50 X = 30 mm
X = 40 mm
0
30 33 36 39 42 45
AFR

Figure 1. Flame height on 10 mm inside diameter of ring
Flame height vs Burning Load

on Di = 10 mm
350
300
Flame Height, (mm)
250
200
150
X = 10 mm
100 X = 20 mm
X = 30 mm
50 X = 40 mm
w ithout ring
0
9,000 11,000 13,000 15,000 17,000
Burning Load (MJ/m^2.s)
Figure 2. Flame height vs Burning Load on 10 mm inside diameter of ring
Conclusions
This paper has presented a partial result of flame lift-up phenomenon in term of flame height.
The correlation has not been elaborated and the result was merely fact finding on the
laboratory only. Development of geometric ring and kinetic reaction of fuel related to flame
lift-up phenomenon was also a motivating subject for basic research on combustion.
Keywords
AFR, Bunsen, flame height, Flame lift-up, premixed combustion.
Acknowledgements
This experimental research is fully supported by DRPM Universitas Indonesia under Hibah
S3 Program Contract No. 242F/DRPM-UI/N1.4/2008

References
Becker HA, Liang D, (1978), Visible height of vertical free turbulent diffusion flames’ Combustion and Flame 32:
115-137.
Drysdale D. (1998), Introduction to Fire Dynamics, 2nd Edn, Wiley, UK .
Hawthorne WR, Weddell DS, Hottel HC. 1949, Mixing and Combustion in Turbulent Gas Jets, 3rd Symp. (Int.)
Combust, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, p266-288.
Heskestad G. (1999), Turbulent Jet Diffusion Flames: Consolidation of Flame Height Data, Combustion and
Flame,; 118: 51-60.
Kalghatgi GT, 1984, Lift-off heights and visible heights of vertical turbulent diffusion flames in still air, Combust.
Sci Tech 41: 17-29.
Rokke A Nils, (1987)‘A Study of Partially Premixed Unconfined Propane Flames, Combustion and Flame 97:88-
106.
Sugawa O, Sakai K,. 1997, Flame height and width produced by ejected propane gas fuel from a pipe, 13th
Meeting of the UJNR, NISTIR 6030, p 401-411.


Framework of regression-based graph matrix analysis approach in

multi-relational social network problem
Staff : Belawati H. Widjaja1*
Student : Ford Lumban Gaol
Sponsor :
Email Contact : bela@cs.ui.ac.id, flg50@ui.ac.id, fordlg@gmail.com
Disseminated at : Ford Lumban Gaol and Belawati Widjaja (2008) Framework of
Regression-Based Graph Matrix Analysis Approach in Multi-
Relational Social Network Problem. Journal of Mathematics and
Statistics 4 (1): 51-57, 2008
1
Introduction
One of the first works on SNA can be found in the classic paper of Milgram (1967). It
estimates that every person in the world is only six edges away from every other. It sets the
stage for investigations into social networks and algorithmic aspects of social networks. Many
recent efforts try to leverage social networks for diverse purposes, such as expertise location
as in Kautz et al. (1996, 1997), mining the network value of customers as in Domingos and
Richardson (2001) and discovering shared interests as in Schwartz and Wood (1993).
Previous work in sociology and statistics has suffered from the lack of data and focused on
very small networks, typically in the tens of individuals Wasserman and Faust (1994). With
the web growing, much potential social network data are available and a lot of research
efforts have been put on dealing with such data. Schwartz and Wood mined social
relationships from email logs as in Zhou et al. (2002). The ReferralWeb project is proposed in
Kautz et al. (1997) to mine a social network from a wide variety of web data and use it to help
individuals find experts who could answer their questions. Adamic and Adar (2002) tried to
discover the social interactions between people from the information on their homepages.
Agrawal et al. (2003) analyzed the social behavior of the people on the newsgroups.
Moreover, the web itself can be actually viewed as a large social network. The well-known
link analysis algorithms, such as Google’s PageRank in Page et al. (1998) and Kleinberg’s
HITS algorithm in Kleinberg (1999), can be seen as social network analysis on the web.
In principle, a community can be simply defined as a group of objects sharing some common
properties. Community mining has many similar properties to the graph-cut problem. Kumar
et al. (1999) used the bipartite graph concept to find the core of the community and then
expanded the core to get the desired community. Flake et al. (2000) applied the maximum-
flow and minimum cut framework on the community mining.
Methodology
A regression-based algorithm: The basic idea of our algorithm is trying to find a combined
relation which makes the relationship between the intra-community examples as tight as
possible and at the same time the relationship between the inter-community examples as loose
as possible.

For each relation, we can normalize it to make the biggest strength (weight on the edge) be 1.
Thus we construct the target relation between the labeled objects as follows:
% = ⎧⎨1, example i and example j have the same label
M ij
⎩ 0, otherwise

where, M % is a m×m matrix and M % indicates the relationship between examples i and j.
ij
Once the target relation matrix is built, we aim at finding a linear combination of the existing
relations to optimally approximate the target relation in the sense of L2 norm. Sometimes, a
user is uncertain if two objects belong to the same community and can only provide the
possibility that two objects belong to the same community. In such case, we can define M % as
follows:
M % = Prob (Xi and Xj belong to the same community)
ij
Let a = [a1, a2,…, an]T Î Rn denote the combination coefficients for different relations.
The approximation problem can be characterized by solving the following optimization
problem:
~ 2
n
opt
a = arg min M − ∑ a i Mi (1)
a i =1
This can be written as a vector form. Since the matrix Mm×m is symmetric, we can use
a m(m-1)/2 dimensional vector v to represent it. The problem (1) is equivalent to:
n 2
opt % −∑aV
a = arg min V i i (2)
a i =1
Equation 2 is actually a linear regression problem as in Hastie (2001). From this point
of view, the relation extraction problem is interpreted as a prediction problem. Once the
combination coefficients are computed, the hidden relation strength between any object pair
can be predicted.
In real applications, the user does not need to specify the relationships between any
pair of objects. That is, the vector v need not to be m(m-1)/2 dimensional. We assume that v
is a k-dimensional vector in the following.
Let us first consider the simplest case that:
n
∑ a i vi = v% (3)
i =1
We define:
V = [v1, v2, …, vn] (4)
Thus, Eq. 3 can be rewritten as follows: Va = v%
Suppose the rank of V is min(k, n). We have the following facts:
• When k<n, the set of solutions to Eq. 4 forms a (n-k) dimensional vector subspace
• When k = n, there is a unique solution to Eq. 4
• When k>n, there is no solution to Eq. 4
Conclusion
There are a lot of issues that need to be studied further. First, our approach adopts a
regression-based graph matrix analysis approach. There are potentially many other
approaches that can be explored and compared with this approach. We will expect that future
studies may propose even more powerful approaches in relation extraction than what is
proposed here.
Second, our relation extraction algorithm has made a lot of simplifications in the analysis. In
general, links within the same network and among different networks may carry different
weights. For example, one can imagine that the links among co-author networks should be
inherently stronger than those among co-proceedings since average size (# of links) in the co-
author group is much smaller than that in the co-proceedings group. This is not considered in
our simple model. Thus we expect the prediction power will be substantially enhanced if such
information is incorporated in the new algorithm.
Third, our query model considers only one simple group of nodes (such as researchers). A
more powerful query model may involve and, or, not operators on those groups. For example,

one may like to find those who co-attend the same conference but never co-authored a paper
using the not operator. This will be useful for finding referees for conference submissions.
These issues may form an exciting frontier for future research.
Keywords
Community mining, hidden community information, social network analysis.
References
Adamic L.A. and Adar E. 2002. Friends and neighbors on the web. Technical Report, Xerox Parc.
Agrawal R., Rajagopalan S., Srikant R. and Xu Y., 2003. Mining newsgroups using networks arising from social
behavior. In: Proceedings of 12th International World Wide Web Conference.
Domingos P. and Richardson M. 2001. Mining the network value of customers. In: Proceedings of the 7th ACM
SIGKDD international conference on Knowledge discovery and data mining, pages 57-66. ACM Press.
Flake G.W., Lawrence S. and Giles C.L., 2000. Efficient identification of web communities. In: Proceedings of the
6th International Conference on Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining (ACM SIGKDD-2000).
Hastie T., Tibshirani R. and Friedman J.H. 2001. The Elements of Statistical Learning. Springer-Verlag.
Kautz H., Selman B.and Milewski A., 1996. Agent amplified communication. In: Proceedings of AAAI-96, pp: 3-
9.
Kautz H., Selman B. and Shah M., 1997. Referral web: Combining social networks and collaborative filtering.
Commun. ACM., 40 (3): 63-65.
Kleinberg J., 1999. Authoritative sources in a hyperlinked environment. J. ACM., 46 (5): 604-622.
Kumar R., Raghavan P., Rajagopalan S. and Tomkins A., 1999. Trawling the web for emerging cyber
communities. In: Proceedings of The 8th International World Wide Web Conference.
Milgram S., 1967. The small world problem. Psychol. Today, 2: 60-67.
Page L., Brin S., Motwani R. and Winograd T., 1998. The pagerank citation ranking: Bringing order to the web.
Technical Report, Stanford University.
Schwartz M.F. and Wood D.C.M., 1993. Discovering shared interests using graph analysis. Commun. ACM., 36
(8): 78-89.
Wasserman S. and Faust K., 1994. Social Network Analysis: Methods and Applications. Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge, UK.
Zhou W.J., Wen J.R., Ma W.Y. and Zhang H.J., 2002. A concentric-circle model for community mining.
Technical Report, Microsoft Research.

Friction factor analysis of acrylic square duct

Staff : Budiarso1*, Achmad Fauzan1, Agung Tri Handoyo1
Email Contact : budiarso@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : SNTTM VII – 2008 - UNSRAT, Menado, Indonesia
1
Mechanical Engineering Department, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
One of the characteristic of internal flow in ducts is influenced by the shape of its geometry.
In close non circular cross section duct losses for laminar as well as turbulent flow isn’t only
depended by the roughness of ducts surface but also influenced by the flow characteristics.
Flow in close non circular duct with ratio aspect one or above, are frequently used in atomic
reactors, gas-turbine regenerators, and heat exchangers (Hartnett, J.P., et al., 1962). Some
studies have carried out by some researchers in the field of fluid mechanics to investigate
flow characteristics in several shapes of duct geometry. Several results indicated that the flow
friction factor in a certain Reynolds number in a square duct is lower than in circular duct.
Therefore, implementation of square duct in closed flow in fluid mechanics field has potential
to reduce energy loss due to wall skin friction in the flow and can help to save the flow
energy. In the square duct the interaction between the walls and the flow varies with position.
The result is non- uniform wall shear stresses. Since the static pressure change along a duct is
the same for all of the flow, a mechanism must be present which compensates for the varying
wall shear stresses. The mechanism takes the form of secondary flows which move fluid
from low to high shear stress regions, evening out the shear stress distribution and causing an
exchange between static and velocity pressure as flow is displaced between high and low
velocity regions (Miller, 1990).
Darcy-Weisbach formula is valid for steady state, incompressible, fully developed and
turbulent flow both circular and square pipe.
The purpose of this study is to carry out the friction coefficient (λ) of close flow in an acrylic
square duct 20 x 20 mm for 4.0 x 103 < Re < 2.5 x 104.
Basic theory
To obtain the friction coefficient (λ), Darcy-Weisbach formula is valid for steady state,
incompressible, fully developed and turbulent flow both in circular and square duct (Hartnett,
J.P., et al., 1962)
∆p(Dh L )
λ=
ρ u2 2
(1)
4A
Dh = (2)
P
p, Dh, L, ρ, u, A and P are pressure (N/m2), hydraulics diameter (m), length of duct in the test
section (m), density (kg/m3), velocity (m/s), duct cross section area (m2) and duct wet
peripheral (m) respectively.
Friction coefficient (λ) also could also be obtained by The Colebrook-White explicit formula
(Munson, 2005),
λ =
0 . 25 (3)
2
⎡ ⎛ ε 5 . 74 ⎞⎤
⎢ log ⎜⎜ + ⎟⎟ ⎥
⎣ ⎝ 3 .7 D h Re 0 . 9 ⎠⎦

ε
ε is surface roughness, and formula valid for 10 − 6 ≤ ≤ 10 − 2 and 5 × 10 3 ≤ Re ≤ 108
Dh
acrylic 20 x 20 mm
Figure 1. Experimental apparatus

Experimental method
In order to investigate friction coefficient (λ) of an acrylic square duct 20 x 20 mm,
experiments was carried out to measure the pressure loss in that duct. Fig. 1 shows the
experimental apparatus. Two pressure gauges were attached on both of the two test section
edge. The first pressure tap was located 1300 mm from the edge of right side of duct near the
elbow in the upstream side in order to assure that the flow has already in fully developed
condition before enters the test section (entrance length). The equation of the entrance length
(le) according Munson, 2005, is:
le 1 (4)
= 4,4 Re6
Dh
In this experiment the range of Reynolds numbers was 4.0 x 103 < Re < 2.5 x 104. The fluid
that was used for this experiment was tap water in ambient temperature. The length of two
pressure taps was 600 mm so the value of pressure loss is large enough to be read.
In order to control variation of flow capacity for obtaining the Reynolds numbers range valve
was installed in the pipe between reservoir and flow meter. The flow meter was used for
measuring the water flow capacity for obtaining the velocity of flow. By using Darcy-
Weisbach formula it will obtain the friction coefficient (λ).

Experimental result shows in Fig. 2, indicate that for Re < 1.1 x 104 the friction factor of
square duct of ratio aspect 1 is lower compared by circular pipe, but for Re > 1.1 x 104 the
friction factor of square duct is higher than the circular pipe. The lower friction factor
developed in the range of Reynolds numbers 4.0 x 103 < Re < 1.1 x 104 shows that the drag
reduction is not in the turbulent flow region but in the transition of laminar to turbulent region
flow. It is inferred that drag reduction due to the delaying of transition flow from laminar to
turbulent flow is caused by the development of secondary flow in a duct.

experimental
result
Figure 2: Experimental results comparison of
Conclusion
The friction factor (λ) obtained from experimental result of close flow square duct of ratio
aspect 1 for 4.103 < Re < 2.5 x 104 lower 1.3% than circular pipe. The phenomenon in the
square duct of ratio aspect 1 is inferred due to the delaying of transition flow from laminar to
turbulent flow that are caused by the development of secondary flow in a duct.
Keywords
Friction factor, secondary flow, square duct.
References
Hartnett, J.P., Koh, J.C., McComas, S.T., (1962) A Comparison of Predicted and Measured Friction Factors for
Turbulent Flow Through Rectangular Ducts, Trans ASME, Februari.
Miller, D.S., (1990) Internal Flow Systems. BHRA, Cranfield, Bedford MK43 OAJ, UK, (ISBN 0-947711-77-5).
Munson, Bruce R., Young, Donald F., Okiishi, Theodore H., (2005) Mekanika Fluida. Fourth Edition B Volume 2,
Translation Copyrights © 2003, Translated by - Harinaldi, Budiarso, Published by Erlangga, Jakarta,
Indonesia. (ISBN 979-741-393-4).

Gerasimov-Drell-Hearn sum rule and the discrepancy between the

new CLAS and SAPHIR data
Staff : T. Mart1*
Student :
Disseminated at : T. Mart (2008) Few Body System 42, 125-138
1
Introduction
The new experimental data of kaon photoproduction γ + p → K + + Λ provided recently by
the SAPHIR, Glander et al. (2004), and CLAS, Bradford et al. (2006), collaborations lead to
not only a new opportunity to study the dynamics of kaon and hyperon interactions in great
detail, but also to a puzzling point: Why do there exist discrepancies between the two data
sets in the γ + p → K + + Λ channel, whereas in the γ + p → K + + Σ 0 channel the extracted
data from the two collaborations agree quite well? There have been considerable efforts
devoted to analyze the consequence of the data discrepancies in the γ + p → K + + Λ process.
It is shown by Mart and Sulaksono (2006) that the use of SAPHIR and CLAS data,
individually or simultaneously, leads to quite different extracted photo-coupling parameters.
Therefore, it is concluded that the current data situation does not allow for a precise
determination of the resonance parameters or for the search of the ‘‘missing resonances’’. By
studying the statistical properties of the two data sets Bydzovsky and Mart (2007) showed that
the CLAS data are in good agreement with the LEPS data [7], whereas the SAPHIR data are
coherently shifted down with respect to both CLAS and LEPS data, especially at forward
kaon angles. The relative global-scaling factor between the SAPHIR and CLAS data has been
found to be 1.13. Although results of the recent works could reveal certain consequences of
using SAPHIR or CLAS data in the database, it is still difficult to determine which data set
should be used to obtain a reliable phenomenological model as well as to extract the correct
resonance parameters. In view of this, it is important to consider other quantities which can be
predicted by the models and can be directly compared with the results from other
measurements or model predictions. One of the possible quantities is the contribution of the
γ + p → K + + Λ channel to the Gerasimov-Drell-Hearn (GDH) sum rule, Gerasimov (1966),
Drell and Hearn (1966).
The Gerasimov-Drell-Hearn sum rule

The sum rule relates the anomalous magnetic moment of the nucleon µ N to the difference of
its polarized total photoabsorption cross sections,
2 ∞
κ N2 =
mN
∫
dEγ
[σ 3 / 2 ( Eγ ) − σ 1 / 2 ( Eγ )]
4π 2α thr
Eγ
Eγ
where σ 3 / 2 ( Eγ ) and σ 1 / 2 ( Eγ ) indicate the cross sections for the possible combinations of
spins of the proton (1/2) and the photon (1), Eγthr the photoproduction threshold lab energy,
α = e 2 / 4π = 1 / 137 the fine-structure constant, and mN the nucleon mass. For the sake of
comparison, however, it is more convenient to define the GDH integral as

∞
I GDH = ∫
dEγ
Eγ
[σ1/ 2 ( Eγ ) − σ 3 / 2 ( Eγ )]
thr
Eγ
With this definition, the GDH sum rule on the proton yields
p 2π 2ακ 2p
I GDH =− = −204.5 µb
m 2p
Besides that we can also calculate the corresponding contribution the forward spin
polarizability of the proton,
∞
γ0 =
1
∫
dEγ
[σ1/ 2 ( Eγ ) − σ 3 / 2 ( Eγ )]
4π 2 Eγ3
Eγthr
It is interesting that the precise value of this observable is currently less known, since there is
no sign that calculations from chiral perturbation theory (ChPT) would converge in this case.
For instance, the isobar model predicts γ 0 = −0.65 (in 10−4 fm4), whereas the analysis from
ChPT to order of p3 obtains a value of 4.6 and an extension to order of p4 yields −3.9. The
latest value obtained from the photoabsorption experiment is − 0.94 × 10−4 fm4.
Results
Results of our analysis are summarized in Table 1, where Fit 1 and Fit 2 display the results of
using the SAPHIR and CLAS data, respectively, whereas Fit 1a and Fit 2a demonstrate the
results after inclusion of the LEPS data. It is clear from this result that the MAID model
prefers the use of SAPHIR data rather than the CLAS data. We have also investigated the
effects of including the new Cx and Cz data that are recently published by the CLAS
collaboration and we found that the present finding does not change with this inclusion.
Table 1. Contributions of the γ + p → K + + Λ channel to the GDH sum rule for the proton and to the forward spin
polarizability obtained in this work compared with the corresponding values of MAID. Also shown the number of
data used N and the χ2/N.
Observable MAID Fit 1 Fit 1a Fit 2 Fit 2a
IGDH (µb) 1.247 1.309 1.274 −0.845 −0.333
γ 0 (10−7 fm 4 ) 0.939 0.807 0.753 −0.208 0.060
N 319 720 834 1377 1694
2 3.36 0.78 1.02 0.84 0.98
χ /N
Keywords
Electromagnetic production , kaon, hyperon, Gerasimov-Drell-Hearn sum rule.
References
Bradford R, et al. (2006) Differential cross sections for γ + p → K + + Y for Λ and Σ0 hyperons. Physical Review
C 73, 035202.
Bydzovsky P, Mart T (2007) Analysis Of The Data Consistency On Kaon Photoproduction With Lambda In The
Final State. Physical Review C 76, 065202.
Drell SD, Hearn AC (1966) Exact Sum Rule For Nucleon Magnetic Moments. Physical Review Letters 16, 908-
911.
Gerasimov S.B. (1966) A Sum Rule For Magnetic Moments And The Damping Of The Nucleon Magnetic
Moment In Nuclei. Soviet Journal of Nuclear Physics 2, 430-433.
Glander K.H., et al. (2004) Measurement of γ + p → K + + Λ and γ + p → K + + Σ 0 at photon energies up to 2.6
GeV. European Physics Journal A 19, 251-273.
Mart T, Sulaksono A (2006) Kaon Photoproduction In A Multipole Approach. Physical Review C 74, 055203.
Sumihama M, et al. (2006) The polarized γ + p → K + + Y and polarized γ + p → K + + Σ 0 reactions at forward
angles with photon energies from 1.5 GeV to 2.4-GeV. Physical Review C 73, 035214.

Graphconnect: Framework of discovering closed highly connected

pattern from semistructured dataset
Sponsor :
Disseminated at : F. L. Gaol, B. Widjaja (2008) GraphConnect: Framework of
Discovering Closed Highly Connected Pattern from Semistructured
Dataset. International Review on Computers and Software 3(1),
January 2008, 76 – 80
1
Introduction
In social networks, frequent highly connected subgraph in large relational graphs can
help identify groups where people are strongly associated. In computational biology,
highly connected subgraph could represent a set of genes within the same functional
module, i.e., a set of genes participating in the same biological pathways as in Butte et
al. (2000) and Spririn and Mirny (2003). Butte et al. (2000) calculates the pair-wise
similarity between gene expressions to construct relevance networks in order to
discover functional relationships between genes.
The common problem in the above application scenario is to find not only frequent
graphs, but also graphs that satisfy the connectivity constraint. This new problem
setting has three major characteristics different from the previous frequent graph
mining problem defined in Inokuchi et al. (1998), Kuramochi and Karypis (2001),
Borgelt and Berhol (2002), Gaol and Widjaja (2006a), Gaol (2006). First, in relational
graphs each node represents a distinct object. No two nodes share the same label. In
biological networks, nodes often represent unique objects like genes and enzymes.
Secondly, relational graphs may be very large. For example, gene relevance networks
often have thousands of nodes and millions of edges. Thirdly, the interesting patterns
should not only be frequent but also satisfy the connectivity constraint. Previous
studies in Washio and Motoda (2003) and Chekuri et al., usually interpret a frequent
graph as an object and ignore its internal properties such as connectivity. In order to
handle these new challenges, two issues have to be solved: (1) how to mine frequent
graphs efficiently in large relational graphs, and (2) how to handle the connectivity
constraint. Since frequent graph mining usually generates too many patterns, as
observed in Burdick et al. (2001), Zaki and Gouda (2003), Wang et al. (2003), Gaol
and Widjaja (2006b), it is more appealing to mine closed frequent graphs only.
Our major contribution is to tackle the connectivity constraint. We develop graph
theoretic approach, GraphConnect (a pattern-growth approach), to efficiently discover
closed highly connected graphs while still preserving the completeness of the mining
result. We apply graph condensation and decomposition techniques in the design of
GraphConnect to improve the performance. GraphConnect can reduce the size of
candidate graphs in terms of nodes and edges. GraphConnect are targeted to handle
different mining requests.

Methodology
We define union, intersection and difference operators for relational graphs.
Definition 1 (Union, Intersection, Difference). Given two relational graphs, G = (V,E) and G′
= (V,E′), the union of G and G′, written G ∪ G′, is (V,E ∪ E′). The intersection of G and G′,
written G∩G′, is (V, E∩E′). The difference of G and G′, written G − G′, is (V,E \ E′).
Definition 2 (Constraint). A constraint is a function, C : {G} → {0, 1}, which maps a graph
G to a Boolean value. A graph G satisfies constraint C if C(G) = 1.
Definition 3 (Degree). The degree of a vertex v is the number of edges that connect v, written
as degree(v). The average degree of a graph G is the average of degree (v) for all v ∈ V (G).
The minimum degree of a graph G is the minimum of degree(v) for all v ∈V (G), written as
σ(G).
Definition 4 (Edge Connectivity). Given a graph G, an edge cut is a set of edges Ec such that
E(G) − Ec is disconnected. A minimum cut is the smallest set in all edge cuts. The edge
connectivity of G, written k(G), is the size of a minimum cut.
Definition 5 (K-decomposition). The K- decomposition of an undirected graph G is a set of
subgraphs {gi}, gi ⊆ G, s.t. k(gi) ≥ K and gi ∩ gj = ∅. The maximum K-decomposition is a K-
decomposition that maximizes ∑ E ( gi ) .
Discussion and result

We have the following claim and Corollary about edge connectivity, and build GraphConnect
Algorithm, incorporating the connectivity constraint. When it extends a frequent graph,
GraphConnect attempts to remove the frequent edges that will not be part of highly connected
graphs.
Claim 1 (No Downward Closure Property). Given two graphs G and G′, G ⊂ G′ and k(G) ≤
k(G′) do not imply each other.
Corollary 1 (Condensation). Let G be a subgraph of a graph G′, and G∗ be the graph formed
from G′ with all vertices in G condensed into a single vertex. If k (G ) > k (G/ ), then k (G∗) =
k (G′).
Algorithm GraphConnect (g, D, min_sup, K, C, S)
Input: A graph g, a graph dataset D, a minimum support threshold min_sup, connectivity
constraint K, the previously discovered frequent graph set C.
Output: The result set S.
1: if ∃g′ ∈ C, g ⊂g′ and support(g) = support(g′) then return;
2: extend g to g′ as much as possible such that. support(g) = support(g′);
3: insert g′ to C;
4: g∗ = g′;
5: if ∃go ∈ S, g′ is extended from go then condense the vertices of go into a single vertex in
g ∗;
6: decompose(g∗, K, S);
7: scan D once, find frequent edge set X, s.t. ∀e ∈ X graph g′ ∈ {e} is frequent;
8: for each vertex v in g′, deg(v) ≤ K do
9: remove all edges of v in X;
10: for each frequent graph g′ ∪ {e}, e ∈ X do
11: GraphConnect (g′ ∪ {e}, D, min_sup, K, C, S);
12: return;
The Algorithm sketches the framework of GraphConnect, which consists of four steps: (Step
1) find the closed graph of a newly discovered graph (Lines 2-3); (Step 2) condense and
decompose graphs for highly connected subgraphs (Lines 5-7); (Step 3) remove frequent
edges of unpromising vertices (Lines 8-9); and (Step 4) recursively search new graphs (Lines
10-11). We record the intermediate mining results in a set C. Corollary 1 is used to accelerate
the computation of edge connectivity in the second step, shown in Line 5.

The conclusion
We introduced a new graph mining problem: finding closed frequent graphs with connectivity
constraints in relational graphs. We adopted the concept of edge connectivity and applied
graph theoretic results, graph condensation and decomposition, in our algorithm design. We
developed GraphConnect, a pattern-growth approach and show any graph will be
decomposed at most once in GraphConnect.

Keywords
Closed frequent graphs, closed pattern, connectivity, semistructured data.
References
Borgelt C. and Berthold M.. Mining molecular fragments: Finding relevant substructures of molecules. In Proc.
2002 Int. Conf. on Data Mining (ICDM’02), pages 211–218, 2002.
Burdick D., Calimlim M., and Gehrke J.. MAFIA: A maximal frequent itemset algorithm for transactional
databases. In Proc. 2001 Int. Conf. Data Engineering (ICDE’01), pages 443–452, 2001.
Butte A., Tamayo P., Slonim D., Golub T., and Kohane I.. Discovering functional relationships between rna
expression and chemotherapeutic susceptibility. In Proc. of the National Academy of Science, volume 97,
pages 12182–12186, 2000.
Chekuri C., Goldberg A., Karger D., Levine M., and Stein C.. Experimental study of minimum cut algorithms. In
Proc. of the Eighth Annual ACM-SIAM Symposium on Discrete Algorithms (SODA’97), pages 324–333, 1997.
Gaol F. L.. Finding Structured Pattern in Graph using Permutation Matrix. In Proceedings Interna-tional
Conference 9th QIR, UI, Depok, Indonesia, August 2006.
Gaol F. L. and Widjaja B.. Formal Necessary and Sufficient Conditions for Support Measure Admissibility. In
Proceedings International Communication & Technology Symposium 2006, ITS, Surabaya, Indonesia, Agustus
2006.
Gaol F. L. and Widjaja B.. Mining Frequent Semistructured Pattern Using Path Covers. In Proceedings IJJS Joint
Conference Chiba Univ – UI, UI, Depok, August 2006.
Inokuchi A., Washio T., and Motoda H.. An apriori-based algorithm for mining frequent substructures from graph
data. In Proc. 2000 European Symp. Principle of Data Mining and Knowledge Discovery (PKDD’00), pages
13–23, 1998.
Kuramochi M. and Karypis G.. Frequent subgraph discovery. In Proc. Int. Conf. Data Mining (ICDM’01), pages
313–320, 2001.
Spirin V. and Mirny L.. Protein complexes and functional modules in molecular networks. In Proc. of the National
Academy of Science, volume 100, pages 12123–12128, 2003.
Wang J., Han J., and Pei J.. Closet+: Searching for the best strategies for mining frequent closed itemsets. In Proc.
2003 ACM Int. Conf. Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining (KDD’03), pages 236–245, 2003.
Washio T. and Motoda H.. State of the art of graph-based data mining. SIGKDD Explorations, 5:59–68, 2003.
Zaki M. and Gouda K.. Fast vertical mining using diffsets. In Proc. 2003 ACM Int. Conf. Knowledge Discovery
and Data Mining (KDD’03), pages 326–335, 2003.

Graph connectivity in electrical studies

Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : Ford Lumban Gaol, Belawati Widjaja. (2008) Graph Connectivity
in Electrical Studies. International Engineering and Technology
Journal of Electrical Analysis, 2(3),194-200
1
Introduction
Cluster analysis seeks grouping of elements into subsets based on similarity between pairs of
elements. The goal is to find disjoint subsets, called clusters, such that two criteria are
satisfied: homogeneity: elements in the same cluster are highly similar to each other, and
separation: elements in different clusters have low similarity to each other. The process of
generating the subsets is called clustering. The similarity level is usually determined by a set
of features of each element. These often originate from noisy experimental measurements,
and thus give inaccurate similarity values.
Cluster analysis is a fundamental problem in experimental science, where one wishes to
classify observations into groups or categories. It is an old problem with a history going back
to Aristotle as in Hansen and Jaumard (1997). It has applications in electrical, biology,
medicine, economics, psychology, astrophysics and numerous other fields. The application
that motivated this study was wiring in electrical studies.
In this paper we present a novel clustering algorithm. The approach presented here is graph
theoretic. The similarity data is used to form a similarity graph in which vertices correspond
to elements and edges connect elements with similarity values above some threshold. In that
graph, clusters are highly connected subgraphs, defined as subgraphs whose edge connectivity
exceeds half the number of vertices.
Methodology
Previous graph theoretic approaches: Due to its wide applicability, cluster analysis has been
addressed by numerous authors in various disciplines in the past. The cluster separation and
homogeneity goals described above can be interpreted in various ways for optimization.
Numerous approaches exist depending on the specific objective function chosen as in Jardine
and Sibson (1971), Anderberg (1973), Sneath and Sokal (1973), Hartigan (1975), Sokal
(1977), Mirkin (1996) and Hansen and Jumard (1997).
We briefly review the approaches that are most related to our work.
Matula (1969, 1970, 1972, 1977) was the first to observe the usefulness of high connectivity
in similarity graphs to cluster analysis. Matula’s approach is based on the cohesiveness
function, defined for every vertex and edge of a graph G to be the maximum edge-
connectivity of any subgraph containing that element. The components of the subgraph of G,
obtained by deleting all elements in G of cohesiveness less than k, are precisely the maximal
k-connected subgraphs of G. In Matula (1970) suggested finding clusters by using a constant
value k. The drawback in this approach is that different real clusters mayhave different
connectivity values. Later Matula (1972) suggested identifying as clusters maximal k-
connected subgraphs (for any k) which do not contain a subcomponent with higher
connectivity. This may cause the splitting of some real clusters that contain several highly
cohesive parts.
Minimum cuts in capacitated similarity graphs were also used by Wu and Leahy (1993). The
number of clusters K is assumed to be known for their algorithm. The K-1 smallest cuts in G

are computed, e.g., using the Gomory-Hu algorithm in Gomory and Hu (1961) and their
removal produces a K-partition of the data. The resulting K-partition of G has two desirable
properties: (1) it minimizes the largest inter-subgraph mincut among all possible K-partitions
of G. (2) the maximum mincut between any pair of vertices in the same subgraph (intra-
subgraph mincut) is always greater than or equal to the mincut between vertices in two
different subgraphs (inter-subgraph mincut). We also compare the two approaches with ours.

Herewith the improved HCS algorithm
HCS-loop(G(V, E))
begin
for (i=1 to p) do
remove clustered vertices from G
H ←G
repeatedly remove all vertices of degree < di from H
until _no new cluster is found by the HCS call_ do
HCS(H)
perform singletons adoption
remove clustered vertices from H
end until
end for
end
The algorithm, together with the heuristics, was implemented and tested on both simulated
data, with very good results.
We used the following score to evaluate the quality of clustering. A clustering solution for a
set of n elements can be represented by an n × n matrix M where Mij = 1 iff i and j are in the
same cluster according to the solution and Mij = 0 otherwise. If T denotes the matrix of the
true solution, then the Minkowski score of M is T − M / T as in Sokal (1977) and Jadine and
Sibson (1971). Hence, a perfect solution will obtain a score of zero, and the smaller the score
the better the solution.
The algorithm was first applied to simulate of wiring synthetic data expression. An extant
greedy algorithm used in practice on such data was also applied for comparison. On ten
different groups, of datasets, varying in sizes from 60 to 980 elements with 3-13 clusters and
high noise rate, HCS achieved an average score below 0.2. In comparison, the greedy
algorithm deteriorated from an average score of 0.4 for the smallest problems to 1.4 for the
largest. Stability of the solution quality as measured by the variance of the score, was also
much smaller in our algorithm. HCS also manifested robustness with respect to higher noise
levels.
Conclusion
A clustering algorithm based on high connectivity in graphs was presented, and its generated
solutions with desirable properties for clustering was demonstrated. The algorithm has low
polynomial complexity. It is also efficient in practice: Our initial implementation, after some
heuristic improvements, handles well problems with up to thousands of elements in a
reasonable computing time, see also Tsai (1998).
Our novel definition of highly connected subgraphs gives a stopping criterion, by defining
clusters as subgraphs with connectivity that is above half the number of vertices. It gives
clusters with provable good properties and it precludes the need to know in advance the
number of clusters as in Wu and Leahy (1993).
The HCS algorithm generates clusters with diameter two. This is a strong indication of
homogeneity, as any two vertices are either adjacent or share one or more common neighbors.
This property is not satisfied by the solutions in Matula (1972) and Wu and Leahy (1993).
Possible future improvements include finding maximal highly connected subgraphs (e.g.
using Matula’s cohesiveness function in Matula (1972)) and finding a weighted minimum cut

in an edge-weighted graph. Further theoretical questions on the properties of the algorithm are
also of interest: Can we determine the optimal value of the threshold on the similarity values
that is used to form the similarity graph: Can we determine a probabilistic threshold for the
level of noise under which good (or perfect) clustering is guaranteed, with high probability.
Proving additional (deterministic or probabilistic) properties of HCS clusters is also of
interest.
Keywords
Algorithms, clustering, diameter, graph connectivity, minimum cut.
References
Anderberg M. R.. Cluster Analysis for Applications. Academic Press, New York, 1973.
Gomory R. E. and Hu T. C.. Multy-terminal networks flows. SIAM J_.Apll. Math, 9-551-570, 1961.
Hansen P. and Jaumard B.. Cluster analysis and mathematical programming. Mathematical Programming,
79:1910215, 1997.
Hartigan J.A.. Clustering Algorithms. John Wiley and Sons, 1975.
Jardine N. and Sibson R. Mathematical Taxonomy. John Wiley and Sons, London, 1971.
Matula D.W.. The cohesive strength of graphs. In G. Chartrand and S.F. Kapoor editors: The Many Facets of
Graph Theory pages 215 – 221, Berlin, 1969. Springer-Verlag. Lecture Notes in Mathematics No110.
Matula D.W.. Cluster analysis via graph theoretic techniques. In R.C Mullin, K.B Reid and D.P. Rosell editors,
Proc. Louisiana Conference on Combinatorics, Graph Theory and Computing pages 199 – 212. University of
Manitoba, Winnipeg, 1970.
Matula D.W.. k-Components clusters and slicings in graphs. SIAM J. Appl. Math., 22(3): 459 – 480, 1972.
Matula D.W.. Graph theoretic techniques for cluster analysis algorithms. In J. Van Ryzin, editor Classification and
Clustering, pages 95-129. Academic Press, 1977.
Mirkin B.. Mathematical Classification and Clustering. Kluwer, 1996.
Sneath P.H.A. and Sokal R.R.. Numerical Taxonomy. Freeman San Francisco, 1973
Sokal R. R.. Clustering and classification: Background and current directions. In J. Van Ryzin editor
Classification and Clustering pages 1 - 15 Academic Press , 1977.
Tsai E.. Cluster analysis by highly connected subgraphs with applications to Wiring Synthetic. Master’s thesis,
Department of Computer Science, Ben Guron University, August 1998.
Wu Z. and Leahy R.. An optimal graph theoretic approach to data clustering: theory and its application to image
segmentation. IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, 15(11): 1101 – 1113, 1993.

Kaon contribution to the Gerasimov-Drell-Hearn sum rule on the

proton
Staff : T. Mart1*
Student :
Disseminated at : T. Mart (2008) International Journal of Modern Physics A 23, 599-
612
1
Introduction
Although it has been explored for more than four decades, the internal structure of the
nucleon is still an open topic of investigations nowadays. It is believed that this internal
structure is responsible for the ground state properties of the nucleon and its resonance spectra
at higher energies; two different phenomena which are not all independent but related by a
number of sum rules. One of them is the Gerasimov-Drell-Hearn (GDH) sum rule, Gerasimov
(1966), Drell and Hearn (1966). Meanwhile, the spin structure of the nucleon has been
commonly investigated by scattering polarized lepton beams off polarized targets. The results
are then translated in terms of the spin structure functions g1 ( x, Q 2 ) and g 2 ( x, Q 2 ) , where
x = Q 2 / 2mN ν the Bjorken scaling variable, mN the nucleon mass, Q2 ≥ 0 the squared
momentum transfer, and ν the virtual photon laboratory energy. It was then found that the
integral of g1 is significantly below the prediction of the quark model, which therefore led to
the conclusion that less than half of nucleon spin are due to the constituent quarks (spin
crisis). Interestingly, the spin structure functions g1 and g2 can be expressed in terms of the
(generalized) GDH integrals, which therefore opens a new connection with the currently
intensive studies of meson photo- and electroproduction since the total (virtual)
photoabsorption reaction comprises several inelastic channels involving meson productions.
GDH sum rule on the proton

The sum rule relates the anomalous magnetic moment of the proton µ p to the difference of
its polarized total photoabsorption cross sections,
∞
m 2p dν
κ 2p = ∫ [σ 3 / 2 (ν ) − σ1/ 2 (ν )]
2
4π α thr
ν
ν
where σ 3 / 2 (ν ) and σ1 / 2 (ν ) indicate the cross sections for the possible combinations of spins
of the proton (1/2) and the photon (1), ν thr the photoproduction threshold lab energy,
α = e 2 / 4π = 1 / 137 the fine-structure constant, and mN the nucleon mass. For the sake of
comparison, however, it is more convenient to define the GDH integral as
∞
dν
I GDH = ∫ [σ1/ 2 (ν ) − σ 3 / 2 (ν )]
ν
ν thr
p
With this definition, the GDH sum rule on the proton yields I GDH = −204.5 µb . Besides that
we can also calculate the corresponding contribution the forward spin polarizability of the
proton,

∞
1 dν
γ0 = 2 ∫ [σ1/ 2 (ν ) − σ 3 / 2 (ν )]
4π thr ν3
ν
and its longitudinal-transverse polarizability
∞
1 dν ⎡ν ⎤
δ0 = −
2π 2 ∫ lim ⎢ σ TL' (ν , Q 2 )⎥
3
thr ν Q → 0 ⎣
2 Q ⎦
ν
For the extension of the GDH sum rule to finite Q2 there exist several versions. Here we will
only use the forms which do not contain the longitudinal-transverse terms, thus provides the
simplest generalization of the sum rule. Moreover, this choice seems to be the natural choice
in terms of the quark structure functions g1 and g2. Within this choice the three possible forms
read
∫ [g1( x) − γ ]
∞ x0
m 2p dν 2m 2p
∫ (1 − x)[σ1/ 2 (ν ) − σ 3 / 2 (ν )] ν
2 2
I A (Q ) = 2
= 2
g 2 ( x) dx
8π α thr Q
ν 0
[g ( x) − γ ]
∞ x0
m 2p 2m 2p
I B (Q 2 ) = ∫
(1 − x)
[σ1/ 2 (ν ) − σ 3 / 2 (ν )] dν = ∫
1
1
2
g 2 ( x) dx
2
8π α 1+ γ 2 ν Q 2
1+ γ 2
ν thr 0
∫ 1 − x [g1( x) − γ ]
∞ x0
m 2p dν 2m 2p 1
∫ [σ1/ 2 (ν ) − σ 3 / 2 (ν )] ν
2 2
I C (Q ) = 2
= 2
g 2 ( x) dx
8π α thr Q
ν 0
where γ = Q /ν .
Results
Figure 1 compares the predictions of two Kaon-Maid models used in this calculation with
experimental data. Obviously, the model with missing resonance can nicely describe the
SAPHIR data. The numerical result for the GDH integral is given in Table 1, where we have
performed the integrations up to ν = 2.2 GeV. The present calculation with Model 1 is
consistent to our previous work, while the refined result from Model 1 shows a smaller value
of 2.93. Note that these contributions are positive, since the sign of σTT is in general negative,
thus decreasing the absolute value of the total IGDH if combined with contributions from
single-pion, double-pion, and η photoproduction. If we replace the estimated 4 µb
contribution in the previous work with this value, the total contributions are then shifted by 1
to the value of −201 ± 10 µb, thus still consistent with the sum rule within the error-bar.
Figure 1. Total cross-sections as a function of the photon laboratory energy ν. Dashed curves represent the results
from a model without the missing resonance D13(1895) (Model 1), while solid curves are obtained after including
these resonances in the model (KAON-MAID, Model 2). Open circles correspond to the CLAS data (Bradford et
al., 2006), solid squares are due to the new SAPHIR data (Glander et al., 2004).

Table 1. Contributions of the three kaon reaction channels to the GDH sum rule for the proton in µb. For
comparison, the GDH sum rule yields the value of −204.
Model + + 0 0 + Total
K Λ K Σ K Σ
Model 1 1.65 1.74 0.06 3.45
Model 2 1.25 1.38 0.30 2.93
Figure 2. Contributions of the kaon hyperon final states to the GDH integrals for the proton IA (solid lines), IB
(dashed lines), and IC (dotted lines).
The contributions of kaon–hyperon final states to the generalized GDH integrals for the
proton IA, IB, and IC predicted by Model 1 and Model 2 are shown in Fig. 2. Since the
integrands consist only of σTT’, the behavior of this cross-section is clearly reflected in the
integrals. From this figure we may conclude that the contributions from kaon–hyperon final
states are quite small compared to the case of pion, and therefore will not significantly affect
the result and conclusion given by the previous work (e.g. increasing the positive part of the
total integral by about 1% at most).
In the case of the spin and longitudinal-transverse polarizabilities, contributions from kaon
channels are found to be also small.
Keywords
Electromagnetic reactions, kaon, hyperon, Gerasimov-Drell-Hearn sum rule.
References
Bradford R, et al. (2006) Differential cross sections for γ + p → K + + Y for Λ and Σ0 hyperons. Physical Review
C 73, 035202.
Drell SD, Hearn AC (1966) Exact Sum Rule For Nucleon Magnetic Moments. Physical Review Letters 16, 908-
911.
Gerasimov S.B. (1966) A Sum Rule For Magnetic Moments And The Damping Of The Nucleon Magnetic
Moment In Nuclei. Soviet Journal of Nuclear Physics 2, 430-433.
Glander K.H., et al. (2004) Measurement of γ + p → K + + Λ and γ + p → K + + Σ 0 at photon energies up to 2.6
GeV. European Physics Journal A 19, 251-273.

Low-density instability of multicomponent matter with trapped

neutrinos
Staff : T. Mart1*, A. Sulaksono1
Student :
Email Contact : tmart@fisika.ui.ac.id, anto@fisika.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : T. Mart and A. Sulaksono (2008) Physical Review C 78, 025808
1
Introduction
At low densities both the relativistic and the non-relativistic mean-field models predict a
liquid-gas phase transition region for nuclear matter leading, for dense star matter, to a non-
homogeneous phase commonly called the pasta phase, which is formed by a competition
between the long-range Coulomb repulsion and the short-range nuclear attraction. This
transition has substantial consequences on the properties of stellar matter and neutrino
transport. Considerable efforts have recently been devoted to comprehending the uniform
ground-state stability of multi-component systems consisting of electrons, neutrinos, protons,
and neutrons as a good approximation of this transition, not only in the zero-temperature
approximation but also for finite temperature (Mart and Sulaksono, 2006). It is obvious that to
understand the physics inside non-homogeneous (unstable) regions such as the mechanism of
nuclear creation with slab-like or rodlike shape, we have to go beyond the mean-field
approximation. Attempts in this direction are discussed in Napolitani et al. (2007). Moreover,
in collapsing supernova cores and at sub-nuclear densities, the nuclear shape transition from
spherical to other exotic shapes has significant effects on the neutrino mean free path.
However, how these effects modify the neutrino mean free path is not yet fully understood.
The RMF models

To describe multicomponent matter, we use the Lagrangian density
L = LN + LM + LHP + LL (1)
where the first three terms describe the nucleons in the mean-field level and the last term
indicates a free Lagrangian for leptons. The first term is the Lagrangian for nucleons
interacting with each other via meson exchanges. The second term is the Lagrangian for
mesons, containing also their nonlinear self-coupling information. The third term is added to
accommodate the Horowitz-Piekarewicz isovector nonlinear term (Horowitz and Piekarewicz,
2001). In this study we investigate two RMF models, namely, the G2 parameter set of
Furnstahl, Serot and Tang (1996) (also known as the ERMF model) and the Z271 parameter
set of Horowitz and Piekarewicz (2001). The effective Lagrangian density of the Furnstahl-
Serot-Tang model has been constructed to fulfill the symmetries of quantum chromodynamics
and is expanded in powers of the fields and their derivatives up to order ν = 4.
The longitudinal dielectric function
The longitudinal dielectric function can be written as
ε L (q, q0 ) = det[1 − DL (q )Π L (q, q0 )] (2)
The uniform ground state system becomes unstable to small-amplitude density fluctuations
with perturbation momentum q when ε L (q, q0 = 0) = ε L ≤ 0 . Note that in Eq. (2) q0 is the
r
time-component of the four-momentum qµ and q =| q | . The critical density ρc is the largest
density for which the above condition has a solution. For matter consisting of protons,
neutrons, and electrons, the longitudinal meson propagator is given by

⎛ dg 0 − dg 0 ⎞
⎜ ⎟
+ −
⎜ 0 − ds d svρ d svρ⎟
DL = ⎜ + − ⎟ (3)
⎜ − dg d svρ d33 d vρ ⎟
⎜ 0 −
d sv d v−ρ d 44 ⎟⎠
⎝ ρ
In this form, mixing propagators between isoscalar-scalar and isoscalarvector (dsv), isoscalar-
vector and isovector-vector (dvρ), isoscalar-scalar and isovector-vector (dsρ) are present due to
the nonlinear mixing terms in the model, in addition to the standard photon, omega, sigma
and rho propagators (dg, dv, ds and dρ).
Results
In Fig. 1 we show the effect of the electron absence (indicated by “−e” in the figure) on the
onset of instability by switching off the electron contribution in the case of matter without
neutrino trapping using the G2 parameter set, with and without a Coulomb contribution. Note
that the latter is indicated with “−Coulomb” in the figure. The effect of the electron presence
on the size of the instability region is found to be negligible in both cases. This is because the
number of electrons is too small in matter without neutrino trapping and, therefore, the effect
of the attractive Coulomb interaction generated by electrons and protons is too weak to
produce a visible impact on every point at the onset of instability. Such behavior is observed
even in the limit of q close to zero (see Fig. 2). However, the repulsive Coulomb interaction
from the presence of protons, even in very small number, enlarges moderately the stability
region of this matter in the range of 0.05 ≤ ρ / ρ 0 ≤ 0.4 , which is clearly shown in Fig. 2.
Furthermore, Fig. 1 emphasizes and shows the important role of the Coulomb interaction in
stabilizing matter without NT for almost zero perturbation.
Figure 1. Onset of the instability of neutrinoless matter obtained by using the Furnstahl-Serot-Tang model with and
without (symbolized by −) Coulomb interaction and electrons contributions. Note that the solid (red) and dash-
dotted (blue) curves [as well as the dashed (green) and dotted (black) ones] are coincident.

Figure 2. Longitudinal dielectric function for matter without neutrino trapping obtained by using the Furnstahl-
Serot-Tang model with and without (symbolized by −) Coulomb interaction as well as electron contributions. Note
that the dashed (green) and dotted (black) curves are coincident. All curves have been calculated by using q = 0.01
fm−1.
Keywords
Neutrino interactions, neutrino scattering, neutron stars.
References
Furnstahl R. J., Serot B. D, and Tang H. B. (1997) A chiral effective Lagrangian for nuclei. Nuclear Physics A
615, 441-482.
Horowitz C. J. and Piekarewicz J. (2001) Neutron star structure and the neutron radius of Pb-208. Physical Review
Letters 86, 5647.
Mart T. and Sulaksono A. (2006) Low densities instability of relativistic mean field models. Physical Review C 74,
045806.
Napolitani P., Chomaz Ph., Gulminelli F., and Hasnaoui K. H. O (2007) Ising Analogue to compact-star matter.
Physical Review Letters 98, 131102.

New constructions of A-magic graphs using labeling matrices

Staff : K.A. Sugeng1*, M.Miller2
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : kikiariyanti@yahoo.com; m.miller@ballarat.edu.au
Disseminated at : K.A. Sugeng and M.Miller. (2008) New constructions of A-magic
graphs using labelling matrices. JCMCC65, 147-151
1
2
School of Information Technology and Mathematical Sciences, University of Ballarat, VIC 3353, Australia
*corresponding author
Introduction
Let G = (V , E ) be a simple graph. For an arbitrary Abelian group A , a mapping
f : E → A* , with A* = A − {0} , is called a labeling of G . This labeling induces a mapping
f * : V → A * , defined as f * (v) = ∑ f (uv) , where N (v) = {u ∈ V | uv ∈ E} is a
u∈N ( v )
neighborhood of v ∈ V . Note that f (v) is also known as the weight of the vertex v . We
*
call a labeling f A -magic labeling if for every v ∈ V , f * (v) = ∑

u∈N ( v )
f (uv) = k , where k
is a constant in A . The number k is called the magic constant of G . Using this definition,
edge labels do not have to be the same.
Let f : V → A * be an A-magic labeling of G, with A an arbitrary Abelian group. Let
{v1 ,K, vn } be the set of the vertices of G. A labeling matrix of f, denoted by Af (G) = (aij ), is
a matrix in which each row and each column represents the vertices of G and the entry ij is a
⎧ f (vi v j ), if vi v j is an edge of G
label of the edge vivj . Thus aij = ⎨
⎩ 0, if vi v j is not an edge of G
In this paper we have the following results.
Theorem 1
Let G1 and G2 be A-magic graphs with labeling matrices Af and Bg, respectively. If G1 and G2
have the same magic constant k then G1 ∪ G2 is an A-magic graph.
Theorem 2
Let G1 and G2 be A-magic graphs with labeling matrix Af and Bg, respectively. If G1 and G2
have the same number of vertices and have disjoint edges then the composition of G1 and G2
is an A-magic graph.
Theorem 3
Let G1 and G2 be A-magic graphs with labeling matrix Af and Bg, respectively. If G1 and G2
have the same magic constant k then the graph G* = G1 *G2, as defined above, is an A-magic
graph.
In this paper we show three different constructions to generate new classes of graphs using
combinations of labeling matrices of known A-magic graphs. There are still more
combinations of labelings that could be obtained using labeling matrices.
Keywords
A-magic labelling, labeling matrix.
References
J. Gallian. (2005) A dynamic survey of graph labeling. The Electronic Journal of Combinatorics 9 .
S-M Lee, F. Saba, E. Salehi and H. Sun. (2002) On the V4-magic graph. Congressus Numerantium 156, 59-67.

R.M. Low and S-M Lee. (2004) On group magic eulerian graph. Journal of Combinatorial Mathematics and
Combinatorial Computing 50, 141-148.
R.M. Low and S-M Lee. (2006) On the product of group magic graphs. Australasian Journal of Combinatorics 34,
41-48.
J. Sedláˇcek. (1963) Problem 27, in Theory of Graphs and Its Applications. Proc. Symposium Smolenice, 163-167.
W.C. Shie and R.M. Low. Group magicness of complete n-partite graphs, preprint.
K.A. Sugeng and M. Miller. (2005) Relationships between adjacency matrices and super (a, d)-edge-antimagic
total graphs. J. Combin. Math. Combin. Comput.55, 71-82.
W.D. Wallis. (2001) Magic Graphs. Birkhäuser.

On consecutive edge magic total labeling of graphs

Staff : K.A. Sugeng1*, M. Miller2
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : kikiariyanti@yahoo.com; m.miller@ballarat.edu.au
Disseminated at : K.A. Sugeng and M.Miller. (2008) On consecutive edge magic total
labeling of graphs. Journal of Discrete Algorithms 6, 59-65
1
2
School of Information Technology and Mathematical Sciences, University of Ballarat, VIC 3353, Australia
Introduction
Let G = (V ,E) be a finite (non-empty) graph, where V and E are the sets of vertices and edges
of G. An edge magic total labeling is a bijection α from V ∪ E to the integers 1, 2, . . . , n+e,
with the property that for every xy ∈ E , α ( x) + α ( y ) + α ( xy ) = k , for some constant k.
Such a labeling is called an a-vertex consecutive edge magic total labeling if
α (V ) = {a + 1,K, a + n} and a b-edge consecutive edge magic total if
α ( E ) = {b + 1, b + 2,K, b + e} .
Sedláˇcek [2] introduced magic labeling of graphs in 1963, and since then there have been
many results in magic labeling, especially in edge magic labeling. For new results in graph
labeling see [1].
In this paper we introduce consecutive edge magic labeling and studied some properties of
such labelings.
Define M = e +n. Let γ :V ∪E→1, 2, . . . , M be a super edge magic labeling for a graph G.
Define the labeling γ’ :V ∪ E→1, 2, . . . , M as follows.
γ ‘(x) =M +1 − γ (x), x ∈ V,
γ’(xy) =M +1 − γ (xy), xy ∈ E.
Then γ’ is called the dual of γ. From [6] we know that the dual of an edge magic labeling for a
graph G is also an edge magic labeling.
Let V (G) = {x1 , x2 , K, xn } be the set of vertices in G with labels in {1, 2, . . . , n + e}. A
symmetric matrix A = (aij ) , i, j = 1, . . . , n, is called an adjacency matrix of G if
aij = 1 if there is an edge between xi and xj ,
0 if there is no edge between xi and xj .
A bijection α :V (G)→{1, 2, . . . , n} is called an (a, d)-edge-antimagic vertex (EAV) labeling
of G = G(V,E) if the set of the edge-weights of all edges in G is {a, a + d, . . . , a + (e − 1)d},
where a > 0 and d ≥ 0 are two fixed integers. Note that a graph that has EAV labeling can be
represented by a special adjacency matrix. If G is an EAV graph then the rows and columns
of A can be labeled by 1, 2, . . . , n. A is symmetric and every skew-diagonal (diagonal of A
which is traversed in the “northeast” direction) line of matrix A has at most two “1” elements.
The set {α(x) + α(y): x,y ∈ V (G)} generates a sequence of integers of difference d. Each entry
“1” in a skew-diagonal line has a one-to-one correspondence to an element of the edge-weight
set {α(x)+α(y): x,y ∈ V (G)}.
If d = 1 then the non-zero off diagonal lines form a band of consecutive integers. In this
paper, EAV labeling always refers to an (a, 1)-EAV labeling.
Let G be an a-vertex consecutive edge magic graph and β be an a-vertex consecutive edge
magic labeling of G.
Then β(x) ∈ {a+1, a+2, . . . , a+n}, for every x ∈ V (G), 0 ≤ a ≤ e. If a = 0 then the labeling is
called a super edge magic labeling. In this paper we consider a-vertex consecutive edge magic
labeling for 1≤ a ≤ n − 1. For further results, see [1,6].

In this paper we have the following results.

Theorem 1. The dual of an a-vertex consecutive edge magic labeling for a graph G is an
(e−a)-vertex consecutive edge magic labeling.
The following theorem characterises the graphs that can have a-vertex consecutive edge
magic labeling.
Theorem 2. If G has an a-vertex consecutive edge magic labeling, a ≠ 0 and a ≠ e, then G is
a disconnected graph.
Furthermore, we can prove that G cannot be a union of any three trees.
Theorem 3. If a ≠ 0 and a ≠ e, and G has an a-vertex consecutive edge magic labeling β then
G cannot be the union of three trees T1 , T2 and T3 , where |V (Ti )| ≥ 2, i = 1, 2, 3.
Observation 5. Let G be an a-vertex consecutive edge magic graph, a ≠ 0 and a ≠ e. If G
consists of
• two trees then the number of isolated vertices is one;
• one tree and one unicyclic graph then the number of isolated vertices is two;
• two unicyclic graphs then the number of isolated vertices is three;
• otherwise the number of isolated vertices is at least three.
Theorem 6. There is an a-vertex consecutive edge magic graph for every a and n.
Theorem 7. Every union of r stars with r − 1 isolated vertices has an s-vertex consecutive
edge magic labeling, where s = min{|V (Si )|, . . . , |V (Sr )|}
Let G be a b-edge consecutive edge magic graph and let γ be a b-edge consecutive edge magic
labeling of G.
Then γ (xy) ∈ {b + 1, b + 2, . . . , b + e}. The super edge magic labeling is a special case of b-
edge consecutive edge magic labeling, when b = n. Since the vertex labels in a b-edge
consecutive edge magic labeling, 1 ≤ b ≤ n − 1, do not form a set of consecutive integers, it
follows that the row/column of the adjacency matrix of b-edge consecutive edge magic graph
are labeled according to the vertex labels of G, not consecutively as 1, 2, . . . , n.
Theorem 8. Every b-edge consecutive edge magic graph has edge antimagic vertex labeling.
Considering the dual labeling property, if a graph G has a b-edge consecutive edge magic
labeling, a similar result in the dual also holds.
Theorem 9. The dual of a b-edge consecutive edge magic labeling for a graph G is an (n −
b)-edge consecutive edge magic labeling.
A caterpillar is a graph derived from a path by hanging any number of leaves from the
vertices of the path. The caterpillar can be considered as a sequence of stars S1∪ S2 ∪ ··· ∪ Sr
, where each Si is a star with centre ci and ni leaves, i = 1, 2, . . . , r, and the leaves of Si
include ci −1 and ci +1 , i = 2, . . . , r −1.
Theorem 10. Every caterpillar has a b-edge consecutive edge magic graph for every b.
Theorem 11. If a connected graph G has a b-edge consecutive edge magic labeling, where
b ∈ {1, 2,K, n − 1} , then G is a tree.
Corollary 12. A double star S n1 ,n2 has a b-edge consecutive edge magic labeling for some
b ∈ {1, 2,K , n} and
• if b = 1 then S n1 ,n2 is a star;
• if b >1 then b = n2 + 1
The previous result can be generalised as follows.
Theorem 13. Every caterpillar has a b-edge consecutive edge magic labeling, where
⎧ ⎡ r + 1⎤
⎪ ⎢ 2 ⎥ + ∑ i odd ni − 2 if i is odd
⎪⎢ ⎥
⎨
⎪⎡ r + 1⎤ +
⎪⎩ ⎢⎢ 2 ⎥⎥ ∑ i even, i < r i
n − 2 + (nr -1) if i is even

Theorem 14. Every ∪i =1,K, r Si ∪ {x1 , K , xr −1} where Si , i = 1, . . . , r is a star

and {x1 , K , xr −1} are isolated vertices, has an r-edge consecutive edge magic.
Keywords
A-vertex consecutive edge labeling, b-edge consecutive edge labeling.
References
J.A. Gallian. (2005) A dynamic survey of graph labeling, Electronic Journal Combinatorics 9, #DS6.
J. Sedláˇcek. (1963) Problem 27, in: Theory of Graphs and its Applications. Proc. Symposium Smolenice, 163–
167.
K.A. Sugeng, M. Miller. (2005) Properties of edge consecutive magic graphs, in: Proceeding of the Sixteenth
AustralasianWorkshop on Combinatorial Algorithms 2005, Ballarat, Australia, 311–320.
K.A. Sugeng, M. Miller. Relationships between adjacency matrices and super (a, d)-edge-antimagic total graphs,
JCMCC, in press.
K.A. Sugeng, W. Xie. (2005) Construction of super edge magic total graphs. in: Proceeding of the Sixteenth
Australasian Workshop on Combinatorial Algorithms 2005, Ballarat, Australia, 303–310.
W.D. Wallis. (2001). Magic Graphs, Birkhäuser.

On implementing voice over IP on Universitas Indonesia wide area

network and Indonesian higher education network infrastructure
Staff : R.F. Sari1*, A. Yuniarto2
Student : A. Awaludin3
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : riri@ui.ac.id, adhi@cs.ui.ac.id, awaludin@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Proceedings of Asia Pacific Conference on Arts, Science,
Engineering and Technology, Solo, May 19-22 2008, ISBN 3688 88
1
2
3
Information System Development and Services, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Electronic-based learning environments (ELE) are being increasingly used at all levels of the
educational system at the Universitas Indonesia. With the improvement of infrastructure and
integrated applications to manage academic and administrative matters of the Universitas
Indonesia, the whole stakeholders of the University has increasingly participating to use the
facilities to be member of the open sourcing and informing society in the world. The use of
the state of the art resources such as Global Distance Learning Network, Teleconference
facility, Voice over IP, computer and other pervasive equipment such as laptop, PDA, and
smartphone’s have been witnessed at the Universitas Indonesia. It has been used to support
the university stakeholder’s continuous learning effort using global resources available
through the social networking environment using the Internet.
Information and Communication Technology (ICT) infrastructure is the backbone of the
University’s data, voice, video and all traffic of communications. The advancement of the
infrastructure will affect the development of the university. In order to provide a world class
learning environment, the infrastructure provided must be able to support ‘any time, any
place’ learning paradigm in addition to the conventional brick and chalk method.
Indonesia higher education network (Inherent) was started in the year 2006 to facilitate the
interconnection, by providing the Intranet for higher education institution in Indonesia. Each
university can build their own facility and then later on share their achievement to other
universities. This paper focuses on the idea of implementing an integrated ICT infrastructure
development to support the use of electronic numbering for the members of Inherent. We also
provide the design of the infrastructure and step by step methods to enable the provision of a
unique number for Inherent Voice over IP (VoIP) service.
Implementation
We propose the use of ENUM solution with private ENUM root domain e164.inherent-
dikti.net for the integration of VoIP service between INHERENT members. At least 6
universities is ready to joint this activity (VoIP integration through ENUM), i.e. Universitas
Indonesia (UI), Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB), Gadjah Mada University (UGM),
Bogor Institute of Agriculture (IPB), Surabaya Institute of Technology (ITS), Brawijaya
University (UB).
Result
This paper examines the phenomenon of the introduction of the state of the art learning
environment at UI and then spread out to other Universities in Indonesia, i.e VoIP. We
describe the design of implementing University and Inter-University wide Voice over IP
infrastructure through Indonesia’s Higher Education Research Network (Inherent), as an
effort to build up a Next Generation Network application and services. It can be expected that

the socialization and wider deployment of the VoIP system among the Inherent administrator
and users will lead to a more efficient and cheap way of communication through Internet
Protocol Services.

Figure 1. INHERENT Topology 2008 [Telkom08]

Figure 2. VoIP Network Topology Universitas Indonesia

Figure 3. VoIP interconnection through ENUM
Conclusion
The ability to expand the network and deploy new applications within the existing
infrastructure is the expectation of all universities in order to provide a strong education
system. The integration of VoIP network becomes a model for the service-integration
between universities in the INHERENT network. Scalability and global accessibility
becomes the main issue in the integration of VoIP network infrastructure in INHERENT. One
solution to address the issu is using ENUM. ENUM solution implements the integration of
VoIP network and services between universities of INHERENT members.
Further activity required to answer and analyze the following issues:
• The security of VoIP service infrastructure.
• IM interconnection based on SIP and jabber, and its global interconnectivity.
• Allocation and implementation of public enum ( 2.6.e164.arpa) from Departement of
Post and Telecommunication, to answer the needs of global accessibility.
Keywords
DNS, electronic based learning environment, ENUM, ITAD, Next Generation Network,
Voice over IP.

References
Paul Albitz, Cricket Liu, DNS and BIND 5th Edition, OReilly, May 2006.
P. Faltstrom, The E.164 to Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI) Dynamic Delegation Discovery System (DDDS)
Application (ENUM), April 2004, http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3761, last accessed March 2008.
Theodore Wallingford, Switching to VoIP, OReilly, June 2005.
Juha Heinanen,Otmar Lendl,Enum Module,OpenSER Module,2003,http://
www.openser.org/docs/modules/stable/enum.html (1 of 6), last accessed 2 January 2008
Huawei Tech, NGN System Overview, Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd, 2006.
M. Mealling, The Naming Authority Pointer (NAPTR) DNS Resource Record, September 2000,
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2915, last accessed March 2008.
P. Mockapetris, DOMAIN NAMES - IMPLEMENTATION AND SPECIFICATION, November 1987,
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1035.txt, last accessed March 2008.
P. Mockapetris, DOMAIN NAMES - CONCEPTS AND FACILITIES, November 1987,
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1034.txt, last accessed March 2008
J. Rosenberg, Telephony Routing over IP (TRIP), January 2002, http://www. ietf.org/rfc/rfc3219.txt , last
accessed March 2008.
Ben Teitelbaum, John Todd ,The Freenum/ISN Cookbook, 2007-10-25, http:// www.freenum.org/ISN
Cookbook.htm, last accessed 2 August 2008.
PT. Telekomunikasi Indonesia, Tbk., Paparan Skenario INHERENT 2006-2008, PT. Telekomunikasi Indonesia,
Tbk., March 2008.

Optimization of RS codec synthesis using selected variants of VHDL-

based GF arithmetic operators
Staff : Petrus Mursanto1, Bobby A.A. Nazief2
Studen : --
Sponsor : European Union Project VN/Asia-Link/001 (79754)
Email Contact : santo@cs.ui.ac.id, nazief@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Petrus Mursanto and Bobby A.A. Nazief (2008) Optimization of
Galois-Field Based Applications using Selected Variants of
Arithmetic Operators, Proceedings International Conference on
Advanced Computational Intelligence and Its Applications
(ICACIA), pp.98-103 (ISBN: 978-979-98352-5-3)
1
Computer Network and Architecture Lab., Faculty of Computer Science, Univ of Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
2
Grid Computing Lab., Faculty of Computer Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
Introduction
The advance of digital technology has contributed much toward modern communication
system. Two important aspects of information exchange are security and data correctness, in
which Galois Field (GF) concept plays an important role, i.e. in cryptography [9][14] and
error correction codes (ECC) [13][16]. Performance of applications in these two fields is
determined by the efficiency of GF arithmetic operators involved in the system [5]. There has
been many research works to improve GF operators’ efficiency, i.e. multiplication [15],
division [4] and inversion [17]. In fact, GF operators are not performing their functions
individually or independently, they are parts of a functional integration at the system level
instead. Is operator efficiency beneficial to the application level performance?
This paper reports an experimental result of implementing Reed Solomon Encoder and
Decoder (Codec) RS(15,11) 4-bit based on six variants of GF operator. The purpose of the
experiment is to obtain an RS Codec configuration whose throughput is the most optimum.
The implementation was achieved using VHDL by means of two synthesis tools: the Xilinx
ISE 8.2i and the Altium ProChip Designer.
Previous research
Similar to the ordinary algebra, GF algebra has a number of arithmetic operations, such as:
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, inversion, square and square root. In digital
circuit, GF addition and subtraction are simply implemented by exclusive-OR logic operation.
GF arithmetic operators are characterized by:
1. operation types: multiplication, division, inversion, square or square root
2. processing types: serial or parallel
3. representation basis: standard/polynomial (PB), normal (NB) or dual (DB)
The advance of digital technology has shifted performance measurement mechanism
from the running time of software algorithm [1] to VLSI complexity, i.e. the number of
components and their total delay [15]. GF arithmetic operators used in this experiment are the
best in term of speed as investigated in previous research. Specifically for RS Codec
implementation, the encoder algorithm refers to the circuit in [6], decoder’s Syndrome
Calculator (SC) in [10], Key Equation Solver (KES) in [8], Error Evaluator (EE) in [11] and
Error Corrector (EC) in [16].
Motivation
Previous research focused on efficiency improvement of GF operators. However, literatures
on GF-based implementation at system level are merely experience sharing without any

analysis on the consequences of GF operator variants involved in the system. This paper
comes up with the following research questions. What level of optimization can be achieved
at application system level? Is performance improvement gained at operator level can be
obtained linearly at the application level? Will an application take benefit by employing all
best variant of GF operators? Preliminary hypothesis argues that combining all operators,
each of which is the most efficient variant, is not a simple mechanistic process. Obtaining
synergic efficiency at system level requires careful considerations on several factors such as:
basis representation conversion, generator polynomial selection as well as the architecture
selection, interconnection between GF operators and dependency of sequential operator
processes within the system.
Methodology
A set of experiments was designed to examine whether the best variants of GF operator can
be combined to construct the most efficient application. The best variant is the one having
fastest process in its class. As a case study, encoder and decoder for RS(15,11) 4-bit were
developed. GF operators used in the experiment were implemented as the most efficient for
each combination of two parameters: representation basis (Polynomial, Normal or Dual), and
processing structure (parallel or serial).
Table 1. GF operator variants
Variant Structure Basis
1 Parallel
Polynomial
2 Serial
3 Parallel
Normal
4 Serial
5 Parallel
Dual
6 Serial
The RS Codec is implemented into six versions, each of which was constructed based on the
six variants shown in Table 1. They were implemented using structural VHDL and
synthesized using Xilinx ISE 8.2i and Altium ProChip Designer. The synthesis process results
in maximum combinational path or total delay that defines the maximum frequency possibly
supplied to the system. Hence, the system throughput can be calculated based on the data
capacity proceeded per time unit, expressed in Mega Byte per second (MBps). Throughput is
then used as an indicator of the system performance. An optimal system is defined as the one
having biggest throughput among the six versions of the system.
Results
Practically the overall RS Decoder performance requires a uniform representation basis for
the whole symbols. It has been learnt that the speed of decoding process is defined by
Syndrome Calculator as the first module in the sequence of processes. To combine four
modules (SC, KES, EE, and EC) into one integrated system, cycle rate must conform to the
slowest component. It is shown that both synthesis tools produce the best RS Decoder, i.e. the
one using serial operation and GF element representation in dual basis although the best
multiplier is in parallel PB.
Experiment results show that employing the best operators does not always produce the most
efficient system. This phenomenon is shown consistently by Xilinx and Altium synthesis
tools. Simple and common logic saying that parallel process is faster than serial is not always
correct. This is caused by the fact that the synthesis tools do some improvement or limited
optimization to the VHDL structural design.
Multiplication turns to be dominant in RS Codec. Examination on the results shows that
multiplication with fixed bit operand is optimized by removing unnecessary components in
the system [7]. For specific configuration of RS Codes, multiplications have several
parameters fixed during the system lifecycle. Hence the implementation into FPGA boards
decreases significantly the delay so that processing rate can be faster.
It is examined that optimization was not applied to parallel multiplications although they also
have constant operands. It is due to the fact that the tools optimize constant bit only, whereas

parallel multiplier signal is implemented as an m-bit bus. Superiority of DB multiplier over

PB and NB is the delivery of product in fully serial. DB serial multiplier delivers the product
bit by bit as the binary of operand enters from MSB to LSB. Therefore, variant 6 saves 1
cycle compared to variant 2 and 4 that delivering the product after the whole cycle for m-bit
completed. Therefore, variant 6-based system proceeds addition serially as the product is
delivered from index m-1 to 0. In general, this finding supports several statements in the
literature that multiplication with constant operand can be more efficient [2]. It was examined
as well that optimization does not apply to serial NB multiplier. In serial NB multiplication,
the values of both operands change dynamically during the lifecycle of the system due to the
rotation of internal registers [7].
Conclusion
This paper reports that an optimal performance of RS Codec does not always involve the best
variant or the most efficient GF operators. System performance is also influenced by the
operator composition and distribution, interaction between them and types of internal process
within the system. Superiority of serial based system compared to parallel one is contributed
by the synthesis tool that optimizes serial operators whose operands are constant.
It is interesting to examine further the consistency of this optimization in other GF based
applications, such as cryptography. Explorative experiments are required for real symbol
width, m = 8 bit such as the one used by NASA RS(255,223) 8-bit [12] and Rijndael AES
with cipher-key 8-bit [3]. It is hypothetically predicted that higher performance ratio would be
obtained by serial variants over the parallel ones. It is because of additional combinational
path in parallel operators that results in bigger delays. Meanwhile, serial operators requires
only several additional cycles with constant minimum periods.
Keywords
Error Correction Codes, FPGA synthesis, Reed Solomon, VHDL.
References
[1] Bartee, T. and Schneider, D. (1963) Information and Computers 6, 79 – 98.
[2] Berlekamp, E. (1982) Bit-Serial Reed-Solomon Encoders, IEEE Trans. Information Theory 28, 869 – 874.
[3] Daemen, J. and Rijmen, V. (2001) The Advanced Encription Standard, Dr.Dobb’s Journal 26, 137–139.
[4] Hasan, M., Wang, M., and Bhargava, V. (1992) A Modified Massey-Omura Parallel Multiplier for a Class of
Finite Fields, IEEE Trans. Computers 41 (8) 972–980.
[5] Lin, S. and Costello, D. J. (1983) Error Control Coding, Prentice Hall.
[6]Mursanto, P. (2006) Generic Reed Solomon Encoder, Jurnal Makara Seri Sains 10 (2) 58-62.
[7]Mursanto, P. (2007) Optimization of GF Applications using Selected Variants of Arithmetic Operators,
Dissertation Fasilkom UI.
[8] Sarwate, D. and Shanbhag, N. (2001) High-Speed Architectures for RS Decoders, IEEE Trans. VLSI Systems 9
(5) 641–655.
[9] Schneier, B. (1993) Applied Chryptography, Wiley & Sons.
[10]Schneider, J. (1998) Forward Error Correction (FEC) in ATM-Netzwerken, Diplomarbeit, TU Dresden.
[11]Shayan Y.R., Le-Ngoc T., Bhargava V.K. (1990) IEEE Journal on Selectd Areas in Comm 8 (8) 1535-1542.
[12] Sklar, B. (2003) Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2nd ed.
[13] Sweeney, P. (2002) Error Control Coding from Theory to Practice, John Wiley & Sons.
[14] Tilborg, H.v. (1988) An Introduction to Cryptology, Kluwer Academic Publishers.
[15] Wang, C., Truong, T., Shao, H., Deutsch, L., Omura, J., and Reed, I. (1985) VLSI Architectures for
Computing Multiplications and Inverses in GF(2m), IEEE Trans. Computers 34 (8) 709–717.
[16]Wicker, S.B. (1995) Error Control Systems for Digital Communication and Storage, Prentice Hall.
[17]Zhou, T., Wu, X., Bai, G., and Chen, H. 4 (2002) Fast GF(p) Modular Inversion Algorithm Suitable for VLSI
Implementation, Electronics Letters 38 (14) 706–707.

Performance evaluation of IP based multimedia services in UMTS

Staff : R.F. Sari1*
Student : P.D. Purnamasari1, F. Zaini1, A. D. Gultom1
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : riri@ui.ac.id, prima@ee.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Informatica Economica, Vol. XII/No. 3 (47)/2008, Romania, ISSN
1842- 8088
1
Introduction
This paper presents our work in the performance evaluation of UMTS network based on
simulation. Enhanced UMTS Radio Access Network Extensions for NS-2 (EURANE)
developed by SEACORN has brought us to the higher phase of UMTS simulation in third
generation wireless telecommunication system. Wireless 3G is designed to be able to deliver
various kind of multimedia package through an IP network for the purpose of easier
interconnection with fixed network with various existing multimedia services. Multimedia
services with their bandwidth consumption characteristics are able to be sent through a UMTS
network with the existence of High Speed Data Packet Access (HSPDA) in Release 5. Quality
of Service (QoS) is a major concern in multimedia services. This paper shows the
performance analysis of a number of multimedia services and their QoS using HSDPA in
UMTS. The experiments were based on EURANE extension for NS-2. From the simulation
conducted, we found that Unacknowledged Mode (UM) in Radio Link Control (RLC) will
perform better for QoS class number 1 (VoIP) and 2 (Video Streaming), while Acknowledged
Mode (AM) mode are more suitable for QoS class number 3 (web server) and 4 (FTP).
In this paper we simulate 12 users in 3 different environments accessing 4 multimedia data
services in an Enhanced-UMTS. This simulation is conducted using NS-2 version 2.30 and
additional patch for EURANE version 1.60 which was developed by IST-SEACORN [1, 3].
The simulation architecture of E-UMTS can be seen on Figure 1. There are 3 environments
used in this simulation: Indoor, pedestrian, and Vehicular Environment
Figure 1. Simulation architecture
Result
Throughput in AM and UM has significant differences. Throughput in AM has smooth
difference for every service class in every environment. While in UM, only services with high
priority have good enough quality, i.e. VoIP and streaming video. The possibility is that it that
was caused by no guarantee for every sent data.

Figure 2. Overall Throughput in AM Mode Figure 3. Overall Throughput in UM Mode

An interesting result shown from the number of packet graph in both AM and UM modes. In
both of that modes, video streaming service have a large number of packet compared with
other priority services. The possibility is because the number of sent packet are different,
which is 3760 for VoIP application, and 96 for video streaming application. Graph
visualization of packet loss in AM is depicted in Figure 4, while the graph of packet loss in
UM is depicted in Figure 5.
Figure 4. Number of Packet in AM Mode Figure 5. Number of Packet in UM Mode

The significant difference between delay in AM and UM mode is shown in web service and
FTP services, even in Indoor user environment, there is delay rise high enough in AM mode.
On the other side, a smooth delay available in AM mode where the delay value increase
periodically based on its priority grade. Delay visualization in AM can be seen at Figure 6,
while in UM can seen at Figure 7.
Figure 6. Delay in AM Mode Figure 7. Delay in UM Mode
Figure 8. Overall Comparison of AM and UM

Based on simulation result and analysis which have been conducted, UM operation mode is
not suitable enough to be used for web service and FTP services, because the throughput
value is near 0 and has big enough delay. On the other side UM operation mode is suitable for
VoIP and video streaming service, even if compared with AM operation mode. AM operation
mode is suitable to be used for web service and FTP services. We can conclude that UM
mode is suitable for high priority QoS while AM mode is suitable for low priority QoS in
UMTS HSDPA network.
Keywords
3G, EURANE, HSDPA, Multimedia Services, NS-2, QoS, UMTS.
References
N. Whillans (editor), Deliverable Seacorn. D3.2v2. End-to-end network model for Enhanced UMTS. Simulation of
Enhanced UMTS Access and Core Networks, ISSSTA, Sydney, 2004.
Stevan Parkvall, Eva Englund, Magnus Lundevall, Johan Torsner, “Evolving 3G Mobile Systems: Broadband and
Broadcast Services in WCDMA”, IEEE Communication Magazine, February 2006.
EURANE User Guide (Release 1.6).
Guidelines for Evaluation of Radio Transmission Technologies for IMT-2000, Recommendation ITU-R M.1225,
1997.
Dimitrios Miras. Network QoS Needs of Advanced Internet Applications. 2002.
Marco Fiore, “trace2stats AWK scripts”, http://www.tlc-networks.polito.it/fiore/.

Photo and electroproduction of the hypertriton on He-3

Staff : T. Mart1*
Student :
Disseminated at : T. Mart and B.I.S van der Ventel (2008) Physical Review C 78,
014004 [1-16]
1
Introduction
The hypertriton is a bound state consisting of a proton, a neutron, and a Λ hyperon. Interest in
the hypertriton comes mainly from the fact that it is the lightest and the most loosely bound
hypernucleus. The separation energy into a Λ and a deuteron is only 0.13 ± 0.05 MeV,
whereas the total binding energy is 2.35 MeV. Being the lightest hypernucleus, the
hypertriton is obviously the first system in which the YN potential, including the
interesting Λ−Σ conversion, can be tested in the nuclear medium. This is also supported by
the fact that neither the ΛN nor the ΣN interaction possesses sufficient strength to produce a
bound two-body system, and the available YN scattering data are still extremely poor.
Therefore the hypertriton is expected to play an important role in hypernuclear physics similar
to that of the deuteron in conventional nuclear physics. The hypertriton can be produced by
using kaon induced reaction. In this work we theoretically calculate the cross sections of the
photo- and electroproduction of the hypertriton.
Theoretical model
The process of the hypertriton electroproduction is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 1. It is
obvious from this diagram that nuclear transition matrix element in the laboratory frame can
be written as
Figure 1. Feynman diagram of the hypertriton electrorproduction from a He-3.
r r
f | J µ | i = 3 d 3 p d 3q Ψ *f ( p, q ' ) J µ Ψi ( p, q)
∫ (1)
where the integrations are taken over the three-body momentum coordinates
r r r r r
p = 12 (k 2 − k3 ) and q = k1 , while the hyperon momentum inside the hypertriton is
r r r r
q ' = k1 + 23 (k − q K ) . The factor of 3 on the right hand side comes from the antisymmetry of
the initial wave function. The transition current J µ is related to the elementary operator (see
Fig. 1) by the relation M fi = ε µ J µ . Using the standard notations for the He-3 and hypertriton
wave functions we can recast Eq. (1) to

f | Jµ |i = 6 ∑ ∑ ∑ ( LmL SmS | JmJ )( LmL SmS | J ' mJ ' )(lml 12 ms | jm j )

αα ' mm'n, mn
× (l ' ml ' 12 ms ' | j ' m j ' )(lml 12 ms | jm j )( JmJ jm j | 12 M i )( J ' mJ ' j ' m j ' | 12 M f )
(2)
n −1 / 2 − ms '
× ( 12 − ms ' 12 ms
| nmn )(−1) δ LL 'δ mL mL ' δ SS 'δ mS mS ' δ ms ms ' δT 0
3r
r r r r
× p dp d q φα ' ( p, q ' ) φα ( p, q ) Yml ' (qˆ ' )Yml (qˆ )[ j µ ]nm
∫
2
l' l n
µ n
where [ j ]m is the completely frame independent elementary operator. Hence, we can
n
construct the spin-averaged tensor
1
Wµν =
2M M
∑
f | J µ | i f | Jν | i * (3)
i f
The differential cross section can be calculated by using

dσ T α q K M H
= WT (4)
dΩ K L 2W
with WT = (W xx + W yy ) / 4π .
Results
In this work, we use the elementary operator of Kaon-Maid (Mart and Bennhold, 2000).A
comparison of the results of our model with experimental data, Dohrmann et al. (2004), is
shown in Fig. 2. It is found that off-shell effects are important in the case of
electroproduction. This fact is clearly exhibited in Fig. 2, where we can see that the “final
hyperon on-shell” assumption can nicely shift the cross section upward to reproduce the
experimental data at θc.m = 2.7◦ and 9.5◦. Obviously, this finding is in contrast to the
phenomenon observed in pion photoproduction off 3He (Tiator et al., 1980), where the
assumption that the initial nucleon is on-shell yields a better agreement with experimental
data. However, the present finding can be understood as follows: The hyperon binding energy
in the hypertriton is much weaker than the binding energy of the nucleon in 3He. Therefore,
shifting the hyperon in the final state closer to its mass shell moves the model closer to
reality. The experimental data point at θc.m. = 18.9◦ seems, however, to be very difficult to
reproduce. Although the elementary cross section at this kinematics slightly increases, the
nuclear suppression from the two nuclear wave functions is sufficiently strong to reduce the
cross sections at θc.m. > 10◦.

Figure 2. Comparison between the model predictions with different off-shell assumptions and experimental data.
At W = 4.30 GeV and W = 4.50 GeV the various off-shell assumptions yield quite different
phenomena compared to those in the case of photoproduction. In the case of photoproduction
the assumption that the final hyperon is on-shell yields the smallest cross sections, whereas
the opposite situation occurs in the case of electroproduction. Again, this behavior originates
from the longitudinal terms. It is found that, for all W of interest, the longitudinal cross
sections are larger than the transverse ones. In the former, the off-shell effects are more
profound and the assumption that the hyperon in the final state is on-shell always yields the
largest cross section. Such behavior does not show up in the transverse cross sections. In fact,
by comparing the transverse cross sections we can clearly see that the result presented here is
still consistent with that of the photoproduction. We have also found that, although the
phenomenon of the dominant longitudinal cross sections originates from the contribution of
the missing resonance D13(1895), the fact that the final-hyperon on-shell assumption always
yields the largest cross section is not affected by the omission of this resonance.
Keywords
Electromagnetic reactions, hypernuclei, hypertriton, strangeness.
References
Λ Λ +
Dohrmann F., et al. (2004) Angular distributions for 3, 4 H bound states in the 3, 4 He(e,e'K ) reaction. Physical
Review Letters 93, 242501 [1-4].
Mart T. and Bennhold C. (2000) Evidence for a missing nucleon resonance in kaon photoproduction. Physical
Review C 61, 012201.
Tiator L., Rej A. K., and Drechsel D. (1980) Fermi motion and off-shell effects in the reaction 3He(γ, π+)3H.
Nuclear Physics A 333, 343.

Ring temperature effect on propane flame lift-up

Staff : I Made Kartika Dhiputra1*, Yulianto S. Nugroho2
Student : Pratomo Setyadi3, Cokorda Prapti Mahandari4
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : dhiputra_made@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : I Made Kartika Dhiputra1, Yulianto S. Nugroho2, Pratomo
Setyadi3, Cokorda Prapti Mahandari4 (2008) Ring Temperature
Effect on Propane Flame Lift-up. e-Proceeding of ICGES 2008,
SPS-PGSS, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, 23-24 December 2008

1,2,3
Flame and Combustion Research Group, Thermodynamic Laboratory, Mechanical Engineering Department
Engineering Faculty, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Flame lift-up phenomenon initially found on the premix combustion using Bunsen burner
incorporated a ring above the tube burner. Research on this phenomenon has been done
starting on preliminary study on determining AFR for lift–up and impact of position of ring to
AFR for lift-up. Research on flame height of flame lift-up has also been done on the basis of
AFR, position of ring, inside diameter of ring and material of ring. Currently the impact of
material ring has been investigated. Two different materials on the same dimension of ring
have been applied. Eliminating the effect of flow field by setting dimension of ring and fuel
flow rate on the same value, it has been found that flame height on ring made of ceramic was
higher compare to flame height on ring made of stainless steel. AFR for lift-up was also
changes drastically. Then temperature of ring should be considered affecting the flame height.
Therefore this research will further study the ring temperature whenever lift-up appeared.
Methods
The apparatus for this study was similar to other research on propane flame lift-up. The
difference is on the addition device for measuring surface temperature of ring. Thermocouple
and infra red thermograph were used to measure temperature of the ring surface. Infrared
thermograph was directly connected to a computer so that the image can be analyzed using an
image processing software as it is shown on Figure 1.
Figure 1. Measurement of ring temperature


Datas of ring temperature were presented in comparison graphic of temperature of ring made
of stainless steel and temperature of ring made of ceramic. It shows that when lift-up,
temperature of ring made of ceramic is lower than temperature of ring made of stainless steel.
There is something very interesting, that temperature of ring made of stainless steel at 30 mm
position above burner tip is the highest of all heights. But on the contrary for temperature of
ring made of ceramic, in this position is lower of all position, especially in low burning load.
This result give a prediction that ring temperature is in the opposite way to flame length.
Based on previous study, it has been found that flame length on lift-up events for ring made
of ceramic was longer than flame length ring made of stainless steel. From AFR when lift-up
event, it seems that the raising of AFR is proportional to the raising of ring temperature. This
result is match with the previous study, that lower AFR number means lower flame
temperature, and so was the ring temperature.
But, in the same burning load, it did not show the same thing. In the previous study it was
found that AFR was defined by ring position. Closer ring position resulted in higher AFR.
Conlusions
The lift-up phenomenon is not only affected by flow field, but also the ring temperature. On
high fuel flow, ring temperature tends to rise when lift-up. Using ring made of stainless steel,
the ring temperature is higher than using ring made of ceramic when lift-up happens. Higher
ring temperature results in higher AFR, this means that on ring made of ceramics the fuel
burnt leaner than using stainless steel ring, since it need more air to burn it. For ring made of
ceramic, the heat that accepted from the reaction rate is released to burn the fuel, but this is
need to be proven in the future.
Keywords
Flame lift-up, premixed combustion, ring temperature.
Acknowledgements
This experimental research is fully supported by DRPM Universitas Indonesia under Hibah
S3 Program Contract No. 242F/DRPM-UI/N1.4/2008.
References
Cokorda P.M., I Made Kartika Dhiputra, (2007) Flame Lift-up on a Bunsen Burner; A Preliminary Study,
Proceedings of the 10th International Conference on Quality in Research (QIR) Engineering Center
Universitas Indonesia, December 2007, pp EPE-13, (ISSN:1411-1284) December 4-6, 2007.
I Made Kartika Dhiputra, Hamdan Hartono A, Cokorda Prapti Mahandari, 2008, “Perubahan Panjang Nyala Api
pada Fenomena “Flame Lift-up” Akibat Letak Ketinggian Posisi Ring ‘Flame-Hold’, Proceeding Seminar
Nasional Teknik Mesin 3,UK Petra , Surabaya, Indonesia, pp101-104.
I Made Kartika Dhiputra, Bambang Sugiarto, Amri Parlindungan Sitinjak, Cokorda Prapti Mahandari, ‘Pengaruh
Material Ring Pada Fenomena Nyala Api Lift-up’, Proceeding Seminar Nasional Teknik Mesin ITENAS
Bandung, 28 Oktober, 2008.
Rokke, Nils A, (1987), A Study of Partially Premixed Unconfined Propane Flames, Combustion and Flame 97:88-
106.
I Made Kartika Dhiputra, Cokorda Prapti Mahandari, ‘Karlovitz Number for Predicting A flame lift-up on Propane
Combustion”, Proceeding The 1st International Meeting on Advances in Thermo-Fluid 26th August 2008,
Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, Johor, Malaysia.
I Made Kartika Dhiputra et all “Flame Height of Propane the Propane Flame lift-up”, Proceeding of the 1st
International Meeting on Advanced in Thermo-Fluid, UTM Johor, Malaysia 26 August 2008.
I Made Kartika Dhiputra, et al, ”Temperature Rong pada Fenomena Flame lift-up”, Proceeding Seminar Nasional
Teknik Mesin ITENAS Bandung, 28 Oktober, 2008.
I Made Kartika Dhiputra, Eko Warsito, Cokorda Prapti Mahandari, ‘Karakteristik Temperatur Maksimum Nyala
api Pembakaran Non Difusi Gas Propana dengan Teknik Pencitraan Nyala (Infra Red Thermography)’,
Proceeding Seminar Nasional Teknik Mesin 3,UK Petra Surabaya, Indonesia hal. 89-92.

Smart health application implementation on UI Javacard based

smart card
Staff : R.F. Sari1*
Student : Donny1
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : riri@ui.ac.id, tigi6580@yahoo.co.id
Disseminated at : Asian Journal of Information Technology, 7(3): 117-125, 2008,
ISSN:1682-3915
1
Introduction
In this work, a JavaCard application called Smart Health has been developed on the
Universitas Indonesia's Smart Card. This application has two functions. First, to read medical
records from JavaCard and second, to write medical records into the JavaCard. Medical
record which will be saved in the JavaCard was split into six categories. Smart Health
application has three main parts, JavaCard applet, connector applet, and terminal module.
JavaCard applet is a program to control the reading and writing process on JavaCard. It also
controls JavaCard memory allocation. Connector applet is an interface program to connect
the JavaCard applet with the terminal module. Terminal module is a Graphical User
Interface (GUI) module. User interacts with the Smart Card application using this module.
Smart Card is a card with an embedded microprocessor inside the card. It can be programmed
to create application, perform task, and store information. Smart Card has a protocol called
Application Protocol Data Unit (APDU), used to control data communication process.
JavaCard is one of a technology in developing Smart Card. JavaCard is based on Java
programming language to create JavaCard application.
In this work, a Smart Card application called Smart Health has been developed. The type of
Smart Card used in this application is JavaCard. JavaCard is a Java based Smart Card which
uses Java programming language to create applications. Our Smart Health application works
to keep the medical information and has two main functions, i.e. to read medical records from
JavaCard and to write medical records into the JavaCard. Medical record which will be
saved in the JavaCard has been split into six categories. The application also includes
personalization of the Smart Card holder.
Smart Card has a computer chip or microprocessor inside. This card can be programmed to
do some task and store information. Card Acceptance Device (CAD), such as card reader, is
needed to connect the card and a computer. There are two types of Smart Card, namely,
Intelligent Smart Card and Memory Card. Intelligent Smart Card has the ability to read,
write, and calculate. Memory Card is used only to store information [Surendran, D., 2000].
Figure 1 shows that Physical Characteristics of a smart card.
Figure 1. Smart Card Physical Characteristics [Chen,Z., Rinaldo Di Giorgio, 1998]
JavaCard is a kind of Smart Card which is capable to run Java based program. By using Java,
creating Smart Card application will be much easier. The programmer can make the

application using Java Card Virtual Machine (JCVM) dan Application Programming
Interface (API) inside the JavaCard.[Hartanto, A.A., 2007].
The JCVM is built on top of a specific integrated circuit (IC) and native operating system
implementation. The JCVM layer hides the manufacturer's proprietary technology with a
common language and system interface. The Java Card Framework defines a set of
Application Programming Interface (API) classes for developing Java Card applications and
for providing system services to those applications [Chen, Z., 2000]. JavaCard applications
are called applets. Multiple applets can reside on one card. Each applet is identified uniquely
by its Application Identifier (AID) [Chen, Z., Ronaldo Di Giorgio, 1998].
Smart Health Application Design
Figure 2. Smart Health Terminal Module Class Diagram
The Smart Health application serves the user by providing the card holder’s personal data,
read his/hers medical records, and write his/hers medical records. From the user side, Smart
Health application is an easy to use application because the application only need few actions
from the user. The user only need to input the JavaCard into the card reader, and then the
user can read or write medical records by accessing the field at the terminal module. Smart
Health application contains two parts, reading the medical records and writing the medical
record. To perform this two tasks, the applications must pass through three steps of activity.
First, reading the personal data from applet MahasiswaUIApplet. Second, reading the
additional personal data from the applet PKMApplet. Third, writing the medical record to the
applet PKMApplet. Figure 3 shows the Sequence diagram or reading personal data.
Figure 3. Read personal data Sequence Diagram Figure 4. Read medical record Sequence

Memory usage in the JavaCard is still open for further optimization by using data
compression. To implement the data compression, an additional library is needed as a tool for
executing the data compression process. Compression is done at the connector applet, which
processes data array from the terminal module before stored in the JavaCard. In the data
retrieval process, data taken from the JavaCard by the connector will be decompressed before
being diplayed in terminal module. Figure 6 shows the comparison of the data before and
after the compression.

Figure 5. Data comparison diagram before and after compression

The performance of the Smart Healh application is tightly related with the processing speed
of the JavaCard. In medical data retrieval, the process done by the application is accessing
the personal data and medical data stored in the JavaCard’s memory. All data stored in this
memory is read one by one, then displayed by the terminal module. In this process, the
processing speed of the JavaCard will determine the overall performance of the application.
The speed of JavaCard’s microcontroller determines how fast the data retrieval process will
be. The overall performance of the Smart Health application greatly depends on JavaCard’s
processing speed.
Conclusion
The making of a JavaCard application consists of three steps, JavaCard applet programming,
connector applet programming, and building the terminal module. JavaCard applet is an
integral part in making the application and determines the continuity of the whole application
operation. Connector applet is an applet that is used to connect the JavaCard applet with the
terminal module. Our results shows that JavaCard applet programming, APDU arrangement
to process operation, and memory allocation are the keys in building a JavaCard application.
Keywords
APDU, JavaCard, medical record, memory allocation, Smart Card, Smart Health.
References
Chen,Z., Rinaldo Di Giorgio, (1998), “Understanding Java Card 2.0, Learn the inner workings of the Java Card
architecture, API, and runtime environment”.
Chen, Z., (1999), ”How to write a Java Card applet: A developer's guide, Learn the programming concepts and
major steps of creating Java Card applets”, http://www.javaworld.com/javaworld/jw-07-1999/jw-07-
javacard.html, Last accessed on December 2nd, 2007.
Chen, Z., (2000), ”Java CardTM Technology for Smart Cards: Architecture and Programmer’s Guide”. Addison
Wesley.
Di Giorgio, R., (1997), ”Smart cards: A primer Develop on the Java platform of the future”,
www.javaworld.com/jw-12-1997/jw-12-javadev.html.
Di Giorgio, R., (1998), ”Smart cards and the OpenCard Framework, Learn how to implement a card terminal and
use a standard API for interfacing to smart cards from your browser”, http://www.javaworld.com/
avaworld/jw-01-1998/jw-01-javadev.html, Last accessed on December 2nd, 2007.
Fodor, O., V. Hassler, (2005), ”JavaCard and OpenCard Framework: A Tutorial”, Information Systems Institute,
Technical University of Vienna.
Guarddin, G., et all, (2007), http://smartcard.ui.edu. Last accessed on December 2nd, 2007.
Hartanto, A.A., (2007), “Teknologi SmartCard dan Impian di Masa Depan”, http://bebas.vlsm.
Org/v11/refind1/physical/SmartCardDream.rtf, Last accessed on December 2nd.
Surendran, D., (2000), ”Applications of Smart Cards”, http://people.cs.uchicago.edu/~dinoj/smartcard/arch-1.html.
Last accessed on December 2nd, 2007.
Surendran, D., (2000), “Elements of Smart Card Architecture”. http://people.cs.uchicago.edu/~dinoj/
smartcard/Jcarch-1.html. Last accessed on December 2nd, 2007.
Surendran, D., (2000), “Java Cards”., http://people.cs.uchicago.edu/~dinoj/smartcard/JCarch1.html. Last accessed
on December 2nd, 2007.

Stimulating innovation using function models: Adding product value

Staff : M.A. Berawi1* and R.M. Woodhead2
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : M.A. Berawi & R.M. Woodhead (2008), Stimulating Innovation
Using Function Models: Adding Product Value, Value World,
Volume: 31, Number: 2, pp. 4-7, SAVE Press, USA
1
Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Technology Management, School of Technology, Oxford Brookes University, Oxford, United Kingdom
Introduction
The paper outlines the articulation of a theory of idea generation based around the act of
building falsifiable models of reality (i.e., making complex mechanisms explicit). It positions
the source of ideas not “singularly” within the human mind but within the relationship
between mind and world. In the context of innovation, a function is that which needs to be
done in order to achieve a purpose of a system that has been designed.
This paper shares insights and offers a theory of ideas that opens the way for researchers and
practitioners to explore the ability to manage invention as a capability.
The research began by combining two knowledge bases; philosophical and practical.
Identifying the various theories of functionality and followed by hypotheses testing in
practice which led to the realisation that there was a need for more reliable methods to model
functions and functionality. The development of a proposed theory was then validated in
practice. The research combined quantitative and qualitative approaches including the
development of deduced arguments using predicate calculus, a participative action research,
and three different surveys. The participative action research and grounded theory were
integrated in the investigation. For the purpose of this paper, the method of building the
arguments is only explained. Deduction logic with predicate calculus was used to develop
arguments in order to build a stable foundation for a consistent logic. This method is
employed as a logical way to construct a stable base that would strengthen confidence in
subsequent arguments and conclusions.

Identifying functions enables us to propose alternative ways to perform those functions in the
act of creation and innovation such that the purpose of modelling functions is to yield
improvement. The transformation of function-directed causal relations into manufacturing
makes it possible to bridge the gap between physical structure and intentional function in a
technological design. A particular concept type will fall into one of four mutually exclusive
categories within a particular context, as follows:
Context: Environment in which a system exists. A system is a dynamic entity. The
context becomes a transcending framework that directs attention to the way
in which we view a system. A single phenomenon can therefore be viewed
from different contexts and have different imperatives applied.
Purpose: The principal reason a project, product, or service is needed. A purpose is a
final result delivered by a system and is what we want to achieve (overall
goal-directedness). Purpose is achieved by the outcomes delivered by
processes.

Outcome: A description of the result, effect, or consequence that will occur after
carrying out a program or activity. An outcome resides between process and
purpose. An outcome is a result of a process. Some outcomes will directly
enable a purpose to be achieved. Others may not.
Function: The essential work or essential contribution a designer of a system needs to
achieve. In other words, a function is a reason why a ‘thing’ exists in a
system. Functions exist in a conceptual sense and require processes to be
conducted in order to achieve them. Functions are conceptual and so cannot
be measured. It is the process applied to the function that is measured as that
is ‘real’ not conceptual. We can select different processes to perform the
same function and this is why they are useful to innovation.
Process: A set of activities that can be recognised and measured. A process leads to
an outcome. A process is a concrete action in the real world that has been
selected to perform either a particular function or many functions. That is,
all processes should have at least one function that justifies their use.
Conclusion
The paper concludes by differentiating between “ideas as purposes”, “ideas as outcomes”,
“ideas as processes” and “ideas as functions” and the need to model complex mechanisms
stimulating a better understanding of the relationship between our thoughts and how things
work in the concrete world. Central to this is a clear understanding of essential functions that
need to be performed by processes in order to achieve selected outcomes and purpose.
Functions exist in a conceptual sense whereas processes are recognisable phenomena in the
real-world. A process is a concrete action, in the real world, and has been selected to perform
a particular function. An outcome is a result of concrete action (i.e. process leads to outcome).
Removing unnecessary processes with no essential contribution (i.e. outcomes that have no
value) will result in greater efficiency and effectiveness in a system. In the act of innovation
these relations between “Function”, ‘‘Process” and “Outcome” are designed to achieve
intended “Purpose”.
Keywords
Concept types, function model, innovation, idea generation, value.
References
Berawi, M.A. (2004), “Quality revolution: leading the innovation and competitive advantages”, International
Journal of Quality & Reliability Management, Vol. 21, No. 4, pp. 425-438.
Berawi, M.A. (2006), “Distinguishing Concept Types in Function Models during The Act of Innovation”,
Unpublished PhD Thesis, Oxford Brookes University.
Berawi, M.A. & Woodhead, R.M. (2004), “A teleological explanation of the major logic path in Classic FAST”,
Proceedings of the 44th SAVE International Annual Conference, Montreal, Quebec, Canada.
Berawi, M.A. & Woodhead, R.M. (2005a), “Application of knowledge management in production management”,
Human Factors and Ergonomics in Manufacturing, Vol. 15, No. 3, pp.249-257.
Berawi, M.A. & Woodhead, R.M. (2005b), How-Why Logic Paths and Intentionality, Value World, Volume: 28,
Number: 2, pp. 12-15.
Berawi, M.A. & Woodhead, R.M. (2005c), The If-Then Modelling Relationship of Causal Function and Their
Conditioning Effect on Intentionality, Value World, Volume: 28, Number: 2, pp. 16-20.
Birdi, K.S. (2005), “No idea? Evaluating the effectiveness of creativity training”, Journal of European Industrial
Training, Vol. 29, No. 2, pp. 102-111.
Bodewes, W. E. J. (2002), “Formalization and innovation revisited”, European Journal of Innovation
Management, Vol. 5, No.4, pp. 214-223.
Bytheway, C.W. (1965), Basic Function Determination Technique, Proceedings Fifth National Meeting, Society
of American Value Engineers, April, pp. 21-23.
Crawford, C.M. and Di Benedetto, C. A (2006), New Products Management, 8th edition, McGraw Hill.
Cummins, R. (1975), “Functional explanation”, Journal of Philosophy, Vol.72, pp. 741-764.
Cumming, B.S. (1998), “Innovation overview and future challenges”, European Journal of Innovation
Management, Vol.1, No. 1, pp.21-29.
Howells, J. (2005), The Management of Innovation & Technology, Sage Publications, London.
Kaufman, J.J. and Woodhead, R.M. (2006), Stimulating Innovation in Products and Services, Wiley, NJ.

Kroes, P.A. (1998), ‘Technological explanations: the relation between structure and function of technological
objects’, Technè, Vol. 3, no. 3.
Kroes, P. (2001), “Technical functions as dispositions: a critical assessment”, Techné, Vol. 5, no. 3, p.16
Miles, L.D. (1961), Techniques of Value Analysis and Engineering, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Millikan, R.G. (1989), “In defence of proper functions”, Philosophy of Science, Vol. 56, pp. 288–302.
Muller, A., Välikangas, L. and Merlyn, P. (2005), “Metrics for innovation: guidelines for developing a customized
suite of innovation metrics”, Strategy & Leadership, Vol.33, No. 1, pp.37-45.
Neyer, J. (1967), “Product return opportunities by function investigate technique (PROFIT)”, SAVE Proceeding,
Vol. II, pp.185-187.
Oetinger, B (2004), “From idea to innovation; making creativity real”, Journal of Business Strategy, vol. 25, No. 5,
pp. 35-41.
Preston, B. (1998), “Why is a wing like a spoon? a pluralist theory of function”, Journal of Philosophy, Vol. 95,
pp. 215-254.
Searle, J. R. (1995), The Construction of Social Reality, Penguin, New York.
Tidd, J., Bessant, J. and Pavitt, K., (2001), Managing Innovation: Integrating Technological, Market and
Organisational Change, 2nd edition, Wiley & Sons.
Trott, P.(2002), Innovation Management and New Product Development, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Ltd,
Harlow.
Twiss, B. (1992), Managing Technological Innovation, 4th Ed, Pitman, London.
Vermaas, P. E. & Houkes, W. (2003), “Ascribing functions to technical artefacts: a challenge to etiological
accounts of functions”, The British Journal for the Philosophy of Science, Vol. 54, pp. 261-289.
Woodhead, R.M. & Berawi, M.A. (2004), “An etiological explanation of WHEN logic in Classic FAST”,
Proceeding of the 44th Annual SAVE International Conference, Montreal, Quebec, Canada.
Woodhead, R.M. & Berawi, M.A. (2005), The If-Then Modelling Relationship of Causal Function and Their
Conditioning Effect on Intentionality, Value World, Volume: 28, Number: 2, pp. 16-20.
Woodhead, R.M. & Berawi, M.A. (2008), An Alternative Theory to Idea Generation, International Journal of
Management Practice, Volume 3, No. 1, pp.1-19.
Woodhead, R.M. & Downs, C.G. (2001), Value Management: Improving Capabilities, Thomas Telford, London.
Woodhead, R.M. & McCuish, J. (2002), Achieving Result: How to Create Value, Thomas Telford, London.
Woodhead, R.M., J.J. Kaufman, Berawi, M.A. (2004), “Is ‘drink beer’ a function?”, Value World, Journal of the
Society of Value Engineers, Vol. 27, No.1, pp. 11-15.
Wright, L (1973), “Functions”, Philosophical Review, Vol. 82, pp. 139-168.

Strengthening codes of professional ethics in the construction

industry
Staff : M.A. Berawi1*, H. Abdul-Rahman2
Student : K.W. Siang2
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at: M.A.Berawi, H. Abdul-Rahman & K.W. Siang (2008),
Strengthening Codes of Professional Ethics in the Construction
Industry, Building Engineer International, pp. 6-11, October 2008,
The Association of Building Engineers (ABE) Press, United
Kingdom

1
Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Indonesia
2
Faculty of Built Environment, University of Malaya, Malaysia
Introduction
Many parties claimed that construction professionals have been involved in some cases of
unethical behaviour. This paper presents an attempt to study the meaning and application of
professional ethics in construction industry. This paper describes the ethical problems and
issues in the construction industry as well as determines ways to reinforce and strengthen the
professional ethics in construction professionals.
The paper concentrates primarily on the three key professions within the construction
industry, namely architects, quantity surveyors and engineers, seeking their views and
experiences on a range of ethical issues surrounding construction industry.
A quantitative approach that comprise of a closed-ended questionnaire survey was used as the
main framework for the methodology. Two data analysis methods are applied in this survey,
namely: descriptive statistic and t-test. Descriptive statistics are used to describe the basic
features of the data in a study and one sample t-test is conducted to validate the findings.

The result of the study revealed that most of the respondents have perceived that the
construction industry is tainted by unethical behaviour and a majority of them are exposed to
unethical acts in daily practices. The major ethical issues faced in the construction industry
include inadequate safety standards, poor workmanship, and late payments. Furthermore,
insufficient legislative enforcement, fierce competition and economic downturn are the main
factors that contribute to unethical occurrences. Unethical practices can result in projects
when completed are considered unnecessary, unsuitable, overlay complex components, over-
priced or delay. Future knock-on effect include unethical conducts detriment to construction
and engineering companies by resulting wasted tender expenses, tendering uncertainty,
increased project costs, economic damage, fines, and reputational risk.
On other hand, the manager’s role model, awareness of social responsibilities, stiffer penalties
for those caught in unethical or illegal acts and enforcing codes of ethics has been agreed by
respondents as ways to reducing instances of unethical behaviour.
Conclusion
Clear codes of ethical conduct must be widely communicated to the construction industry and
implemented at all levels. Apart from that, to cope with insufficient ethical education from
professional institutions and schools, industry bodies should unite in a common initiative to

provide guidelines and advice to professionals, especially for those at the start of their career,
on how to deal with these issues.
Enforcing codes of ethics and introducing training on ethics seem effective solutions to
overcome the unethical behaviour. Thus by reducing or avoiding the instances of unethical
behaviour, the image and professionalism of the construction industry will be enhanced
greatly, locally and globally.

Keywords
Codes of conduct, construction professionals, construction industry, professional ethics.
References
Bommer, M., Grato,C., Gravander, J., and Tuttle, M., 1987. A Behaviour Model of Ethical and Unethical Decision
Making. Journal of Business Ethics, 6(0):265-280.
Bowen, P., Akintoye, A., Pearl, R. and Edwards, P.J., 2007. Ethical behaviour in the South African construction
industry, Construction Management and Economics, 25(6), 631 – 648.
De George, R.T., 1999. Business Ethics. 5th edition. Englewood Cliffs, N.J: Prentice-Hall.
Fan, L., Ho, C. and Ng, V., 2001. A study of quantity surveyors’ ethical behaviour. Construction Management and
Economics, 19(1), 19–36.
Fan, L.C.N. and Fox, P.W., 2004. Ethical issues in the construction industry. (available at
http://www.ciihk.org.hk/r&d/backend/files/papers/4.pdf) (accessed on 12 December 2007).
FMI, 2004. The 2004 - 2005 U.S. Construction Industry Training Report. US: FMI Corporation.
FMI/CMAA, 2004. Survey of Construction Industry Ethical Practices. Virginia: Construction Management
Association of America.
Jackson, B., 1999. The Perception of Experienced Construction Practitioners Regarding Ethical Transgressions in
the Construction Industry. (available at http://www.ascjournal.ascweb.org/journal/2005/no1/112-
128_Jackson.pdf) (accessed on 4 December 2007).
Kassim, A., 2001. Integration of foreign workers and illegal employment in Malaysia, in Simpson, J. (ed.),
International migration in Asia: trends and policies, Organisation for Economic Co-operation & Development
Proceedings, Japan, pp. 113-135.
Pilvang, C and Sutherland, I., 1998. Environmental project management in project design, building research
information. The International Journal of Research, Development, Demonstration and Innovation, Vol. 26,No.
2, March-April, p.113.
Ray, R.S., Hornibrook, J., Skitmore, R.M. and Zarkada, A., 1999. Ethics in tendering: a survey of Australian
opinion and practice. Construction Management and Economics, 17(2), 139–53.
Ritchey, D., 1990. “Bonded by trust: a new construction ethics committee is formed”. Arkansas Business and
Economic Review, Vol. 7 No. 7, 26 March, pp. 50.
Rossouw, D., 2002. Business ethics in Africa. 2nd edition. Cape Town: Oxford University Press.
Transparency International, 2005. Preventing Corruption on Construction Project. United Kingdom: Transparency
International.
Weller, S., 1988. The effectiveness of corporate codes of ethics. Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 7, pp. 389-95.
Vee, C. and Skitmore, R.M, 2003. Professional ethics in the construction industry. Journal of Engineering,
Construction and Architectural Management, 10(2), 117-27.

Super (a, d)-vertex antimagic total labeling on disjoint union of

regular graphs
Staff : K.A. Sugeng1*, D.R. Silaban
Student :-
Sponsor : Hibah Kompetensi Dikti 2008
Email Contact : {kiki, denny-rs}@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Presented at International Conference on Mathematics and Natural
Sciences, ITB Bandung, October 2008. Accepted at Journal of
Combinatorial Mathematics and Combinatorial Computing.
1
Introduction
In this paper we consider simple and undirected graphs G = G(V,E). The set of vertices of G
will be denoted as V = V (G) and the set of edges E = E(G), while n = |V (G)| and e = |E(G)|.
A labeling α of a graph G, basically is a mapping from elements (vertices, edges, faces) of a
graph to set of numbers. A vertex labeling (respectively, edge labeling) is a labeling which its
domain is the set of vertices (respectively, the set of edges). A total labeling is a labeling
which its domain is V (G) ∪ E(G). For a further explanation of vertex, edge and total
labelings, see [4].
The vertex-weight wt(x) of a vertex x ∈ V , under a labeling α : V ∪ E {1, 2, K, n + e} , is
α ( x) + ∑ y∈N ( x ) α ( xy ) , where N(x) is neighbour of x. An (a, d)-vertex-antimagic total (in
short, (a, d)-VAT) labeling of G is a bijection α : V ∪E {1, 2, ..., n+e} which the set of
vertex-weights of all vertices in G is {a, a + d, a + 2d, . . . , a + (n − 1)d}, where a > 0 and d ≥
0 are integers. If d = 0 then we call α a vertex-magic total (in short, VMT) labeling. An (a,
d)-vertex-antimagic total labeling α is called a super (a, d)-vertex-antimagic total (in short,
super (a, d)-VAT) labeling if α (V ) = {1, 2, K, n} and α ( E ) = {n + 1, n + 2, K, n + e} .
The concept of the vertex-magic total labeling was introduced by MacDougall et al. [8], while
Baˇca et al. [1] introduced basic properties of (a, d)-VAT labelings. Sugeng et. al [10] studied
basic properties of super (a, d)-VAT labeling and showed the construction of such labelings
for certain classes of graphs, including complete graphs, complete bipartite graphs, cycles,
paths and generalized Petersen graphs. For other results in vertex magic and (a, d)-vertex-
antimagic total labeling, see [2–4, 6, 8, 9, 11]. Most of the results on super (a, d)-VAT are on
a connected graphs. However, lately there is a direction to study more on such labeling on
disjoint union graphs.
If G is an r-regular graph, then from Equation (3), we have the following Lemma.
Lemma 4
Let G be an r-regular graph and has super (a, d)-VAT labeling, then
n(2 + 4r + r 2 ) + 2r + 2 − 2(n − 1)d
a=
4
Observation 1
Let G be a t copies of r-regular graph H. Let G has a super (a, d)-VAT labeling and |V (G)| =
n, then
(i). If d = 1 and r is odd, then tn = 2(mod 4).
(ii). If d = 2 and
• if r, t are odd then n = 0(mod 4)
• if r is odd and t is even then n = 0(mod 2) and
• if r is even then t and n are odd.
Observation 2

Let G be a t copies of r-regular graph H. Let G has a super

(a, d)-VAT labeling and |V (G)| = n, then
(i) . If r = 2 then d ≤ 2, for n ≥ 3.
(ii) . If r = 3 then d ≤ 2, for n ≥ 3.
(iii) . If r = 4 then d ≤ 5, for n ≥ 10.
Theorem 3
Let G be a t copies of r-regular graph H. Let H has an (a, d)- VAT labeling and |V (H)| = n. If
G has a super (a, d)-VAT labeling a ( G ) = ta ( H ) + (t − 1)(1 + d + r ) / 2
Gomez in [5] proved that, under some circumtance, if the r-regular graph G has super (a, 0)-
VAT labeling then t copies of G also has super (a, 0)-VAT labeling.
Theorem 4 [5]
Let t be a positive integer. If the graph G is r-regular graph that admits a super VMT labeling
and (k − 1)(r + 1)/2 is an integer, then the graph tG has a super VMT labeling.
While Gomez proved the general case of super VMT labeling of t copies of graphs, in this
paper we give construction of super (a, d)-VAT labeling for d = 1 only, of union of several
classes of graphs. The classes of graphs that we consider are cycles, generalised Petersen
graphs and circulant graphs. Each classes represents r-regular graphs with r ∈{2, 3, 4},
respectively.
The only regular graph with r = 2 is a cycle. The following theorem shows that disjoint union
of t cycles with odd vertices (does not have to be isomorphics each other) has a super (a, 1)-
VAT labeling. See Figure 1. for the example.
Theorem 5
Let {Cn j : j = 1, K , t} be a set of cycles with n j vertices, where n j ≥ 5 are odd integers.
t t
Then disjoint union of cycles ∪ Cn j has a super (3
j =1
∑n
k =1
k + 2,1) -VAT labeling.
Theorem 6
Let P(n, 1) be prism with 2n vertices, n odd and n ≥ 3. Let t be an odd number, then t-copies
⎢n⎥
of prism tP (n, 1) has a super (a = (10t + 2)n − ⎢ ⎥ + 2,1) -VAT labeling.
2 ⎣ ⎦
Theorem 7
Let P(n, 2) be a generalised Petersen Graph with 2n vertices, n odd and n ≥ 3. Let t be an odd
number, then t-copies of generalised Petersen Graphs tP (n, 2) has a super
1
(a = ( (21tn + 5),1) -VAT labeling.
2
Cn(1,m) have super vertex magic total labeling. Using modification from this labeling, we can
show that Cn(1,m) has super (a, 1)-VAT labeling. Moreover, we prove that disjoint union of
Cnj (1, 2), for j = 1, ....t, has a super (a, 1)-VAT labeling.
Theorem 8
Let {Cn j (1, 2) : j = 1, 2, K , t} be a set of circulant graphs with nj vertices. Then disjoint union
( )
t
of circulant ∪ Cn j (1, 2 ) has a super a = 8 ∑
t
k =1
nk + 3,1 -VAT labeling
j =1
We list some problems for further investigation.

– Find if there is a super (a, d)-VAT labeling of disjoint union of r-regular graphs other than
we have found in this paper for several values of d.
– Find if we can generalise the property of t copies of graph G, when G has a super (a, d)-
VAT labeling.
Keywords
Regular graphs, super vertex antimagic total labeling.


References
M. Baˇca, F. Bertault, J.A. MacDougall, M. Miller, R.Simanjuntak and Slamin. (2003) Vertex-antimagic total
labelings of graphs. Discussiones Mathematicae Graph Theory 23, 67-83.
M. Baˇca, M. Miller and Slamin. (2002) Vertex-magic total labelings of generalized Petersen graphs. Intern. J.
Comp. Math. 79,1259-1263.
C. Balbuena, E. Barker, K.C. Das, Y. Lin, M. Miller, J. Ryan, Slamin, K.A. Sugeng and M. Tkac. (2006) On the
degrees of a super vertex-magic graph. Discrete Math.
J. Gallian. (2008) A dynamic survey of graph labeling. The Electronic Journal of Combinatorics 6.
J. Gómez. (2007) Two new methods to obtain super vertex-magic total labelings of graphs. Discrete Math.
I.D. Gray, J.A. MacDougall and W.D.Wallis. (2003) On vertex-magic labeling of complete graphs. Bulletin of ICA
38, 42-44.
A. Kotzig and A. Rosa. (1970) Magic valuations of finite graphs. Canad. Math. Bull. 13, 451-461.
J.A. MacDougall, M. Miller, Slamin and W. Wallis. (2002) Vertex-magic total labelings of graphs. Utilitas
Mathematics 61, 68-76.
J.A. MacDougall, M. Miller and K.A. Sugeng. (2004) Super vertex-magic total labelings of graphs. Proceedings of
AWOCA’04, Balina.
K. A. Sugeng, M. Miller, Y. Lin and M. Baˇca. (2005) Super (a, d)-vertex-antimagic total labelings. JCMCC 55,
91-102.
K. A. Sugeng, M. Miller and M. Baˇca. Super antimagic total labeling of graphs, preprint.
W.D. Wallis. (2001) Magic Graphs. Birkhauser.

Super edge magic total labeling on unicycle graphs

Staff : K.A. Sugeng1*
Student : Adidarma Sepang, P. Anton Wibowo, Bong Novi Herawati
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : {anton_asia, adidarma_sepang}@yahoo.co.uk,
novi_bong@yahoo.com, kiki@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : A. Sepang, P. A. Wibowo, B. N. Herawati, dan K. A. Sugeng.
(2008). Super edge magic total labelling on unicyclic graphs.
Jurnal Makara Seri Sains Vol. 12(1), 36-38
1
Introduction
Let G = (V,E) be a simple and finite undirected graph with v vertices and e edges. Let f be a
bijection from V ∪ E to the set {1, 2, · · · , v + e}. f is called an edge magic total labeling if
for any edge xy in G the weight of edge f(x) +f(y) +f(xy) = k, for some constant integer k. A
super edge magic total labeling is an edge magic total labeling f which f(V ) = {1, · · · , v}. A
graph that has a (super) edge magic total labeling is called a (super) edge magic total graph.
Sedláček introduced the concept of magic labeling in 1963 [7]. However the notion of super
edge-magic labeling has been used since it was defined by Enomoto et al. in [4]. We can
obtain complete results on edge magic total labeling in Gallian’s survey [5].
According to attack the famous conjecture that said all trees are super edge magic total graphs
[4,6], Bača, Lin and Muntaner-Batle [1] and Ngurah, Baskoro and Simanjuntak [2] in separate
paper proved the following theorem.
Theorem 1 [1,2]: All path-like trees are super edge magic total graph.
Sugeng and Silaban used the idea of path-like tree for constructed a subclass of tree, they
called it caterpillar-like tree, which has super edge magic total labeling [8]
Theorem 2 [8]: All caterpillar-like trees are super edge magic total graph.
The super edge magic total labeling of odd cycle has been constructed by Enomoto et al. [4].
It is also known that even cycles do not have super edge magic total labeling. If we consider
the labeling of odd cycle, then the cycle can be decomposed to two paths Pn-1 and P2. The
super edge magic total labeling of cycle can be constructed by edge magic total labeling of
path Pn-1 , which one of the end vertex has 1 as its labels and then adjust the labels of all
edges. Figure 1 shows a super edge magic total labeling of C15.
Let Cn, n ≥ 4, be the cycle with V (Cn) = {xi : 1 ≤ i ≤ n} and E(Cn) ={xixi+1 : 1 ≤ i ≤ n −
1}∪{xnx1}. The cycle Cn is called embed to a grid if Cn can be drawn as a subgraph of the two
dimensional grid. If n is even then there is no problem to make the embedding, but the even
cycle is not a super edge magic total graph. However if n is odd then we have one edge of
cycle Cn that is represented as a free line in the grid.
Consider the ordered set of subpaths S1, S2, . . . , St which are maximal straight segments in
the embedding and it has the property that the end of Sj is the beginning of Sj+1 for any j = 1,
2, . . . , t − 1.
Suppose that Sj = P2 for some j, 1 < j < t, V (Sj) = {u0, v0}, u0 ∈ V (Sj−1) ∩ V (Sj ), v0 ∈ V (Sj) ∩
V (Sj+1), and distance of u and v is one for some vertex u of Sj−1 and vertex v of Sj+1. The
distance of u0 and u in Sj−1 is equal to the distance of v0 and v in Sj+1. An edge transformation
is replacing the edge u0v0 by a new edge uv.
A unicycle C of order n is called cycle-like when it can be obtained from some embedding of
Cn in the two dimensional grid by a set of sequentially edge transformations. Since the labels
of vertices of Cn is similar with label of vertices of Pn, then the edge transformations prevent
the super edge magic total labeling property of a new graph.


Results
Lemma 1 [3] :
A graph G with v vertices and e edges is super edge magic graph if and only if there exists a
bijective function f : V (G) ∪E(G) →{1, 2, . . . ,v+e} such that the set S = {f(x) + f(y)| xy ∈
E(G)} consists of e consecutive integers. In such a case, f extends to a super edge magic total
labeling of G with magic
constant c = v+ e + s where s = min(S) and S = {f(x) + f(y)| xy ∈ E(G) ={c − (v + 1), c − (v +
2), ..., c − (v +e)}.
Theorem 3: All cycle-like unicycles are super edge magic total graph.
Let G be a corona Cn • K r . Corona is a cycle Cn with r tail on every vertex. If we ignore all
the tails and look at the labeling on the cycle it self, then we can do the similar process with
caterpillar-like tree as in [8] and we can have the following Theorem. This methods only
works if the number of tails on every vertex are the same (=r).
Theorem 4: All corona-like unicycles are super edge magic total graph.
In this paper we construct and prove two new subclass of unicyclic graphs, cycle-like
unicycle graphs and corona-like unicycle graphs, to be a super edge magic total graph by
using edge transformation on edges of embedded cycle in a two dimensional grid. If we have
quite long tails from every vertex, we can do the same process (edge transformation) and treat
the tails as a path, then we can have more exciting graphs. However, this graph still categorize
as unicycle graph.
Keywords
Edge magic total labeling, super edge magic total labeling.
References
Baca, Y. Lin and F.A. Muntaner-Batle. Super edge-antimagic labelings of the path-like trees. Utilitas
Mathematics, to appear.
A.A.G. Ngurah, E.T. Baskoro, R. Simanjuntak. (2005) On (super) edge magic total labeling of graph. Proceedings
Seminar Nasional Matematika, Universitas Indonesia.
R.M. Figuerora-Centeno, R. Ichisima and F.A. Muntaner-Batle. (2001) The place of super edge magic labeling
among other classes of labelings. Discrete Math. 231, 153-168.
H. Enomoto, A.S. Llado, T. Nakamigawa and G. Ringel. (1998) Super edge-magic graphs. SUT J. Math. 34, 105-
109.
J. Gallian. (2003) A dynamic survey of graph labelling. The Electronic Journal of Combinatorics 6, DS # 6.
A.Kotzig and A.Rosa. (1970) Magic valuations of finite graphs. Canad. Math.Bull.13, 451-461.
J. Sedláˇcek, Problem 27. (1963) In Theory of Graphs and It’s Applications. Proc. Symposium Smolenice,
June, 163-167.
K.A. Sugeng and D.R. Silaban, On super edge magic total labeling of cateripllar-like tree. preprint.

Traffic Signal Control Modification Based on Self-Organizing in

Indonesia
Staff : Wisnu Jatmiko1* , Benyamin Kusumoputro1, A.A. Krisnadhi1,
I. Takagawa2, K. Sekiyama2, T. Fukuda2
Student : A. Arfan1
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : wisnuj@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Wisnu Jatmiko ,Benyamin Kusumoputro , A. A. Krisnadhi ,
A. Arfan, I. Takagawa , K. Sekiyama , T. Fukuda . 2008.
International Journal of Sociology 2008
1
2
Dept of Micro-Nano Systems Engineering, Nagoya University, Japan
Introduction
Traffic jam often occurs around the signalized intersection because each takes “stop-and-go
cost” to pass through the intersection. Hence, traffic signal control has significant meanings in
reducing the traffic jams efficiently. only local traffic information. Previously, a decentralized
control method is arbitrary interconnected one-way traffic network by adjusting the split
setting [1]. The studies in [2,3,4] pose the traffic signal control as an optimization problem
such as a combination of reinforcement learning to maximize local traffic at each intersection
and global optimization by Evolutionary Computational Method [2,5], minimization of the
total delay experienced by all network traffic at each section in a given network using a
dynamic programming technique [3] and adjustment of green period by reinforcement
learning [4].
We describe a traffic signal network using a system of nonlinear coupled oscillators. The self-
organization observed in nonlinear coupled oscillators is referred to as “synchronization” or
“the phenomenon of entrainment” [6], where oscillators having different natural frequencies
are phase locked with some phase delays as a result of their mutual or one-sided interaction.
In this signal network control problem, we find it useful to apply a nonlinear coupled
oscillator system to achieve desired signal pattern of the network using such a self-organizing
phenomenon of collective oscillation. Secondly, we adopted a decentralized control strategy
of the cycle time and the split setting of the signals so that the desired offset patterns are self-
organized through mutual entrainment based on local traffic demand to achieve efficient
traffic flow reducing the cost of the “stop-and-go” at signals [7]. Finally, visualization of
simulation demonstrates the effectiveness proposed method under unstructured condition like
in Indonesia.
Architecture and Control of Traffic Signal Network
In urban traffic signal network, the coordination of neighboring signals will provide great
benefit to road users, but coordinating signals over a wide area is currently regarded as a
difficult problem. There are three parameters which characterize signal patterns such as
• Cycle time : The time required for one full cycle of signal phases including red time, blue
time and clearance time.
• Green split : The percentage of green time allocated to each direction in one cycle of the
signal.
• Offset : The relative time difference between the starting times of green phase on
consecutive signals.

Figure 1. This is a time-distance diagram of consecutive signals. By setting suitable offset, cars can pass the
intersection without stop
The cycle time is a parameter mainly used for the control of an isolated traffic signal. A signal
can reduce the stop-and-go cost by taking longer cycle time when there is high traffic flow at
a intersection, so that more cars pass across the intersection without any stops. However, in
urban traffic signal network, each signal cannot decide the cycle time independently because
consecutive signals must have the same cycle time in adjusting offset as mentioned later.
The green split decides the relative length of green time in one full cycle of a signal, and can
be used for the control of both an isolated traffic signal and a traffic signal network. Taking
larger green split for a particular direction can reduce the cost of traffic flow incoming from
the direction.
In urban traffic signal networks, the offset is most important for the coordination of
neighboring signals to reduce the stop-and-go costs of traffic flow. The desired offset pattern
of a traffic signal networks makes more traffic cars pass across consecutive signals without
any stops, as shown in Fig. 1. Note that adjusting the offset requires the synchronization of
the consecutive signals by which the signals have the sane cycle time.
In order to reduce the stop-and-go cost in urban traffic networks, all the parameter. Cycle
time, green split and offset, should be adjusted by signal control. The detail explanation for
equation derivation of cycle time, split settings, and offset can be explored in [7].
Simulation example
Solving the traffic jam problem in big urban city requires hardware and software platforms.
During the initial design stages, software evaluation is preferred because it allows easy
comparison of different localization strategies for various environmental scenarios. The
screenshoot comparation between simulation using traffic signal control conventional and
traffic signal control modification based on self-organizing methods to handle a complex real
traffic light system in Indonesia showed in Fig 2.
Figure 2. Comparation running simulator between (a) conventional method and (b) proposed method

Conclusions
We performed visualization of simulation using traffic signal control conventional and traffic
signal control modification based on self-organizing methods to handle a complex real traffic
light system in Indonesia. In next step we will analysis the performance off the system in
different scenario. While the long term of our research is to simulate whole parts of cities in
Indonesia where consisting of road and traffic signal.

Keywords
Nonlinear coupled oscillators, self-organizing method, trafic signal control.
References
[1] Edward J. Davidson and Yukinori Kakazu, “Decentralized Control of Traffic Network,” IEEE Transaction on
Automatic Control, vol. AC-28, no. 6, pp. 677-688.
[2] Sadayoshi Mikami and Yukinori Kakazu, “Genetic Reinforcement Learning for Cooperative Traffic Signal
Control,” in IEEE Conference on Evolutionary Computation, Juni 1994, pp. 223-228.
[3] I. Porche, R. Segupta M. Sampath, Y.-L. Chen, and S. Lafortune, “A Decentralized Scheme for Real-Time
Optimization of Traffic Signals,” in IEEE International Conference on Control Application, September. 1996,
pp. 582-589.
[4] Tadnobu Misaya, Haruhiko Kimura, Sadaki Hirose, and Nobuyasu Osato,“ Multi Agent-Based Traffic Signal
Control with Reinforcement Learning,” IEICE Transactions, vol. J83-D-I, no 5, pp. 478-486, Mei 2000.
[5] Ikuku N., Takeshi I., and Kazutoshi S.,” Improvements of the Traffic Signal Control by Complex-Valued
Hopfield Networks”, IEEE International Conference World Congress of Evolutionary Computational 2006
(International Joint Conference on Neural Networks 2006), pp. 1186-1191.
[6] Yoshiki Kuramoto, Chemical Oscillations, Waves, and Turbulence, Springer- Verlag, 1984.
[7] K. Sekiyama, et al. 20. “Self-Organizing Control of Urban Traffic Signal Network”. Systems, Man, and
Cybernetics. IEEE International Conference on System, Man and Cybernetic 2001, pp. 2481-2486.

Two approaches for diagnosing a Pap smear cell image: Based on

image segmentation and classification methods and based on content-
based image retrieval system
Staff : Aniati Murni Arymurthy3*
Student : Ratih Amalia1 and Phyllisia Angelia2
Sponsor : Hibah Pascasarjana 2008, DepDikNas (Preliminary Study)
Email Contact : aniati@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Asia Pacific Conference on Art Science Engineering and
Technology (ASPAC ASET), pp.S-180 – S-186, Solo, May 2008
1,2,3
Introduction
Cervix cancer is the cause of many women death throughout the world. According to the
World Health Organization data [11], in the year of 2000, there are 471,000 cases and among
them 288,000 died because of the cervix cancer. Pap smear test is the way to detect early
cervix cancer. Pap smear means human cells that are subtracted using Papanicolaou method.
The cells are observed by a pathologist through a microscope to decide whether they are
healthy or not. Women who live in the remote areas of Indonesia are far from the facility for
obtaining a Pap smear test. The substance of Pap smear cells could be mixed with coloring
substance and recorded into a Pap smear cell images. A telemedicine system and a computer-
based Pap smear image diagnostic system are needed.
This paper presents two approaches for diagnosing a Pap smear cell image. The first approach
is based on image segmentation and classification processes, the similar way a doctor
diagnoses a Pap smear cell image. Several segmentation methods and classification methods
have been studied [1,7,9,10]. This paper has used the fuzzy c-means clustering that performed
the best in the previous study [1]. Several classification methods and classification methods
have also been studied [1,4,5,7]. This paper has compared the scaled conjugate gradient back
propagation neural network, and the support vector machine for the classification methods
[3,6,8].
This paper has also presented the second possible approach for diagnosing a Pap smear cell
image by utilizing an accumulated knowledge stored in image database and a query by
example using an image to be diagnosed. The former and the later approaches may also be
used in a hybrid way for obtaining a verified decision. The later approach allows a young
doctor to learn from his or her senior doctors or other doctor by retrieving similar diagnosed
images and their related treatment record from a knowledge database. This paper is organized
as follows: the methodology of the first and the second approaches, the experimental data,
and the experimental results. At the end, this paper is closed by concluding remarks and
future works.
Methodology
In the first approach for diagnosing Pap smear cell image based on segmentation and
classification methods, the image processing methodology is as follows: (i) image filtering
using the median filter; (ii) segmentation using the fuzzy c-means clustering [1,9]; and (iii)
classification using the scaled conjugate gradient back propagation neural network [6] and
Exponential Radial Basis kernel Function (ERBF) support vector machine [8]. In the
preliminary study, the use of ERBF gave a better results compared to the use of Radial Basis
Function (RBF) kernel function, with exponent value = 20. The study has also found that the
use of Directed Acyclic Graph (DAG) for multiclass classifier gave better results compared to

the One-vs-All and One-vs-One methods [3]. In the experimental process, the overall error,
false negative, and false positive are used as the performance measures. False negative (FN)
rate describes the percentage of abnormal cells identified as normal cells. True positive (TP)
rate describes the percentage of abnormal cells identified as abnormal cells. False positive
(FP) rate describes the percentage of normal cells identified as abnormal cells. True negative
(TN) rate describes the percentage of normal cells identified as normal cells. Overall error
(OE) is computed using Eq, (1).
OE = ((FN+FP) x 100%) / (TP+FN+TN+FP) (1)
where
FN = (FN x 100%) / (TP + FN)
FP = (FPx 100%) / (TN + FP)
In the second approach for diagnosing Pap smear cell image based on a content based image
retrieval system (CBIRS), only a subset of the data have been used for experiments due to a
limitation of time to enter the data. Seventy images (ten images for each class) are used for
constructing a knowledge image database. The database record consists of the five scale-
invariant shape features, the diagnose result, and the related image filename. For the query
process, another seventy images (ten images for each class) are used for example images in
the query process. The image processing methodology for constructing the knowledge image
database is as follows: (i) image filtering using the median filter; (ii) image segmentation
using the fuzzy c-means clustering; (iii) feature extraction of the five shape features (ratio
between nucleus and cytoplasm area, nucleus elongation, nucleus roundness, cytoplasm
elongation, and cytoplasm roundness) [3]; and (iv) database record construction. The query
process consist of the following steps: (i) input the observed image to be diagnosed; (ii) image
filtering using the median filter; (ii) image segmentation using the fuzzy c-means clustering;
(iii) feature extraction of five shape features; (iv) image content matching using Euclidean
distance measure; and (v) display the matched images including with their diagnosis
information. The diagram is shown in Fig. 1 [2]. In the experimental process, the average
classification error, the precision and recall accuracies are used for the performance measures.
For each-class queries by example, the classification error are computed based on both 2-class
and 7-class problem. Finally, the average classification error is computed based on both 2-
class and 7-class problem. The precision accuracy describes the ratio between the number of
relevant retrieved images and the number of retrieved images. The recall accuracy describes
the ratio between the number of relevant retrieved images and the number of relevant images
[2].
Experimental data
The data for experiment are obtained from Jantzen et al. [4]. The data consists of 917 Pap
smear cell images (Fig. 2.). The data consist of single Pap smear image, its segmented image
supervised by a doctor and its diagnosed category of cell status.

(a) Pap smear cells (b) Single Pap smear cell image and (c) its (d) Seven categories of cell
image (source: J. segmented image supervised by a doctor (source: condition (source: Jantzen et
Indarti , FKUI). Jantzen et al. [4]. al. [4].
The experimental results are shown in Fig.3.
Figure 3: (a) Classification accuracy using several

classifiers [1,2]; (b) Hasil content based image
retrieval system [3]. (b)
Concluding remarks
A combination of fuzzy c-means clustering and support vector machine classifier using ERBF
gave the best result with the overall error of 11.34%, followed by the scaled conjugate
gradient back propagation neural network that gave an overall error of 15.42%. The
preliminary study with a limited data has used five scale-invariant shape features. The CBIR
approach shows quite promising results, with the average classification accuracy of 81% for
2-class problem and 40% for 7-class hard problem. Furthermore, the precision and recall
analysis shows that the content-based image retrieval system is relatively quite effective in the
sense that similar diagnosed images occupy the highest matching ranks (shown in Fig.1).
Keywords
Classification, content based image retrieval system, segmentation.
References
1. D. Addiati, T. Farida, and A. Murni, Pap Smear Cell Image Diagnostic System Based on Fuzzy C-Means
Clustering and BackPropagation Neural Network, Proceedings of Asialink International Conference on
Biomedical Engineering and Technology, AICBET-2007, p.81-84, Jakarta, Indonesia, 2007.
2. R. Amalia, Pengenalan Citra Sel Tunggal Pap Smear dengan Model Klasifikasi Adaptive Network-based
Fuzzy Inference System (ANFIS) dan Biomedical Image Retrieval System, Tugas Akhir, Fakultas Ilmu
Komputer, Universitas Indonesia, 2007.
3. P. Angelia, Studi Banding Metode Klasifikasi Citra Sel Tunggal Pap Smear Menggunakan Neural Network
dan Support Vector Machine, Tugas Akhir, Fakultas Ilmu Komputer, Universitas Indonesia, 2007.
4. J. Jantzen, J. Norup, G. Dounias, and B. Bjerregaard, Pap-smear Benchmark Data For Pattern Classification,
Technical University of Denmark, Denmark, 2005.
5. 5. E. Martin, Pap smear Classification. Technical University of Denmark, Denmark, 2003.
6. F.M. Moller, A Scaled Conjugate Gradient Algorithm for Fast Supervised Learning, Neural Networks, Vol 6,
p.525-533, 1993.
7. J. Norup, Classification of Pap smear Data by Transductive Neuro-Fuzzy Methods, Master Thesis, Technical
University of Denmark, Denmark, 2005.
8. K.P. Soman, R. Loganathan, M.S. Vijaya, V. Ajay, and K. Shivsubramani, Fast Single-Shot Multiclass
Proximal Support Vector Machine and Perceptrons, Proceedings of the International Conference on
Computing: Theory and Applications, p.294-298, March 05-07, 2007.
9. N. Theera-Umpon, White Blood Cell Segmentation and Classification in Microscopic Bone Marrow Images,
Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Chiang Mai University, Thailand, 2005.
10. N.V. Vliet, Image Segmentation Applied to Cytology, Laboratoire de Recherche et Developpment de
l’Epita1416, rue Voltaire – F-94276 Le Kremlin-Bicetre cedex - France, 2003.
11. World Health Organization. Cervical Cancer Screening in Developing Countries: Report of a WHO
Consultation, Geneva, 2002.

Variant of ranged global best in parallel modified niche PSO with

flow of wind for multiple odor source localization problems in
dynamic environments
Staff : Wisnu Jatmiko1*, Jeremias Perkasa1, Benyamin Kusumoputro1,
Petrus Mursanto1, Abdul Muis2, Kosuke Sekiyama3, Toshio
Fukuda3
Student : Aditya Nugraha1, Rusdi Effendi1, Jeremias Perkasa1
Sponsor :
Email contact : wisnuj@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Jatmiko, Wisnu, et al. 2008. Proceedings of International
Conference on Advanced Computational Intelligence and Its
Application 2008. pg 104-110

1
2
Dept. of Electrical Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Indonesia
3
Dept of Micro-Nano Systems Engineering, Nagoya University, Japan
Introduction
Many issues have hindered odor source localization in the past. One of the common issues
has been that most detection of chemicals with mobile robots has been based on experimental
setups where the distance between the source and the sensor following an odor trail has been
minimized to limit the influence of turbulent transport [1-2]. Another issue has been that of
basing systems on the assumption of a strong, unidirectional air stream in the environment
[3]. However, thus far not much attention has been paid to the issue of odor localization
within a natural environment.
To combat natural environment issues [1-3], a new approach exploiting Particle Swarm
Optimization (PSO) is presented in this paper. The PSO algorithm here is modified to include
chemotaxic and anemotaxic theory along with the development of an Advection-Diffusion
odor model. This Modified Particle Swarm Optimization (MPSO) is applied by multiple
mobile robots which localize an odor source in natural environment where the odor
distribution changes over time [4,5].
Modified particle swarm optimization

The main problem with standard PSO applications in dynamic optimization problems is that
the PSO will eventually converge to an optimum; it thereby looses the diversity necessary for
efficient exploration of the search space. Applying Coulomb’s law, a charged swarm robot is
introduced in order to maintain diversity of the positional distribution of the robots and to
prevent them from being trapped in a local maximum. This enhances adaptability to the
changes of the environment. Suppose that robot i can observe the present position of the
other robots and has a constant charge Qi in order to keep a mutual distance away
and maintain positional diversity. Two types of swarm robots are defined: neutral and
charged robots. For all neutral robots Qi 0 ; hence, no repulsive force is applied to the
neutral robots. For charged robots, the mutual repulsive force between robots i and p is
defined according to the relative distance, as follows;

........................................................................ (1)
where, ( i ≠ p ), rcore denotes the diameter inside which a constant, strong repulsion force is
applied and rperc denotes the recognition range of robot. Hence, if the mutual distance is
beyond rperc, there exists no repulsion force between the robots. In the case of rcore ≤r≤rperc,
the repulsion force is dependent on the mutual distance. Then, taking the summation of the
mutual repulsion force, robot i defines collective repulsion force by:
..................................................................................................................... (2)
where N is number of the robots. The charged swarm robot is described in equations (3) and
(4)
................................................... (3)
......................................................................................... (4)
Deal with multiple source
The limitation of PSO is premature convergence to a local solution or one solution. These
situations is also finding in multiple odor source localization problem [6]. To escape from
this situation, niche method with deflection procedure, is adopted [6,7]. The deflection
approach operates in multiple odor density function, adapting it to remove or lose when the
one source was found.
Implementation framework
The odor source localization problem in dynamic environments is related to several issues
from biology, physical chemistry, engineering and robotics. This paper proposes a
comprehensive approach to offer a sound technical basis for odor source localization in a
dynamic environment.
Environment
We adopted an extended Advection-Diffusion odor model by Farrell et al. [8] because of its
efficiency. It represents time-averaged results for measurement of the actual plume, including
chemical diffusion and advective transportation. In addition, the Advection-Diffusion odor
model has a key factor to approximate the meandering nature of the plume, in that the model
is sinuous. (For further explanation on this model, see [8], section two and three.)
Robot behavior
The gas source localization algorithm used in this work can be divided into three subtasks:
plume finding, plume traversal and source declaration. Random search is employed until one
robot encounters the plume. After finding the plume, the second task of the plume traversal
proceeds. Particle Swarm concept will be applied to following the cues determined from the
sensed gas distribution.
Extension with ranged global best concept
MPSO groups could track the same odor source. And the second found odor sources that are
not distributed properly among groups. If these groups have range from each other, they could
be run more divergent and do not enter others’ area. This method, ranged groups, is also
capable of distributing odor sources found by others’ properly because each group has region
that cannot be interfered by others.
We make a region from their global best location and determine how far it should from global
best of other groups. We call this method as ranged global best I as it is using global best
position to make range of all groups.

Figure 1. Conceptual idea of ranged global best I. Figure 2. The diversity problem still not solved.
Furthermore to increase the diversity from each group we extend the concept of the ranged
global best I. Two type mechanisms to increasing the diversity will be introduced. First, the
looser subgroup will spread goes far away from the winner subgroup where the center of
spreading is from the looser subgroup. We call the method is a ranged global best II. Second
the looser subgroup will spread goes far away from the winner subgroup where the center of
spreading is from the winner subgroup as . We call the method is a ranged global best III.
Figure 3. Conceptual idea of ranged global best II Figure 4. Conceptual idea of ranged global best III
Conclusions
The Niche Parallel MPSO was implemented for solving multiple odor source localization
problems. These proposed approaches can solve such dynamic environment problems.
Unfortunately, when using parallel niche, we found some problem where there is a possibility
that more than one subgroup locates one odor sources. This is inefficient because other
subgroups should locate other sources. To deal with this problem, we propose three variants
method of preventing that problem there are global best ranged I, II and III.
Keywords
Dynamic environment, odor source localization, particle swarm optimization.
References
[1] M. Wandel, A. Lilienthal, T. Duckett, U. Weimar, and A. Zell. Gas distribution in unventilated indoor
environments inspected by amobile robot. In Proceedings of the IEEE International Conference on Advanced
Robotics (ICAR’03), 2003.
[2] X. Cui, C. T. Hardin, R. K. Ragade, and A. S. Elmaghraby. A swarm-based fuzzy logic control mobile sensor
network for hazardous contaminants localization. In Proceedings of the IEEE International Conference on
Mobile Ad-hoc and Sensor Systems (MASS’04), 2004.
[3] Ishida, H. Nakayama, G. Nakamoto and T. Moriizumi, T. Controlling a gas/odor plume-tracking robot
based on transient responses of gas sensors”, IEEE Sensors Journal, Vol. 5. No.3. June 2005.
[4] Wisnu Jatmiko, K. Sekiyama and T. Fukuda, "Modified Particle Swarm Robotic for Odor Source
Localization in Dynamic Environment ", The International Journal of Intelligent Control and Systems: Special
Issue on Swarm Robotic, Vol. 11, No 3, pp.176-184, September 2006.
[5] Wisnu Jatmiko, K. Sekiyama and T. Fukuda," A PSO-based Mobile Robot for Odor Source Localization in
Extreme Dynamic Advection-Diffusion Environment with Obstacle: Theory, Simulation and Measurement ".
IEEE Computational Intelligence Magazine: Special Issue on Biometric. Vol. 2, Issue 2, pp. 37-51, May
2007.
[6] Wisnu Jatmiko et. al., " Modified Niche PSO with Flow of Wind for Multiple Odor Source Localization
Problems in Dynamic Environments". In Proc. Inter. Conf. SCIS-ISIS 2008, September 2008, Nagoya,
Japan. (In press).
[7] R. Brits, A. P. Engelbrecht and F. van den Bergh," Locating multiple optima using particle swarm
optimization". Applied Mathematics and Computation, vol. 189 (2007), pp.1859-1883.
[8] Jay A. Farrel et all , "Filament-based atmospheric dispersion model to achieve short time-scale structure of
odor plumes," Environment Fluid Mechanics , vol. 2, pp. 143-169, 2002.

Vertex-antimagic total labeling of the union of suns

Staff : D.R. Silaban1*, K.A. Sugeng
Student : Andrea Parestu
Email Contact : anpa50@ui.ac.id, denny-rs@ui.ac.id, kiki@ui.ac.id
Combinatorial Mathematics and Combinatorial Computing
1
Introduction
In this paper all graphs are finite, simple and undirected. Let G has vertex set V (G ) and
edge set E (G ) , and let n =| V (G ) | and e =| E (G ) | .
A labeling λ of a graph G is a mapping that assigns elements of a graph to a set of numbers
(usually positive integers). If the domain of the mapping is the set of vertices (respectively,
the set of edges) then we call the labeling vertex labeling (respectively, edge labeling). If the
domain is the set of vertices and edges, then we call the labeling total labeling. A general
survey of graph labelings can be found in [2].
The vertex-weight w( x ) of a vertex x , under a labeling λ : V (G ) ∪ E (G ) → {1,2, K , n + e}
(or wλ (x) ), is the sum of values λ ( xy) assigned to all edges incident to given vertex x
together with the value assigned to x itself.
A bijection λ : V (G ) ∪ E (G ) → {1,2,K, n + e} is called an (a, d ) -vertex antimagic total
labeling (in short, (a, d ) -VAT labeling or (a, d ) -VATL) of G if the set of vertex-weights
of all vertices in G is {a, a + d , K , a + (n − 1)d } , where a > 0 and d ≥ 0 are two fixed
integers. If d = 0 then we call λ as a vertex-magic total labeling. The concept of the vertex-
magic total labeling was introduced by MacDougall et al. [3].
(
Ba c a et al. [1] investigated basic properties of ( a, d )-VAT labelings. They also studied dual
labeling and relationship between a SVMT labeling (or super ( a,0 )-VAT labeling) and an
( a, d )-antimagic labeling. Rahim et al. [5] proved that the union of t suns has a VMT
∑
t
labeling (or (a,0) -VAT labeling) with magic number k = 6 n + 1 . Parestu et al. [4]
k =1 k
∑
t
proved that the union of t suns has an ( a,1 )-VAT labeling with a = 4 n +2
k =1 k
Main result
A sun S n is a cycle Cn with adding an edge connecting to each vertex vi in a cycle with
single vertex ui , for i = 1,2,K , n . The sun S n consists of vertex set
V ( S n ) = {vi : 1 ≤ i ≤ n} ∪ {ui : 1 ≤ i ≤ n} and edge set
E ( S n ) = {vi vi +1 : 1 ≤ i ≤ n} ∪ {ui vi : 1 ≤ i ≤ n} , where vi are inner vertices and ui are outer
vertices of S n . Note that if i = n then i + 1 = 1 . The union of t suns, denoted by
Sn ∪ Sn ∪ L ∪ Sn , consists of vertex set
1 2 t
V ( S n ) = {vij : 1 ≤ i ≤ n j ,1 ≤ j ≤ t} ∪ {uij : 1 ≤ i ≤ n j ,1 ≤ j ≤ t} and edge set

j

E ( S n ) = {vij vij+1 : 1 ≤ i ≤ n} ∪ {uij vij : 1 ≤ i ≤ n} . Thus S n ∪ S n ∪ L ∪ S n has 2∑k =1nk

t
j 1 2 t
∑
t
vertices and 2 n edges.
k =1 k
For any graph G with the smallest degree δ and the largest degree ∆ we have the restriction
of d as follows
(∆ + 1)(2(| V | + | E |) − ∆)) − (δ + 1)(δ + 2)
d≤ .
2(| V | −1)
Since sun has δ = 1 and ∆ = 3 , then we have d ≤ 7.
In following we give ( a, d )-VATL of graphs, which consists of the union of t suns for
d ∈ {1,2,3,4,6} .
Theorem 1
∑
t
For n j ≥ 3 and t ≥ 1 , the union of t suns S n ∪ S n ∪ L ∪ S n has a (4 n + 2,1) -
k =1 k
1 2 t
VATL.
Theorem 2
∑
t
k =1 k
1 2 t
VATL.
Theorem 3
∑
t
For odd n j ≥ 3 and t ≥ 1 , the union of t suns S n ∪ S n ∪ L ∪ S n has a (4 n + 3,3) -
k =1 k
1 2 t
VATL.
Theorem 4
∑
t
k =1 k
1 2 t
VATL.
Theorem 5
For odd n j ≥ 3 and t ≥ 1 , the union of t suns S n ∪ S n ∪ L ∪ S n has an (5,6) -VATL.
1 2 t
Conclusion
We have studied an ( a, d )-VAT labeling of the union of suns. We found that the graphs
Sn ∪ Sn ∪ L ∪ Sn has an ( a, d )-VATL for d ∈ {1,2,3,4,6} . In the case when
1 2 t
d ∈ {3,6} , for even n ≥ 3 ; and d ∈ {5,7} , for n ≥ 3 , we do not have the compelte answer.
We list here two problems for further investigation.
Open Problem 1
Find if there is an ( a,3 )-VAT labeling and ( a,6 )-VAT labeling for even n ≥ 3 .
Open Problem 2
Find if there is an ( a,5 )-VAT labeling and ( a,7 )-VAT labeling for all n ≥ 3 .

Keywords
Sun graph, vertex magic total labeling, vertex antimagic total labeling.
References
(
Ba c a M., Bertault F., MacDougall J. A., Miller M., Simanjuntak R. and Slamin (2003) Vertex-antimagic total
labelings of graphs, Discussiones Mathemaicae Graph Theory 23, 67-83.
Gallian J. (2008), A dynamic survey of graph labeling, The Electronic Journal of Combinatorics 6, DS6.
MacDougall J. A., Miller M., Slamin and Wallis W. (2002) Vertex-magic total labelings of graphs, Utilitas
Mathematics 61, 68-76.
Parestu A., Silaban D. R. and Sugeng K. A. (2008) Pelabelan simpul-ajaib total dari gabungan graf matahari,
Prosising Seminar Nasional Matematika, Universitas Parahyangan, Bandung, Vol 3, 407-414.
Rahim M. T. and Slamin, Vertex-magic total labeling of the union of suns, preprint.

Vertex-magic total labelings of union of generalized Petersen graphs

and union of special circulant graphs
Staff : D.R. Silaban1*, K.A. Sugeng1, Slamin2
Student : A. Parestu1, B.N. Herawati1
Email Contact : denny-rs@ui.ac.id, kiki@ui.ac.id, anpa50@ui.ac.id,
novi_bong@yahoo.com, slamin@unej.ac.id
Combinatorial Mathematics and Combinatorial Computing
1
2
Mathematics Education Study Program, FKIP, Jember University, Jl. Kalimantan 32, Jember 68121, Indonesia

*corresponding author
Introduction
In this paper all graphs are finite, simple, and undirected. The graph G has vertex set
V = V (G ) and edge set E = E (G ) , and let n =| V (G ) | and e =| E (G ) | . MacDougall et al.
[4] introduced the notion of a vertex-magic total labeling. The vertex-magic total labeling of
a graph G is a one -to-one mapping from V ∪ E onto the integers 1,2,K, n + e such that
for every vertex x ∈ V there is a constant k so that for every vertex x ,
wλ ( x) = λ ( x) + ∑ λ ( xy) = k ,
y∈N ( x )
where N ( x) is the set of all vertices y that adjacent to x . The constant k is called the
magic constant for λ and wλ ( x) is called the weight of x under labeling λ .
⎢ n − 1⎥
The generalized Petersen graph P (n, m), n ≥ 3,1 ≤ m ≤ ⎢ , is a regular graph with an
⎣ 2 ⎥⎦
outer n -cycle u1 , u2 , K , u n , a set of n spokes ui vi ,1 ≤ i ≤ n , and n inner edges vi vi + m with
indices taken modulo n . Generalized Petersen graphs were first defined by Watkins [7].
Let 1 ≤ a1 ≤ a2 ≤ K ≤ ak ≤ ⎣ n/2⎦ , where n and ai ( i = 1,K, k ) are positive integers. A
circulant graph Cn (a1 , a2 , K , ak ) is a regular graph with V = {v0 , v1 , K , vn −1} and
E = {(vi vi + a )(mod (n − 1)) | i = 0,1,K, n − 1, j = 1,2,K , k} .
j
If a regular graph G possesses a vertex-magic total labeling, we can create a new labeling λ ′
from λ by setting
λ ′( x) = n + e + 1 − λ ( x)
for every vertex x , and
λ ′( xy) = n + e + 1 − λ ( xy)
for every edge xy . Ee call λ ′ as the dual of λ . If r is the degree of each vertex of the
regular graph G , then
k ′ = (r + 1)(n + e + 1) − k
is the new magic constant for λ ′ .
Some results on vertex magic total labeling of particular classes of graphs. MacDougall et
al.[4] proved that the cycle Cn for n = 3 , path Pn for n = 2 , complete graph K n for odd n ,
and complete bipartite graph K n , n for n > 1 , have vertex-magic total labeling. Baca, Miller,

n −1
and Slamin [1] proved that for n = 3,1 ≤ m ≤ ⎣ ⎦ , every generalized Petersen graph
2
P(n, m) has vertex-magic total labelings with the magic constant k = 9n + 2, k = 10n + 2,
and k = 11n + 2. Balbuena et al [2] proved that for odd n ≥ 5 and m ∈ 2,3, K , (n − 1)/2 ,
circulant graphs Cn (1, m) has a super vertex-magic total labeling with k = (17n + 5)/2 . The
complete survey of the known results on vertex-magic total labeling of graphs can be found in
[3]. For the case of disconnected graph, Wallis [6] proved Theorem 1. Slamin et al. [5]
proved that the 2 copies of generalized Petersen graphs 2 P(n, m) has a vertex-magic total
labeling with the magic constant k = 19n + 2 and k = 21n + 2.
Main result
Theorem 1 [6]
Suppose G is a regular graph of degree r which has a vertex-magic total labeling. (i) If r is
even, then tG is vertex-magic whenever t is an odd positive integer. (ii) If r is odd, then tG is
vertex-magic for every positive integer t.
t
The union of t generalized Petersen graphs U j =1
P(n j , m j ) has a vertex set
t
V (U j =1P (n j , m j )) = {uij |1 ≤ i ≤ n j ,1 ≤ j ≤ t} ∪ {vij |1 ≤ i ≤ n j ,1 ≤ j ≤ t} and the edge set
t
E (U j =1P (n j , m j )) = {u ij u ij+1 |1 ≤ i ≤ n j ,1 ≤ j ≤ t}∪{u ij vij |1 ≤ i ≤ n j ,1 ≤ j ≤ t}
∪{vij vij+ m |1 ≤ i ≤ n j ,1 ≤ j ≤ t} .
j
Theorem 2
n j −1
For n j ≥ 3,1 ≤ m j ≤ ⎣ ⎦, the union of t generalized Petersen graphs
2
P (n j , m j ), j = 1,2,K , t , has a vertex-magic total labeling with the magic constant
t
k = 10∑nl + 2.
l =1
From duality, we can show that the construction of vertex-magic total labeling for union of t
generalized Petersen graph is not unique. However, both labels have the same magic number
t
k = 10∑nl + 2.
l =1
t
The union of t special circulant graphs U C (1, m j )
j =1 n
has a vertex set
t
V (U j =1Cn (1, m j )) = {vij |0 ≤ i ≤ n − 1,1 ≤ j ≤ t} and the edge set
t
E (U j =1Cn (1, m j )) = {vij vij+1|0 ≤ i ≤ n − 1,1 ≤ j ≤ t}∪{vij vij+ m |0 ≤ i ≤ n − 1,1 ≤ j ≤ t} .
j
Special circulant graph Cn (1, m) is a regular graph with r = 4 . Theorem 1 states that if G
is a regular graph with r is even, then tG is vertex-magic whenever t is an odd positive
t
integer. Moreover, we construct that the union of t special circulant graphs, U C (1, m j ) ,
j =1 n
for not only odd t , but also for even t . For the case of even t , our result is an example for
G regular and even r that tG can have vertex magic labeling.
Theorem 3
For odd n ≥ 5 and m j ∈ {2,3, K , (n − 1)/2} , the disjoint union of t circulant graphs
n −1
∪tj =1 Cn (1, m j ) has a vertex magic total labeling with k = 8tn + + 3.
2

Corollary 1
For odd n ≥ 5 and m j ∈ {2,3, K, (n − 1)/2} , the disjoint union of circulants ∪tj =1 Cn (1, m j )
n −1
has a vertex magic total labeling with k = 7tn − + 2.
2
Conclusion
We conclude with an open problem for further research direction in this area.
Open Problem 1
Find if there is a vertex magic labeling for disjoint union of t (non)-isomorphic regular
t
graphs other then U j =1
P (n j , m j ) and ∪tj =1 Cn (1, m j ) .

Keywords
Circulant graph, Petersen graph, regular graphs, vertex magic total labeling.
References
(
Ba c a M., Miller M. and Slamin (2002) Vertex-magic total labelings of generalized Petersen graphs,Int. J. of
Computer Mathematics 79, Issue 12, 1259-1264.
Balbuena C., Barker E., Das K. C., Lin Y., Miller M., Ryan J., Slamin, Sugeng K. and Tkac M. (2006) On the
degrees of a super vertex-magic graph, Discrete Mathematics 306, 539-559.
Gallian J. (2008) A dynamic survey of graph labeling, The Electronic Journal of Combinatorics 6 DS6.
MacDougall J., Miller M., Slamin and Wallis W. D. (2002) Vertex-magic total labelings, Utilitas Math., 61, 3-
21.
Slamin, Prihandoko A.C., Setiawan T. B., Rosita V. and Shaleh B. (2001) Vertex-magic total labeling of
disconnected graphs, Journal of Prime Research in Mathematics, to appear.
Wallis W. D. (2001) Magic Graph, Birkhäuser.
Watkins M. E. (1969) A Theorem on Tait Colorings with an Application to the Generalized Petersen Graphs, J.
Combin. Theory 6, 152-164.


Visualization and statistical analysis of fuzzy-neuro LVQ in eigen

domain for recognizing mixture odors
Staff : Benyamin Kusumoputro1, Wisnu Jatmiko1*
Student : Rochmatullah1
Sponsor :
Email Contact : wisnuj@cs.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Rochmatullah, Benyamin Kusumoputro and Wisnu Jatmiko. 2008.
Proceedings of International Conference on Advanced
Computational Intelligence and Its Application 2008. pg 70-75
1
Introduction
The olfaction system is essential and very vital sense in the animal world, especially for
matting and survival of many species. Recently, technological advances have interest in the
possibility of mimicking the human olfaction system electronically, and odor sensing system
have showed an enormous number of potential application, such as in different product of
foods [1-3], wine [4-5] and gasoline product [6]. One of the potential applications of an odor
sensing system is to analyze and discriminate various perfumes odor [7, 8].
Odor discrimination system

The objective of an odor discrimination system is to automatically divide a set of unknown
odor into numbers of homogenous odor clusters The artificial odor recognition system
consists of a sensory subsystem, a feature extraction subsystem and neural network as its
pattern recognition subsystem. In the sensory and its feature extraction subsystem QCM
sensor is used as it showed good correlation between a human threshold and its sensor
response [17]. In this paper, we have used 20 MHz QCM sensors, each of which is covered
by different thin membrane to build a sensor array with 16 QCM sensors of 20 MHz
resonance frequency. Schematic diagram of the experimental system is not explained in this
paper; it can be seen in another paper [10].
Fuzzy-neuro learning vector quantization

Fuzzy neural networks based back-propagation [9] learning algorithm have been developed
and are widely used [14, 15]. Another fuzzy neural networks algorithm is developed based on
Learning Vector Quantization (LVQ) [16], which is called Fuzzy-Neuro LVQ (FNLVQ) [8]
to distinguish with Fuzzy-Algorithms LVQ (FALVQ) [12]. These fuzzy neural networks used
fuzziness number on its neuron and directly calculated the neuron activation using fuzzy
similarity [11-13]. In FNLVQ, neuron activation is expressed in terms of fuzzy numbers, i.e. a
triangular fuzzy number.
Karhunen-Loeve transformation technique

K-L domain transformation or subspace decomposition [18,19], which means to
orthogonalize, that is increasing the separability of the extracted feature, and to reduce its
dimensionality. The standard analysis using principal components of aromatic data
is done by determining a set of hidden linear representation
parameters y1(t), ..., ym(t), called factors or features. These features could then be used for
linear least mean-squared-error reconstruction of the original data. If there is enough
correlation between the observation variables x1(t), then we can reconstruct the pattern with
acceptable accuracy using a number of features m which is much smaller than the data

dimension n. We often call n is the superficial dimensionality of the pattern data while m the
intrinsic dimensionality of the pattern data.
Visualization
In order to using FNLVQ algortihm, we had developed a GUI based simulation program that
were writen using Visual C++.
Figure 1. Visualization of FNLVQ simulation program
Results
Results of experiments on recognizing unlearned odors within 12 classes of two-mixture
odors problem are depicted in Table 1. both FNLVQ in aroma domain and in its eigen domain
show higher recognition rate, about 99%, compare with that of BPNN that just about 53% for
8 sensors and 81% for 16 sensors [3].
Table 1. Recognition rate of FNLVQ in discriminating 12 class of two-mixture-odors, both in aroma domain and
in eigen domain, using 8 and 16 sensors.
As for the three-mixture-odors problems, Table 2 show the experimental results of FNLVQ
recognition rate for 6 classes for both in aroma domain and in its eigen domain, using 8 and
16 sensors.
Table 2. Recognition rate of FNLVQ in discriminating 6 class of three-mixture-odors, both in aroma domain and
in eigen domain, using 8 and 16 sensors.
As can be clearly seen in this table, the FNLVQ in eigen domain shows slightly higher of its
recognition rate, about 90%, compare with that of in aroma domain for about
88%.
Conclusions

Experimental results on two-mixture-odors problem show that both FNLVQ in aroma domain
and in its eigen domain have high recognition rate, and increasing the number of sensors has
no effect on its recognition rate. As in the three-mixture-odors problem, when increasing the
number of odor classess to be recognized, the FNLVQ in its eigen domain show its
superiority.
Keywords
Fuzzy-Neuro learning vector quantization, Karhunen-Loeve transformation, odor
discrimination system.
References
[1] A.Z. Berna, J. Lammertyn, S. Saevels, C. Di Natale and B.M. Nicolai, “Electronic nose systems to study shelf
life and cultivar effect on tomato aroma profile”, Sens.Actuators B, vol.97, feb. 2004, 324-333.
[2] S. Oshita, K. Shima, T. Haruta, Y. Seo, Y. Kawagoe, S. Nakayama and S. Kawana,” Discrimination of odours
emanating from ‘La France’ pear by semiconductor polymer sensors”, Comput.Electro.Agric. vol 26, 209-216,
2000.
[3] S. Saevels, J. Lammertyn, A.Z. Berna, E. Veraverberke, C. Di Natale, B.M. Nicolai, “ Electronic nose as a non
destructive tool to evaluate the optimal harvest date of apples”, Postharvest Biol.Technol., Vol. 30, pp.3-14,
2003.
[4] C. Di Natale, F.A.M Davide, A.D’amico, P.Nelli, s.Groppelli, G. Sberveglieri, “An Electronic nose for the
recognition of the vineyard of a red wine”, Sens.Actuators, B33 (1-3), 83-86, 1996.
[5] T. Nakamoto, K. Fukunishi and T. Moriizumi, “ Identification capability of odour sensors using quartz
resonator array and neural network pattern recognition,” Sens.Actuators, 1990, B1, 473-476.
[6] T. Sobanski, A. Szczurek, K. Nitsch, B.W. Licznerski and W. Radwan,” Electronic nose applied to automotive
fuel qualification”, Sens.Actuators,B116, 2006, 207-212.
[7] A .Carrasco, C. Saby and P. Bernadet, Discrimination of Yves Saint Laurent perfumes by an electronic nose,
Flav. and Fragr. Journal, 13, 335-348, 1998.
[8] B. Kusumoputro, H. Budiarto and W. Jatmiko, Fuzzy neuro LVQ and its comparison with fuzzy algorithm
LVQ in artificial odor discrimination system, Journal of ISA Transactions, Vol. 41, 395-407, 2002.
[9] K. Emma, M. Yokogawa, T. Nakamoto and T. Moriizumi, “Odor sensing system using quartz resonator semsor
array and neural network pattern recognition”, Sensors and Actuators, 18, 291-296, 1988.
[10] B. Kusumoputro and M. Rivai, “Discrimination of fragrance odor by arrayed quartz resonator and a neural
networks, in Computational Intelligence and Multimedia Applications, H. Selvaraj and B. Verma (Eds), World
Scientific Press Singapore, 264-269, 1998.
[11] W. Pedrycs, “Fuzzy neural networks with reference neurons as pattern classifiers,” IEEE Trans. Neural
Networks, 3, pp. 770-775, 1992.
[12]Karayiannis N. B. and Pai, P. I., “A family of fuzzy algorithms for learning vector quantization”, In Intelligent
Engineering Systems through Artificial Neural Networks, Dagli, C. H. et al. Eds. New York: ASME Press,
219-224, 1994.
[13] Karayiannis, N. B. and Pai, P. I., “Fuzzy algorithms for learning vector quantization”, IEEE Trans. Neural
Networks, 7, 1196-1211, 1996. [14] B. Kusumoputro and T.P. Arsyad, “Recognizing odor mixtures using
optimized fuzzy-neural network through genetic algorithms”, Journal of Advanced Computational Intelligence
and Intelligent Informatics, Vol.9, No.3, 290-296, 2005.
[15] Z-Q. Liu and F. Yan, “Fuzzy Neural Network in Case- Based Diagnostic System,” IEEE Trans. on Fuzzy
Systems, 5, 209-222, 1997
[16] Sakuraba, Y., Nakamoto, T. and Moriizumi, T., “New method of learning vector quantization”, Systems and
Computer in Japan, Vol. 22, No.13, 93-102, 1991.
[17] Y.Okahata, O. Shimizu and H. Obata, “Detection of odorous substances by using a lipid-coated quartz crystal
microbalance in the gas phase”, Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn, Vol; 63, 3082, 1990.
[18] K.Fukunaga, “Statistical Pattern Recognition”, San Diego, California: Academic Press, 1990.
[19] D.L. Swets and J. Weng, “Using Discriminant Eigenfeatures for Image Retrieval”, IEEE Trans. PAMI,
Vol.18, No.8, 1996, pp. 831-836.

Antibacterial activity test of Pangium edule Reinw, fresh seed extract

fractions
Staff : W. Mangunwardoyo1* and E.S. Heruwati2
Student : L. Ismaini1
Sponsor : Department of Marine Affairs and Fisheries
Email contact : w_mangunwardoyo@hotmail.com
Dessimination at : W. Mangunwardoyo, L. Ismaini and E.S. Heruwati (2008)
Antibacterial Activity Test of Pangium edule Reinw, Fresh Seed
Exctract Fractions. Jurnal Bahan Alam Indonesia. 6 (4), 163—168

1
Department of Biology, Faculty of Mathematics and Sciences Universitas Indonesia, Kampus Depok 16424.
2
Research Center for Marine and Fisheries Product Processing and Biotechnology. Department of Marine Affairs
and Fisheries, Jakarta. 10260.

Introduction
Fresh seed of Pangium edule Reiw (picung) has been used by for traditional fish preservation,
the treatment extend the storage period for 2 weeks, however, preservation with addition of
salt only able to preserve up to 6 days. The antibacterial in the fresh seed tannin, cyanide and
fatty acid (Nuraida et al. 2000; Widyasari, 2005). Tannin was polyphenol group antimicrobial
effect against bacteria, molds and yeast. Tannin isolated from Rhizopora apiculata, Acasia
mollissima and Quercus aucheri have microbial activity to Staphylococcus aureus,
Micrococcus luteus, and Bacillus subtilis, mold Alternaria alternate also yeast Candida
albicans and Candida krusei, (Scalbert, 1991, Digrak et al. 1999, Sakar et al. 2005; Lim et al.
2006). The objective of the research to examine antibacterial chromatograph fractions of
aquadest and ethanol fresh seed against Gram positive and negative bacteria.
Material
Plant Material: Seed of Pangium edule collected from Pabuaran, Cileungsi, Bogor. Bacterial
assay: Two Gram positive Micrococcus luteus, and Staphylococcus aureus, and six Gram
negative: Alcaligenes eutrophus, Enterobacter aerogenes, Flavobacterium gleum,
Pseudomonas fluorescens, Salmonella typhimurium, and Serratia marcescens. Antibiotic
Chloramphenicol 10 mg/ml (as positive control). Media; Nutrient Agar (NA), Mueller Hinton
agar (MHA).
Methods
Extraction: The fresh seed picung washed, and using followed freeze drying at -40oC and to
become powder. Maceration was used for extraction, first step 200 g of fresh seed dissolved
in 1000 ml aquadest, shake at 30 rpm for 3 days, with Whatman paper no 42, the filtrate
further evaporated at 72 mbar. maceration residue 1000 ml ethanol, shake at 30 rpm for 3
days, the filtratewas evaporated at 175 mbar. The extract were freeze followed by freeze
drying and kept in bottle for further analysis (Harbone, 1998: Andarwulan et al. 1999).
hromatography : silica gel C-18 70 mesh, column 1,5x15 cm The amount 80 mg/ml extract
fresh picung from aquadest and ethanol 50%, eluted using gradient methanol:water (5:1 and
7:1), ethanol-ethyl acetate (5:1 and 7:1) and methanol-n-hexane (5:1 and 7:1). Each volume of
eluent in comparation of 5:1 500 ml 7:1 400 mlhe were examined similarity chromatogram
pattern UVi spectrophotometer (100-600 nm). The identified fraction were collected and
evaporated at 40oC (Harbone, 1998).
Antimicrobial assays: Agar diffusion methods was used for assay the antimicrobial activity
of extract aquadest and ethanol 50%. Amount of 20 µL bacterial at optical dencity 0.5—0.6
inoculated at 15 mL MHA medium, and poured in the petridish. After solidify the sterilled
disk paper diameter 6 mm dropped 20 µL consist of 1 mg/ml chromatography fraction.

Incubation was carried out at 37oC for 24 hours. Antibiotic chloramphenicol used as positive
control and aquadest as negative control.

Result fraction from chromatography column extract seed fresh picung from aquadest shown
in Tabel 1. Eluent methanol: H20 (7:1) give the antimicrobial for all bacteria assayed, the
possibility that first fraction have a phenolic, flavonoid, alcaloid, saponin, and tannin
componentb action synergistic inhibited the enzyme on biosynthesis peptidoglycan,
lipopolysaccharide, damage the membrane cytoplasm and disturbance of membrane
permeability (Gilbert, 1984; Cowan, 1999).
Tabel 1. Antibacterial fractions extract aquadest fresh Pangium edule Reiwn. against Gram negative and positive
bacteria.
Sample Eluent Average diameter zona inhibition (mm)
code Bacterial assay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Meth:H20: 7:1 5.00 3.33 4.67 2.67 4.00 3.33 1.00 3.33
2 Meth:H20: 7:1 ND 1.00 2.00 ND ND 1.67 ND ND
D Meth:H20: 7:1 ND 1.33 ND ND ND ND ND ND
3 Meth:H20: 5:1 ND 1.00 ND ND ND ND ND ND
J Eth: Eth acetate (5:1) 3.67 4.00 3.67 4.67 4.00 4.00 1.33 3,67
25 Eth: Eth acetate (5:1) ND ND ND ND 1.33 ND ND ND
I Eth: Eth acetate (7:1) ND ND ND ND 1.00 ND ND ND
9 Met:n-hexane (5:1) ND ND ND ND 1.00 3.00 ND ND
11 Met:n-hexane (5:1) 5.00 3.00 4.00 3.00 4.67 4.33 2.33 4.00
10 Met:n-hexane (7:1) 4.33 4.33 3.33 3.67 6.00 5.00 2.33 3.00
12 Met:n-hexane (7:1) 4.67 ND ND ND 6.00 4.67 3.00 4.00
20 Met:n-hexane (7:1) ND ND ND ND ND 4.00 ND ND
21 Met:n-hexane (7:1) ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
K(+) chloramphenicol 13.83 11.67 13.00 11.67 14.00 13.56 13.33 8.33
Note: ND= Not Detected, 1=Staphylococcus aureus, 2= Micrococcus luteus, 3= Alcaligenes eutrophus,4=
Enterobacter aerogenes, 5=Flavobacterium gleum,6= Pseudomonas fluorescens, , 7= Serratia marcescens.
8=.Salmonella typhimurium
Result fractions from chromatography column extract seed fresh picung from Ethanol 50 %
extract shown in Tabe 2. ethanol: H20: 5:1 and methanol: H20: 7:1 inhibited the Gram positive
and negative bacteriathe eluent used semipolar. The eluent have semipolar and polar
component have antimicrobial activity. The extract isolated from Nicolaia speciosa have
component terpenoid, alcaloid, flavonoid and glycoside, have synergistic action to
Staphylococcus aureus, Salmonella typhimurium, Pseudomonas aeroginosa and Escherichia
coli (Kanazawa et al. 1995)
Table2. Antibacterial fractions extract fresh Pangium edule Reiw against Gram negative and positive bacteria.
Sample code Eluent Average diameter inhibition (mm)
Bacterial assay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Meth:H20: 5:1 5.00 5.00. 6.00 5.67 3.00 6.00 4.67 5.67
B Meth:H20: 5:1 4.00 2.33 5.00 2.00 4.00 5.67 5.67 5.00
C Meth:H20: 5:1 5.67 1.67 5.67 5.00 5.00 5.00 2.00 4.00
5 Meth:H20: 7:1 4.00 4.67 3.00 2.67 4.00 4.00 1.00 3.67
6 Meth:H20: 7:1 5.67 4.33 4.67 5.00 4.67 4.67 2.00 4.00
7 Meth:H20: 7:1 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
23 Eth: Eth acetate (5:1) 3.00 4.00 4.00 2.67 5.00 3.33 4.33 3.33
26 Eth: Eth acetate (5:1) ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
18 Eth: Eth acetate (5:1) ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
13 Met:n-hexane (7:1) 2.67 3.67 3.67 1.00 4.67 4.00 3.00 3,67
16 Met:n-hexane (5:1) ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
14 Met:n-hexane (7:1) 4.33 3.00 3.33 1.00 5.33 5.33 2.00 5.33
15 Met:n-hexane (7:1) 3.00 5.67 ND 2.67 6.00 4.33 2.33 4,67
K (+) choramphenicol 13.83 12.33 14.00 14.00 14.00 14.67 14.67 11.67
Note: ND= Not Detected, 1=Staphylococcus aureus, 2= Micrococcus luteus, 3= Alcaligenes eutrophus,4=
Enterobacter aerogenes, 5=Flavobacterium gleum,6= Pseudomonas fluorescens, , 7= Serratia marcescens.
8=.Salmonella typhimurium

Conclusions
Antimicrobial assays of fractions obtained using column chromatography of aquadest extract
of fresh seed of Pangium edule Reinw, which were eluted with methanol:H20 (5:1) and
ethanol-acetate (5:1); methanol: hexane (5:1 and 7:1) and fractions of 50% ethanol extract
which were eluted with methanol: H20 (5:1), ethanol: acetate (5:1) and methanol: hexane (7:1)
showed that the fractions inhibited growth of Gram positive and negative bacteria tested.
Keywords
Antibacterial activity, bioactive compounds, Gram positive and negative bacteria, Pangium
edule Reiw.
References
Andarwulan, N., S. Fardiaz, G. A. Waimena, & K. Shetty. 1999. Antioxidant activity associate with lipid and
phenolic mobilization during seeds germination of Pangium edule Reinw. Journal Agric. Food Chemistry. 47:
3158--3163.
Cowan, M.M,. 1999. Plant products as antimicrobial agents. Clinical microbiology reviews. American Society
for Microbiology: 564--582.
Digrak, M., A. Ilcim., M.H. Alma, & S. Sen. 1999. Antimicrobial activities of the extracts of various plants
(Valex, mimosa bark, gallnut powders, Salvia sp. and Phlomis sp.). Tr. J. of Biology. 23: 241--248.
Gilbert, P. 1984. The revival of microorganism sublethally injured by chemical inhibitors dalam M.H.E. Andrew,
& A.D. Russel (ed.). The Revival of injured microbes. Academic Press. London: 175—197.
Harborne, J.B. 1998. Phytochemical methods. A guide to modern techniques of plants analysis. Third edition.
Chapman & Hall, London: xii+302.
Kanazawa, A.T., T. Ikeda, & Endo. 1995. A novel approach to made of action on cationic biocides:
morphological effect on antibacterial activity. Journal Appl. Bacteriol. 78: 55--60.
Lim, S.H., I. Darah., & K. Jain. 2006. Antimicrobial activities of tannins extracted from Rhizophora apiculata
barks. Journal of Tropical Forest Science. 18 (1): 59--65.
Nuraida, L., & N.L.P. Nienaber, . 1995. Produksi asam γ- linolenat oleh kapang Mucor. Bul. Tek. dan Industri
Pangan. 6 (3): 66--73.
Sakar, M.K., D. Sohreto, M. Ozalp, E.K. Melike, S. Piacente, & C. Pizza. 2005. Polyphenolic compounds and
antimicrobial activity of Quercus aucheri Leaves. Turki Journal Chem. 29: 555--559.
Scalbert, A. 1991. Antimicrobial properties of tannins (Review article number 63). Phytochemistry. 31 (12):
1878--1883.
Widyasari, R.A.H.E. 2005. Teknologi pengawetan ikan Kembung (Rastreliger branchysoma) segar dengan
menggunakan bahan bioaktif alami biji picung (Pangium edule Reinw). Thesis Sekolah Pascasarjana IPB.
Bogor: iv+86 hlm.

Biosorption of Cr(Vi) by Psidium guajava

Staff : Sutrasno Kartohardjono1*
Student : M. Ali Lukman, C.F. Cahyani, G.P. Manik
Sponsor : DTK FTUI 2008
Email Contact : sutrasno@che.ui.edu
Disseminated at : Sutrasno Kartohardjono, M. Ali Lukman, C.F. Cahyani, G.P.
Manik, (2008). Biosorption of Cr(VI) by Psidium huajava,
Proceeding of International Conference on Sustainable
Environmental Technology for Tropical Region, Surabaya
1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Waste water containing heavy metals from industrial activities could contribute to
environmental danage. Heavy metals, such as chromium, copper, lead, cadmium, etc, are
dangerous environmental pollutants. Hexavalent chromium form is of particular because of its
greater toxicity (Arslan, 2007). Cr(VI) is soluble in the water in form of divalent oxy-anion,
chromate ion (CrO42-) and dichromate ion (Cr2O72-). Solutions which contain chromium ion
are used for electroplating industry, leather tanning, metals recovery, and neutralizing
cadmium, magnesium, zinc, etc (Yakup, 2005).
Several methods have been utilized to remove chromium from industrial wastewaters such as
direct precipitation (Kim, 2002) and reduction method (Lu, 2006). However, those methods
have disadvantages such as limited in application, high energy needs, and high cost operation.
Alternative methods have been conducted by some researchers to solve these advantages
especially in its high-cost operation problem. One of these alternative methods is biosorption.
Biosorption utilizes the ability of biological materials to accumulate heavy metals from waste
streams by either metabolically mediated or purely physico-chemical pathways of uptake
(Fourest, 1992). This research will employ leaves and fruits of Psidium guajava as biosorbent
for chromium adsorption process in solution containing chromium ion.

Experiments used colorimetric method to determine the concentration of dissolved hexavalent
chromium, Cr(VI), in artificial wastewater from K2Cr2O7 solution. This method can be used
to analyze samples containing Cr (VI) from 0.5 to 50 mg per liter. It used visible light
spectrophotometer to measure amount of chromium ion concentration filtrate. Filtrate
absorbance was determined photo metrically at wave length of 540 nm. In this method,
diphenylcarbazide solution, made from 250 mg 1,5-diphenylcarbazide and 50 mL acetone,
was used to increase filtrate solution absorbance. The sorbents used were crushed guava
leaves and fruits. All of these materials were obtained from local house yards; materials were
crushed by blender, washed, and then dried in the sun for two days. After drying, the
materials were kept in vacuum plastic ware. Filtrate concentration was determined from
calibration curve. Visible spectrophotometer was calibrated using sample solutions having
concentrations of 0; 2,5; 5; 7,5; and 10 mg/L. These samples were used for calibration curve
based on measurement of visible spectrophotometer in 540 nm.

Figure 1 shows that, as it is expected, the amount of Cr(VI) adsorbed increases with
increasing contact time. Mechanism of Cr (VI) adsorption by leaves and fruits of guava have
not been known before. Variation on pretreatment and preparation of biosorbent, method and
metal behavior can be considered to explain whether adsorption mechanism is ion exchange,

surface adsorption, chemical adsorption, chemical complexation or complexation adsorption

(Arslan, 2007). Electrostatic force, ion exchange and chemical complexation must be
considered in analyzing the effect of pH on Cr(VI) adsorption. Thus, the adsorption pattern in
acid condition is due to attract-electrostatic force between positive part of biosorbent surface
and HCrO4- anions of Cr(VI) from solution. On the other side, at pH 7 or 10, there will be a
competition between anion Cr(VI) and OH- from the solution, where OH- was very dominant
compare to anion Cr(VI).
Effect of temperature experiment to adsorption process is determined by varying temperature
operation to 25, 35, 45, and 50 0C. Temperature operations change affects to thermodynamic
parameters of adsorption process (Agarwal, 2006). Equilibrium constants for Cr(VI)
decreased as temperature increases for guava leaves and guava fruits as shown in Figure 2.
This phenomenon is due to the exothermic adsorption reactions of Cr(VI) ions with guava
leaves and fruits and the weakening of sorptive forces between the guava leaves and guava
fruits binding sites and the Cr(VI) ions, and between the adjacent molecules of the sorbed
phase.
By assuming activity coefficient is uniform at low concentration (Henry Law),
thermodynamic parameters can be determined using equation (Arslan, 2007):
C
K c = Ae (1)
C eq
∆G 0 = − RT ln K c (2)
∆S 0 ∆H
log K c = − (3)
2,303 R 2,303 RT
Kc is equilibrium constant, Ceq equilibrium concentration in solution (mg/L), and CAe solid
phase concentration at equilibrium (mg/L). ∆Go, ∆Ho, and ∆So represent change in free
energy, enthalpy, and entropy. From equation (3), ∆Ho, and ∆So were obtained by linear
Van’t Hoff plot of log Kc versus 1/T as shown in Figure 3. Correlations obtained by linear
regression for guajava leaves (3) and fruits (4) are:
y = 1894,3 X − 2,612 (4)
y = 1602,1X − 0,6299 (5)
To see the effect of initial concentration of chromium ions in solution, the experiments were
varied into 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80 mg/L at 1 atm and 25 0C. These experiments only conducted
at pH 2 and contact time of 90 minutes for guava leaves and 240 minutes for guava fruits.
Percentage of Cr(VI) adsorbed by guava leaves relatively constant in the range of initial
concentration observed, meanwhile, for guava fruits decrease with an increase in initial
concentration of Cr(VI) in the solution as shown in Figure 4. The decrease due to active sites
in biosorbent surface in solution has reached saturated condition so that biosorbent can not
adsorb chromium ions from solution any further.
Conclusions
Experiments have been conducted to adsorb Cr(VI) ion from the solution using guava leaves
and fruits as adsorbent. Experiment results showed that the adsorption process occur only at
pH 2. The mechanism of Cr(VI) ion binding to guava leaves and fruits may include surface
adsorption, physical adsorption, and chemical adsorptions. At pH 2, the experiment was
reached equilibrium condition for guava leaves and fruits at the contact time of 90 minutes
and 240 minutes, respectively, and percentage of chromium adsorbed reaching 99,7% for
initial chromium concentration of 10 mg/L. Meanwhile, for commercial powdered activated
carbon (PAC) at the same pH condition and operation conditions, the experiment has reached
equilibrium condition in contact time of 15 minutes. The equilibrium constants for Cr(VI)
adsorption and adsorptive capability of sorbents decreased with increasing temperature
indicated that biosorption processes using guava leaves and fruits were exothermic processes.
Cr(VI) biosorption on guava leaves and fruits were described only by the Freundlich isotherm
model. From adsorption isotherm experiment, the sorption capacities (Kf) of guava leaves and

fruits were 4.2 and 2.9 mmol/gram, respectively. Meanwhile, the intensity values of
adsorption processes (n) for both materials were 2.2 and 2.5, respectively. These intensity
values showed that guava leaves and fruits are very valuable as chromium adsorbent, or at
least are potential as biosorbent for chromium removal from wastewater.
Keywords
Biosorbent, biosorption.

100 8000
90
%Cr(VI) adsorrbed
80
6000
70
60 Leaves
fruits
leaves
Kc
50 PAC 4000
fruits
pH=7
40
pH=10
30
2000
20
10
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 295 300 305 310 315 320 325
Contact time (min.) T (K)

Figure 1. Variation of %CR(VI) absorbed with contact Figure 2. Variation of equilibrium constant, Kc, with
time temperature, T.
3.9 100
90
3.8
80
%Cr(VI) adsorbed
3.7 70
Log (K c)
60
3.6
leaves leaves
50
fruits fruits
3.5
40
3.4 30
20
3.3
10
3.2 0
0.00305 0.0031 0.00315 0.0032 0.00325 0.0033 0.00335 0.0034 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1/T (1/K) Intial Cr(VI) concentration (mg/L)
Figure 3. Variation of Log (Kc) with 1/T). Figure 4. Variation of %CR(VI) absorbed with
initial concentration of Cr(VI) in the solution.

References
Agarwal, G.S., Hitendra Kumar Bhuptawat and Sanjeev Chaudhari. (2006) Biosorption of aqueous chromium(VI)
by Tamarindus indica seeds. Bioresource Technology, 97, 949-956.
Arslan, Gulsin, Erol Pehlivan. (2007) Batch removal of chromium(VI) from aqueous solution by Turkish brown
coals. Bioresource Technology, 96, 2836-2845.
Fourest, E., Roux, J.C. (1992) Heavy metal biosorption by fungal mycelial byproducts: mechanisms and influence
of pH. Applied Microbiology. Biotechnology, 37, 399-403.
Kim, S.D., Park, K.S., Gu, M.B. (2002) Toxicity of hexavalent chromium to Daphnia magna: influence of
reduction reactionby ferrous iron”, Journal of Hazardous Materials, 93 (2), 155–164.
Lu, A., Zhong, S., Chen, J., Shi, J., Tang, J., Lu, X. (2006) Removal of Cr(VI) and Cr(III) from aqueous solutions
and industrial wastewaters by natural clino-pymhotite. Environmental Science Technology, 40(9), 3064-3069.
Yakup Arica, M., Gulay Bayrammoglu. (2005) Cr(VI) biosorption from aqueous solutions using free and
immobilized biomass of Lentinus sajor-caju: preparation and kinetic characterization. Colloids and Surfaces
A: Physicochem. Eng. Aspects, 253, 203–21.

Characterization of activated carbon as adsorbent from Riau coal by

physical activatin method
Staff : M. Idrus Alhamid1, Bambang Suryawan1 and Nasruddin1
Student : Awaludin Martin2* and Sehat Abdi2
Sponsor : Habah Bersaing and PHK A3 DTM-FTUI
Email contact : mamak@eng.ui.ac.id
Desseminated at : Alhamid, M. Idrus d, Bambang Suryawan, Nasruddin, Awaludin
Martin, Sehat Abdi, Characterization of Activated Carbon as
Adsorbent From Riau Coal by Physical Activatin Method, The First
International Meeting on Advances in Thermo-fluids, Universiti
Teknologi Malaysia, Malaysia, 26th August 2008

1
Refrigeration & air condition Laboratory, Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering-
Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering-Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Activated carbon consumption is continuously being increased because they are used in
important areas such as waste, drinkable water treatments, atmospheric pollution control,
poisonous gas separation, solvent recovery (Marsh, Harry et al. 2006 and B. Serrano-
Talavera et al. 1997) . In addition, as is well-known, any cheap carbonaceous material can be
used as a raw material for the production of activated carbons such as wood, peat, fruit nuts,
petroleum coke, bones, coconut shell, and coals. Anthracite and bituminous coals have been
the major sources (B. Serrano-Talavera et al. 1997 and Yang, Ralph. T, 2003).
The modern manufacturing processes to produce activated carbon basically involve the
following steps: raw material preparation, low-temperature carbonization, and activation. An
adsorbent with a highly developed porosity and a correspondingly large surface area is
obtained only by activating the carbonized material either by physical or chemical activation4.
In the present study, Riau coals were chosen as precursors of activated carbon by physical
activation method and describes the influence of the activation duration on the development
of the surface structure, this paper also describe the CO2 adsorption on activated carbon.
Experimental section
Coal Characteristics
Riau coals were used as the starting material. The analyses of the raw coals are shown in
Table 1. The as-received coals were crushed and seived to a particle size of 5-10 mm before
being treated.

Table 1: Content of Riau Coal (Certificate of Sampling and Analysis, 2007)
Unsure %
Inherent Moisture 5,59 %
Ash Content 17,96 %
Volatile Matter 34,51 %
Fixed Carbon 41,94 %
Total Sulphur 1,74 %
Production of Activated Carbon

The production of activated carbons by a physical activation technique was completed in an
vertical autoclave activation reactor with a furnace. The processing steps used to produce the
activated carbons were as follows: Carbonization; Pyrolysis of fresh coals were performed in
a furnace under a stream of N2 at ± 80 cm3/minute. The samples were heated at around 7.5
°C/min from room temperature to maximum heat treatment temperatures in 900 °C for 1

hour. Activation; Following the carbonization process, the char samples were gasified, also in
the furnace, in a stream of CO2 at ± 80 cm3/minute. The samples were heated at around 7.5
°C/min from room temperature to maximum heat treatment temperatures in 950 °C for 60
(RU1), 90 (RU2), 120 (RU3), 150 (RU4), and 180 (RU5) minute. After activation process,
the activated carbon were crushed to granule size 10x20 mesh. Activated carbons with
various degrees of burn-off were prepared. Figure 1 presents a schematic of the process.

(a) (b)
Figure 1. Schematic of the process (a); Schematic of equipment to produce activated carbon

Effect of activation time
In this work the result for five activation time were compared. Table 2 describe the effect of
activation time on amount of carbon, longer activation time result in higher amount of carbon.
Table 2: Presentation of carbon on material (%)

Fixed carbon Riau Coal 41.94
Activated carbon; 60 minute activation process 75.22
Activated carbon; 180 minute activation process 88.19
Figure 2 describe the effect of activation time on burn-off and surface area. It can be seen
from figure 2, in general longer activation time result in higher burn-off and surface area. This
result was consistent with Marsh, Harry et al., 2006, that activation process influence of heat
rate, mass flow rate of activating agent, activating agent, equipment and activation time.
50 250
Burn off
Surface Area
48 200
Surface Area (m2/gr)
Burn off (%)
46 150
44 100
42 50
40 0
60 90 120 150 180
Activation time (minute)
Figure 2. Effect of activation time on burn-off and surface area
Adsorption CO2 activated carbon

The method of volumetric adsorption isotherms of CO2 on activated carbon at 30 °C based on
Belal, Dawoud et al. 2003 are shown in Figure 3. The adsorption isotherms of CO2 was higher
on RU5 than RU3. This indicated that RU5 have surface area and total pore volume higher
than RU. Adsorption capacity CO2 on RU5 is 48.3 mgr/gr activated carbon in 1 hour and
adsorption capacity CO2 on RU3 is 44.1 mgr/gr activated carbon in 1 hour. This result was
consistent with Yang, Ralph. T, 2003 that adsorption isotherm of adsorbate on adsorbent

influences of capacity of activated carbon. Adsorption capacity CO2 commercial activated

carbon is 68.9 mgr/gr in 1 hour, around 1.5 times from RU5 and RU3.

(a) (b)
Figure 3. CO2 Adsorption on activated carbon at pressure equilibrium 1.5 bar (a); Schematic kinetic adsorption test
rig (b)
Conclusion
Riau coals were proven to be feasible materials for activated carbon preparation by a physical
activation method at 950oC. Activation time influences of burn-off, surface area, structure of
activated carbon and adsorption isothermal. Long activation time resulting better quality of
activated carbon and in this study the optimum activation time was 180 minute.
Acknowledgment
This research was supported by the Higher Education Directorate, National Education
Department of Republic Indonesia, through Project Hibah Bersaing and Contract
Nomor. 239 AT/DRPM-UI/N14/2008 and Mechanical Department, Faculty of Engineering,
Universitas Indonesia, through Project Hibah PHK A-3 respectively.
Refferences
B. Serrano-Talavera, M. J. Mun˜ oz-Guillena, A. Linares-Solano, and C. Salinas-Martıńez de Lecea, 1997,
Activated Carbons from Spanish Coals. 3. Preoxidation Effect on Anthracite Activation, Energy & Fuels 1997,
11, 785-791.
Certificate of Sampling and Analysis, 2007, PT. Superintending Company of Indonesia (Sucofindo).
Dawoud, Belal, Yuri Aristov, 2003, Experimental Study on The Kinetics of Water Vapor Sorption on Selective
Water Sorbent, Silica Gel and Alumina Under Typical Operating Conditions of Sorption Heat Pumps,
International Jounal of Heat and Mass Transfer, pp 273-281.
Manocha, Satish. M, 2003, Porous Carbons, Sadhana volume 28 part 1&2 pp 335-348, India.
Marsh, Harry, Francisco Rodriguez-Reinoso, 2006, Activated Carbon, Elsevier Ltd, London, UK.
Yang, Ralph. T, 2003, Adsorbents: Fundamentals and Applications, John wiley and Sons Inc, New Jersey.

Characterization of killer toxin secreated by mycocinogenic yeasts

originating from Cibodas Botanical Garden
Staff : A. Salamah1*, A. Oetari1
Student : D.G.Davina1, S.P. Anasti1
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : ama_jp@yahoo.com; salamah@ui.ac.id;andi.salamah@gmail.com
Disseminated at: Andi Salamah1*, Aryanti Oetari1, Dafina Ghassani Nurlaili,
Stephanie Prima Anasti and Asri Martini Wulani Characterization of
mycocinogenic yeasts isolated from Cibodas Botanical Garden
against Food’s contaminant yeasts. Proceeding The 2nd UKM-
FMIPA UI Joint Seminar 2009, Bangi, Selangor, Malaysia

1
Department of Biology, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
Introduction
In accordance with the increasing of human population in the world, food and drink products
have become the most important and dynamic industrial sectors. Microbial spoilage is a
serious problem for the food industry as fungal contamination can occur during processing as
well as handling of the end products. Since yeasts can generally resist extreme conditions
better than bacteria, they are often found in products with low pH and in those containing
preservatives ( Deak, 2007; Moreira et al., 2001; Suriyarachchi, & Fleet 1981), To counterfeit
spoilage, some manufacturers add benzoate or sorbate to food or drink products. However,
under certain conditions some yeasts and molds may also be resistant to inhibition by sorbate
(Piper et al., 2001, Stratford, 2007) These finding lead us to search an alternative preservative
to prevent bacterial and fungal spoilage. Some yeasts strains produce and excrete extracellular
toxins, mycocins, which are lethal to other sensitive yeasts and fungi (Golubev, 1998).
Various potential applications of killer yeasts and their toxins have been studied (Marquina et
al., 2002; Guyard et al., 2002); . They can be used to eliminate undesirable contaminating
yeasts during fermentations by conferring the killer character on starter strains and can be
considered as bio-control agents in the preservation foods (Ciani & Fatichenti, 2004). The
killer activity and protein profiles of 18 selected yeast strains isolated from leaves and fruits
grown in Cibodas Botanical Garden were presented here.

Killer activity test
Killer sensitivity was assayed using seeded-agar-plate technique according to Buzzini &
Martini (2000). Spoilage yeasts grown in YM slant medium was suspended in sterile water
(~108cells/mL) and plated as a lawn onto KM-MB agar. Killer toxins from potential
mycocinogenic strains were prepared by growing yeasts in a pH 4.4 buffered liquid KM
medium without methylene blue at 300 C, and harvested daily until 3 days. Yeast cells were
isolated by centrifugation at 3000 x g for 10 min at 300 C and the supernatant filtered through
sterile 0.45-µm polivinyliden fluoride membrane before precipitated with cold ethanol with
final concentration of 70%. All the samples (supernatant, filtrate and precipitant) used in this
study was kept at 40 C. The activity of killer toxins was tested using lysis zone assay by
pippeting 0.1 mL of samples in wells (10 mm in diameter) cut into agar. The plates were
incubated at 300 C and were observed daily for 3 days. If the killer reference strain was
surrounded by a clear zone of growth inhibition, the lawn spoilage yeast was declared
sensitive. The lawn strain was considered killer resistant if there was no clear zone of growth
(Izgu & Altinbay, 2004; Vital et al., 2002) The confirmation of activity was obtained through
triplicate-plating techniques.

SDS-PAGE analysis
Supernatant of the potential yeast cells were subjected to electrophoresis for a total of 1 h,
following the method described by Laemmli (1970) under denaturing conditions, using a 12%
acrylamide gel with coomasie brilliant blue staining. The molecular mass was determined by
comparing the mobility of the purified protein with that of known marker proteins (pre-
stained broad range, Bio-Rad).

SDS-PAGE results showed that the toxin moved in five different running patterns of 12 % of
gel electrophoresis. No band was detected from UICC Y-324, Y-331,Y-343, Y-367, Y-385
and Y-391. Strains from Rhodotorula (Y-318, Y-325, Y-332, Y-381, Y-384 and Y-386)
showed similar pattern detected at position around 35 kDa, 49 kDa and 100 kDa. Major
bands were detected at position around 31 kDa; 39 kDa, 70 kDa and 80 kDa for Candida
rancensis UICC Y-326. Cryptococcus aethanolamini UICC Y-322 showed similar pattern of
bands to C. rancensis UICC Y-326, with little differences at lower bands position (Figure 1).
The killer activity test showed that amongts 18 tested strains used in this study, prominent
clear zone of growth inhibition was observed in 2 strains of phylloplane yeast (Cryptococcus
aethanolamini UICC-322 and Candida rancensis UICC Y-326), while Cryptococcus
aethanolamini UICC-379 (Figure 2A). and UICC Y-319 (data not shown) showed weak
activity. No inhibition zone was observed in other strains (Rhodotorula UICC Y-318, Y-325,
Y-332, Y-381, Y-384 and Y-386; Cr. laurentii UICC Y-324, Candida rancensis UICC Y-
331; Deb. nepalensis UICC Y-328 and Y-343; Metschnikowia reukaufii UICC Y-351;
Sporidiobolus pararoseus UICC Y-367, and Pseudozyma aphidis UICC Y-391). The activity
of killer strains was stable when kept at 40 C. However, the activity was destroyed by heating
at 1000 C (Figure 2B). This result is consistent with that reported by Izgu & Altinbay (2004).
They showed that killer activity of K5 type toxin of Pichia anomala NCYC 344 was stable at
temperatures 4 - 300 C, but decreased up to 60% when incubated at 50º - 100ºC for 1 h. The
mycocinogenic activity demonstrated by Cr. aethanolamini UICC Y-322 (basidiomycetous)
and Candida rancensis (ascomycetous) UICC Y-326, showed a wide spectrum for inhibition
activity due to their ability to inhibit the spoilage yeasts of different taxonomical groups.
209 209
kDa kDa
124 124
kDa kDa
80 80
kDa kDa
379 331 328 322 391 385 367 343 324
209 209
kDa kDa
124 124
kDa kDa
80 80
kDa kDa
384 379 351 328 326 322 319 386 384 381 332
Figure 1. SDS Polyacrylamide Gel Electrophoresis (12%) of 11 mycocinogenic potential strains of phylloplane
yeast.

A Y- B
Y-
Y- Boiled

Figure 2. Well test of killer activity. A Cells lawn of yogurt spoilage yeast was made in KM-MB agar (pH 4.4) d
0.1 mL of yeast supernatant (A). Boiled supernatant for 5 min at 1000 C (B) were deposited onto the lawn. Arrow
indicates the clear zone of growth inhibition
Conclusion
The results presented here clearly demonstrated that phylloplane yeasts, especially
Cr.aethanolamini UICC Y-322 and C.rancensis UICC Y-326 can supress the growth of
spoilage yeast isolated from yogurt and could be promote as an alternate biopreservative in
food industry. Futher studies are needed to reveal the molecular basis of killer phenomenon.
Keywords
Killer activity, mycocin, SDS-PAGE, yeast, yogurt.
Acknowledgement
This study was supported by Universitas Indonesia Competitive Research (RUUI) 2008 grant
#240A/DRPM-UI/N1.4/2008.
References
Buzzini, P & A. Martini. 2000. Utilization of differential killer toxin sensitivity patterns for fingerprinting and
clustering yeast strains belonging to different genera. System Applied Microbiology. 23: 450--457.
Ciani, M & F. Fatichenti. 2001. Killer toxin of Kluyveromyces phaffii DBVPG 6076 as a biopreservative agent to
control apiculate wine yeasts. Applied and Environmental Microbiology. 67(7):3058-3063.
Deak,T. 2007. Handbook of Food Spoilage Yeasts. (2nd Ed.) CRC Press, Boca Raton: 360
Golubev, W. 1998. Mycocins (killer toxins). Dalam: Kurtzman, C.P & J.W.Fell (eds). 1998. The yeast: A
taxonomic study. 4th ed. Elsevier, Amsterdam: 55--62.
Guyard, C., E. Dehecq, J.P.Tissier, L. Polonelli, E.D. Cas, J.C. Cailliez & F.D. Menozzi. 2002. Involvement of b
glucans in the wide-spectrum antimicrobial activity of Williopsis saturnus var mrakii MUCL 41968 killer
toxin. Molecular Medicine. 8(11): 686—694.
Izgu, F & D. Altinbay. 2004. Isolation and characterization of K-5 type yeast killer protein and its homology with
an exo-b-1,3 glucanase. Biosci.Biotechnol. Biochem. 68 (3): 685—693.
Laemmli, U.K. 1970. Cleavage of structural protein during the assembly of the head of bacteriophage T4. Nature.
227: 680-685.
Marquina, D., A. Santos & J.M. Peinado. 2002. Biology of killer yeasts. International Microbiolgy: Reviev article.
5: 65—71.
Moreira, S.R., R.F. Schwan, E.P. de Carvalho & A.E. Wheals. 2001. Isolation and identification of yeasts and
filamentous fungi from yogurts in Brazil. Brazilian Journal of Microbiology. 32: 117--122.
Piper, P., C.O. Calderon, K. Hatzixanthis & M. Mollapour. 2001. Weak acid adaptation: the stress response that
confers yeasts with resistance to organic acid food preservatives. Microbiology. 147: 2635-2642.
Stratford, M., A. Plumridge & D.B. Archer. 2007. Decarboxylation of sorbic acid by spoilage yeasts is associated
with the PAD1 gene. Applied and Environmental Mycrobiology. 73(20): 6534—6542.
Suriyarachchi, V.R. & G.H. Fleet. 1981. Occurance and growth of yeasts in yogurts. Applied and Environmental
Microbiology. 42(3): 574–579.
Vital, M.J.S., J.Abranches, A.N. Hagler & L.C. Mendonca-Hagler. 2002. Mycocinogenic yeast isolated from
Amazon soil of the Maraca EcologicalStation, Roraima-Brazil. Brazilian Journal of Microbiology. 33: 230--
235.

Combination of cellulase and celubiase for bioethanol production

from bagasse and waste paper through Simultaneous
Saccharification and Fermentation (SSF)
Staff : M. Gozan1*, Heri Hermansyah1, Mohammad Nasikin1, Bambang
Prasetya2
Student : Muhammad Samsuri
Sponsor : INSENTIF RISTEK 2006-2007
Email Contact : mgozan@che.ui.edu
Disseminated at : Renewable Energy Congress X, Glasgow, Scotland, 19-25 July 2008
1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI, Depok 16424, INDONESIA, Telp. 62
21 7863516, Fax: 62 21 7863515, http://www.ui.edu or http://www.chemeng.ui.ac.id/~mgozan/
2
Research Center for Biotechnology, Indonesian Institute of Science (LIPI) Cibinong, Indonesia
Introduction
Ethanol productions are mostly derived from starch or sucrose [Gong et al., 1999]. Expansion
of ethanol production for biofuel should not compete for food. Lignocellulose is abundant
material available in forestry, domestic and agricultural residues. Sugarcane bagasse
(Saccharum officinarum) is a potential renewable biomass resource, since it is readily
available and considerably inexpensive. Our research aims to obtain novel process for the
production of ethanol from bagasse and old paper. The propose process combines enzymatic
hydrolysis, subsequent physical treatment with steam, biological treatments with selective
lignin-degrading white rot fungi, and combination of both treatments process. Hydrolysis and
fermentation were performed in the same reactor and simultaneously occurred. Thus, the
presence of yeast together with the cellulolytic enzyme complex reduces the accumulation of
sugars within the reactor, thereby increasing yield and saccharification rate with respect to
separate saccharification and fermentation. Another advantage of this approach is that a single
fermentor is used for the entire process, thereby curbing the investment costs.
Method
Bagasse was obtained from a sugar factory in Lampung and East Java. Sugarcane bagasse
was milled, screened (30-60-mesh), air-dried to a final humidity 10% and stored under dry
conditions. The same method was used for old newspaper and oldpaper. P. ostreatus ATCC
66376, C. subvermispora ATCC 90467, L. endodes IFO 6654 and Saccharomyces cerevisiae
AM12 were precultured on PDA. Cellulase (Meicellase from Trichoderma viride, Meiji Seika
Co. Ltd.) and cellubiase (98%, Sigma-Aldrich, Slovakia) were used. Lignin, holocellulose, α-
cellulose and hemicellulose contents were analyzed by Klason lignin and Wise methods,
respectively. Ethanol concentration was determined by GC using SUPELCOWAX-10
(Supelco Inc., 0.53 mm i.d., 15 m, 0.5 mm) oven temperature at 50oC of a Shimadzu GC-14A
GC.

Ethanol production with enzymes
Combination of enzyme cellulase and cellubiase increased ethanol production from bagasse
by SSF using Saccharomycess cerevisiae AM12. The highest ethanol concentration was
achieved after hydrolysis by enzyme cellulase-cellubiase in SSF at pH=5 up to 6.94 g/L. This
result indicated that although cellulase has a group of cellobiases (β-glucosidase), it can not
optimally convert cellubiose (disaccharides) to glucose.
Hydrolysis of cellulose to glucose is often followed by partial hydrolysis of cellulose to
cellubiose. Thus, addition of cellubiase enhances the conversion of cellulose to ethanol. The

experiments were carried out at pH = 5. The ethanol production during incubation time of 0-
48 h increased very significantly, whereas after 48 h incubation different result was occurred.
These results indicated that incubation more than 48 h the enzyme and yeast were not so
effective in converting bagasse to ethanol. Fermentation period or incubation time to achieve
constant ethanol yield in this experiments was shorter compared to other studies. Ballesteros
et al. (2004), reported that the maximum ethanol production from biomass using
Kluyveromyces marxianus CECT 10875 and enzyme cellulase was done on fermentation
period of 72-82 hr. Other study showed 72-82h incubation time to achieve final ethanol
concentration using thermo-tolerant yeast and enzyme cellulase at 10% substrate by SSF of
lignocelluloses waste (including bagasse) [Adrados et al., 2005].
The highest yield of ethanol production of bagasse was 13.87% based on original bagasse or
27.74% based on cellulose.
Conversion of bagasse to ethanol with combination of enzyme cellulase-cellubiase was
48.87% and the conversion of bagasse to ethanol with enzyme cellulose only was 42.03%.
The increase was about 6.8% as cellulase-cellubiase was used. Conversion was calculated
from the highest ethanol yield from experiment (13.87% based on original bagasse or 27.74%
based on cellulose), compared with maximum yield from theoretical (28.43% based on
original bagasse or 56.86% based on cellulose).
Effect of combination of these enzymes also have been examined on old newspaper and
paper. The combination of enzymes increased ethanol production especially in newspaper.
Effects of pre-treatment
Combination of white rot fungi C. subvermispora and steam (180oC) increased ethanol
production from bagasse. Ethanol production after incubation time 48h, 72 and 96h was about
12.73, 12.82 and 12.86 g/L, respectively (Fig. 1). The increasing of ethanol yield by
combination of fungal treatments and steam treatments were ascribed to increase in
accessibility of cellulolytic enzymes to cellulose by decomposing Lignin surrounding the
polysaccharide and solubilised of lignin and hydrolytic degradation of hemicellulose in steam.
C. subvermispora is known as a selective white-rot fungus that degrades lignin in wood cell
walls without penetration of its extra cellular enzymes into the cell wall region [Watanabe et
al., 2003].
15.0
12.0
Ethanol concentrations (g/L)
9.0
6.0
Control
C. subvermispora
3.0 180 C
C. Subvermipora + 180
0.0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Incubation time (h)
Figure 1. Ethanol production with enzyme cellulase-cellubiase using combination steam at 180oC for 60 minutes
and white rot fungi treatment for 8 weeks
White rot fungi like C. subvermispora, L. edodes are selective lignin degrading fungi that are
able to decompose lignin in bagasse without intensive damage to cellulose [Samsuri et al.,
2005]. Yuan-ZongLai concluded that the reactivity and accessability of cellulose and lignins
depend on many factors such as crystalline and supramolecular structrure [1996]. The other
aspect water has an unusually high dielectric constant that enables ionic substances to
dissociate. Water is able to dissolve all of the lignin and hemicellulose. Steam cleaves
hemiacetal linkages in biomass, so that access of cellulase-cellubiase to polysaccharides is
easier (Antal, 1996).

Calculations on ethanol yield (in %-tage) with combination of steam (180oC) and white rot
fungi (C. subvermispora) treatments showed the highest ethanol yield was 25.72%, based on
original bagasse; or 51.44%, based on cellulose). Theoretically, the maximum yield of ethanol
production from bagasse was 28.43% (based on original bagasse) or 56.86% (based on
cellulose). This result indicated that 90.02% of theoretical yield was achieved if bagasse
converted to ethanol with enzyme cellulose-cellubiase and combination of steaming and white
rot fungi treatment on SSF. Conversion was calculated from the highest ethanol yield from
experiment (25.72% based on original bagasse or 51.44% based on cellulose), compared with
maximum yield from theoretical (28.43% based on original bagasse or 56.86% based on
cellulose).
Conclusions
Combination of cellulase and cellubiase increased ethanol production from bagasse by SSF
using Saccharomycess cerevisiae. The highest ethanol concentration was 6.94 g/L, this was an
increase of 16% if compared with ethanol concentration using enzyme cellulase only (5.98
g/L). The conversion of bagasse to ethanol was 48.87%, It was an increase of 6.84%
compared with cellulase only (42.03%). This combination of cellulase and cellubiase also
increased ethanol production from oldnewspaper and old paper raw materials.
Pre-treatment with combination white rot fungi (C. subvermispora) and steam treatments
increased ethanol production very significantly. The highest ethanol production was 12.86g/L.
The highest ethanol yield was 25.72%, based on original bagasse or 51.44%, based on
cellulose. The conversion of bagasse to ethanol was 90.02%, which meant an increase of
51.11% compared to ethanol conversion with cellulase-cellubiase without pre-treatment
(48.87%).
Acknowledgment
The Ministry of Research and Technology (MoRT) of the Republic of Indonesia are
gratefully acknowledged for their financial supports to this research through INSENTIF
scheme (No:126/MKp/XI/2006).
Keywords
bagasse, bioethanol, cellulase, celubiase, fermentation, enzymes, saccharification.
References
Adrados, B. P., P.Choteborska, M. Galbe and G. Zacchi. (2005) Ethanol production from non-strach
carbohydrastes of wheat bran. Bioresource technology. 96: 843 – 850.
Ballesteros, M., Oliva, J.M., Negro, M.J., Manzanares,p., Ballesteros, I. (2004) Ethanol from lignocellulosic
material by a simultaneous saccharification and fermentation process (SFS) with Kluyveromyces marxianus
CET 1087, Process. Biochem. 39:1843-1848.
Samsuri, M., E. Hermiati, B. Prasetya, Y. Honda and T. Watanabe., (2005) Pre-treatment for ethanol production
from bagasse by Simultaneous Sacharificatin and Fermentation. In Towards ecology and economy
harmonization of tropical forest resources. Japan, Proceeding of the 6th Intern Wood Science Symposium 288-
294.
Watanabe T. (2003). Microbial degradation of lignin-carbohydrate complexes In: Koshijima T, Watanabe T (eds),
Association Between lignin and carbohydrates in wood and other plant tissues. Berlin, Springer verlag. 237-
287.
ZongLai, Y., (1996) Chemical modification of lignocellulosic materials: reactivity and accessibility of cellulose,
hemicellulose and lignins. New york, 35-95.

Cryosurvival of goramy (Osphronemus goramy, Lacepede 1801)

spermatozoa after subzero freezing
Staff : Abinawanto1*, Retno Lestari1, and Sunarya Wargasasmita2
Student : Mariana Intan D. Bayu1
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : abinawanto.ms@ui.edu; abi_62@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Abinawanto1*, Retno Lestari1, and Sunarya Wargasasmita2
(2009)Cryosurvival of goramy (Osphronemus goramy, Lacepede
1801) spermatozoa after subzero freezing. Proceeding The 2nd
UKM-UI Joint Seminar 2009, Bangi, Selangor, Malaysia
1
Genetics laboratory, Department of Biology, FMIPA-Universitas Indonesia, Depok 16424, Indonesia
2
Ecology laboratory, Department of Biology, FMIPA-Universitas Indonesia, Depok 16424, Indonesia
Introduction
Indonesia is one of the two megabiodiversity countries in the world, besides Brazil. About 44
out of 360 species of freshwater fish are endemic in Indonesia (World Conservation
Monitoring Centre, 1992). Indonesian giant goramy (Osphronemus goramy, Lacepede 1801)
is an indigenous species in Indonesian fresh water which also has very important economic
value (Sunarma et . 2007). Those of endemic (local) species are getting extinct if exploited in
uncontrolable. There were two strategies in order to protect those of local (endemic) species,
either by in situ (re-stocking) or by ex situ conservation (cryopreservation). Cryopreservation
is a process to maintain genetic material in subzero freezing. The expectation result of the
cryopreserved materials were still performed in good physiological function. The successful
of cryopreservation were influenced by cryoprotectant and extender. The methodologies,
development and application of cryopreservation of fish spermatozoa were reported some for
species: carp (Withler, 1982; Harvey, 1983; Horvath et al, 2003), rainbow trout (Stoss &
Donaldson, 1983) and other salmonids (Harvey et al., 1982). This communication presents
the preliminary results from the study of goramy spermatozoa cryosurvival at different
extender (skim milk and sucrose).

Collection of ejaculated semen
Mature male goramies obtained from a private commercial hatchery were brought into
laboratory. The ejaculates from a total of four male goramies were collected by hand
stripping, 7—8 hours after injected intra-muscularly with Ovaprim at a dose of 0.7 ml/kg
body weight according to modification method of Sunarma et al. (2007).
Semen dilution
The ejaculated semen were diluted with the solvent (15% skim milk-fish ringer + 10%
methanol; 1 : 5) according to Harvey (1983) or (0.5% sucrose-Kurokura II + 10% methanol;
1 : 9) according to Horvath et al. (2003).
Equilibration and freezing
Samples were stored in 2 ml cryogenic tube, equilibrated at temperature 4 °C for 0 (for 0.5%
sucrose) and 10 minutes (for 15% skim milk), respectively according to the modification
method of He & Woods (2003). Samples were then stored in -34 °C (deep freezer) for 24
hours.
Post-thaw parameters examined
After thawing by immersing the cryogenic tubes in a waterbath at 40 °C for 13 sec., each
sample was then evaluated for the following parameters using a light microscope with the aid
of a digital eye-piece connected to the computer (image driving software; Scopephoto 2.0.4):

the percentage of spermatozoa motility, viability, abnormality, and the total spermatozoa per
mililiter ejaculate.

Fresh semen were whitish color, pH 8, and 100 µl of volume per ejaculate. The viable or
motile sperm showed green color (transparent) on the sperm head, while the non-viable sperm
showed pink or red color on the sperm head (Fig. 1). Most of the abnormal sperm has bigger
head (Fig. 1).The percentage of sperm viability, motility, abnormality, and spermatozoa
concentration of fresh semen were: 86%, 72.73%, 13%, and 22.75 x 107 cell/ml, respectively.
While post-thawed sperm (diluted with 0.5% sucrose-Kurokura II + 10% methanol) showed:
36%, 12.12%, 30%, and 1.97 x 107 cell/ml, respectively. On the other hand, post-thawed
sperm (diluted with 15% skim milk-fish ringer + 10% methanol) showed: 27%, 66.67%, 35%,
and 4.88 x 107 cell/ml, respectively. The highest post-thawed sperm viability (36%) was the
combination of 0.5% sucrose-Kurokura II extender and 10% methanol, while the highest
post-thawed sperm motility (66.67%) was the combination of 15% skim milk-Fish ringer and
10% methanol. The lowest post-thawed sperm abnormality (30%) was the combination of
0.5% sucrose-Kurokura II extender and 10% methanol, while the highest post-thawed sperm
concentration (4.88 x 107 cell/ml ejaculate) was the combination of 15% skim milk-fish ringer
and 10% methanol. All of the percentage of sperm viability, motility, abnormality, and
spermatozoa concentration were showed in Table 1.

viable/motile sperm
non‐viable/abnormal sperm
Figure 1. Spermatozoa profile (Eosin Y; 10 x 40)
Table 1. The pre-freezed and the post-thawed sperm profile

Treatment The percentage of sperm
Viability Motility Abnormality Concentration (cell/ml)
Pre-freezed (fresh) semen 86% 72.73% 13% 22.75 x 107
10% Methanol + 0.5% Sukcrose-Kurokura II 36% 12.12% 30% 1.97 x 107
10%Metanol + 15% Skim milk-Fish Ringer 27% 66.67% 35% 4.88 x 107
Although Kurokura II and Fish Ringer are the commonly used extender for freezing fish
sperm, the process for preparing the extender involves complicated procedures including
storage for one or more days prior to use in addition to microbiological problems. Moreover,
there are considerable individual differences in the fertilizing capacity of cryopreserved fish
spermatozoa frozen either in Kurokura II- or Fish Ringer-based extender. Thus, an improved
system for cryopreservation of fish spermatozoa is required for successful breeding programs.
Skim milk and sucrose are extract from biological products, however, both of them are
commercially available as a reagent and widely used as a cryoprotective additive in carp
(Harvey, 1983; Horvath et al., 2003), mouse (Nakagata, 2000), goat (Dorado et al., 2007),
and canine spermatozoa (Abe et al. 2008). In addition, sufficient exposure time to the
cryoprotectants may be a critical factor for the viability of frozen goramy spermatozoa.
According to Bergeron et al. (2007), skim milk prevents the binding of seminal plasma
protein to bull sperm and reduces sperm lipid loss while also maintaining sperm motility and
viability during storage at 4°C.
Conclusion
The results presented here clearly demonstrate that an effective, simple extender composed of
skim milk-fish ringer or sucrose-Kurokura II with methanol are available for the
cryopreservation of goramy spermatozoa as an alternative to extender, and may be contribute
to efficient exchange of genetic materials.

Aknowledgements
This study was supported by Universitas Indonesia Competitive Research (RUUI) 2008 grant
#240 AT/DRPM-UI/I.4 2008.
Keywords
Cryosurvival, Osphronemus goramy spermatozoa, 0.5% sucrose, 15% skim milk, 10%
methanol.
References
Abe, Y., D-S, Lee, H. Sano, K. Akiyama, Y. Yanagimoto-Ueta, T. Asano, Y. Suwa, & H. Suzuki. 2008. Artificial
insemination with canine spermatozoa frozen in a skim milk/glucose-based extender: Technical note. Journal
of Reproduction and Development. 54: 290--294.
Bergeron, A., Y. Brindle, P. Blondin, & P. Manjunath. 2007. Milk caseins decrease the binding of the major
bovine seminal plasma proteins to sperm and prevent lipid loss from the sperm membrane during sperm
storage. Biology of Reproduction 77: 120—126.
Dorado, J., I. Rodriguez, & M. Hidalgo. 2007. Cryopreservation of goat spermatozoa: comparison of two freezing
extenders based on post-thaw sperm quality and fertility rate after artificial insemination. Theriogenology 68:
168—177.
He, S & C. Woods. 2003. The effect of osmolality, cryoprotectant and equlibration time on striped bass Morone
saxatilis sperm motility. Journal of the World Aquaculture Society 34(3): 255--265.
Harvey, B. 1983. Cryopreservation of Sarotherodon mossambicus spermatozoa. Aquaculture 32: 313--320.
Harvey, B. & M. J. Ashwood-Smith, 1982. Cryoprotectant penetration and supercooling in the eggs of salmonid
fishes. Cryobiology 19: 29—40.
Horvath, A., E. Miskolczi & B. Urbanyi. 2003. Cryopreservation of common carp sperm. Aquatic Living
Resources 16: 457--460.
Nakagata, N. 2000. Cryopreservation of mouse spermatozoa. Mammalia Genome 11: 572—576.
Stoss, J. & E. M. Donaldson, 1983. Studies on cryopreservation of eggs from rainbow trout (Salmo gairdneri) and
coho salmon (Onchorchynchus kisutch). Aquaculture 31: 51—65.
Sunarma, A., D. W. Hastuti & Y. Sistina. 2007. Utilization of honey as an extender combined to different
cryoprotectant on sperm cryopreservation of nilem (Indonesian Sharkminnow, Osteochiius hasseltii
Valenciennes, 1842). Indonesian Aquaculture Conference: 1—9.
WCMC (=World Conservation Monitoring Centre). 1992. Global biodiversity: Status of the earth’s living
resources. Chapman & Hall, London: xviii + 585 hlm.
Withler, F.C. 1982. Cryopreservation of spermatozoa of some freshwater fishes cultured in South and Southeast
Asia. Aquaculture 26: 395--398.

Current status of research and implementation of bioenergy in

Indonesia
Staff : M. Gozan1*
Student : --
Sponsor : Asian Federation of Biotechnology (AFOB)
Disseminated at : Bioenergy Korea Conference 2008 International Symposium, April
8-9, 2008 at KDJ-Convention Center in Gwangju, Korea
1
Introduction
One of the most important messages in The World Summit on Sustainable Development in
year 2002 is the prediction of energy supply in the next 50 years that will become more and
more difficult. By that time, the energy demand will double what we need nowadays.
Indonesia will also face challenges in increasing energy demand and in the same time
decreasing fossil fuel production. Blessed for rich biological resources and available fertile
lands, Indonesia is focusing on the development of the two most common types of biofuels,
i.e. ethanol and biodiesel.
Bioethanol in Indonesia
Ethanol is normally and largely produced through fermentation of any pre- or untreated
carbohydrate-containing biomass (starches, sugars, or celluloses). This biological process
name is then attached to the product, which is then commonly called “bioethanol”. National
launch of bioethanol-blended gasoline in early 2005, sympolized the new era of biofuel in
Indonesian transportation. However, the blended bioethanol-gasoline fuel, or popularly called
“gasohol”, requires slightly different conduct.
Bioethanol can be produced by converting the starch content of biomass feed stocks (e.g.
cassava, corn, potatoes, beets, sugarcane, and wheat) into alcohol. Several potential biomass
resources in Indonesia are listed in Table 7. Potential Biomass Resources in IndonesiaTable 7.
Due to economic value of Aren and Coconut, the utilization of them for bioethanol production
has not been explored much. On the other hand, molasses as the by product of sugar cane
industry have been the most popular raw material.
Table 7. Potential Biomass Resources in Indonesia
Plant Part of Plant Ethanol Productivity (L/ha/yr)
Cassava Root 4,500
Sweet potato Root 7,800
Sugar Cane Stalk 5,000 –6,000
Corn Grain 5,000-6,000
Aren Sap 40,000
Nipah (Mangrove) Sap 5,000-15,000
Lontar Sap 8,000 –10,000
Coconut Sap 8,000 –10,000
Paddy Stalk 1,000 –2,000
Forest plants Wood waste No data available
Sources: Panaka and Yudiharto, 2007
Table 8. Export of Ethanol from Indonesia

Year Capacity (ton) In US$ (x 1000)
2000 30,197 9,857
2002 27,518 10,757
2004 22,198 9,180
Source : Kompas. April 19. 2006

In our Industrial Bioprocess research group at Universitas Indonesia (IB UI), experiments are
undergoes since 2004 to produce ethanol from bagasse by simultaneous saccharification and
fermentation (SSF). Combination of cellulase and cellubiase were used following hydrolisis.
Fermentation by using Saccharomycess cerevisia is done in the same reactor tubes.
Combination of cellulase and cellubiase increased ethanol production.
Biodiesel in Indonesia
Diesel fuel is largely utilized in the transport, agriculture, commercial, domestic, and
industrial sectors for the generation of power/mechanical energy. The substitution of even a
small fraction of total consumption by alternative fuels will have a significant impact on the
economy and the environment. The situation has led to the search for an alternative fuel,
which should be technically acceptable, economically competitive, environmentally
acceptable and easily available (Srivastava and Prasad, 2000). From the of these
requirements, triglycerides and their derivatives may be considered as viable alternatives for
diesel fuels. Vegetable oils are widely available from a variety of sources, and they are
renewable.
Biodiesel production technology has referred to the reversible transesterification reaction, in
which triglyceride molecule with methanol (methanolysis) is converted to alkyl methyl ester
and glycerol. Although higher alcohols (ethanol) can be used in the transesterification,
however, methanol is more advantageous since the two main products, fatty acid methyl ester
(FAME) and glycerol, is hardly miscible and thus form separate phases – an upper ester phase
and a lower glycerol phase. Moreover, the price of methanol is cheaper than ethanol which
makes it preferable for commercial biodiesel production.
Palm oil was the preference of raw material for biodiesel production. However, there are
pressures from domestics, activists and government to seek non feedstock raw materials.
Since then, Jatropha, especially J. curcas has been on the field.
From the renewable energy policy, especially biofuels, it is stated that the target of biodiesel
use in 2010 is 10% of the total diesel oil for transportation consumption. Error! Reference
source not found. shows the potential biodiesel for the substitution of transportation sector.
The figure of 10% equals to an amount of 1.337.000 million tones biodiesel per year. To meet
this target, Indonesia should develop 15 to 40 units biodiesel plant at commercial scales with
the plant size of 30,000 to 100,000 tones per year.
Table 9. Projected Biodiesel Consumption for Industrial Sector up to 2010 with various Blending
percentage (Thousand kL)
Year Diesel oil 10 % 20 % 30 % 40 %
for BD F BD F BD F BD F
industry
2005 8,320 832 7,488 1,664 6,656 2,496 5,824 3,328 4,992
2006 8,570 857 7,713 1,714 6,856 2,571 5,999 3,428 5,142
2007 8,827 883 7,944 1,765 7,062 2,648 6,179 3,531 5,296
2008 9,091 909 8,182 1,818 7,273 2,727 6,364 3,636 5,455
2009 9,364 936 8,428 1,873 7,491 2,809 6,555 3,746 5,618
2010 9,645 965 8,681 1,929 7,716 2,894 6,752 3,858 5,787
Road map of bioenergy in Indonesia

Indonesian government shows has made various policies which are supporting the
development of biodiesel energy. Presidential Regulation No. 5/2006 regarding the National
Energy Policy (Perpres, 2006) and Presidential Instruction No. 1/2006 regarding the
utilization of biofuel (Inpres, 2006) are released formally on 25 January 2006.
The National Energy Policy is intended to secure national energy supply and to support the
sustainable national development, and becomes the guidance of the national energy
management in efforts the fulfillment of national energy security. To achieve the targets, the
National Energy Policy implementing the main and supporting energy policy as shown in
Table 10.

Table 10. Indonesia National Energy Policy

No. Category Supply Side Utilization Side
1 Main Policy • Production exploration • Energy Efficiency

• Energy Conservation • Energy Diversification
• Production Optimization
Energy price will gradually change to the economical price
• Consider the environmental factor
2 Supporting Policy Energy infrastructure development
• Subsidy policy for poor people
• Government and private sector partnership scheme
• Public empowerment
• Research and development promotion
• Coordination between related stakeholders
Source : Department of Energy and Mine Reources, 2006
Conclusions
By 2010 Indonesian plan to replace 10% of the country’s total oil-based fuel consumption
which reached 70 million kiloliter last year according to the roadmap. Regarding to this,
Government has issued policies & regulations on the supply & utilization of biofuelas
alternative fuel and providing incentive and tariff.
Government has to establish a commercialization scheme for bioethanolutilization in order to
integrate with an existing F fuel commercialization and also creating a simple testing system
and standard procedure for bioethanol.
The stages of biodiesel development from research to be ready commercialized have been
done and several important milestones have been achieved but more still have to be done.
These include how to accelerate the construction of new biodiesel plants, plantation as a key
driver in the continuity of raw material which is supported by the committed government
policy and regulation. This implies all biodiesel stakeholders should work harder for the
success of biodiesel program in Indonesia.
Keywords
Biodiesel, bioenergy, bioethanol, research implementation, roadmap.
Reference
Kusmayanto Kadiman, 2005. Biofuel: The alternative Fuel for Vehicles in the Future, Proceedings of Gaikindo
Conference, 12 July, in Jakarta.
Petrus Panaka and Arif Yudiarto, 2007. New Development of Ethanol Industry in Indonesia, Proceedings of Asian
Science & Technology Seminar, Jakarta. March 7.
Lynd, L.R., Bothast, R.J., Wyman, D.E., 1991. Fuel etanol from cellulosic biomass. Science 251: 1318-1323
Wyman, C.E., 1994. Etanol from ligcellulosic biomass: Technology, economics, and opportunities. Biores.
Technol. 50, 3-6.
Srivastava, A. and R. Prasad., 2000. Triglycerides-based diesel fuels, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews.
4:111-133.
ESDM, 2005. “Blue Print Pengelolaan Energy Nasional’ Workshop Sosialisasi Blue Print Pengelolaan Energy
Nasional 28-29 June.
Handaka and Agung Hendriardi, 2005. “Konsep kerjasama penelitian dan pengembangan energi terbarukan di
Indonesia”, Workshop Pengembangan dan Pemanfaatan Energi Biomasa, 01 March.
Reksowardojo, I.K., Shofwatuzzaki, T. H. Soerawidjaja, D. Darnoko, W. Arismunandar, 2005. The Experience of
Road Test Diesel EngineVehicles Using Blended Diesel Oil and Palm Oil Biodiesel Fuel, Proceeding
International Seminar & Exhibition on Ecological Power Generation, January 19, Jakarta.

Indonesian Kickxellales: Two species of Coemansia and Linderina

Staff : Kurihara1*), N. Sukarno2, M. Ilyas3, E. Yuniarti4, W.
Mangunwardoyo5*), R. Saraswati,4 J.Y. Park1, S. Inaba1, Y.
Widyastuti6 and K. Ando1
Student :-
Sponsor : NITE -LIPI
Email contact : kurihara@opbio.com, w_mangunwardoyo @hotmail.com
Dessiminatioan at : Y. Kurihara1, N. Sukarno2, M. Ilyas3, E. Yuniarti4, W.
Mangunwardoyo5, R. Saraswati,4 J.Y.Park1, S. Inaba1, Y.
Widyastuti6 and K. Ando1 (2008). Mycoscience 49:250–257
1
NITE Biological Resource Center (NBRC), National Institute of Technology and Evaluation, 2-5-8
Kazusakamatari, Kisarazu, Chiba 292-0818, Japan
2
Biology Department, Bogor Agricultural University (IPB), Cibinong, Indonesia
3
Research Center for Biology, Indonesian Institute of Sciences (LIPI), Cibinong, Indonesia
4
Research Institute for Food Crops Biotechnology, DEPTAN, Bogor, Indonesia
5
Department of Biology, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
6
Research Center for Biotechnology, Indonesian Institute of Sciences (LIPI), Cibinong, Indonesia
Introduction
The order Kickxellales R.K. Benj. (Kickxellomycotina) contains one family and nine genera
(Kurihara and Degawa 2006). Within the Kickxellomycotina, Kickxellales is phylogenetically
closest to the harpellalean genus Orphella L. Léger & M. Gauthier (White 2006; White et al.
2006), an inhabitant of stonefly nymph guts (Misra and Lichtwardt 2000). Most species of
Kickxellales have been isolated from mammal excrement, soil, rhizosphere soil, other fungi,
and cadavers and excrement of soil-dwelling arthropods (Linder 1943; Kwasńa et al. 1999;
Benny et al. 2001; Kurihara et al. 2001, 2004; Ho and Hsu 2005; Kurihara and Degawa
2006). Most kickxellalean species are rarely found, except for several species of Coemansia
(Benjamin 1958, 1979; Kwasńa et al. 1999; Benny et al. 2001).

To isolate kickxellalean species in Indonesia, 77 soil samples were collected from Kupang,
Cibinong, West Java and Kutai National Park, East Kalimantan. The soil samples were
treated by the direct inoculation method (Kurihara et al. 2008). Pure cultures of kickxellalean
to a Miura’s agar medium plate (Miura and Kudo 1970) with a fine needle. All the
kickxellalean isolates were identifie ( Kurihara et al. 2001).
Preparation of slides and measurements of each morphological feature were conducted as
described in Kurihara et al. (2000). Partial sequences of the nuclear large (LSU) and small
subunits of ribosomal DNA (rDNA) of these isolates have been deposited at
DDBJ/EMBL/GenBank (accession numbers: AB287996, AB295424–AB295429). In
Indonesia, Boedijn (1958) reported two Coemansia species from mammal excrement: C.
erecta from bat excrement and C. reversa from Isaria Fr. that was growing on rabbit
excrement. In contrast, all the species discovered in this study were isolated from soil.

Taxonomy
Coemansia asiatica Kurihara & Sukarno, sp. nov. Coloniae in agaro 1/2 ME-YE luteolae.
Hyphae vegetativae hyalinae, septatae. Sporangiophora erecta, septata, 7– 19.5 µm lata,
simplicia, furcata vel aliquantum trifurcata, asperula. Sporocladia primo divergentia, mox fere
parallela ad sporangiophorum, cymbiformia, fere recta vel curvula, asperula, ex stipitibus
brevivus 4–9 × 4–7 µm evolventia, 5–9-cellularia, praeter stipites 19–37 × 5–9.5 µm; cellula

apicalis sterilis et curvata, 2–9.5 × 2–5 µm. Pseudophialides lageniformes, e cellulis fertilibus
sporocladii lateraliter orientes, latrorsae, 5–7.5 × 2–3.5 µm. Sporangiola monospora,
incolorata, fusiformia, ventricosa, 8–14(-16) × 2.5–3.5(- 4) µm. Sporangiosporae fusiformes,
ventricosae, sursum attenuatae, 7–13.5(-15) × 2.5–3.5 µm. Zygosporae ingnotae. Holotypus:
BO22543, colonia exsiccata in cultura ex solo, Anggeraja, Enrekang, South Sulawesi,
Indonesia, Aug. 29, 2005, K. Ando, Y. Widyastuti, R. Saraswati.
Coemansia asiatica (BTCC-F31). Sporangiophore with sporocladia bearing mature
sporangiospores. porangiophore with sporocladia after separation of sporangiospores.
Sporocladium with immature pseudophialides (above) and sporocladium with developing
sporangiospores formed on pseudophialides (below). Sporocladium after separation of
sporangiospores (above) and sporocladia with nearly mature sporangiospores (below).
Sporocladium and pseudophialides after separation of sporangiospores. Sporangiospores.
Lestari, R. Ridwan, S. Ratnakomala, H. Yamamura, J.-Y. Park, et Y. Kurihara leg., Y.
Kurihara isol., in Herbario Bogoriensi conservata; BTCC-F31 (= ID05-F0205), cultura viva.
Etymology: Latin asiaticus, referring to its localities. Colonies on 1/2 ME-YE pale yellow.
Vegetative hyphae hyaline, septate. Sporangiophores erect, septate, 7–19.5 µm wide, simple,
furcate or sometimes trifurcate, asperulate,fertile branches of sporangiophore producing
sporocladia laterally, often with intervals that lack sporocladia. Sporocladia divergent to
nearly parallel to sporangiophores, boat-shaped, nearly straight to curved shortly, asperulate,
stalk short 4–9 × 4–7 µm, composed of 5–9 cells excluding thestalks, 19–37 × 5–9.5 µm, the
apical cell sterile and curved, 2–9.5 × 2–5 µm. Pseudophialides fl ask-shaped, 5–7.5 × 2–3.5
µm, positioned laterally in transverse rows on sporocladia. Sporangiola monosporic, hyaline,
fusiform, ventricosus, 8–14(-16) × 2.5–3.5(-4) µm, easily detached at maturity, forming a
spore mass. Sporangiospores fusiform, ventricosus, slightly tapering to the apex, 7–13.5(-15)
× 2.5–3.5 µm, surrounded by a sporangiole. Zygospores not observed.
Linderina pennispora Raper & Fennell, Am. J. Bot. 38:83, 1962.Colonies on Miura’s medium
pale yellow to yellow, nearly 5 mm high. Vegetative hyphae hyaline, septate.
Sporangiophores erect, septate, 7.5–12.5 µm wide, branched, asperulate. Sporocladia
subglobose to globose, sessile, slightly asperulate when immature, (7-)9–15 × 10–16.5(-19.5)
µm, producing pseudophialides on the upper surface. Pseudophialides flask-shaped, 5.5–9(-
9.5) × 2.5–3.5(-4) µm, producing a sporangiole apically. Sporangiola monosporic, hyaline,
elongate-obclavate to very narrow pyriform, 18– 21.5 × 3.5–5 µm, easily detached at
maturity, producing a spore mass. Sporangiospores elongate-obclavate, truncate at the base,
16.5–20.5 × 3.5–5 µm, surrounded by a sporangiole; the surface with transverse lines of
minute spines. Zygospores not observed.
Cultures of two L. macrospora isolates (BTCC-F30 and BTCC-F32) grew well on PDA,
Miura’s medium, cornmeal agar medium (CMA; Nissui Pharmaceutical), and SGA, but
sporulated poorly on these media. Sporulation of these two isolates has not been observed on
CMA and SGA after incubation for 13 months. Poor sporulation of BTCC-F30 was observed
on PDA and Miura’s medium after incubation for 5 months and 13 months, respectively.
Similarly, BTCC-F32 sporulated poorly on Miura’s medium after incubation for 9 months.
By way of contrast, BTCC-F30 and BTCC-F32 sporulated well on Miura’s medium after
incubation for 2 months on Miura’s medium medium supplemented with aphids (BTCC-F30)
or nereids (BTCC-F32). The substances that induced sporulation differed between the
isolates.
Acknowledgments
This work was conducted under the Joint Research Project between the Department of
Biotechnology, NITE, Japan, and LIPI. Mr. Tomoaki Kamijyo, Ms. Rieko Suzuki, and Ms.
Kozue Anzai cultivated, preserved, and sequenced the isolates. Ms. Kimi Sakai and Dr.
Yousuke Degawa provided an isolate (NBRC 102546). Dr. Katsumi Isono offered
constructive criticism and editorial suggestions that improved previous drafts. Prof. Ken
Katsumoto reviewed the Latin descriptions.

Keywords
Coemansia asiatica, Coemansia javaensis, Indonesia, Linderina macrospora, Linderina
pennispora.
References
Benjamin RK (1958) Sexuality in the Kickxellaceae. Aliso 4:149–169.
Benny GL, Humber RA, Morton JB (2001) Zygomycota: Zygomycetes. In: McLaughlin DJ, McLaughlin EG,
Lemke PA (eds) The Mycota, vol 7. systematics and evolution, part A. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, pp 113–146
Boedijn KB (1958) Notes on the Mucorales of Indonesia. Sydowia 12:321–362.
Ho HM, and Hsu CH (2005) The merosporangiferous fungi from Taiwan (V): two new records of Coemansia
(Kickxellaceae, Kickxellales, Zygomycetes). Taiwania 50:22–28.
Kurihara Y,and Degawa Y (2006) Pinnaticoemansia, a new genus of Kickxellales, with a revised key to the genera
of Kickxellales. Mycoscience 47:205–211.
Kurihara Y, Tokumasu S, and Chien CY (2000) Coemansia furcata sp. nov. and its distribution in Japan and
Taiwan. Mycoscience 41:579–583.
Kurihara Y, Degawa Y, and Tokumasu S (2001) A new genus Myconymphaea (Kickxellales) with peculiar septal
plugs. MycolRes 105: 1397–1402.
Kurihara Y, Degawa Y, and Tokumasu S (2004) Two novel kickxellalean fungi, Mycoëmilia scoparia gen. sp.
nov. and Ramicandelaber brevisporus sp. nov. Mycol Res 108:1143–1152.
Kurihara Y, Degawa Y, Tokumasu S, and Harayama S (2008) Isolation methods for Coemansia and other species
of Kickxellales from soil (in Japanese). Nippon Kingakukai Kaiho 49:47–52.
Kwasńa H, Bateman GL, and Dawson AJM (1999) Coemansia species from the rhizospheres of wheat and barley
in the United Kingdom. Mycol Res 103:896–900.
Linder DH (1943) The genera Kickxella, Martensella, and Coemansia. Farlowia 1:49–77.
Miura K, and Kudo MY (1970) An agar medium for aquatic hyphomycetes (in Japanese). Trans Mycol Soc Jpn
11:116–118.
Misra JK and Lichtwardt RW (2000) Illustrated genera of Trichomycetes, fungal symbionts of insects and other
arthropods. Science Publishers, Enfi eld.
Raper KB, Fennell DI (1952) Two noteworthy fungi from Liberian soil. Am J Bot 39:79–86.
White MM (2006) Evolutionary implications of a rRNA-based phylogeny of Harpellales. Mycol Res 110:1011–
1024.
White MM, James TY, O’Donnell K, Cafaro MJ, Tanabe Y, and Sugiyama J (2006) Phylogeny of the Zygomycota
based on nuclear ribosomal sequence data. Mycologia 98:872–884.

Inhibition of L-histidine decarboxylase produced by histamine

forming bacteria using benzoic acid
Staff : Heruwati E.S2* and W. Mangunwardoyo1*
Student : R.A. Sophia1
Sponsor : Department of Marine Affairs and Fisheries
Email contact : e_heruwati@yahoo.com; w_mangunwardoyo@hotmail.com
Dessimination at : Heruwati E.S.. Sophia R. A and W. Mangunwardoyo, (2008)
Inhibition of L-histidine decarboxylase produced by histamine
forming bacteria using benzoic acid. Journal of Marine and
Fisheries Product Processing and Biotechnology 3(2) 97-108
1
Department of Biology, Faculty of Mathematics and Sciences Universitas Indonesia, Kampus Depok 16424
2
Research Center for Marine and Fisheries Product Processing and Biotechnology. Department of Marine Affairs
and Fisheries, Jakarta. 10260
Introduction
Histamine is a non volatile compound which is produced during process of histidine
decarboxylation (Lehane & Olley, 1999). The histamine production was influenced by the
activity of enzyme L-Histidine Decarboxylase (HDC) (Bennour et al., 1991). The
concentrations of histamine of fresh fish arearound 10-15mg/100g (Ozogul et al., 2004). The
activity of HDCenzyme is influenced by pH, temperature and low concentration of oxygen,
and the optimum activity is at 37oC and pH 6,0 (Eitenmiller et al., 1982). nhibition of HDC
enzyme is consider as one method to control the production of histamine (Wendakoon &
Sakaguchi, 1995). Benzoic acid at concentration of 0,05 – 0,1% is known potential to inhibit
bacteria, yeast and mold in food (Medikasari, 2002)..Characterization of HDC enzyme is
needed in order to get information on the mechanism of inhibition of the histamine production
(Coton et al., 1998). The objection of the research were to conduct the characterization of
HDC enzyme produced from potential isolate, to study the inhibition of the HDC enzyme and
to try the application on skipjack (Euthynnus affinis).

The bacteria used in this study was isolate A4 identified as Enterobacter sp.,taken from the
collection of Research Center for Marine and Fisheries Product Processing and
Biotechnology. The fish used in the application trial was skipjack (Euthynnus affinis) of 25 –
30 cm long and 150 – 170 g/each weight which were bought at Palmerah market , Jakarta.
Synthetic medium was adopted from Omura et al.1978), while production of HDC enzyme
followed Atmadjaja (1994). The enzyme activity was measured using spectrofotometer
(Hardy & Smith 1976). Characterization of HDC enzyme after addition of benzoic acids
were conducted by variation of benzoic concentration, temperature, pH, and the availability of
metal ions (Atmadjaja,1994). Application of histamine inhibitor on skipjack (Euthynnus
affinis) was conducted by assessing the histamine content (SNI ICS 67.120.30., 2006) and
total histamine producer (Poerwadi & Indriati, 1984). The experiment was carried out in
triplicate.

Figure 1 showed that the addition of benzoic acid at concentration of 15 mM have the highest
inhibition activity (0,17 Units) . According to Clark & Pogrund (1961) the mechanism of
inhibition of decarboxylase enzyme is a competivite inhibition, the substrate inhibits the
enzyme by competition of the active sites therefore the catalytic activity of the enzyme would
decrease (Segel, 1975).

100
activity(U)
Enzim
50
0
0 1015202530
Benzoic acid conc. (mM)
Figure 1. Activities of HDC enzyme produced from A4 isolate after Addition of various concentrations of benzoic
acid, measured at 30oC, pH 6.8.
Figure 2 showed that the optimum inhibition of enzyme added with 15 mM benzoic acids was
at the temperature of 40 oC. The enzyme is a thermo labile and will be denatured by heat.
Increasing of the temperature may increase of the enzyme inactivation (Reed, 1975).
Eitenmiller et al. (1982) reported that decreasing of the HDC activity was at temperature
above 40oC.
80
Enzyme activity (U)
60
40
20
0
K 25 30 35 40 45
Temperature
o
( C)
Figure 2. Effect of temperature on the activity of HDC enzyme produced by A4 isolate after addition of 15 mM
benzoic acid, measured at pH 6.8.
Figure 3 showed that pH 6 gave the highest inhibition of the enzyme after addition of 15 mM
benzoic acid (0,27 Units). Similar results was reported by Eitenmiller (1982) that the HDC
have the optimum activity at pH 6. By addition of inhibitor the correlation of substrate and
enzyme was disturbed. pH affected the enzyme substrate configuration between inhibitor and
enzyme (Whitaker, 1972). Variations changes of pH influence the H+ ion concentration, so it
modify the conformation of active sites and the catalytic activity of the enzyme (Segel,
1975).
40
30
Enzyme act.(U)
20
10
0
K pH4 pH5 pH6 pH7 pH8
Figure 3. Effect of pH on the activity of HDC enzyme produced by A4 isolate after addition of 15 mM benzoic
acid, measured at 40oC.
Figure 4 showed the effect of 10 mM divalent ions on the HDC after addition of 15 mM
benzoic acid. The highest inhibition was achieved by addition of ion Fe2+ with the activity of
0,27 Units. The divalent ion was important as a cofactor at the enzymatic reaction (Segel,
1975). According to Whitaker (1972), the complex substance which change the essential
cation from the apoenzyme will act as a inhibitor of the enzyme and the ion inhibition was
also correlated with the pH of the enzyme.
80
60
Enzyme activity(U)
40
20
0
K Ba Mg Mn Co Zn Cu Ca Fe
Figure 4. Effect of divalent metal ions on the activity of HDC enzyme produced by A4 isolate after addition of 15
mM benzoic acid, measured at 40oC, pH 6.8.
Figure 5 showed the results of the treatment by dipping skipjack in 0,1% benzoic acids to see
the effect on the histamine produced and the growth of the histamine producing bacteria. The
highest growth of histamine producing bacteria was found in control treatment (dipiing in
aquadest) which was 13,5 x 102 cfu/g. For the benzoic acid treatments, the growth of
histamine producer bacteria were less than 102 cfu/g. Those inhibition might be due to the low
pH of the benzoic acid (pH 3,66) (Medikasari, 2002). Similar result was revealed on the
production of histamine (Fig. 5)

histamine (mg/10g) og no. of bact(cfu/g)

l
12
4,5
10
4
8 3,5
3
6 2,5
4 2
1,5
2 1
0 0,5
0
A B C
A B C
Figure 5. Growth of histamine forming bacteria and the production of histamine on skipjack (Euthynnus affinis).
A: untreated fresh fish, direct assessment without storage
B: dipped in aquadest for 30 min, assessed after 8 hrs storage at room temperature
C: dipped in 0.1% benzoic acid for 30 min, assessed after 8 hrs storage at room temperature
Conclusions
The optimum inhibition of benzoic acid on the HDC activity was at 15mM. The
characterization of inhibition of the enzyme HDC produced by isolate A4 which was
identified as Enterobacter sp. was at temperature of 40oC, and pH 6,0 using buffer
phosphate and divalent ion Fe2+. Application test by dipping fish in 0,1% benzoic acid for 30
minutes, inhibited the growth of histamine producing bacteria and the histamine production.
Keywords
Benzoic acid, Euthynnus affinis, histamine forming bacteria, L-histidine-decarboxylase.
References
Atmadjaja, J.S. 1994. Isolasi dan Identifikasi Morganella morganii JD-37 Sebagai Bakteri Pembentuk Histamin
dari Ikan Tongkol (Euthynnus sp.). Thesis. PPS-UGM: 57 p.
Bennour, M., A.E. Marrakchi, N. Bouchriti, A.Hamama, & M.E.Ouadaa. 1991. Chemical and microbiological
assessment of mackerel (Scomber scombrus) stored in ice. J.Food Prot. 54: 789 – 792.
Clark, W.G., & R.S.Pogrund. 1961. Inhibition of DOPA decarboxylase in vitro and in vivo. J. of American Heart
Association. 9: 721 – 733.
Coton, E., G.C.Rollan, & A.Lonvaud-Funnel. 1998. Histidine decarboxylase of Leuconostoc eonos 9204:
purification, kinetic properties, cloning and nucleotide sequence of the HDC gene. J. of Appl. Microbiology.
84: 143 – 151.
Dwiyitno, F.Ariyani, T.Kusmiyati, & Harmita. 2005. Perlakuan perendaman dalam larutan asam untuk
menghambat perkembangan histamin pada pindang ikan lisong (Scomber autralasicus CV). J. Penelitian
Perikanan Indonesia 11(8). Jakarta: 1 – 8.
Eitenmiller, R.R., J.H. Orr, & W.W. Wallis. 1982. Histamine formation in fish: microbiological and biochemical
conditions. In: Martin,R.E., G.J. Flick, & C.E. Hebard. (eds). Chemistry and Biochemistry of Marine Food
Product AVI Publishing.Co. 39 – 50.
Hardy, R., & J.G.M. Smith. 1976. The storage of mackerel (Scomber scrombus). Development of histamine and
rancidity. J. Sci. Food. 27: 595 – 599.
Lehane, L, & J. Olley. 1999. Histamine (Scombroid) Fish Poisoning. A review in a risk – assessment framework.
National Office of Animal and Plant Health, Canberra: iv + 80 hlm.
Medikasari. 2002. Bahan Tambahan Makanan. Fungsi dan Penggunaannya dalam Makanan. Makalah Falsafah
Sains (PPs 702). Program Pascasarjana/S3. Institut Pertanian Bogor. 14 hlm.
Omura, Y., R.J.Price, & H.S. Olcott. 1978. Histamine forming bacteria isolated from skipjack tuna and jack
mackerel. J. Food. Sci. 43: 1779 – 1781.
Ozogul, F., A. Polat, & Y.Ozogul. 2004. The effect of modified atmosphere packaging and vacuum packaging on
chemical, sensory and microbiological changes of sardines (Sardinella pilchardus). J. Food. Chem. 85(1): 49 –
57.:
Poerwadi and N. Indriati, 1984. A preliminary Study of Bacteria and Histamine Production in Dried Salted Chub
Mackerel (Rastrelliger neglectus) from Indonesia. Report on visit by RIFT personnel to Hobart, Tasmania
(Australia).Uni. of Tasmania, CSIRO, ACIAR.
Reed, G. 1975. Effect of temperature and pH. In: G.Reed (ed). Enzymes in Food Processing. 2nd ed. Academic
Press. New York: xvi + 573 p.
Segel, I.H. 1975. Enzyme kinetics. Behaviour and analysis of Rapid equilibrium and steady-state enzyme systems.
John Wiley & Sons Inc. New York: xxii + 957 p.
SNI ICS 67.120.30. 2006. Cara uji kimia – Bagian 6: Penentuan Kadar Histamin pada Produk Perikanan dengan
Spektrofluorometri dan Kromatografi Cair Kinerja Tinggi (KCKT) pada Produk Perikanan. Badan
Standarisasi Nasional. ii + 7 p.
Whitaker, J.R. 1972. Principles of Enzymology for the Food Sciences. Marcel Dekker Inc. New York: xiv + 636 p.

Isolation, purification, and characterization of kojic acid from

fermentation culture of Aspergillus flavus
Staff : Herman Suryadi1* , Harmita2
Student : Ambar Mirantini3
Sponsor : Hibah Bersaing XIV 2006
Email Contact : hsuryadi@ui.ac.id; hermans001@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Herman Suryadi, Harmita, Ambar Mirantini (2009), Jurnal Bahan
Alam Indonesia Vol.6 (6), 217-223
1,3
Laboratory of Microbiology and Biotechnology, Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural
Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, 16424, INDONESIA.
2
Laboratory of Pharmaceutical Chemistry and Instrumental Analysis, Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of
Mathematics and Natural Science, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, 16424, INDONESIA
Introduction
Kojic acid is a secondary metabolite commonly produced through fermentation process by
many species of Aspergilus and Penicillium.. Kojic acid is mostly used in cosmetics, as
whitening agent and protector against UV radiation. Beside that it also has few potential
activities such as insectiside, antibiotics, antiinflamation, analgetics, antifungi, anticancer,
and antioxidant which increase the stability of oil and fatty acids (1,2,3,4).
Kojic acid is produced from carbohydrate in aerobic fermentation process by few species of
Aspergillus, such as A. oryzae, A. flavus dan A. tamari (5). Usually, large scale production
was carried out after optimum productivity obtained. Some efforts to improve the productivity
of A. flavus strain has also been performed (6,7).
There are few methods of kojic acid isolation from fermentation culture, such as by
precipitation technique, extraction with suitable solvent, evaporation and crystalization, and
absorption with carbon active followed by elution with organic solvent. Rough crystal of
kojic acid from crystalization step was then purified by column chromatography. In this
study, isolation of kojic acid was carried out by liofilization, and followed by extraction with
suitable organic solvent. Purification of crystal obtained was done by column chromatography
(1,8,9).
The objectives of this study were to obtain pure isolate of kojic acid from fermentation
culture of Aspergillus flavus mutant and to find its chemical characteristics compared to kojic
acid standard.

Figure 1. Molecular structure of kojic acid.

Isolate Aspergillus flavus M3B7F7E8 from our previous study was used as biocatalyst. Potato
Dextrose Agar (PDA) [Difco] and YES (yeast extract [Difco]) dan sucrose [Merck]) medium
were used for maintaining and preculturing A. flavus colonies, respectively. Fermentations
were carried out in YES medium contain (per-liter) : 100 g sucrose, 0,5 g MgSO4[Merck], 1
g KH2PO4[Merck], supplemented with 15 g red rice beans [Cianjur].
All mediums were dissolved by boiling and sterilized by outoclaving at 1210C for 15 minutes.
Other chemicals used were : standard kojic acid [Nicco Chemical Co], methanol
[Malincrodt], toluen [Malincrodt], ethyl acetate [Merck], formic acid [Merck], acetone

[Merck], chloroform [Malincrodt], ferri chloride [Merck], silica gel 60 [Merck], and
potassium bromide [Merck].
Variation of yeast extract concentration was carried out to find optimum concentration of
nitrogen source, those are 1 g/L (Medium I ), 2 g/L(Medium II), and 4 g/L (Medium III),
respectively. Incubation was done by shaking at room temperature, 180 rpm for 12 days.
Biomass as dry cell weight was determined by gravimetry and kojic acid was analyzed by
TLC densitometry and spectrophotometry. Fermentation with selected medium was carried
out in 1000 ml Erlenmeyer contain 400 ml medium and 10% (v/v) inoculum.
Isolation of kojic acid from fermentation liquid was carried out by liofilization, and the residu
was extracted by acetone. Pool of extract was dried by nitrogen flowing, dissolved in mix
solvent of toluen-ethyl acetate- formic acid (3:6:1), and used for purification with column
chromatography. Recrystalization was done by acetone, and melting point of crystals were
determined and compared to standard. Both morphology of kojic acid isolate and standard
were observed under microscope, and their infra red spectrums were also compared.

Maintenance and preculture of A.flavus mutant M3B7F7E8
After maintaining and subculturing in PDA for 14 days, darkgreen-yellowish colonies of
A.flavus mutant was observed growing in slant and disc of PDA medium.( Fig. 2.a). This
mutant strain of A. flavus M3B7F7E8 was selected for its higher productivity of kojic acid
although it showed slower growth.
a b
Figure 2. coloni of Aspergillus flavus mutant(a), and its pellet form (b).
When the mutant was grown in preculture medium with shaking for 24 h, it grew higher than
those in PDA plate. Biomass in preculture suspension showed a pellet form with white-
yellowish colour. (Fig. 2.b). and readily used as inoculum for fermentation medium.
Optimization of nitrogen source concentration

Biomass suspension from preculture step, in amount of 10 ml was pipetted into 100 ml
medium of different kinds of yeast extract concentration. The growth was measured during
the fermentation periods every three days. The pattern of biomass growth and its relationship
to kojic acid was observed and showed in Fig. 3.
The results showed that biomass increased maximum between day 0 to day 3, and reached
stationer at day 3 for medium II but at day 6 for medium I and III. This observation showed
that earlier biomass growth to reach the stationary phase will earlier induced secondary
metabolite production (Fig.3). Kojic acid concentrations were calculated by using calibration
curved of kojic acid standard, y = -22,497 + 18,479x, with linear regression, r = 0,99926.
35 7
30 6
bobot sel kering (g/l)
konsentrasi (g/L)
25 5
20 MEDIA I 4 MEDIA I
MEDIA II MEDIA II
15 3
MEDIA III MEDIA III
10 2
5 1
0 0
0 3 6 9 12 0 3 6 9 12
hari ke- Hari ke-
Figure 3. Biomass Growth of A flavus mutant(left) and kojic acid production (right) in different medium.
Medium I, YE 0,1%; medium II, YE 0,2%; and medium III, YE 0,4%.

Purification and characterization of kojic acid isolate

Crude crystals of kojic acid isolate was confirmed by its similarities to UV and Visible
spectrum of kojic acid standard 25,6 ppm. Both UV spectrum showed high similarities, with
maximum absorption at 269 nm. The crystals were purified again by column chromatography
and positive fraction were collected, dried by nitrogen flowing, and recrystalized by acetone.
The pure isolate was then identified by infra red Spectrometry, and compared to standard
spectrum. Both IR spectrum were identics which showed similar peaks at 1660 cm-1, 1700
cm-1, 1230 cm-1, 1140 cm-1. and 3230 cm-1. (Fig.4).

Figure 4. IR Spectrum of standard kojat acid (lower) and isolate (upper). A. O—H, 3180 cm-1; B. C=O, 1700 cm-1;
C. C—O alkohol, 1230 cm-1; D. C—O eter, 1150 cm-1
Conclusion
Isolation of kojic acid from fermentation culture can be performed by liophilization, followed
by extraction with acetone and purified by column chromatography to produce relative pure
kojic acid which showed characteristics with high similarities to standard.
Keywords
Aspergillus flavus, characterization, isolation, kojic acid, tlc-densitometry.
References
Burdock, GA, Soni, C. (2001) Evaluation of health aspect of kojic acid in food. Regulatory Toxicology and
Pharmacology 33:80-101.
Gruszka, R. & Podgorski, W.(2003) Kojic acid production by Aspergillus oryzae in defined medium. Proceedings
of the 30th International Conference of SSCHE : 145.
Futamura, T.,Okabe, M., Tamura, T., Koda, K. and Matsunobi, T. (2001) Improvement of kojic acid by mutant
strain Aspergillus Oryzae MK107-39. Journal of Bioscience and Bioengineering; 91(3): 272.
Setiawati, H. (2003) Skrining beberapa isolat Aspergillus spp. penghasil asam kojat serta pengaruh kondisi
aerasi, sumber karbon, dan sumber nitrogen terhadap produksi asam kojat. Skripsi Sarjana Departemen
Farmasi Fakultas Matematika dan Ilmu Pengetahuan Alam Universitas Indonesia. Depok.
Wu, W.T., Wan, H.M., Chen, C.C., Chang, T.S., and Giridhar, R.N. (2004) Combining induced mutation and
protoplasting for strain Improvement of Aspergillus oryzae for kojic acid production. Biotechnology Letters 26:
1163-1166.
Suryadi, H., Maksum R. Juwita D. dan Arni H. (2006) Improvement of kojic acid production by a mutant strain of
Aspergillus flavus N40C10. ICMNS, ITB, Bandung.
Devianasari, R. (2006) Pemuliaan galur Aspergillus flavus dengan N-metil- N’-nitro-N-nitrosoguanidin (NTG)
dan iradiasi sinar gamma untuk peningkatan kadar asam kojat. Skripsi Sarjana Departemen Farmasi Fakultas
Matematika dan Ilmu Pengetahuan Alam Universitas Indonesia. Depok.
Owens, RG, Welty RE, and Lucas GB. (1970) Gas chromatographic analysis of the mycotoxins, kojic acid, terreic
acid, and terrein. Analytical Biochemistry ; 35 : 249-258.

Screening for glucosyltransferase gene (gtf) from exopolysaccahride

producing lactic acid bacteria
Staff : A. Malik1*, and A. Yanuar
Student : D. M. Ariestanti and A. Nurfachtiyani
Sponsor : Partly funded by SPIN KNAW Mobility Programme and by
RUMIPA 2006 to A. Malik
E-mail contact : amarila.malik@farmasi.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : A. Malik, D.M. Ariestanti, A. Nurfachtiyani, A. Yanuar. Makara
(Sains) 12 (2008): 1-6

1
Department of Pharmacy, FMIPA, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI Depok, Depok 16424
Introduction
Glucosyltransferase (GTF) is an enzyme involved in exopolysaccharide (EPS) polymer
synthesis in microbes. One example of EPS that has been used in pharmaceutical and medical
application is dextran. Dextran has been used in conjugated-drug delivery system as matrix.
As a group of microbes producing EPS, lactic acid bacteria (LAB) have been well reported
carrying sucrase genes glucosyltransferase (gtf), as well as fructosyltransferases (ftf). In an
attempt to search for novel gtf genes as the aim of this study, LAB collection isolated from
local sources yielded from previous study were screened performing PCR using degenerate
primers DegFor and DegRev.

LAB collection, isolated from local sources yielded from previous study, were screened
performing PCR using degenerate primers DegFor and DegRev. Genomic DNAs were
extracted performing Murray and Thompson methods using CTAB as described previously.
Agarose gel electrophoresis was employed to observe the PCR product (amplicon).

An approximately 660 base pairs (bp) amplicons were obtained by using genomic DNAs of
those LAB isolates as templates with conserved region of gtf genes catalytic domain as target.
Two out of 20 LAB strains were yielded no amplicon as observed on agarose gel, while one
strain exhibited non-specific amplicon DNA bands with sizes other than 660 bp. The two
negative ones were isolated from soil obtained from dairy product waste field and from waste
of soy sauce from previous study, while the latter was isolated from waste of soy sauce.
Keywords
Degenerate primers, exopolysaccharide, glucosyltransferase, gtf , lactic acid bacteria.
References
B. Henrissat, A. Bairoch. Biochem. J. 316 (1996) 695-696.
V. Monchois, R. M. Willemot, P. Monsan. FEMS Microbiol. Rev. 23 (1999) 131-151.
S. Kralj, G. H. van Geel-Schutten, H. Rahaoui, R.J. Leer, E.J. Faber, M.J. van der Maarel, L. Dijkhuizen. Appl.
Environ. Microbiol. 68 (2002) 4283-4291.
S.A.F.T. van Hijum, E. Szalowska, M.J. van der Maarel, L. Dijkhuizen. Microbiology 150 (2004) 621-630.
S. Kralj, G.H. van Geel-Schutten, M.M.G Dondorff, S. Kirsanovs, M.J. van der Maarel, L. Dijkhuizen.
Microbiology 150 (2004) 3681-3690.
G.H. van Geel-Schutten, F. Flesch, B. ten Brink, M.R. Smith, L. Dijkhuizen. 1998. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol.
50 (1998) 697-703.
Renault, P. Biochim 84 (2002) 1073-1087.
F. Vaningelgem, M. Zamfir., F. Mozzi, T. Adriany, M. Vancanneyt, J. Swings, L. De Vuyst. Appl. Environ.
Microbiol. 70 (2004) 900-912.

A. Savadogo, C.A.T. Ouattara, P.W. Savadogo, N. Barro, A.S. Ouattara, A.S. Traore. African J. Biotechnol. 3
(2004) 189-194.
Kusmiati, F. Rachmawati, S. Siregar, S. Nuswantara, A. Malik. Makara (Seri Sains) 10 (2006) 24-29.
F.M. Veronese, P. Caliceti.in: Meibohm (Ed), Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Biotech Drugs:
Principles and Case Studies in Drug Development. Wiley-CH Weinheim, 2006, 272-273.
Anonim. 2001. Dextran. 1 hlm. . http://www.microsurgeon.org/dextran.htm. 18 Desember 2006, pk 17. 10.
Sutherland, I.W. Trends Biotechnol 16 (1998) 41-46.
L. De Vuyst, F. De Vin, F. Vaningelgem, B. Degeest. Int. Dairy J. 11 (2001) 687-707.
P. Monsan, S. Bozonnet, C. Albenne, G. Joucla, R.M. Willemot, M. Remaud-Siméon. 2001. Int Dairy J. 11 (2001)
675-685.
S.A.F.T. van Hijum, S. Kralj, L.K. Ozimek, L. Dijkhuizen, G.H. van Geel-Schutten. Microbiol Mol. Biol. Rev. 70
(2006) 157-176.
M. Tieking, M. Korakli M.A. Ehrmann, M.G. Ganzle R.F. Vogel. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 69 (2003) 945–952.
S. Kralj, G.H. van Geel-Schutten, M.J.E.C van der Maarel, L. Dijkhuizen. Biocatal. Biotransform. 21 (2003) 181-
187.
A. Malik, Felicia, M. Radji, A. Oetari. Sains Indonesia 12 (2007) 1-6.
Felicia. Skrining, Isolasi dan Identifikasi BAL Penghasil Eksopolisakarida (EPS) Menggunakan Gen Penyandi 16S
rRNA. (2006) Skripsi. Depok: Departemen Farmasi FMIPA UI.
J.C. de Man, M. Rogosa, M.E. Sharpe. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 23 (1960) 130-135.
M.G. Murray, W. F. Thompson. Nucl. Ac. Res. 8 (1980) 4321-4326.
S.R. Gallagher, P.R. Desjardins. Curr Protocols Molec Biol, John Wiley & Sons Inc. (2006). A.3D.1-A.3D.21
Innis, M. A. 1990. PCR Protocols : A Guide to Methods and Applications. San Diego: Academic Press Inc.: 3-10;
13-17; 219-226.
S. Bozonnet, D. Dols-Laffargue, E. Fabre, S. Pizzut, M. Remaud-Simeon, P. Monsan, R-M Willemot. J. Bacteriol.
184 (2002) 5753-5761.

Auxiliary Substrates for Elimination of Trichloroethene,

Monochlorobenzene, and Benzene in a Sequential Anaerobic–Aerobic
GAC Biobarrier
Staff : M. Gozan1*, A. Mueller2, A. Tiehm2
Student : --
Sponsor : German Ministry of Education and Research (BMBF No. 02WT9937/7)
Disseminated at : Asian Journal of Chemical Engineering (AJChE) 2007, Vol. 7, No. 1,
68-82
1
21 7863516, Fax: 62 21 7863515
2
Water Technology Centre, Karlsruher Str. 84, 76139 Karlsruhe, GERMANY
Introduction
Trichloroethene (TCE), monochlorobenzene (MCB), and benzene (BZ) represent the most
common contaminant cocktails found in contaminated subsurface water in various places.
Reductive dechlorination of TCE has been reported to occur in anaerobic groundwater
systems (DiStefano et al. 2001, Bradley 2003). During the reductive dechlorination process,
TCE receives electron from hydrogen. Further dechlorination follows similar reaction to vinyl
chloride and then to ethene. Molecular H2 was demonstrated in the labs as well is in natural
systems, including contaminated aquifers, to be the direct and initial electron donor for
reductive dechlorination that was observed under sulfidogenic, methanogenic, or fermentative
conditions (Middeldorp et al.1999). This paper examines the influence of controlled variables,
i.e. auxiliary substrates and electron acceptors, on biological degradation of TCE, MCB, and
BZ on sequential anaerobic– aerobic GAC barrier system.
Method
All the granular activated carbon used in the experiments were from Chemviron Carbon, Neu-
Isenburg, Germany (FILTRASORB TL 8-30). Inoculums were obtained by means of
membrane filtration (Polyethersulfonfilter, 0,45 µm) of contaminated groundwater area from
Bitterfeld, Leipzig-Germany. The cake was put into three 500 ml Erlenmeyer flasks
containing chloride-free medium. A laboratory scale column set, with 2 vertical 0.164L
columns (diameter 3.5cm and height 17cm) was filled with Filtrasorb GAC TL 830
(Chemviron Carbon, Belgium). Analysis of hydrocarbons was performed by GC from
Hewlett Packard (GC Series II 5890) equipped with a head-space sampler, flame ionization
detector (FID), and electron capture detector (ECD). Separation was accomplished in a 50-m
capillary column (PONA id 0.21 mm, methyl silicon film 0.5µm thickness, Hewlett Packard).
Sulphate and chloride ionic concentrations were determined with IC 2010I Dionex.

Auxiliary substrates
To examine the effect of auxiliary substrate (AUXS) on reductive dechlorination, the
concentrations of ethanol and sucrose were gradually modified. In the beginning of the
experiments, high supply of AUXSs was introduced to the anaerobic column, i.e. 50 mg/L
DOC.
Theoretical H2 production was 0.065 mg/ mg sucrose and 0.174 mg/mg ethanol. These
number correspond to approximately 0.15 mg/ mg DOCSucr. and 0.06 mg/mg DOCEtOH.
Thus, it is clear that the actual AUXS supply (50–5 mg/L) surpassed the theoretical AUXS
demand (3.3 mg/L). Further reduction of AUXS from 5 to 1 mg DOC/L was
284 Nano Science and Technology

stoichiometrically resulting in insufficient electron donor for a complete dechlorination or

conversion of TCE.
The activity of methanogenic started after throughflow 250 L when the AUXS availability
was high. Reductive dechlorination of TCE to ethene is more favorable thermodynamically
compared to sulfate reduction and methanogenesis. Therefore, supply of H2 in the form of
AUXS should be maintained at low or stoichiometrical demand of reductive dechlorination.
Our mass balance clarified that the shares in AUXS through sulfate reduction or
methanogenesis were considerably low. Most part of the AUXS was available for
halorespiration. Halorespiration (TCE reduction through cis-DCE and VC to ETH) gains
greater energy than through sulfate reduction or methanogenesis. Libelo et al. (1998)
confirmed that supplying H2 at low AUXS concentration will further degrade TCE to ETH.
The low redox condition existed around 40 days of operation. Reduction of AUX allowed the
halorespiration microorganisms to survive. As the reaction zone was dominated by the
reductive dechlorination afterward, the redox potential was relatively stable at approximately
-100 mV. Table 4. 1 Theoretical demand and the actual supply of H2 for dechlorination of
TCE to cis-DCE, VC and ETH.
In our experiments, the autochthonous micro flora of the Bitterfeld site proved to be capable
of degrading VC oxidatively regardless of the auxiliary substrate provided. In all samples
taken after 48 d, VC was completely degraded. Degradation of VC without the addition of
auxiliary substrates (flask no. 10) indicated the use of VC as sole carbon and energy source
(Davis and Carpenter, 1990; Hartmans and DeBont, 1992; Verce et al., 2000). However, in
our batch tests the presence of organic material added with the inoculum and serving as
auxiliary substrates could not be excluded. In contrast to VC dechlorination, significant
differences in cis-DCE dechlorination were observed. Addition of ethene resulted in a
complete dechlorination within 48 d, thus confirming the positive results reported previously
(Koziollek et al., 1999; Freedman et al., 2001). In the presence of other auxiliary substrates,
cis-DCE was still detectable after 138 day. The auxiliary substrates monochlorobenzene,
benzene, and toluene stimulated cis-DCE dechlorination significantly and were completely
degraded. Addition of formate, sucrose, and ethanol also improved cis- DCE dechlorination.
Sucrose and ethanol have the potential to stimulate further dechlorination of cis-DCE in the
presence of oxygen. The oxidation of methane or ammonium was not observed.
Corresponding to the low metabolic activity in the methane and ammonium amended flasks,
oxidative dechlorination of cis-DCE was low. However, the lowest chloride formation was
observed without addition of an auxiliary substrate. Interestingly, the end product of reductive
dechlorination, i.e. ethene, as well as the aromatic compounds i.e. monochlorobenzene,
benzene and toluene, are suitable auxiliary substrates for oxidative dechlorination. This
suggests the benefit natural attenuation in pollutant cocktails containing aromat.
Electron acceptors
The aerobic phase clearly showed the role of oxygen as electron acceptor (H2O2). All of
molecular oxygen was used to oxidise model contaminants and a part of auxiliary substrates.
As oxygen was depleted, then part of the auxiliary substrate used nitrate as electron acceptors.
This fact showed electron acceptor preferential. Figure 10 shows that monochlorobenzene
predominate the utilisation of electron acceptor (oxygen). Biodegradation of MCB and BZ
with nitrate as terminal electron acceptor could not be observed. The high DOC in the influent
at the initial phase was oxidised with nitrate. AUXS was supplied to favour reductive
dechlorination purpose and used by various microorganisms in the anaerobic column.
However, there was remaining AUXS entering the subsequent aerobic phase. The remaining
AUXS can be measured by DOC method, which did not quantify volatile chlorinated carbons.
Therefore, this DOC value indicated only DOC from the remaining AUXS. As a source of
molecular oxygen, hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) is more manageable for groundwater
application compared to air injection. The liquid form of H2O2 is easier to handle than the
gaseous form of oxygen.

Conclusions
In the sequential anaerobic-aerobic systems for elimination of TCE, MCB and BZ one should
maintain the supply of auxiliary substrates low but stoichiometrically adequate for supporting
reductive dechlorination stoichiometrically. Supplying higher amount of auxiliary substrates
provoked competitive reactions in anaerobic conditions, such as sulfate reduction and
methanogenesis. If the auxiliary substrates do not utilised completely in the anaerobic phase,
the remaining flow into the aerobic phase. This lead to unwanted conditions, ie. oxidation of
auxiliary substrates instead of pollutant elimination. One should supply electron acceptor in
the aerobic phase to oxidise pollutant contaminants and metabolites from previous anaerobic
phase. In our experiments molecular oxygen was still the preferred electron acceptor for the
model contaminants used in this research. Molecular oxygen can be supplied with hydrogen
peroxide. One should avoid supplying hydrogen peroxide in high amount to avoid the toxic
effect of hydrogen peroxide to microorganisms. A maximum level of 30 mg/L did not show
inhibition to denitrifying bacteria while supported the oxidation of model contaminants. More
distributed electron acceptor supply along the column could be beneficial for the application
in biobarrier.
Acknowledgement
This study is a part of the SAFIRA research programme, funded by the German Ministry of
Education and Research (BMBF No. 02WT9937/7).
Keywords
Benzene, biobarrier, granular activated carbon, monochlorobenzene, trichloroethene.
References
Adrados, B. P., P.Choteborska, M. Galbe and G. Zacchi. (2005) Ethanol production from non-strach
carbohydrastes of wheat bran. Bioresource technology. 96: 843 – 850.
Ballesteros, M., Oliva, J.M., Negro, M.J., Manzanares,p., Ballesteros, I. (2004) Ethanol from lignocellulosic
material by a simultaneous saccharification and fermentation process (SFS) with Kluyveromyces marxianus
CET 1087, Process. Biochem. 39:1843-1848.
Samsuri, M., E. Hermiati, B. Prasetya, Y. Honda and T. Watanabe., (2005) Pre-treatment for ethanol production
from bagasse by Simultaneous Sacharificatin and Fermentation. In Towards ecology and economy
harmonization of tropical forest resources. Japan, Proceeding of the 6th Intern Wood Science Symposium 288-
294.
Watanabe T. (2003). Microbial degradation of lignin-carbohydrate complexes In: Koshijima T, Watanabe T (eds),
Association Between lignin and carbohydrates in wood and other plant tissues. Berlin, Springer verlag. 237-
287.
ZongLai, Y., (1996) Chemical modification of lignocellulosic materials: reactivity and accessibility of cellulose,
hemicellulose and lignins. New york, 35-95.

Bioavailability of monochlorobenze and benzene on aerobic granular

activated carbon column
Staff : M. Gozan1*, Dianursanti1, Wijanarko1, P.P.D.K. Wulan1
Student : A. Bustomi1, Y.A. Husnil1
Sponsor : RUTI RISTEK 2005-2007
Email Contact : mgozan@ui.edu
Disseminated at : M. Gozan, A. Bustomi, Y.A. Husnil, Dianursanti, Wijanarko and
P.P.D.K. Wulan. (2008) Bioavailability Of Monochlorobenze And
Benzene On Aerobic Granular Activated Carbon Column. Journal
of Chemical and Natural Resources Engineering,2:1-9 ©
FKKKSA, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia
1
Introduction
The use of granular activated carbon (GAC) in water treatment is standard due to activated
carbon ability to transfer effectively broad range of organic compounds, from the liquid phase
to solid phase. A number of works reported bioregeneration of AC using continous or, mostly
batch reactor (Nakano et al, 2000; Klimenko et al, 2003) Most of the bioregeneration
proceeded in separate chamber or in different treatment system than the sorption process,
except for the experiments by Kim et al. (1997) and Koshikawa et al. (2003) who performed
simultaneous adsorption and biodegradation in small Erlenmeyer reactors. Using wide variety
of contaminants, those authors observed that the adsorbed contaminants were bioavailable,
although the bioregeneration level differed from 0 to 99% of adsorbed contaminants.
The principal objective of this effort is to examine the concept of simultaneous adsorption-
biodegradation in aerobic GAC column system in eliminating model contaminants of
contaminated groundwater. Possible implementation of this technology is in remediation of
any appropriate contaminated groundwater plume, which is contaminated with pollutant
cocktails. Initially, respirometer batch experiments using benzene as model pollutant
examined the bioavailability and toxicity reduction effect of various amount of GAC. Then
MCB, together with Benzene (BZ) as model pollutants in aerobic GAC column, assessed
further sorption behaviour and bioregeneration of model pollutants in the presence of high
GAC amount.
Materials and method

All the granular activated carbon used in these experiments was from Chemviron Carbon
(FILTRASORB TL 8-30).
Different volume of monochlorobenzene (sole carbon source) was injected into 1-litre vials
containing 750 ml chloride-free medium. To examine the effect of GAC presence on
bioavailability and toxicity of MCB, the oxygen utilisation was measured by a respirometer
with various MCB concentration and GAC loading (2 to 3 replicates, each). After injection, 4
days of shaking was allowed for MCB adsorption onto GAC, prior to inoculation.
A laboratory scale experiment consisting of aerobic operation unit was built to study
adsorption and biodegradation of the model contaminants. A set of vertical 0.164 L column
(diameter 3.5 cm and height 17 cm) was filled with Filtrasorb GAC TL 830. The GAC was
washed in demineralised water to remove fines, followed by drying at 105oC. A reference set
was operated under sterile conditions. After the pre-loading period, bacterial mixed cultures
capable of utilising BZ, and MCB were injected (active column), while in the sterile column
NaN3 was added continuously to hinder the growth of microorganisms. During the loading

period, the flowrate to GAC columns varied from 50 to 90 L/d. Two similar set, but packed
with pumice stone (PS), were build to examine the non adsorptive operation. For the
bioregeneration experiment, the flowrate (medium and substrate) to each column was
adjusted to approximately 4 L per day. The pore volumes of the GAC columns were ± 57%.
Analysis of hydrocarbons was performed by gas chromatograph (HP 5890) equipped with a
head-space sampler, flame ionisation detector (FID) and electron capture detector (ECD).
Separation was accomplished in a 50-m capillary column (PONA id 0.21 mm, methyl silicon
film 0.5 µm thickness, HP). Sulphate and chloride ionic concentrations were determined with
ion chromatograph with suppression system and conductivity detector. Measurement of redox
potential and pH was done regularly with a multimeter (pH 91 WTW). Determination of O2
was carried out with a dissolved O2 meter (Oxi 330-WTW). H2O2 level was monitored with
peroxide test strip (Merck).

Effect of GAC on MCB short term bioavailability
Respirometer tests showed no significant effect of adsorption on the bioavailability of
monochlorobenzene in the presence of low GAC concentrations (0.3 g GAC/L medium). At
higher amounts of 1.3 to 13 g/L GAC significantly lower respiration rates were observed. The
model contaminants are bioavailable in the presence of high amount of GAC. Bioavailability
is affected to some extent by the quantity of activated carbon, or the amount of MCB-loading.
At higher activated carbon amount, i.e. lower MCB-loading, the equilibrium concentration of
MCB in the liquid phase is reduced. Thus, it reduced the availability of MCB to microbial
attack and slowed down the aerobic respiration activity. By lower GAC amount, or in other
words, higher contaminant loading, the availability of MCB was only slightly affected,
because the available MCB in the solution is evidently higher.
Column experiments
Prior to inoculation with culture of bacteria, two GAC columns were loaded with MCB and
BZ. The loading in both columns was achieved in 17 days. Loading operations of both
columns produced comparable breakthrough curves (data not shown), thus confirming the
reproducibility of the operations. Benzene broke through earlier than monochlorobenzene as
it was predicted based on lower KF (adsorption constant) of BZ than that of MCB. At through
flow ca. 280 L or ± 3.000 exchange pore volumes (EPV), 50% of initial BZ concentration had
broken through. The 50% breakthrough of MCB followed after approximately 650 L of
through flow (± 7.000 EPV). Adsorption of BZ and MCB reached their equilibrium between
solid and liquid phase at through flow 1100L (± 12.000 EPV) as no more adsorption occur in
the column.
Results show that most of the MCB elimination took place in this lower part of the column.
This indicates the availability of the organic compounds, i.e. MCB, for the growth of
microorganisms. The total biological elimination until 2424 L or 424 day of operation was
approx. 98% of the MCB flux. The adsorption took place strongly on the lower part of the
column (80%) rather than on the upper part of the column (20%).
There were no distinctive metabolites that could be analysed to proof the biodegradation of
benzene in the aerobic column. Thus, to make a mass balance on benzene, only influent and
effluent concentration of BZ could be taken into account. After the initial phase of adsorption
(from 33rd day on) reduction of model contaminant concentration in influent created new
equilibrium condition between the concentration in solid and liquid phase. The change in
influent concentration could be seen with the lower but steady of the influent rate.
Due to temporary fall in influent concentration rate (between through flow 750 to 1000 L) the
amount of BZ on the surface of GAC was decreasing. However, from through flow ca. 1200
L ahead, the sterile column reached its equilibrium condition and stayed at around 15 mmol
until the end of operation. No more BZ was detected in the effluent of active column at the
end of the experiments. The gradient of B1 elimination is positive and equal to influent rate
from the time when temporary fall occurred until end of aerobic operation. Therefore, the

remaining BZ concentration on the surface of active GAC column might have lower value
than that in sterile column (15 mmol).
Conclusion
Abiotic oxidation of GAC during experiments did not show significant hindrance to the
bioregeneration of GAC in terms of time scale and amount of oxygen required for the overall
project. The need for abiotic oxidation of GAC is ca. 2.5 - 3 mg O2/g GAC. The contaminants
are competitively adsorbed in the adsorptive materials (GAC) with order according to their
hydrophobicity. Biodegradation processes in the GAC column also affected the contaminant
distribution in the reactor. This might lead to zonation of contaminants along the biobarrier.
Model contaminants are still bioavailable in the presence of high amount of GAC although
bioavailability is affected by the quantity of activated carbon. At high activated carbon
presence in the system the equilibrium concentration of contaminant in the liquid phase is
reduced. Thus, it reduced the availability of contaminant to microbial attack and slowed down
the respiration activity. Oppositely, by lower GAC amount, or in other words higher
contaminant loading, the availability of contaminant was only slightly affected, because the
available contaminant in the solution is higher.
Keywords
Aerob, benzene, bioavailability monochlorobenze, granular activated carbon.
Acknowledgement
This study is a part of the RUTI research programme, funded by the Indonesian Ministry of
Research and Technology (BMBF No. 02WT9937/7).
References
Kim, W.H., Nishijima, W., Shoto, E., Okada, M. (1997). Competitive removal of Dissolved organic carbon by
adsorptionby adsorption and biodegradation on biological activated carbon. Water Sci Technol 35(7):147-153.
Klimenko, N., Smolin, S., Grechanyk, S., Kofanov, V., Nevynna, L., Samoylenko, L. (2003). Bioregeneration of
activated carbons by bacterial degraders after adsorption of surfactants from aqueous solutions, Colloids and
Surfaces A: Physicochem Eng Aspects, in Press.
Koshikawa, H., Tsumori, Y., Oya, T., Tsuno, H. (2003). Anaerobic treatment of Tetrachloroethylene by expanded-
bed granular activated carbon bioreactor. In Proc of the 4th IWA specialized conference on Assessment and
control of hazardous substances in Water, Aachen. 37:1-4.
Nakano Y., Hua L.Q., Nishijima W., Shoto E. and Okada M. (2000). Biodegradation of Trichloroethylene (TCE)
adsorbed on Garnular Activated Carbon (GAC). Water Res 34(17):4139-4142.

Electrochemical detection of free chlorine at gold-modified boron

doped diamond electrodes
Staff : T.A. Ivandini2*
Student :-
Sponsor : Keio University COE Life For Conjugated Chemistry 2007
Email Contact : ivandini.tri@ui.edu
Disseminated at : M. Murata,1 T. A. Ivandini,2* M.Shibata,3 S. Nomura, A.
Fujishima,4 Y. Einaga1 (2008). Journal of Electroanalytical
Chemistry 615 (3), 145-153
1
Keio Univ, Fac Sci & Technol, Dept Chem, Yokohama, Kanagawa 2238522 Japan
2
Univ Indonesia, Fac Math & Sci, Dept Chem, Jakarta 16424, Indonesia
3
HORIBA Ltd., Minami-ku, Kyoto 601-8510, Japan
4
Kanagawa Acad Sci & Technol, KSP, Kawasaki, Kanagawa 2130012 Japan
Introduction
Chlorine is a strong oxidizing agent. Since one mole HCl or ClO- is generated from each mole
chlorine gas dissolved in water, HCl and ClO- were also known as “Free chlorine”(Kodera et.
al. 2005). The ability of chlorine to disinfect depends on its concentration. If the concentration
is too small, the disinfectant effect is ineffective; however, too much chlorine is wasteful and
creates other dangerous side products such as trihalomethanes. Therefore, the exact
determination and continuous on-line monitoring of residual water disinfectant is a necessary
requirement. Electrochemical oxidation of free chlorine, in the form of HCl/ClO, with
conventional electrodes has been reported (Simper 1997). However, this technique can only
detect free chlorine in ppm level, whereas lower detection limit is required. The fact that
oxygen evolution of conventional electrodes occurs very near to the potential oxidation of
free chlorine oxidation should also be considered. Moreover, deterioration of electrodes
attributable to hypochlorite oxidation has been reported, resulting in fouling of the electrode.
On the other hand, the use of boron-doped diamond (BDD) electrodes for electroanalysis are
established due to their superior properties, including wide potential window, low and stable
background current, low sensitivity to dissolved oxygen and stability of the responses
(Kodera et. Al. 2005). In the present study, we focused on the electrochemical quantitative
determination and the possibility of continuous on-line monitoring of free chlorine oxidation
using BDD electrodes. A simple, fast, and stable detection with excellent detection sensitivity
could be performed at as-deposited BDD electrodes. In order to study the mechanism, a
comparison was made between different terminations of BDD electrodes. Cyclic voltammetry
and flow injection analysis were used.
Experimental section
A standard free-chlorine solution was prepared by diluting a sodium hypochlorite aqueous
solution. BDD electrodes were deposited on Si(111) wafers in a microwave plasma-assisted
chemical vapour deposition (MPCVD) system (ASTeX) Corp. Details of the preparation
procedure are described elsewhere (Fujishima et. al. 2004, Ivandini et. al. 2002). A mixture of
acetone and methanol in the ratio of 9:1 (v/v) was used as the carbon source. B2O3, used as
the boron source, was dissolved at a B/C atomic ratio of 1:100. Oxidized BDD electrodes
were prepared by oxidation of as-deposited BDD at a constant potential of 2.3 V (vs.
Ag/AgCl) in a phosphate buffer solution (PBS) pH 7 for 30 min. The surface termination was
characterized by using X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy. Electrochemical measurements
were carried out with a single-compartment cell. An Ag/AgCl (saturated KCl) electrode was
used as the reference electrode and a Pt wire was used as the counter electrode. The planar
working electrode was mounted on the bottom of the glass cell by the use of a silicone-O-ring

with estimated geometric area of 0.77 cm2. The supporting electrode was 0.1 M sodium
perchlorate. All measurements were made at room temperature.

A well-defined irreversible oxidation peak was observed at a potential of ~2.4 V (vs.
Ag/AgCl) at ad-BDD electrodes. The inset shows a plot of the oxidation peak current vs. the
free chlorine concentration. A linear calibration curve obtained at the concentration range of
20-100 mg Cl L-1, indicating that determination of free chlorine can be. A slope of 0.744 µA
cm-2 mg-1 L shows the sensitivity, which is 3-4 times higher in comparison with those at the
conventional electrodes [Kodera et. al. 2004, 2005]. The background current of 3 µA cm-2
was obtained very small in comparison with that of Pt electrode in the same condition (115
µA cm-2). Furthermore, excellent stability is shown in Fig. 1b with a relative standard
deviation of 2.56% for 10 repetitive measurements.
Figure 1. Cyclic voltammograms of a 0.1 M NaCLO4 solution (a) in the presence of various concentrations of free
chlorine and (b) for 10 repetitive scans of 50 mg Cl L-1 using as-deposited BDD electrode. The scan rate was 100
mV s-1. Linear calibration plots are shown in the insert.
In order to confirm the interference of chloride ion, some experiments with chloride oxidation
was conducted. Cyclic voltammetry (CV) of 100 mg Cl L-1 NaCl in 0.1 M NaClO4 solution
shows no oxidation peak obtained in the potential range of 0-1.5 V (vs. Ag/AgCl). However a
well-defined peak was observed when 100 mg Cl L-1 NaClO was added in the solution (Fig.
2a), indicating that the oxidation peak is represent to the oxidation of HClO/ClO- and not the
oxidation of Cl-. Further investigations were conducted for a various concentration of NaClO
in 0.1 M NaClO4 in the presence of 100 mg Cl L-1 NaCl. Similar CVs as well as slopes of
linear calibration of free chlorine oxidation in the absence and the presence of NaCl (Fig. 1a)
indicated that no significant influent of NaCl. Although an increasing of current densities (~1
mA cm-2) is shown with the presence of chloride ions, no concentration dependence was
observed. Moreover, no shifting of the oxidation peak potential was detected. These result
have confirmed the previous work about hypochlorite decomposition in water that chloride
ion contributes nothing but the ionic strength.
Effect of electrolyte was also studied on the chlorine oxidation using different electrolyte
solutions. CVs of 100 mg Cl L-1 in 0.1 M NaCl shows shifted peak from ~1.4 V ( vs.
Ag/AgCl) in 0.1 M NaClO4 (Fig. 1a) to ~1.2 V (vs. Ag/AgCl) in NaCl solution (Fig. 2). On
the contrary, the peak shifted to the more positive potential (~1.5 V) in 0.1 M PBS. The result
indicated that exceeded chloride ion concentration leads to accelerate the electron transfer on
hypochlorite oxidation, whereas reserve effect was found in PBS. It seems that different
chemical reactions between ClO- and Cl- (in NaCl electrolyte) and between ClO- and ClO4- (in
NaClO4 electrolyte) occurred before electrochemical oxidation of the electrodes, suggesting a
CE mechanism in the presence of other species Cl (Cl- or ClO4-).

Further comparison with anodically oxidized (ao-) BDD was conducted. CVs of 500 mg Cl L-
1
at ao-BDD electrodes shows that the oxidation peak shifted to a more positive potential in
comparison with that at ad-BDD. It is well-known that the ad-BDD surface is mainly
hydrogen-terminated since BDD electrodes were deposited in a hydrogen plasma of the CVD
machine. Ad-BDD has relatively more positive charge than ao-BDD, which has oxygen
termination. An oxidation treatment can convert the BDD surface to be partially oxygen
terminated [Notsu et al. 2000]. The strong repulsion at ao-BDD suggests that the active
oxidized molecule has negatively charged, confirming that the active molecule is ClO-.
Figure 2. Cyclic voltammograms of 0.1 M NaClO4 at as-deposited BDD electrodes. He scan rate was 100 mV s-1.
The inset shows a cyclic voltammogram at an anodically oxidized BDD electrodes.
Conclusion
A novel electrode to the determination of the free chlorine concentration in water has been
developed using highly boron-doped diamond electrodes. Cyclic voltammograms exhibited
well-defined peaks of ClO- at both hydrogen- and oxygen-terminated BDD electrodes.
However, the superiority of hydrogen over oxygen termination was demonstrated in terms of
the more negative oxidation potential and lower background current. High sensitivity and
good stability were also shown without any pre-treatment required. Interference of small
concentration of chloride ion was not observed, whereas exceeded chloride concentration was
found to accelerate the electron transfer on hyphochlorite oxidation. A detection limit of 8.3
µg L-1 was achieved using flow injection analysis, suggesting that this method can be applied
for free chlorine monitoring in drinking water.
Keywords
diamond electrodes, differentiation method, gold, stripping voltammetry, total
inorganic arsenic.
References
Kodera F., Umeda M., Yamada A. (2005) Anal. Chim. Acta, 537, 293-299.
Simper J., (1997) Product Finish 50, 4-10 World Health Organization, Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality –
Recommendations, 2nd ed. vol. 1. WHO, Geneva, 1993.
Kodera F., Umeda M., Yamada A., (2005) Jpn J. Applied Phys.44, L718-L719.
Fujishima A., Einaga Y., Rao T. N., Tryk D. A. Diamond Electrochemistry, Elsevier-BKC, Tokyo 2004.
Ivandini T. A., Sato R., Makide Y., Fujishima A., Einaga Y. (2004) Diamond Relat. Mater. 13, 2003-2008.
Kodera F., Kishioka S., Ueda M., Yamada A. (2004) Jpn. J.. Appl. Phys. 43, L913-L914.
Notsu H., Yagi I., Tatsuma T., Tryk D. A., Fujishima A. (2000) Electroanal. Chem. 492, 31-37.

Fe-Al intermetallic coating on steel by means of high energy milling

of Fe-Al particle mixture
Staff : Sri Harjanto1*, Nurul Taufiqu Rochman2, and Dedi Priadi1
Student : Alvian Novyanto2,3
Sponsor : RUUI 2007
Email Contact : harjanto@metal.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Sri Harjanto, Alvian Noviyanto, Nurul Taufiqu Rochman dan Dedi
Priadi, Fe-Al Intermetallic Coating on Steel by Means High
Energy Milling of Fe-Al Particle Mixture, Proc. of Malaysian
Metallurgical Conference 2008, Bangi, Malaysia (December 3-4,
2008)# (# selected paper to be published in Solid State Science and Technology, 2009)

1
Department of Metallurgy and Materials Engineering, Faculty of Engineering Universitas Indonesia
2
Advanced Materials and Nanotechnology Laboratory, Research Centre for Physics, Indonesian Institute of
Science, PUSPIPTEK Serpong 15314
3
Formerly, Postgraduate Student at Department of Metallurgy and Materials Engineering, Faculty of Engineering
Universitas Indonesia
Introduction
Fe-Al intermetallic compounds are well known to have a structural superiority in high
temperature condition because of their resistant to oxidation, sulphidation and corrosion (Mc
Kamey et al.,1996; Hashii and Hosoi, 1998; Singhu and Ishihara, 1995). However, the
disadvantages of this compound are brittle in room temperature and loose their strength at the
temperature above 600oC. An approach to increase the ductility of the intermetallic
compounds is by making the materials to nanostructure (Grosdidier, et al., 2001). Steel
coating with nanostructure Fe-Al had been reported by thermal spray method at 2350oC and
by the combination of ball mill and pack cementation at 400-600oC (Grosdidier, et al., 2001,
Zhan et al., 2006). Intermetallic Fe2Al5 was formed after processing for 15-120 minutes by
using ball mill and pack cementation.
The present research aims to investigate the Fe-Al intermetallic coating on structural steel by
using high energy ball mill at room temperature. In addition, this research is also investigating
the formation of nanostructure powder and coating phenomena of Fe-Al powder on the steel
surface.
Experimental method
Al with the purity above 90% and Fe with the purity more than 99% with size of 10 µm
obtained from Merck Co. Ltd were used in the research. Composition of powder were set at
Fe-30 atomic % Al (Fe-30 at.% Al) and Fe-60 atomic % Al (Fe-60at.% Al). Milling and
coating process were conducted simultaneously by using high energy milling HEM-E3D for
32 hours in inert atmosphere by using argon gas with the speed of 263 rpm. The vials with the
volume of 100 mL made from stainless steel were utilized during milling process. Ball mill
which are made from chrome steel with size of 10 mm and 2 mm were employed in the
milling. The ratio between big and small ball is 1:5 and the ball to powder ration (BPR) is 8:1.
The milling temperature was kept at 25-50oC, with the interval time was set for 5 minutes.
The milling products were characterized using SEM (Leo 430) and XRD with anode tube Cu
K (Philips Instruments).

Figure 1 shows the XRD patterns of the powder mixture of Fe-30at.% Al in the initial state
and after different milling times. From the figure, one can perceive that phase transformation

occurs in the powder samples during milling. It also can be observed that at the early stage of
mechanical alloying process (0–4 h), the intensity of the fcc Al diffraction peaks decrease and
then disappear after 16 h. This indicates that bcc Fe(Al) solid solution is formed since Al
atoms dissolves into Fe lattice (Shi et al., 2008). After milling for 16 h, the Fe3Al phase was
formed. The XRD patterns of the mechanically alloyed powders for 32 h are similar with the
pattern obtained after 16 h of milling.
The changes of crystal size was calculated from X-ray diffraction patterns of Fe-30at.%Al
and Fe-60at.%Al powder mixtures at 0, 4, 16, 32 h. As shown in Figure 2, during the early
stage of milling the crystallite size decreases rapidly with a final value of about 35 nm. It is
observed that Fe-30at.%Al in the early milling have relatively larger crystallite size than that
of Fe-60at.%Al. However, by increasing time of milling, the crystallite size of Fe-30at.%Al
become smaller than that of Fe-60at.%Al. It also indicated in XRD pattern that Fe-30at%Al
powder mixture tend to form brittle intermetallic Fe3Al after milling for more than 16 hours.
On the other hand, similar phenomenon is not found in the Fe-60at.%Al powder mixtures
after milling for 32 hours. In addition, by extending the milling time, the formation of
intermetallic phase in Fe-60at.%Al powder mixtures is predicted to be occurred.
Figure 1. XRD peaks of Fe-30at.%Al after milled for 0, 4, 16 and 32 hours.
Figure 2. Effect of milling time to the crystallite size estimation of Fe-30at.%Al and Fe-60at.%Al.

Figure 3. Cross section of steel with Fe-30at.%Al coating

Figure 3 shows the cross section of base metal of steel (left-hand side) with Fe-30at. %Al
coating (right-hand side). In the early stage of milling, the coating on the steel is thin, less
than 10 µm. On further milling (16 h) the coating is relatively thick, about 10 µm. It is also
observed that the structure of coating layer is rough and coarse. After milling time 32 h the
coating layer became thicker (about 20 µm). The coating layer structure is finer than that of
16 h milling time. Mechanical interlocking mechanism is observed according to the Fig. 3
after 32 hours of milling time. The phenomenon of cold welding in the coating process also
occurs.
Conclusion
1. Fe3Al intermetallic is formed after mechanical alloying of Fe-30at%Al powders at this
condition.
2. Nanostructure materials have been formed after 32 hours of milling time. This can be
predicted by decreasing crystallite size until 35 nm obtained from the calculation.
3. Mechanical interlocking mechanism seems to be occurred in the coating process as
observed in the coating layer structure.\

Keywords
Ball mill, iron-aluminide, mechano-chemical, metallic powder, nano particles.
References
Grosdidier, T., Tidu, A. and Liao., H.L., (2001) Nanocrystalline Fe-40Al coating processed by thermal spraying
of milled powder. Scripta mater., 44, 387–393.
Hashii, M., Hosoi, Y., (1998) “Characterization of FeAl Intermetallic Compound in the Process of Mechanical
Alloying, TMS, pp. 2425-2430
McKamey, C.G., Stoloff, N.S., Sikka, V.K., (1996) “Physical metallurgy and Processing of Intermetallic
Compounds, Chapman and Hall, London, pp.351-391.
Shi, H., Guo, D., Ouyang, Y., (2008) Structural evolution of mechanically alloyed nanocrystalline FeAl
intermetallics. Journal of Alloys and Compound, 455, 207-209.
Shingu, P.H., Ishihara, K.N., (1995) Non-Equlibrium materials by Mechanical Alloying”, Material Transaction -
JIM, 36(2), 96-101.
Zhan, Z., He, Y., Wang, D., Gao, W., (2006) Low-temperature processing of Fe–Al intermetallic coatings assisted
by ball milling, Intermetallics, 14, 75–81.

Knowledge-based material cost control for building construction

project using expert system approach
Staff : Y. Latief1*, I. Abidin2, and B. Trigunarsyah3
Sponsor : Personal
Email Contact : latief73@eng.ui.ac.id, CPI_abidin@yahoo.com,
bambang.trigunarsyah@qut.edu.au
Disseminated at : Y.Latief, I.Abidin, and B.Trigunarsyah (2008), CIB International
Conference on Building Education and Research 2008, 11-15th
February 2008, Heritance Kandalama, Sri Lanka
1
Civil Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Depok
2
Civil Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Depok
3
School of Urban Development, Queensland University of Technology, Brisbane, Australia
Introduction
Poor project monitoring and control process has been identified as one of the main reasons for
construction projects not achieving project cost objectives. Other factors contribute to this
condition include: lack of documentation on project lessons learned, not optimum in adopting
information technology, and a long process in making decisions. Documentation of lessons
learned corrective actions can help project team in identifying various project risks. It is an
important feedback in the effort to achieve better project performances, to prevent
occurrences of specific risks or to prepare responses to such risks. This paper discusses the
development of knowledge-based corrective actions related to controlling project material
cost, which includes identifying the impacts, the causes and corrective actions. A survey on
various high rise building projects was selected as the research method, and structured
interviews with experts on such projects was used as data collecting method. Probability
matrix, statistic and simulation were used to analyse the data, and expert system was used to
develop decision support system based on cost control theory and practices.
Research results
Knowledgebase for project cost control process are based on relationships between cost
overrun indicators with events and causes. In the initial stage of the research, these
relationships were grouped into related project cost components. Table 1 shows the number of
knowledgebase indicators as well as their related events and causes.
Table 1. Number of Knowledgebase Cost Overrun Indicators, Event and Causes
Project cost component Cost overrun indicators # Event # Causes
Equipment 5 67 52
Materials 4 58 57
Manpower 4 48 70
Subcontractor 4 31 48
Overhead 4 52 43
Total 21 256 270
Further assessment using qualitative risk analysis has provided information on the complexity
of the relationship between cost overrun indicators and events, as well as between events and
their causes.
The sources of risks that cause the most events on material cost overrun are purchasing and
material usage. Eight events that have the most influence on material cost overrun, which are
related to purchasing are:
• Project delay which is caused mostly by schedule variance and materials are purchased
not in accordance to specifications & requirements,

• Increased material costs which is caused mostly by delay in purchasing and poor strategy
in selecting sellers
• Change orders and excess materials which are mostly due to materials that are purchased
not in accordance to specifications & requirements
• Delay in material procurement which is caused mostly by shortage in the market, change
in materials sources that are related to project location, delay in payment, and delay in
purchasing
• Delay in project works execution which is mostly due to shortage of materials in the
market, change in materials sources that are related to project location, delay in payment,
and delay in purchasing
• Increased procurement cost which is caused mostly by shortage of supply in the market
• Delay in delivery of materials to project site which is mostly due to poor strategy in
selecting sellers
Seven events that have the most influence on material cost overrun which are related to
material usage are:
• Delay in project completion which is mostly due to repairs or reworks
• Shortage of materials during construction which is caused mostly by excess materials
onsite, reworks and inefficient works
• Reworks which are mostly caused by mistakes in material use
• Excess materials that are mostly caused by inefficient usage and materials movements of
materials on site, poor understanding of site characteristics, insufficient equipment for
mobilisation, and mistakes in materials usage.
• Delay in works execution which is due mostly to poor understanding of site
characteristics and insufficient equipment for mobilisation
• Increase in procurement cost which is caused mostly by inefficient usage and materials
movements of materials on site, reworks, mistakes in materials usage, poor understanding
of site characteristics, insufficient equipment for mobilisation, and mistakes in materials
usage.
• Increase in defective/damage materials which are caused by inefficient materials
movements of materials on site, poor understanding of site characteristics, insufficient
equipment for mobilisation, and mistakes in materials usage
Figure 1 shows the integration of the relationships between indicator-event, event-causes and
causes-corrective actions. The first level, which is the highest level of the network, is the four
cost overrun indicators: purchasing cost, transportation cost, storage cost, and excess (waste)
material cost. The second level is the events, the third level is the causes, and the fourth,
which is the lowest level of the network, is the corrective actions.
Figure 1. Relationship pattern indicators-event-causes-corrective action in Project Material cost control

The use of decision support system (DSS) in selecting corrective actions can improve the
effectiveness and efficiency in getting recommended corrective actions that lead to better
project cost performances. The program starts with an introduction that explains what the
program is all about and instructions to use the program. The second sub-model defines the
project information, such as project type, contract type and contract value. The third sub-

model consists of two modes of process, i.e. lessons learned mode and DSS mode. The fourth
sub-model provides report of the process results. C++ has been used in developing the
program.
The validation of the program was done by conducting several trials to construction experts.
These experts were asked to assess the program and the results it provides. The assessment
used in the validation include: completeness of knowledgebase system, speed, user
friendliness, accuracy of the results, and level of application. Most of the experts involved in
the validation gave good assessments for the program. They also suggested that an
improvement in design can make the program more attractive.
Conclusions
Relationships between cost overruns-events and events-causes are complex. The
combinations of these relationships require effective and efficient corrective actions that can
lead to improve project cost performances. It is very significant to document those
relationships as part of project cost control system. Those relationships make up a basis for a
good knowledgebase to select corrective actions The use of DSS program can support the
selection of effective and efficient corrective actions.
Keywords
Cost control, knowledge base, lessons learned.
References
O’Brien, J. J., & Zilly, R.G. 1991. Contractor‘s Management Handbook. New York: McGraw Hill Inc.
Kazi,A S & Chotchai C 1999. Cost Analysis Information System for Developing and Underdeveloped Countries,
Cost Engineering / Aug Vol.41 / No.8 : 29-35.
Dipohusodo, I 1996. Manajemen Proyek dan Konstruksi. Erlangga.
Naoum, S.G. 1999. Dissertation Research and Writing for Construction Students. Great Britain: Butterworth-
Heinemann.
Kaming, P.F., Olomolaiye, P., Holt, G. & Frank C.H. 1997. Regional Comparison of Indonesian Construction
Productivity, ASCE Journal of Construction Engineering and Management / Mar-Apr : 33-39.
Ritz, George J. 1994. Total Construction Project Management. New York: McGraw-Hill Inc.
Zhan, J.G. 1998. A Project Cost Control Model, Cost Engineering Journal Vol.40 / No.12: 31-34.
Asiyanto 2003. Construsction Project Cost Management. Jakarta: PT. Pradnya Paramita.
Arditi, David and Gunaydin, H.Murat, (1998). Factor That Affect Process Quality In The Life Cycle of Building
Project, Journal of Construction Engineering and Management, Vol. 124, No. 3, ASCE.
Ahuja,H.N. 1980. Successful Construction Cost Control. New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Hamzah, AR & Alidrisyi, M.N. 1994. A perspective of material management practices in a fast developing
economy: the case of Malaysia. Construction Management and Engineering. 12(5): 413-422
PMI 2004. A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge 3rd ed.
Stukhart, G. 1995. Construction Materials Management. New York: Marcell Dekker Inc,
Kimmons, R. L. 1990. Project management basics: a step by step approach. New York: M. Dekker.

Modification and grain refinement in AC4B alloy produced by Low

Pressure Die Casting
Staff : Bondan T. Sofyan1*, Andika P. Hutama2, and Ragil E. Susanto3
Student : Lulus Basuki1, Febrian Hendra1, M. Husni Harion1, Budi
Lesmana1, Lukfawan Trijati1, Jati Kusumawardhani1, Daniel J.
Kharistal1
Sponsor : RUUI 2008, Hibah Kompetensi Dikti 2008
Email Contact : bondan@eng.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : MRS International Materials Research Conference, Chong
Qing, China, 9 – 12 May 2008; Prosiding Seminar Nasional
Metalurgi dan Material II, Bandung, 20 – 21 Agustus 2008;
Jurnal Sains dan Materi, Desember 2008, pp.67-71; Int.
Conf.Materials for Advanced Technologies 2009, Singapore, 28
June – 3July 2009
1
Department Metallurgy and Materials Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI
Depok 16424, Indonesia
2
PT. Astra Honda Motor, Jl. Laksda Yos Sudarso, Sunter I, Jakarta 14350, Indonesia
Introduction
AC4B alloy (Al-8Si-2.4Cu) is one of the most desirable cast aluminium to be processed
through low pressure die casting (LPDC). However, there are many problems particularly
shrinkage and porosity that need to be resolved. Methods to solve this problem are by adding
modifier and grain refiner, such as Al-Sr and Al-Ti. Strontium is added to transform the
morphology of the silicon phase from acicular flakes to a fibrous rodlike form, thereby
improving mechanical properties, especially fracture toughness and elongation [Dinnis et al.,
2004]. At the same time Sr addition changes the mode of eutectic nucleation from that
occurring near the α-Al dendrites, to that taking place within the eutectic liquid itself. It then
will control the distribution of the remaining liquid in the last stages of solidification and will
define the connectivity of the feeding channels, and thus determine the resultant porosity
profile in the solidified casting. Titanium addition produces TiB2 and TiAl3 particles as
nucleant, on which α-Al dendrites will nucleate and thus producing a smaller grain size
[Asenio-Lozano, 2006; Nafisi, 2006]. This research is aimed to understand the effects of Sr
and Ti addition on AC4B alloys produced by Low Pressure Die Casting (LPDC) and to
investigate the fading mechanism of each alloying addition.
Experimental method
The melting of AC4B was conducted in reverberatory furnace with the capacity of 500 kg at
810 ± 5 °C. Then aluminum was poured in to the preheated ladle and trapped hydrogen was
eliminated by using Gas Bubble Floatation (GBF) for 8 minutes. Strontium was added as Al-
10Sr (wt. %) rod with the amount of 0.002, 0.012, and 0.015 wt. % Sr in the holding furnace.
At the beginning of GBF process, flux Al-Ti grain refiner was added with the amount of
0.019, 0.029, 0.0505 and 0.072 wt. % Ti. Molten metal was then injected through LPDC
machine at 700 – 710 oC. Fading was observed through the changes of hardness, tensile
strength and microstructure for a period of 0 – 2 hour. Samples were taken from thick and
thin area of the component to see effect of heat transfer on grain refinement and fading.

Effects of Sr Addition

Fluidity is an important factor in casting processes to reduce misrun. Results in Fig. 1 show
that at all injection temperatures, addition of Sr increased fluidity of molten AC4B alloys.
This is in correlation with previous studies that the role of Sr in solidification process is to
decrease the eutectic temperature so that shorten the solidification range and resulting in
higher fluidity. The presence of Sr also alters the morphology of porosity from irregular in Sr-
free AC4B alloys into rounded and partly irregular ones as seen in Fig.2.
475
425
Fluidity (mm)
375
325
0 % Sr
275 0.002 % Sr
0.012 % Sr
0.015 % Sr
225
670 680 690 700 710 720 730
Injection tem perature (oC)

Figure 1. Effect of Sr addition and injection temperature on fluidity of AC4B alloys.

Figure 2. Morphology of porosity in (a) Sr-free, and (b) 0.015 wt. % Sr-containing AC4B alloys. Microstructures
were taken from fluidity samples.
Effects of Ti Addition
Effect of Ti flux addition on hardness and tensile strength of AC4B alloys is presented in Fig.
3. It is clear that the addition of Ti increased the hardness, and is linear with the increase in
tensile strength.
96
190
94 (a) 180
(b)

Tensile strength (MPa)
92 170
Hardness (BHN)
160
90
150
88
140
86
130
Tipis
84
Tebal 120
82 110
80 100
0 0,01 0,02 0,03 0,04 0,05 0,06 0,07 0,08 0 0,02 0,04 0,06 0,08
Ti addition (w t. %)
Ti addition (w t. %)

Figure 3. The change of (a) hardness and (b) tensile strength of AC4B alloy with addition of Ti
Fig. 4 shows detailed microstructure of Ti-containing alloys, and results of microanalysis are
provided in Table 1. Second phase of silicon crystal is found in the alloys, as well as
Al15(Fe,Mn)3Si2, and Al2Cu. They are spreading in between the dendritic structures. No
difference in types of second phase was detected by addition of titanium. It is interesting to
note that titanium was not revealed by SEM in both alloys. Therefore, it is thought that
titanium grain refiner in the form of flux may have different mechanism in refining the
structures, in which the titanium contributes to the growth limitation of -dendrite.
Fig. 5 shows the change of hardness of 0.072 wt. % Ti-containing alloy for 4 hours. Samples
from thin area reveals continuous decrease in hardness throughout the period, while samples
from thick area exhibits sudden decrease in hardness in 1 hour, before increases up to 3 hours.
In general, thin area possesses higher hardness than the thick area, due to faster heat transfer.

a b
Fig. 4. SEM micrograph of AC4B alloys with addition of 0.072 wt. % Ti. Points of EDX microanalysis are
labeled, and the results are available in Table 1.
Table 1. EDX microanalysis of AC4B alloy with 0.072 wt. % addition of Ti, at points shown in Fig. 4.
Composition (wt. %)
No Colour Phase
Si Cu Fe Mn Ti Al
1 11.96 - 24.73 5.46 0 rem Light grey Al15(Fe,Mn)3Si2
2 96.43 - - - 0 rem Dark grey AlSi crystal
3 0.51 66.51 - - 0 rem White Al2Cu
4 1.52 - - - 0 rem Grey -Al

Figure 5. Change of hardness of AC4B alloys with 0.072 wt. % addition of Ti flux for 4 hour-period.
Conclusions
1. Addition of Sr up to 0.012 wt. % into AC4B alloys increases tensile strength, hardness and
fluidity, as well as spreading porosity and change its morphology from irregular into
rounded and partly irregular porosity. Further addition of Sr leads to decrease in
mechanical properties due to extensive porosity formation.
2. Addition of Sr modifies microstructures of AC4B alloys up to class E (well modified) and
decreases the secondary dendrite arm spacing (DAS). Modification of microstructures is
apparent by the transformation of Si eutectic from acicular into fine fibrous, α-Al(Fe,Mn)Si
from chinese script into accicular β-Al(Fe,Mn)Si, and Al2Cu from pocket into massive
blocks. Higher solification rate leads to finer SDAS and lower modification level.
3. Addition of Ti up to 0.072 wt. % increases the hardness and tensile strength of AC4B alloy
by refining the DAS. The effect of Ti addition is more dominant in thin area.
4. The longer the holding time, the lower hardness and the tensile strength of AC4B alloy. On
the other hand, the longer the holding time, the higher the SDAS.
5. The titanium was not detected in the microstructure indicating its growth limiting effect to
refine the α−dendrites.
Keywords
AC4B, Al-Ti flux, fading, Grain refiner, modification,LPDC, Sr.
References
Asenio-Lozano, J; B. Suarez-Pena (2006), Scripta Mat., 54, 943-947.
Dinnis, C.M, M.O.Otte, A.K.Dahle and J.A.Taylor (2004), Met. Mat. Trans. A, Vol. 35A, pp. 3531-3541.
Nafisi, S; R. Ghomashchi (2006), J. Mat. Proc. Tech., 174, pp. 371–383.

Nanocrystallinity enhancement of the sol−gel derived TiO2 thin films

by conventional annealing and post-hydrothermal treatments
Staff : A.H. Yuwono1*, Y.A.Yatmo2, P. Atmodiwirjo2
Student : A.Ferdiansyah1
Sponsor : RUPM-FTUI 2007
Email Contact : ahyuwono@metal.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Seminar Material Metalurgi 2008, 18 December 2008, Graha
Widya Bakti DRN, Kawasan PUSPIPTEK Serpong, Tangerang
15314 (to be published in Majalah Metalurgi-LIPI)
1
Department of Metallurgy and Materials Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus
Baru UI Depok 16424, West Java-Indonesia
2
Department of Architecture, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus Baru UI Depok 16424, West
Java-Indonesia
Introduction
Titanium oxide or titania (TiO2) is one of the transitional metal oxides which has been a
subject of research and industrial interests due to its large range of interesting properties and
technological importance. For example, the photocatalytic characteristic and super-
hydrophilicity of TiO2 thin films have led to important industrial applications such as
antibacterial ceramic tiles, anti-fogging coatings, and self-cleaning glass (Negishi, 1995). In
certain architecture application, the self-cleaning effect of TiO2 coated on the glass panels is
essential to maintain the transparency and cleanliness of the glass window, leading to a
reduced maintenance cost for the building. Among other techniques to prepare TiO2 thin
films, sol−gel process has been widely practiced due to its versatility, i.e.: (i) a lowered
processing temperature and thus lowered energy consumption; (ii) high purity; and (iii)
feasibility of employing various post-forming processes (McKenzie, 1984). However, the
sol−gel process has a major limitation, which is the largely amorphous state in the resulting
TiO2 phase, as a consequence of the relatively low processing temperatures. Therefore, the
present study is aimed first at understanding the mechanisms responsible for the low
crystallinity of the sol−gel derived TiO2 film and furthermore finding an appropriate
technique to enhance the crystallinity of the film at relatively low temperature.
Experimental details
In the present study, TiO2 thin film was fabricated by using transparent TiO2 sol solution
obtained through a careful hydrolysis of the precursor titanium isopropoxide (Ti-iP, 98%,
Acros) with ethanol (Et-OH, 95%, Merck) and de-ionized water. The Ti-iP concentration in
the solution was controlled at 0.4 M with an understoechiometric ratio of water to Ti-iP (rw)
of 0.82 and pH value of 1.3 for obtaining a stable clear solution. Furthermore, the sol solution
were spin coated the onto the glass substrates at 3000 rpm for 20 seconds. The
nanocrystallinity of the TiO2 thin film was varied by applying two different treatments, i.e.
conventional annealing and post-hydrothermal treatments. In the first treatment, the samples
were dried at 60 oC for 5 minutes followed by annealing in a dry atmosphere at 150 oC for 3
hours. In the second treatment, after drying at 60 oC for 5 minutes and annealing at 110 oC for
15 minutes, the samples were exposed to water vapor using Teflon-lined stainless steel
autoclave at 150 oC for 24 hours. The crystallinity of the resulting TiO2 thin films was
investigated by means of X-ray diffraction (XRD) measurements performed on Bruker AXS
diffractometer using Cu K- radiation (1.5406 Å) operated at 40 kV, 40 mA and with a step-
size of 0.02o and time/step of 20 seconds. The corresponding infrared spectra of the samples
were recorded at room temperature in the range of 4000400 cm-1 using Bio-Rad FTIR model
QS-300 spectrometer, which has a resolution of + 8 cm-1. The nanostructure of the films was

examined further by using a high-resolution transmission electron microscope (HRTEM)

operating at 200 keV and with a resolution of 0.14 nm (JEOL -3010).

Figures 1a shows the XRD traces of the conventionally annealed and post-hydrothermally
treated TiO2 samples. It is clearly seen that the conventionally annealed thin film (trace “a”)
shows broadened diffraction peaks in the 2θ range of 25−36, 38.5, 48.25, 54.85 dan 63.38o,
corresponding to the (101), (112), (200), (211) dan (204) crystal planes of anatase TiO2. The
broadening of difraction peaks strongly indicates a low crystallinity of TiO2 phase. By
contrast, the intensities of all the peaks were found to increase significantly in the post-
hydrothermally treated TiO2 thin film (trace “b”).
90
6 00
80
(101)
5 00
70
(ii)
T ran sim ttance

4 00 60
Intensitas
(112) (200)
(211) (204) 50
3 00
40
(i)
2 00 (ii) 30
1 00 20
(i) 10
0
Ti‐ OH Ti‐ O‐ Ti
20 30 40 50 60 70
(a) (b) 3900 3400 290 0 2400 1 900 140 0 900
0
400
Sudut 2 ( (derajat)
Wavenumb er (cm-1 )

Figure 1. (a) XRD traces and (b) FTIR spectra of (i) conventionally annealed and (ii) post-
hydrothermally treated TiO2 thin films derived from the sol- gel technique.
Figure 1b shows the existence of broad absorption bands located at ~3400−3500 cm-1, which
is assigned to hydroxyl groups of Ti−OH (Lee and Chen, 2001). In addition, there exists also
an absorption band in the range of ~400−900 cm-1, is accounted for by stretching vibrations of
Ti−O−Ti groups (Wang, et.al, 1999). It is apparently demonstrated that the conventionally
annealed sample (spectrum “i’) provides a high intensity Ti−OH absorption band, but with a
weak intensity Ti−O−Ti absorption band. By contrast, a reverse phenomenon is resulted by
the post-hydrothermally treated sample (spectrum “ii’) where the intensity of Ti−OH
absorption band is decreased significantly, accompanied with an increase in the intensity of
Ti−O−Ti absorption band. It is obvious that the nanocrystallinity enhancement of TiO2 phase
on the film is represented with an increase in intensity of Ti−O−Ti absorption band and a
decrease in intensity of Ti−OH absorption band. The stretching vibration of Ti−O−Ti
absorption band is regarded as the characteristic peak for TiO2 nanocrystalline (Wang, et.al,
1999). The difference in nanocrystallinity between these two samples is further confirmed by
HRTEM studies as shown in Figure 2. The conventionally annealed thin film provides
amorphous TiO2 clusters appearing as nearly spherical nanoparticles with no clear lattice
fringes (image “a”). By contrast, TiO2 nanoparticles in the post-hydrothermally treated film
shows well-established lattice fringe (image “(b)”). The average crystallite size and standard
deviation are 3.98 ± 0.97 and 9.09 ± 1.51 nm for conventionally annealed and post-
hydrothermally treated thin films, respectively.Concerning the lack of nanocrystallinity for
the sol−gel derived TiO2 phase, Brinker and Hurd (1994) and Langlet et al. (2001) have
suggested that the largely amorphous nature is related to the high functionality of titanium
alkoxide precursor favoring the fast development of stiff Ti−OH networks via condensation.
In this connection, further studies by Matsuda et al. (2000) and Kotani et al. (2001) suggested
that some structural changes in the TiO2 thin films derived from sol−gel process could be
induced by a treatment in a high humidity environment at temperatures above 100 oC. Further
investigations by Imai et al. (1997) and Imai and Hirashima (1999) confirmed that the
exposure of sol−gel-derived TiO2 films to water vapor triggered rearrangement of the
Ti−O−Ti bonds leading to the formation of anatase phase at relatively low temperature (180

o
C). Therefore, the XRD and FTIR results in this study confirm two important points. First,
the largely amorphous nature of the sol−gel derived TiO2 thin films is due to formation of the
stiff Ti−OH networks during fast condensation stage in the sol−gel process. Second, based on
the model proposed by Imai et al. (1997) and Imai and Hirashima (1999), the
nanocrystallinity enhancement upon post-hydrothermal treatment is obtained through the
cleavage or cutting mechanism on the stiff Ti−OH networks by highly-pressurized water
molecules to generate the flexible Ti−O−Ti bonds which can rearrange and thus densify to
form nanocrystalline TiO2 phase.
(a) (b)

Figure 2. HRTEM images of: (a) conventionally annealed; and (b) post-hydrothermally treated TiO2 thin films.
Conclusion
Based on XRD and FTIR studies, the mechanism responsible for the largely amorphous state
of TiO2 phase has been made understood, i.e. this is due to the formation of stiff Ti−OH
networks during condensation stage which retarded further densification to obtain TiO2
nanocrystalline. Nanocrystallinity enhancement on TiO2 thin films was successfully achieved
through a modified process combining a pre-annealing and a post-hydrothermal treatment
carried out at relatively low temperature (150 oC). Highly pressurized water molecules upon
post-hydrothermal treatment provide a cleavage mechanism on the stiff Ti−OH networks and
thus generate much more flexible Ti−O−Ti bonds which can further densify to form TiO2
nanocrystallites.
Keywords
Amorphous, enhanced nanocrystallinity, thin films,TiO2.
Acknowledegement
The authors would like to thank the financial support from Faculty of Engineering Universitas
Indonesia research Grant for Young Investigator (RUPM-FTUI) 2007 No.
781/PT02.H5.FT/U/2008.
References
Brinker, C.J. and Hurd, A.J., J. Phys. III France, Vol. 4, (1994), pp. 1231.
Imai, H., Moromoto, H., Tominaga, A. and Hirashima, H. J. Sol−Gel. Sci. Technol., Vol. 10, (1997), pp.45.
Imai, H. and Hirashima, H., J. Am. Ceram. Soc. Vol. 82, (1999), pp. 2301.
Kotani, Y., Matsuda, A., Kogure, T., Tatsumisago, M., and Minami, T., Chem. Mat. Vol. 13, (2001), pp. 2144.
Langlet, M., Burgos, M., Coutier, C., Jimenez, C., Morant C., and Manso, M., J. Sol−Gel. Sci. Technol., Vol. 22,
(2001), pp.139.
Lee, L. H., and Chen, W.C., Chem. Mater., Vol. 13, (2001), pp.1137.
Matsuda, A., Kotani, Y., Kogure, T., Tatsumisago, M., and Minami, T. J. Am. Ceram. Soc., Vol. 83, (2000), pp. 229.
McKenzie, J.D., in Ultrastructure Processing of Ceramics, ed. by L.L. Hench and D.R. Ulrich, (1984), Wiley,
New York.
Negishi, N., Iyoda, T., Hashimoto, K., and Fujishima, A., Chem. Lett., Vol. 24, (1995), pp. 841.
Wang, S.X., Wang, M.T., Lei, Y., and Zhang, L.D., J. Mater. Sci. Lett. Vol. 18, (1999), 2009.

Optimizing study on dissolved oxygen removal from water through

hollow fiber membrane contactor via sweep gas method
Student : Johannis Gilbert
Sponsor : Hibah Bersaing DIKTI 2007
Disseminated at : Sutrasno Kartohardjono and Johannis Gilbert. (2008) Optimizing
study on dissolved oxygen removal from water through hollow fiber
membrane contactor via sweep gas method. Proceeding on Seminar
Nasional Fundamental dan Aplikasi Teknik Kimia, Surabaya
1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia.
Introduction
In the power plant industry, removal of dissolved oxygen in boiler feed water is an important
step for protecting the boiler from corrosion, poor heat transfer and efficiency reduction.
Hollow fiber membrane contactors have high efficiency, energy, space and cost savings, and
some other advantages. Hollow fiber membrane contactors for oxygen removal from water
have been widely used in the process for ultrapure water in microelectronic, pharmaceutical
and other industrials. Recently, hollow fiber membrane contactors have been utilized to
remove the dissolved gases in boiler feed water (Miller, 2005).
Several earlier research on dissolved oxygen removal from water through hollow fiber
membrane contactor via sweep gas method have been conducted at the Department of
Chemical Engineering Universitas Indonesia (Kartohardjono, 2008). The result of the study is
the correlation of the mass transfer coefficient represented by Sherwood number. The aims of
this study is to obtain optimum conditions in the membrane contactors at a given water flow
rates and fiber diameters. The optimum condition is achieved at the lowest operating,
pumping and membrane costs.
Theoretical optimum conditions

There are three choices to define the best module as follows: the best module that gives the
most mass transferred per cost; the best module that gives the most mass transferred per
module volume; and the best module that gives the most mass transferred per power required
to move the fluid. The first definition will be that most commonly used commercially
(Wickramasinghe, 1993). When the total cost is dominated by the capital cost of the
membrane, the best module is the one with the greatest mass transfer coefficient. The second
definition is commonly quoted for blood oxygenators (Wickramasinghe, 2002, Matsuda,
2000, and Catapano, 2001), or might also be used for separations where space is important or
very expensive, as on off shore oil platforms. The third definition, the module with most
mass transferred per power required to move the fluid, would be achieved at low flows. At
low flows, the power required to move the fluid is proportional to the square of the velocity
across the fibre bed, while at higher flows, it varies with the velocity cubed.
The mass transfer correlation obtained from the previous study is (Kartohardjono, 2008),
Sh = 0.11 ϕ-1.42 Re0.99 (1)
This equation is obtained from mass trasnsfer study on dissolved oxygen removal from water
through hollow fiber membrane contactor via sweep gas method. Furthermore, the number of
fibers in the contactor can be obtained by solving Eq. (2),


0.99
⎛ QL dp − ndf
2 2
⎞
⎜ ⋅ ⎟ ⎛ QL ⎛ C − C * ⎞ ⎞ ⎛ d p − nd f ⎞
2 2
⎛ ⎛ ⎛d 2
⎞
−1.42
⎞ ⎜ π dp 2 − ndf 2
( ) dp + ndf ⎟ ⎜ ⋅ ln⎜ o ⎟⎟ ⋅ ⎜
⎜ nπd l ⎜ C − C * ⎟ ⎟ ⎜ d + nd ⎟
⎟
⎜ ⎜ ⎞ ⎟ ⎟ ⎜ 4 ⎟ ⎝ ⎝ 1 ⎠⎠ ⎝ p f ⎠
⎜ 0.011 ⋅ ⎜ n⎜⎜ ⎟
f f
⎟ ⎟ ⎟⋅⎜ ⎟ − =0
⎜ ⎝ dp ⎠ ⎟ ⎜ µ/ρ ⎟
D
⎝ ⎝ ⎠ ⎠
⎜ ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ ⎠ (2)

Eq. (2) is solved by numerical method using bisection method. Variabels used in the equation
are: DOinlet = 6 ppm; DOoutlet = 4 ppm; C* = 0 ppm; QL = 100, 200 and 300 L/h; dp= 7 – 25
cm; df = 0.03 – 0.2 cm; and lf = 40 cm. Fig. 1 shows the effect of shell diameter on the
number of fibers in the contactor. The number of fibres nf increases with increasing module
shell diameter dp. As the module diameter dp is increased, the equivalent diameter of the
module de increases, and based on the Equation (1) the mass transfer coefficient decreases and
lead to an increase in membrane area.
Fig. 2 shows the results of membrane, pumping and total costs versus module shell diameter
dp at fibre length l of 40 cm, and cost of membrane per area per year af of $20, 30 and 40/m2-
y. Fig. 2 also shows that pumping cost is independent of membrane cost. The membrane cost
increases and pumping cost decreases with increasing module shell diameter dp. Meanwhile,
at the same module shell diameter, membrane cost increases with increasing the cost of
membrane per area per year. Fig. 2 is consistent with Fig. 1 where an increase in module shell
diameter dp will increase the number of fibers and lead to an increase in the membrane area
Am.
Total cost of pumping and membrane is shown in Fig. 3. Total cost decreases as contactor
shell diameter increases at the region where pumping cost is dominant, and then increases at
the region where the membrane cost is dominant. The same phenomenon also occur for the
optimum module shell diameter as shown in Fig. 4. Fig, 4 reveals that as the membrane cost
is increased, the optimum module shell diameter dp decreases. Increasing the cost of
membrane per area per year af, increases the membrane cost at the same module shell
diameter as shown in Fig. 3. Therefore, one needs lower module shell diameters dp before the
pumping cost starts to dominate, hence pushing the optimum module shell diameter dp to
lower values. The value of η at the optimum module shell diameter dp increases because it
costs more to membrane and to pump a liquid further. All the curves tend to the same straight
line at lower module shell diameters where the pumping costs dominate.
60000 $9,000
50000
Biaya (per tahun)
40000 $6,000
Biaya Pemompaan
af=US$20/th.m2
n
30000
af=US$30/th.m2
af=US$40/th.m2
20000 $3,000
Q = 100 L/jam
10000 Q = 200 L/jam
Q = 300 L/jam
0
$0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
d P (cm) d P (cm)
Figure1. Variation of fiber number in the Figure 2. Variation of pumping and membrane
contactor, n, with contactor diameter, dP. costs, with with contactor diameter, dP.

$20,000 5.0
4.0
Total Biaya/tahun
$15,000
η (US$/gram)
3.0
af= US$20/th.m2 af= US$20/th.m2
$10,000 af= US$30/th.m2 af=US$30/th.m2
af= US$40/th.m2 af= US$40/th.m2
2.0
$5,000
1.0
$0 0.0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
d P (cm) d P (cm)
Figure 3. Variation of total cost/year, with Figure 4. Variation of performance index, η, with
contactor diameter, dP. contactor diameter, dP.
Conclusions
The study has been conducted to evaluate optimum contactor shell diameter at dissolved
oxygen removal process through hollow fiber membrane contactor via sweep gas method.
The optimum condition is obtained in two stages, first to find the fiber number in the
contactor and then to obtain optimum contactor shell diameter at the lowest performance
index. The optimum contactor shell diameter decreases at the region where the pumping cost
is dominant, and increases at the region where the membrane cost is dominant.
Keywords
Contactor, sweep gas, and performance index.
References
Catapano, G., Papenfuss, H.D., Wodetzki, A., and Baurmeister, U. (2001) Mass and momentum transport in extra-
luminal flow (ELF) membrane devices for blood oxygenation. Journal of Membrane Science 184, 123-135.
Ito, A., K. Yamagiwa, M. Tamura, M. Furusawa. (1998) Removal of Dissolved Oxygen using Non-porous Hollow
Fibre Membrane. Journal of Membrane Science, 145, hal 111-117.
Kartohardjono S., Immanuel Kharisma, (2008), “Pemisahan Oksigen Terlarut dalam Air Melalui Kontaktor
Membran Serat Berongga dengan Metode Gas Penyapu”, Prosiding Seminar Nasional Fundamental dan
Aplikasi Teknik Kimia, ITS, Surabaya.
Matsuda, N., and Sakai, K. (2000) Blood flow and oxygen transfer rate of an outside blood flow membrane
oxygenator. Journal of Membrane Science 170, 153 –158.
B. Miller, J. Munoz and F. Wiesler. (2005) Boiler feed water degasification using membrane contactors new
methods for optimized performance. IWC-05-79, presented at the 2005 International Water Conference.
Wickramasinghe, S.R., Garcia, J.D., and Han, Binbing. (2002) Mass and momentum transfer in hollow fibre blood
oxygenators. Journal of Membrane Science 208, 247-256.
Wickramasinghe, S.R., Semmens, M.J., and Cussler, E.L. (1993) Hollow fibre modules made with hollow fibre
fabric. Journal of Membrane Science 84, 1-14.
Jiahui Shao, Huifeng Liu, Yiliang He. (2008) Boiler feed water deoxygenation using hollow fiber membrane
contactor. Desalination 234, 370–377.

Separation of dissolved oxygen from water through hollow fiber

membrane contactor via sweep gas method
Student : Immanuel Kharisma
Sponsor : Hibah Bersaing DIKTI 2007
Disseminated at : Sutrasno Kartohardjono and Immanuel Kharisma. (2008)
Separation of dissolved oxygen from water through hollow fiber
membrane contactor via sweep gas method. Proceeding on
Seminar Nasional Fundamental dan Aplikasi Teknik Kimia,
Surabaya
1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia.
Introduction
Water is one of main utilities and has an important role in industries. This water still contain
very small amount of dissolved oxygen, however, have great effect on several industries such
as corrosive and oxidative effects. As for instance, in semiconductor and power plant
industries, dissolved oxygen in water can cause corrosion to production equipment and
products such as corrosion at steam turbine and defect chip products. The need to remove
dissolved oxygen from water is different from one to another depend on purity requirement
and its tolerance. In power plant industry, as for example, dissolved oxygen concentration in
boiler feed water must be reduced until below 0.5 ppm (mg/L) to protect the boiler from
corrosion, poor heat transfer and efficiency reduction (Shao, 2008), and below 10 ppb
(mg/m3) to prevent oxide layer formation in waver-immersion system (Ito, 1998).
Hollow fiber membrane contactors for oxygen removal from water have been widely used in
the process for ultrapure water in microelectronic, pharmaceutical and other industrials
because of its high efficiency, energy, space and cost savings, and some other advantages.
Recently, membrane contactors have been utilized to remove the dissolved gases in boiler
feed water. However, their use in boiler feed water are still not commonly used compared
with currently widely used technologies, such as chemical agents, forced draft degasifiers and
steam deareators (Miller, 2005). In the gas-liquid contact process through the hollow fiber
membrane contactor, usually used hydrophobic microporous membrane to prevent water
filled the membrane pores and allow oxygen go through the membrane pores. In general
there are three methods to remove dissolved oxygen from water through membrane contactor;
vacuum degassing method, sweep gas method and combination of these two methods. This
research will employ polypropylene fibers in the contactors to remove dissolved oxygen from
water via sweep gas method. The aim of this study is to evaluate the effectiveness of hollow
fiber membrane contactor for dissolved oxygen removal from water via sweep gas method
through mass transfer and hydrodynamics studies.

The fiber membrane was provided by MEMCOR Australia. The membrane is made of
hydrophobic polypropylene and the fibers are 2 mm in outer diameter. The total numbers of
fiber membrane in the hollow fiber membrane module are 30, 40 and 50, respectively.
The schematic diagram of deoxygenation experiment is shown in Fig. 1. Water from the
reservoir was pumped by a centrifugal pump to the hollow fiber membrane module at the
shell side. Meanwhile, nitrogen sweep gas flow on the lumen side of the membrane contactor
to sweep oxygen out from the membrane. Dissolved oxygen concentration and pressure drop

in water after the degasification module was monitored by digital dissolved oxygen meter dan
manometer, respectively.

Mass transfer coefficients and oxygen fluxes through the membrane contactors are shown in
Fig. 2 and 3. Mass transfer coefficients and fluxes, as it is expected, increase with an increase
of water flow rate in the contactors. On the other hand, mass transfer coefficients and fluxes
decrease with an increase of membrane packing fraction in the contactors. Transversal flow
and surface renewal effects are main factors affecting the increase of mass transfer
coefficients and fluxes at the lower membrane packing fraction (Kartohardjono, 2005).
Similar phenomena also occur in heat transfer where Nusselt number increases as the tubing
packing fraction in heat exchanger decreases (Lipnizki, 2001).
To study the dependency of oxygen transfer coefficients through the membrane contactor,
correlation is usually expressed in dimensionless Sherwood number, Sh, Reynolds number,
Re, and Schmidt number, Sc. Sherwood number, Reynolds number and Schmidt number are
representing mass transfer coefficients, flow properties and its viscosity, respectively.
General equation to correlate these parameters is expressed in Eq. (1), and for oxygen-water
system in this study the water viscosity is not varied and the b value of 0.33 can be used
(Gabelman, 1999).
Sh = f (ϕ ) Re a Sc 0,33 (1)
Figure 4 shows experimental data of Sherwood number plotted against Reynolds number at
various contactors packing density. Similar to mass transfer coefficients and fluxes, Sherwood
number increase with an increase of water flow rate and a decrease in packing density. More
over, the correlation from Fig. 4 is best fitted by equation,
Sh = 0.0015ϕ −1.42 Re 0.99 Sc 0,33 (2)
The high dependency of Sherwood number on Reynolds number exponent (a=0.99) indicated
that mass transfer is took place in turbulent region (Costello, 1993).
Hydrodynamics study is concluded by plotting water pressure drop versus Reynolds number
as shown in Fig. 5. Pressure drop increase with increasing membrane pacing density in the
contactor at the same Reynolds number due to an increase friction between water and fibers in
the contactor. In addition, an increase in fiber number will decrease equivalent diameter of
the contactor, and at the same time increase the water velocity at the same flow rate which
lead to an increase in water pressure drop.

0.01
k L (cm/s)
n = 30 serat
n = 40 serat
n = 50 serat
0.001
10 100
v L (cm/s)
Fig. 2. Variation of mass transfer

Fig. 1. Schematic diagram of
coefficients, kL, with water velocity, vL.
experimental set up.
1000
0.01
∆P (bar)
Sh
100
n = 30 serat
n = 40 serat 40 serat
n = 50 serat 50 serat
10 30 serat
0.001
100 1000 10000
100 1000 10000
Re
Re
Fig. 3. Variation of Sherwood number, Fig. 4. Variation of water pressure drop, ∆P,
Sh, with Reynolds number, Re. with Reynolds number, Re.

Conclusions
Experiments have been conducted to remove dissolved oxygen from water through hollow
fiber membrane contactor using nitrogen as a sweep gas. The mass transfer coefficients and
oxygen fluxes through the membrane contactor increase as water flow rate increase and
membrane packing density decrease in the contactors. Meanwhile, water pressure drop
increases either with increasing water flow rate or membrane packing density. Mass transfer
correlation in the contactor is best fitted by equation of: Sh = 0.011 φ-1.42 Re0.99 showing the
dependency of contactor geometry (φ) and water flow rate in the contactors (Re).
Keywords
Mass transfer coefficient, Reynolds number and pressure drop, Sherwood number.
References
Costello, M.J., Fane, A.G., Hogan, P.A., and Schofield, R.W. (1993) The effect of shell side hydrodynamics on the
performance of axial flow hollow fibre modules. Journal of Membrane Science 80, 1-11.
Gabelman, A., S.T. Hwang. (1999) Hollow Fiber Membrane Contactors. Journal of Membrane Science, 159, 61-
106.
Ito, A., K. Yamagiwa, M. Tamura, M. Furusawa. (1998) Removal of Dissolved Oxygen using Non-porous Hollow
Fibre Membrane. Journal of Membrane Science, 145, 111-117.
Kartohardjono, S., Vicki Chen. (2005) Mass Transfer and Fluids Hydrodynamics in Sealed End Hydrophobic
Hollow Fiber Membrane Gas-Liquid Contactors. Journal of Applied Membrane Science and Technology 2, 1-
12.
Lipnizki, F., and Field, R.W. (2001) Mass transfer performance for hollow fibre modules with shell-side axial feed
flow: using an engineering approach to develop a framework. Journal of Membrane Science 193, 195-208.
B. Miller, J. Munoz and F. Wiesler. (2005) Boiler feed water degasification using membrane contactors new
methods for optimized performance. IWC-05-79, presented at the 2005 International Water Conference.
Jiahui Shao, Huifeng Liu, Yiliang He. (2008) Boiler feed water deoxygenation using hollow fiber membrane
contactor. Desalination 234, 370–377.

Weldability of zinc coated steel sheet by plasma arc welding

Staff : Winarto1*
Sponsor : Private
Email Contact : winarto@metal.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Winarto (2008); International Journal of Material Science Forum,
Vol. 580-582, 61-66. (ISSN 0255-5476)
1
Department of Metallurgy & Materials, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
The coating of steel or iron with zinc using various processes is called "galvanizing". Metallic
zinc is used for corrosion protection of cast irons, mild steels and low alloy steels. The zinc or
zinc alloy cathodically protects the steel surface. Manufacturers of many items such as truck
bodies, buses, and automobiles are increasingly concerned with the effects of corrosion
particularly when chemicals or salts are used on roads for ice control. Galvanized metal is
also used in many appliances such as household washing machines and driers and in many
industrial products such as air conditioning housings, processing tanks, etc. Other uses for
galvanized products are for high tension electrical transmission towers, highway sign
standards, and protective items.[1]
There are two basic methods of galvanizing steel.[1] One is by coating sheet metal and the
other is by hot dipping the individual item. The coated sheet metal is produced by the
continuous hot dip process, but traffic control devices, high-tension transmission tower parts,
etc., are made by dipping each item.
Galvanized steels can be joined by the same methods as uncoated steel. The tensile, bend and
impact properties of sound welds made with covered electrode, gas shielded metal arc or
submerged arc processes in zinc coated steel are equivalent to the properties of sound welds
in uncoated steel, but galvanized coatings on steel may require: i) different data for
calculation of welding parameter; and ii) different methods of fabrication.[2,3]
There is often uncertainly about these differences and how problems connected with them can
be solved. This leads to reluctance to specify welding of galvanized structures and welders are
also often unwilling to weld them. This objections are often based on the erroneous opinion
that welds in zinc coated steel have inferior mechanical properties such as increased porosity,
inter-crystalline cracking, and zinc becoming incorporated in weld metal when compared to
welds in uncoated steel.
These problems tried to be dealt with applying the plasma arc welding technique on zinc
coated steel sheets. Since the plasma welding has many advantages such as a good
penetration, narrower weld beads, a minimized heat affected zone (HAZ) and minimal
distortions.[4,5]
The paper describes the weldability of zinc coated steel sheets produced by plasma arc
welding and also to investigate the influence of zinc dilution on the mechanical properties of
weldments as a function of various process parameters.
Experimental procedures
Welding equipment and accessories: The plasma welding equipment and the mechanized
tracking machine (BUG-O System) was used in this investigation to maintain the welding
travel speed.
Material & Specification: The low carbon steel sheet was used with the dimension was 0.7
mm and 1.0 mm in thickness respectively and the plate area of 450mm x 100mm. Those
materials were hot-dip galvanizing types with a variety of zinc thickness. The thickness of
zinc layer is 20 µm for 0.7 mm-thickness sheet and 10 µm for 1mm-thickness sheets.

Welding Program and Design: The welding experiments were carried out by several
parameters, those are:
a. Plate thickness: 0.7 and 1.0 mm
b. Welding current in the range of 20 to 40 A
c. Welding gas flow rate: 0.8 and 1.2 Lt/min
d. Welding travel speed: 300 to 650 mm/min

An optimum combination of parameters was sought which would give the full-penetration of
weld with the highest travel speed and no visual defects on every steel-sheets thickness as a
basis characterizing the process in the most interest and useful industrial applications.
Effect of Main Parameters: The arc current, travel speed, orifice gas flow rate were the prime
variables in this investigation. All of these variables are interrelated in their effect on
penetration to produce the sound of welds. The relationship between current, travel speed and
plasma gas flow rate which is called the operating envelopes. [6]
Evaluation of Mechanical Properties: The mechanical properties of the butt welds were
determined by transverse tensile tests, bend test and micro hardness test. The highest hardness
is in the weld metal area, this is due to the high cooling rate in weld metal producing the hard
structure.[3] The tensile results showed that the dilution of zinc in weld-metal had no
significant effect on the tensile properties of the butt-welded sheet. It is found that there is no
crack in all welds as can be seen in Figure 1.

(a) (b)
Figure 1. The macrostructure of weldments for 0.7 mm in thickness
(a) before and (b) after bending test.
Evaluation of zinc dilution in the weld pool: For further investigation, the SEM by EDAX
was carried out to determine the dilution of zinc in the weld pool. The photograph in Figure 2
shows that the zinc layers are still exist in the surface of weld metal, but there are very thin
layer. Analyzing the weld metal area using EDAX show that the amount of zinc diluted in the
weld pool varies from the top to the bottom of weld bead in all welds as can be seen in Figure
2. The dilution of zinc tends to decrease from the top weld bead to the bottom weld bead.
There are some elements dilute on the weld metal especially aluminium which is one of the
most important and common of the metallic elements. [7,8] However, the presence of zinc that
picks up in the weld metal is no influence on the tensile and bending properties.
14
Percent of Trace Elements (%)
12.05
12
Zinc (Zn)
Mangan (Mn)
10
Aluminum (Al)
8
1.29 1.69
2
.23 .22 1.02
.29 .26 .12
0
Layer Top Bead Middle Bottom
(a) (b)
Figure 2. (a) The thickness of zinc coating for 0.7 mm in thickness after welded by PAW &
(b) The percentage of zinc dilution from top to bottom of weldments

Conclusion
The following conclusion can be drawn as follows:
1. Zinc coated steel sheets with 0.7 mm and 1 mm in thickness can be welded satisfactorily
by plasma arc welding.
2. Arc current, travel speed & gas flow rate are the main parameters in PAW interrelating in
their effect on weld penetration to produce the sound weld.
3. No significant defects in all welds produced by PAW and the highest travel welding
speed can be achieved up to 650 mm/min for both plate thicknesses.
4. The tensile and bend properties of zinc coated steel welds were unaffected by the dilution
of zinc in weld metal.
5. There is a slight difference in chemical composition because of zinc pick-up varying from
the top layer to the bottom of zinc coated steel sheets weldments.

Keywords
Mechanical properties and weldability, plasma arc welding, zinc coated steel sheet.
References
[1] Porter, Frank C.(1991), Zinc Handbook: Properties, Processing & Use in Design, Marcel Dekker Inc., USA,
[2] Gregory E.N.(1970), Fusion Welding of Zinc Coated Steel, Proceed. 9th Int. Conf. on Hot Dip Galvanizing
Dusse1dorf, pp. 355 -386.
[3] Gregory EN.(1971), Mechanical Properties of Weld in Zinc Coated Steels, Welding Journal, October 1971,
Research supplement. pp. 445s- 450s.
[4] Robson, C. Agosthino, T.(2006), Advances in the Application of Keyhole Plasma Welding, The First South-
East Asia - IIW Congress Proceeding, November 2006, pp. 630-639.
[5] Norrish J.(1992), Advanced Welding Processes, IOP Publication, UK.
[6] Bennett B (1990), Gases for TIG and Plasma Arc Welding; Welding and Metal Fabrication, July 1990. pp.
335 -336.
[7] Steel World Team (2006), Role of Aluminum in Zinc Coated Steels, Steel world, pp. 36-39.
S. Wienströer, et.all (2003), Zinc/Iron Phase Transformation Studies on Galvannealed Steel Coatings by X-Ray,
Journal of Advances in X-ray Analysis, Volume 46 - pp.291-296.

A study on Kampung Pekojan area as urban living heritage

Staff : Evawani Ellisa1*, Teguh Utomo Atmoko, Kemas Ridwan K.*
Student : Pradita Widasari, Cindy Aprilia
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : ellisa@eng.ui.ac.id ; tiua@eng.ui.ac.id; r_kemas@yahoo.co.uk
Disseminated at : the 4th ISVS (International Seminar on Vernacular Settlement):
Pace or Speed? Vernacular Building Types and Settlements in
Transition, Department of Architecture ICPT Ahmedabad, India,
14-15 2008, with the paper entitled: Pekojan: Between the
Disappearance of Muslim Arabs and the Emergence of Chinese
Communities
1
Department of Architecture, Faculty of Engineering Universitas Indonesia
Introduction
This study investigated issues on urban living heritage and local community participation on
conservation of urban heritage. The case study is urban settlement of Pekojan, a Muslim
Arab community in Kotatua, Jakarta. The investigation focused on object as well as subject of
conservation i.e. the physical urban characteristic and the socio-cultural aspect of Pekojan.
Academically the purpose of this study is to enrich understanding and contribute development
of theory of problem solving on urban living heritage, especially for the metropolitan city
such as Jakarta. Practically this study aims to formulate a conservation strategy of urban
living heritage within the context of urban development system.
The urban characteristic of Pekojan had been investigated through data compilation and field
surveys. We explored the historical background of Pekojan through key informant interviews
as well investigation of historical resources. Using the purposive sampling, detail
observations on the existing dwelling units had been conducted to understand the architectural
qualities of the remaining old buildings. An open ended interview had questioned to old
building’s owners on their vision on conservation.
The results and discussion

Pekojan is derived from Koja, a Moorish or Muslim Indian migrant from Bengali. Few
records mentioned Moorish settlers living there, but the survival of Al Anshor mosque dates
back from 1648 remarks their existence. The opening of Suez encouraged migration from
Hadramaud or South Yemen and since then the Muslim Arab population gradually increased
and replaced the Moorish settlers. By the end of the 19th century Pekojan become entirely an
Arab Muslim settlement.
At the micro-morphological scale of family household, the common housing type in Pekojan
was the tube-like terrace row house often called rumah petak. By purchasing only one plot,
one could build a house which only 4 meters width, but could be as long as needed according
to conditions. The longest house could be 40 meter length.
The house of Pekojan is characterized by the intermediary transition spaces between the
entrances and the courtyards, preventing direct contact with the public to protect the privacy
of life taking place in the courtyards. On the other hand the life on terraces is more public and
open to communicate with the neighbourhood. The physical constraints of terrace and
courtyard met the social and cultural practices of Muslim Arabs in Pekojan. The pattern of the
houses in Pekojan created enclosed spaces, yet enhanced the sense of togetherness among the
Arab Muslims. Social practices are clearly expressed through the separation of the public
sphere. Men move freely in the streets and the terrace in the absence of women, while women
space is reserved for their convenience and privacy in the back-lane areas.
314 Policy Studies

By the middle of 20th century, migration from rural areas took place in large scale in Jakarta,
and Pekojan soon become more and more built up. While Pekojan is gradually transformed
into a high density residential area, the disappearing process of Arab Muslim population tends
to increase. From a total of 30.794 people in Pekojan, less then half of the population are
Muslims, of which not more than 1.000 inhabitants are Muslim Arab. The rest are non-
Muslim dominated by Chinese. It is very clear that Arab Muslims are gradually disappearing
and are being replaced by the Chinese inhabitants.
JALAN PEKOJAN GANG 4
ETNIC COMPOSITION
CHINESE
OLD HOUSES
NEIGHBORHOOD CONTEXT
(DEMOLIZED OLD &

TRANFORMED INTO MODERN
URIGINAL/OLD
BUILDING
TOWNSCAPE OF JALAN PEKOJAN GANG 4 NORTH SIDE

Figure. 1 Present Condition of RT 1/RW 1 Kampung Pekojan
Transformation is clearly visible in the new pattern of the Arab houses which are transferred
to Chinese. However, the Chinese intrusion does not necessarily transform building activities,
since many new dwellers maintain the building function for residential purposes. In the area
along the main streets, more change of use from residential to commercial or other more
economic uses are expected, such as combining housing with storage. The latter relates to the
fact that Pekojan is located adjacent to the commercial and retail center of Glodok. The
transformation strikes the naked eye with intensity. High levels of congestion are observed –
as result of high residential densities, multiple means of transport and the use of street for
Policy Studies 315

commercial and circulation purposes. The previously peaceful residential quarter is

makeshift, transformed into mixed areas that imply congestion and degradation.
The main characteristic of morphological change in Pekojan is the intensification use of
building lots. Existing small series of purchased lot parcel or smaller units of houses force the
new owners to rebuild upward. Meanwhile, there is scarcely any transformation in the case of
rental houses so that most of them are in an unreasonable state of disrepair. The low rental
rate is the main reason why the landlord will not have anything to do with repairs. On the
other side, tenants will not invest in expensive repair since there is no any guarantee of long-
term security. Such tenants are really caught in a dilemma, sticking on because of the cheap
housing as well as the convenience being located in the inner city.
Conclusion
Although local government had designate Kampung Pekojan as Arab Muslim cultural
heritage district (Regulation Governor of DKI No. 34/2006), the study revealed that Pekojan
had been transformed into heterogenic settlement. The continuous process of building
transformation of old houses in Pekojan is undergoing and triggering the physical degradation
through continuous demolition of abundant old buildings. As a result, neither characteristic of
dweller nor the pattern of settlement implies the continuance of Arab Muslim cultural
tradition. Without any protection program, Muslim Arabs in Pekojan have been gradually
disappeared, while in return the Chinese communities have emerged.
The declining process of the Arab Muslim population might be difficult to resist, as long as
the property inheritance consistently follows Islamic law. But religious buildings and
activities would never shrink, as the rest of Muslim Arabs keep on try to maintain the
subsistence of all religious features and activities in Pekojan. This has been underway for a
long time and until recent times remains significant to preserve old kampung Pekojan as the
historical Arab Muslim settlement. For that reason, synergy of religious buildings and
activities would bear a considerable role to maintain Pekojan as the Islamic center for already
spreading Arab Muslims, alongside an emerging Chinese community inside Pekojan.
Keywords
Arab muslim, socio-cultural aspect, urban characteristic, urban living heritage.
References
Ellisa, Evawani (2008) Pekojan: Between the Disappearance of Muslim Arabs and the Emergence of Chinese
Communities, Proceeding 4th ISVS (International Seminar on Vernacular Settlement), Pace or Speed?
Vernacular Building Types and Settlements in Transition, ICPT Ahmadabad, India, 14-15 February 2008.
Haris, Tawaluddin (2007) Kota dan Masyarakat Jakarta Dari Kota Tradisional ke Kota Kolonial, Wdatama Widya
Sasatra, Jakarta.
Heuken, SJ (1989) Historical Site of Jakarta, Cipta Loka Caraka, Jakarta.
Heuken, SJ (2003) Mesjid-mesjid tua di Jakarta, Cipta Loka Caraka, Jakarta.
Hitti, Philip.K.(2002) HIstory of Arabs, Palgrave Macmillan, New York, 2002.
Jonge de Hub (2000) Jakarta Batavia socio-cultural essays, Leiden: KITLV Press.
Kelly, Eric Damian and Becker, Barbara (2000): Community Planning, Island Press, Washington DC.
Kostof, Spiro (1992) the City Assembled, the Element of urban Form Through History, Thames and Hudson,
London.
Papageourgious, Alexander (1971) Continuity and Change: Preservation in City Planning, Pall Mall Press,
London.
Pearce, David (1989) Conservation Today, Routledge, Now York.
Pickard, Robert (2000), Policy and law in Heritage Conservation, Sponn Press in assosiation with the Council of
Europe.
Raffles, Thomas Stamford (2008), the History of Java (translation), Narasi, Yogyakarta.
316 Policy Studies

Factor affecting on sustainability of water supply (Case study on

Buaran water treatment plant in the city of Jakarta)
Staff : D.M. Hartono1*
Student : ---
Sponsor : Paper Presentation Funded by Competitive Grant Funding B (PHK
B), Civil Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering,
Email Contact : djokomh@eng.ui.ac.id; djokomhs@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Djoko M. Hartono (2008), Factor Affecting on Sustainability of
Water Supply - Case Study on Buaran Water Treatment Plant in the
City of Jakarta, Proceeding International Student Scientific Meeting
-ISSM 2008, Delft, The Nederland, 13-15 May 2008, ISSN: 0855-
8692
1
Environmental Engineering Study Program, Civil Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas
Introduction
In Indonesia like other countries in Southeast Asia, the major problems are increasing
population density, rapid urbanization and industrial growth, inadequate food, resources
depletion and pollution in the new era. To meet the increasing demands, people deliberately
modify the natural environment with a purpose to improve the quality of live. Water is used
not only for daily life such as drink, food, bath but also for other purposes such as
agriculture, industry and many other purposes. According to Cunningham and Saigo (2001)
almost 60% of human body is consisting water, and people can survive for couple of week
without enough food but without water can only survive for a couple of day. To support the
quality of life, water is very important in human life. To meet the needs of water for the
communities, the government has to provide the good water supply system.
In the past, municipal water supply systems generally comprise collection works, purification
works, transmission works and distribution works which are concerning with engineering
aspect. Population growth, industrialization, economic growth and the development of quality
of life are some example in increasing demand of water supply. To fulfil the need for water
supply, not only depend on engineering aspect but also another aspect should be taken into
account. Integrated water supply system approach which will consider natural environment,
engineering aspect, and socio-economic and community participation aspect should be
applied.
Method
The study was observing Buaran and Pulo Gadung Water Treatment Plant and their operation
as well as raw water characteristics in water intake. Study on consumer perception on water
supply usage is using ex post facto research with stratified random sampling for water supply
consumer. Primer data has collected by field observation and questioner form are distributed
to representative sample. Secondary data has collected from representative offices and other
relevant sources. Study on raw water characteristics at Water Treatment Plant at Buaran and
observation on social aspect along West Tarum Canal . Jatiluhur Dam is one of raw water
sources for water supply for City of Jakarta. From Jatiluhur Dam to the nearest Water
Treatment Plant in Buaran which around 70 km long, transmitted by using open channel so
call West Tarum Channel since 1966. Instead of as raw water for Buaran Water Treatment
Plant, West Tarum Channel its also supplied for two other Water Treatment Plant, Pulo
Gadung Water Treatment Plant and Pejompongan Water. Water analysis from raw water
Policy Studies 317

conducted for 34 water quality parameters. 34 parameters were used under time based
approach of various time period (hours to monthly based).

The result was indicated that some parameters are exceeding water quality standard based on
National as well as Local Government Water Quality Standard and the method of analysis is
based on AWWA (1999) and Hefni (2003). Observation on water quality parameter source
of Water Intake Buaran from year 2003 until year 2006 shows that there are 8 parameter are
exceeding water quality standard, turbidity, BOD, Iron, COD, Ammonia, Manganese,
Suspended Solid and Total Coli form.
Figure 1. Concept on sustainability of water supply

Characteristics of raw water, water treatment technology alternative, water production cost,
willingness to pay, implementing and law enforcement on current regulation are other aspect
to be considered in sustainability of water supply system. Nowadays, river is the main
alternative of source of water among other sources of raw water. However, characteristic of
the surface water has been setting worst basically caused by people activities as well as the
effect on climate change. Adaptive technology should also an option to accommodate the
change of characteristics of the raw water in produce safe water. In general water treatment
plant in Indonesia was constructed for 15 and 40 years ago. The development on water
treatment plant technology to produce drinking water that meet drinking water standards will
affect to the water production cost as a result will also affect to willingness to pay of the water
supply consumer. Many regulation concerning with water supply have already been set up
and produced which is not only protecting the water resources and the environment from
pollution, but also managing the community as well as government obligation.
Concept of integrating among natural resources, man made environment and social
environment should be implemented in all kind of live. Sustainability of water supply in
general depend on natural condition and man behaviour. Environmental condition also
depend on natural resources and global climate changes that will affect to the characteristics
of water resources. Human behaviour also affects the characteristic of water resources.
Education, regulation and proper environment are some examples to change man behaviour
to protect environment. Technology alternative in improving water treatment plant should
also pro environment and not to burden the water supply consumer. Addition technology to
treat raw water should also to consider capacity of human resources available.
Conclusion
People participation on protection water resource management should be improved by
education, training as well as socialization on the important of health. Production cost as
addition of technology should be explained and also transparency to consumer. Willingness
318 Policy Studies

to pay consumer to water tariff is one of the performance indicator of level in water supply
services. The other important thing is coordination among institution or parties involving in
water supply. The coordination should be made among, central Government, Department of
Internal Affair, Department of Public Work, Forestry Department, Local Government, Private
Company, Police Department and the community participation.
Keywords
Adaptive technology, characteristics of raw water, integrated water supply system, production
cost, willingness to pay.
References
American Water Works Association (AWWA), .Water Treatment Plan Design,1999.
American Water Works Association, Water Quality and Treatment, A Handbook of Community Water Supplies,
fifth edition, McGraw Hill, 1999.
Cunningham W.P , Saigo B.W. Environmental Science 6th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.
Effendi, Hefni, Telaah Kualitas Air : Bagi Pengelolaan Sumber Daya dan Lingkungan Perairan, Kanisius, 2003.
Gerhard Bjornsen, Rolf Gimbel, H.D. Spangeberg, A Concept for an Integrative Consideration of the Drinking
Water and WasteWater/Sewage Management, Water Science Technology Vo.37, No.2, pp.333-341, 1998.
Hadi, Sudharto P, Resolusi Konflik Lingkungan, Badan Penerbit Universitas Diponegoro, 2004.
Hardjasoemantri K, Hukum Tata Lingkungan, Gadjah Mada University Press, 2002.
Hartono, D.M., The Influence of Raw Water Characteristics Changes from Surface Water on Sustainability of
Water Supply (Case Study on Raw Water, Technology and Socioeconomics Aspects of Water Supply at Buaran,
Pulo Gadung and Pejompongan Water Treatment Plant), Dissertation, 2007.
International Reference Centre for Community Water Supply and Sanitation- WHO Collaborating Centre. Small
Community Water Supplies, Technology of Small Water Supply Systems in Developing Countries, The Hague,
The Netherlands, 1981.
Kodoatie, R.J dan Syarief R, Pengelolaan Sumberdaya Air Terpadu, Penerbit Andi Yogyakarta, 2005.
Miller G.Tiller, Living In The Environment, ITP, 1996.
Persatuan Perusahaan Air Minum Seluruh Indonesia (Perpamsi), Direktori, 2000; 2006.
Perum Jasa Tirta II, Water Utilization for Industry and Public Purposes in Citarum River Basin, Symposium on
Water Policy, Technology and Utilization for Industry and Public Purposes, Jakarta, 2005.
Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 82 Tahun 2001 Tentang Pengelolaan Kualitas Air dan
Pengendalian Pencemaran.
Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 16 Tahun 2005, tentang Pengembangan Sistem Penyediaan Air
Minum.
Qasim, Syed R.; Motley E.M; Zhu Guang; Water Works Engineering, Planning, Design, and Operation, Prentice
Hall, 2000.
Soerjani.M, Ahmad. R, Munir. R, 1987. Lingkungan : Sumberdaya Alam dan Kependudukan dalam
Pembangunan, Penerbit Universitas Indonesia.
Undang-Undang Republik Indonesia Nomor 7 Tahun 2004, Tentang Sumber Daya Air, 2004.
United Nations,. The Millenium Development Goals Report, 2005.
Policy Studies 319

Geochemical association of heavy metals and environmental

pollution at Jakarta Bay
Staff : N.D. Takarina1*, Wisnu Wardhana1, Budiawan2
Sponsor : Directorate General for Higher Learning (DIKTI)
Email Contact : takarinanoverita@hotmail.com; wisnu_97@cbn.net.id;
dr.budiawan@gmail.com
Disseminated at : International Seminar on Chemistry “The Roles of Chemistry in the
Utilization of Natural Resources”, 254. Padjajaran University,
Bandung

1
Department of Biology, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, West Java,
16424, Indonesia
2
Department of Chemistry, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, West
Java, 16424, Indonesia

Introduction
The environmental degradation due to the increasing of heavy metals concentration in water
and sediments will cause many health disturbance to organism (biota) such as fish, bivalvia,
etc. that live in the water and also human.
Studies of the trace metal contamination of sediments to monitor industrial pollution often
rely on the analysis of total metal content, but information on total concentration is not
sufficient for an understanding of the environmental behaviour of trace metals as only fraction
of the total metal is available for biological or diagenetic processes (Groot et.al., 1982; Martin
et.al., 1987: Tack and Verloo, 1995).
The objective of this study is to know the distribution of heavy metal Pb (Lead) in five river
mouths that flow into Jakarta Bay and to know the geochemical partitioning of Pb in the
sediments that are bound to “Exchangeable Fraction”, “Reducible Fraction”, “Fe-Mn Oxide
Fraction”, “Oxidizeable Fraction” and “Residual Fraction”.
In this study, a total of 18 sediment samples were collected from the coastal area of Jakarta
Bay. The samples were taken from the 5 river mouths namely Muara Angke, Muara
Ciliwung (Ancol), Muara Sunter, Muara Cakung, and Muara Bekasi. From each river mouth,
there were 3 sub samples taken from left side, right side and the middle part of river mouth.
One comparison sample was also collected from Penjaliran Island (100 km up North of
Jakarta Bay) to see background value and compared it with values that observed in Jakarta
Bay.
Methods
During sample collection the depth, salinity, dissolved oxygen, biological oxygen demand
and suspended solids of the overlying water were recorded. Water samples were collected
with a 2-L Van Dorn water sampler. Biological oxygen demand is based on a five-day
incubation period. Suspended solids were determined by filtering 2 liters of water through a
pre-weighed glass fiber filter. Filters was dried at 60º C and reweighed after equilibration in a
desiccator. Sediment samples were collected using a 3.5 L Ekman grab sampler. The top 2–
3cm of sediment was collected using a plastic spatula. After that, sediments was placed in
acid washed plastic bags and stored at 4º C for transport. Within 24h of collection, samples
are hand picked for benthic organisms and large organic matter, dried at 105º C and stored in
acid washed sample bottles. Bulk sediment samples should be disaggregated with an agate
mortar and pestle in preparation for geochemical analysis.
The geochemical fractionation of Pb is determined on a 1g aliquot of bulk sediment using a
series of three sequential leaches, a residual digestion and a separate oxidizing leach (Buckley
and Winters, 1992). The first sequential leach, denoted F1, is with weak (25%) acetic acid
320 Policy Studies

adjusted to pH 2 for 16 hours at room temperature as described in Chester and Hughes (1967).
This weak acid leach extracts metals predominantly from carbonates, hydrated sulfides, and
weakly bound metals adsorbed on mineral surfaces. The second leach, denoted F2, is using
1M hydroxylamine hydrochloride (NH2OH.HCl) at room temperature for 16h at pH 5–6. This
leach extracts potentially reducible metals (Chester and Hughes, 1967). The third leach,
denoted F3, is performed with 0.04M NH2-OH.HCl at pH 2 heated to 80º C. This leach
extracts predominantly strongly adsorbed metals from mineral surfaces (Tessier et al., 1979).
The sum of metal extracted by these three leaches is defined as labile metal. A 0.5g aliquot of
the residue from the first three leaches will be analyzed for total metal content by a four acid
digestion (HClO4/HNO3/HCl/HF) at 200ºC. This residual digestion, denoted F5, extracts
metals bound within lithogenic material and complexed with organic matter. To account for
metals bound to organic matter, the F5 fraction is presented as the total metal content of the
residual fraction minus the metal content of the organic fraction. The organic fraction leach,
denoted F4, will be performed on a separate 1g aliquot of sediment treated with an oxidizing
leach of 10% hydrogen peroxide and 25% acetic acid at pH 2 for 24h. This leach will extract
metals associated with organic matter and oxidizable sulfides. The acetic acid retarded
hydrolysis of metals as they were extracted. Because this leach also extracted metal from the
weak acid soluble forms, it is necessary to correct for this component by subtracting the
results from the first sequential leach.
Leachates from the labile and organic fractions were analyzed by ICP-AES. Residue total
destruction analysis was analyzed using ICP-MS. The accuracy and precision of results is
determined by analyzing five sediment samples in duplicate and the standard reference
material MESS-1 in triplicate.

The result of this research showed that Lead (Pb) reach the highest concentration of 272 ppm
at Muara Sunter. Other river mouths like Muara Angke, Muara Cakung, and Muara Ciliwung
have average concentration as much as 167, 146, 78 ppm, respectively. These values exceed
the Canadian Standard for Contaminated Sediments which for Pb is 25 ppm. Lead (Pb) is
used for industrial processes such as in textile, paint, ceramics, metal foundries, agrochemical,
pharmaceutical, electronics, plastics, vehicles, pulp, and electroplating factories. Meanwhile,
the lowest concentration of Pb was found at Muara Bekasi. There are not many industries,
yet, in this area. Based on percentage of fraction, most of Lead (Pb) was bound to lithogenic
fraction (F5) as much as 15-90 %, therefore there are not bioavailable for biota right now, but
it is possible to be released in the future.
Conclusion
Lead (Pb) content in four river-mouths (Muara Angke, Muara Sunter, Muara Cakung, and
Muara Ciliwung) exceeds the Canadian Standard for Contaminated Sediments which for Pb is
25 ppm.
Keywords
Geochemical association, heavy metal, sediment, pollution, Jakarta bay.
Acknowledgement
The writers want to thank to Directorate General for Higher Learning (DIKTI) for funding
this research. Gratitude was also addressed to all of staffs at Affiliation Laboratory at
Chemistry Department and Marine Biology Laboratory, Biology Department, Faculty of
Mathematics and Natural Sciences, Universitas Indonesia.
References
Buckley, D.E., Winter, G.V., 1992. Geochemical characteristic of contamined surficial sediments in Halifax
Harbour: impact of waste discharge. Canadian Journal of Earth Science 29, 2617—2639.
Policy Studies 321

Chester, R., Hughes, M. J., 1967. A chemical technique for the separation of ferro-manganesse mineral, carbonate
mineral and adsorbed trace elements from pelagic sediments. Chemical Geology 2, 249—262.
Groot, A.J. de, Zschuppe, K.H., Salomons, W., 1982. Standardization of methods of analysis of heavy metals in
sediments. Hydrobiologia 92, 689–695.
Martin, J.M., Nirel, P., Thomas, A.J., 1987. Sequential extraction techniques: promises and problems. Marine
Chemistry 22, 313–341.
Tack,F.M.G., Verlo, M.G., 1995. Chemical speciation and fractionation in soil and sediment heavy metal analysis:
a review. International Journal of Enviromental Analytical Chemistry 59, 225—238.
322 Policy Studies

Heavy metals content in the sediments of Angke River and its

estuary, Jakarta
Staff : N.D. Takarina1*and Sunardi2
Sponsor : Tzu- Chi Foundation, Tzu- Chi University, Taiwan and Universitas
Indonesia
Email Contact : takarinanoverita@hotmail.com; sunardi1@ui.edu
Disseminated at : Sciences Go Green The First International Seminar on Science and
Technology (ISSTEC 2009): The challenge of Sciences in Global
Warming Era: Issues and Opportunities for a Better Life at
Universitas Islam Indonesia (UII), Jogjakarta, Indonesia

1
16424, Indonesia
2
Department of Chemistry, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences, Universitas Indonesia Depok, West
Introduction
River is one of important water resources that give many benefits for human society.
Characteristics of river reflect the environmental condition of the surrounding landscape.
Healthy river ecosystems are balanced systems where input, output and chemical
transformation maintain nutrient concentrations within ranges appropriate for organisms
living in the river. Sewage and industrial effluent from urban areas and fertilizers from
agriculture field and residential landscape becomes major input pathway, raising nutrient
concentration to many times their natural concentration. In response to the high nutrient levels
and the associated high concentration of organic matter, autotrophic and heterotrophic
microbial communities bloom and natural species composition are severely disrupted. The
consequences of these effects to water quality may be severe that human health is directly
threatened, especially the presence of toxin such as heavy metals in these effluents (Naiman et
al., 1998).
Kali Angke is one of complex river ecosystem in Jakarta. This river provides benefit for the
surrounded people such transportation, diffusion of wastes, and fishing, but on the other hand
impact of those activities have degraded river condition. Monitoring of water quality and
management of Kali Angke are needed to maintain the river water condition.
Sediment plays a crucial role in water quality due to its role as a sink for pollutants and the
potential later release of these contaminants to the water column with changes in
physicochemical conditions (Salomons and Forstner, 1984).
Methods
Surface sediment sampling was performed in the middle of the rivers. Surface sediments were
collected using an Ekman grab sampler. The samples were carefully scraped only the top 2
cm, then transferred to plastic bags (acid washed). At places where the water depth is low,
plastic spatula is used to take the sediments from each site. Sediments were air-dried at room
temperature. To know the concentration of heavy metals in the environment, strong acid
digestion using HF, HNO3 and HC1O4 on fraction < 63 um of sediments was used. This
method not only gives total concentration of metals but also attack silicate minerals. The
procedures are as follows : pre-weighed (± 0.25 g) dry sediment samples were put into teflon
beaker and were digested in a gradually warmed ( ± 100 °C) mixture of nitric, perchloric and
hydrofluoric acids in teflon 'bombs'. This method will destroy the silicates and most
constituents of sediments. Samples were evaporated overnight and after several steps of
dilution (with deonized water) and filtration (using mesh 42 of ash-less paper), the samples
were ready for analyses by Perkin Elmer 3110 Atomic Absoption Spectrophotometry
Policy Studies 323

(AAS) (Sola, 1991). The detection limit for Pb and Cd were 0.01 ppm; while for Hg and
As were and 0.0001 ppm.
To calculate heavy metals content in benthic animals, 0.5 – 3.0 g of benthic animal samples
were preweighed to obtain a dry weight. Samples were ground using an agate mortar and
pestle. Ground samples were stored in plastic vials until sub samples were taken for digestion.
Approximately 0.3 g of benthic animal samples are mixed with 5 mL of concentrated nitric
acid and heated to 60 degree Celcius for 2 hours. The temperature is raised to 110 degree
Celcius and the samples are digested for further 4 hours. An additional 3 mL concentrated
nitric acid was added and temperature be reduced to 60 degree Celcius. The samples were
covered and allowed to reflux overnight, until the volume reduced to approximately 1 mL.
Samples were diluted to final volume of 50 mL with demineralized water. The samples are
ready for analysis. Here, Zeeman Background Corrected Graphite Furnace/ Autosampler
Condition Hitachi Model Z-2000 Series Spectrophotometer was used.

Based on heavy metal analysis using Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer, it is showed that
lead (Pb) content in Angke River sediment range from 13.73 in Pantai Indah Kapuk and
56.10 µg/g dry wt (ppm) in Right side of Rivermouth. Some of these values were above the
Canadian Standard which for Pb is 25 ppm. Sources of lead (Pb) is from leaded gasoline,
smelting, painting, and galvanizing, also electroplating factories.
Cadmium (Cd) content in Angke river ranges from 8.92 µg/g dry wt (ppm) in Pesing Poglar
and 124.33 µg/g dry wt (ppm) in river mouth. These values exceed the Canadian Standard for
contaminated sediment which for Cd is 0.006 ppm. Cadmium is used extensively in
electroplating factory, paints, batteries, and phosphate fertilizers.
The concentration of Arsenic (As) in sediments of Angke river and its estuary ranges from
3.55 – 34.28 µg/g dry wt. Probable Effect Level (PEL) is the concentration above which
adverse effects are expected to occur frequently. The PEL for arsenic is 17 micrograms per
gram (µg/g) dry weight, for bulk (un-sieved) sediments. Arsenic occurs naturally in soil and
minerals and it therefore may enter the air, water, and land from wind-blown dust and may
get into water from runoff and leaching. Beside that, arsenic is used in various agricultural
activities, insecticides, and poisons.
Mercury (Hg) content in sediments of Angke river and its estuary varied between <0.2 -
28.11µg/g dry wt (ppm). Some of these values are below the detection limit. Only at River
mouth is high. This is probably due to water discharge directly from river that is carried by
the currents. Canadian Standard for Contaminated Sediment for Mercury in sediments is 0.5
ppm.
Conclusion
Most of heavy metals content in several areas of Angke River and its estuary already exceeds
the Canadian Standard for Contaminated Sediments.
Keywords
Angke river, benthic animal, estuary, heavy metal, sediment.

Acknowledgement
The writer wants to thank Tzu Chi Foundation, Tzu Chi University and Universitas Indonesia
for funding this research.
References
Naiman, J.R., Stuart, B., Christer N.Geoff E. P., Gilley P. Lisa C.T., 1998. Legitimizing fluvial ecosystem as users
of waters: an overview. Environmental Management 30, Springer NY, 455—467.
Salomon, W., Forstner, U., 1984. Metals in the Hydrocycle. Springer-Verlag. Berlin Heidelberg, NY. Tokyo 349 p.
Sola, M.J., Millian, E., Legorburu, L., Canton, L., 1991.Heavy metals levels in superficial river sediment from
Guipuzcoa (Spain). Environ. Technol, 12, 441—445.
324 Policy Studies

Low impact development approach of meandering river to conserve

equilibrium river system
Staff : Siti Murniningsih1*
Email Contact : sitimurni@eng.ui.ac.id ; titik_winarno@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : Symposium for Young Water Talents, 23 June 2008, Suntec
Singapore
1
Laboratory of Hydrology, Hydraulics and River, Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering,
Introduction
Indonesia has approximately 127 river basins managed by central government, provincial
government and district government. Most of the river has a meander area especially located
at the lower reach. The word ‘meander’ originates from the Meander River of South-West
Turkey, which clearly shows the winding course characteristic of a meandering river. In
general, rivers originate from volcanic mountains and have a distinctive bed slopes which are
steep at the upper reach, moderate at middle reach and nearly flat at lower reach. When the
bed slope change from moderate into flat, the pattern of river channel also altered from
straight into braided or meander due to varying velocity and geometry of the channel.
Figure 1. Meander River

Meander River in urban area usually encourage sediment transport problem such as riverbed
aggradations at the area surrounding inside of the bank then will decrease the river capacity in
retaining flood while simultaneously eroding on the outer banks of meander bends. This
condition also has a serious impact to the construction of infrastructure such as bridge, public
road, houses which are built along the river bends. Related with the phenomena, protection
against sedimentation and erosion along meandering river is extremely needed.
In this paper, understandings of various phenomenons’ in the meander area due to the
sedimentation processes are described and also to propose the new concept of protection with
low impact developments (LID) approach. The role of vegetation on the floodplain should be
addressed as once of Low Impact Development approach to conserve equilibrium river
system along meander area.
Meander migration
Meander migration usually occurs as a response to natural or man-made disturbances of the
fluvial system. In most cases, it causes the occurrence of imbalance river morphology. In
order to predict changes in channel morphology, location, and behavior, it is important to
understand the relative stability of a channel, which is revealed by its patterns. The conditions
of the flow and the properties of the soil are major factors affecting meander migration, thus,
soil properties, meander geometry, channel relocation and human activities on the floodplain
Policy Studies 325

of river are considered to be the most important factors affecting meander. For instance, its
related processes of the meander migration cause problems such as landslide or slope failure,
outside bend erosion (Figure 2), siltation on the inside meander area, flood, scour of
infrastructure foundations and ecological problem.
A number of researchers showed the relation of meander migration with several properties of
the river such as free surface slope of the river, catchments area, channel width and channel
geometry.
Figure 2. Outside Bend Erosion along Meander Area

Most of meander pattern in Indonesia located at the urban area which is has some a serious
problem as well as many human activities along the floodplain of the river. This is of great
economics importance such as in connection with cost of flood control scheme, its critically
dependent on the estimated maximum flood level, sustainability of infrastructure i.e.
irrigation system, water treatment plan, highway, bridge pier that is seriously affected by the
scour and subsequent downstream deposit of sediment.
Subsequent modification if conditions remain stable such as canal shortcut or river correction,
are deep weathering and the deposition of sediment on the flood plain. Oxbow lakes, meander
scars, and natural levees are common which is has to maintain for long term purpose and need
some of maintenance budget to prevent meander migration.
Low impact development approach (LID)

The concept of LID is an innovative, ecosystem-based approach to land development and
stormwater management (Figure 3).Basic LID principles are conserve natural areas as
meander pattern, minimize development impact, maintain site runoff rate through implement
Integrated Management Practice such as pollution prevention, proper maintenance and public
education programs.
The morphological behavior in Meander Rivers is governed by several factors: channel width,
discharge, water depth, slope, bed material and vegetation. The role of vegetation on the
floodplain should be addressed as once of Low Impact Development approach to conserve the
meandering channel pattern. Bank vegetation influences the channel pattern and controls bank
strength also increase bank strength, reduction flow velocity and effective shear stress as well
as channel width (Ikeda and Izumi, 1990).
Figure 3. Key Elements of low Impact Development Approach
326 Policy Studies

Figure 4. Riparian Vegetation System to Conserve Meander Migration
Conclusions
There are many examples of streambank stabilization and rehabilitation measures that failed
because they were placed on actively migrating streams and rivers without evaluating the
characteristics of channel migration at those locations. In many places, efforts are being made
to acquire, maintain, and increase remaining riparian vegetation system for ecological and
biological purposes also for conserve meander river migration (Figure 4). Since sheet erosion
can also cause banks slope failure, slope surface protection should be considered as important
as other structural reinforcements but its importance is often over looked.
Protecting the slope surface with vegetative cover is an effective, economical, and essential
preventive measure. The vegetative cover provided by grass seeding, hydro-seeding or hydro-
mulching normally is quite effective against sheet erosion and small rill erosion, and deep-
rooted plants such as trees and shrubs can provide some structural reinforcement for the
ground. According to this condition, a river which has an active meander migration is
generally necessary to maintain a healthy riparian community with vegetation system, a
meanderbelt that is sufficiently wide to allow active channel migration should be maintained.
References
A.H. Elliott (2000) Settling of Fine Sediment in a Channel with Emergent Vegetation, Journal of Hydraulics
Research, Vol. 126, No. 8 ,pp. 570 –577.
C.-L.Jang, (2007) Vegetation Effects on the Morphological Behavior of Alluvial Channels, Journal of Hydraulics
Research, Vol. 45, No. 6, pp. 763 –772.
Jean-Louis Briaud, et al. (2007) Establish Guidance for Soil Properties – Based Prediction of Meander Migration
Rate, Technical Report published on www.ntis.gov,National Technical Information Service, Springfield,
Virginia 22116.
Kanhu Charan Patra and Srijib K. Kar (2000) Flow Interaction of Meandering River with Floodplains, Journal of
Hydraulics Research, Vol. 126, No. 8, pp. 593 –603.
Paul Truong Tran Tan Van, Elise Pinners (2008), Vetiver Systems Applications, Proven and Green Environmental
Solutions, A Technical Reference Manual, Published by The Vetiver Network International.
Policy Studies 327

Small hydraulic structure to maintain reliable water municipal

supply
Staff : Siti Murniningsih1*, Toha Saleh1
Student : Annie Wulandari2
Email Contact : sitimurni@eng.ui.ac.id, titik_winarno@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : 1ST IWA Asia Pacific Young Water Professionals Conference :
“ Meeting Water Challenges in Asia-Pacific Region”, Gwangju,
Korea, December 08 – 10, 2008
1
Laboratory of Hydrology, Hydraulics and River, Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering,
2
Post graduate Students, Structural Engineering, Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, and
Introduction
Indonesia has encountered no problem in the water issue as supply is sufficient. The problem
results from the way of managing water properly. In recent years, certain problems associates
with in many river basins have become apparent, for instance, extensive soil erosion and
siltation problems in the river basin are severe due to the destruction of ecological
environment. One of the most important problem occurred at West Tarum Canal (WTC) is to
convey raw water to feed Buaran Water Treatment Plant (WTP). It produces more than
400.000 m3 of drinking water per-day for community in the East Jakarta and becomes one of
the biggest plants in Jakarta. The raw water is taken from the West Tarum Canal (WTC),
which is part of the Citarum and Bekasi river system (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Area of Study

In the last few years, turbidity level in the WTC has been a major problem to Buaran WTP.
Quite often Bekasi River supplies not only the required additional discharge but also large
amount of suspended solids. Thereby, the WTP is suffering supply of water characterises not
only by high turbidity level but also by frequent spike that may rise from 16 NTU to as high
as 10,000 NTU. (source: Buaran WTP Intake data - March 2002). It is observed that several
spikes of turbidity level shows disturbed productivity of drinking water supplied to costumers
in DKI Jakarta. This condition identified that turbidity level principally analogous with
suspended solids amount, indicates that the sediment mostly dominated by suspended solid.
To reduce -and, if it is possible, to stabilize- turbidity level before the water enters the plant,
therefore come the idea to propose the Small Hydraulic Structure located at in front of Buaran
Intake.
328 Policy Studies

Problem identification
Several problem can be identified from the River Basin especially is the control of water
quality. Since the standard of turbidity level for clean water must be less than 10 NTU
(Nephelometric Turbidity Unit) and standard for drinking water must be less than 5 NTU,
therefore, some of countermeasures to reduce and to stabilized turbidity level before the water
enter the plant are strongly needed. The data recorded and previous studies at Buaran Water
Treatment Plant gives figures of several spikes of turbidity level, shown as wide
discrepancies between the average and the maximum value.
Turbidity Distribution (16-31 March 2002)
12000
10000
Turbidity (NTU)
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
0
0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
08
20
Hours
Figure 2. Turbidity Distribution, Silt Sedimentation at West Tarum Canal

Table 1 and Figure 2 show the difference of around 7000 NTU. From the observation along
the canal, it also identifies that turbidity level principally analogous with suspended solids
amount as shown in the Figure 4, indicates that the sediment mostly dominated by suspended
solids (e.g. silt). It is assumed that the dominant sediment is in the form of silt. This
assumption will be clarified by testing the sediment samples in the laboratory at the following
section.
Table 1. Recorded Turbidity Level (NTU scale)
Minimum Average Maximum Difference (Max-Avg)
12.20
1490.03 8456.17 6966.14
Source: WTC monitoring research by UoI, 2001

Preliminary identification
The 7 km channel between Bekasi Weir to Buaran treatment plant that convey flow rate (Q)
of 15 m3/sec has an average depth of only 2 m with 20 m width. An assessment based on
settling velocity (Vs) of coarse silt indicates that the current depth of the channel is
inadequate to prevent re-suspension. Even though, there is no significant disturbance from
area near the channel.
Design of small hydraulic structure
Regarding to laboratory analysis and the relation of turbidity and suspended solid, thus, the
objective of the research is to develop a scale model of small hydraulic structure as a
treatment unit which capable to overcome the spike and looking at the possibility of using
turbidity sensor and other technology to support the unit. Small Hydraulic Structure reduces
suspended solid concentration which might be installed near the existing intake unit at Buaran
WTP. The structure is a sedimentation unit, supplying the clearer water to further treatment
with settler plate system consisted of intake bay equipped with ‘V’-notch flow measurement
which will be used to control the flow of raw water that enters the unit. Settling chamber has
rectangular shape and riser with the type and number of intake pipe (riser) inside the basin,
should be able to attain discharge as design without causing any turbulence in the system.
Policy Studies 329

B- B B- B
Intake Bay
Bar Screen
Intake Bay
Sediment Trap
B- B
(a) (b)
Figure 3. (a) Proposed Design of Small Hydraulic Structure for Buaran Intake,
(b) Silt Sedimentation at West Tarum Canal
Conclusions
There are several ways to control the suspended solid transport along the canal which is
conveying raw water to feed Water Treatment Plant. For instance, the construction of weir
or sediment trap can be built before the water enters the plant. However, there are some
constraint in order to built the either weir or sediment trap. This problem is the decreasing of
water supply during the construction time and must be a consideration, since the water supply
for community in Urban Area on the supply from the canal.
References
Graf, WH, 1971, Hydraulics of Sediment Transport, McGraw Hill, New York.
Rodi, W, 1980, Turbulence Models and their Applications in Hydraulics-State of the art review, International
Association for Hydraulics Research.
R Perianez, 2004, Modelling the Transport of Suspended Particulate Matter by the Rhone River plume (France)
Implications for Pollutant Dispersion, paper published on www.elsevier.com.
Center FEWER, FT-UI, 2002, West Tarum Canal (WTC) Water Quality Monitoring.
Research, Joint Research between Civil Engineering Dept – PT Thames PAM Jaya.
330 Policy Studies

Speciation of heavy metals in the sediments of Jakarta Bay,

Indonesia
Staff : N.D. Takarina1*, Yasman1, Sunardi2
Sponsor : RUUI (2007)
Email Contact : takarinanoverita@hotmail.com; yasman.si@ui.edu;
sunardi1@ui.edu
Disseminated at : Seminar Nasional Kimia Lingkungan VIII: Pemanasan Global dan
Arah Penanganannya, Universitas Airlangga, Surabaya

1
16424, Indonesia
2
Department of Chemistry, Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, West

Introduction
Studies of the trace metal contamination of sediments often rely on the analysis of total metal
content; however, information on total concentration is not sufficient for an understanding of
the environmental behaviour of trace metals as only a fraction of the total metal is available
for biological or diagenetic processes (Groot et al., 1982; Martin et al., 1987; Tack and
Verloo, 1995). Assessment of heavy metal contamination of the coastal environment based
solely on total metal content also poses the difficult problem to regulators of how to
distinguish between background lithogenic trace metal that is relatively unavailable to marine
biota and labile trace metal.
This study is aimed to examine the distribution of metals Copper (Cu), Chromium (Cr), Lead
(Pb) and Zinc (Zn) and to know the geochemical partitioning of those heavy metals in marine
sediments from the coast of Jakarta Bay, Indonesia that are bound to “Exchangeable
Fraction”, “Reducible Fraction”, “Fe-Mn Oxide Fraction”, “Oxidizeable Fraction” and
“Residual Fraction”.
In this study, a total of 12 sediment samples were collected from the coastal area of Jakarta
Bay. The samples were taken from the 3 river mouths namely Muara Kamal, Cengkareng
Drain, and Muara Dadap. From each river mouth, there were 3 sub samples taken from left
side, right side and the middle part of river mouth. One comparison sample was also collected
from upstream of Ciliwung River to see the anthropogenic effects to the estuaries and one
from Penjaliran Island (100 km up North of Jakarta Bay).
Methods
The geochemical fractionation of Cr, Cu, Pb, and Zn is determined on a 1g aliquot of bulk
sediment using a series of three sequential leaches, a residual digestion and a separate
oxidizing leach (Buckley and Winters, 1992). The first sequential leach, denoted F1, is with
weak (25%) acetic acid adjusted to pH 2 for 16h at room temperature as described in Chester
and Hughes (1967). This weak acid leach extracts metals predominantly from carbonates,
hydrated sulfides, and weakly bound metals adsorbed on mineral surfaces. The second leach,
denoted F2, is using 1M hydroxylamine hydrochloride (NH2OH HCl) at room temperature
for 16h at pH 5–6. This leach extracts potentially reducible metals (Chester and Hughes,
1967). The third leach, denoted F3, is performed with 0.04M NH2- OH HCl at pH 2 heated to
80º_C. This leach extracts predominantly strongly adsorbed metals from mineral surfaces
(Tessier et al., 1979). The sum of metal extracted by these three leaches is defined as labile
metal. A 0.5g aliquot of the residue from the first three leaches was analyzed for total metal
content by a four acid digestion (HClO4/HNO3/HCl/HF) at 200ºC. This residual digestion,
denoted F5, extracts metals bound within lithogenic material and complexed with organic
Policy Studies 331

matter. To account for metals bound to organic matter, the F5 fraction is presented as the total
metal content of the residual fraction minus the metal content of the organic fraction. The
organic fraction leach, denoted F4, was performed on a separate 1g aliquot of sediment
treated with an oxidizing leach of 10% hydrogen peroxide and 25% acetic acid at pH 2 for
24h. This leach extract metals associated with organic matter and oxidizable sulfides.

Copper (Cu) reach the highest concentration 157 ppm in Muara Dadap, followed by Muara
Kamal and Cengkareng Drain, which were 138 and 100 ppm, respectively. The lowest
concentration (5 ppm) is in Penjaliran Island (uncontaminated area). This suggests that the
sediments of those 3 areas already contaminated with Cu. Meanwhile, the percentage of
fraction of Cu is dominated by Residual Fraction (F5) which range from 50 – 70 %. It means
that Cu does not have high potency to be released to the environment, because it is still be
bound to lithogenic fraction. Usually, copper is used in oil refinery, electroplating, pesticide,
etc. According to Canadian Standard for Contaminated Soils and Sediments, 2001, ambient
value for Copper (Cu) is 30 ppm. Most of Cu values in this research exceed the standard.
Total metal content of Zn in sediments of Cengkareng Drain, Muara Dadap, and Muara
Kamal river-mouths fell within the range of 100 ppm in Penjaliran to 465 ppm in Muara
Kamal. These values suggest that sediments in parts of Jakarta Bay already contaminated with
Zinc (Zn). Based on the percentage of fraction of Zn in sediments, Zn is dominated by labile
fraction (F1-F3) and F4 (organic fraction), ranges from 68 – 80 %. Here, Zn has higher
opportunity to be released to the environment and will be available for organisms. Zn is
usually used in galvanizing, automotive, and pharmaceutical industries. Although Zn is an
essential micronutrients in low concentration, but in high concentration of it can be very
toxic. According to Canadian Standard for Contaminated Sediments, the ambient value for Zn
is 60 ppm.
The highest Pb content was found in Cengkareng Drain which is 58 ppm, followed by Muara
Dadap and Muara Kamal, which are 45 and 28 ppm, respectively. All the values exceed the
Canadian Standard for Contaminated Sediments which for Pb is 25 ppm. Based on
geochemical fractionation, the percentage of metals (Pb) in three locations are bound to
Exchangeable fraction (F1), Reducible fraction (F2), and Oxidisable fraction (F3) and F4,
ranges from 35–76 %.
Meanwhile, the highest Cr content was found in Muara Kamal, 72 ppm and the lowest is in
Muara Dadap, 24 ppm. All these values exceed the Canadian Standard for Contaminated
Sediments which for Cr is 22 ppm. While, for its geochemical fractionation, the percentage of
Cr is dominated by F1-F4, ranges from 39-66 %. Both Pb and Cr have higher possibility
compare to Cu to be released to the environment and will be available for biota (organisms).
Conclusion
Most of heavy metals found in the research areas (Cengkareng Drain, Muara Kamal, and
Muara Dadap) were exceed the Canadian Standard for Contaminated Sediments.
Keywords
Heavy metal, Jakarta bay Pollution, sediment, sequential extraction.
Acknowledgement
The writer wants to thank Universitas Indonesia for funding this research through RUUI-
Utama.
References
Buckley, D.E., Winter, G.V., 1992. Geochemical characteristic of contamined surficial sediments in Halifax
Harbour: impact of waste discharge. Canadian Journal of Earth Science 29, 2617—2639.
Chester, R., Hughes, M. J., 1967. A chemical technique for the separation of ferro-manganesse mineral, carbonate
mineral and adsorbed trace elements from pelagic sediments. Chemical Geology 2, 249—262.
332 Policy Studies

Groot, A.J. de, Zschuppe, K.H., Salomon, W., 1982. Standaridization of methods of analysis of heavy metal in
sediments. Hydrobiologia 92, 689—695.
Martin, J.M., Nirel, P., Thomas, A.J., 1987. Sequential extraction techniques:promises and problem . Marine
chemistry 22, 313—341.
Salomon, W., Forstner, U., 1984. Metals in the Hydrocycle. Springer-Verlag. Berlin Heidelberg, NY. Tokyo 349 p
Tack, F.M.G., Verlo, M.G., 1995. Chemical speciation and fractionation in soil and sediment heavy metal analysis:
a review. International Journal of Enviromental Analytical Chemistry 59, 225—238.
Tessier, A., Campbell, P.G.C., Bisson, M., 1979. Sequential extraction procedure for the speciation of particulate
trace metals. Analylical Cemistry 51 (7), 844—851.
Policy Studies 333

The changes of surface water characteristic as raw water oource for

water supply treatment plant in Jakarta
Staff : D.M. Hartono1*
Student : ---
Sponsor : Paper Presentation Funded by Faculty of Engineering and
Competitive Grant Program B (PHK B) Civil Engineering
Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia.
Email Contact : djokomh@eng.ui.ac.id; djokomhs@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : D.M. Hartono (2008):The changes of Surface Water Characteristic
as Raw Water Source for Water Supply Treatment Plant in Jakarta,
Proceeding of The Eleventh East Asia-Pacific Conference on
Structural Engineering and Construction (EASEC-11), November
19-21, 2008, Taipei, Taiwan
1
Environmental Engineering Study Program Civil Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas
Introduction
One of the objective in water supply management is providing the safety and healthy clean
water and sufficient at anytime needed to the community. Nowadays, demand on water
supply increases while the capacity of water treatment plant are remains constant as the
consequences surface water and ground water become important alternatives. The main
problem in water demand in urban environment is the poor of quality raw water, insufficient
water quantity and non contiguous of clean water distribution which puts many low income
communities at risk to water diseases. Treatment Plant in Indonesia have been constructed for
20 and 40 years ago, with the criteria design implemented is conventional treatment plan. The
design of the treatment plant is based on raw water characteristic condition in 20 or 40 years
ago so that need some modification in the design. Raw water source mainly comes from
surface water, which is being worst in quality as well as quantity. Jakarta is the capital city of
Indonesia, is facing water supply problem like other cities in Indonesia. Based on Municipal
Water Supply Jakarta (PAM Jaya), water demand in DKI is around 27806 litre/second and
total production of water is around 12235 litre/second or 48% of total demand of water
supply. Production of water mostly comes from surface water which is treated in water
treatment plant. Although very small amount distributed from spring water, the rest of the
community used ground water to support their need of water supply.
Due to the fact that Water Supply in DKI Jakarta could not supply all population, ground
water source will be an important alternative to accommodate the need of water supply in
Jakarta. The exploration on ground water source is used by continuous pumping which
various from small until large scale of capacity of pump which will cause many impact to the
environment. This exploration not only for domestic water supply needed but also for
industrial as well as other commercial purposes.
In fact, the water treatment plan effectiveness is decreasing and needs some adjustment in line
with current quality standard. The treatment is designed to treat raw water with has parameter
of water quality on the certain level, and most cases the parameter are exceeding the limit
standard, as the result the water produced to consumer is not meet with the consumer
expected as well as national or international standard. The regulations to protect water
resources has been established and socialization on water pollution control to the community
has done regularly.
The main output of this study is to propose alternative solution to improve water supply
services to the community in maintaining and rehabilitation the quality of water production
from water supply treatment plant of surface water as raw water source.
334 Policy Studies

Method
The research is using ex post facto research with secondary and primary data on raw water
characteristic from year 2003 until year 2006. 42 water parameter are measured with
frequency of 6 hour, 24 hour, 1 week, 1 month and 3 month analized by Standard Methods
from American Water Work Association.

Observation on water quality parameter source of Water Intake Buaran from year 2003 until
year 2006 shows that there are 8 parameter are exceeding water quality standard, turbidity,
BOD, Iron, COD, Ammonia, Manganese, Suspended Solid and Total Coli form. Among 8
parameters, turbidity is the highest number of concentration exceed the criteria standard
which had set up before construction and in the past, turbidity was used as the primary
parameter in design water treatment plant.
Figure 1. Turbidity in WTP Buaran (2003-2006)

The concentration on turbidity can be seen on Figure 1 below during 2003 – 2006, whereas
criteria design for water treatment plant is 100 mg/l. In the current situation, water quality is
changed, which need effort to redesign or to improve effectiveness of water treatment plant.
Technology alternative in improving water treatment plant should also pro environment and
not to burden the water supply consumer. Addition technology to treat raw water should also
to consider capacity of human resources availability. Human behaviour also affects the
characteristic of water resources. Education, regulation and proper environment are some
examples to change man behaviour to protect environment.. Sustainability of water supply in
of water resources. Community participation should be involved regularly in maintaining and
rehabilitation water facilities and law enforcement should also be implemented to eliminated
water pollution.
Conclusion
Technology alternative in improving water treatment plant should also pro environment and
not to burden the water supply consumer. Addition technology to treat raw water should also
to consider capacity of human resources availability. Human behaviour also affects the
characteristic of water resources. Education, regulation and proper environment are some
examples to change man behaviour to protect environment.. Sustainability of water supply in
of water resources. Community participation should be involved regularly in maintaining and
rehabilitation water facilities and law enforcement should also be implemented to eliminated
water pollution. Several option to solve this problem is concerning with maintenance and
rehabilitation not only the sediment along the river , but also alternative technology to reduce.
More overt the other important thing is coordination among institution or parties involving in
water supply. Based on engineering consideration, additional treatment plant to improve
Policy Studies 335

efficiency of the treatment plant or another alternative by improving transmission line from
Jatiluhur Dam to Buaran Water Intake separate with other purposes.
Keywords
Alternative technology, characteristic of raw water, quality standard,bturbidity, water
treatment plant.
References
American Water Works Association (AWWA)(1999), .Water Treatment Plan Design.
American Water Works Association (1999) Water Quality and Treatment, A Handbook of Community Water
Supplies, fifth edition, McGraw Hill.
Cunningham W.P , Saigo B.W.(2001) Environmental Science 6th Edition, McGraw Hill.
Effendi, Hefni, (2003) Telaah Kualitas Air : Bagi Pengelolaan Sumber Daya dan Lingkungan Perairan, Kanisius.
Gerhard Bjornsen, Rolf Gimbel, H.D. Spangeberg (1998), A Concept for an Integrative Consideration of the
Drinking Water and WasteWater/Sewage Management, Water Science Technology Vo.37, No.2, pp.333-34.
Hadi, Sudharto P (2004), Resolusi Konflik Lingkungan Badan Penerbit Universitas Diponegoro.
Hardjasoemantri K, (2002) Hukum Tata Lingkungan, Gadjah Mada University Press.
Hartono, D.M.,(2007) The Influence of Raw Water Characteristics Changes from Surface Water on Sustainability
of Water Supply (Case Study on Raw Water, Technology and Socioeconomics Aspects of Water Supply at
Buaran, Pulo Gadung and Pejompongan Water Treatment Plant), Dissertation.
International Reference Centre for Community Water Supply and Sanitation- WHO Collaborating Centre (1981)
Small Community Water Supplies, Technology of Small Water Supply Systems in Developing Countries, The
Hague, The Netherlands.
Kodoatie, R.J dan Syarief R (2005), Pengelolaan Sumberdaya Air Terpadu, Penerbit Andi Yogyakarta.
Miller G.Tiller (1996), Living In The Environment, ITP.
Persatuan Perusahaan Air Minum Seluruh Indonesia (Perpamsi) (2000:2006), Direktori.
Perum Jasa Tirta II,(2005) Water Utilization for Industry and Public Purposes in Citarum River Basin, Symposium
on Water Policy, Technology and Utilization for Industry and Public Purposes, Jakarta.
Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 82 Tahun 2001 Tentang Pengelolaan Kualitas Air dan
Pengendalian Pencemaran.
Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 16 Tahun 2005, tentang Pengembangan Sistem Penyediaan Air
Minum.
Qasim, Syed R.; Motley E.M; Zhu Guang(2000) Water Works Engineering, Planning, Design, and Operation,
Prentice Hall.
Soerjani.M, Ahmad. R, Munir. R, 1987. Lingkungan : Sumberdaya Alam dan Kependudukan dalam
Pembangunan, Penerbit Universitas Indonesia.
Undang-Undang Republik Indonesia Nomor 7 Tahun 2004, Tentang Sumber Daya Air, 2004.United Nations
(2005),. The Millenium Development Goals Report, 2005.
336 Policy Studies

The physical environmental quality of primary school grounds and

their potentials as learning resources for environmental education
Staff : P. Atmodiwirjo1*, Y. Andri Yatmo2 and E.T. Atmodiwirjo3
Student :-
Sponsor : RUUI 2008
Email Contact : mitayandi@gmail.com; yandiay@gmail.com
Disseminated at : P. Atmodiwirjo and Y. Andri Yatmo (2009). Eco-schools for eco-
city: School ground as a micro urban environment. Proceedings of
International Conference on Green Technology and Engineering,
Malahayati University, Bandar Lampung, 15-16 April 2009
1,2
Department of Architecture, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia.
3
Faculty of Psychology, Universitas Indonesia.
Introduction
There is a need for environmental education for every child as the future steward of the earth.
It becomes important to integrate environmental values into all aspects of learning (UNESCO,
2007). The successful delivery of messages in environmental education is much related to the
availability of physical environments to support the learning processes. The physical
environments experienced by children in their everyday life, including natural environment,
play an important role in the development of children’s knowledge and attitudes towards
environment (Malone & Tranter, 2003; Titman, 1994). Unfortunately, there seems to be a
tendency of decreasing quality of physical environments especially for urban children. School
environments in urban areas tend to offer limited environmental experiences for children. In
particular, there is a need to pay attention to the physical condition of open spaces or school
ground and their potentials to support environmental learning.
Every kind of environments may offer potentials to support human activities; nevertheless
only a small proportion of those potentials are effectively utilized (Gans, 1986; Kytta, 2004).
In the context of this study, the physical environment of school ground may offer various
potentials for environmental learning activities. However the utilization may not be optimum.
This research explores the quality of the physical environments of open spaces in primary
schools and their potential as learning resources for environmental education. The objectives
of the research are: a) to illustrate the availability of physical elements and the variety in the
physical quality of school grounds as learning resources for environmental education; b) to
identify the extent to which the potentials of school ground as learning resources are utilized
by teachers and children and c) to identify the accessibility of physical environment of school
ground for children.
Methods
The research was conducted in fifteen primary school grounds in Jakarta. The school grounds
chosen as the location of study represented a variety in school ground areas. The data for this
study was collected through observation and the distribution of questionnaires among teachers
and pupils. The observation of the physical quality of school ground was conducted to
identify the extent to which school ground offer potentials as leaning resources for
environmental education. The observation included the mapping of school ground areas and
the identification of physical elements that are available in school ground: variety of ground
surface materials, plant and animal habitat, elements related to trash, elements related to water
and other elements. The questionnaires were completed by a total number of 83 teachers and
493 pupils. The objective of the questionnaire distribution was to identify the teachers’ and
pupils’ general perception of the physical quality of school ground, the utilization of school
Policy Studies 337

ground and their elements for learning activities and the pupils’ accessibility to the physical
elements of school ground.
Findings
The study found that there was a variety of school ground in terms of the area and the
availability of physical elements in the school ground observed in this study. School ground
generally possess some basic physical elements that are necessary as learning resources of
environmental education, such as plant habitat, a variety of ground surfaces – both the water
absorbing and non-water absorbing surfaces, and trash bins or trash cans. In addition the high
percentage of water absorbing surface in many school grounds compared to non water
absorbing surface provides a good example of ecological environment. However, school
grounds are still lack of certain physical elements, such as water plants, animal habitat, sand
and gravels, water pool, trash sorting facilities, composting box and water absorbing facilities.
These elements are necessary in order to provide children with opportunities to learning more
from the environment. The study also suggests that the large space area of school ground does
not necessarily relate to the sufficient physical elements, school grounds with limited ground
area could also be equipped with variety of elements for environmental learning resources.
This study explored the extent to which school ground has been utilized as learning resources.
The majority of the teachers in this study had conducted learning activities that utilize school
ground. Some of the learning activities really utilized the physical elements that exist in the
school ground, however, the other activities only use the school ground as location of
activities, without any relationship with the physical elements of school ground. The learning
activities include observation of natural elements, other observation activities such as
measuring distance and drawing objects, science experiments, growing and caring for plants
and other activities, such as sport, traditional games. Most pupils had been involved in
observing types of plants or animals and their characteristics as well as growing and caring
for plants. Meanwhile, not too many pupils had been involved in the activities of caring for
animals, observing the characteristics and condition of soil, sand and gravels, observing types
of trash, observing the trash cycle, sorting and recycling trash and observing the absorption of
water on the ground surface.
The study also found the limitation of access for pupils towards certain physical elements of
school ground, as indicated by various activities that were not allowed and various elements
that pupils were not allow to interact with. According to pupils, they were not allowed step on
grass, climb the tree, sit on the soil or grass, be around trash collection area, be around water
and play with water. According to teachers, pupils were not allowed to step on grass, climb
the tree, sit on the soil or grass, be around trash collection area, be around water and play with
water. In addition to those restricted activities, pupils in this study also mentioned that they
were not allowed to get close to the part of school ground with plants, touch the soil, sand and
gravels. Both pupils and children mentioned certain elements that pupils could not touch. The
reasons behind such restriction include aesthetical, health and safety reasons. The pupils tend
to mention health reasons, while teachers tend to mention aesthetical reasons.

The findings of this study suggest a variety in the physical environmental quality in the school
grounds observed in this study. The variety exist in terms of the areas of school ground that
are available for the school as well as the availability of physical elements in the school
ground, including the ground surface, plant and animal habitat, elements related to trash,
elements related to water, and other elements.
The findings also indicate the utilization of school ground and its physical elements as
learning resources, although still limited to the observation of natural elements and scientific
experiments. There are still other possible utilizations of the physical elements of school
ground that have not been fully utilized for environmental learning activities. However, other
findings of this study suggests limited access for pupils to interact with the physical elements
of school ground, as indicated by various activities that they are not allowed to do and various
338 Policy Studies

elements that they are not allowed to touch or get close with. It becomes necessary to pay
attention to such limited accessibility, since it may decrease the pupils’ opportunities for
interaction with various elements that are important for environmental learning.
Based on the findings of this study, there are some recommendations and implications for
practice, both for architectural design practice and educational practice:
‐ There is a need for guidelines for the design of school ground environment that offers a lot
of potentials as learning resources for environmental education and offers opportunities for
pupils to interact with various environmental elements. In particular the design of school
ground environment should incorporate plant and animal habitat as well as various elements
related to trash and water.
‐ The planning and design of school ground environment should guarantee the health and
safety of the pupils, in order to minimize the needs to limit pupils’ accessibility to interact
with the physical elements of school ground and use them as learning resources.
‐ There is a need for an understanding that the importance of school ground is not merely for
visual aesthetics but as environmental learning resources, therefore access for pupils to the
physical elements of school ground should be maximized.
‐ There is a need for guidelines for teachers to optimize the utilization of school ground for
learning activities, in order to support the objective of environmental education for the
pupils as the future steward of the earth.
Keywords
Children, environmental education, nature,school ground.
References
Gans, H. J. (1968). The potential environment and the effective environment. In H. J. Gans (Ed.), People and
plans. New York: Basic Books.
Kytta, M. (2004). The extent of children's independent mobility and the number of actualized affordances as
criteria for child-friendly environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24(2), 179-198.
Malone, K. & Tranter, P. (2003). Children's environmental learning and the use, design and management of
schoolgrounds. Children, Youth and Environments, 13(2). Retrieved 10 Desember 2007 from
http://colorado.edu/journals/cye.
Titman, W. (1994). Special places, special people: The hidden curriculum of schoolgrounds. Surrey: World Wide
Fund for Nature/Learning through Landscapes.
UNESCO (2007). Highlights on DESD Progress to Date. Retrieved 10 Desember 2007 from
http://www.unesco.org.
Policy Studies 339


SOCIAL SCIENCE AND HUMANITY EXTENDED
ABSTRACTS

A study of union effectiveness in developing countries: Indonesia and

Malaysia
Staff : A. Satrya1*, B. Parasuraman2
Email Contact : aryanasatrya@yahoo.com.au
Sponsor : University of Queensland, University Malaysia Sabah
Disseminated at : A study of union effectiveness in developing countries: Indonesia
and Malaysia. Conference Proceedings, 82-83, 228 pp. [Sixth
Regional Congress of the International Industrial Relations
Association for the Americas, Argentina, 2-4 September 2008]
1
Department of Management, Faculty of Economics and Business, Universitas Indonesia, Depok 16424, Indonesia
2
Industrial Relations Program, School of Social Sciences, Universiti Malaysia Sabah, P.O Box 22144, 88781
Luyang, Kota Kinabalu, Sabah, Malaysia
Introduction
The effectiveness of union activities becomes more critical to achieve members’ needs in
current uncertain situation. However, the literature on unions in developing countries does not
provide any consensus on the effectiveness of unions. The purpose of this study is to explore
union effectiveness in developing countries, particularly in Asian region.
The research will be one of pioneer work on the study of union effectiveness in Indonesia and
Malaysia. In relation to this, this study will assess the actual condition of union effectiveness
in postal industry in Malaysia and Indonesia. The study will focus on the union in the postal
industry to illustrate the industry’s importance to the two countries on the ground on their
high level of union density (Satrya and Parasuraman, 2007).
Literature review
The success of an organisation is measured by organisational effectiveness. Daft (2004)
relates effectiveness as the capability of an organisation to achieve its goals. Moreover,
Cherrington & Dyer (2003) explain that the organisation is effective if ‘it has acquired
resources from the environment, transformed them into usable products, and adapted to
changing environmental demands’. However, a major point of debate concerns the way to
measure it. Daft (2004) argues that literature of organisational effectiveness distinguishes
between goal-oriented, resource-based, and systems approaches.
Resource-based or adaptation approach shows the ability of organisations to acquire and
manage vital resources, or to adapt to environmental changes. Non-profit organisations that
frequently have unclear output objectives may adopt this approach, including suggests the use
resources quality and quantity, as well as level of adaptation (Harrison, 2005). Smooth
internal process involving workers and teamwork would lead to higher productivity, such as
comparison of outputs to inputs through total number of patients treated (Robbins &
Barnwell, 1994). However, subjective measures are more often applied by non-profit
institutions, such as subordinates partaking in decision makings (Daft, 2004; Harrison, 2005).
Goals models assume organisations have clear and measurable objectives, including
profitability, market share and product quality (Shetty, 1979 cited in Daft, 2004). However,
non-profit organisations are complex entities and may have multiple goals, which can be
abstract, inconsistent, or conflicting (Harrison, 2005). Therefore, employing multiple
indicators or using subjective perceptions is possible alternative solutions (Daft, 2004).
From previous studies, Quinn and Rohrbaugh (1983) argue that there are common elements
underlying any comprehensive list of organisation effectiveness criteria, which can be
combined to create basic sets of competing values. Their approach is divided into two general
levels: (a) the rational model that focuses on control, formalisation, and consolidation, and (b)
the natural system model that focuses on adaptation or flexibility. At the next level, the

rational model is divided into the rational goal model that focuses on control and external
aspects, and the internal process that focuses on control and internal aspects. The natural
system model consist of the human relation model that focus in flexibility and internal
aspects, and the open system model that focus in flexibility and external aspects. Their study
finds that less than 25% of the studies have used all four models concurrently.
Apparently, the researchers in industrial relations prefer to use the goals model indicators.
Bronfenbrenner (1997) employed membership growth and union density change, Boreham
and Hall (1994) used unemployment level, whereas Fiorito et al. (1995) used merely three out
of sixteen indicators of effectiveness that can be classified as system oriented variables.
However, research in Indonesia (SMERU, 2002; Sutanto, 1998) showed the importance of
process, wherein unions were considered effective if they could deal in collective bargaining,
disputes process, or communicated and empowered members.
Several studies propose the multivariate measurement of union effectiveness (Boxall and
Haynes, 1997; Fiorito et. al, 1995). Pyman (2002) proposes a multi-dimension of union
effectiveness, including growth, internal democracy, and activism. Burchielli (2004) classifies
union effectiveness into administrative, representative, and ideology. However, both studies
are confusing. Some criteria of Pyman’s model are used in some dimension, i.e. culture, and
resources. The work of Burchielli, such as social values and political environment, are not
operational indicators. Besides, some indicators of both models, such as union strategy
(activism, campaign, and alliance) were used as the determinants of union effectiveness (e.g.
Bronfenbrenner, 1997). The other study by Satrya (2006) examined the relationship between
union strategy and effectiveness by adapting the models of Quinn and Rohrbaugh (1983).
Research method and variables

This study based on a qualitative case study approach using a multi-method technique
(Hartley, 2004; Yin, 2003). The management, union officials and workers were interviewed
and observed, various meetings were attended, and documents were obtained. The
comparative study serves as a mean to assess the validity of the phenomena observed
(Hopkin, 2002).
The study adopted the framework of Quinn and Rohrbaugh (1983) that offers
multidimensional measures of union effectiveness. A special questionnaire based on the
literature review was developed. The measures utilised both objective and subjective
indicators. Responses of each item in the questionnaire was a dichotomous variables (‘yes’ or
‘no’), which indicated the presence of indicator stated in the item.
The rational model was measured by: (1) instrumental or economic achievement: efficiency
(establish collective bargaining, preventing lay-off, winning dispute cases), distribution of
income (increase of wage or benefits, employee share ownership policy); (2) audit process,
the presence of formal control of union performance; (3) self-rating, the only subjective
indicator based on perception of union leaders on unions’ performances in achieving its
recruiting, servicing, and overall objectives; and (4) communication channel, the presence of
mechanisms for disseminating information to the members or public.
The natural system model was measured by: (1) membership growth; (2) resource acquisition,
the support provided by employer and external parties; and (3) member-improvement,
measured by the presence of member satisfaction survey, and members that have attended
training on union issues.
Discussion
The results of the questionnaires demonstrated the applicability of the framework of Quinn
and Rohrbaugh (1983) that adopts multidimensional measures. The measure covers all
indicators of effectiveness measures, including the approaches of resource-based (e.g.
resource acquisition, external support), internal process (e.g. member-improvement,
communication, audit), and goals oriented (e.g. instrumental achievement, organising
effectiveness, membership growth), as well as adopting objective and subjective type of
indicators (namely organising effectiveness). Therefore, this is an improvement from previous

measures that was dominated by only one type of indicators, such as the goals model criteria
(e.g. Bronfenbrenner, 1997; Fiorito et al., 1995). This research also makes an advancement of
operationalising unambiguous indicators of Pyman (2002) and Burchielli (2004).
The Indonesian and Malaysian cases can be compared by counting the number of ‘yes’ and
‘no’ answers for each case, enabling the summation of all the items into a composite scale.
The union in Indonesian case booked eleven ‘yes’ answers for collective bargaining, dispute
cases won, recruiting, servicing, overall effectiveness, communication mechanism, member
and density growth, support from employer, support from other parties, and member training.
The Malaysian case booked ten ‘yes’ answers for collective bargaining, prevent retrenchment,
recruiting, servicing, communication mechanism, member and density growth, support from
employer, support from other parties, and member training. Therefore, the Indonesian case
showed a slightly more effective performance, particularly in the area of organising
effectiveness, creating a higher level of member activism.
Conclusion
There have been limited studies regarding union effectiveness, particularly in developing
countries. This paper has contributed to providing some information that could assist in
measuring union effectiveness within the context in Indonesia and Malaysia. Regarding future
research, this paper can be improved by conducting a longitudinal study and be extended into
other industries or conducted in other countries for international cross-country comparison.
Keywords
Indonesia, Malaysia, Union effectiveness.
References
Boreham, P. and Hall, R. (1994) Trade-Union strategy in contemporary capitalism - the microeconomic and
macroeconomic implications of political unionism. Economic and Industrial Democracy 15(3), 313-353.
Boxall, P. and Haynes, P. (1997) Strategy and trade union effectiveness in a neo-liberal environment. British
Journal of Industrial Relations 35(4), 567-591.
Bronfenbrenner, K. (1997) The role of union strategies in NLRB certification elections. Industrial & Labor
Relations Review 50(2), 195-212.
Burchielli, R. (2004) It's not just number': union employees' perceptions of union effectiveness. Journal of
Industrial Relations 46, 337-344.
Cherrington, D. J., & Dyer, W. G. (2003) Organizational effectiveness (3rd ed.) Provo, UT, USA: Creative Works
Office, Brigham Young University.
Courtney, R. (2002) Strategic management for voluntary nonprofit organizations. Routledge, New York.
Daft, R. L. (2004) Organization theory and design (8th ed.) Mason, Ohio: South-Western, Thomson Learning.
Fiorito, J. and Jarley, P. (1995) National union effectiveness in organizing: measures and influences. Industrial &
Labor Relations Review 48(4), 613-634.
Harrison, M. I. (2005) Diagnosing organizations: methods, models, and processes (3rd ed.) Thousand Oaks,
Calif.: Sage Publications.
Hartley, J. (2004) Case study research. In C. Casell, C., & G. Symon (Eds.) Essential guide to qualitative methods
in organizational research. London: Sage Publications.
Hopkin, J. (2002) Comparative methods. In Theory and methods in political science D. (Eds. D. Marsh and G.
Stoker) 2nd edn. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Pyman, A. (2002) Union effectiveness: theorising a set of dimensions. Sixteenth Conference of the Association of
Industrial Relations Academics of Australia and New Zealand (AIRAANZ) Conference, Queenstown.
Quinn, R. E. and Rohrbaugh, J. (1983) A spatial model of effectiveness criteria: towards a competing values approach
to organizational analysis. Management Science, 29, 363-377.
Robbins, S.P. and N. Barnwell. (1994) Organization theory in Australia. (2nd ed.) Sydney: Prentice Hall.
Satrya, A. (2006) Union strategy and union effectiveness in Indonesia. Twentieth Association of Industrial
Relations Academics of Australia and New Zealand (AIRAANZ) Conference, Adelaide, 4-6 February.
Satrya, A. and B. Parasuraman. (2007) ‘Union strategy in the Indonesian and Malaysian postal industries.’
Employment Relations Record 7(2), 31-45.
SMERU. (2002) Industrial relations in Jabotabek, Bandung, and Surabaya during the freedom to organize era.
Jakarta: SMERU Research Team.
Sutanto. (1998) The impact of industrial relations on worker's welfare in Indonesia. Unpublished PhD, University
of Glamorgan, Glamorgan.
Yin, R. K. (2003) Case study research: Design and Methods. 3rd ed. London: Sage Publication.

Immortalised aesthetics: Photography in the promotion of colonial

tourism in the Dutch East Indies
Staff : R. Achmad Sunjayadi1*
Email Contact : achmad.sunjayadi@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Achmad Sunjayadi. (2008) Mengabadikan estetika. Wacana Jurnal
Ilmu Pengetahuan Budaya 10 (2), 191-316
1
Dutch Studies, Department of History, Faculty of Humanities, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
If we heard about the record of history, we always refer to the writing. The photographs are
just for the illustration, not as primary sources. Perhaps, it could be right because the
photographs that are taken, for special purpose.
Meanwhile photographs and tourism have a relation. As a promotion medium, photographs
(in postcard, illustration of guide book) can attract many tourists.
Before men use the technology of photography in Netherlands-Indies, the using of travelling
journal in the early government newspapers such as Bataviasche Koloniale Courant (1810),
De Java Gouvernment Gazette (Termorshuizen 1993:10; Termorshuizen 2001), and also
Bataviasche Courant (1816), De Javasche Courant (Surjomihardjo et al. 2002:26) attract the
public.
In the time of King William I, the information about the colony is very important. He sent
then not only the experts such as botanicus, geologist, historian to the colony but also the
drawer, painter such as C.W.M. van de Velde, A.A.J. Payen to draw and paint the situation in
the colony (Van Goor 2000:213).
When the first technology of photography came to the Netherlands-Indies in the nineteenth
century, it was only used for government purposes and was not yet meant for public
consumption (Faber et al. 1988:16) On the other hand, the rise of colonial tourism in the
Netherlands-Indies in the early twentieth century required a medium for promotion.
Photographs were the right choice because, as the saying goes, pictures could tell more than
words. Photographs for colonial tourism promotion were produced in various forms such as
postcards, illustration in magazines, and guide books, and were published by the colonial
government as well as by private publisher (Sunjayadi 2006).
This article discusses the role of photography in colonial tourism in the Netherlands-Indies
and its influence in the process to ‘find Indonesia’. This article is also tries to answer the other
question: what kind picture of photographs that were presented and used for the colonial
tourism promotion.
The sources used are taken from published postcard collection, magazines, guide books, and
also published government archives from colonial times (1821-1937)
The result
There were many photographers in the Netherlands-Indies during 1857 until 1900’s. They are
the Englishmen, Walter Bentley Woodbury and James Page (Knaap 1995; Wachlin 1994)
then in the next years build Isidore van Kinsbergen the photographs studio in Batavia.
In 1870 the Germany and Dutch photographers, Petz & Co, C. Krüger, A Wulisch came to
Batavia. Meanwhile the other photography studio also found in Surabaya such as J.B. Jasper,
C.C.F. Perret and H.Salzwedel (Faber et al.1988:54) We can also find the photography studio
in Buitenzorg, Cirebon, Surakarta, Bandung, Magelang, Malang and also in Kotaraja, Binjai,
Medan, Brastagi, Makassar (Faber et al. 1988:179-192)
The photographers took the order from their customer and also made the cartes-de-visites, the
series of postcards with the pose of the natives, customs (Bonnet and Grant 1994:57)

The other famous photographer was K. Cephas who the owner of photography studio in
Yogyakarta (Knaap, 1999). He was the official photographer for the palace in Vorstenlanden
(Yogyakarta, Surakarta). It was interesting because we can find also the naked women
photographs that used for attract the young men. Hopefully, they were become the soldiers in
the colony (Spoor 1980:59-60; Brousson 2004). The half naked women photographs were
also attract the Parisian in Exposition Universelle 1889. The colonial government had made
Le village Javanais, the Javanese village in that exhibition. They presented the Javanese
dancer with the breast cloth (kemben) as their costume (Bloembergen 2004:94)
In the early of twentieth century the object of photographs was change. The panorama of
Netherlands-Indies, such as the river, rice field, mountain, and village were the favourite
photographs. The individual photographer became the big company and produced the mass
product. The photography company such the Armenian, Onnes Kurkdjian in Surabaya, Charls
& Van Es & Co in Batavia, Hisgen & Co in Semarang, Thilly Weissenborn’s Foto ‘Lux’ in
Garut.
When the Officieel Vereeniging Toeristenverkeer Bureau (VTV), the bureau of tourism board
established in Batavia in 13 April 1908 by the colonial government, they started to organize
where, how, what the tourist could enjoy the Netherlands-Indies, the tropical Holland. They
needed the medium of promotion. The postcards, guide books, flyers, posters, magazines
were the various forms that they could use for their tourism promotion.
Bonnef and Grant (1994:56) mentioned that there were many publisher published the
postcards, such as G. Kolff in Batavia (74 pictures), Visse & Co in Batavia and Bandung (55
pictures), Van Ingen in Surabaya (34 pictures), G.C.T. van Dorp in Semarang (24 pictures),
Alberti in Sabang (58 pictures), Liem Sioe Yaam in Fort de Kock-Bukit Tinggi (32 pictures)
and Tio Tek Hong in Batavia (72 pictures).
The pictures were reproduced from the early photographers, such as Woodburry & Page in
Batavia, Cephas in Yogyakarta. The pictures were the daily life of natives in Netherlands-
Indies. Beside that object, the other object of photographs such as factory, building, harbour
were also made (Haks and Wachlin 2004:22)
In the 1930’s the colonial government through VTV selected 12.000 pieces of photographs
which were used for the postcards, the tourism guide books and they would send them to 30
countries all around the world (Tourism in Netherlands-Indië 1934)
Bonnef and Grant (1994: 57-58) also mentioned that there were 1000 postcards in the 1900-
1930’s about the Netherlands-Indies. They categorize the postcards into the region in
Netherlands-Indies: Java (659 pieces), Sumatra (239 pieces), Bali, Sulawesi, Maluku,
Kalimantan, Flores and Lombok (100 pieces).
At the end of 1920’s Bali became the alternative destination after Java. Vickers (1989: 11)
writes that the colonial government create Bali from the wild island to become the lost
paradise. The object of photographs in Bali, especially the bare breast Balinese women were
more attracted for the tourist.
On the exhibition Het daghet in den Oosten in June 1941 in Amsterdam presented a bare
breast Balinese woman. The photographer was J.C. Mol, director of N.V. Multifilm Haarlem
and took the order from Rotterdamsche Lloyd to take photographs in Java and Bali.
The photographs as the ‘official’ product of colonial government were also used in school
textbook in the colonial time (Nugraha 1995; Hasse 2004)
The illustration of the school textbook we can also find on the photographs on Handbook of
the Netherlands East-Indies (1930). The books were not only used by the Dutch children but
also by the Indonesian children. The Indonesian children were ‘taught’ to know their country
where they live and to imagine that they were a part of the whole community and country as
Bennedict Anderson said about ‘Imagined community’
Conclusion
The using of photographs from the colonial time are to record for posterity of aesthetics in the
history of photography in Indonesia. The photographs used in the first time only for

government purpose, then private purpose (European/Dutch, natives noble). It used for the
souvenir from Netherlands-Indies. The pictures developed during the colonial time. Then the
Colonial government used the photographs as one of tourism promotion media for
Netherlands-Indies. The form changed to postcards, illustration in magazines and guidebooks.
Then the photographs used are taken to the illustration of the school textbook in the colonial
time. The various of pictures present the representation about the beauty and the diversity of
our country and through the photograph they teach us how to become ‘Indonesia’.
Keywords
Colonial tourism, Hindia-Belanda, photography, promotion.
References
Bloembergen, Marieke. (2004) Koloniale inspiratie. © KITLV, Leiden, Netherlands, 256 pp. (ISBN 90-6718-236-
2).
Bonnef, Marcel and Stephen Grant. (1994) Bonser baiser de Batavia: Cartes postales des Indes Néerlandaises.
Archipel 47, 53-85.
Brousson, H.C.C Clockener. (2004) Batavia awal abad 20: gedenkschriften van een oud-koloniaal. © Komunitas
Bambu, Jakarta, Indonesia, 150 pp. (ISBN 979-96201-5-5).
Faber, Paul et al. (Ed.) (1988) Toekang potret: 100 jaar fotografie in Nederlands-Indië 1839-1939. © Fragment,
Amsterdam, Netherlands, 192 pp. (ISBN 9789065790637).
Haks, Leo and Stevan Wachlin. (2004) Indonesia: 500 early postcards. © Archipelago Press, Singapore, 288 pp
(ISBN 981-4155-25-x).
Haasse, Hella S. (2004) Bij de les: schoolplaten van Nederlands-Indië. © Contact, Amsterdam, Netherland, 96 pp
(ISBN 9789025423742).
Knaap, G.J. (1995) Woordbury & Page: Fotografen in Indonesia 1857-1908. booklet photographs exhibition
Erasmus Huis Jakarta 18 Januari-24 Februari.
Knaap, G.J. (1999) Cephas, Yogyakarta: photography in the service of the Sultan. © KITLV, Leiden, Netherland,
136 pp. (ISBN 9067181420).
Nugraha, Iskandar P. (1995) Theosophical education movement in colonial Indonesia (1900-1947), M.A. thesis,
University of New South Wales, Australia.
Spoor, Ronald. (1980) Alexander Cohen, uiterst links, journalistiek werk 1887-1896. © Engelbewaarder,
Amsterdam, Netherland, 200 pp (ISBN 9053336427).
Sunjayadi, Achmad (2006) Perhimpunan Turisme Batavia (1908-1942): Awal Turisme Modern di Jawa, M.A.
thesis, Universitas Indonesia, Depok.
Surjomihardjo, Abdurrahman., Hilman Adil, and Adrian Bernard Lapian (2002) Beberapa segi perkembangan
sejarah pers di Indonesia. © Kompas, Jakarta, Indonesia, pp. (ISBN 979-709-013-2).
Termorshuizen, Gerard. (1993) In de binnenlanden van Java: vier negentiendeeeuwse reisverhalen. © KITLV,
Leiden, Netherlands, 104 pp. (ISBN 90-6718-057-2).
Termorshuizen, Gerard. (2001) Journalisten en heefthoofden: een geschiedenis van de Indisch-Nederlandse
dagbladpers 1744-1905. © KITLV, Leiden, Netherlands, 862 pp. (ISBN 903887426X).
Tourism (1934) Tourism in Netherlands-India, vol IX/1 January-February.
Van Goor, J. (2000) Indische avonturen: opmerkelijke ontmoetingen met een andere wereld. © SDU, Den Haag,
Netherlands, 294 pp. (ISBN 90 12088542).
Vickers, Adrian. (1989) Bali, a paradise created. ©Penguin, Singapore. 240 pp. (ISBN 0-945971-28-1).
Vlekke, Bernardus Hubertus Maria (1959) Nusantara: a history of Indonesia. © Van Hoeve, den Haag,
Netherlands, 479 pp. (ISBN).
Wachlin, Steven. (1994) Woordbury & Page: photographers Java. ©KITLV, Leiden, Netherlands, 219 pp. (ISBN
90-6718-070X).
Official archives
Indische Staatsblad 1821 Nr.6
Indische Staatsblad 1872 Nr.38
Indische Staatsblad 1881 Nr. 226, 1890
Indische Verslag 1931. Landsdrukkerij, s’ Gravenhage
Indische Verslag 1937. Landsdrukkerij, s’ Gravenhage
Jaarverslag van Vereeniging Toeristenverkeer 1928-1929. Javasche Boekhandel en Drukkerij, Batavia
Koninklijk Besluit 1871 Nr.1

Kain gendong Jawa

Staff : Nanny Sri Lestari1*
Sponsor : RUUI-2008
Email Contact : pbintangpagi@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : International Conference and Summer School on Indonesian
Studies Faculty of Humanities Universitas of Indonesia UI Campus,
Depok Indonesia (July, the 27-29, 2009)
1
Departemen Susastra Fakultas Ilmu Pengetahuan Budaya Universitas Indonesia
Introduction
Kain Gendong Jawa, (Javanese Gendong Cloth) is one of the Indonesian cultural heritage
As a part of Indonesian cultural heritage Kain Gendong Jawa is also a part of traditional
drawings, meaning that Kai Gendong Jawa is a relection composed of local wisdom of the
community ideas, action and arts. By the long tradition from generation to generation this
kain gendong became special part Javanese cultural., and also the community traditions of
making batik leads the idea to produce kain gendong Jawa with batik motif on it.
In the beginning, Kain gendong was made for a limited purposed, as to carry children on the
back or hip, but this then has develop for more other purposes, one of which is for a
professional requirement. Also from so many requirement, came an idea to make Kain
gendong with many kind of motive according to the needs of the people.
There is no specific research on kain gendong in this time. It happened because according to
people opinion, kain gendong is a part of batik or lurik. This opinion is correct but not
precise, because of kain gendong have a different function. Second, kain gendong has a
special physical size for length and.width. Third, kain gendong has a long history of different
using.
Objective
The objective of the research is to express the local wisdom of traditional people which was
left behind. People did not understand because they did not realize that kain gendong
had its own function and meaning and also less of information and attention. In this time
people only know that the use of kain gendong without realize what the meaning behind this
kain gendong?
Methodology
The research methodology is a field research, due to the fact that the preliminary research has
found out that the data about kain gendong Jawa are limited. In addition, the specific research
on is no available yet. If there is a note on kain gendong, its only a part of Javanese batik
discussion. For example, Nian S. Djoemena (1990), Peppin Van Roojen (1995), H. Santoso
Doellah (2002). That’s why in this research try to collect every data that connect to kain
gendong. Start from the function of kain gendong, materials of kain gendong and history of
kain gendong and the location was limited in middle Java, Tuban and a part of Madura or east
Java.
Result
From the research we found a couple of interesting problem. The use of kain is to carry
children or thing on the back or hip. This action were always doing by women, like this
picture below,

Kain gendong also has special physical size, with the length 2,5 meter and width 1 meter. The
main characteristic of kain gendong with lurik materials is the motif of salur in the side edges,
like this picture below,
At first the material of kain gendong was commonly kain tenun, and its known as lurik. But in
the next time kain gendong was not only with lurik material but also with batik materials. In
the kain gendong with batik materials craftsman proofed their creativity by putting the salur
in the side edges with many colours. In this way kain gendong more interesting and look
different from previously. In the part of motive, now kain had their own motive, not only
limited on something, but its freely motive with more attractive color compotition, like this
picture below.
This research is preliminary research, because we still collect many data about kain gendong,
but we find so many interesting finding. This finding are the traditional people who were
made kain gendong needs an assistance about patent and modern marketing.
Conclusion
Conclusion, people always think that kain gendong is a part of batik. This idea is correct but
not precise, because kain gendong has different raw materials, motif/designves and different
function. Up to the present time, the art of creativity of Kain Gendong Jawa has still existed

and been dynamic. For these reasons, the protection from related government apparatus to
keep this local wisdom is unquestionably needed.
References
Nian S. Djoemena (1990), Ungkapan Sehelai Batik. Its Mystery and Meaning, PT Djambatan, Jakarta.
Peppin Van Roojen (1995), Batik Design, The Peppin Press, Amsterdam, the Netherlands and Kuala Lumpur
Malaysia.
H. Santosa Doellah (2002), Batik, Pengaruh Zaman dan Lingkungan, Batik Danar Hadi, Solo.

Liberalization in higher education: Opportunities and challenges to

the development of Islamic-based higher education in Indonesia
Staff : A.H.S. Ghafur1*
Email Contact : haniefsaha@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : International Conference on Islamic Area Studies, New Horizons in
Islamic Area Studies: Islamic Scholarship across Cultures and
Continents. Kuala Lumpur, 24 November 2008
1
Middle East and Islamic Studies, Post-graduate Program, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
Liberalization in higher education as promoted by GATS/WTO encourages higher education
institutions in the world into tight competition to be nominated as world class universities. In
such a competition, ‘quality’ and ‘standardization’ become prerequisite. As with other
national governments, the Government of Indonesia is developing its national policy on
quality assurance of higher education. Accreditation is carried out for this purpose. National
universities and institutes are competing to reach better rank in national accreditation. This
trend affects the development of Islamic-based higher educational institutions in Indonesia.
Since the last few decades, there have been a growing number of state and private Islamic
higher educations in Indonesia. Nevertheless, few have acquired international reputation and
recognized as world class research universities. Similarly, there are limited numbers of
Islamic-based universities and institutes that have obtained the highest status according to
national accreditation. How can Indonesian Islamic-based universities or institutes improve
their quality; What are national policies required to develop Islamic-based higher education
institutes in Indonesia; To what extent can international cooperation between Indonesia and
other Moslem countries be used to enhance the quality of Indonesian Islamic higher
education, in particular, and universities in Moslem countries in general? This paper discusses
all these issues by elaborating the general impact of liberalization to higher education in
Indonesia, the current condition of Islamic universities and institutes with regard to quality
assessment, the obstacles of liberalization to improve the quality of Islamic-based education
institutions, and possibilities to enhance international cooperation among Moslem countries in
the field of higher education development.
Content of the extended abstract

The current trend of liberalization in higher education cannot be separated from the
development of global liberalization as promoted by World Trade Organization (WTO)
through a multilateral agreement namely GATS (General Agreement on Trade in Services).
The agreement has successfully encouraged free trade and open market in services, including
education services. National governments are urged to eliminate all barriers of cross-countries
trades in services, capital and investment. Higher education institutes are induced to run
effective organizations, to use resources efficiently and to be high competitive in global
market. Unavoidably, liberalization that to some extents overlaps with internationalization of
higher education raises the issues of commoditization and commercialization of education.
Debates become more intensive and deal with the basic notion of education when
WTO/GATS includes education as free and open ‘tradable services’ among countries.
Controversies then come up with regard to education: whether it can be perceived as private
goods that can be traded freely and commercially like economic commodities, or else, as
public goods that serve for public interests and as media for transforming cultural and
national identities..
How does the Government of Indonesia (GOI) respond to liberalization in higher education,
in particular to GATS/WTO scheme of liberalization of trade in education?

Internationalization and international cooperation in higher education have been adopted in

national policy. Nevertheless, there are two different perspectives of Indonesian government
with regard to these issues. On one side, Law 20/2003 on National Education System (Art.64
and 65) and Government Regulation 60/1999 on Higher Education (Art.125 and 129) promote
internationalisation of higher education that works on open market principle. Then, the Long
Term National Education Development Strategy 2003-2010, even though agrees with open
market principle, still places education development as non-commercial public services. On
the other side, The Strategic Plan of Indonesian Ministry of National Education 2005-2009
clearly welcomes to liberalization and highly supports the GATS/WTO scheme of
liberalization in education. The pro-liberalization education policy as manifested through the
Plan is a consequence of the GOI’s decision to ratify WTO/GATS through Law 7/1994 that
includes education services as tradable services. Then, Law 25/2007 on Investment opens the
road of foreign investment in education. Other implementing regulations such as Presidential
Regulations 77/2007 revised by Regulation 111/2007 concerning the list of open and close
business for foreign investment has made foreign investment in education is easier than
before. The Regulations require that foreign investment in education can reach by 49% of
total investment. The Regulations are expected to improve national higher education quality
as well as capitalization of education through open market competition. It is clear that WTO
has strong influence to those national policies. Supporting liberalization in higher education
without many restrictions has contradicted with Indonesian Basic Constitution 1945 and Law
2003 on National Education System that perceive education as a tool of character building
and as public services.
Islamic-based higher education institutes have been facing difficulties to cope with
liberalization in education. There are several factors, internally and externally, that generally
contribute to this situation. The internal factors cover some problems: (1) self-finance
incapability; (2) unprofessional university management and governance; (3) weak capacity to
develop ICT as one requirement of modern higher education facilities; and (4) uncompetitive
captive market.
The incapability of Islamic universities to develop their self-financing was rooted to the
historical background as universities funded by non-profit Islamic foundations that as well
know had less financial support, at least if compared with universities funded by big
corporations. Thus, the only incomes of the Islamic universities are their students. In fact,
nowadays they have to compete with other universities to get good fee-paid students. To
respond their financial problems, Islamic universities need to carry out some efforts, such as
(1) to develop their entrepreneurial activities; (2) to develop quasi market by establishing
market friendly programs and activities and providing market with good graduates and
research; (3) to make successful fundraising; (4) to develop ‘new universities’ business’; (5)
to increase universities income like patenting research findings and joint venture.
Conclusions
Liberalization in higher education as promoted by GATS/WTO has successfully encouraged
universities/institutes into competition that works based on free trade and open market in
education services. As member of WTO and has ratified GATS, Indonesia has trapped into
dilemma with regard to liberalization in higher education. Two different perspectives of
Indonesian government can be found concerning the issue of liberalization. Firstly, the
government, based on basic policies of national education as stated in Constitution and Law
on National Education System, recognizes the need of internationalization of higher education
that based on open market principle, but agrees that education development must be seen as
non-commercial public services. Secondly, The Strategic Plan of Indonesian Ministry of
National Education 2005-2009 welcomes to liberalization and highly supports the
GATS/WTO scheme of liberalization in education without too much restriction.
The global trend of liberalization has enhanced competition among Indonesian universities:
state-private and private-private. In such a situation, Islamic-based higher education institutes
are those who always disadvantaged. Many Islamic universities or advance institutes are still

struggling to achieve their better position as qualified national higher education institute. But,
liberalization pushes them toward another situation of imbalance competition with ‘non-
Islamic based universities’ or international standard oriented universities as established by
large corporations in Indonesia. There is no alternative for survival for Islamic universities
than improving their education quality. However, they have too much problems like self-
finance incapability, unprofessional university management and governance, weak capacity to
develop ICT as one requirement of modern higher education facilities and uncompetitive
captive market. Support from government and Moslem society, as such, is still necessary.
International cooperation is another option to assist Indonesian Islamic higher education
improving their education quality.
Keywords
Higher education, Islamic universities, liberalization and globalization in higher education.
References
Departemen Pendidikan Nasional (2005), Rencana Strategis Departemen Pendidikan Nasional Tahun 2005-2009:
Menuju Pembangunan Pendidikan Nasional Jangka Panjang 2025. Depdiknas: Jakarta.
Enders, J. (2002), Higher Education, Internationalization and the Nation State: Recent Developments and
Challenges to Governance Theory. Paper Presented at CHER Conference, September 5-7, Vienna Austria.
ENQA (2005), Standards and Guidelines for Quality Assurance in the European Higher Education Area. ENQA;
Helsinki, Finland.
Jones, D.P. (2002), Different Perspectives on Information about Educational Quality: Implications for the Role of
Accreditation. CHEA Occasional Paper, April. Washington DC.
Knight, J. (1999), Internationalization of Higher Education. In OECD, Quality and Internationalization in Higher
Education. OECD: Paris, Pp. 13-28.
Somadikarta, et al. (1997) Universitas Indonesia. UI Press: Jakarta.
Tadjudin, M.K. (2002), Akreditasi Perguruan Tinggi: Kini dan di Masa akan datang. Jakarta, Unpublished Public
Lecture at UNJ, 19 June.
UNESCO (2004), Higher Education in a Globalize Society. Position Paper. Unesco: Paris.France.
Van Damme, D. (2001), Higher Education in the age of globalization: the need for a new regulatory framework for
recognition, quality assurance and accreditation. Introductory paper for UNESCO Expert Meeting, Paris, 10-11
September.
Wirakusumah, S. (1993), Growth and Challenges of Higher Education by Private Undertakings in Indonesia.
Position paper submitted to ADB Project TA 1824-INO Meeting in Ujung Pandang, August, 19-21.

Mausoleum as a centre of corporate identity: a study of mausoleum

as an archival symbolic value in Japanese corporation
Author : Ike Iswary Lawanda1*
Email contact : lawanda62@yahoo.com; iswari@ui.edu
Disseminated at : Bedah terkini department of library and information science faculty
of humanity Universitas Indonesia 2008

1
Department of Library Science and Information Faculty of Humanities (FIB), Universitas Indonesia Kampus UI
Depok 16424. Indonesia Tel/Fax No.: 62 21 787 2353
Introduction
Japanese corporate mausoleums transmit both content and contextual information about
ancestor archival records: transmission of the symbolic values possessed by records. In global
information era, both society and records keepings are undergoing rapid changes, banks of
institutionally records, new ways of describing records and less apparent symbolic values
assigned to records. The kind of records should be permanently kept, in the way both context
and content should be communicated amongst the heads, staff and workers and its community
is the founder records.
In the last decades in Japan there are quite mausoleums of big corporation (zaibatsu) and
companies founded before and after Meiji restoration. Odaira memorial hall represents for
Hitachi inspire the next located in Hitachi Works (one of a company in Hitachi founded 1910)
in Hitachi city. Besshi Copper Mine Memorial House represents Sumitomo in Niihama city,
Ehime where Sumitomo corporate was founded in 1689. Mausoleums of Japanese leaders in
Meiji era (1868-1912) and Nintoku mausoleum in Sakai city, Osaka of country’s leader of
Yamato, mausoleum Tokugawa Ieyasu in Toshogu Shrine Nikko of bakufu shogun.
Recently, quite a lot of Japanese corporate founders intendly have been found mausoleums in
a pattern of jinja such as Shibusawa Eiichi jinja as the founder of Bank of Japan. There are
many others could be traced down following the model of ancestor worship of Japanese
(sosensuhai).
Method
The method of interpretive is conducted through symbolic meanings to gain a comprehensive
understanding on a corporate founder mausoleum exists along with its archival records as
symbols that articulate in its community and society in whole. Social, economic, and cultural
phenomena are the elements which can be used to explain the symbolic value of archive in
the Japanese people that focuses on mausoleum.

The research is about Japanese corporate mausoleum as a centre of identity by its archival
records. The explaination is corporate mausoleums in Japanese corporation have symbolic
values of its founder ancestor archival records along with its informational value. Its meaning
as a world, to connect the real world and the other world is going to be accomplished; to
create realities and phenomena into symbols where the sensation of its existence is real into
an order. Symbolic meaning of mausoleum turns corporation into archival or documents
symbolic power overwhelmed with ancestor records and the symbolic power related to the
destruction of documents. It turns into the best tradition of Japanese order or chaos paradigm,
which stay very tight in the mind of the Japanese whom expressing it.
The meaning of Hitachi corporate mausoleum as the founding ancestor documents is a
symbol as well as carriers of information can be recognized and explained by understanding
the public and institutional interest. The essential of it is the transmission of information
which extracted into symbols have formed a sense of identity and make sense of it.

Conclusion
The goal of proposed researched to indicate the symbolic construction of mausoleum transfer
the status, vitality and centrality of corporate founder. Mausoleums and Memorial Halls
which preserve its founder’s archival records work in reciprocal. The image of extent, solid
always present the back ground of the subconscious in the mind of the founder become a
reason archive being preserved as Hitachi corporate revered mausoleum.
The significance of research proposed is to show the heritage community absolutely refuses
ancestor archive to be destroyed, therefore the information within the documents serve in
multiple sources, better indexed, better access, and better preserved physically. Mausoleum
acts as paradigm of authority or endeavors for the creator institution moreover to individuals
related.

Keywords
Ancestor, archival record, corporate founders, identity, symbolic meanings.
References
Deal, T.E & A.A Kennedy. Corporate Cultures. Massachusetts: Addion-Wesley, 1982.
Hofstede, G. Cultures and Organization. London: HarperCollins, 1991.
Ishida, I. Kamito Nihonbunka (Dewa dan Kebudayaan Jepang). Tokyo: Perikansha, 1983.
Ishii, dalam H.Nakamaki(ed.).Senri Ethnological Studies 62.The culture of association and Associations in
contemporary Japanese society. Osaka：National Museum of ethnology, 2002 Jinjashinposha (ed.).
Kigyounojinja.(Kuil perusahaan) Toukyou: Jinjashinposha, 1986.
Keesing, R.M. Cultural Anthropology. New york: Holt, Rinehart and Winston,1976.
Kondo, D. K. Crafting selves. Chicago: University of Chicago, 1990.
Komatsu, K. Kamini nattahitobito (Orang-orang yang sudah menjadi dewa). Kyoto: Tankosha, 2001.
Kumazawa, M. Noryokushugitokigyoshakai (faham kemampuan dan masyarakat korporasi). Tokyo:
Iwanamishoten,1998.
Nakamaki, H. Senri Ethnological Studies 62.The culture of association and associations in contemporary
Japanese society. Osaka：National Museum of Ethnology,2002.
Kaishajinruigaku (Antropologi Perusahaan).Osaka：Toho,2001 (ed.)
KenrijinruigakuKotohajime：kaishatosarariman.Osaka: Toho, 1997
Nihonunkanokokoro sono uchitosoto.Mukashidaimyoima kaisha (Kebudayaan Jepang dalam dan luar. Dulu
daimyo sekarang perusahaan. Osaka: 1995.
Sherriton, J.C & J.L Stern. Corporate culture, team culture: removing the hidden barriers to team success. New
York: Amaco, 1997.
Yanagita, K. Nihonno matsuri (Upacara Jepang). Tokyo: Kadokawashoten, 1972.Sensonohanashi (cerita
mengenai leluhur).Tokyo:Tsukumashobo,1975.

Psycho-social approach towards humanistic-relocation

Staff : Sarlito W. Sarwono1*, Adrianus Meliala2, Eko A Meinarno3**,
Bambang Widianto4***, Harsanto5, Ringking Marina Korah6,
Idhamsyah E.P.6, Y Herlijanto7, Sri Murni8.
Sponsor : DRPM Universitas Indonesia, Tzu Chi University, Tzu Chi
Foundation Taiwan.
Email Contact :* sarlito_sarwono@yahoo.com; **snipsnape@yahoo.com;
**qbang53@hotmail.com
Disseminated : Tzu Chi Flat House Research. Final Report (2008), and
International Seminar Towards Humanistic-Approach Relocation,
in Auditorium, Special Hospital for Surgery, (February 2009)
1. Departement of Social Psychology, Faculty of Psychology, University of Indonesia, Depok. Indonesia

2. Departement of Criminology, Faculty of Politic and Social Sciences, Universitas Indonesia. Depok. Indonesia
3. Centre for Research of Human Resources and Environment, Postgraduate Program, University of Indonesia,
Jakarta, Indonesia
4. Departemen of Social Psychology, Faculty of Psychology, Universitas Indonesia, Depok Indonesia
5. Faculty of Law, University of Indonesia, Depok. Indonesia
6. Institute of Research and Social Service, Faculty of Psychology, University of Indonesia, Depok Indonesia
7. Department of Sinology, Faculty of Cultural Sciences,University of Indonesia, Depok. Indonesia
8. Departement of Anthropology, Faculty of Politic and Social Sciences, Universitas Indonesia, Depok. Indonesia
Introduction
Rusun Cinta Kasih or Tzu Chi Flat House was built in 2003 by the Budha Tzu Chi
Foundation in Indonesia. The flat house construction was a part of comprehensive efforts
toward restoration of Angke River. The restoration of Angke River required a resettlement of
squatters who lived on riverbank alongside of Angke River. The research on Tzu Chi Flat
House was conducted to evaluate the facilities and gain the information about occupants
adaptation process toward social and economic change. This extended abstract is based on the
report tittled Tzu Chi Flat House Final Report, 2008.
Methods
Using both quantitative and qualitative methods, this research involved 316 people, which
consist of 253 quantitative respondents, 45 participants of focussed group discussions, and 18
in depth interviewees. An observation was held to gather more information.
This research focussed on eight variables. It can be seen below as:
1. Judgment toward facilities prepared by the Tzu Chi Foundation
2. Satisfactory level staying in rusun compared to their previous dwellings
3. Self identification as members of Tzu Chi community
4. Social opinion as Tzu Chi community
5. Social relationship of Tzu Chi community with surrounding people
6. Opinion toward Chinese
7. Opinion toward religion
8. Tolerance in religious life

There were 253 respondents which consisted of 119 male and 134 female. The respondents
consisted of heads of family (69 persons), housewifes (91 persons) and youth (91 persons).
The ethnicity and beliefs were diverse. The ethnicity of respondents consisted of Javanese 92
people, Sundanese 71 people, Betawinese 41 people, other 47 people, The beliefs of

respondents were Muslim 237 people, Christian 9 People, Catholic 4 people, and Buddha 3
people. The combined variables showed few results such as:
1. Social Welfare
• The economic level of Tzu Chi occupants is between $ 2-2,5 per day.
• Social prosperity based on environmental condition and existing facilities (water
and electric) had given satisfaction to occupants.
• Totally, compared to their past life on riverside of Kali Angke, the occupants of
rusun Tzu Chi felt enjoy to live in Rusun Tzu Chi.
• Statistically, the influence of facility to satisfaction only contribute as big as
5,5%, this means other variable also plays important role to maintain this feeling.
2. Public Health
• Enough health services by health clinic in area to occupants of Rusun Tzu Chi.
• There is waste management to maintain the cleanliness of Rusun Tzu Chi.
• The existing toilet and bathing system in each house is good and clean.
• Water supplied by Tzu Chi from WTP can’t be used for drinking. It was used for
bathing and washing clothes. All respondents bought water for drinking.
3. Altruism
• All respondents were actively involved during national events and cleaning days
• In general, the occupants were ready to support other families in need, such as
death of a family member.The occupants of Rusun Tzu Chi knew each other
(other occupants)
4. Ethnic Relationship and Multicultural Abilities
• In general, occupants of Rusun Tzu Chi have an open-mind and positive attitudes
as well as abilities to create positive relationship with other ethnic groups and
different religions
• In general, occupants of Rusun Tzu Chi have positive perception towards people
with Tiong Hoa background
• Occupants of Rusun Tzu Chi does not feel embarrassed and have developed
positive perception as residents of the Rusun Tzu Chi
• There is considered poor relationship between occupants of rusun Tzu chi with its
surrounding neighborhood (Perumnas). This phenomena was line with correlation
between variables that shows that the better self identification as occupants of
Tzu Chi, the more negative perception towards its surrounding neighborhood
5. Religious Life and Religious Tolerance
• There were strong religious activities within one religion such as praying
(Shalat), reading Qoran (pengajian), and involvement in reading group (majlis
ta’lim) within Rusun Tzu chi.
• Tolerance with followers from other religions is high and the occupants showed
respect rituals from other religious groups
Conclusion
The people who had lived in squater areas alongside the Angke river was relocated to Rusun
Tzu Chi. The resettlement program was conducted by Tzu Chi foundation in coordination
with local government of DKI Jakarta. There area few conclusions bellow:
a. Different level of satisfaction between the occupants of Rusun Tzu Chi toward
provided facilities. There was high satisfaction among members of community
toward the help given by the foundation. However, through FGD, depth interview
and observation, it was found that the occupants still have few complaints.
However, researches failed to further investigate the matter due to bureaucracy. It
was found that the occupants were glad that they only have to pay the rent Rp
90.000 per month plus electricity and water fee. Furthermore, they were also have
the freedom to perform religious activities, even by the minority.

b. There is a misunderstanding between community of Rusun Tzu Chi and the

Indonesia Tzu Chi Foundation. The Tzu Chi foundation think that community who
lived in the Rusun Tzu Chi were the victim of Jakarta Flood and needed a help
through a good housing program. On the other hand, the occupants felt that they
were the victim of coercive resettlement. These facts should be consider before
further problem solving.
c. Adaptation problem in economic. It was found that the occupants felt difficult to
earn money as well as to develop economic activity since they still have to adapt to
the new environment.
d. Despite of frequent philanthropistic practices shown by Tzu Chi volunteers to
support people in Rusun Tzu Chi, such imitational behavior is still quite to be, at
least, referred by people observed. One way to explain this was those
philanthropistic practices should be conducted more frequent for a better result.
Keywords
Altruism, ethnicrelationships, multicultural abilities, tolerance of religious life.
References
Devi, Bose. (1999) Dampak Kesehatan Lingkungan dari Rumah Susun (Studi Kasus Rusun Pulo Gadung, Jakarta
Timur), thesis, Program Pascasarajana Program Studi Ilmu Lingkungan Universitas Indonesia.
Douglass, M. (1989). The Environment Sustainability of Development, Coordination, Incentives and Political Will
in Land Use Planning for Jakarta Metropolis, Third World Planning Review, II.2; May.
Indra, R. Dede C. (2001) Evaluasi Pasca Huni Rumah Susun Sederhana Kota Baru Bandar Kemayoran (ditinjau
dari aspek Arsitektur dan Perilaku), thesis, Program Pascasarjana Program Studi Ilmu Lingkungan Universitas
Indonesia.
Gambiro, Henny (1999) Aspek Psikologi Lingkungan dalam Pengembangan Rumah Susun, thesis, Program
Pascasarjana Program Studi Ilmu Lingkungan Universitas Indonesia.
Hendratno, Edie Toet (1998) Rumah Susun dan Penghuninya: Suatu Kajian Kognitif tentang Pandangan Rumah
Tangga Penghuni Rumah Tangga terhadap Rumah Huniannya (Studi Kasus Rusun Kemayoran Jakarta),
thesis, Fakultas Hukum Universitas Indonesia.
Kurniasari, Indah (2005) Keberlanjutan Permukiman Nelayan Muara Angke Penjaringan, thesis, Program
Pascasarjana Program Kajian Pengembangan Perkotaan Universitas Indonesia.
Lestari, Mardi Dwi, 1998, Perbandingan Kepuasan Tempat Tinggal pada Penghuni Rumah Susun dengan Disain
yang berbeda, skripsi, Fakultas Psikologi Universitas Indonesia.
Rachmawati (2006) Anak dan Ruang yang Terbentuk: Suatu Studi mengenai Fasilitas yang Mendukung
Kebutuhan Ruang Anak pada Rumah Susun Sederhana Cengkareng, thesis, Program Pascasarjana Program
Studi Teknik Arsitektur Universitas Indonesia.
Uguy, Mediana Johanna Hendriette (1996) Perilaku Spasial Penghuni dalam Lingkungan Perumahan Massa:
Studi Kasus Rumah Susun Tanah Abang dan Kebon Kacang Jakarta Pusat, thesis, Program Pascasarajana
Program Studi Ilmu Lingkungan Universitas Indonesia.
Stangor, Chasrles (2004), Social Groups in Action and Interaction, New York: Psychology Press.
Tajfel, Henri (2000) Social Stereotypes and Social Groups; in Intergroup relations, ed. Michael A. Hogg, Dominic
Abrams.
Verkuyten, Maykel, The Social Psychology of Ethnic Identity, New York: Psychology Press, 2005
www.tzuchi.or.id (Downloaded in February 2008).

The state, ethnic violence and ethnic peace: a case study in West
Kalimantan, Indonesia
Staff : Rochman Achwan1*
Sponsor : United Nation Development Programme 2004
Email Contact : rachwan@indo.net.id
Disseminated at :Rochman Achwan. (2008) the 2008 Global Conference of the
International Peace Research Organization (IPRA), University of
Leuven, Belgium, July 15-19
1
Department of Sociology, Faculty of Social and Political Sciences, Universitas Indonesia, Indonesia
Introduction
Much has been written about ethnic violence in West Kalimantan, Indonesia. In general, most
analysts seem to agree that three theoretical perspectives dominate an inquiry into the causes
and dynamics of ethnic violence namely the institution (Brubaker, 1998; Bertrand, 2004), the
instrumental (Davidson, 2002; van Klinken, 2002) and the primordial. These perspectives
respectively focus on the state breakdown, the role of ethnic elite and public masses and, the
un-negotiable ethnic identity in bringing about violence.
While all perspectives focus on different emphasises and provide useful analyses, they pay
little attention on the structural processes that lead to the construction and contestation of
specific state, businesses, civil society. This paper aimed at investigating these structural
processes and dynamic relationships of those three macro institutions that finally lead to the
Soeharto’s state failure and ethnic violence in West Kalimantan. Moreover, it also aimed at
explicating processes of reconstruction of macro institutions in the current post-Soeharto era.
This paper argues that ethnicity has been manipulated by the ruling elite throughout the
contemporary political history of West Kalimantan. During the authoritarian rule, local state
fails to maintain its relative autonomy vis-à-vis business world, political parties, and civil
society. Local state has been captured by business power, ruling political party and security
apparatus on one hand, and it has co-opted ethnic elite on the other. The interpenetration
among these structural components has formed un-negotiated hybrid authoritarian state that
dominated the province for almost a quarter of century. Such type of the state has opened an
extra-ordinary penetration of powerful private interests into the process of policy formulation
and implementation at the expense of the interests of society.
Qualitative method has been used to collect data from various actors who have direct and
indirect knowledge of both the conflict and post-conflict periods. A desk review to assess
available research findings was previously conducted before visiting the research areas.
Theoretical Framework: Hybridisation
SN Eisendstadt (1994) rejected conceptual reification and urged to study the combination of
basic components that formed existing social institutions or boundaries in any society. The
basic components may consist of religion, primordiality, tradition and modernity, and they
combined in different ways in different societies. Social institutions have never closed and
they always changed.
His tenet on the construction of social institutions is useful for explicating the dynamics of
hybridisation of state institution. Quoting Rowe and Shelling, Frank and Stollberg (2004)
define hybridisation as the ways in which forms become separated from existing practices and
recombine with new forms in new practices. The concept of hybridisation has often been
contrasted to homogenisation and polarisation. While the former concept refers to
westernisation of institutions, the latter deals with the resistance against westernised
institutions in developing societies. Inspired by Frank and Stollberg, I try to develop three
criteria of hybridity in order to assess a degree of hybridisation.

The first refers to the extents to which local objects or institutions are adopted in the state
institution, and then contextualized in a certain set of meanings. Whether they wholly or
partly adopted in the state institutions, the hybrid state has to intensively adjust itself to local
conditions. Here the issues of interest representations and distribution of resources come to
fore. Ethnic assemblies, for instance, which previous function as a medium of interest
representation of ethnic members may continue to represent their members or transform into a
new form with a new function in the hybrid state.
The second concerns with the degree of blending of local institutions in the hybrid state.
Patrimonialism, for instance, has been merged into the South Korean state and it has
contributed to the flourishing economy for almost a quarter century before this country moved
toward democracy (Biggart and Hamilton, 1984). In contrast, the merging of familism into
business organisation has caused the decline of business life in Bali, Indonesia (Geertz,
1963b). These two cases inform that a high degree of blending of local institution into modern
institutions may or may not successful and it depends on the existence of two important
elements, namely actors’ competency and distribution of resources. The success of Korean
patrimonial states has been attributed to the strong leadership, competence economic planners
and, more or less justifiable distribution of resources to a majority of citizens.
The third relates to the dominating elements in the hybrid state. This criteria explains the
structures of relationships within the state institution in order to identify whether original
elements – be they are the ruling political party, bureaucracy or security apparatus - are
dominating or merging with local institutions such as ethnic assemblies and customary
institutions. This criteria is useful for assessing the degree of hybridisation. The higher the
domination of the original elements the lower the degree of hybridisation in the state
institution. On the contrary, the higher the blending of local institutions the higher the degree
of hybridisation in the state institution.
Discussion
A series of the deadly incidents of ethnic violence in West Kalimantan at the beginning of
emerging democracy have to be situated in the specific political and economic circumstances.
The eruption of ethnic violence was preceded by a number of structural factors. First, the long
processes of the un-negotiable of two different ‘movements’: the inflexibility of the weak
hybrid authoritarian state and, the Dayak revitalization counter-movement that demanded the
application of adat law. It was weak hybridity in the sense that ethnicity as a component in the
West Kalimantan state functioned as a complement and failed to represent the interests of its
memberships. Second is the absence of mediating institutions. Mediating institutions are vital
if any meaningful peace is to be built. In several “hot spot” areas, such institutions are absent
and therefore ethnic crimes and violence became a legitimate means for the expression of
grievances. Third refers to the severe demographic and economic pressures in the district of
Sambas have sharpened the boundaries of inter-ethnic relations. These pressures have brought
about the depletion of economic networks of the ordinary Malays on the one hand and the
growing benefits of big entrepreneurs and the Jakarta-oriented local elite on the other. The
Madurese, the small ethnic group, whose behaviour was seen as un-adaptable to that of the
local communities, particularly in economic life, become the target of that anger.
The construction of the West Kalimantan hybrid state and its dynamic relationships with other
societal actors has signified the working of the mechanism of decoupling, by ignoring and
even abandoning the ethnic tradition and institutions. This is in contrast to most studies on
hybridisation that find the working of close coupling between the original form and the
transforming components derived from local society. Moreover, studies on hybridisation as
the impacts of globalisation reveal the innovative elements of the blending of global and local
components (Frank and Stollberg, 2004).
Very recently, however, there is an interesting development that might determine the future of
polity in West Kalimantan. The gubernatorial direct elections have taken place in democratic
and peaceful manners and for the first time in more than 35 years, a Dayak leader becomes a
governor. This development is in line with national political development where gubernatorial

direct elections in most provinces have not only taken place democratically but also
contributed to the rise of new political leaders. Such circumstances open opportunities for the
West Kalimantan political leaders to gradually leave ethno-politics and begin to embark on
civic-politics. This is a new politics based on ethnicity but it nurtures pluralism and
democratic values. While a weak degree of hybridisation signified the West Kalimantan state
in the Soeharto era, nowadays, a high degree of hybrid state indicated by the intermingling of
democratic values and ethnicity has a chance to flourish.
Conclusions
This study shed lights on the processes of construction, contestation and reconstruction of the
West Kalimantan hybrid state. It is shown how ethnicity has been manipulated throughout the
contemporary political history of West Kalimantan. Only recently, in the midst of the
country’s democratisation and active combating corruption, ethnicity may have opportunities
to surface in different and constructive forms, intermingling with other components in
political and economic institutions.
Keywords
Ethnicity, hibridisation, social contestation, social reconstruction,.
References
Bertrand, Jacques. (2004) Nationalism and Ethnic Conflict in Indonesia. Cambridge University Press.
Biggart, Nicole Woosley and Gary G. Hamilton. (1984) The Power of Obedience. Administrative Science
Quarterly 29 (4): 540-549.
Brubaker, Rogers and David D Laitin. (1998) Ethnic and nationalist Violence. Annual Review of Sociology 24
Davidson, Jamie S. (2002). Violence and Politics in West Kalimantan, Indonesia. Unpublished Ph.D thesis.
University of Washington.
Frank, Robert and Gunnar Stollberg. (2004) Conceptualizing Hybridization: On the Diffusion of Asian Medical
Knowledge to Germany. International Sociology. 19 (1).
Geertz, Clifford. (1963) Peddlers and Princes: Social Change and Economic Modernization Two Indonesian
Towns. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Varshney, Ashutosh. (2002). The Relevance of International Research on Ethnic Conflict for Indonesia. Jakarta:
UNSFIR.
Walder, Andrew G. (1996) Markets and Inequality in Transitional Economies: Toward Testable Theories.
American Journal of Sociology 10 (4).
Wilson, Chris. (2001) Internal Conflict in Indonesia: Causes, Symptom ad Sustainable Development. Foreign
Affairs, Defence and Trade Group, Working Paper 1.

ASEAN’s human rights body: new breakthrough for human rights

protection in South East Asian region? Some preliminary notes from
Indonesia’s perspective
Staff : A. Afriansyah1*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : arie.afriansyah@ui.ac.id, arieafriansyah@yahoo.com
Disseminated at : The international conference of the fifth Asian Law Institute (5th
ASLI Conference), Organised by the Faculty of Law National
University of Singapore, 22-23 May 2008
1
ransnational Law Department, Faculty of Law, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
On 21 November 2007, there was a very important moment when ASEAN’s leaders
concluded a charter, ASEAN Charter (the Charter). The Charter is not only provides legal
basis for ASEAN’s legal personality but also provides other new legal norms for its member
states. One of the new legal norms which need to be discussed is the establishment of
ASEAN’s Human Rights Body (the Body). This obligation is stipulated in Article 14 of the
Charter where it stresses the commitment of member states in human rights protection.
However, the establishment of the Body is an interesting phenomenon because of many
pessimistic opinions about ASEAN’s capability in protecting human rights due to its
notorious reputation over this matter.
It can be argued that this achievement should be regarded as the highest commitment from
ASEAN member states to acknowledge and to promote universal values of human rights.
Instead of these positive beliefs, there are many challenges faced by ASEAN in its efforts to
establish a human rights body. For that reason, it is important to note some factors that should
be prepared concerning the Body. This article argues that there are some areas of concerns
that need to be considered to put the Body into operation. Some important lessons from the
European Human Rights Body will be examined as the comparative study.
The ASEAN Charter
Based on many considerations in a practical condition, member states of ASEAN had grew
their common need of legal document as their “articles of association”. This common need
was stipulated in the 2004 Vientiane Action Programme. The ten member states hoped that
the ASEAN Charter would establish ASEAN as a juridical and legal entity. By clearly
defining the association’s objectives, it would make it easier for ASEAN to advance towards
those objectives.
European Human Rights Mechanism: Lessons Learned for ASEAN
Prior the discussion about human rights mechanism in ASEAN, it is significant to have
another regional human rights mechanism as a comparison example. As it has been noted that
there at least three regional human rights mechanisms that already established. They are in the
European, African and American regions. Having considered their reputation and history, the
writer argues that European mechanism is likely to be the better example for ASEAN to
follow.
Preliminary Notes
It is important to stress that the inclusion of human rights provision in the Charter is a
significant achievement in ASEAN history. This huge initial effort needs to be followed up by
TOR which will be decided later by ASEAN Foreign Ministers Meeting in the near future.
Before ASEAN community celebrated the establishment of an ambitious ASEAN Human
Rights Body, there are some factors which need to be considered by the people of ASEAN.
Policy Studies 363

Human Rights Values within ASEAN in General

It is widely acknowledged that human rights development level in the ASEAN region varies
in each member states. Therefore, it would be very difficult to generalise human rights
condition in ASEAN without considering the situation or development in every member
states in designing TOR for the Body. As the parameter of this, there are only four states that
have National Human Rights Institution as the domestic human rights monitoring and
protection body compare to other six member states.
ASEAN’s NHRIs Cooperation
It is obvious that human rights protection is a foremost domain for national authority in all
ASEAN states member. Therefore, the establishment of National Human Rights Institution
which is the national authority for monitoring and protecting human rights becomes very
important to be pushed into realty. For this effort, Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines and
Thailand are the states that bear responsibility for. Since they have their NHRIs, they need to
cooperate by exchanging of their best practices not only for their own good but also for other
member states as their guidelines in establishing their own NHRIs.
Terms of Reference
As the main instrument for the Body, TOR should at least contain three elements which need
to be reserved. First, the TOR should cautiously decide the Body’s name whether it is Council
or Commission. Second, it is extremely important to determine the Body’s jurisdiction over
the complaints of human rights violations which directed to it. Thirdly, it is important also to
decide that what measures are if the remedies from national authority are considered by the
Body not fulfilled the satisfaction of the violated rights.
ASEAN Charter’s Ratification Problem
As aimed in its preamble, the Charter will provide ASEAN’s existence becomes clearer as
ruled-based international organisation that has international legal capacity. All future
cooperation within or outside ASEAN will be based on legal agreement not on political
compromise. Nevertheless, as mandated by the Charter, TOR for the Body will provide the
commissioners to act according to their jurisdiction without any political interference from
any states member.
All the dreams above-mentioned will meaningless if the Charter is not ratified by all member
states as the compulsory requirement for the Charter entry into force. Even though the TOR
already finish and ready for adoption by the Foreign Ministers Meeting, the ASEAN human
rights body will never come into reality due to member states’ reluctance in ratifying the
Charter.
Conclusion
There are many considerations that should be taken into account in designing the TOR for the
Body which will be agreed by Foreign Ministers Meeting. It is important to bear in mind that
human rights development among ASEAN member states are varies to each other. In order to
improve the human rights standards, it is ASEAN countries that have their NHRIs to
cooperate so they can have exchange of experiences (best practices). These experiences could
be shared to other states that need an improvement in their human rights standards.
The terms of reference for the creation of an ASEAN human rights body will determine the
extent of willingness of ASEAN to realize its human rights commitment. Therefore it should
be carefully decided at least at two points. Firstly, the TOR should cautiously decide the
Body’s name whether it is Council or Commission because it will have an effect to the
membership of the body. Secondly, it is extremely important to determine the Body’s
jurisdiction over the complaints of human rights violations which directed to it. The aim of
this proportion is to minimise wider interpretation of human rights violations which will be
reported to the Body since the main responsibility for protecting human rights is in domestic
authority. Thirdly, it is significant to determine the procedure for individual to claim
complains if his/her rights are violated by the member states.
Policy Studies 364

Keywords
ASEAN, human rights body, human rights protection.
References
Boyle, Elizabeth Heger and Melissa Thompson, “National Politics and Resort to the European Commission on
Human Rights” 35(2) Law & Society Review 2001.
Denoon, David B. H., and Evelyn Colbert, “Challenges for the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN)”
71(4) Pacific Affairs 1999.
Engle, Karen, “Culture and Human Rights: The Asian Values Debate in Context” 32 International Law and
Politics 2000.
Greenberg, Jack and Anthony R. Shalit, “New Horizons for Human Rights: The European Convention, Court, and
Commission of Human Rights” 63(8) Columbia Law Review 1963.
Katsumata, Hiro, “Why is ASEAN Diplomacy Changing? From “Non-Interference” to “Open and Frank
Discussions””, 44(2) Asian Survey 2004.
Kivimäki, Timo, “The Long Peace of ASEAN” 38(1) Journal of Peace Research 2001.
Okere, B. Obinna, “The Protection of Human Rights in Africa and the African Charter on Human and Peoples’
Rights: A Comparative Analysis with the European and American Systems” 6(2) Human Rights Quarterly
1984.
Robertson, A.H., “The Legal Work of the Council of Europe” 10(1) International and Comparative Law Quarterly
1961.
Sands, Philippe and Pierre Klein, Bowett’s of International Institutions, fifth edition, Sweet & Maxwell, London,
2001.
Severino, Rudolfo C., Framing the ASEAN Charter. An ISEAS Perspective, Institute of Southeast Asian Studies,
Utopia Press Pte Ltd, Singapore, 2005.
Policy Studies 365

A DEA approach to explain relative productivity performance of

Indonesia’s rural development bank
Staff : Viverita1*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : viverita@fe.ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Asia Pacific Productivity Coference. Academia Sinica,Taipei,
Taiwan, 17 – 19 Juli, 2008
1
Department of Management, Faculty of Economics, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
The objective of this study is to evaluate the relative productivity performance of rural
development banks of Indonesia (also known as regional government banks) and to identify
factors contributed to the variation of it. Productivity and efficiency analysis have been
widely used as a tool for assessing the performance of banking sectors in the US, developing
countries as well as in the emerging countries. For example, Hadad et al. (2003), Putra
(2003), Soemonagoro, Viverita (2007 and 2008) have observed various issues relating to the
productivity and efficiency performance of Indonesian banks. However, to date none of these
studies conducted to evaluating the productivity and efficiency of the regional development
banks (Hereafter: BPD). According to the government regulation, the main role of BPD is to
help financing the development of infrastructure in the regions (provinces) throughout
Indonesia as well as assist the SMEs and agricultural sectors. Therefore, the main motive of
this study is to judge the performance of sample banks based on productivity changes and to
identify sources of the changes by decomposing it into technical efficiency change and
technological change. Focus on this study, therefore, is to identify the productivity
performance of BPD relative to all banks in the sample and to identify sources of the
productivity changes.
The Indonesia’s rural development banks (BPD) were established based on the government
regulation No. 13, 1962. The main function of these banks is to provide funding for the
development of the regions across the archipelago, either conducted by the government or
private sector firms. However, these banks can only provide loans to other parties other than
the government projects. These banks are located in the main cities of the region, i.e. the
capital city of each province, and owned by the provincial government. The BPD is part of
the Indonesian banking system, where its activities cannot be separated from the region
economy. Not like other commercial banks, although considered as commercial banks, BPD
cannot issue and accept current deposits, do not handle international transactions and allows
to deposits their current assets only in the central bank and specific banks determine by the
central bank. Therefore, it major activity mostly as a teller of the government expenses in a
province.
To date, there are 26 BPD operated in the twenty six provinces. Based on its goal, in general,
the role of these banks is to enhance the development of a province (region) to support the
development of its infrastructure, SMEs, as well as agricultural sector. However, currently its
role seems to slightly shift.
Methodology and data specification

This study applied a non-parametric approach of Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) output
orientated to measure the productivity performance of Indonesian regional government bank
(BPD) and to investigate factors contributing to such performance. Researchers are
increasingly employing DEA method to measure bank’s efficiency and productivity
Policy Studies 366

performance. For example, Ariff and Can (2007), Berger et al. (1993), Chu and Guan (1998),
and many more studies on bank’s efficiency performance.
Findings
This section presents findings on banks’ technical efficiency using the output orientation
constant returns to scale (CRS) to formulate the Malmquist Index and its decomposition of
each bank using semi annually data from the first semester of 2001 to the first quarter 2007.
Semi annually financial data of 130 banks including 26 (twenty six) rural development banks
(BPD) of Indonesia were obtained from the regional government banks’ association
(ASBANDA). The specific data items used in this study comprises of total loans disburse by
bank and other bank service and investment as output variables. In addition, personnel
expenses, fixed assets and funds from third parties are considered as output variables. Table 1
includes summary statistics on the entire sample, which consists of 1690 observations. The
output-orientated constant returns to scale, CRS, formulation is used to compute the
Malmquist index for 26 Indonesian rural development banks (BPD) to measure the change in
productivity over the period 2001 to 2007 relative to other banks in the industry. The total
sample of this study comprises of 130 banks i.e. state banks (4); regional government banks
(26); private national banks (71); and foreign banks and joint banks (28). To evaluate the
productivity performance, we use 2 (two) output and 3 (three) input variables, i.e: total loan;
other services and investment as inputs and labor; fixed assets; and third party funds, as
outputs. The Malmquist DEA is used to calculate the various production frontier distances.
Analyzing the relative productivity of the Indonesian regional government banks (BPDs) was
such an interesting work. Not only because of these banks had a special role given by the
government to provide financing for the region development, but they also experienced as the
most efficient bank among the sample banks. Contrary to general belief that the efficiency of
government-owned institutions are always behind those of privately-owned institutions, this
study found that BPDs shown as the most technically efficient banks among the sample, with
growth technical efficiency change of 6.5 percent. However, this performance is not
supported by the way these banks conducted their operations, since most of these banks have
operated at decreasing returns to scale. This means to be more efficient, these banks need to
increase their operating scale by increasing its capacity as intermediary institutions. This can
be done if the government set such regulation that improve business conditions in the region
and allow SMEs to get funds from the BPDs easily. In addition to this, such regulation may
be needed to require institutions or businesses to only acquire funds from the BPDs.In
addition, in order to be technically and scale efficient, the government may merge all the
BPDs into a holding regional bank, and re-grouping them based on their business activities.
Keywords
Productivity, rural development bank.
References
Ariff, M and Can, Luc. (2007), “Cost and Profit Efficiency of Chinese Banks: A Non-Parametric Analysis”. China
Economic Review, pp. 1-14.
Chu, Sing Fat and Guan, Hua Lim. (1998). “Share performance and profit efficiency of banks in an
oligopolisticmarket: evidence from Singapore”, Journal of Multinational Financial Management 8, 155-168.
Fukuyama, Hirofumi. (1995).” Measuring Efficiency and Productivity Growth in Japanese Banking: A Non
Parametric Frontier Approach”. Applied Financial Economics 5, 95-107.
Hadad, Muliaman D., Santoso, Wimboh, Ilyas, Dhaniel & Mardanugraha, Eugenia, 2003. “Analisis Efficiency
Industri Perbankan Indonesia”. Working paper, Bank Indonesia
http://www.bi.go.id/NR/rdonlyres/C2FC92CC-F93B-4CFF-905E-
2007E55FE7D2/1400/PenggmetodeparametrikDEA.pdf.
Putra, M.H, (2003), ”Analisis Efisiensi Industri Perbankan di Indonesia Menggunakan Data Envelopment Analysis
(Studi pada Bank-Bank Devisa Tahun 2001-2002)”, Tesis, Program Pascasarjana, Universitas Gajah Mada:
Yogyakarta.
Soemonagoro, Koeswardojo, (2006). “Challenging the Performance of a Restructured Indonesian Bank: A Case
Study of Bank Mandiri’s merger and recapitalization”. unpublished thesis, Swiss German University,
Indonesia.
Policy Studies 367

Viverita, Kym Brown, and Michael Skully (2007).”Efficiency Analysis of Islamic Banks in
Africa, Asia and the Middle East”. Review of Islamic Economics Vol. 11, No.2, October.

Policy Studies 368

Benchmarking the efficiency of Indonesian cooperatives

Staff : Viverita1*, Sigit S. Wibowo2
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : viverita@fe.ui.ac.id; sigitsw@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Asia Pacific Productivity Coference. Academia Sinica,Taipei,
Taiwan, 17 – 19 Juli, 2008
1
Department of Management, Faculty of Economics, Universitas Indonesia
2
Laboratory of Management Studies, Department of Management, Faculty of Economics, Universitas Indonesia.
Introduction
The development of cooperatives in Indonesia began when the Dutch ruled in the colonialism
era. The first cooperative was established by R. AriaWiriatmadja in 1896 where it focused on
credit cooperatives (Masngudi, 1990). Until now, most of cooperatives grew in the rural
areas. Currently, the potential of cooperative development is able to begin an autonomous
cooperative movement while the focus of its business should be directed to fulfil their
members’ needs i.e. financial services, infrastructure services and collective buying activities.
The opportunities of regional autonomy and local resource utilizations do have some conflict
of interests that must be settle down at the regional level. With the integration of financing
resources, network development and the existence of innovation and technological centres in
regional areas, the needs of cooperative development are strongly needed.
This study examined the efficiency of 30 Indonesia cooperatives at the provincial level from
2000 to 2007. Firstly, we use a DEA approach to estimate technical and pure efficiency
scores. Secondly, DEA-based Malmquist indices are calculated to examine productivity and
efficiency changes. Finally, a SFA approach is carried out to identify the reasons of the
differences existing among the cooperatives in terms of technical efficiency.
Efficiency Measures
Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA)
Charnes et al. (1978) introduced the DEA constant return to scale (CRS). It obtains into
account multiple inputs that are used in the production process to generate outputs, to estimate
total factor productivity or TFP, a score including all factors of productions. DEA can be
estimated either input-oriented or output-oriented. In the input-oriented, the DEA approach
defines the frontier by seeking for the maximum possible reduction in input usage, with
output held constant, vice versa. The two results of both measures give the same technical
efficiency scores when CRS assumption is assumed, but are different when variable returns to
scale (VRS) are assumed. In this paper, an output-oriented measures and CRS is assumed
because the DMUs want to maximize their outputs given inputs related to the production
function.
This study is design to apply DEA-Malmquist productivity index to measure a cooperative’s
TFP. TFP growth is the geometric mean of Malmquist TFP indices that can be decomposed in
to two output-based measures: one index uses period t technology and the other period t+1
technology (Coelli, 2005). The Malmquist indices are defined using distance functions. This
approach is argued to be superior in identifying the net gain in efficiency after input
adjustments by the DMU. TFP is measured in two stages. The Malmquist index of total factor
productivity change (TFPCH) over period t and t+1 is the product of technical efficiency
change (EFFCH) and technological change.
Stochastic Frontier Analysis (SFA)
Similar to DEA, the SFA method defines efficiency as the relative distance of a firm from
some best practice production frontier that is given the costs and output levels. This approach
observed one of the components of the TFP namely the efficiency change and relates it to the
Policy Studies 369

firm-specific factors. Different from the DEA approach, the SFA approach utilizes an
econometric approach to estimate static technical efficiency: (See Aigner et al. (1977) and
Meeusen and van den Broeck (1977). This study will follow Battese and Coelli (1995)
formulation.
Data and methodology

Data are gathered from Annual Indonesian Cooperatives Statistics (Statistik Perkoperasian),
published by State Ministry of Cooperatives and Small and Medium Enterprise. Data used are
at the provincial level. We make adjustment on the number of provinces as decision making
units from 34 provinces to 30 provinces because of regional autonomy policy. We also
consider the analysis based on the location of the provinces. The input and output variables
are chosen based on the approach used. For the data envelopment analysis (DEA), input
variables are number of managers and amount of equity capital, whilst output is the surplus
obtained by the cooperatives during the observation periods. In addition, the effect of number
of member, amount of external funds and location of the cooperatives on the firm technical
efficiency is examined using the stochastic frontier analysis (SFA) approach.
Findings
Table 1 shows the Malmquist productivity indices and its components measure changes
across eight years. Values more than unity indicate productivity improvements, while values
less than unity show productivity decline. Results of the Malmquist productivity show that on
average, the Indonesian cooperatives experience productivity decline by 27 per cent during
the period of 2000 to 2007. This deterioration is attributable to a considerable negative change
in technical efficiency (5 per cent) although it compensated by increasing in technologica
change by 1 per cent. The decline of technical efficiency is a result of deterorioration both
pure and scale efficiencies.
Table 1. Malmquist Productivity of Indonesian Cooperative, 2000-2007
Periods Technical Efficiency Change Technological Productivity
Total Pure Eff Scale Eff change change
2001-2002 0.969 0.539 0.961 1.009 0.522
2002-2003 1.005 0.667 1.041 0.965 0.670
2003-2004 1.002 0.761 0.967 1.036 0.762
2004-2005 1.038 0.807 1.038 1.000 0.838
2005-2006 0.999 0.860 0.999 1.000 0.858
2006-2007 0.959 0.826 0.959 1.000 0.792
Geometric Mean 0.995 0.734 0.993 1.001 0.730
Max 1.038 0.860 1.041 1.036 0.858
Min 0.959 0.539 0.959 0.965 0.522
Table 2 presents the summary results of factors influencing technical efficiency of the
cooperatives.
Table 2:Summary Results of Factors Influencing Cooperatives’ Technical Efficiency
Variables Parameter Coefficient Standard-error t-ratio
Constant δ -0.24212 0.05454 -4.4386
0
Number of members δ 0.0000003 0.0000001 3.2429
1
External funds δ -0.0000004 0.0000001 -3.1827
2
Locations δ3 0.4184 0.1272 3.2897
Sigma-squared 0.5503 0.0585 9.4118
Gamma 22/sγσσ= 0.00022 0.00006 3.7354
LR test of the one-sided error = 12.6

Note: *Critical value is 7.05 for 3 d.f. as for Table 1 of Kodde and Palm, 1986 (Coelli, et al., 1986) for technical
inefficiency effect
Policy Studies 370

Findings from this study try to explain that the government’s approach to establish
cooperatives as an instrument to develop nation’s economy only to create weaknesses that
build themselves as business institutions as well as social vehicles. Therefore, the government
needs to have a new agenda in order to enhance the cooperative efficiency. Since the amount
of external funds have a significant role in enhancing cooperatives’ efficiency, therefore the
cooperatives need not to rely on internal equity, but to collect more financial support from the
external sources. In addition, it is also need to increase the technical efficiency of the
cooperatives, especially those in Java Island by creating more innovative products to attract
more clients and at the end, to increase surplus.
Keywords
Benchmarking, cooperatives, efficienc,.
References
Alvarez, R. et.al. (2003). “Determinants of Technical Efficiency in Small Firms,” Small Business Economics 20:
233-244.
Bonfiglio, A. (2006). “Efficiency and Productivity Changes of the Italian Agrifood Cooperatives: a Malmquist
Index Analysis,” Working Paper, Università Politecnica Delle Marche.
Desrochersa, M. (2003). “Efficiency and Expense Preference in Philippines: Cooperative Rural Banks,” CIRPEE
Working Paper No. 03-21.
Charnes, A. et al (1978). "Measuring Efficiency of Decision Making Units." European Journal of Operational
Research 2: 429-44.
nd
Coelli, T.J et al (2005). An Introduction to Efficiency and Productivity Analysis, 2 edition. New York: Springer
Science+Business Media.
Coelli, T.J. (1996). “A Guide to Frontier Version 4.1: A Computer Program for Stochastic Frontier Production and
Cost Function Estimation,” Center for Efficiency and Productivity Analysis (CEPA) Working Papers].
Department of Econometrics University of New England, 1996 (Accessed May 2002. Available from
http://www.une.edu.au/econometrics/cepawp.htm).
Masngudi, H. (1990). Penelitian tentang Sejarah Koperasi di Indonesia. Jakarta: Department of Cooperatives, the
Republic of Indonesia.
Singh, S. et.al. (2001). “Performance of Dairy Plants in the Cooperative and Private Sectors in India,” Annals of
Public and Cooperative Economics 72: 453-479.
Policy Studies 371

Civic organizations and governance reform in Indonesian cities

Staff : Rochman Achwan1*, Meuthia Ganie Rochman1
Sponsor : Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences 2006
Disseminated at : Rochman Achwan, Meuthia Ganie Rochman. (2008) Asian
Journal of Social Science (in press)
1
Introduction
Much has been written about Indonesia’s decentralization since the fall of Soeharto. Several
scholars have deliberated on the question of “right” governance, focusing on the weaknesses
of transferring external concepts of governance into Indonesian regional politics (Hadiz,
2004), the persistence of irrational elements in regional bureaucracy (Bubandt, 2006), and the
difficulties involved in replicating in other regions the success story of anti-corruption
movement in Padang, West Sumatra (Davidson, 2007).
While all scholars have provided useful analyses and findings, they seem to have ignored a
large hole in the study of decentralization, namely the organizational behavior of civic
organizations. This paper aims to explore this issue by focusing on regional civic
organizations engaged in governance reform. The purpose is not only to fill the gap in the
study of decentralization, but also to contribute to research in the sociology of organization in
democratizing societies.
Three cities – Padang, Bandung, and Yogyakarta – were chosen as the study locations for the
conspicuous and even prominent engagement of civic organizations in these cities in the
struggle for reform of public governance. The study targets are the Forum for the Care of
West Sumatra or FPSB in Padang, Bandung Institute of Governance Studies or BIGS in
Bandung, West Java, and the Institute of Research and Empowerment or IRE in Yogyakarta.
The issues and institutional targets of governance reform initiated by these civic organizations
differ. In Padang, the issue is budget abuse in provincial parliament; in Bandung, the issue is
municipal budget transparency; and in Yogyakarta, the status of this special province.
The general questions raised in this paper are: What are the characteristics of civic
organizations under study in terms of organizational cohesion, resource sustainability and
networks? And, what kind of public arena do these civic organizations face and in what ways
does that affect each organization and their patterns of interaction?
This study employed a qualitative method, involved two stages. The first stage was
conducting a desk study to map all engaged organizational actors and to identify strategic
civic organizations working in the field of governance reform; and then analyzing secondary
data from local media and reports published by the participating organizations. The second
stage was conducting in-depth interviews with thirty six individual actors representing twenty
one organizations directly and indirectly involved in the support or opposition of current
governance reform.
Discussions
Our case study shows that civic organizations in the three cities do not function as effective
vehicles to achieve their stated goals. There are several characteristics that indicate their
weaknesses.
Strong solidarity, weak networks
Like most social movements the world over, civic organizations in the three cities have a high
degree of solidarity. However, they are weak when it comes to networking. They develop
cooperation mainly on ad hoc, inter-personal relationships rather than on inter-organizational
relationships. This kind of personal networking makes it difficult to sustain institutionalized
Policy Studies 372

exchange and mobilization of resources. The basis of cooperation is program or project.

Compared with the situation a few years ago, gatherings among NGOs tend to be fewer, as
prominent civic organizations become more absorbed in their own programs. External
funding agencies have urged them to be more “technocratic” – meaning their program
activities should be more detailed.
Personalized Networks
A popular definition of ‘network’ is a group of people and organizations that are connected
and involved in a common cause. The problem is that defining common cause is sometimes
impossible, even unhelpful. Our study shows that organizational actors engaged in
governance reform comprise a variety of organizations, all raising issues for different reasons;
so different that their involvement in other kinds of activities might even be at odds with their
goals. The tenability of the networks of civic organizations has much depended on the
capacity of individual activists to maintain the direction of network. This raises the problem
of agency within organizations. At this stage there is a growing gap between organizational
and individual networks. The leaders of these organizations receive more invitations from
various organizations at the local, national and international levels, and were thus able to
rapidly develop their personal networks.
Intense identity
In contrast to the identities of public organizations with their wider roles, clear function and
norms, the identities of civic organizations are “intense” and narrow. They are impacted by
particular situations, such as when the state feels the need to create new rules of the game. As
a consequence, they are more vulnerable in terms of public acceptance. The civic
organizations in the three cities are painfully expanding their identities in the context of
decentralization through the combination of critical appeal and expertise. Post-Soeharto
Indonesia requires that civic organizations are not only capable of mobilizing the public – as
they have frequently attempted to do in the public arena – but also of displaying technocratic
competency.
Shaky arenas of legitimacy
The civic organizations faced difficulties when reaching out to a wider audience to gain
legitimacy in three cities. Organizational theories tend to see legitimacy as something fixed in
the environment, not only in terms of normative standards but also in the form of social
agencies that execute it (Hensmans, 2003). In fact, analysis of an organization’s environment
needs to look at the possibility of organizational actors actively creating legitimacy through
arenas of social interaction, which we have dubbed ‘arenas of legitimacy’. Our study shows
that although the organizations relied heavily on local communities and the mass media, the
former as a public arena for building social legitimacy is shaky, fragmented, and only loosely
connected to the real structure of decision making. The most effective arena for building
social legitimacy is credible mass media. They have fix audiences that have certain
characteristics considered socially and politically important to political players. But since the
mass media has its own dynamics – with their own central figures –, it requires the constant
attention of political players. The study shows that none of the organizations has a division
dedicated to dealing with this, but that they rely more on individual capacities in this regard.
Conclusions
The concept of organizational field can in fact be used to indicate and predict the direction of
civic organizations engaged in a similar cause or function. Using elements of field from Scott
– boundaries, logics, governance, and structuration – a less promising future is indicated for
the pro-reform civic organizations. Boundaries within and between organizations are not
sharply defined by professionalism, skill and function since these aspects are not dominant
prerequisites of acceptance. Certainly we cannot expect the professionalism and skills of
these organizations to equal that in other organizational fields, such as the business and public
sectors. But any organizational field needs certain standards that properly conceived of
according to the goals they pursue and the challenges they are facing.
Policy Studies 373

Much emphasis has been placed on the principle of “independency” and “freedom”. It seems
that Indonesia’s civic organizations do not realize that the principle of accountability, among
themselves and to the world outside, is an important pillar in achieving their goals. Lack of
accountability has restricted mobilization of resources among civic organizations. Other
societal organizations, such as the mass media, also find it difficult to engage more deeply
with pro reform civic organizations. Structuration is short lived in nature: there are too many
links and too little mesh within the organizational fields.
Acknowledgements
The authors would like to thank Willem G. Wolters, Nico Schulte Nordholt, Frans Husken,
Mario Rutten, Huub de Jonge, Gerben Nooteboom from Radboud University of Nijmegen,
the Netherlands, and the Asian journal of Social Science anonymous reviewers for their
helpful comments of this paper.
Keywords
Civic organisation, legitimacy, network, sociology of organisation.
References
Bubandt, Nils. (2006) Sorcery, Corruption, and the Dangers of Democracy in Indonesia. Journal of the Royal
Anthropological Institute. 12: 413-431.
Davidson, Jamie. (2007) Politics-as-usual on trial: regional anti-corruption campaigns in Indonesia. The Pacific
Review 20 (1): 75-99.
DiMaggio, Paul J and Walter Powell (Eds.) (1991) The New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press.
Ganie-Rochman, Meuthia. (2002) An Uphill Struggle: Advocacy NGOs during Soeharto’s New Order. Jakarta:
LabSosio-Universitas Indonesia.
Granovetter, Mark. (2005) The Impact of Social Structure on Economic Outcomes. The Journal of Economic
Perspectives 19(1), 33-50.
Hadiz, Vedi R (2004) “Indonesian Local Politics”, Critical Asian Studies 36 (4): 615-636
Hannan, Michael T and Glenn R. Caroll. (1992) Dynamics of Organizational Populations: Density, Legitimation
and Competition. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Hensmans, Manuel. (2003) “Social Movement Organizations: A Metaphor for Strategic Actors in Institutional
Fields”, Organization Studies 24(3): 355-381.
Scott, Richard W. (2001) Institutions and Organizations (Second Edition), Thousand Oak, CA: Sage Publication.

Policy Studies 374

Decentralization policy and equality: A Theil analysis of Indonesian

income inequality
Staff : Irawan,Tony1, Hartono, Djoni2*
Email Contact : aragorn042002@yahoo.com; djoni.hartono@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : 11th International Convention of the East Asian Economic
Association (EAEA), 15-16 November 2008, Manila
1
Department of Economics, Faculty of Economics and Management, Bogor Agricultural University.
2
Department of Economics, Faculty of Economics and Business, Universitas Indonesia
Introduction
The impacts of income inequality on growth have been analyzed for years. In theoretical
framework, economic growth can be effected by income inequality through 4 channels
(Barro, 1999), i.e. credit market imperfections, political economy, social unrest, and saving
rates. In the empirical framework, many studies have been conducted, for instance: Kaldor
(1957), Bourguignon (1981), Alesina and Rodrik (1994), Bertola (1993), Perotti (1993), and
Keefer and Knack (2000). Interestingly, both theoretical and empirical suggest that the
relation between inequality and growth could be positive or negative.
Although the impact of income inequality on growth have been mix and conflicting, it is
really important to understand the structure of income inequality. Therefore in this study we
calculate gini coefficient as a measure of income inequality in more detailed figure during the
decentralization. We compare income inequality between urban and rural area in each
province in Indonesia.
In our perspective, one of inequality sources is the inequality problem in the sector. People
earn their income by working in the sector. Consequently, if the sector has large inequality, it
is expected that the economy has big gini coefficient. Thus, as a measure of inequality in the
sectors we calculate Theil inequality index using both national and province level data.
Prior to the two inequality measures that we describe in the previous paragraph, we test the
validity of the Kuznet hypothesis (the inverted-U shape curve). We would like to address the
relationship between inequality measure and income per capita. Thus we could analyze
Indonesia’s stage of development. Technically, it is quite different with other studies. Instead
of using a broad panel of countries, we use a cross-province data within country.

Data that we used in this study is National Socio-Economic Survey from 2002 up to 2006.
Generally, we can group our analysis into three steps. First, we test the validity of Kuznets
hypothesis by using panel data analysis. Here, we employ Panel-Corrected Standard Errors
(PCSE) which is developed by Beck and Katz (1995) due to the existence of
heteroscedasticity and autocorrelation problem in the model. In PCSE, we correct the
standard error by using the square roots of the diagonal elements of panel corrected
variance/covariance matrix.
Second, we calculate gini coefficient and theil inequality index in both national level and
province level. Here we analyze the inequality in both rural and urban area. Gini coefficient is
calculated to measure the people income inequality, whereas theil inequality index is a
measure to analyze the structural change for the distribution of income between and within
various sectors of the economy.

Generally, there are two issues that will be addressed in this paper. First, whether the Kuznet
hypothesis valid for Indonesian data. The basic question of Kuznet Hypothesis is whether
income inequality increase or decrease in the evolution of country’s economic growth
Policy Studies 375

(Kuznet, 1955). Kuznet (1955) argue that during the economic development process,
inequality first increases and then decreases after a specific point. It is also known as
inverted-U curve Kuznet Hypothesis. Here, we found that Kuznet hypothesis is not proven for
Indonesian data since only income per capita that is significant at 5 percent level. These might
be due to the length of period that we used. We use unbalanced panel data with 30
observations and 5 year periods. In the base paper of Kuznet hypothesis, Kuznet (1955)
defines that the central topic of his paper is the causes of long-term changes in the income
distribution. However, the “sign” of coefficient implies that higher per capita income would
result higher income inequality. If we divide the inverted-U curve into two stages, the
estimation result also indicate that Indonesia still in the early stage of development.
The next issue in this paper is the feature of inequality during the decentralization. The
income inequality level has not much improved during the implementation of the
decentralization. Since the first year in which the policy took place, instead of having lower
income inequality level, gini coefficient fluctuated and even rose substantially in 2005. This
might be occurred because local government did not have good coordination with central
government. The local busied with their income generating activity and cause national
program such as poverty alleviation program left behind. Moreover, the increasing oil price
was also indicated as one of the main reasons of the significant rising gini coefficient in 2005.
In the more specific analysis, it is shown that the income inequality in urban worse than rural
for all period, except for Papua. This condition also occurred in many other provinces and
national level data. It might be due to the natural centralization of economic activity that is
usually in the city (urban). People prefer to move and try to find a job in the city since there
are many types of jobs served by the city both skilled and unskilled. As a result, the city
crowded with migrants and those who are not lucky enough would stay in slum area and
create poverty problem in the city.
As we mentioned before, we expect that one of inequality sources is the inequality problem in
the sector. Therefore, we calculate theil inequality index for all provinces. Since there are 33
provinces in Indonesia, we will only focus on provinces with the most severe inequality
during 5 years analysis. The method that we used here is simply by choosing the provinces
that dominantly appear as 7 provinces with highest gini coefficient during 2002 up to 2006.
If we take out provinces that are always in the 7 provinces with highest gini coefficient at
least for four years period, we will have DI Yogyakarta, DKI Jakarta, East Kalimantan and
Papua. DI Yogyakarta and DKI Jakarta represented west region of Indonesia and East
Kalimantan and Papua represented east region of Indonesia. Within 7 provinces with highest
gini coefficient, west region of Indonesia was more dominant than east one with the constant
comparison 4 : 3. Next, we will present theil index in four provinces above and national level
for four years period (2002-2006). We divided sectors into 9 groups i.e. Agriculture, Fishery
and Forestry; Manufacture; Construction; Trade, Hotel and Restaurant; Transportation and
Communication; Banking and Real Estate; Services; Mining, Electricity, Gas and Oil.
In DKI Jakarta, two sectors that have high inequality are Banking and Real Estate sector and
Trade, Hotel and Restaurant sector. These two sectors were important sector for DKI Jakarta.
Banking and Real Estate sector contributed more than 30 percent to total PDRB DKI Jakarta
and become the largest sector for period 2002 - 2005 and Trade, Hotel and Restaurant sector
contributes about 26 percent to total PDRB DKI Jakarta. Similar with DKI Jakarta, Banking
and Real Estate sector and Trade, Hotel and Restaurant sector are two sectors with high
inequality problem. In the next two provinces, East Kalimantan and Papua, the highest
inequality exists in Mining, Electricity, and Gas sector. Again, this sector has highest
contribution to the both East Kalimantan and Papua output (PDRB).
If we calculate Theil Inequality Index in the national data level, sectors that have large
inequality are Manufacture; Trade, Hotel and Restaurant; Banking and Real Estate. This looks
consistent with DKI Jakarta and DI Yogyakarta condition. However, if we compare it with
Kalimantan Timur and Papua, we have completely different result.
Policy Studies 376

Conclusion
To sum up, there are four important findings in this paper. First, Kuznet hypothesis is not
proven for Indonesian data. The estimation result indicates that Indonesia still in the early
stage of development. Second, the income inequality in urban is worse than rural area. Third,
inequality problem is majorly arisen in the province’s important sector. Four, the inequality
analysis in national level cannot capture the difference of inequality problem between
provinces in Indonesia. Thus, the inequality-related policy should be derived from province
level instead of national level.
Keywords
Decentralization, inequality, Theil indices.
References
Alesina, A., Rodrik, D. (1994) Distributive Politics and Economic Growth. The Quarterly Journal of Economics
109, 465--490.
Barro, R. J. (1999) Inequality, Growth and Investment. NBER Working Paper Series No. 7038. National Bureau of
Economic Research. Cambridge.
Beck, N., Katz, J.N. (1995) What to do (and not to do) with Time-Series Cross-Section Data. The American
Political Science Review 89: 634--647.
Bertola, G. (1993) Factor Shares and Saving in Endogenous Growth. The American Economic Review 83, 1184--
1198.
Bourgignon, F. (1981) Pareto Superiority of Unegalitarian Equilibria in Stiglitz’ Model of Wealth Distribution
with Convex Saving Function. Econometrica 49, 1469--1475.
Figini, P. (1999) Inequality and Growth Revisited. Trinity Economic Paper Series No. 99/2. Trinity College
Dublin.
Kaldor, N. (1957) A Model of Economic Growth. The Economic Journal 67, 591--624.
Keefer, P., Knack, S. (2000) Links between Inequality and Growth. Policy Research Working Paper No. 2418. The
World Bank.
Kuznet, S. (1955) Economic Growth and Income inequality. The American Economic Review 45, 1--28.
Perotti, R. (1993) Political Equilibrium, Income Distribution, and Growth. The Review of Economic Studies 60,
755--776.
Ram, R. (1991) Kuznet’s Inverted-U Hypothesis: Evidence from a Highly Developed Country. Southern
Economic Journal 57, 12—23.

Policy Studies 377

Explaining union strategy in Indonesia

Staff : A. Satrya1*
Disseminated at : A. Satrya, (2008). Explaining union strategy in Indonesia. Asian
Profile 36(1), 57-66
1
Introduction
Strategy is fundamental to the organisation to preserve its existence, while adapting to its
environment. The appropriate strategy chosen by the organisation will improve organisation
performance with benefits such as to make clear and focus on the vision and objective of the
organisation, and to understand the environment (Wheelen and Hunger, 2004: 4). In non-
profit organisations, the use of strategy will ensure stakeholder satisfaction, growth in
participation, and better financial performance (Courtney, 2002: 144-145).
Union strategy is not commonly associated with conscious, planned, and long-term planning
characteristics, since union activity is usually characterised as defensive and reactive.
Decisions are often collective, and made by different interest groups. The result of a number
of studies (Boreham and Hall 1994; Gahan and Bell 1999) confirms that union strategy
variables are among the most important determinants of organising success.
This paper attempts to evaluate the strategy of the Indonesian union movements in the
telecommunications business, an industry which is still very attractive to foreign investors. I
developed the work of Gahan (1998) to describe components of strategies adopted by unions.
Based on the results, it further reviews which strategy pattern that dominates the activity of
unions. This is a first work for explaining union strategy using a comprehensive model that
employs simple, non-overlapping dimensions. The results would improve the understanding
of union behaviour in particular, and employee behaviour in general, which in turn would
improve collaboration of the parties in the Indonesian telecommunications industry.
Literature review
Boxall and Haynes (1997) examine the effectiveness of union strategy in relation to workers
and employers. They show that in a neo-liberal environment, when the support from the
government is decreasing, classic unionism strategy that combines solid organising with
servicing, and implements less co-operations with employers, are more effective compared to
other strategy patterns, namely: paper tiger, consultancy, and partnership unionism. Relying
on servicing methods and neglecting members’ participation will threaten union effectiveness.
A similar argument also declared by Gahan (1999: 15) and Cahill (2001: 169) that traditional
strategy such as strikes remain effective tools, as added by Kelly (1998: 64) that urges the use
of union militancy, rather than the policies of moderation, in pursuing union goals.
Gahan (1998) provides a simple but more systematic and thorough framework for union
strategy, which consists of union methods (unilateral regulation, arbitration, collective
bargaining, and political action); union goals (control of labour supply, direct bargaining with
employer, strengthen organisation, and social change); union tactics (apprenticeship control,
meetings, house call, bargaining, legal tactic, industrial action, link with political party,
coalitions with other group, etc.); and the level at which strategy is developed (national,
regional, workplace). Unions pursue their goals using methods selected at a certain level in
the organisation. Tactics are then developed to implement the chosen strategy. Each method
may have specific objectives and tactics, for instance, the political action may have an
objective to create a social enhancement and supported with the political link and
demonstration. However, other tactics such as legal tactic and meetings may also be
employed when a union adopts political unionism. Gahan (1998: 27) assumed that unions
Policy Studies 378

may implement a mixed method, but there will be dominant patterns of strategy. According to
Gahan (1998: 20), his general model has incorporated all dimensions of union strategy based
on theoretical and empirical reasons, thus removing the ambiguity found in the other models,
whilst involving all the basic dimensions needed in union strategy.

This research is based on a theoretical framework provided by Gahan (1998) to investigate
union strategy, which consist: goals, methods, tactics, and levels of decision-making. I also
explore union and company characteristics.
The first set of variables highlights the importance of each union goal: wages and benefits,
employment goals, organisation goals, and political goals. The second set of variables
identifies which strategy method has been pursued, whether collective bargaining, arbitration,
or political actions. The third set of variables consists of the respondent’s tactics, which
comprise traditional, organising, services, and social movement tactics. The fourth set of
variables identifies which levels of union organisation that have the most influence on the
creation of strategy.
The unit of analysis of this study is the union as organisation, not the individual members.
Therefore, each union, represented by its leaders, filled one questionnaire, which contains
closed and open ended questions. I also interviewed some union leaders and made some
observations to union activities. The respondents were seven nationwide enterprise unions:
two full service operators, two cellular operators, one data telecommunications provider, one
paging operator, and one telecommunication equipments manufacturer. Two companies have
partly been privatised, as the other was state-owned. The remains were private companies, of
which two were jointly owned by private and foreign telecommunications companies, and the
others were owned by domestic companies.
All unions were formed after 1998. Their members range from 50 to 28,000 workers, with
union density between 20 percent and 95 percent. About 80 percent of 40,000 workers in
those companies have been unionised. The union coverage ranges from low-level workers to
general managers in any occupations, since the Trade Unions Act No. 21/ 2000 does not
prohibit managerial employees from becoming union members or officials.
Discussion and conclusion

The research has identified component of the strategy of the Indonesian union in the
telecommunications industry, which consisted of union goals, union methods, union tactics,
and the level of strategy-making. The employment-security and economic oriented objectives
were the most prevalent union goals. In the period of economic crisis of 1997-1998 that was
indicated by massive retrenchment and high level of unemployment, the Indonesian unions
were forced to prioritise the interest of members of securing current jobs in contrast of
economic choices as happen in Australian (Gahan, 2002) and Korea (Jeong, 2007).
If the unions were able to meet the requirement on bargaining, they would use collective
bargaining agreement as primary union method for pursuing their goals. The chosen methods
were enforced by combining tactics of organising member by utilising ICT (Diamond &
Freeman, 2002), and building limited partnership in work, while implementing occasional
adversarial approach (Gardner, 1989), and acquiring supports from union federations. Some
studies in the developing and advanced countries show that the use of comprehensive union-
building campaign will significantly influence union effectiveness (Bronfenbrenner, 1997;
Kuruvilla, Das, Kwon, & Kwon, 2002; Satrya, 2006).
Partnerships are practised in the form of indirect participation through regular meetings or
joint consultative committee (JCC). The importance of partnership is in line with the study in
Indonesia and Malaysia (Satrya and Parasuraman, 2007), the Philippines (Erickson,
Kuruvilla, Ofreneo, & Ortiz, 2003) and Korea (Park & Leggett, 2004). However,
management can use JCC in substituting union participation, as evident in India, Malaysia,
and the Philippines (Verma, Kochan, Lansbury, 1995), or even at British Telecom (Barrett &
Policy Studies 379

Heery, 1995). Other anti-union tactics were also found at most cases, at least by restricting
unions to conduct activities during working hours, and discriminations in promotions.
Referring to the framework of Boxall and Haynes (1997), all unions in the Indonesian
telecommunications industry are better categorised as the consultancy unionism. The unions
from the state-owned companies were actually more appropriate to represent such unionism,
as they emphasised servicing and some adversarial engagement with employers. However,
despite their extensive organising and cooperative efforts, the unions in private companies
might not yet be classified as applying partnership unionism, since they showed inadequate
signs of strong solidarity. Their bargaining powers were not enough to show both an
opportunity and a threat to an employer (Boxall and Haynes 1997: 578).
Fierce competition, accompanied by rapid innovation in telecommunications technology
creates more pressure and complexity for the unions. In order to survive, unions have to
strengthen their commitment in organising (Brown, 2001; Kester & Sidibe, 1997), to improve
solidarity and participation, and subsequently to construct a partnership based on members’
support (Gahan and Bell, 1999).
Keywords
Indonesia, telecommunications, union strategy.
References
Barrett, M., & Heery, E. (1995). Ìt's good to talk'? The reform of joint consultation in British Telecom. Industrial
Relations Journal, 26(1), 57.
Boreham, P., & Hall, R. (1994). Trade-Union Strategy in Contemporary Capitalism - the Microeconomic and
Macroeconomic Implications of Political Unionism. Economic and Industrial Democracy, 15(3), 313-353.
Boxall, P., & Haynes, P. (1997). Strategy and trade union effectiveness in a neo-liberal environment. British
Journal of Industrial Relations, 35(4), 567-591.
Bronfenbrenner, K. (1997). The role of union strategies in NLRB certification elections. Industrial & Labor
Relations Review, 50(2), 195-212.
Brown, A. (2001). After the Kader fire in Thailand. In J. Hutchison & A. Brown (Eds.), Organising labour in
globalising Asia (pp. 127-146). London, New York: Routledge.
Cahill, P. (2001). Sangharsh - Workers' Interventions in the Privatisation of Indian Telecommunications. In J.
Hutchison & A. Brown (Eds.), Organising labour in globalising Asia. London, New York: Routledge.
Diamond, W. J., & Freeman, R. B. (2002). Will Unionism Prosper in Cyberspace? The Promise of the Internet for
Employee Organization. British Journal of Industrial Relations, 40(3), 569-596.
Erickson, C. L., Kuruvilla, S., Ofreneo, R. E., & Ortiz, M. A. (2003). From Core to Periphery? Recent
Developments in Employment Relations in the Philippines. Industrial Relations, 42(3), 368-395.
Gahan, P. (1998). Union strategy: a conceptual framework. Sydney: School of Industrial Relations and
Organisational Behaviour, University of New South Wales.
Gahan, P. (2002). (What) do unions maximise? Evidence from survey data. Cambridge Journal of Economy,
26(3), 279-297.
Gahan, P., & Bell, S. (1999). Union Strategy, Membership Orientation and Union Effectiveness: An Exploratory
Analysis. Labour & Industry, 9(3), 5-30.
Gardner, M. (1989). Union Strategy: A Gap in Union Theory. In G. W. Ford & D. Plowman (Eds.), Australian
unions: an industrial relations perspective (2nd ed., pp. 49-72). South Melbourne, Vic.: Macmillan.
Jeong, J. (2007). Industrial relations in Korea: diversity and dynamism of Korean enterprise unions from a
comparative perspective. London; New York: Routledge.
Kelly, J. (1998). Rethinking industrial relations: mobilization, collectivism, and long waves. London; New York:
Routledge.
Kester, G., & Sidibe, O. O. (1997). Trade unions and sustainable democracy in Africa. Brookfield: Ashgate.
Kuruvilla, S., Das, S., Kwon, H., & Kwon, S. (2002). Trade Union Growth and Decline in Asia. British Journal of
Industrial Relations, 40(3), 431-461.
Park, Y. B., & Leggett, C. (2004). Employment relations in the Republic of Korea. In G. J. Bamber & R. D.
Lansbury (Eds.), International and comparative employment relations: a study of industrialised market
economies (Rev. ed.). St. Leonards, NSW.: Allen & Unwin.
Satrya, A. (2006), 'Union Effectiveness and Union Strategy in Indonesia', Paper presented to 20th Association of
Industrial Relations Academics of Australia and New Zealand (AIRAANZ) Conference, Adelaide, 1-3 February
2006, 69-78.
Satrya, A. and Parasuraman, B. (2007), 'Partnership as Union Strategy - Does it Work in Asia? Case Studies in
Indonesia and Malaysia', Indian Journal of Industrial Relations, Vol. 42, No. 4, 589-616.
Verma, A., Kochan, T. A., & Lansbury, R. D. (1995). Employment relations in the growing Asian economies.
London: Routledge.
Policy Studies 380

Exploring the implementation of joint consultation committee in

postal industry: case study in Malaysia and Indonesia
Staff : B. Parasuraman 1, A. Satrya2 *
Sponsor : University of Queensland, University Malaysia Sabah
Disseminated at : Parasuraman, B. and A. Satrya. (2008). Exploring the
Implementation of Joint Consultation Committee in Postal
Industry: Case Study in Malaysia and Indonesia. Philippine
Journal of Labor and Industrial Relations 28(1&2) (in press)
1
Industrial Relations Program, School of Social Sciences, Universiti Malaysia Sabah, P.O Box 22144, 88781
Luyang, Kota Kinabalu, Sabah, Malaysia
2
Introduction
Strauss (1998) argues the effectiveness of direct participation will be restricted if it is not
combined with indirect participation. The arguments supporting indirect participation are
significant because many high level decisions affect the people in the organisation, and vice
versa. This is because the strategic direction of the company is usually a determinant of the
workers actions and beliefs (Wilpert 1998). They are constructed based on strong union
solidarity and participation among their members (Gahan and Bell 1999; Heery 2002).
In most English speaking countries, indirect participation has been in the form of joint
consultation committees (JCC), collective bargaining (CB), worker-director schemes,
occupational health and safety. In Western Europe and in most Scandinavian countries, works
councils and co-determination have been important mechanisms for indirect participation.
While the developed world is working to achieve a balance for effective worker participation,
the utilisation of effective schemes in developing countries, such as Malaysia and Indonesia,
is far behind. The research will be our pioneer work on the practices of JCC in Malaysia and
Indonesia. The paper will utilise the model of JCC proposed by Marchington (1992; 1994) in
order to examine the actual practice of JCC in postal industry in Malaysia and Indonesia.
Literature review
Marchington et al. (1992, p.1) define a JCC as, “a mechanism for managers and employee
representatives to meet on a regular basis, in order to exchange views, to utilise members’
knowledge and expertise, and to deal with matters of common interest which are not the
subject of Collective Bargaining”. JCC is part of the concept of partnership between
employees and employers (Gollan, 2002).
JCC can be traced from the Whitley Committee in the United Kingdom (UK) during 1917-
1918 (Ramsay 1990). JCC were more popular in larger corporations (Cully et al., 1999). The
influence of the Whitley Committee influenced Malaysian industrial relations practices in the
workplace, which was formerly under the UK colonial administration (Parasuraman 2004). In
Malaysia, JCC are more common in the public sector (Idrus 2001). JCC were established in
private companies from 1994 because of the issuance of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act 1994 (Aminuddin 2003). According to Todd and Peetz (2001:1381), other sorts of JCC in
Malaysia include the sports and recreation committee, the canteen committee, the suggestion
committee, and the religious affairs committee.
The principle of partnership between managers and employee representatives in Indonesia can
be traced back since the introduction of the Governmental Decree No. 25/1961 that
encouraged the establishment of Work Councils at State-Owned Enterprises. However, the
attempts were never flourished (Sutanto 2001). In the era of Soeharto regime, the partnership
was reinvigorated through the use of concept of Hubungan Industrial Pancasila (HIP -
Policy Studies 381

Pancasila Industrial Relations), which was introduced in 1968. It positioned the parties in
production process within a framework of unitarist national development, which discouraged
the conduct of strikes and lock-outs, and encourages the use of deliberation to reach
consensus (Sudono 1978). The Manpower Act No. 13 year 2003 mandates the establishment
of compulsory JCC for the companies employing more than 50 workers.
The literature discusses four main models of JCC which impact on CB. They are alternative,
marginal, competing, and adjunct models (Marchington, 1992; 1994). The first model is
based on JCC being an alternative to CB. In this environment, employers will introduce and
develop JCC in order to oppose CB. Employers establish this model of JCC in order to dilute
the value and dependence of employees on unions. The next model regards JCC as being
marginal to CB. In this model, JCC have minimum impact on workers and management, and
little mutual benefit is gained. The trust between parties is lacking and management does not
take the development seriously. The subject matter can be quite trivial. Third is the competing
model, where the JCC is considered a direct competitor to CB. In this model employers are
keen on JCC because their aim is to undermine the power of the union in the workplace. The
subject matter is substantive with focus on reducing competitive friction and encouraging
employees to commit to management actions and strategy. The final model sees JCC as an
adjunct to CB. In this model JCC and CB have an integrative relationship where both can
have different roles but together they achieve cooperation between management and
employees. For example, CB is mainly to negotiate on wages, working conditions and
distributive issues whereas JCC focus more on investment decisions, new business plans,
takeovers and mergers, etc. Although JCC and CB have different interests both are beneficial
for management and employees.

This study based on a qualitative case study approach using a multi-method technique
(Hartley, 2004; Yin, 2003). The management, union officials and workers of Posco in
Malaysia and Posindo in Indonesia were interviewed and observed, various meetings were
attended, and documents were obtained. Gummesson (1991:76-79) argues that generalisation
in case studies can be seen differently, and that rigorous investigation with only one case
which identifies specific issues and systems, and other important characteristics may be
reasonably used to generalise similar cases or situations. This research, however, is a study of
firms that are heavily unionised, and therefore generalisation would be limited.
Discussion
The JCC brought beneficial to the unions. The unions perceived that the employers adopted a
more willingness stance for in dealing with workers’ grievances. If previously the unions
found had difficulties for persuading the management to discuss the disputes, now, they could
use the meetings for escalating examining the problems. The most important benefit gained
was that the unions were more involved in the process of decision-making.
Out of four models of Marchington’s conceptual framework (1992; 1994), the fourth model –
the adjunct model – is more applicable to Posco and Posindo. In the Posco and Posindo
context, JCC and CB have separate roles. On one side, JCC is focused toward joint decision
making on selected operational and strategic issues. On the other side, CB is concerned about
pay structures and conditions of work. Both committees (JCC and CB) are thought to provide
bargaining power. These success cases are supported by strong union solidarity and
participation among their members, as suggested by Gahan and Bell (1999) and Heery (2002).
Support from government towards partnerships is a critical requirement for the success of
such arrangement (Oxenbridge and Brown 2002). In Malaysia, this situation is made possible
because of the influence of the UK’s Whitley Committee. In Indonesia, the mandate of
Manpower Act No. 13/2003 to establish partnership drives the promotion of JCC through
various activities, such as bipartite workshop and the presentation of Bipartite Awards.
However, there is always a possibility of degrading condition from the adoption of the adjunct
model to the less balanced of power between JCC and CB. When the management starts to
Policy Studies 382

undermine the role of unions, they will attempt to boost the role of JCC. Strategic matters are
then discussed in the JCC as a competitor to CB, therefore, JCC can be used as a substitution
of union as occurred in the Philippines (Bitonio Jr. 2004, p. 11). In order to prevent such
condition, the unions must always prove that they have strong bargaining power, which is
supported by high level of negotiation capacity and strong support from employees.
Conclusion
The findings from the research on JCC in both countries indicated that the adjunct model of
Marchington is more appropriate to understand the role of unions and management in making
decisions together at the company level in Posco and Posindo. Although there is collective
bargaining established under the industrial relations law in both countries, both Posco and
Posindo used JCC as an alternative employee representation in the workplace and do not
challenge the collective bargaining (CB) practices.
The adjunct model of Marchington (1992; 1994) is suitable to the ASEAN conditions, which
is dominated by the form of enterprise-level unions (Parasuraman and Satrya 2008). The
model, however, requires state support and a strong bargaining power of unions, which is
showed by high level of negotiation capacity and strong member support.
Keywords
Developing, joint consultation committees, postal.
References
Bitonio Jr., B.E.R. (2004). Workers representation amidst labor flexibility: insight from the Philippine experience.
IIRA 5th Asian Regional Congress, Seoul, South Korea, June 23-26, (2004.
Cully, M., S. Woodland, A. O'Reilly, and G. Dix. (1999). Britain at work. London: Routledge.
Gahan, P., and S. Bell. (1999). Union strategy, membership orientation and union effectiveness: An Exploratory
Analysis. Labour & Industry 9(3): 5-30.
Gollan, P. (2002). All talk but no voice: employee voice at the Eurotunnel call centre. Economic and Industrial
Democracy 24: 509 - 541.
Gummesson, E. (1991. Qualitative methods in management research. Newbury Park: Sage Publications.
Heery, E. (2002). Partnership versus organising: alternative futures for British trade unionism. Industrial Relations
Journal 33(1): 20-35.
Idrus, D. (2001). An examination of the contending factors shaping the role of the state in Malaysian industrial
relations. Doctor of Philosophy, Department of Management, University of Stirling, Stirling.
Marchington, M. (1992). Managing the team: a guide to successful employee involvement. Oxford: Blackwell
Business.
Marchington, M. (1994). The dynamics of joint consultation. In Personnel management: a comprehensive guide to
theory and practice in Britain, ed. K. Sisson. 2nd Edition, Oxford: Blackwell.
Oxenbridge, S. and W. Brown. (2002). The two faces of partnership? An assessment of partnership and co-
operative employer/trade union relationships. Employee Relations 24(3): 262-276.
Parasuraman, B. (2004). Malaysian industrial relations: a critical analysis. Petaling Jaya, Malaysia:
Pearson/Prentice Hall.
Parasuraman, B. and A. Satrya. (2008). Relaciones De Trabajo En Los Paises de APEC: Relaciones Laborales en
ASEAN: Una Vision General, Segunda Parte. Análisis Laboral, 32(374): 14-15.
Ramsay, H. (1990). The joint consultation debate: soft soap and hard cases. In Discussion Paper. Glasgow:
University of Glasgow.
Strauss, G. (1998). An overview. In Organisation participation: myth and reality, ed. F. Heller, E. Pusic, G.
Strauss and B. Wilpert, 8-39. New York: University Oxford Press.
Sudono, A. (1978). Gerakan buruh Indonesia dan kebijaksanaannya. Jakarta: Federasi Buruh Seluruh Indonesia
and Asian American Free Labor Institute.
Sutanto. (2002). Usaha-Usaha Pengembangan Dewan Perusahaan dan perbandingannya di beberapa negara. In
Peran serta pekerja dalam pengelolaan perusahaan, ed. H.P. Rajagukguk. Jakarta: Yayasan Obor Indonesia.
Todd, P. and Peetz, D. (2001). Malaysian industrial relations at century's turn The International Journal of Human
Resource Management 12(8): 1365-1382.
Wilpert, B. (1998). Participation: view from psychology. In Organisational participation: myth and reality, ed. F.
Heller, E. Pusic, G. Strauss and B. Wilpert, 40-64. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Yin, R. K. (2003). Case study research: design and methods. 3rd edn. London: Sage Publication.

Policy Studies 383

How to learn knowledge from foreign partner: A case study of

Japanese joint venture in Indonesia
Staff : T.N. Mursitama1*
Student :-
Sponsor : Private
Email Contact : tirta.nugraha@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : 2008 Academy of International Business Southeast Asia Regional
Conference, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, December 4-6, 2008
1
Department of International Relations, Faculty of Social and Political Sciences, Universitas Indonesia, Depok,
Indonesia
Introduction
This research focuses on how local partner learn knowledge from foreign partner in Japanese
joint venture in emerging economies. It is an in-depth case study explaining internal learning
capability transfer from foreign firms; resource sharing within business groups especially in
developing human capital; and knowledge acquisition, assimilation, and exploitation process
which is so-called absorptive capacity (Cohen and Levinthal, 1990; Zahra and George, 2002),
in a leading electronic joint venture (JV) firm in Indonesia.
Focus of this study is to understand learning process in Panasonics Manufacturing Indonesia
(PMI), a joint venture between Matsushita Electrical Industries and Gobel International.
Method
This research follows the replication logic, rather than sampling logic: whether case
companies chosen could provide rich information in the aspects of research constructs (i.e.
Lee, 2003). PMI as one of the leading JV firm in Indonesia fits with these criteria. Matsushita,
a parent company of PMI, also recognized as high performance business group in terms of
technological and managerial capabilities. In addition, PMI has shown their eagerness to be
studied by providing access to informants. The author also has long acquaintance with one of
directors in other member of Matsushita group in Indonesia who gave recommendation to
PMI. It is useful to develop a relationship of mutual trust with respondents. Therefore, PMI
also fits for practical reasons.
Letter of inquiry with a research’s proposal explaining the objective, design, protocols and
advantage of the research is sent in early 2006. The approval is given shortly and followed by
pilot study on April to May 2006. First fieldwork is conducted in June to July 2006 whereas
the second is on August to September 2006. The following steps are taken to ensure the good
quality of this in-depth case study. First, I met with vice chairman and three senior managers
to explain the research protocols and get initial comments and set up the more detailed
schedules for field studies.
Second, the main informants are senior manager HR and senior manager R&D. I conduct nine
interviews during April to September 2006: twice interviews both with vice chairman and
senior manager R&D, and five times interviews with senior manager HR. Each interview is
carried out lasting between thirty minutes and two hours. Following the standard procedures
in doing case study, I used open-ended and semi-structured questionnaire (Creswell, 1998).
Creswell (1998) suggests that good case study should meet the standard of quality
verification, therefore I conduct triangulation of information---searching for the convergence
information---relates directly to data situation in developing case study from data sources,
theory, methods, and my self as investigator. In addition, member checking is done by
sending the rough draft of writing to the informants after the entire interviews finished. All
the interviews are recorded and field notes are also created.
Policy Studies 384

Third, the rationale of this study that makes this study as a single-case study is to confirm,
challenge, or extend the theory (Creswell, 1998, Yin, 1994: 38). I use within-case study
analysis in this study because several themes identified earlier are being confirmed,
challenged, or extended within a single case.

I found three types of learning processes as follows. First, learn how to manufacture the
product. The objective of this type of learning is to understand one single task to perform
manufacturing process. Focus of this learning is for new recruits both blue collars and white
collars employees. Table 1 below provides summary of type and characteristics of internal
learning mechanism at PMI. Second, learn how to improve manufacturing system. Objective
of this type of learning is to improve better manufacturing system. Main focus is for relatively
mature blue collars employees and well-experienced white collars employees. In particular I
found that development of well-experienced white collars employees could be conducted
through (i) project-based development; (ii) internal and external training and
domestic/overseas seminars/courses; and (iii) on the job training in overseas. Third, learn how
to find problems and solutions. Despite of the first two learning processes, I found the unique
way of learning so-called how to find problems and solutions. This type of learning occurs for
new recruits of white collars employees.
This research also highlightes role of Japanese experts in JV Company. Japanese experts
always remain in JV company as representative of parent company regardless new products,
techniques, or system will be launched or not. They stay for long time usually for 5 years.
Japanese experts sent to JV company has different expertise ranging from electronics,
mechanical and production. The decision to send Japanese experts is depended upon the
strategy that JV will pursue to strengthen the company. For example, if in the first phase, they
decide to strengthen engineering therefore parent company will send senior engineers who
have expertise in engineering. Then, if they decide to strengthen production capacity and
efficiency, therefore parent company will send senior production engineers.
I classify the role of Japanese experts as follows. First, as Advisor, they give advice to the
company regarding particular matters such as engineering and production. Their main job is
firstly to guarantee quality, reliability, and safety of the products or production processes meet
the parent company standard. Second, as window, they teach JV company management as
well as engineers regarding new rules, system, or special requirement as part of parent
company standard. In this case, they act as “bridge” between parent company and JV
company vice versa. Finally as motivatior and mentor, they give motivation to local engineers
to pursue better capability in the future. He tells one of informant about his experience as
Japanese senior engineer including efforts to balance life as employee in Japanese company
and his personal life.
Key Success. Some underlying key success in learning process at PMI as follows:
(1) Good training system particularly with strong determination of managers (factory manager
and HRD manager) to train blue and white collars workers. They conduct unique way of
learning using checking mechanism, learning by finding problems and solutions, creating
“embarrassing” environment for workers. This create strong fundamental of absorptive
capacity ranging from acquiring, assimilating, transforming and exploitation into such
technological capability.
(2) Managers have been successful to motivate workers in human resources development by
applying some principles as follows: (1) Long life learning process to acquire knowledge, not
only from formal school but company as school for the workers; (2) Try to always be in the
good health by regular sports exercises; (3) Discipline; (4) Responsibility; and (5)
Hardworking.
(3) The existence of Japanese experts has created mutual benefits and two-way rounds of
learning both from parent company side and JV company. PMI earned more advanced
techniques, skills and knowledge from parent company while Japanese experts learned about
local knowledge such as culture, languages, and market. Local partner also perform daily
Policy Studies 385

operations and deal with workers’ problems as well as with the government. Both parent and
local partners work together in their own roles.
(4) Successful technology or knowledge transfer is based on principle “willingness to give
from parent, and willingness to learn from local partner”. Matsushita gave opportunity to PMI
to develop product based on their needs and local taste (such as audio products). On the other
hand, PMI has put all their efforts to utilize this opportunity. This contributes to the concept
of absorptive capacity that both foreign and local partner are needed to ensure successful
absorptive capacity.
(5) Being part of group membership, especially as JV, PMI has benefited from world wide
production networks that provide human networking, accumulating experience and
knowledge and sharing testing facilities including R&D facilities.
Keywords
Absorptive capacity, Indonesian firm, Japanese joint venture, knowledge acquisition and
sharing.
Table 1. Internal Learning Mechanisms: Type and Characteristics

Type of To manufacture product To improve manufacturing system To find and solve problems
learning Blue collars White collars Blue collars White collars Blue collars White collars
(operators) (engineers) (operators) (engineers) (operators) (engineers)
What to be One-line Process, routines of Cell-manufacturing Advanced One-line and cell- Process, routines of entire
learned manufacturing entire production system manufacturing manufacturing production system and
system system system, production, system product development
product development
Objective; Able to perform Able to understand Able to perform Able to find more Ability to Ability to understand, to
emphasize one single task ; and capable to multitasks from start to efficient and effective understand simple think, to create better
physical ability perform and final product; increase production routines task in improvement (i.e.
supervise entire productivity or manufacturing increasing productivity,
production process; maintain worker system better quality, reducing
thinking ability productivity production cost etc)
Who New recruits, New recruits, Well-experienced Middle and well- New recruits, permanent employees both operators
high school technical college or operators experienced engineers and engineers
graduate, 20-22 engineering
years old bachelor graduates
When/period First time enter company; probation When the physical 3-4 years after From first time
(3 months) strength decreases, permanent status is enter company
approximately at 40 given and upward (probation) until
years age permanent status is
granted
How/channel General training (during probation), OJT Groups of 4-5 workers Project-based General training Project-based
based on education background development, (during probation), development,
internal/external OJT internal/external training,
training, OJT OJT domestic and foreign
domestic and foreign
Evaluation During probation (presentation Checking mechanism Within each channel During probation; Within each channel
system exam; checking mechanism) checking
mechanism
Trigger Start labor-intensive manufacturing Decreasing physical ability and productivity (specifically for operators) ; pressure from global competition;
process (mainly, low-cost manufacturing) technology advancement
Source: author, based on interviews
References
Creswell, J. W. 1998. Qualitative inquiry and research design: Choosing among five traditions. California: Sage.
Dyer, J. H., & Singh, H. 1998. The relational view: Cooperative strategy and sources of interorganizational
competitive advantage. Academy of Management Review, 23: 660-679.
Eisenhardt, K. 1989. Building theories from case study research. Academy of Management Review, 14: 532-550.
Hong, J. F. L., Easterby-Smith, H., Snell, R. S. 2006. Transferring Organizational Learning Systems to Japanese
Subsidiaries in China. Journal of ManagementStudies, 43: 1027-1058.
Inkpen, A. and Beamish, P. (1997) ‘Knowledge, bargaining power, and the instability of international joint
ventures’, Academy of Management Review, 22(1): 177-202.
Kogut, Bruce and Udo Zander. 1993. “Knowledge of The Firm and The Evolutionary Theory of The Multinational
Corporation”, Journal of International Business Studies, 24, Vol. 4, pp. 625-645.
Lall, S. 1992. Technological capabilities and industrialization. World Development, 20: 165-186.
Lane, P. J., Salk, J. E., & Lyles, M. A. 2001. Absorptive capacity, learning, and performance in international joint
ventures. Strategic Management Journal, 22: 1139-1161.
Lyles, M. A. and Salk, J. E. (1996) ‘Knowledge acquisition from foreign parents in international joint ventures’,
Journal of International Business Studies, 27(5): 877-904.
Mursitama, T.N. 2006. Creating relational rents: The effects of business groups on affiliated firms’ performance in
Indonesia. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 23: 537-557.
Xie, W., & Wu, G. 2003. Differences between learning process in small tigers and large dragons: Learning
processes of two color TV (CTV) firms within China. Research Policy, 32: 1463-1479.
Yin, R. K. 1994. Case Study Research: Design and Methods, Second Edition. London: Sage.
Zahra, S. A. and George, G. (2002) ‘Absorptive capacity: A review, reconceptualization, and extension’, Academy
of Management Review, 27(2): 185-2003.
Policy Studies 386

Implementing social control at the Jakarta Public Library

Author : Laksmi1*
Sponsor : Faculty of Humanities, 2008
Email Contact : laksmi@ui.ac.id
Disseminated at : Internasional Symposium on Emerging Trends and Technology for
Libraries and Information Services, Jaypee Institute of Information
Technology University, Noida, India, 18-20 December 2008
(Proceeding published by KBD Publications; Editors, Sanjay
Kataria, B.S. Nigam, Rama Kant Shukla; ISBN 978-81-907999-0-4;
in 2009, p. 474-489)
1
Department of Library and Information Sciences, Faculty of Humanities, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
Introduction
In Indonesia, social control is necessary to handle the performance of employee’s daily work.
At the Jakarta Public Library (JPL), it has been implementing control system more and more
tightly. Basically, social control is referred to the capacity of society to regulate itself
according to desired principles, values, rules, and norms (Janowitz, 1975).
The main research question: why do social controls do not work properly, even though the
system is well organized? It contains two questions: 1) what are the symbolic forms of social
control at the JPL? 2) how is the implementation of process of social control? The research,
January 2007 to July 2008, uses ethnography method. All the informants’s names are
disguised. The aim is to understand the implementation process of social control that has less
impact to employees behavior in conduct the tasks.
The Condition of the Jakarta Public Library
The role of JPL, 30 years old (1978-2008), is serving public and government offices in
information. Based on Government District vision, the JPL vision is to create modern public
library in which Jakarta society as a smart and prestige reader. JPL manage six municipality
branches, including Kepulauan Seribu Regency Public Library and public library at 124 unit
of 267 Political District Administered by Lurahs at Jakarta. The library members which are
around thirty thousand is limited for people who lives in Jabodetabek. The organization hold
18.289 titles and 43.356 exemplars. It hold competitions for teenagers to increase reading
habits, such as competition of story telling, composing synopsis, book discussions, training of
writing, etc. Usually, those are held at the Jakarta City Celebration Day, 22 June, and
Independence Day of Republik Indonesia, 17 August. The library is open from 9 a.m. to 8
p.m., from Monday to Sunday, with 66 staff, consisting of 55 civil servants and 11 contract
staff.
The form of symbolic social control
a. Rules and rewards. The value of rules and rewards is fairly balanced. The Head makes
many rules, but she also gives rewards and sanctions. She spends her own money every
month to buy some small presents for staff who come on time and do their job properly. She
tends to focus on psychologycal aspect which is not aimed to scare people, but to warn the
employees who are considered to make mistake.
b. Logogram. It consists of an eye, with an open book and globe as a background is made
sense as inviting people to read. Curve lines vertically means stability, strenghts, glorious, and
elegant. The figure of open book reflects human ideas, and the eye reflects the window where
we can give world view. Logogram describes as an educational institution, but not
correspondence to the values of employees.
c. Layout of the furniture and room. The employees of Division of Secretariat feel most
important that Division of services, because they deal with organization life and continuity
Policy Studies 387

and carrier. Furthermore, the chair of leader in the meeting room has high lean in the bag and
located on the front and many doors locked, they show that social relation is not in harmony
and no mutual trust. The whole office layout reflects the domination of power.
d. Ritual. At the JPL, the forms are calling for readiness, Korpri, religious activities, sport,
arisan, a tour to out of town, and sarasehan. Eventhough the Head motivates employees to
speak up, discuss, and solve their problems at workplace at rituals, the employees belief from
the emperical experiences and knowledge that as an eastern community, instead of revealing
other disgrace or criticizing supervisor in public, they prefer to remain silent.
e. Directly observation. She sometimes goes around to observe performance of the
employee’s daily tasks, and comes to participate in shelving. She has caught with surprise
some employees chatting, smoking, and taking a nap at kitchen, at working hours. By directly
observing, she is trying to provide the best attitude or real model to employees, and to inform
that they always have to be aware, and remain to work with or without her absent.
The process of construction the organizational culture
The emerging the need of control. The process begins from the result from interactions, then
individual can see, feel, and know; she/he will compare it to her/his own experience,
knowledge, and values. Based on the framework of thinking, there comes an expectation of
‘what should be’ to do (Hatch, 1993). Firstly, the Head found that the order of book on the
shelves that are not arranged sistematically and some books vanished. Secondly, she finds that
employees service people unproperly; they can not answer the questions of the number of
books, the number of books borowed per month, and which user is the most frequent borrow
the books; some employees behave unmannered, and care less to users.
Socialization. There is transformation values through the forms of symbolic control. In order
to socialize it, she always reminds the importance of a book and reading book. On the other
hand, employees see book just like an object to be collected, processed, and preserved, then
put in order at the shelves. Public services is understood as administration: registration,
processing books, and watching the lockers and user’s behavior. Social values, such as taking
care user’s emotional, listening user’s complaints, and so forth, are ignored. The system trial
and error is more dominant comparing to the system of work which is more learned carefully.
Moreover, employees seem to depend on employers, wait for instructions, and they are
considered as an object, which does not have power or rights to do an action and make
decision. Employers limit the freedom of employees in taking action. Between them, there is
a conflict of interest. Both of them are not able to understand the consequences of the process.
Implementation. She always socializes it at sarasehan. Because employees always remain
silent, employers consider the employees as incompetent, know nothing, can not motivate
themselves, have poor work ethic, passive, and not appreciate what they earn much more
money compared to other districts. The head of secretariat uses words ‘to develop and make
them accustomed’ and ‘employees need superordinate’s guidance.’ Moreover, employees
need attention, caring, presence, and greeting from employers, especially when they are
working hard.
Response of employees
The response is divided into resistances and acceptance as below:
Resistances. 1) Complaining behind. Employers complain that employees need supervision
all the time, and employees complain on feeling of being underestimated. 2) Not cooperative.
Most of them prefer not to be presence at meeting, because they think that their voice will not
be heard after all. 3) Making gossip. Employees need to share their experiences or feeling, to
find justification and support, talking about the behavior of their employers as negative. 4)
Mutation. Many employees think that is better to move to the district. Public libraries at the
district do not implement the tight absent system.
Acceptation and creation of new values. When employees accept the social control process, it
enables the friction of values. Oganization expects the values of commitment, discipline, after
all, the appropriate way of perform in order to achive the goals. Few of employees accept the
social control in mannered way. They obey the employers and perform appropriately their
tasks, because they have a hope that employers will pay back their efforts.
Policy Studies 388

Conclusion
The patriarchal culture that already exists in the Indonesian society cause a value of respect
and obey to employers. This condition creates symbolic forms of control social in the
suppresive form, dominated by authority of the leaders. The employers, who conduct
hyerarchical system, do not involve employees, neither negociate how to work which is in
accordance with employee’s expectation and belief. There is lack of mutual trust. Therefore,
the response of employees tend to shows more resistances than acceptation. They want to
show that employees are not the weak and passive object, but they are active subjects who are
able to decide whether they will accept or reject the social control to achieve the best
performance. They also see that the level of knowledge of employers on library and
information is almost the same with them. Moreover, they are not able to do the good services
because they do not learn the importance of the servives. They understand the library services
as administration work.
Keywords
Organizational cultures, resistances, symbols, social control, values.
References
Aihwa Ong. (1987) Spirits of resistance and capitalist discipline: factory women in Malaysia. New York: State
University of New York Press.
Anthropology of organizations. (1994) Edited by Susan Wright. London: Routledge.
Baliga, B. R., and Alfred M. Jaeger. (1984) “Multinational Corporations: Control Systems and Delegation Issues.”
Journal of International Business Studies, 15, no. 2, Special Issue on Strategic Planning, Autonomy and
Control Processes in Multinational Corporations, (Autumn, 1984): 25-40. http://www.jstor.org/stable/154230.
Blumer, Herbert. (1969) Symbolic interactionism: perspective and method. Berkeley: Univ. of California Press,
Brophy, Peter. (2001) The library in the twenty-first century: new services for the information age. London:
Library Association Publishing.
Budd, John W. (1996) “The organizational culture of the research university: implications for LIS education.”
Journal of Education for Library and Information Science, 37, no. 2 (1996): 154-162.
Buku panduan: pengembangan budaya organisasi mendukung Jakarta sebagai kota layanan unggul (Jakarta as a
service city). (2005) Jakarta: The Jakarta Consulting Group.
Etzioni, Amitai. (1964) Modern organizations. (Foundations of Modern Sociology Series). New Jersey: Prentice-
Hall.
Geertz, Clifford. The interpretation of culture: selected essays. New York: Basic Books, 1973.
Goffman, Erving. (2002) Relations in public: microstudies of the public order. New York: Harper Colophon
Books, 1971.
Gottfried, Heidi. (1991) “Mechanisms of control in the temporary help service industry.” Sociological Forum, 6,
no. 4, (Dec., 1991): 699-713. http://www.jstor.org/stable/684413.
Hatch, Mary Jo. (1997) Organization theory: modern, symbolic, and postmodern perspectives. New York: Oxford
University Press.
Janowitz, Morris. (1975) “Sociological theory and social control.” The American Journal of Sociology, 81, no. 1,
(July, 1975): 82-108. http://www.jstor.org/stable/2777055.
Laporan akuntabilitas kinerja instansi pemerintah (LAKIP). (2005) Jakarta: Kantor Perpumda Prov. DKI Jakarta.
Prasad, Pushkala. (1993) “Symbolic processes in the implementation of technological change: a symbolic
interactionist. Study of work computerization.” The Academy of Management Journal, 36, No. 6, (Dec., 1993):
1400-1429. http://www.jstor.org/stable/256817.
Sutarno, NS. (2003) Seperempat abad Perpustakaan Umum Pemerintah Provinsi DKI Jakarta, 1978-2003.
Jakarta: Pustaka Sinar Harapan.
Trice, Harrison M., and Janice M. Beyer. (1993) The cultures of work organizations. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Tucker, James. (1993) “Everyday Forms of Employee Resistance.” Sociological Forum, 8, no. 1, (March, 1993):
25-45. http://www.jstor.org/stable/684283.
UNESCO. (1994) Manifesto Perpustakaan Umum.
Policy Studies 389

Information dissemination focused on face to face interaction: A case

study of news library in television
Author : Ike Iswary Lawanda1*
Email contact : lawanda62@yahoo.com; iswari@ui.edu
Disseminated at : Proceeding of IcoASL conference 2008

1
Department of Library Science and Information Faculty of Humanities (FIB), Universitas Indonesia Kampus UI
Depok 16424. Indonesia Tel/Fax No.: 62 21 787 2353
Introduction
The library of news section television station is an entity in the system of television station as
an organization system that function as a resource of information dissemination for producing
news being broadcasted which is the substantive task of a television station organization. The
urgency of this research is to indicate that information dissemination considered as a product
of relation between interaction and working activities of individuals in the function of news
producing in the organization system. The library becomes the headwater as well as the
mouth-river of the whole internal and external information productions flow. Information and
individuals in this entity mutually interdependence connected in the commitment of the need
of every individual working assignment. As an input occurred from a requirement that makes
information is under responsibility of the role management of librarians in managing the
whole information of the news production function. Production of news as a substantive work
in television station creates a position of library as central especially its dissemination of
information. Librarians are responsible to creating channels for information to be able to
fulfill the demand and requirement news producing in line. Channels of information between
librarians and news producers become primary through effective and efficient interaction then
news produced accurately.
Therefore, this paper is to show that information dissemination focuses on face to face
focused interaction starting with introduction to provide frame of work, followed by concept
of information dissemination in news library RCTI then the implication of face to face
interaction in news library RCTI ends with conclusion.
Method
In order to get an accurate understanding about the process and policy of information
dissemination and interaction between librarians and users in Indonesia television broadcast
that is Rajawali Citra Televisi Indonesia (RCTI) the method of structuralism is applied. The
method of functional structuralism treats information dissemination as a cultural product in its
context as a mediator of constituents relevant. Actors related in the context of information
disseminated posited important in each role.

In this research it shows the process of dissemination of information focuses on face to face
interaction becomes the primary in the unit of news producing in RCTI television station.
Among other channels are telephone, internal mail, collection requirement form and fax
always of and for focused and unfocused interaction. The library and librarians in information
dissemination take the position of dominant function in the organization as its function to
provide users in specialized field with access to information and collections not available in
public and university libraries.
A group exists in simply saying as a product of abilities to behave morally or the ability to
inspect each other of their actions. Ervin Goffman argues this pheomena as the order of
interaction (1983): a set of product produce by the application or performance of rules or
working action in a certain area which affect every one in touch within the environment. In
Policy Studies 390

other word, wherever we are with other people form and direct our our actions by rules and
understanding comprehended collectively actually aroused from demands in interaction.
Interactional demands and prerequisites may be summarized within 2 categories: the
informational and the ritual. When we interact we have desires to get information relevant to
or in the context of mood, purpose, mutual trust, and reliability on other persons. It is
necessary in order practical goals can be achieved such as answering questions, making
promises with persons needed, getting direction). However, the important also is to give
attention on ritual matters such give attentions and expression and control of emotion that
show respect to ourselves and care of others as we have taken their times with questions.
The need of information and ritual in interaction in reality interchained every aspect in such
interesting ways and keep in its context. The kind of condition works in control in the
dissemination of informatiom by librarians in news library of Rajawali Citra Televisi
Indonesia (a television broadcast in Indonesia). The role of librarians as a source of
information in news making by journalists, news anchors and editors work with the interest
and based on content and context. Each party needs the understanding of each other to
convey content of interaction well sent and received by each party without diturbing every
party of existence. Hierarchy in the organization structure can not be neglected because
hierarchy directs interaction amongst individuals moreover in face to face interaction. News
library is a core in the organization system of RCTI and functions as resource of information
for the making of news as an essential task in television broadcast.
Conclusion
In conclusion, I have the construction on the face to face focused interaction in the process of
dissemination information amongst news producers and librarians provides as the mediator of
information provided in the library and information needed by the news producers. In this
case librarians have the frame of thinking as news producers that make them special as the
representation of librarians of special library.
Keywords
Interpretative, service, quality, understanding, value.
References
Lancaster F.W. Information retrieval systems: characteristics, testings, and evaluation. New York: John Wiley &
Sons, 1978.
Rubin, R.E. Foundations of library and information science. London, New York: Neil-Schuman Publishers, 1998.
Basuki S., Lawanda I.I., Hariyadi U.B., Laksmi. Perpustakaan dan informasi dalam konteks budaya. Depok:
Departemen Ilmu Perpustakaan dan Informasi Fakultas Ilmu Pengetahuan Budaya Universitas Indonesia, 2006.
Whatmore G. The Modern news library: documentation in current affairs in newspaper and broadcasting libraries.
London: Library Association, 1978.
Policy Studies 391

International environment protection during armed conflict. Case

study: Israel-Lebanon conflict
Staff : A. Afriansyah1
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : Journal of Law and Development, Faculty of Law Universitas
Indonesia, 38th edition, No.1, January-March 2008
1
Transnational Law Department, Faculty of Law, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
In the last ten decades, many armed conflicts have occurred among peoples and states.
Generally speaking, at the beginning, people were only concerned to human as the victim of
war. However, as the growing concern in international community to the environmental
damage which have great impact to human life, people are now more aware of the war effect
to the environment. Some had argued that the environment was frequently both being the
victim and a tool of armed conflict. There are many examples of war which have great impact
to environment. These include the Persian Gulf War in 1990, the Kosovo conflict in 1999,
and the conflict between Israel-Lebanon (Hezbollah). The latter conflict will be the focus of
this essay.
Before discussing a detail description of the environmental problem from the Israel-Lebanon
(Hezbollah) conflict, the essay will begins with brief description of international legal
protections of the environment during the armed conflict as the basis of analysis in
international law in general and international environmental law in particular. In the
following, this essay will describe the Israel-Lebanon (Hezbollah) conflict as a case study that
had a result of environmental damages. Having given all the facts, it then examines whether
the conflict had conducted under international law and tries to seek out state’s responsibility
of environmental damages that have been produced by the conflict.
Environmental Damage from Jiyyeh’s Oil Spill and Naftali Forest Fire
In early July 2006, Hezbollah’s armed force, in small raid in Lebanon’s border with Israel,
was kidnapping two Israeli soldiers as the respond to Israel occupation in southern Lebanon.
Israel warned Hezbollah to surrender its soldiers but Hezbollah refused it. Israel sends their
missiles to Hezbollah’s main assets and infrastructure in Lebanon territory such as Beirut and
southern part of Lebanon. One of its targets was power supply to the government which was
petrol station. This mission was the starting point to which the environmental damage was
happened.
Between 13 and 15 July 2006, Israel attacked the Jiyyeh’s power station which located 30 km
south of Beirut. Approximately 10.000 tonnes of heavy oil were spilled into Mediterranean
Sea. Some reports suggest that the actual number could 35.000 tonnes of heavy oil. While
local environmental groups claimed that the oil slick as an “environmental disaster” which
could be compared with the 1989 Exxon Valdez tanker incident in Alaska. Furthermore,
UNEP (United Nations for Environmental Programme) stated that this incident was a
significant threat to some Mediterranean wildlife.
Besides the oil spill, environmental impact during the conflict was also experienced by Israel
when Hezbollah’s rockets hit forests and fields across northern Israel. According to Michael
Weinberger, the forest supervisor for the Jewish National Fund, the top administrator of
Israel’s forests, the rocket fire has destroyed 16.500 acres of forests and grazing fields. These
fires have threatened the ecosystem of the forest.
Policy Studies 392

Legal Consequences of the Conflict

In discussing legal consequences from this conflict especially to the impact of the
environment, there are two broad analyses in which recognised in international law
concerning the laws of war. These broad analyses are determination of the legality use of
force by the conflicting parties and justification factors i.e. necessity and proportionality. It
can be argued that these discussion lead to the conclusion of which whether there is breach of
international law especially to legal protection to the environment and whether the two
conflicting States could be placed as the responsible parties of the environmental damages.
Legality Use of Force

It is clear that both Israel and Hezbollah justify their action based on self-defence reason
under Article 51 UN Charter. Article 51 recognises that the inherent right of individual or
collective self-defence if an armed attack occurs against a Member of the United Nations. It is
clear that action of self-defence is justified if an “armed attack” occurs. The ICJ, in its
judgement in the Nicaragua case, determined that “armed attack” is including “action by
regular armed forces across an international border and the sending by/on behalf of a state of
armed bands, irregulars, mercenaries which carry out acts of such gravity as to amount to an
actual armed attack by regular forces – or its substantial involvement therein”. It is obvious to
note from the word “occurs” that the armed attack begins not until a state’s territory is
affected.
It can be argued that Israel’s justification of its action was flawed under Article 51.
Hezbollah’s military raid, of which claimed by Israeli government as an armed attack, was
took place within the Lebanon’s territory and outside Israel’s territory where there is no
significant implication. It also clear that there was no sending of armed bands by/on behalf of
neither Hezbollah nor Lebanese government to Israel. In the other side, Hezbollah, in
representing the government, had a clear justification of self-defence when Israeli missiles
were launched into Lebanese territory.
Justification Factors: Necessity and Proportionality

During the armed conflict, the conflicting parties are required to take into account of their
actions based on necessity and proportionality assessments. This statement was considered as
international customary law and reaffirmed by the ICJ in its judgement and advisory opinion.
These are also applied not only to actions which will influence human but also to the
environment. Given the main protection rules in the Protocol I to the Geneva Conventions of
1949 and the ENMOD convention, States are obliged not to use its military force which might
lead to cause widespread, long-term and/or severe damage to the environment.
From the facts above, it can be argued that both Israel and Lebanon (Hezbollah) violate
international law in protecting the environment during their military conflict. This was
because Israel and Hezbollah intentionally attack power station and forest respectively in
which both of them caused a cause widespread, long-term and/or severe damage to the
environment. Therefore, Israel and Lebanon have violated the protection rules in Protocol I
and the ENMOD convention.
Finally, it can be argued that, based on the principle of State Responsibility, both Israel and
Lebanon are liable for paying compensations in order to redress all the environmental
damages as the result of the conflict. This obligation emerges from Article 3 of Hague
Convention IV and Article 91 of Additional Protocol I. Compensation is a mean of peaceful
settlement which had been practiced by States for over a century. One of the clear example of
this application was in the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf War where the UNCC became the
independent body to receive and manage for claims as the result of the conflict.
Conclusion
It is important to note that, because of armed conflict experiences, the international
community has tried to protect the environment through conventional and customary
international laws. However, until these days, if an armed conflict occurs, the environment
Policy Studies 393

continues to suffer and no individual has been charged with an environmental crime. There
are many reasons for this condition such as ambiguity in the elements of the acts which
constitute a war crime to the environment because of political sensitivities such as victor’s
justice and global social value system that allows environmental crimes to be overshadowed
by humanitarian atrocities.
It is clear that armed conflicts cause destruction on different kinds of victims, but
unfortunately when the victim is the environment, perpetrators walk off without punishment.
However, it is important to argue that legal consequences for those who cause environmental
damage should be attached to deter the acts and remedy damage in maximum efforts. Then, it
is significant to say that the State’s responsibility is incur under international law if the armed
forces of the State cause damage to the environment of other States by violating the laws of
armed conflict.
Keywords
Armed conflict, environment protection, international environmental law, state responsibility.
References
Frank, Joshua, “Kidnapped in Israel or Captured in Lebanon? Official Justification for Israel’s Invasion on Thin
Ice”, July 22, 2006 <http://www.antiwar.com/frank/>, (accessed August 25, 2006).
Greenwood, Christopher, “State Responsibility and Civil Liability for Environmental Damage Caused by Military
Operations” in Protection of the Environment During Armed Conflict, eds. Richard J. Grunawalt, John E. King
and Ronald S. McClain, volume 69, (Newport RI: Naval War College, 1996).
Kiss, Alexandre & Dinah Shelton, International Environmental Law (London: Graham and Trotman, 1991).
Roberts, Adam, “Implementation of the Laws of War in Late 20th-Century Conflicts”, Security Dialogue 29(2)
(1998).
Stone, Christopher D., “The Environment in Wartime: An Overview”, in The Environmental Consequences of
War: Legal, Economic, and Scientific Perspectives, eds. Jay E. Austin and Carl E. Bruch, (Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 2000).
Weinstein, Tara, “Prosecuting Attacks that Destroy the Environment: Environmental Crimes or Humanitarian
Atrocities?” Georgetown International Environmental Law Review 17(4) (2005).
Policy Studies 394

On productivity performance gains of Indonesian Firms

Staff : Viverita1, M. Ariff2*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Email Contact : viverita@fe.ui.ac.id; mariff@bond.edu.au
Disseminated at : International Journal of Managerial Finance (2008) 34 (9)
1
Department of Management, Faculty of Economics, Universitas Indonesia
2
Faculty of Business, Bond University, Australia
Introduction
This study compares the productivity performance gains of public-sector and private-sector
firms in Indonesia over a recent 10-year period that includes four years of economic reforms
by IMF. The motivations for this investigation are: to determine if private sector firms were
more or less or equally efficient during the observation periods, by measuring gains in
performance; and identify performance differences, if any, in the two sectors. The novel idea
here is to use total factor productivity measure instead of the entrenched but increasingly-
questionable financial performance measures so far used in performance studies. In particular,
non-conventional firms such as state firms (or even Islamic banks versus conventional banks,
where such variables as profits and interest costs/revenues) do not lend themselves for
comparison across different forms of organisations, our proposed method of analysis is very
well suited, and yields accurate results, besides identifying the slack in efficiency against the
capacity potential.
This study employed Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) and Malmquist Indices to consider
the efficiency of samples of firms, and also examined productivity change after the financial
crisis. The results show that both public and private sector firms experienced productivity
declines during the study period. The declines were primarily due to technological regression,
which arose from the inability of firms to adopt newer and better technology, we assume,
given the scarcity and high cost of capital in the economy particularly after the financial
crisis. The state sector firms were suffering more on these grounds than their private
counterparts, perhaps because of the entrenched monopoly positions of some private firms.
However, there was a catching-up effect in both sectors over time during the eleven-year
study period.
The efficiency of Indonesian firms
The important aspect in evaluating firm’s performance is its performance gains over time. In
the case of Indonesian firms, since public and private sector firms cover different purposes,
therefore they are different in various management styles and regulations, which often lead to
different goals and thus performance differences. Given the current thinking widely
disseminated in the literature about how to assess the performance of economic entities,
performance of the state enterprises has been measured according to the same criteria as that
of a private sector firm. There appears to be two separate lines of assessment in practice,
which is patently wrong-footed as measures such as profits (example return on equity) are
biased against finding efficiency of state firms since the state firms are organised without the
objective of profits, although it can be said that both state and private firms must recover all
costs. That is, the before-tax profits must be equal to zero for state firms to be financially
efficient as such firms are required to earn a rate of return on investment. The accounting-
financial performance applied by accountants and financial professionals is based on the very
old returns on capital and cost of sales measures (or some variants of these measures. We
assume this approach to be a wrong research process. The other measures increasingly
gaining attention is based on the production efficiency literature based on some variant of
Policy Studies 395

Cobb-Douglas Production Function, and addresses the performance issue without considering
profits.
Method, data and sample

This study measures firm’s efficiency performance as its productivity, which is based on its
activity of converting inputs into outputs. Performance is to be measured as productivity
ratios, which is the ratio of outputs to inputs. The larger ratio is associated with a better
performance, showing increasing returns to scale. However, the term performance here is a
relative concept, which means that it could be measured relative to the previous year or
relative to the performance of other firms. Employing data envelopment analysis Malmquist
indices follows Fare et al. (1994).
In order to calculate the firm’ efficiency analysis, inputs and outputs must be specified. The
specific data items used in this study are: total assets, sales, and earning before interest and
tax (EBIT) as outputs, data on production factors such as material used, labour cost and
capital cost. These data are expressed in nominal monetary value in a country with a high
inflation. Thus, data are adjusted for inflation (Ma et al. (2002; 298-312)), using the
Consumer Price Index (CPI) with base year as 1993 prices, to obtain the real values. The
theory of firm suggests that firms’ aim to create value, which is total assets; maximise sales;
and create an annual value, which is net income. Since SOEs often do not have profitability
objective, a practical variable is to consider operating income (EBIT) as another output. EBIT
is used to replace net income or earning before tax, considering SOEs are not always required
to make profit from their operations and these firms are also supported with state funds so
these do not incur huge interest costs.
Findings
This section reports our results on production efficiency performance of SOEs and PSEs. The
output-orientated constant return to scale formulation is used to compute the Malmquist index
for 141 firms comprising two samples respectively. Coelli (1998; p. 43) notes that the
CRS/VRS options have no influence on the Malmquist DEA because both are used to
calculate the various production frontier distances using the Malmquist Indexes. Summary of
statistics on annual efficiency change, technical change, and total factor productivity (TFP) of
all firms as well as for each sector.
The results show the annual average of technical efficiency changes, technical changes, and
TFP changes of all firms. The results described here are based on the full set of 141 matched
firms with the following inputs and outputs. The inputs measure used are material cost (input
1), labour cost (2) and depreciation expenses (3) The last item is a proxy for capital input,
while the outputs are total assets (output1), net sales (2), and earning before interest and tax
(EBIT, the no. 3 output).
The results of the Malmquist productivity measures show that there is productivity
improvements in Indonesian firms, which is primarily due to the use of technology, which is
the use of new technology made possible by increased use of capital especially by the private
sector firms in the test period. Deprived of capital because of budget constraints, the state
firms sought and made improvements in efficiency rather than technology. However, if the
firms are separated as public and private firms, instead of improvement, there was a
productivity decline in both sectors over the whole period, which includes four years of
industrial reforms over 1998-2001. The evidence shows that the decline is caused mostly by
technological regression, despite smaller efficiency gains in both sectors during the study
period. The results are the first to measure performance of corporations using, in our opinion,
a bias-free measure of total factor productivity and its components. In some regard, these
results are not merely robust, but are also tested appropriately to establish statistical support
for the conclusions that the performance of both sectors are broadly similar statistically,
although in index value terms private firms are marginally more efficient.
As mentioned in other sections of this paper, these results can be highlighted to show how the
method of performance attribution of state versus private firms can be easily applied to the
Policy Studies 396

study of conventional banks versus Islamic financial firms. Given the non-comparability of
key financial ratios and variables traditionally used for study of Indonesian firms, the ready
comparability of technical, efficiency and total factory productivity changes across the firms
enables a valid comparison to be made, which we recommend for the study of Indonesian
Islamic bank performance as well since the Islamic banks share the same dissimilar
characteristics as does the state versus private firms.
Keywords
Data envelopment analysis, production efficiency, Indonesia, Malmquist indices.
References
Coelli, T.J et al. An Introduction to Efficiency and Productivity Analysis. Boston; Dodrecht;London: Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 1998.
Coelli, T.J. A Guide to Frontier Version 4.1: A Computer Program for Stochastic Frontier Production and Cost
Function Estimation Center for Efficiency and Productivity Analysis (CEPA) Working Papers]. Department of
Econometrics University of New England, 1996 [cited May 2002. Available from
http://www.une.edu.au/econometrics/cepawp.htm.
Fare, Rolf; Grosskopf, Shawna and Margaritis, Dimitri. "Productivity Trends in Australian and New Zealand
Manufacturing." The Australian Journal of Economic Review 34, no. 2 (2001): 125-34.
Ma, Jinlong, Evans, David G. and Stewart, Donald F. "Technical Efficiency and Productivity of China's Iron and
Steel Industry." International Journal of Production Economics 76 (2001): 293-312.
Policy Studies 397

Ownership reform: Does it matter? A study of privatization of

Indonesia’s state-owned enterprises (BUMN)
Staff : Viverita1*
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : One-day Conference on A Quest for Development Paradigms in
Indonesia: Micro and Managerial Perspectives. The Institute of
South East Asian Studies (ISEAS), Singapore 6 March 2008
1
Introduction
State-owned Enterprises (BUMN) were considered special in Indonesia, besides receiving
subsidies from the government in the form of capital participation, they also supporting the
economy through their contribution to national income. The existence of Indonesia’s state-
owned enterprises (SOEs, hereafter BUMN) can be traced to the Dutch colonial government,
which started the BUMN in the late nineteenth and at the beginning of Twentieth centuries.
The Article 33 of the country’s constitution also gave a legal foundation for the takeover of
these Dutch companies. However, as oil prices began to decline in the early 1980s, the
BUMN subsidies as well as their contribution reduced. The decline continued during and after
the Asian economic crisis that riddled Indonesia since 1998. This situation led to a substantive
reform of the BUMN, resulting in a policy of self-financing as had occurred for example
during 1984 in Vietnam. Therefore, BUMN in the recent decade have to secure good
economic outcomes, high financial and productivity performance to be able to sustain them.
To achieve these goals, the Indonesian government had launched a privatization policy by
selling part of government ownership in some of BUMN through public offerings and private
placements. However, some evidence indicated that so far, there no significant change
BUMN performance of the privatized firms. Therefore, this paper aims to analyze whether the
government policy to privatize some of state firms (BUMN) was a suitable policy to be made,
or maybe there is such proper strategy could be chosen.
Therefore, this paper aims to evaluate whether the government policy to privatize some of
BUMN in order to improve their contributions and performance was achieved, or maybe there
is such proper strategy could be chosen before selling it to the private sector.
The Privatization Theory

Privatization is one of external change that can motivate internal change, such as corporate
strategy which influences firm performance. The examples of internal changes are
management turnover and corporate governance practice. Management turnover bring new
skills and new capabilities to the firms as they did not have these before implementing
privatization program. This practice makes the changes in strategy, structure, and culture
which is affecting the firm’ ability to gain profit maximization and shareholder value creation.
Privatization of SOEs was regarded as an important means to introduce efficiency. In general,
there are three reasons for the implementation of privatization policy: (1) reducing the
government role in business, by promoting competition to increase efficiency and
productivity; (2) generating new sources of cash flow and self-financing for state-owed
enterprises - SOEs, by promoting foreign direct investment, and deepening domestic equity
market; and (3) reducing the government financial deficits, by reducing fiscal transfer to
SOEs and increasing tax revenues through the higher profits to be generated by privatized
firms after privatization (Edited by Lieberman and Kirkness (1998)). In addition, privatization
reduces the state control over the SOEs and increase control of private investors ((Bishop, et
al., 1994).
Policy Studies 398

Privatization and BUMN performance

The economic crisis of 1997/1998 led to a substantive reform of the State-owned Enterprises
(In Indonesia: BUMN), resulting in a policy of self-financing policy. Therefore, BUMN in the
recent decade have to secure good economic outcomes, high financial and productivity
performance to be able to sustain them. The research issue then is: Is the BUMN performance
satisfactory under these reforms? Whether privatization was an accurate policy to enhance
BUMN performance and its contribution to the national economy?
Until 2006, there were 12 out of 139 BUMN have been listing at the stock exchanges, the rest
still under controlled and owned by the government of Indonesia. Looking at the activities of
those BUMN, most of them are firms that establish to provide essential products and services.
In terms of returns on asset (ROA) of the five categories of BUMN, i.e.: financial, non-
financial, Pertamina (the oil producer), BUMN with financial support and privatized firms. It
shows that on average, Pertamina has the highest ROA, while on average BUMN with
financial support from the government has the opposite. In addition, those BUMN gained the
highest ROA in 2005. In addition, the return on equity (ROE) of the BUMN for all categories
shown that on average, publicly-owned (privatized) firms have the highest ROE (36.66 %),
whilst BUMN with financial support from the government have the lowest ones (0.82%).
This is an interesting phenomenon that those privatized BUMN achieved the highest return
for their investors. This can be assumed that privatization policy may increase the BUMN
ability to improve their performance. It implies that control by the independent investors lead
to a better performance.
Performance of the BUMN can also be seen form the profit earned and the number of
unperformed BUMN. This achievement is also indicated by a significant growth of their
contribution in the form of dividends, tax payment to the government, and capital flows to
small and medium enterprises except from the profit from privatization. It is shown that the
average contribution from 2002 to 2006 was 27.72 percent, and dominated by contribution in
the form of tax payment. According to the literature, state-owned enterprises broadly
experienced poor efficiency performance compared with private sector firms. Thus,
privatization has been shown to have led to efficiency improvement in several countries
(Megginson et al. (1994); Boyco, Schleifer and Vishny (1996); Megginson and Netter (2001);
Boubakri and Cosset (1998); and Lo (1999)). Evidence about inefficiency and lower
profitability relative to the private firms can be found in the studies of Dewenter and
Malatesta (2001) and Boardman and Vinning (1989).
In addition, examining the comparative financial performance between the SOEs and PSEs in
each industry reveals that public sector firms in the two industries (industrial and mining
industry and properties) have better returns and profit performance than private sector firms.
This evidence can also be indicative of the fact that state firms in this industry have been
financially supported by the government, and have also operated in a protected market.
In summarize, the unsatisfied performance of Indonesia’s BUMN after beeing privatized
might be for some reasons. Firstly, the objective of privatization of BUMN was mainly to
help the government in fulfiling the government financial deficits. Therefore, this kind of an
urgent and short-term objective made the government as the policy maker did not have much
time to seek the potential investors who offer better transaction prices and set a lower price on
the right issues than it sould be to the private investors. As the results, there were many cases
that privatization of BUMN could not provide an optimal sales revenue for the government
(Yusuf, 2006 and Sunarsip, 2007). Secondly, BUMN was established to produce essential
services as ports, printing, transportation and basic commodities. Such firms were and are still
mandated to produce a large amount of outputs, in areas where the private sector is unable to
provide the capital and organisational framework needed for large-scale production Based on
that, the government ownership of the BUMN represents society (people) ownership of these
firms. Therefore, the government has to consider the people’s view for every decisions and
policies made upon the BUMN. However, much of the privatization policy was made based
on political consideration without taking into account the DPR’s view on the policy. This
situation makes every implementation of privatization policy a debatable decision. Such
Policy Studies 399

sircumatances, actualy can be reduced by giving a clear information of the privatization

program to the management as well as to the public, that it will not be painful to the society
but benefits to increasing their wealth.Thirdly, another factor that can caused unsatisfied
performance of BUMN after the privatization is the performance of BUMN it self before and
at the time it was sold to the private investors. Most of BUMN sold experienced poor
financial and efficiency performances. In some cases, there were a lot of unqualified
managerial staff can be found in the management, as well as high cost of capital that limit
BUMN effort to expand their businesses.
Based on those conclusions, some alternative solutions can be considered in implementing
privatization policy to BUMN. For example, the privatization policy need to be well informed
and socialized to the society (the people representatives, management of BUMN) before
implement it. This can reduce the asymmetric information of the policy between the decision
maker and the sociesty as general. Furthermore, the implementation of privatization policy
should taking into account the current performance of the BUMN to be privatized. It might be
favorable if selling the firm when it has a good performance. Therefore, the government need
to select, which BUMN is ready to privatized and would give maximum benefits to the public
and at the same time be able to help fulfilling financial deficits. Moreover, to be able to secure
optimum revenues from the sale of an outstanding BUMN, the government could sell the firm
after improving its performance and profitability. In addition, to avoid underpricing IPO of
the BUMN the government could consider other alternative in selling BUMN shares as
follows. Stage one, the underperformed BUMN intended to privatized can be sold to such an
institution owned by the government. This institution have a responsibility to improve its
performance until it ready to sell with a proper price to private investors at the second stage.
Keywords
Efficiency, privatization, productivity, state-owned enterprises.
References
Anwar, M. Arsjad. Strategi Pembiayaan & Regrouping Bumn : Upaya Menciptakan Sinergi Dalam Rangka
Peningkatan Daya Saing Bumn. Edited by Setiono Yuli Pranoto Toto, Nggao Ferdy. Jakarta: Lembaga
Manajemen FEUI, 1994.
Bishop, Mattew, Kay, John, and Mayer, Colin (1994), “Privatization and Economic Performance”. Oxford
University Press.
Boardman, Anthony E. and Vining, Aidan R. "Ownership and Performance in competitive Environments: A
Comparison of the Performance of Private, Mixed, and State-Owned Enterprises." Journal of Law and
Economics 32 (1989): 1-33.
Boubakri, Narjes and Cosset, Jean-Claude. "The Financial and Operating Performance of Newly Privatized Firms:
Evidence from Developing Countries." The Journal of Finance 53, no. 3 (1998): 1081-110.
Boycko, Maxim, Shleifer, Andrei, and Vishny, Robert W. (1996), “A Theory of Privatisation, Economic Journal,
vol. 106 (March), pp. 309-319.
BUMN Master Plan, 2004-2009. The Miistry Office of Indonesia State-owned Enterprises (BUMN).
Cuervo, A. dan B. Villalonga, (2000), “Explaining the Variance in the Performance Effects of Privatization”,
Academy of Management Review.
Dewenter, Kathtryn L. and Malatesta, Paul. H. "State-Owned and Privately-Owned Firms: An Empirical Analysis
of Profitability, Leverage, and Labour Intensity." The American Economic Review 91, no. 1 (2001): 320-34.
Hasyim, Mohamed Eliyas, ed. Privatization Experience in Indonesia. Edited by B.N. Gosh, Privatization the
ASEAN Connection: NOVA Science Publishers, Inc, 2000.
Jones, Leroy, 1991 "Performance Evaluation for State-Owned Enterprise." The World Bank.
W. Lieberman, Ira W and Christopher D. Kirkness, eds., Privatization and Emerging Equity Markets, Washington,
DC: The World Bank, 1998.
Lipsey, et al. Economics. 12 ed. Reading, Massachusetts; Menlo Park, California; New York; Harlow, England;
Don Mills, Ontario; Sydney; Mexico City; Madrid; Amsterdam: Addison-Wesley, 1999.
Mc Taggart, D. Microeconomics: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co, 1996.
Ramamurti, Ravi,1987 "Performance Evaluation of State-Owned Enterprises in Theory and Practice." The
Management Science 33, no. 7, pp. 876-93.
Ramamurti, Ravi and Vernon, Raymon, ed. 1991, “Privatisation and Control of State-Owned Enterprises”.
Washington, D.C.: The World Bank.
Yusuf, Vidianita, 2006. “Kinerja Efisiensi BUMN Sebelum dan Sesudah Privatisasi: Studi Kasus13 BUMN
Publik”. Undergraduate Working Paper. Department of Management, Faculty of Economics, Universitas
Indonesia.
Policy Studies 400

The contestation of business networks in liberalising economy and

polity: evidence from regional textile business in Indonesia
Staff : Rochman Achwan1*
Sponsor : Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences 2006
Disseminated at : Rochman Achwan. (2008) the ISA-RC02 International Midterm
Conference on Inequality beyond Globalization: Economic Changes and
the Dynamics of Inequality, the University of Neuchatel, Switzerland,
June 26-28, 2008
1
Introduction
The 1997 economic crisis followed by the step down of president Soeharto in 1998 changed the
landscape of Indonesia’s economy and polity. It was the beginning of the International
Monetary Fund (IMF) in cooperation with the Indonesia’s democratising state sailed to a new
economic destination. Preaching market solution to social and economic problems, drastically
reduced the role of the state, and further trade liberalisation become new medicines for
healing Indonesia’s economy. In the political sphere, the country radically shifted from
authoritarian to democratic political systems marked by the existence of multi-party
competition and free elections.
Recently, there seems to be a unanimous consensus among economic sociologists that the
transplantation of institutional forms of economic liberalisation of the developed into
developing societies will not produce the expected results and frequently backfired (Portes,
2006). Two cases are worth noting. Mexican economic liberalisation represents a failed
model of transplantation. Under President Salinas, the privatization programme has been
severely resisted by the managers of public owned companies, trade unions, the ministries
dealing with programme‘s supervision, and national entrepreneurs (Portes, 2006). Salinas’
privatization programme clearly ignores the dynamics of power as important element of
institutional context in Mexico’s economy. Another case, the China case of the reform of
agriculture collectivism, represents adjusted model of market transition. Before implementing
market economy, Chinese government has launched land reform programmes with different
emphasis from region to region (Walder, 1996). Reform in power structure has been the
priority so as to harmonise with formal rules of market economy. China’s experience informs
the strategic importance of institutional context before voyaging into a new ocean of market
economy.
This paper intends to enrich studies on institutional contexts of economic liberalisation with
particular reference to a certain region in Indonesia. The implementation of economic
liberalisation in Indonesia has been eloquently called by Stiglitz as “crying fires in the
theatre” (Hill, 2003). His statement has informed not only the ignorance of accounting
institutional context but also the complete withdrawal of the state in the intervention of textile
economy. Within such circumstances, this paper argues that Indonesia’s economic
liberalisation brings about the processes of de-industrialisation. The existing bonding and
bridging types of business networks are being contested and they face difficulties to response
to the transplanted liberalisation. As a consequence, business inequality has sharply increased
as indicated by the decreasing power of entrepreneurs in the structure of textile market. The
mushrooming of political parties and civic associations, including textile association, in a
democratising Indonesia may constrain a further process of textile de-industrialization as far
as their voices are considered in the process of public policy making.
Policy Studies 401

In order to support the above-mentioned arguments, in-depth interviews with strategic actors
and content analysis of local newspapers and government documents were carried out in
Pekalongan region, Central Java from April to August in 2006.
Theoretical discussions
Throughout the previous sections, this study shed lights on the processes of business
contestation that has been occurring in one of Indonesia's medium-sized urban areas. It is
shown how economic liberalisation within the context of political liberalisation has shaken
the underlying social institutions of business networks in the region. It is evident that the
strong imposition of economic liberalisation - without accounting for institutional context -
has led to the increasing inequality within various business networks in the textile market.
The findings of this study inform that the imposition of external institutional blueprint into
liberalising economies and polities should be sceptically understood. Such imposition seems
to be the dominant paradigm in various areas of life such as the implementation of Good
Governance, development of civil society and social capital in Indonesia. It is not the
economic liberalisation but the existing institutional arrangements that matter most. Walder
(1996) warns the general claims about the impact of economic liberalisation on inequality.
Market economies vary widely in their patterns of power and privilege, and the characteristics
of emerging markets. They should be taken into account before the implementation of
economic liberalisation.
In his seminal article, Nee (2005) offers a comprehensive institutional perspective of the
economy in industrialising societies. His perspective, influenced by North, aimed at
integrating informal social organization of close-knit groups and the formal rules of
institutional structures, highlighting the mechanisms that regulate the manner in which both
informal and formal institutions facilitate, motivate, and govern economic action. Moreover,
he introduces concepts of close coupling and decoupling in order to explicate processes of
integration and disintegration of both institutions. Following Nee’s perspective, Indonesia’s
experience shows a mechanism of decoupling rather than close coupling occur in the process
of managing textile crisis.
Conclusion
The rise of political parties and rejuvenation textile associations has opened public dialogue
over the issues of textile deindustrialisation in the country. Unfortunately, the issues seem to
be kept floating on the air considering the weakness in the connections between textile
entrepreneurs and politician at the local level, as well as between local politicians and their
colleagues at the national level. The local politicians do not communicate well with the
entrepreneurs as they uphold different issues as their political stakes. The national politicians,
as a consequence, do not have sufficient input to what has happened to the regions. Moreover,
the weakness of the Indonesia’ political parties, organisationally and functionally as the
articulation means for people’s interests, are widely known.
All in all, public dialogue or deliberation as a mechanism for salvaging textile industry seems
to become an end itself. However, recently, new and small movements seem to shed some
lights in the dark tunnel. Young and uncorrupted politicians begin to win elections in several
cities and regencies in the country. This development may affect the 2009 general elections.
Much hope to recover textile industry will be determined by the results of the 2009 parliament
and presidential elections.
Today, the re-emergence of textile associations and political parties in the supports of the
interests of textile entrepreneurs at regency level still need to be salvaged, nurtured and
developed. By developing them, all textile entrepreneurs from different level of ownership have
a say in the process of policy making. Liberalisation without devising the possible social costs
would bring about human catastrophe.
Keywords
Couping and decoupling, formal and informal rules, liberalisation, social network.
Policy Studies 402

References
Budiono. (2005) Managing the Indonesian Economy: Some Lessons from the Past. Bulletin of Indonesian
Economic Studies 41 (3): 309-24.
Caruthers, Bruce G and Sarah L Babb. (2000) Economy/Society: markets, Meanings and Social Structure. Pine
Forge Press.
Chalmers, Ian and Vedi R Hadiz ed. (1997) The Politics of Economic Development in Indonesia:Contending
Perspectives. London: Routledge.
Hill, Hal. (2001) Small and Medium Enterprises in Indonesia: Old Policy Challenges for a New Administration.
Asian Survey. XLI (2).
Nee, Victor. (2005) The New Institutionalism in Economics and Sociology. in: Smelser, Niel J and Richard
Swedberg, eds, The Handbook of Economic Sociology. Princeton University Press (Second Edition).
Papanek, Gustav F.(2006) The Pribumi Entrepreneurs of Bali and Central Java (Or How Not to Help Indigenous
Enterprise). Bulletin of Indonesian Economic Studies 42 (1).
Portes, Alejandro. (2006) Institutions and Development: A Conceptual Reanalysis. Population and Development
Review 32 (2).
Soesastro, Hadi and M Chatib Basri. (2005) The Political Economy of Trade Policy in Indonesia. Asean Economic
Bulletin 22 (1).
Walder, Andrew G. (1996) Markets and Inequality in Transitional Economies: Toward Testable Theories.
American Journal of Socoilogy 10 (4).
Policy Studies 403

The economy-wide impact of controlling energy consumption in

Indonesia: An analysis using a social accounting matrix framework
Staff : Hartono, Djoni1*, Resosudarmo-Budy P.2
Email Contact : djoni.hartono@ui.ac.id; budy.resosudarmo@anu.edu.au
Disseminated at : Energy Policy
1
Department of Economics, Faculty of Economics and Business, Universitas Indonesia
2
Indonesian Project, Economics Division, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, The Australian National
University
Introduction
Oil has played an important role as Indonesia’s main energy source. In the last 10 years,
approximately 65.5 percent of Indonesia’s total energy consumption has come from crude oil
(Center of Data and Information – Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources, 2005).
Furthermore, crude oil has long been an important source of government revenue. Nowadays,
however, more and more people are questioning whether Indonesia can continue to depend on
oil as its main source of energy and as one of its main sources of revenue. That Indonesia
depends too much on oil is one of the energy related concerns.
The second energy related concern is the government energy subsidy. The government has
always controlled the price of domestic oil products —fuel oils— such as gasoline,
automotive diesel oil and kerosene, so as to be lower than the world price, by providing a
subsidy to Pertamina, the only oil processor and distributor of fuel oils in the country. The
government also controls the price of electricity at a lower than production cost by
subsidizing the national electricity company.
The third concern is energy intensity, which has not improved. Energy Information
Administration (EIA) reported that, in the last two decades, energy intensity in several East
Asian countries, particularly China, has improved significantly, and developed countries
around the world have been able to keep their level low, while Indonesia’s has worsened at a
rate of 1.94 percent annually1. This situation indicates, though not precisely, that there has
been an increasing trend towards inefficiency in primary energy use in Indonesia. Hence,
there has been growing pressure on Indonesia to improve its efficiency in using primary
energy.The fourth concern is negative externalities to the environment, both at local and
global levels. At the local level, environmental problems related to energy use are generally
human health problems caused by emissions from vehicles and industrial activities. At the
global level, the main concerns are global climate change and global warming due to
increasing emissions of greenhouse gases. The energy sector, through its production and
exploitation activities, is considered to be the main contributor of greenhouse gases. EIA
reported that the CO2 emission intensity of Indonesia has been worsening at a rate of 4.1%
annually during the 1990s and early 2000s.
With the above mentioned problems in mind, the Indonesian government must develop
various programs to promote better and more efficient use of energy. This paper aims to
analyze the impact on the economy of energy policies aiming to reduce and to improve the
efficiency of energy use, particularly on the income of various household groups. This paper
will, first, construct a Social Accounting Matrix for Indonesia with detailed energy sectors
and, second, utilize various multiplier analyses to observe and understand the impact of these
energy policies.

1
http://www.eia.doe.gov
Policy Studies 404


Data that we used in this study is Social Accounting Matrix data in year of 2000, published by
Indonesian Central Agency of Statistics (Badan Pusat Statistik or BPS). We extend it further
to develop The Indonesian Energy SAM. The Energy SAM extends this original Indonesia
SAM to include detail energy sectors, namely: (1) fuel oil sectors (BBM), comprising:
gasoline, automotive diesel oil, industrial diesel oil and kerosene; (2) the gas fuel sector
(BBG), i.e. refinery gas and urban gas, where BBG referred here is from refinery or oil
production and is not a liquid natural gas; and (3) the electricity sector. Data on detail energy
sector is available from the Center of Data and Information – Ministry of Energy and Mineral
Resources. In extending the Indonesian SAM into the Energy SAM, we followed the
procedure developed by Lewis in 1993 (Lewis, 1993).
Generally, this paper aims to predict the impact of an improvement of energy efficiency on
household incomes for various different groups. The two particular methods implemented
are: (i) an accounting multiplier matrix with backward linkage to analyze the impacts of
improvement in efficiency of energy use (or energy-saving), both with and without subsidies;
and (ii) a constrained fixed price multiplier to analyze the impact of restrictions in energy use.

There are several conclusions that can be made. First, a policy improving the efficiency of
energy use is relatively better than a policy restricting the use of energy. In general, an
improvement in energy efficiency increases the income of most household groups, while
energy restriction decreases their incomes. Furthermore, the simulations show that an
improvement in energy efficiency most likely will not cause a rebound effect or an increase in
energy use.
Second, a combination of reduction energy subsidy policy and policy improving the
efficiency of energy use produces the best outcome in general. In the case where greater
energy efficiency is reached without any reduction in government subsidy, household
incomes will increase the most when all industry sectors and all households use electricity
more efficiently. In case where more efficient energy use is achieved by a reduction of
energy subsidy, household incomes will increase the most when all industry sectors and all
households use automotive diesel oil more efficiently.
Third, an improvement in energy efficiency should be emphasised more in industrial sectors
than in households, as the former will increase household income by a greater amount than
the increase created by the improvement in household energy efficiency. In general, the
improvement in efficiency in industrial sectors should focus on the use of automotive diesel
oil and electricity. Furthermore, specific recommendations on the industrial sectors that are
suggested to trial more efficiency in energy consumption in order to result in a positive effect
on household income are: (i) The Pulp and Paper Industry, Construction and Land
Transportation for automotive diesel oil; and (ii) The Trade, Pulp and Paper Industry and
Textile Industry for electricity.
Conclusion
To sum up, there are four important findings in this paper. First, a policy improving the
efficiency of energy use is relatively better than a policy restricting the use of energy. Second,
a combination of reduction energy subsidy policy and policy improving the efficiency of
energy use produces the best outcome in general. Third, an improvement in energy efficiency
should be emphasized more in industrial sectors than in households, as the former will
increase household income by a greater amount than the increase created by the improvement
in household energy efficiency.
Keywords
Energy economics, government policy, social accounting matrix, technological change.
Policy Studies 405

References
Azis, I. J., 2000. Simulating economy-wide models to capture the transition from financial crisis to social crisis.
Annals Regional Science 34 (2), 251-278.
Azis, I. J. and Mansury, Y., 2003. Measuring economy-wide impacts of a financial shock. ASEAN Economic
Bulletin 2 (20), 112-27.
BPS Statistics Indonesia (BPS) (2004). Social Accounting Matrix 2000. BPS Statistics Indonesia, Jakarta.
Binswanger, M., 2001. Technological progress and sustainable development: what about the rebound effect?
Ecological Economics 36, 119-132.
Bourguignon, F., Robilliard, A.-S. and Robinson, S., 2003. Representative versus real households in the macro-
economic modeling of inequality. Working paper DT 2003-10, DIAL.
Brookes, L., 1990. The greenhouse effect: the fallacies in the energy efficiency solution. Energy Policy 18, 199-
201.
Center of Data and Information – Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources (2005). Book of Energy Statistics
2004. Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources, Jakarta.
Clements, B., Jung, H.-S. and Gupta, S., 2007. Real and distributive effects of petroleum price liberalization: the
case of Indonesia. The Developing Economies 45 (2), 220-237.
Defourny, J. and Thorbecke, E., 1984. Structural path analysis and multiplier decomposition within a social
accounting matrix framework. Economic Journal 94, 111-136.
Fiscal Policy Office (various year). Nota Keuangan dan RAPBN. Department of Finance, Jakarta.
Ghebremedhin, T.G. and Schreiner, D.F., 1983. An Input-Output Approach For Analysis of Energy and Economic
Policies in Oklahoma. Department of Agriculture Economics, Southern University, Baton Rouge, LA.
Hartono, D. and Resosudarmo, B.P., 1998. Eksistensi matriks pengganda dan dekomposisi matriks pengganda
Pyatt dan Round dari sistem neraca sosial ekonomi. Ekonomi dan Keuangan Indonesia 46 (4), 473-496.
Ikhsan, M., Dartanto, T., Usman and Sulistyo, H., 2005. Kajian dampak kenaikan harga BBM 2005 terhadap
kemiskinan. LPEM Working Paper http://www.lpem.org.
Khanna, M. and Zilberman, D., 2001. Adoption of energy efficient technologies and carbon abatement: the
electricity generating sector in India. Energy Economics 23, 637–658.
Khazzoom, D.J., 1980. Economic implications of mandated efficiency standards for household appliances. Energy
Journal 1 (4), 21-39.
Koop, G., 2001. Cross-sectoral patterns of efficiency and technical change in manufacturing. International
Economic Review 42 (1), 73-103.
Lewis, B. and Thorbecke, E., 1992. District-level economic linkages in Kenya: evidence based on a small regional
social accounting matrix. World Development 20 (6), 881-897.
Lewis, J.D., 1991. A Computable General Equilibrium (CGE) Model of Indonesia, Development Discussion Paper
No. 378, Harvard Institute for International Development, Cambridge MA., 1993. Energy Pricing, Economic
Distortions, and Air Pollution in Indonesia. Development Discussion Paper No. 455, Harvard Institute for
International Development, Cambridge MA.
Lovins, A.B., 1988. Energy saving from more efficient applicances: another view. Energy Journal 10, 157-166.
Newell, R.G., Jaffe, A.B. and Stavins, R.N., 1999. The induced innovation hypothesis and energy-saving
technological change. Quarterly Journal of Economics 114, 941-975.
Pacudan, R. and de Guzman, E., 2002. Impact of energy efficiency policy to productive efficiency of electricity
distribution industry in the Philippines. Energy Economics 24, 41–54.
Pyatt, G. and Round, J., 1979. Accounting and fixed price multipliers in a social accounting matrix framework.
Economic Journal 89, 850–873.
Resosudarmo, B.P. and Thorbecke, E., 1996. The impact of environmental policies on households incomes for
different socio-economic classes: the case of air pollutants in Indonesia. Ecological Economics 17, 83-94.
Sadoulet, E. and de Janvry, A., 1995. Quantitative Development Policy Analysis. Johns Hopkins University Press,
Baltimore.
Sugema, I., Hasan, M., Oktaviani, R., Aviliani and Ritonga, H., 2005. Dampak kenaikan harga BBM dan
efektivitas program kompensasi. INDEF Working Paper http://www.indef.or.id.
Thorbecke, E., 1992. Adjustment and Equity in Indonesia, OECD Publications, Paris.
World Bank, 2006. Making of the New Indonesia Works for the Poor. The World Bank, Jakarta.
Yanai, M. and Hewings, G.J.D., 2004. Economic impact of repowering the Midwest: energy efficiency impacts for
the Midwest. Working Report No.2, University Illinois and Federal Reserve Bank of Chicago.

Policy Studies 406

The effect of mergers on bank performance: Evidence from bank

consolidatoion policy in Indonesia
Staff : Viverita1*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : International Review of Business Research Paper (2008), 4(4),
368-380
1
Introduction
An inclusive merger mechanism became one option for the Indonesian banking industry to
response the Asian Financial crisis under its bank consolidation program. Bank consolidation
in the form of merger become one of the regulations initiated by the Indonesian central bank
in order to improve banking system’s capacity to provide financial intermediation between
savers and borrowers and restore public confidence. As merger activities around the world
have the same purpose, the most common purpose for merger is to increase efficiency and
reduce costs. In the depths of the crisis, initiated by the Government, sixty-seven banks were
closed, merged or acquired by other institutions. To recondition bank balance sheets and
public confidence, the government implemented a major restructuring and recapitalization
program, directed by the Indonesian Bank Restructuring Agency (IBRA). The priorities were
to reduce overlap in the banking sector and to create much larger and stronger entities that
could serve the needs of a modern economy. Therefore, merger mechanism became one of the
options for banking industry to survive the crisis. As a result, 19 banks were consolidated and
formed 4 merged banks during the priod of 1997 to 2000.
This study gives insight into the effectiveness of economic policy reforms in the Indonesian
banking industry. This study examines the impacts of merger on commercial bank’s
performance in Indonesia during 1997 to 2006. The period was characterized by financial
deregulation, the Asian economic crisis, and bank restructuring programs. The traditional
financial ratios and non-parametric Data Envelopment Analysis approach is employed to
investigate any efficiency gains both in the pre and post merger periods, in order to detect
whether bank mergers produce any efficiency gains as well as factors contributed to the
performance. The evidence shows that merger created synergy as indicates by the statistically
and significantly increasing the post-merger financial and productive efficiency
performances. The main objectives of this study are to compare the financial and productivity
performance of the Indonesian banks pre- and post merger and to identify factors that
contribute to efficiency gains. This would also include five banks resulted from the merger
program, as well as the evaluation of performance from the target banks. First we use
financial ratio measures such as Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR), Non-Performing Loans
(NPL), Loan-to-Deposit Ratio (LDR), Net Interest Income (NII), Return on Assets (ROA),
and Return on Equity (ROE), to understand the effect of merger on bank financial
performance. Then, we use a non- parametric Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) to measure
bank efficiency performance before and after the merger. This study hope that empirical
findings could provide a reference to government and bank authorities as to (1) Provide
reliable financial information on the economic resources and obligation of the banks; (2)
Provide support for identifying the variances which come up while calculating the financial
ratios; (3) Provide assistant for financial information in estimating the gaining capability of a
bank; and (4) Provide steadfast information about the changes in net resources that occur
because of various banking actions.
Policy Studies 407

Methodology and research design

In general, study on bank’s efficiency performance can use one of the following approaches:
production approach and intermediary approach. Production approach viewed banks as a
producer of services. The services related to the deposit and loan accounts. Therefore, the
number of transactions associated with each accounts are taken as outputs where labor and
capital are considered the inputs. Conversely, under the intermediary approach, bank is
viewed as a financial intermediary transferring funds betwen surplus saving units and deficit
spending unit (Heffenan, 2000). Therefore, bank accepts deposits and used them to make
loans and investments. Under this methods, deposits are considered as input to produce loans
and generate interest income (Havrylchyk (2006) and Canhoto and Dermine (2003. This study
applies the intermediary approach with deposits and interest expenses as input variables,
while total loans distributed and interest income are the output variables.
Sample for this study comprises input and output of unbalanced panel data of 19 Indonesian
commercial banks between1997–2006. Furthermore, we applied a multi-stage DEA to
calculate banks’ technical efficiency performance (Coelli, et al. 1998), as well as financial
ratio measures. Data were gathered from the central bank data based as well as from the
individual banks’ annual financial reports. In addition, the F-test is conducted to test the
difference between two variances of performances pre- and post merger. According to Levine
et al. (2005), the important reason to test for difference between the variances of two
populations is the need to determine whether the pooled-variance t test is appropriate or not.
Financial indicators measurement of bank performance
Some financial ratios used in this study to evaluate bank performance pre - and post merger is
common. For example, return on asset (ROA), return on equity (ROE), non-performing loans
(NPL), loan to deposit ratio (LDR), capital adequacy ratio (CAR), and net interest margin
(NIM). Return on assets (ROA) is a comprehensive measure of overall bank performance
from an accounting perspective (Sinkey, Jr., 1992, p. 43). It is a primary indicator of
managerial efficiency. It indicates how capable the management of the bank has been
converting the bank’s assets into net earnings. Indonesian banking industry, based on Bank
Indonesia’s regulation in 2004 stated that the banks is considered healthy if they have a
minimum ROA of 1,215.
Malmquist data envelopment analysis
Using the DEA methodology, one can calculate the relative efficiency of banks, which can be
advantage the need for assigning a priori measures of relative importance of to any inputs or
outputs. Therefore, one can define efficiency as full efficiency when none of its inputs or
outputs can be improved without deteriorating some of its other inputs or outputs. In addition,
a bank can be considered as 100% efficient if the performance of other banks cannot be
improved without worsening some of its other inputs or outputs. DEA is used as a tool to
evaluate operating performance of such a DMU or an organization. The performance is
simply measured as unit (DMU) efficiency or productivity, which is a ratio of output
produced to input used in the production processes. For example, partially we can measure
labor efficiency as sales per number of employee. In addition, we can also measure total
productivity by incorporating all possible inputs used to produce all possible outputs of such
entity.
Discussion of findings
Using both financial ratio analysis and data envelopment analysis (DEA) approaches. The
DEA can determine the production efficiency gain, as well as its decomposition, efficiency
change and technological change. In addition, the traditional accounting and financial
measures is also employed. The new findings for the literature would strongly suggest that
corporate evaluation which is primarily based on accounting - financial ratios is definitely not
getting at the more important, in our opinion, levels of how management of firms efficiently
mix inputs to secure productivity gains. Thus, the use of productivity measures led a better
conclusion on to bank’s overall performance by including all factors contributed to its
outputs. Neither measure alone is useful for an evaluation of bank performance. Use of
Policy Studies 408

production measures reveal the factors that are identified as the cause of the inefficiency, i.e.
managerially inefficient or technologically inefficient.
This paper provides interesting evidence using both accounting-finance and production
efficiency with unbalanced samples using non-parametric statistics. This study reveals that
merger did increase bank’s ability to gain profits. It indicates by the increasing most of
performance indicators such as return on asset, return on equity, net interest margin, capital
adequacy ratio and non-performing loans. In In contrast, it is also found that merged banks
could not improve their ability to carry out its function as an intermediary institution,
indicates by declining the ratio of loan to deposits collected from their customers that could
be due to slower activities in the real sectors. The results of the Malmquist productivity
measures show that there is a significant productivity improvement of the merged banks over
the observation periods and that is primarily due to the technological growth. It is also found
that after the consolidation, merged banks could move their production frontier to the efficient
level, specifies by achieving the technical efficiency change index of 1. Furthermore,
evidence on the comparative performance of banks before and after merger shows that being
merged they can boost operating efficiency by optimally used their production capacity.
Findings of this study give us insight on how the merger can create more benefit to the public.
For example, bank should increase managerial skill of its officers to increase the bank
managerial efficiency. For example, distribute more loans to SMEs customers who had
proven their income stability during the crisis periods, which in turn, increasing loan to
deposit ratio (LDR). In addition, banks should consider lowering their cost of funds by
changing the composition of funds from third parties to acquire more funds from current and
saving accounts which apply lowest cost of capital to increase their net profit margin (NIM).
Finally, despite of the some success stories of merger, based on findings of this study there is
still a question of whether merger action could improve banks ability to accomplish their
main task as intermediary institution between depositors and borrowers. Therefore, for the
central bank as regulator it is also a question of whether merger is an appropriate tool to
increase banks efficiency. However, this is a preliminary finding on the impact of merger on
banks’ efficiency and still need more elaboration of what the main problems are.
Keywords
Bank, merger, performance.
References
Canhoto, A., Dermine, J. 2003, "A note on banking efficiency in Portugal: new vs. old. banks", Journal of Banking
and Finance, Vol. 27 No.11, pp.2087-98.
Coelli, T.J et al. 1998. An Introduction to efficiency and productivity analysis. Kluwer Academic Publishers
Boston, Dodrecht, London.
Havrylchyk, O.,2006. "Efficiency of the Polish Banking Industry: Foreign versus Domestic Banks."Journal of
Banking and Finance 30(7): 1975-1996.
Sinkey, Jr., Joseph F., 1992. Commercial Bank Financial Management: In the Financial Service Industry, 4th Ed,
Macmillan Publishing Company, Ontario.
Policy Studies 409

Will there be an Asean human rights convention?

Staff : A. Afriansyah1*
Student :-
Sponsor :-
Disseminated at : The Inaugural Asian Society of International Law Young Scholars
Workshop on 10 - 12 September 2008 at the National University
of Singapore Faculty of Law
1
Transnational Law Department, Faculty of Law, Universitas Indonesia, Jakarta, Indonesia
Introduction
The development of international human rights law in all region of the world has grown
rapidly in the last decades. However, in this rapid growth, it is important to note that human
rights cultures are vary in all parts of the world. There are some regions which have advance
in human rights cultures. These facts have raised many questions that challenged the norms
and values of the recent universal human rights. Many states have not ratified the existing
human rights international instruments as the evidence of compliance to the promotion and
protection of human rights.
It is important to note that in reality there are human rights instruments which specially made
and adopted regionally such as in Europe, America and Africa where as there are many
universally adopted human rights instruments. In regards with Asian region, it is important to
bear in mind that many countries that have not ratified international human rights instruments.
These countries are including all the members of the Association of South East Asian Nations
(ASEAN). This article tries to describe and analyse the possibility for ASEAN to have a
special human rights convention which can be implemented regionally with some urgency
conditions and some factors that need to be considered.
International human rights law & ASEAN
ASEAN member states as part of the international community have also take the
prevailing universal human rights law into account of their respective domestic laws.
For the purpose of this article, the author has conducted a small research on the status
of ratifications of ASEAN member states to international human rights law.
It is clear from the data that there are only two conventions, CEDAW and CRC,
where all ASEAN member states are parties. The second place for most of ASEAN
member states with six states as parties are CERD, CESCR, CRC-OP-SC and
CPPCG. Interestingly to note that ICCPR is ratified by only half of the ASEAN
member states. Besides ICCPR, Optional Protocol to the Convention on the Rights of
the Child on the Involvement of Children in Armed Conflict is also ratified by half of
the member states. It is curious to discuss that this convention is only applies during
the armed conflict whereas almost never happened a war between ASEAN member
states since its establishment. The rest of the conventions are varying in number of
ratification with four, three, two or even only one ratification. In general, the author
concludes that most of ASEAN member states are not parties to international human
rights law under the auspices of the United Nations with various reasons.
Why should ASEAN human rights convention?
As stated above, the debates over the possibility of ASEAN human rights convention is
becoming visible not only in academic but also in practitioners such as government officials
of the member states. This spirit needs to be guarded by some information on the urgency of
ASEAN for having this kind of special convention on human rights. At least there are two
Policy Studies 410

factors that need to be considered as the reason behind all of this spirit. They are cultural
differences or civilisations and the relativity of states’ capability in promoting and protecting
human rights.
Cultural differences or civilisations
It is important to note that Huntington rightly appointed to the situation happened at
the UN Conference on Human Rights in Vienna in June 1993. At that conference,
third world countries had challenged the universality of the prevailing human rights.
Huntington argued that these countries in fact could not claim themselves as the third
world countries since the Cold War was already over. They might claim as special
group of states that represent one special culture (civilization). He said further that the
conflict at that conference was dominated by the Islam and Confucian groups that
reject the universality of human rights which came from western countries cultures.
The relativity of states’ capability in promoting and protecting human rights
It can be inferred from the data above that ASEAN member states are parties to some
international human rights instruments. The fact that they have international obligations as
parties to those instruments does not ensure the compliance for them to implement the rules
within their national laws. Some of ASEAN member states even in allegation for serious
violation of human rights according to those instruments. As repeatedly referred, the
difference in cultures might cause the failure in fulfilling their obligations. These failures are
alleged by most western states that have high expectation level of promotion and protection in
human rights. Whereas the concerning states thought that they have fulfilled their obligation
according to their capability.
Some areas of concern to the future ASEAN human rights convention
Human rights values within ASEAN in general
In this regards, ASEAN needs to improve its human rights awareness and develop a human
rights culture in a similar level by still considering the conditions of each member states. This
effort can be done by all the national governments in socialising human rights “values” by all
means of communication especially through formal and informal education channel. This
massive efforts need to be conducted consistently without time limitation until it creates an
institutionalisation of human rights values in the society of ASEAN member states. Through
ASEAN slogan “sharing values” where every member states practices and shares values to
each other, it is hoped that there will be a common values which can be uphold as a hierarchy
of values within ASEAN community.
Problems with ASEAN charter and its human rights standards
As of October 2008, all the ASEAN member states had ratified the Charter and it will start to
be entry into force on 17 December 2008. The striking news about this was the ratification of
the Charter by Myanmar, a country which many allegation of human rights violations.2
Special note for Indonesia, even though Indonesia become the last country in ratifying the
Charter, it can be argued that Indonesia should not be in doubt for ratifying the Charter
because there is no disadvantage for Indonesia’s national interests. Besides that, the foremost
thing is that the ratification to the Charter is the articulation of recognition and
acknowledgement of universal human rights values.
Reasonable Call Standard of Human Rights Protection to ASEAN Member States
It is important to bear in mind that the success of human rights promotion and protection is
highly depends on the capability of a state in upholding those values and norms. Then, this
capability is vary from one state to the other due to different level of political, social and
economic development. This situation is very obvious within ASEAN member states. If the
first effort to make human rights culture at the same level within ASEAN is failed then one

Policy Studies 411

thing that ASEAN could do is by having reasonable call standards of human rights in its
future human rights convention.
Conclusion
The promotion and protection of human rights is important matter not only for South East
Asian region but also for the whole region in this world. ASEAN, once again, had announced
to the world that this organisation is trying to uphold universal human rights values in its
region by having efforts in establishing the human rights body which stipulates in ASEAN
Charter. Further, the spirit is boosted by the growing concern over the possibility of ASEAN
to have its own regional human rights convention. However, this plausible commitment to
human rights promotion and protection will remain empty gestures unless they are followed
by concrete action in a timely manner and take into account all the concerns from all
stakeholders as constructive inputs.
Keywords
ASEAN, convention, human rights.
References
Bodeen, Christopher, “Myanmar Ratifies ASEAN Charter”, Associated Press, 20 July 2008. Available on
http://ap.google.com/article/ALeqM5jgl0dMVy3IB6IUmgtJpnoxQn6BXAD9222LQO0, visited 22 July 2008.
Engle, Karen, “Culture and Human Rights: The Asian Values Debate in Context” (2000) 32 International Law and
Politics.
Kirby, Michael, “Human Rights: An Agenda for the Future” in Brian Galligan and Charles Sampford (eds.),
Rethinking Human Rights, Federation Press, Sydney, 1997.
Kraft, Herman Joseph S., “Human Rights, ASEAN and Constructivism: Revisiting the “Asian Values” Discourse”
(2001) 22(45) Philippine Political Science Journal.
Landman, Todd, “Protecting Human Rights: A Comparative Study”, (2007) 42 Acta Politica.
Neumayer, Eric, “Do International Human Rights Treaties Improve Respect for Human Rights?” (2005) 49
Journal of Conflict Resolution.
Policy Studies 412

INDEX
A F
A. Afriansyah ..................363, 392, 410 F. Farizal ......................................... 177

A. Malik ..........................................282 Fatma Lestari .............................. 82, 91
A. Salamah ......................................261
A. Satrya .........................343, 378, 381 H
A. Wahid .........................................138
A.H. Yuwono ..................................302 H. Pujasari......................................... 34
A.H.S. Ghafur .................................352 Hartono, Djoni ........................ 375, 404
Abinawanto .....................................267 Herman Suryadi .............................. 279
Agung Shamsuddin Saragih............147
Aniati Murni Arymurthy 156, 159, 162, I
171, 238
Awaludin Martin .....................168, 258 I Made Kartika Dhiputra......... 180, 220
Ike Iswary Lawanda ................ 355, 390
B Ingrid S. Surono .. 11, 13, 30, 59, 85, 87
B. Basuki ...........................................38 J
B. Hidayat .......................6, 94, 97, 100
B.M. Bachtiar ....................................49 J. Djajadisastra ........................ 123, 126
Bachtiar E.W. ..........................9, 16, 37
Belawati H. Widjaja ........183, 191, 194 K
Bondan T. Sofyan ...........................299
Budiarso ..........................................186 K.A. Sugeng.... 174, 203, 205, 230, 233
D L
D. Susanna ....................................3, 64 Laksmi ............................................ 387

D.H.S. Dillon ....................................44
D.M. Hartono ..........................317, 334 M
D.N. Iswarawanti ..............................57
D.R. Silaban ............................244, 246 M. Gozan ................ 264, 270, 284, 287
M. Rahmat Widyanto...................... 150
E M.A. Berawi ........... 141, 144, 225, 228
Mardiastuti , H.W. ............................ 67
E. Suarthana ..............32, 41, 47, 70, 72
E.W. Bachtiar ........................18, 54, 90 N
Evawani Ellisa ................................314
N.D. Takarina ................. 320, 323, 331
Nanny Sri Lestari ............................ 349
413

P T. Mart ............ 153, 189, 197, 200, 217

T.N. Mursitama ............................... 384
P. Atmodiwirjo................................337 T. Nuraini.......................................... 77
Petrus Mursanto ......................165, 211 T.A. Ivandini................................... 290
R U
R. Achmad Sunjayadi .....................346 U. Fahmida ....................................... 74

R. Farida......................................55, 62
R.D. Antarianto ...........................24, 27
V
R.F. Sari ..................135, 208, 214, 222
R.T. Hariyati .....................................79 Viverita ........... 366, 369, 395, 398, 407
Rochman Achwan ...........360, 372, 401
W
S
W. Mangunwardoyo ....... 252, 273, 276
Sarlito W. Sarwono .........................357 Winarto ........................................... 311
Siti Murniningsih ....................325, 328 Wisnu Jatmiko ........ 132, 235, 241, 249
Sri Harjanto .....................................293
Sri Sukmaniah ...................................51 Y
Sutrasno Kartohardjono ..255, 305, 308
Y. Harahap ..... 105, 108, 111, 114, 117,
T 120, 129
Y. Latief .......................................... 296
T. Eryando.........................................19 Y.S. Wimardhani .............................. 22
414

Extended Abstracts UI 2008

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Extended Abstracts UI 2008

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Extended Abstracts UI 2008

Cigarette smoking in Indonesia: Examination of myopic models of

Results and discussion

Materials and methods

Results and discussion

Materials and methods

Results and discussion

Effect of IgY on in vitro biofilm formation of S. mutans isolated from

Effect of Portland cement on human dental-pulp cells vibility

Result and discussion

Expression level of TAp73 isoform in oral squamous cell carcinoma

Materials and methods

Expression of tenascin C in rat neonatal cardiac tissue

Materials and methods

Result and discussion

Figure 1: Negative control(left), Positive immunoreactivity in rat cardiac ventricle

Figure 2 : Negative control (left), positive immunostaining at AV valve

Materials and methods

Result and discussion

Figure 1. 3 neonatal rats age 2 days old

Figure 2. Thoracotomy before intravital fixation

Table 1: Differrence in Cardiomyocites number and diameter between 3 age groups

Neonatus 72.8 (±5.3) 6.3 (±0.6) 153.3(±10) 6.9 ( ±0.5)

In vitro displacement and inhibition of Bacteroides vulgatus intestinal

Materials and methods

Results and discussion

Long-term outcome of a prospective cohort of apprentices exposed to

Nursing student's and nurse educator’s perceptions and attitudes

Qualitative work overload and other risk factors related to

subjects. These might be due to career development is well-regulated with periodic

Salivary immunoglobulin a response to Streptococcus mutans

Materials and methods

Results and discussion

Age group Age group

Conclusion and recommendation

Materials and methods

Results and discussion

The effect Portland cement in ALP activity of dental-pulp cells

Table 1. Characteristics of subjects (n=128)

Policy development 73 (57,0)

health workers 8,3

women's group 13,1

local stakeholder: head of village, etc 17,9

health cadres 23,8

food handler in hospital 25

family of the sick-people 32,1

food vendor 33,3

pregnant and lactating mother 34,5

sick people 35,7

food handler in food establishment 36,9

school children 46,4

Conclusions and recommendations

Materials and methods

The toxic effects of Triethylene Glycol Dimethacrylate (TEGDMA) on

Triethylene glycol dimethacrylate (TEGDMA) is a common component of the bonding agents

Results and discussion

Total dissolved solid (TDS) assessment of surface water contaminants

Purpose and objective

Sampling Sites (SWS)

Conclusion and recommendation

Water quality of Angke River: Microbiology point of view

Materials and methods

Result and discussion